JP7328586B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

A game that adjusts the flow direction of game balls flowing down the game area in a game machine such as a pachinko machine
machine is known (US Pat .

JP-A-11-197311

However, the gaming machine described above has a problem that the operation rate of the gaming machine is lowered .

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to solve the problems exemplified above, and to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the operation rate of the gaming machine .

In order to achieve this object, the game machine according to claim 1 comprises a game board having a game area on the front side, a first member arranged on the front side of the game board, and a front side of the first member. and a second member disposed at a predetermined interval on the side and allowing the game ball to flow down between the facing with the first member, and at least the first member or the second member A change means is provided for changing the interval between the predetermined portion disposed on one side and the other of the first member or the second member, and the change means changes the first state and the first state to the first state. It is possible to form a second state in which the direction of the game ball flowing down between the first member and the second member is different, and the game ball flowing down between the opposing members can be visually recognized by the player. The second member is formed with a visual recognition portion for visually recognizing the inside, and the predetermined portion has an upper surface side inclined with respect to the width direction of the game board when viewed from the front of the game board, It is disposed on the first member and configured to be longer in the width direction than in the vertical direction when viewed from the front of the game board, and the changing means displaces the predetermined portion in the front-rear direction of the game board. , and the interval between the two facing each other can be changed.

According to the gaming machine of claim 1, there is provided a game board having a game area on the front side, a first member arranged on the front side of the game board, and a predetermined space on the front side of the first member. and a second member that is disposed apart from and allows the game ball to flow down between the facing with the first member, and is disposed on at least one of the first member or the second member changing means for changing the interval between the predetermined portion and the other of the first member or the second member facing each other, and the changing means changes the first state and the first state between the first member and the second member. It is possible to form a second state in which the direction of the game ball flowing down between the opposing members is different, and the second member so that the player can visually recognize the game ball flowing down between the opposing members. is formed with a visually recognizable portion that allows the interior to be visually recognized, and the predetermined portion has an upper surface side inclined with respect to the width direction of the game board when viewed from the front of the game board, and is attached to the first member. When viewed from the front of the game board, the changing means is configured to be longer in the width direction than in the vertical direction. The interval can be changed.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing that the game is disadvantageous, and it is possible to improve the operation rate of the gaming machine .

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. 1 is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective front view of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is an exploded perspective front view of an operation unit and a game board. FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; It is an exploded perspective front view of the game board. (a) is a front view of the general winning opening unit, and (b) is a sectional view of the general winning opening unit taken along line XIIb-XIIb of FIG. 12(a). 3 is a cross-sectional view of the game board taken along line XIII-XIII of FIG. 2; FIG. 14 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the game board in range XIV of FIG. 13; FIG. It is a rear view of a general prize-winning unit. 14 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the game board in range XIV of FIG. 13; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective front view of the center frame; FIG. (a) is a front view of the first unit, (b) is a side view of the first unit, and (c) is a rear view of the first unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of a 1st unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of the first unit. FIG. 18B is a cross-sectional view of the first unit taken along line XXI-XXI of FIG. 18(b); FIG. 22 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit shown in FIG. 21; 18B is a cross-sectional view of the first unit taken along line XXIII-XXIII of FIG. 18B; FIG. 21. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the first unit taken along line XXIVa-XXIVa of FIG. 21, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first unit taken along line XXIVb-XXIVb of FIG. 21 is a cross-sectional view of the first unit taken along line XXIVc-XXIVc of 21; FIG. (a) is a partially enlarged view of the first unit in the range XXVa of FIG. 21, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first unit taken along line XXIVb-XXIVb of FIG. 25(a). (a) is a partially enlarged view of the first unit in the range XXVa of FIG. 21, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first unit taken along line XXIVb-XXIVb of FIG. 26(a). (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit taken along line XXVIIa-XXVIIa of FIG. 25(a), and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit taken along line XXVIIb-XXVIIb of FIG. 25(a). 25(c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit taken along line XXVIIc-XXVIIc of FIG. 25(a). (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit taken along line XXVb-XXVb of FIG. 25(a), and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit taken along line XXVIIIb-XXVIIIb of FIG. 25(a). be. (a) is a front view of the second unit, and (b) is a rear view of the second unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of a 2nd unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of the second unit. FIG. 30 is a cross-sectional view of the second unit taken along line XXXII-XXXII of FIG. 29; (a) is a front view of the center frame, and (b) is a side view of the center frame. (a) is a perspective front view of a center frame, and (b) is a perspective rear view of the center frame. 4 is an exploded perspective rear view of the center frame; FIG. 34 is a cross-sectional view of the center frame taken along line XXXVI-XXXVI of FIG. 33; FIG. (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of a game board, and (b) is a schematic exploded cross-sectional view of the game board. (a) is a front view of the rear case, and (b) is a rear view of the rear case. (a) is an exploded perspective front view of the rear case, and (b) is an exploded perspective rear view of the rear case. (a) is a front view of the rear case, and (b) is a rear view of the rear case. (a) is a front view of the rear case, and (b) is a rear view of the rear case. (a) is a perspective rear view of a rear case and a board box, and (b) is a rear view of the rear case and a board box. It is a front view of a lower displacement unit. It is a rear view of a lower displacement unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of a lower displacement unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of a lower displacement unit. It is a front view of a lower displacement unit in a retracted state. FIG. 10 is a front view of the downward displacement unit in the first extended state; FIG. 10 is a front view of the downward displacement unit in the second extended state; It is a rear view of the downward displacement unit in a retracted state. FIG. 10 is a rear view of the downward displacement unit in the first extended state; FIG. 11 is a rear view of the downward displacement unit in the second extended state; FIG. 8A is a rear view of the first link member and the cam member in the retracted state, (b) in the first extended state, and (c) in the second extended state; FIG. 51 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the lower displacement unit along line LIVa-LIVa in FIG. 50, and FIG. 52B is a schematic cross-sectional view of the lower displacement unit along line LIVb-LIVb in FIG. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the lower displacement unit along line LVa-LVa in FIG. 50, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the lower displacement unit along line LVb-LVb in FIG. FIG. 52 is a cross-sectional view of the lower displacement unit at line LVc-LVc at 52; 53(a) is a cross-sectional view of the lower displacement unit taken along line LVIa-LVIa in FIG. 52, and (b) is a front view of the first link member and cam member of the lower displacement unit in the second extended state. FIG. (a) is a front view of a lower displacement member, and (b) is a rear view of the lower displacement member. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective front view of a lower displacement member; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective rear view of a lower displacement member; (a) and (b) are front views of a lower displacement member. Fig. 10 is a front view of the lower displacement member in the first position; Fig. 10 is a front view of the lower displacement member in the second position; Fig. 10 is a front view of the lower displacement member in a third position; (a) to (c) are partially enlarged views of a lower displacement member. (a) to (c) are front views of a lower displacement member. (a) to (c) are front views of a lower displacement member. (a) to (c) are front views of a lower displacement member. (a) to (c) are front views of a lower displacement member. (a) is a partially enlarged view of the lower displacement member in range LXIXa of FIG. 68(b), and (b) is a partially enlarged view of the lower displacement member in range LXIXb of FIG. 68(a). (a) is a top view of the sorting unit, and (b) is a rear view of the sorting unit. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the sorting unit; FIG. FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the sorting unit; FIG. 71 is a cross-sectional view of the sorting unit taken along line LXXIII-LXXIII of FIG. 70(a); 74(a) and (b) are partially enlarged views of the sorting unit in range LXXIV of FIG. 73. FIG. (a) and (b) are partial enlarged views of a sorting unit. (a) and (b) are partial enlarged views of a sorting unit. (a) and (b) are partial enlarged views of a sorting unit. (a) and (b) are partial enlarged views of a sorting unit. It is a front view of a sorting unit and a lower displacement unit. FIG. 10 is a top view of a sorting unit and a lower displacement unit; It is a front view of a lower displacement unit. FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of a sorting unit; It is a front view of a lower displacement unit. FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of a sorting unit; It is a front view of a lower displacement unit. FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of a sorting unit; It is a front view of a rotation unit. It is a rear view of a rotation unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of a rotation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotation unit. It is a front view of a decoration unit. 91. (a) is a side view of the decoration unit as viewed in the direction of arrow XCIIa in FIG. 91, and (b) is a side view of the decoration unit as viewed in the direction of arrow XCIIb in FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective front view of the decoration unit; FIG. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective rear view of the decoration unit; FIG. 89 shows the rotating unit viewed in the direction of arrow XCVa, and FIG. 89B shows the rotating unit along arrow XCVb in FIG. FIG. 89 shows the rotating unit viewed in the direction of arrow XCVa, and FIG. 89B shows the rotating unit along arrow XCVb in FIG. FIG. 4A is a side view of the decoration unit and the right transmission member in the closed state, (b) in the intermediate state, and (c) in the open state; FIG. 4A is a side view of the decoration unit and the right transmission member in an open state, (b) in an intermediate state, and (c) in a closed state; (a) is a side view of the decoration unit in a closed state, and (b) is a side view of the decoration unit in an open state. 100(a) is a front view of the rotating body, (b) is a side view of the rotating body viewed in the direction of arrow Cb in FIG. 100(a), and (c) is an arrow Cc in FIG. 100(a). It is a side view of a rotary body in direction view. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective front view of a rotating body; It is an exploded perspective rear view of a rotating body. (a) is a side view of the rotating body with the opening/closing member closed, and (b) is a side view of the rotating body with the opening/closing member open. (a) and (b) are side views of the decorative unit. It is a front view of a lower displacement unit and a rotation unit. FIG. 106 is a top view of the downward displacement unit viewed in the direction of arrow CVI in FIG. 105; It is a front view of a lower displacement unit and a rotation unit. (a) is a top view of the ball cradle, (b) is a front view of the ball cradle, and (c) is a sectional view of the ball cradle taken along line CVIIIc-CVIIIc in FIG. 108(a). is. It is an exploded perspective view of a ball cradle. (a) and (b) are sectional views of a ball cradle. 88(a) and (b) are schematic cross-sectional views of the rotation unit taken along line CXI-CXI in FIG. 87. FIG. It is a front view of an upper displacement unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of an upper displacement unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of an upper displacement unit. FIG. 10 is a front view of the upper displacement unit in a state where the upper displacement member is arranged at the retracted position; FIG. 11 is a front view of the upper displacement unit in a state where the upper displacement member is arranged at an intermediate position; FIG. 10 is a front view of the upper displacement unit in a state where the upper displacement member is arranged at the extended position; (a) is a front view of a variable part, and (b) is a rear view of the variable part. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective front view of a lower displacement member in the second embodiment; It is a front view of a lower displacement member. Fig. 10 is a front view of the lower displacement member in a third position; (a) is a front view of a lower displacement member in a third embodiment, and (b) is a rear view of the lower displacement member. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective front view of a lower displacement member; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective rear view of a lower displacement member; (a) and (b) are front views of a lower displacement member. (a) is a front view of the lower displacement member at the first position, and (b) is a front view of the lower displacement member at the second position. (a) is a front view of the lower displacement member at the third position, and (b) is a front view of the lower displacement member at the second position. It is a front view of the downward displacement unit in 4th Embodiment. It is a front view of a lower displacement unit. It is a front view of a lower displacement unit. (a) is a top view of the distribution unit in 5th Embodiment, (b) is a rear view of a distribution unit. 4 is an exploded perspective front view of the sorting unit; FIG. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective rear view of the sorting unit; FIG. 131 is a cross-sectional view of the sorting unit taken along line CXXXIV-CXXXIV of FIG. 131(a); 135(a) and (b) are partially enlarged views of the sorting unit in range CXXXV of FIG. 134. FIG. It is a front view of the rotation unit in 6th Embodiment. It is an exploded perspective front view of a rotation unit. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective rear view of the sorting unit; 138(a) to (c) are side views of the decoration unit viewed in the direction of arrow CXXXIX in FIG. 138. FIG. 138(a) to (c) are side views of the decoration unit viewed in the direction of arrow CXXXIX in FIG. 138. FIG. It is a side schematic diagram of the displacement unit in 7th Embodiment. It is a side view schematic diagram of a displacement unit. It is a schematic side view of the displacement unit when a game ball is held by the displacement member. It is a schematic side view of the displacement unit when a game ball is held by the displacement member. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 8th Embodiment. 4 is an exploded perspective front view of the rotary operation unit; FIG. FIG. 146 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along line CXLVII-CXLVII in FIG. 145; It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective front view of the 1st link member in 9th Embodiment, (b) is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of a downward displacement unit. It is a cross-sectional view of the game board in the tenth embodiment. FIG. 21 is an exploded perspective front view of a lower displacement member in an eleventh embodiment; (a) and (b) are front views of a lower displacement member. (a) is a front view of the lower displacement member, (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the lower displacement member along the line CLIIIb-CLIIIb in FIG. 153(a), and (c) is FIG. 153(a). is a schematic cross-sectional view of the lower displacement member taken along line CLIIIc-CLIIIc of FIG. (a) is an exploded perspective front view of a ball receiving portion in a twelfth embodiment, and (b) is a front view of the ball receiving portion. 155(a) and (b) are front views of the lower displacement member, and (c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the lower displacement member taken along line CLVc-CLVc in FIG. 155(b). (a) is a front view of the special winning device in the thirteenth embodiment, (b) is a perspective front view of the special winning device, and (c) is a line CLVIc-CLVIc in FIG. It is a sectional view of a special winning device. It is an exploded perspective front view of a special winning device. (a) is a top view of the special winning device, and (b) is a sectional view of the special winning device taken along line CLVIIIb-CLVIIIb of FIG. 158(a). 159(a) is a rear view of the rear case in the fourteenth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the rear case taken along line CLIXb--CLIXb in FIG. 159(a). FIG. (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of a back case in a fifteenth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of a back case in a sixteenth embodiment. 161(a) is a rear view of the rear case in the seventeenth embodiment, and (b) is a sectional view of the rear case taken along line CLXIb-CLXIb of FIG. 161(a). FIG. (a) is a front view of a rear case in an eighteenth embodiment, and (b) is a rear view of the rear case. (a) is a front view of the rear case, and (b) is a rear view of the rear case. (a) is a schematic top view of a game board, and (b) is a schematic top view of a pachinko machine 10. FIG. FIG. 20 is an exploded perspective front view of an engaging member in a nineteenth embodiment; 165. (a) is a front view of the back case, and (b) is a one-way cross-sectional view taken along line CLXVIb--CLXVIb in FIG. FIG. 20 is an exploded perspective view of a rear case and a rotating unit in a twentieth embodiment; (a) is a front view of an engaging member, and (b) is a rear view of a rotating unit and an engaging member. (a) is a rear view of a rotating unit and an engaging member, and (b) is a rear view of a rear case 20300. FIG. FIG. 170 is an exploded perspective view of the back case and rotating unit in the twenty-first embodiment. 171(a) is a rear view of a rotating unit and an engaging member, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the rotating unit taken along line CLXXIb-CLXXIb of FIG. 171(a). FIG. (a) is a rear view of a rotating unit and an engaging member, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of a rear case and a rotating unit. (a) is a rear view of a rotating unit and an engaging member, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of a rear case and a rotating unit. 4 is a perspective front view of an engaging member and a fixing member; FIG. (a) and (b) are front views of a rear case. 175(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the rear case taken along line CLXXVIa-CLXXVIa of FIG. 175(b); FIG. FIG. 177(b) is a front view of the rear case in the twenty-fourth embodiment, and FIG. 177(b) is a cross-sectional view of the rear case taken along line CLXXVIIb-CLXXVIIb of FIG. 177(a). FIG. 177B is a cross-sectional view of the rear case taken along line CLXXVIII-CLXXVIII of FIG. 177(b); (a) and (b) are sectional views of a game board in a twenty-fifth embodiment. (a) and (b) are sectional views of a game board in a twenty-sixth embodiment. (a) and (b) are sectional views of a game board in a twenty-seventh embodiment. (a) is a sectional view of a game board in a twenty-eighth embodiment, and (b) is a sectional view of a game board in a twenty-ninth embodiment. (a) is a cross-sectional view of a general winning opening unit in a thirtieth embodiment, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of a general winning opening unit in a thirty-first embodiment. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective front view of the special winning device in the thirty-second embodiment; (a) is a front view of the special winning device, (b) is a top view of the special winning device, and (c) is a sectional view of the special winning device taken along line CLXXXVc-CLXXXVc in FIG. 185(a). is. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the special winning device, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the special winning device taken along line CLXXXVIb-CLXXXVIb of FIG. 186(a). (a) is an exploded perspective front view of a first path member in a thirty-third embodiment, and (b) is a sectional view of a special winning device. (a) is a front view of the game board in the thirty-fourth embodiment, and (b) is a sectional view of the game board taken along line CLXXXVIIIb-CLXXXVIIIb of FIG. 188(a). It is an exploded perspective front view of the game board. FIG. 189 is a cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along line CXC-CXC in FIG. 188; (a) is a front view of the game board in the thirty-fifth embodiment, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board along line CXCIb-CXCIb of (a). It is an exploded perspective view of a special winning device. (a) to (c) are sectional views of the game board 13 taken along line CXCIII-CXCIII in FIG. 191(b). (a) is an exploded perspective front view schematically showing a game board in the thirty-sixth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the game board. (a) is an exploded perspective front view schematically showing a game board in a thirty-seventh embodiment, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the game board. FIG. 20 is an exploded perspective front view of a lower displacement member in the thirty-eighth embodiment; (a) is a front view of the lower displacement member, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the lower displacement member taken along line CXCVIIb-CXCVIIb of FIG. FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view of the lower displacement member taken along line CXCVIIc-CXCVIIc; FIG. 39 is an exploded perspective rear view of a lower displacement member in the thirty-ninth embodiment; 199(a) is a front view of the lower displacement member, and FIGS. 199(b) and 199(c) are cross-sectional views of the lower displacement member. 200(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit in the fortieth embodiment, and FIG. 200(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit along line CCb-CCb in FIG. 200(a). 201(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit in the forty-first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit taken along line CCIb-CCIb in FIG. 201(a). (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit taken along line CCIIa-CCIIa in FIG. 201(a), and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit taken along line CCIIb-CCIIb in FIG. 201(a). be. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective front view of the rear case in the forty-second embodiment; (a) is a front view of the back case, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the back case taken along line CCIVb-CCIVb in FIG. 204(a). (a) is a front view of the back case, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the back case taken along line CCVb-CCVb in FIG. 205(a). (a) is a rear view of the game board, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board along line CCVIb-CCVIb in FIG. 206(a). It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the first control example. It is a schematic diagram showing the internal structure of the special winning device in the first control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and valid line setting of a display screen, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of an actual display screen. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display content showing the variation of the 16R probability variable jackpot in the first control example, (b) is an example of the display mode of the rotary unit at the time of 16R probability variable jackpot fluctuation. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display content showing the variation of the 6R probability variable jackpot in the first control example, (b) is an example of the display mode of the rotary unit at the time of the 6R probability variable jackpot fluctuation. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display content showing the variation during the CHARGE effect in the first control example, and (b) is the display content showing the change stop during the CHARGE effect in the first control example. It is the figure which showed an example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display content showing the roulette effect after the special symbols are stopped in the first control example, and (b) is the display content showing the result of the roulette effect in the first control example. It is the figure which showed an example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display content when the valid period for pressing the button occurs in the first control example, and (b) is the display content when the valid period for pressing the button has passed a certain period in the first control example. It is the figure which showed an example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of display contents during button depression in the first control example, and (b) is a view showing fusion of button effects after each button depression effective period display in the first control example matches. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a case where FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing a period during which a button-pressing effect is being performed in the first control example; FIG. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents of the button automatic pressing effect 1 in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents of the button automatic pressing effect 2 in the first control example. It is a diagram. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of display contents of button automatic pressing effect 3 in the first control example; (a) is a diagram showing an example of display contents when an attacker wins during a jackpot game in the first control example, and (b) shows a case where a pseudo-attacker wins during a jackpot game in the first control example. is a diagram showing an example of display contents of . 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing counters and the like provided in a RAM 203 of the main controller 110. FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the main controller in the first control example, and (b) schematically shows the configuration of the RAM of the main controller in the first control example. It is a schematic diagram. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special symbol jackpot random number table, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the small hit random number table, (c) It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the random-number table which hits normally. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a jackpot type selection table, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a special figure 1 jackpot type selection table, and (c) Is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection table; FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a normal/potential variation pattern selection table; FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a probability variation variation pattern selection table; (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the first control example, and (b) is the schematic diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device in the first control example. 2 is a schematic diagram shown in FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a holding rank selection table, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a holding mode selection table. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a treasure box mode selection table; It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the production|presentation counter group. 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device in a first control example; FIG. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining a power-on image. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the rear surface A, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the rear surfaces BD. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the rear surface E. FIG. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display data table; FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table; FIG. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a drawing list; 4 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit; It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main controller. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol 2 fluctuation start process executed by the MPU in the main controller. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol 1 fluctuation start process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart which shows small hit setting processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the game state update process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the start prize-winning processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. 4 is a flow chart showing prefetching processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing that is executed by the MPU in the main controller. It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation start processing executed by the MPU in the main controller. 4 is a flow chart showing through gate passage processing executed by an MPU in the main controller; It is a flow chart which shows normal figure prefetching processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows other prize-winning processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. 4 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main controller; 4 is a flow chart showing start-up processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; It is a flowchart which shows a main process by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows a big-hit control process performed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flow chart which shows small hit control processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. Fig. 4 is a flow chart showing the start-up process performed by the MPU in the audio ramp controller; 4 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device; 4 is a flow chart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device; 4 is a flow chart showing variation pattern reception processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device; 4 is a flowchart showing winning information-related processing executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device; 4 is a flow chart showing a hold mode selection process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing treasure chest mode selection processing executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device; FIG. FIG. 4 is a flow chart showing the hit-related processing performed by the MPU in the audio ramp controller; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the right attacker jackpot-related processing performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the pseudo attacker effect processing which is executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device. FIG. 4 is a flow chart showing a shutdown process performed by the MPU in the audio ramp controller; FIG. 4 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device; It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation production|presentation setting process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the operation production|presentation setting process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the charge production|presentation setting process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / effect|presentation process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the liquid crystal production|presentation execution management process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus. 4 is a flow chart showing operation effect management processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing boot processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; (a) is a flow chart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flow chart showing V interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. 4 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; (a) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, (b) is a flowchart showing a stop type command process executed by the MPU in the display control device be. (a) is a flow chart showing an advance notice effect display process executed by an MPU in a display control device, and (b) is a flow chart showing a variable replacement switching process executed by an MPU in a display control device. is. (a) is a flow chart showing operation effect command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flow chart showing button fusion display processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. 10 is a flow chart showing pseudo winning display processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. 4 is a flow chart showing error command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing display setting processing executed by an MPU in the display control device; (a) is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a pointer update process executed by the MPU in the display control device. . (a) is a flow chart showing a transfer setting process executed by an MPU in a display control device, and (b) is a flow chart showing a resident image transfer setting process executed by an MPU in a display control device; be. 10 is a flowchart showing normal image transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing drawing processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display content indicating the start of the point acquisition effect in the second control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display content indicating the end of the point acquisition effect. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the point acquisition effect with the holding ball in the second control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display content showing the reach selection variation pattern. be. (a) is a diagram showing an example of display content of pseudo fluctuation in the second control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of display content showing point consumption re-fluctuation. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents of the symbol hold selection screen in the second control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents of the symbol hold screen in the second control example. . (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the second control example, and (b) is the schematic diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device in the second control example. 2 is a schematic diagram shown in FIG. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a point selection table with suspension in the second control example; FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a point selection table without suspension in the second control example; (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a variation point selection table in a second control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a display position in the second control example. be. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a win consumption point selection table in the second control example, and (b) schematically shows the contents of a loss consumption point selection table in the second control example. It is a schematic diagram. 10 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the second control example; FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 2 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the second control example; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing variation pattern reception processing 2 executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the second control example. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing point selection processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the second control example; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing frame button input monitoring/effect processing 2 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the second control example. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing an advance notice setting process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the second control example; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing special point selection processing executed by the MPU in the sound ramp control device in the second control example; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the consumption reach selection process performed by MPU in the sound ramp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. 10 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing 2 executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second control example; 10 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 2 executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second control example; (a) to (c) are front views of a lower displacement member in a third control example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the third control example, and (b) is the schematic diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device in the third control example. 2 is a schematic diagram shown in FIG. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of initial operation data in a third control example; (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of firing motion data in a third control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of origin motion data in the third control example. be. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of first operation data in the third control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of second operation data in the third control example; It is a diagram. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing initial operation setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the third control example; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the third control example; 10 is a flow chart showing initial discharge operation setting processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the third control example; 10 is a flowchart showing operation control processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third control example; 10 is a flowchart showing first operation setting processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third control example; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing discharge operation setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound ramp control device in the third control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing second operation setting processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third control example; FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing firing operation setting processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the third control example; It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the fourth control example. It is a schematic diagram showing the internal structure of the special winning device in the fourth control example. FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a game flow of the pachinko machine in the fourth control example; It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the flow of the production|presentation performed corresponding to the game state in a 4th control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of display contents showing an effect during the latent probability effect A mode in the fourth control example; (b) is a view showing an effect during the latent probability effect B mode in the fourth control example; is a diagram showing an example of display content showing . (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special symbol per random number 4 table in the fourth control example, (b) schematically shows the contents of the small per random number 4 table in the fourth control example (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a normal per random number 4 table in the fourth control example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 1 jackpot type selection 4 table in the fourth control example, (b) is the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 4 table in the fourth control example It is a schematic diagram which showed the content typically. FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a variation pattern selection 4 table in the fourth control example; FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a normal/probability variation 4 table in the fourth control example; (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the 4 tables for latency in the fourth control example, and (b) schematically shows the contents of the 4 tables for time saving in the fourth control example. It is a schematic diagram. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a RAM of a main controller in a fourth control example; FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a RAM of the audio ramp control device in the fourth control example; It is the flowchart which showed the special design fluctuation|variation process 4 performed by MPU in the main-control apparatus in the 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the 1st special design variation start process 4 performed by MPU in the main control device in the 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the 1st special symbol jackpot determination process 4 performed by MPU in the main control device in the 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the 1st special design variation pattern selection process 4 performed by MPU in the main control device in the 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the process 4 during a 1st special design variation execution performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the 1st special design fluctuation|variation stop processing 4 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the 2nd special design variation start process 4 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the 2nd special symbol jackpot determination process 4 performed by MPU in the main control device in the 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 2 deviation fluctuation|variation process 4 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in the 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the 2nd special design variation pattern selection process 4 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 2 deviation fluctuation pattern selection process 4 performed by MPU in the main controller in the 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the process 4 during a 2nd special design variation execution performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 4th example of control. It is the flowchart which showed the 2nd special design fluctuation|variation stop processing 4 performed by MPU in the main-control apparatus in the 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 2 deviating stop processing 4 performed by MPU in the main controller in the 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the design fluctuation|variation process 4 normally performed by MPU in the main-control apparatus in the 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot end processing performed by MPU in the main controller in the 4th control example. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing main processing 4 executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the fourth control example; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 4 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fourth control example; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing state command processing 4 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourth control example; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing a pseudo effect setting process executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fourth control example; FIG. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the modification of the first control example.

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to FIGS. 1 to 111. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

In the following description, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. 1, the front side of the paper is defined as the front (front) side, and the back side of the paper is defined as the rear (rear) side. Also, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. ) side. Further, arrows UD, LR, and FB in the drawing indicate the up-down direction, left-right direction, and front-back direction of the pachinko machine 10, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 whose outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. and an inner frame 4 supported so as to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 4, the outer frame 11 has a front view (
(See FIG. 1) Metal hinges 18 are attached to two upper and lower positions on the left side, and the inner frame 4 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side with the side on which the hinges 18 are provided as an opening and closing axis.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning slots 63 and 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 4 from the back side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front surface of the game board 13 to play a pinball game. In addition, the inner frame 4 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that shoots a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a game board 1 that shoots a ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a.
A firing rail (not shown) or the like is mounted to guide the front area of 3.

On the front side of the inner frame 4, there are a front door 5 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side.
and are provided. In order to support the front door 5 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1). 5 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported toward the front side so that they can be opened and closed. The locking of the inner frame 4 and the locking of the front door 5 are unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front door 5 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and has a window portion 5c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses 8 is arranged on the back side of the front door 5, and the front side of the pachinko machine 10 can be visually recognized through the glass unit 16.例文帳に追加

An upper tray 17 for storing balls projects forward from the front door 5 and is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the ball thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4). In addition, on the upper surface of the upper plate 17, the frame button 2
2 is provided. This frame button 22 is, for example, the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 2).
It is operated by the player when changing the stage of the effect displayed by , or when changing the content of the super ready-to-win effect.

Light-emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the front door 5 (for example, at corners). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined ready-to-win state is reached, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illumination parts 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided on the periphery of the window part 5c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps, and the respective electric decoration parts 29 to 33 are lit by lighting or blinking of built-in LEDs at the time of a big win or a ready-to-win production. Alternatively, it flashes to indicate that the jackpot is in progress or that the player is in the process of reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, an indicator lamp 34 is provided at the upper left portion of the front door 5 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). The indicator lamp 34 has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and is capable of indicating whether prize balls are being dispensed and when an error has occurred.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front door 5 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right side electric decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 (Fig. 2)
A certificate stamp or the like affixed to the pachinko machine 10 can be visually recognized from the front. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chromium, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to create more splendor.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 5c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . pachinko machine 10
When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the player, the ball is lent according to the operation. will be
Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium).
Lending balls are supplied to the upper tray 17 as long as there is a balance in the card or the like. return button 43
is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball leasing operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower tray unit 15 positioned below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. there is Lower plate 5
On the right side of 0, an operation handle 51 is provided which is operated by the player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 .

Inside the operation handle 51 are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball shooting unit 112a, and a shooting stop switch 51 for stopping the shooting of the ball during the pressing operation.
b, and a variable resistor (not shown) for detecting the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the operation handle 51 from changes in electrical resistance. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. A ball is shot with a strength (shooting intensity) corresponding to , and is hit to the front surface of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always biased to the right, and when it is slid to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50 .

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front.
In addition to a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance and a windmill, rails 76 and 77, a general winning opening 63, a first
The prize winning port 64, the second prize winning port 640, the variable prize winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display device unit 80, etc. are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). be done. The base plate 60 is made of wood by pasting together thin plate materials, and is formed so that various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 cannot be seen from the front side of the base plate 60 by the player.
The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through-holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is fixed by a tapping screw or the like from the front side.

The central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 4 through the window portion 5c of the front door 5 (see FIG. 1). Mainly referring to FIG. 2, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 77 is formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape.
is erected, and an arc-shaped inner rail 76 formed of a strip-shaped metal plate is erected in the inner position of the outer rail 77 like the outer rail 77 . The outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 76 and 77 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails.
area where the launched ball flows down).

The two rails 76 and 77 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. The tip portion of the inner rail 76 (Fig. 2
A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the upper left part of the game board 13) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 77 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center.

First pattern display devices 37A and 37B provided with a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged in the lower left side of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left side in FIG. 2). first
The symbol display devices 37A and 37B provide displays corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In this embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball has won the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 640.例文帳に追加Specifically, when the ball enters the first winning hole 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball enters the second winning hole 640, the first The pattern display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable probability, the time saving mode, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state by the lighting state. Whether the stop pattern is a pattern corresponding to the probability variable jackpot, a pattern corresponding to the normal jackpot, or a missing pattern is indicated by the lighting state, the number of pending balls is indicated by the lighting state, and a 7-segment display device indicates the round during the jackpot. Display numbers and errors. In addition, multiple L
The ED is configured so that the respective LEDs emit different colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and by combining the emitted colors, it is possible to suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs.

Incidentally, in the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when a prize is won in either the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 640.例文帳に追加In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big win (big win lottery), and also determines the kind of big win when it is determined as a big win. As a jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variable jackpot,
4R probability variable jackpot and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. First pattern display device 37A, 3
In 7B, not only is it indicated whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop pattern after the end of variation, but also a pattern corresponding to the type of jackpot is indicated in the case of a jackpot.

Here, the “15R probability variable jackpot” is a probability variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, and the “4R probability variable jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after . In addition, "15R normal jackpot" is the maximum number of rounds after the jackpot of 15 rounds,
Along with moving to a low probability state, during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations) is a jackpot that becomes a time-saving state.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, a time during so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game that is easy to shift to a special game state It is the state of The high-probability state (during probability variation) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the second symbol (to be described later) is increased and the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640 . "Low probability state" refers to a state in which the odds are not variable, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than when the odds are variable. In addition, the time-saving state (during time-saving) of the "low-probability state" is a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, and the jackpot probability remains the same, but only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second winning port 640 It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is likely to win a prize. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is normal, it is a game state (
This is a state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the winning probability of the second symbol is increased.

During the probability change and the time saving, not only the probability of winning the second symbol increases, but also the second winning port 64
The time in which the first electric accessory 640a associated with 0 is opened is also changed, and a longer time is set than in normal. When the first electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), compared to the case where the first electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state), the second winning port 640 The ball will be in a state where it is easy to win. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640, and the number of times the big winning lottery is performed can be increased.

In addition, instead of changing the opening time of the first electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 during the probability change or the time saving, or in addition to changing the opening time, one hit , the number of times the first electric accessory 640a is opened may be changed to increase more than during normal operation. In addition, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or the time reduction, and the first electric role product 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened and the first electric role product is opened once. At least one of the number of times 640a is opened may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time for opening the first electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 and the number of times the first electric accessory 640a is opened per time are not changed. Only the winning probability of the second symbol may be changed so as to be increased as compared with the normal state.

The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 has a first winning port 64, a second
Triggered by one of the winning openings 640 (starting winning), the first symbol display device 37A,
A third pattern display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") that performs variable display of the third pattern while synchronizing with the variable display in 37B, and the passage of the ball through the first through gate 66 A second pattern display device (not shown) composed of an LED that variably displays the second pattern using as a trigger is provided.

A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 . The third pattern display device 81 can be visually recognized through an opening formed in the center of the center frame 86 .

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, upper, middle and lower three patterns are displayed. A column of symbols is displayed. Each pattern row is composed of a plurality of patterns (third patterns), and these third patterns are horizontally scrolled for each pattern row to variably display the third pattern on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加It's like In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B under the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4). Decorative display according to the display of the pattern display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Incidentally, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be constructed using a reel or the like.

The second symbol display device displays a display symbol (second symbol (
A variable display is performed by alternately lighting up a symbol "O" and a symbol "X" (not shown) for a predetermined period of time. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the first through gate 66, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning lottery is won, the second symbol display device stops and displays the symbol "○" after the second symbol is variably displayed. Also, as a result of the winning lottery, if it is lost, the second symbol display device displays "
The symbol "x" is stopped and displayed.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol ("○" symbol in this embodiment), the first electric accessory 64 associated with the second winning hole 640 is displayed.
0a is configured to be activated (released) for a predetermined period of time.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set so as to be shorter during the variable probability or during the time saving than during the normal gaming state. As a result, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time during the probability change and the time reduction, so that more winning lotteries can be performed than during normal times.
Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player more chances to open the first electric accessory 640a of the second winning opening 640.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640 during the probability variation and the time saving.

In addition, during the variable or time saving, the first
If the ball is in a state where it is easy to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change or during the time reduction by other methods such as increasing the opening time or the number of openings of the electric accessory 640a, the variable display of the second symbol The required time may be constant regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during the variable probability or during the time saving, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the game state, and one winning first against
The opening time and the number of opening times of the electric accessory 640a may be fixed regardless of the game state.

The first through gate 66 is attached to the game board in the area on the right side of the variable display unit 80 . The first through gate 66 is configured so that a part of the balls flowing down the game board among the balls shot to the game board can pass through. When the ball passes through the first through gate 66, the second
A lottery will be held for the design. After the winning lottery, a variable display is performed on the second symbol display device,
If the result of the winning lottery is a win, a symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display,
If the result of the winning lottery is lost, the pattern of "x" is displayed as the stop pattern of the variable display.

The number of times the ball passes through the first through gate 66 is suspended up to four times in total, and the number of suspended balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and the second symbol suspension lamp (not shown) is displayed. ) is also illuminated. Four second pattern holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third pattern display device 81 .

In addition, the variable display of the second pattern is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device as in the present embodiment.
37B and part of the third pattern display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol reservation lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81 . Also,
The maximum number of held balls for passage of the ball through the first through gate 66 is not limited to four times,
It may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Also, the number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Also, the mounting position of the through gate is not limited to the right and left sides of the variable display device unit 80, and may be below the variable display device unit 80, for example. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol reservation lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning hole 64 through which balls can win is arranged. When the ball enters the first winning hole 64, a first winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused to turn on the first winning hole switch. (See FIG. 4), a lottery for a big hit is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, on the right side of the first winning hole 64 when viewed from the front, a second winning hole 640 through which a ball can win is arranged. When the ball enters the second winning hole 640, the second winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 ( 4), a lottery for a big hit is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on the first symbol display device 37B.

Also, the first prize winning port 64 and the second prize winning port 640 are also one of the prize winning ports from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. In addition, in this embodiment, the first
The number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the winning hole 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second winning hole 640 are configured to be the same, but the balls enter the first winning hole 64. The number of prize balls to be paid out in the case of winning and the number of prize balls to be paid out when the balls enter the second prize opening 640 are different numbers, for example, the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize opening 64. are three,
The number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second prize winning port 640 may be five.

Further, on the left side of the first prize winning port 64 in a front view, a third prize winning port 82 in which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When a ball wins, the third winning hole 82 can throw the winning ball to the first opening 511 of the sorting unit 500 to be described later via the ball throwing unit 600 . That is, the third winning opening 82 is arranged in communication with a first opening 511, which will be described later.

A third electric accessory 82a is attached to the third prize winning port 82. - 特許庁The third electric accessory 82a is configured to be openable and closable by being rotationally displaced with respect to the game board 13, and normally the third electric accessory 82
A is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the third winning port 82 .
On the other hand, when there is a jackpot determination triggered by the winning of the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 640, the third electric accessory 82a is opened (expanded) for a predetermined time after, or during the big win state), and the ball is likely to enter the third winning port 82. In addition, the third winning port 82
A sensor device SE1 for detecting a passing ball is mounted on the downstream side of the .

It should be noted that the opening timing of the third electric accessory 82a is
It does not have to be triggered by the winning of 40, and as a result of the variable display of the second pattern triggered by the passage of the falling ball through the first through gate 66, the symbol "○" is displayed as the second symbol. It may be released when displayed on the device.

A first electric accessory 640a is attached to the second winning hole 640. - 特許庁This first electric accessory 64
0a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the first electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state).
As a result, it is difficult for the ball to enter the second prize winning port 640 . On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball through the first through gate 66, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the first electric accessory 640a is displayed. It will be in an open state (enlarged state), and the ball will easily enter the second winning port 640 .

As mentioned above, during variable probability and short time, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during normal,
In addition, since the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is short,
is more likely to be displayed, and the number of times the first electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, the time during which the first electric accessory 640a is opened is also longer during the variable probability or during the time saving than during the normal time. Therefore, during the probability change or during the time saving, the second winning opening 640
You can create a state where the ball is easy to win.

Here, when the ball enters the first prize winning port 64 and when the ball enters the second prize winning port 640, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state. However, the probability of winning a 15R probability variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the event of a jackpot is higher when the ball enters the second winning port 640 than when the ball enters the first winning port 64. is set. On the other hand, the first prize winning port 64 does not have the first electric accessory 640a like the second prize winning port 640, and the ball can always win a prize.

Therefore, during normal operation, the electric accessory attached to the second prize winning port 640 is often closed, and it is difficult to win the second prize winning port 640. to shoot the ball so that it passes through the left side of the variable display unit 80 (so-called “left-handed hitting”).
), it is advantageous for the player to aim for a big win by obtaining many chances of a big win lottery by winning in the first winning hole 64 .

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the first through gate 66, the first electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is likely to be in an open state, and the second winning opening 640 is won. Since it is in an easy state, the ball is shot toward the second winning hole 640 so that the ball passes through the right side of the variable display unit 80 (so-called “right hitting”), and is passed through the first through gate 66. It is more advantageous for the player to open the first electric accessory 640a and aim for a 15R probability variable jackpot by winning the second prize winning port 640.例文帳に追加

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment shoots balls to the player according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the game is variable probability, short time, or normal). How to use "
You can switch between left-handed and right-handed. Therefore, it is possible to change the way the player hits the ball, so that the player can enjoy the game.

A variable prize winning device 65 is provided on the right side of the first prize winning port 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific prize winning port (large open port) 65a is provided in the substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10,
When the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of either the first prize-winning port 64 or the second prize-winning port 640 results in a big win, after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) elapses, the first winning lottery becomes a jackpot stop symbol. The symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on, and the third symbol display device 81 is caused to display a stop symbol corresponding to the big win to indicate the occurrence of the big win. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which the balls are likely to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is closed for a predetermined time (for example, 30
It is released until seconds pass or until 10 balls win).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined period of time has passed, and after the closure, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined period of time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a game value (game value) by paying out a larger amount of prize balls than usual. is done.

Specifically, the variable prize winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the specific prize winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing forward with the lower side of the opening/closing plate as an axis.
and The specific prize winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot or hardly wins a prize. In the event of a big win, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to enter the specific prize winning port 65a, and the open state and the normal closed state are formed. It operates to alternate between states.

Incidentally, the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big win is lit in the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the A special game is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. You may make it form as a state. In addition, the number of specific winning holes 65a is not limited to one, and one or more than two (for example, three) may be arranged. It may be on the left side of the variable display device unit 80 .

An affixing space K1 for affixing a certificate stamp, an identification label, etc. is provided at the right corner of the lower side of the game board 13. 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first outlet 71 . Balls that flow down the game area and do not win any of the winning holes 63, 64, 65a, 640, 82 are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out hole 71. be. The first out port 71 is arranged below the first winning port 64 .

The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 . The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board has an MPU as a 1-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

Main controller 110, sound lamp controller 113 and display controller 114, payout controller 111 and launch controller 112, power supply 115, card unit connection board 1
16 are accommodated in substrate boxes 100 to 104, respectively. Substrate box 100~
Reference numeral 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover unopenably by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). consolidation). Also,
A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or sealing sticker,
It is possible to know whether the board boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132, which pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

In addition, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, and the firing control device 11
2 is provided with an operation knob 121 of a variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122 . The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) occurs. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is to be returned to its initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. Some RAM 203
In addition, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 controls the jackpot lottery and the first symbol display device 3.
Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as display setting in 7A, 37B and the third pattern display device 81, and lottery of the display result in the second pattern display device is executed.

In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controller by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the operation of the sub-controller such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, etc., and a stack area for storing various flags, counters, I/O, and the like. The work area where the values are stored (
working area). The RAM 203 is supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 and retains data (backup) even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off.
All the data stored in the RAM 203 are backed up.

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B,
Solenoid consisting of a second pattern display device, a second pattern holding lamp, a large opening solenoid for driving opening and closing forward with the lower side of the opening and closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a as an axis, a solenoid for driving an electric accessory, etc. 209 are connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input/output port 205 .

Further, the input/output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a group of switches (not shown), a group of sensors including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and the power supply device 1 .
15 is connected to a RAM erase switch circuit 253 which will be described later, and the MPU 201 receives signals output from various switches 208 and R output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253 .
Various processes are executed based on the AM elimination signal SG2.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110,
A stack area that stores the contents of the internal registers of the PU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, etc., and a work area (work area) that stores various flags, counters, I/O values, etc. have. The RAM 213 is used for the pachinko machine 10
Data can be held (backed up) by supplying a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power supply is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 also receives a power failure signal SG from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like.
1 is input, and when the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as power failure processing is immediately executed.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The ball launching control device 112 controls the ball launching unit 112 so that the ball launching strength corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to launch the ball.
It controls a. The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (
is not operated), the firing solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the operation handle 51, and the ball is shot with the strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51. .

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and changes production (variation display) and a display control device 114 such as an advance notice effect
It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed in . The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. Input/output port 2
25 are connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other device 228, the frame button 22, and the like. Other devices 228 include drive motors KM1, KM2, and KM3.

Sound lamp control device 113, based on various commands (fluctuation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from main control device 110, determines the display mode of third symbol display device 81, and sends the determined display mode to the command The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player,
The display control device 114 is instructed to change the stage displayed on the third pattern display device 81 or change the content of the effect at the time of super reach. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 . The display control device 114 displays various images on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with commands transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 .

Also, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the display control device 114 . In the audio ramp control device 113,
Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third pattern display device 81, the sound corresponding to the display content is output from the voice output device 226, and the display content is made to correspond. It controls lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 .

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, displays the third pattern display device 8.
1 to control the display such as the variation effect of the third pattern. Moreover, the display control device 1
14 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113 . The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display contents indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third pattern display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 are matched. be able to.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM erase switch 122 (Fig. 3
), and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided with a . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 is an alternating current 2 supplied from the outside.
A voltage of 4 volts is taken in, and various switches such as the various switches 208 and the solenoid 20
9, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc., a voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc., and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are generated. Necessary voltage is supplied to each of the controllers 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 detects the MPU of the main controller 110 when power is cut off due to a power failure or the like.
201 and a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 . The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. In addition, the power supply unit 2
51 maintains the output of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, to the normal value for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of the DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. configured to maintain Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

Next, a schematic configuration of the operating unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 10. FIG. 5 is an exploded perspective front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective front view of the operation unit 200 and the game board 13. FIG. 7 to 10 are front views of the operation unit 200. FIG.

7, the upper displacement member 940 is retracted upward and the lower displacement member 440 is retracted downward. In FIG. 8, the upper displacement member 940 is rotated downward from the state shown in FIG. The displaced state in FIG. 9 is the state in which the lower displacement member 440 extends from the state shown in FIG. 7 to a first overhang position described later. The state displaced to the second overhang position, which is the position, is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the operation unit 200 includes a rear case 30 formed like a box.
0, an upper displacement unit 900, a lower displacement unit 400, a rotation unit 700 and a sorting unit 500 attached to the back surface of the game board 13 are provided in the inner space of the rear case 300.
and a ball throwing unit 600 are accommodated.

The rear case 300 includes a bottom wall portion 301 that is substantially rectangular in front view, and an outer wall portion 302 that is erected from the outer edges of four sides of the bottom wall portion 301 toward the front. It is formed in a box shape with one side (front side) open. A rectangular opening 301a is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 301. Through the opening 301a, a third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 2) arranged on the rear surface of the bottom wall portion 301 is visible. It is possible.

The upper displacement unit 900 is slidably disposed on a base member 910 which is oblong in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front and which is disposed above the opening 301a of the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300. The upper displacement member 940 is provided, and the opening 301a of the rear case 300 (that is,
On the front side of the third symbol display device 81), an effect of rotating while sliding the upper displacement member 940 is formed to be executable. A detailed description of the upper displacement unit 900 will be given later.

The lower displacement unit 400 includes a horizontally elongated base member 410 arranged in a lower portion of the opening 301a of the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300, and slidably arranged on the base member 410. The lower displacement member 440 is formed so as to be capable of performing an effect of sliding and rotating the lower displacement member 440 on the front side of the rear case opening 301a (that is, the third pattern display device 81). A detailed description of the lower displacement unit 400 will be given later.

The rotating unit 700 includes a substantially rectangular rear base 720 disposed on the right side (arrow) in the front view of the lower portion of the opening 301a of the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300, and a rear base 720 in front of the rear base 720. A player can visually recognize an effect of rotationally displacing the rotating body 800 via a transparent plate portion formed on the lower right side of the game board 13 when viewed from the front. A detailed description of the rotation unit 700 will be given later.

The ball throwing unit 600 is attached to the back side of the game board 13, and is connected to the third winning hole 82 of the game board 13.
A path is formed for throwing a game ball thrown to the back side of the game board 13 from the outlet to the first opening 511 of the sorting unit 500 which will be described later.

The sorting unit 500 includes a path forming member 510 attached to the back side of the game board 13, a base plate 520 disposed with a predetermined gap formed opposite to the path forming member 510,
A distribution member 540 attached to the base plate 520 and distributing the game balls flowing down between the path forming member 510 and the base plate 520 to each ball throwing route (second ball throwing route KR2 or third ball throwing route KR3) is provided. . A game ball distributed to the distribution member 540 is thrown to the lower displacement unit 400 . A detailed description of the sorting unit 500 will be given later.

<The first decorative body and the second decorative body are arranged at positions adjacent to each other in the front-rear direction>
Next, referring to FIGS. 11 to 16, the general prize winning unit 1 arranged on the game board 13
50 will be explained.

First, with reference to FIGS. 11 and 12, the general winning slot unit 150 will be described.
FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective front view of the game board 13, and FIG.
50, and FIG. 12(b) is a cross-sectional view of the general prize winning port unit 150 along line XIIb-XIIb of FIG. 12(a).

As shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 formed of a substantially rectangular plate member when viewed from the front, and a center frame 86 arranged in an opening formed in the base plate 60. and a general winning mouth unit 150.

The base plate 60 has a first opening 60a opened in the central portion when viewed from the front, and a second opening 60b opened downward in the gravity direction of the play area formed by the rail members 76 and 77. . A center frame 86 is disposed in the first opening 60a, and the second opening 60
In b, a general prize winning unit 150 is arranged. Also, the base plate 60 is attached with a sticker having a decoration (pattern, pattern, etc.) on the front side (arrow F direction side) so that the player can visually recognize the decoration. The decoration on the front side of the base plate 60 is not limited to stickers, and the decoration may be printed (painted) on the front of the base plate 60 .

The general winning hole unit 150 is arranged in the game area of the game board 13 (in front of the base plate 60), and is capable of changing the path of the game ball flowing down the game area. In addition, general winning mouth unit 1
50 is arranged at a position along the edge of the game area surrounded by the inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77 in the gravity direction (direction of arrow D) when viewed from the front (direction of arrow B). be done. 13 to 16, the seal provided on the base plate 60 is illustrated with the reference numeral of the decorative member 60c. Further, in this embodiment, a character (person) is attached to the decorative member 60c.
is drawn.

The general winning slot unit 150 includes a main body portion 151 formed in a crescent shape when viewed from the front,
a first standing portion 152 erected from the end of the main body portion 151 to the front side (arrow F direction side);
A second standing portion 153 extending from the upper end of the first standing portion 152 in the gravity direction (arrow U direction side) toward the central side of the game area, and a back side of the main body portion 151 Decorative member 15 to be
4, and a plurality of (three in this embodiment) general winning openings 63 formed on the front side of the main body 151.
and are mainly provided.

The body portion 151 is set to have an outer shape slightly larger than the opening shape of the second opening portion 60b opened in the plate thickness direction of the base plate 60, and the base plate 6 in a state of being covered with the opening of the second opening portion 60b.
0 on the front side. In addition, the second opening 60b allows game balls flowing into the general prize winning opening 63 provided in the main body 151 to be thrown to the back side of the game board 13 (base plate 60). Further, the main body portion 151 has a base plate 6 that gradually increases from the inner portion toward the outer end portion when viewed from the front.
An inclined surface 151a inclined to the 0 side, a recessed portion 151b formed in the back surface on the side of the base plate 60 (arrow B direction side), and a back surface portion 151 forming the back surface of the main body portion 151 excluding the recessed portion 151b.
d and .

The inclined surface 151a is formed to be inclined by approximately 30 degrees with respect to the front surface of the base plate 60. As shown in FIG. As a result, the game ball flowing down the game area of the game board 13 can be brought into contact with the inclined surface 151 a and flowed down along the inclination of the inclined surface 151 a to move to the front side of the main body portion 151 .

Here, the inclined surface 151a is not formed at the end of the body portion 151, and the side surface of the body portion 151 is
When formed perpendicular to the front surface of the base plate 60, the game ball flowing down the game area of the game board 13 contacts (collides) with the side surface of the main body portion 151 from a direction perpendicular to it, There is a possibility that the abutted game ball bounces back in the direction opposite to the flowing direction.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the inclined surface 151a allows the game ball in contact with the side surface of the main body portion 151 to move toward the front side of the main body portion. stagnation can be suppressed. As a result, the game balls can smoothly flow down from the front side of the base plate 60 to the front side of the main body portion 151 of the general prize winning port unit 150 .

The rear surface portion 151d is the rear surface of the main body portion 151 as described above, and corresponds to the concave portion 1 in rear view.
51b with a constant width. In addition, the back portion 151d is the general winning mouth unit 1
50 is disposed on the base plate 60, it is disposed in contact with the front surface of the base plate 60 (decorative member 60c).

The recessed portion 151b is recessed toward the front side (arrow F direction side). Also, the concave portion 151b
has a recessed bottom surface 151b2 that serves as a bottom surface in the recessed direction, and an inner side surface 151b3 erected from the outer edge of the recessed bottom surface 151b2 toward the rear side (arrow B direction side).

The recessed bottom surface 151b2 is an adhesive surface for a decorative member 154, which will be described later, and is formed as a plane parallel to the front surface of the main body portion 151. As shown in FIG. Accordingly, when the decoration of the decorative member 154 is viewed through the main body portion 151, the decoration of the decorative member 154 can be visually recognized uniformly.

The inner side surface 151b3 extends in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) when viewed from the front. In addition, the shape of the inner side surface 151b3 in a front view is formed substantially the same as the external shape of the decorative member 154, which will be described later. As a result, when the decorative member 154 is arranged in the concave portion 151b, the decorative member 1
54 can be suppressed from protruding outside the recess 151b. Therefore, general winning mouth unit 1
50 is arranged on the base plate 60, the decorative member 154 is sandwiched between the back surface portion 151d and the base plate 60, thereby forming a gap between the back surface portion 151d of the main body portion 151 and the base plate 60. can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the body portion 151 from protruding toward the front side of the base plate 60 relative to the normal arrangement position. As a result, the game balls can smoothly flow down from the front side of the base plate 60 to the front side of the main body portion 151 of the general prize winning port unit 150 .

The recess 151b is a recess for accommodating a decorative member 154, which will be described later, in its recessed space. set large. In addition, the concave portion 151b extends from the end of the main body portion 151 in a front view to the main body portion 1.
It is recessed along the shape of the end portion of the body portion 151 at a position spaced apart by a certain distance inside the body portion 151 .

Therefore, when the decorative member 154 is arranged inside the concave portion 151b, the rear surface of the decorative member 154 can be prevented from projecting further toward the rear surface than the main body portion 151. FIG. Therefore, when the general prize winning port unit 150 is arranged on the base plate 60, the decorative member 154 is sandwiched between the recessed bottom surface 151b2 and the base plate 60, so that the rear portion 151d of the main body portion 151 and the base plate 60 are separated. It is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between As a result, it is possible to prevent the body portion 151 from projecting toward the front side of the base plate 60 relative to the normal arrangement position. As a result, the game ball can smoothly flow down to the front of the main body portion 151 of the general winning hole unit 150 from above the main body portion 151 in the gravity direction (the direction of the arrow U).

The first erected portion 152 is erected from the end portion of the main body portion 151 on the end portion side (inner rail 76 side) of the game area to the front side (arrow F direction side). The erected dimension of the first erected portion 152 is set to be substantially the same as the width dimension in the erected direction of the inner rail 76 erected on the front surface of the base plate 60 (decorative member 60c). In addition, the first standing portion 152 is set so that the distance between the front door 5 covering the front side of the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 is smaller than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the game ball flowing down the front side of the main body portion 151 is moved to the first standing portion 1 at the lower end portion of the game area in the direction of gravity.
52 can be collided. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball flowing down the front side of the main body 151 from colliding with the inner rail 76, and it is possible to prevent the inner rail 76 from colliding with the game ball and being bent.

Here, the space between the inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77 facing each other is a space for guiding the game ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13.
6 and the outer rail 77 are limited. Therefore, it is difficult to provide reinforcement for the purpose of preventing the inner rail 76 from bending, and there is a risk that the inner rail 76 will bend when the game ball flowing down the game area collides with the inner rail 76. - 特許庁

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the general winning opening unit 150 (
The game ball flowing down the game area can be made difficult to collide with the inner rail 76 by the first standing portion 152). Therefore, it is possible to suppress a change in the distance between the opposing inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77 due to the inner rail 76 bending. As a result, the game ball can be stably launched into the game area.

The second standing portion 153 extends from the upper side of the first standing portion 152 in the direction of gravity (arrow U direction side) toward the center of the game area (first winning opening 64). (see FIG. 2). As a result, the game ball flowing down between the opposing inner rail 76 and the center frame 83 (see FIG. 2) hits the upper surface (the surface in the direction of the arrow U) of the extending portion of the second standing portion 153 that is inclined downward. When thrown, the game ball can be rolled along the downward slope of the second standing portion 153 and thrown toward the center of the game area. As a result, the game ball flowing down in the game area between the inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77 facing each other (arrow L direction side) enters (flows into) the first winning port 64 arranged in the center of the game area. You can make it easier.

The decorative member 154 is formed in a plate shape and adhered to the back side of the main body portion 151 . The decorative member 154 has a decoration formed on the front surface of the main body 151 side, which is continuous with the decoration formed on the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 when viewed from the front. Thereby, the decoration formed on the base plate 60 can be visually recognized as one decoration together with the decoration of the decorative member 154 . In addition,
In this embodiment, a part of the character (person) is drawn on the decorative member 154, and the character of the decorative member 60c and the character of the decorative member 154 can be visually recognized as one character.

Also, the decorative member 154 is made of a light transmissive material. As a result, the light passing through the second opening 60b from the back side (direction of arrow B) of the base plate 60 is incident on the back side of the decorative member 154 and emitted from the front side (direction of arrow F) of the decorative member 154. can be made Therefore, the decoration formed in front of the decorative member 154 can be brightened to be visually recognized by the player, and the decoration of the decorative member 154 can be easily visually recognized by the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 13, the base plate 60 and the general winning slot unit 150 will be described. FIG. 13 is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 along line XIII-XIII in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 13, the decorative member 154 has an outer shape larger than the opening shape of the second opening 60b of the base plate 60 when viewed from the front. As a result, the general winning mouth unit 150
is disposed on the base plate 60, the end of the decorative member 154 is placed in the recess 151b of the main body 151.
is arranged between the recessed bottom surface 151b2 and the base plate 60 (decorative member 60c). Therefore,
When the adhesion between the main body portion 151 and the decorative member 154 is peeled off due to deterioration over time, etc., the decorative member 1
54 can be suppressed from falling off from the game board 13. - 特許庁

In addition, the decorative member 154 has a width dimension that overlaps with the base plate 60 in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction), and has a circular shape of the base plate 60 into which a projection 155 projecting from the back surface of the body portion 151 described later is inserted. is set larger than the diameter of the opening 60g (see FIG. 11). This will
It is possible to suppress formation of a gap between the decorations of the decorative member 154 and the decorative member 60c in a front view due to misalignment of the arrangement of the decorative member 154 with respect to the main body 151 or misalignment of the position where the decorative member 60c is formed. . As a result, the player can easily recognize the decoration member 60c of the base plate 60 and the decoration of the decoration member 154 as one decoration.

In addition, the three general prize winning ports 63 provided in the main body 151 are connected to the openings 514 to 516 of the sorting unit 500 (see FIG. 71) provided on the back side of the game board 13.
A game ball that wins a prize in the general winning hole 63 is thrown to a fourth ball-throwing route KR4 of the distribution unit 500. - 特許庁A detailed description of the sorting unit 500 will be given later.

Further, in the sorting unit 500, a substrate (not shown) having a light source capable of irradiating light on the front side is arranged on the base plate 520 (see FIG. 71). The back surface of the general winning slot unit 150 is illuminated through the second opening 60 b of 60 .

Therefore, the second opening 60b is used as a space for irradiating the path of game balls winning from the general winning opening 63 of the general winning opening unit 150 and the back surface of the general winning opening unit 150 with light. As a result, it is not necessary to separately form an opening for throwing game balls and an opening for passing light. The main body part 151 of the general winning port unit 150
A general prize winning port 63 can be arranged in the entire area. As a result, the general winning mouth unit 150
In addition, the light can be emitted from the entire area of the general prize winning port unit 150 to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the decoration (decoration member 154) of the general prize winning port unit 150.例文帳に追加

Also, according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 151, the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 and the decoration of the decorative member 154 can be arranged adjacent (approaching) in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction).
As a result, the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 can be viewed from an angle inclined with respect to the front view (for example, from a viewpoint at the same height as the upper end of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) in the direction of gravity).
When viewing c and the decorative member 154, the decorations of the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 are visually displaced compared to the case where the decoration of the general winning opening unit is arranged in front of the general winning opening unit. can be suppressed. As a result, the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 and the decorative member 154
The connection part with the decoration can be visually recognized by the player in the same positional relationship regardless of the player's viewpoint, and the design of the game board 13 can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 14, the connection between the decorative member 154 and the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 will be described in detail. 14 is a partially enlarged sectional view of the game board 13 in the range XIV of FIG. 13. FIG. Note that in FIG. 14, the path of light visually recognized by the player is illustrated by a chain double-dashed line.

As described above, the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 and the decoration of the decorative member 154 are viewed by the player as one decoration. Therefore, in order for the player to visually recognize the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 and the decoration of the decorative member 154 as one decoration (pattern), it is necessary to suppress positional deviation between the two decorations. However, when the decoration is formed on the base plate 60 or when the decoration member 154 is arranged on the main body 151, it is difficult to arrange the decoration at an accurate position (the same position each time). Therefore, when the general prize winning unit 150 is arranged on the base plate 60, the position of the decoration of the decorative member 154 is displaced from the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60, so that the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 There is a problem that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decoration as one decoration combined with the decoration.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the decorative member 154 has its end arranged on the back side of the inclined surface 151a. As a result, the decoration of the decorative member 154 and the decorative member 60 of the base plate 60
It is possible to make it difficult for the player to accurately recognize the connection portion with the c decoration (blur the connection portion so that the player can see it). Therefore, the player can recognize the decoration member 60c and the decoration member 154 as one decoration.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 14, the connecting portion between the decoration of the decorative member 154 and the decoration of the decorative member 60c (hereinafter referred to as “boundary P1” (see FIG. 14)) is the inclined surface 1 of the body portion 151.
It is positioned on the back side of 51a. Therefore, the light emitted from the boundary P1 toward the player's point of view and the connection portion between the front surface of the main body 151 and the inclined surface 151a (hereinafter referred to as "boundary P2" (see FIG. 14)) The light emitted toward the viewpoint can be the light reflected at different positions of the decorative member 60c or the decorative member 154 (that is, the light emitted from the boundary P1 toward the player's viewpoint can be reflected on the path of the light). , the formation of the boundary P2 can be suppressed).

Therefore, at the boundary P1, the positional deviation of the decorative member 60c with respect to the decorative member 154 is likely to be recognized by the player as a positional deviation of the decoration. However, since the decorations viewed by the player from the respective positions of the boundary P1 and the boundary P2 can be the decorations at different positions, the positional deviation of the decorations at the boundary P1 and the boundary P2 can be easily recognized at the same position. It is possible to suppress being visually recognized by the player. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the increase in the positional deviation of the decoration due to the combination of the positional deviation of the decoration at the boundary P1 and the positional deviation of the decoration at the boundary P2. As a result, the player can easily recognize the decoration of the decoration member 60c and the decoration member 154 as one decoration, and the design of the game board 13 can be improved.

Furthermore, by arranging the boundary P1 on the back side of the inclined surface 151a, from the viewpoint of the player, the connecting portion between the decorative member 60c and the main body portion 151 (hereinafter referred to as "boundary P3" (see FIG. 14)), A boundary P1 can be placed between the boundary P2. Therefore, between the misaligned positions (boundaries P2 and P3) of the decoration due to the refraction of the light when the light is emitted from the main body 151,
A boundary P1 can be placed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the region recognized by misalignment of the decoration from being elongated. That is, it is possible to limit the area in which the position of the decoration is misaligned and visually recognized with respect to the front of the game board 13 . As a result, the positional deviation area of the decoration can be reduced with respect to the game area of the game board 13, so that the decoration of the decoration member 60c and the decoration member 154 can be easily recognized as one decoration by the player.

In this embodiment, the character's face is decorated on the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60.
The decoration member 154 of the general winning opening unit 150 is decorated with the body of the character decorated with the decoration member 60c. That is, the outline of the decoration is positioned at the connecting portion of the decoration between the decoration member 60c and the decoration member 154. FIG. Therefore, it is possible for the player to recognize the misalignment of the connecting portion between the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 as the outline of the decoration. As a result, the decorative member 6
The decoration of 0c and the decoration member 154 can be easily recognized as the decoration of 1 by the player.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 is decorated up to the neck of the character's face, and the decorative member 154 of the general prize winning opening unit 150 is decorated with the decorative member 154 and the decorative member 6
The clothes worn by the body of the character decorated in 0c are decorated, and the character's face (neck) and clothes are decorated with different colors (in this embodiment, the face is skin-colored and the clothes are black). As a result, the misalignment of the connecting portion between the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 is made a portion with a different color tone, thereby making it difficult for the player to recognize that the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 are separated. can be done. As a result, the player can easily recognize the decorations of the decoration member 60c and the decoration member 154 as one decoration.

As described above, the body portion 151 is provided with the concave portion 151b on the back side, and the decorative member 154 is arranged inside the concave portion 151b. In addition, the shape of the inner side surface (inner side surface 151b3) of the recess 151b is set to be substantially the same as the external shape of the decorative member 154 when viewed from the front. As a result, when the decorative member 154 is arranged on the body portion 151, the inner side surface 151b3 of the concave portion 151b can be used as a guide (positioning). As a result, when attaching the decorative member 154 to the main body portion 151 , it is possible to prevent the decorative member 154 from being displaced from the main body portion 151 .

Furthermore, projections 155 (see FIG. 15) protruding in a cylindrical shape are formed at a plurality of locations (three locations in the present embodiment (see FIG. 15)) on the back side of the body portion 151 . The projection 155 is a positioning projection that positions the general winning slot unit 150 with respect to the base plate 60 when it is arranged on the base plate 60 , and is inserted into a recess 60 d formed in the base plate 60 . Also, the protrusion 155
, at least one location (one location in this embodiment) is the recessed bottom surface 151b2 of the recessed portion 151b.
and is inserted into an opening formed in the decorative member 154 . Therefore, the protrusion 155 can be used for positioning when the decorative member 154 is arranged on the body portion 151 .

Therefore, the projection 155 can position the general prize winning unit 150 on the base plate 60 and position the decorative member 154 on the main body 151 . Accordingly, the positioning portion for arranging the decorative member 154 on the front side of the decorative member 60c can be the same portion. can be suppressed. As a result, the player can easily recognize the decoration of the decorative member 60c and the decoration of the decorative member 154 as one decoration.

Furthermore, the protrusion 155 protruding from the recessed bottom surface 151b2 is within a range E1 (see FIG. 15) described later.
) (attachment area of the adhesive tape 154a). As a result, the body portion 15
1, the projection 155 is inserted into the opening of the decorative member 154, and one edge of the decorative member 154 is aligned with the inner side surface 151b3 of the recess 151b. Thus, two positions of the decorative member 154 can be positioned with respect to the body portion 151 . Therefore, it is not necessary to arrange the decorative member 154 on the main body 151 by aligning the edges of the decorative member 154 at two positions on the inner side surface 151b3 of the recess 151b. As a result, the installation work of the decorative member 154 on the main body portion 151 can be simplified.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 15 and 16, adhesion between the main body portion 151 and the decorative member 154 will be described. FIG. 15 is a rear view of the general winning slot unit 150, and FIG. 16 is a partially enlarged sectional view of the game board 13 in the range XIV of FIG. In addition, in FIG. 15, the decorative member 1
The area of the adhesive tape 154a applied to 54 is indicated by a chain double-dashed line labeled E1. Also, in FIG. 14, the path of light visually recognized by the player is illustrated by a chain double-dashed line. In addition, in this embodiment, the adhesive tape 154a is formed of a light-transmissive double-sided tape, and the area E
1 is attached.

As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the adhesive tape 154a for bonding the decorative member 154 and the main body 151 is attached along the edge of the decorative member 154 with a constant width. As a result, in the area where the adhesive tape 154a is not applied (portions other than the area E1), the adhesive tape 154
A gap (space) having a predetermined width is formed between the body portion 151 (recessed bottom surface 151b2) and the decorative member 154 (the front surface of the decorative member) by the thickness of a.

Also, the adhesive tape 154a extends from the end of the decorative member 154 through the boundary P3 to the inclined surface 1.
It is adhered to the area beyond the imaginary line PK1 (see FIG. 14) orthogonal to 51a. This will
Light that passes through the main body portion 151 and is emitted from the inclined surface 151a is affected by the decoration of the decorative member 154 (the portion where the wavelength is changed) in a range E1 where the adhesive tape 154a is pasted (end of the decorative member 154). part). As a result, even when the player views the general winning slot unit 150 from a predetermined angle or more, the decoration of the decorative member 60c and the decoration of the decorative member 154 can be easily recognized as one decoration by the player.

Here, when the player views the game board 13 from a position higher than normal (for example, a viewpoint at the same height as the upper end of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) in the direction of gravity), as shown in FIG. As shown, the light L emitted from the inclined surface 151a toward the player's line of sight is repeatedly reflected by the front and back surfaces of the main body 151 and passes through the inside of the main body 151 . In this case, the decorative member 15
4 is in contact with the main body 151 via the adhesive tape 154a, the wavelength of the light is changed by the decoration of the decorative member 154 each time it is reflected by the decorative member 154 side. Therefore, the light that passes through the interior of the body portion 151 and is emitted from the inclined surface 151a is emitted from the decorative member 15
Only the wavelength change due to the decoration at the end of 4 cannot be reflected. Therefore, the inclined surface 151
Since the decoration recognized by the player from a is different from the wavelength of the decoration visually recognized by the player from the front of the main body 151, there is a problem that the decorations are not continuous between the main body 151 and the inclined surface 151a. Ta.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the adhesion portion of the decorative member 154 to the main body portion 151 is set to the range E1.
By using only one, it is possible to prevent the light L reflected and passing through the interior of the main body 151 from being affected by the decoration of the decorative member 154 (preventing the wavelength of the light from being changed). As a result, as shown in FIG. 16, light that passes through the main body 151 and is emitted from the inclined surface 151a moves the portion affected by the decoration of the decorative member 154 (the portion whose wavelength is changed) to the adhesive tape 154a.
can be affixed range E1 (the end of the decorative member 154), and the decoration of the inclined surface 151a visually recognized by the player and the adjacent decoration can be easily visually recognized by the player. As a result, the design of the game board 13 can be improved.

Next, the special winning device 550 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 36. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 17, a method of disposing the special winning device 550 will be described. 17 is an exploded perspective front view of the center frame 86. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 17, the center frame 86 includes a base frame 86a formed in a substantially circular frame shape surrounding the central opening of the base plate 60, and a projecting portion projecting radially outward from the base frame 86a. 86b.

The base frame 86a has a shape that follows the central opening of the base plate 60. A part of the base frame 86a is inserted into the inner side of the central opening, and a portion of the base frame 86a other than the part of the base plate 60 is inserted into the central opening. is disposed on the base plate 60 in a state of projecting to the front side of the .

The protruding portion 86b protrudes to the right side (arrow R direction side) in a front view with respect to the game area of the game board 13 . As a result, the special winning device 550 arranged in the protruding portion 86b can be arranged on the right side of the game area (in the direction of the arrow R) when viewed from the front, and when the special game state is entered, the player can hit right. Part of the game ball throwing path can be configured by the special winning device 550 .

The projecting portion 86b has an opening 86b1 that opens in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction), and is positioned above the opening 86b1 (arrow U direction) toward the back side (arrow B direction side). and a concave portion 86b2 that is provided as a concave portion.

A part of a first unit 551 of a special winning device 550, which will be described later, is inserted into the opening 86b1. Thereby, the first unit 551 can be connected to the second unit 552 of the special winning device 550 arranged on the rear side of the projecting portion 86b through the opening 86b1.

The concave portion 86b2 can accommodate a part of the first unit 551 of the special winning device 550, which will be described later. In addition, a detection device 86b3 capable of detecting passage of a game ball is provided in the concave portion 86b2.
is arranged. As a result, game balls passing through the portion of the first unit 551 that is accommodated inside the recess 86b2 can be detected.

The special prize winning device 550 includes a first unit 551 arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the protruding portion 86b of the center frame 86, and arranged on the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the protruding portion 86b. and a second unit 552 that is configured as a main component.

The first unit 551 has a space (path) through which game balls can flow down, and a part of the first unit 551 is arranged in the game area of the game board 13 . Also, the first unit 551 is mounted on the center frame 86 by screws through which the second unit 552 is inserted. A detailed description of how to arrange the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 will be given later.

Next, the configuration of the first unit 551 of the special winning device 550 will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 to 20. FIG. FIG. 18(a) is a front view of the first unit 551, and FIG.
) is a side view of the first unit 551, and FIG. 18(c) is a rear view of the first unit 551. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective front view of the first unit 551, and FIG. 20 is an exploded perspective rear view of the first unit 551. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 18 to 20, the first unit 551 includes a first path member 560 arranged on the front side and a second path member 570 arranged on the rear side of the first path member 560. , and a third path member 580 arranged behind the second path member 570 .

The first path member 560 includes a front plate 564 formed in a plate shape along the front of the game area of the game board 13, and a substantially U-shaped cross section with an open upper side (arrow U direction side). A first receiving portion 561, a second receiving portion 562 and a third receiving portion 563 projecting from the upper end of the face plate 564 toward the rear side, and the first receiving portion 561, the second receiving portion 562 and the third receiving portion A first wall portion 565 formed in a row on the lower side of the portion 563 (direction of arrow D) and extending along a part of the edge portion of the front plate 564, and a lower portion of the first wall portion 565 , and mainly includes two pairs of a second wall portion 566 and a third wall portion 567 protruding from two locations separated by a predetermined interval.

The front plate 564 is a plate member that serves as a wall portion on the front side of a game ball flow-down path formed between facing a second path member 570 or a third path member 580, which will be described later, and is formed of a light-transmitting member. be. As a result, the player can move the game ball flowing down inside the first unit 551 to the front plate 564 .
can be seen through (through)

Further, the front plate 564 includes a guide portion 564a protruding toward the second path member 570 (back side (arrow B direction side)).

The guide portion 564a is driven by a game ball flowing down the inside of the first unit 551, and the front plate 564
is a wall portion that suppresses dirt on the entire wall surface of the second path member 570 or the third path member 570 to be described later.
It extends along the flow-down path of the game ball that flows down between the path member 580 and the path member 580 . Further, the guide portion 564a is projected at a position radially separated from the rolling surface of the game ball flowing down the first unit 551 . In other words, the guide portion 564a protrudes at substantially the same position as the center position of the game ball flowing down the first path member 560 . As a result, the portion where the front plate 564 and the game ball abut can be limited to the projecting tip of the guide portion 564a. Therefore, the front plate 5
It is possible to suppress the occurrence of scratches due to contact with the game ball over the entire area of 64 and the transfer of dirt adhering to the game ball. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball flowing down inside the first path member 560 via the front plate 564 .

The first receiving portion 561, the second receiving portion 562, and the third receiving portion 563 are portions for receiving, inside the first unit 551, game balls flowing down from the game area above the first unit 551 (in the direction of the arrow U). , the opening on the upper side is set to a size larger than the diameter of the game ball. In addition, the first receiving portion 561, the second receiving portion 562, and the third receiving portion 563 are arranged side by side in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) at the upper end (arrow U direction side) of the front plate 564. be.

The first receiving portion 561 is set larger than the second receiving portion 562 and the third receiving portion 563 in the receiving width of the game ball (width dimension in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR)). Thereby, the game ball flowing into the special winning device 550 is made easier to flow into the first receiving portion 561 than the second receiving portion 562 or the third receiving portion 563 .

Also, the first receiving portion 561 communicates with a flow-down path formed inside the first unit 551 . As a result, the game ball received by the first receiving portion 561 flows down inside the first unit 551 . In addition, the flow-down route of the game ball of the first unit 551 will be described later.

The second receiving portion 562 and the third receiving portion 563 communicate with a flow-down path formed inside the second unit 552, which will be described later. As a result, the game balls received by the second receiving portion 562 and the third receiving portion 563 flow down inside the second unit 552 . Note that the second unit 55
2 will be described later.

The first wall portion 565 is an inner wall that forms a space for throwing a game ball between facing a fourth wall portion 573 formed in a second path member 570, which will be described later. One end of the first wall portion 565 is connected to the lower side of the first receiving portion 561 described above, and the other end of the first wall portion 565 extends over the lower sides of the second receiving portion 562 and the third receiving portion 563 in the left-right direction (arrows LR). direction), and a curved wall portion 565b that is curved in a substantially C-shape in a rear view and connected to the upper side wall portion 565a.

The upper side wall portion 565a is an inner wall that covers the upper surface of the rolling surface when the game ball rolls on the upper surface (surface on the arrow U direction side) of the fourth wall portion 573, which will be described later. It is formed at a position spaced upward (arrow U direction side) from the diameter of the game ball in a direction perpendicular to the upper surface of the.

The curved wall portion 565b is an inner wall that changes the rolling direction of a game ball rolling on the upper surface of the fourth wall portion 573, which will be described later, and is formed at a position facing the rolling side end portion of the fourth wall portion 573. be. Also, the curved wall portion 565b is formed in a semicircular arc shape centering on the rolling side end portion of the fourth wall portion 573 . As a result, the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the fourth wall portion 573 can be guided to the lower surface side of the fourth wall portion 573 by flowing down along the inner wall of the curved wall portion 565b. The moving direction can be opposite to the rolling direction of the upper surface of the fourth wall portion 573 .

The second wall portion 566 is an inner wall that forms a space for a path branching from the main flow path of the game ball flowing down inside the first unit 551, and is a pair of wall portions protruding from the back surface of the front plate 564. is set to a dimension slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the number of routes flowing down the first unit 551 can be increased.

The third wall portion 567 is a wall portion that forms the inner surface of a path branching from the main ball-throwing path (main path SK3) of the game ball that flows down inside the first unit 551, and protrudes from the back surface of the front plate 564. The distance between the pair of walls facing each other is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, it is possible to increase the number of paths of game balls flowing down the first unit 551 .

In addition, the second wall portion 566 and the third wall portion 567 each have a downstream end portion that is connected to the first unit 5 .
51 in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR). As a result, the game ball can be thrown to both sides of the first unit 551 in the left-right direction from a branch passage, which will be described later.

The second path member 570 includes a plate-like base plate 571 facing the front plate 564 of the first path member 560, and a fourth wall portion 5 projecting from the front of the base plate 571 toward the first path member 560.
73, a fifth wall portion 574 projecting downward from the fourth wall portion 573 at a predetermined distance, and a position projecting downward from the fifth wall portion 574 at a predetermined distance. and a sixth wall portion 575 that is formed.

The base plate 571 is disposed at a position separated from the front plate 564 of the first path member 560 by a distance slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, the game ball can flow down between the front plate 564 and the base plate 571 . In addition, the base plate 571 has first openings 571 that open at positions corresponding to the first receiving portion 561, the second receiving portion 562, and the third receiving portion 563, respectively.
a, the second opening 571b and the third opening 571c, the fourth opening 571d opening below the first opening 571a, and opening above each of the fifth wall 574 and the sixth wall 575 Fifth opening 571e and sixth opening 571f, fifth wall 574 and sixth wall 575
and a recessed portion 571g located between and recessed on the back side.

The first opening portion 571a, the second opening portion 571b and the third opening portion 571c receive game balls flowing into the first receiving portion 561, the second receiving portion 562 and the third receiving portion 563 of the first path member 560 described above. It is an opening through which the back side of the base plate 571 is passed.

In addition, the base plate 571 includes a first opening 571a, a second opening 571b, and a third opening 571b.
A first rolling portion 576, a second rolling portion 577, and a third rolling portion 578 protrude from the lower end portion of 71c to the back side. As a result, a game ball passing through the first opening 571a passes through the third path member 580, which will be described later, and a game ball passing through the second opening 571b or the third opening 571c
Each ball is thrown to a second unit 552 which will be described later.

The first opening 571a and the fourth opening 571d are connected to a third path member 580, which will be described later, on the rear side.
part of is covered. As a result, the game ball passing through the first opening 571a is thrown from the fourth opening 571d to the front side of the base plate 571 (arrow F direction side).

The fourth wall portion 573 protrudes from the base plate 571 along the lower end portion of the fourth opening 571d and extends in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR). Further, the fourth wall portion 573 is formed so that the upper surface thereof is inclined downward from the fourth opening portion 571d opened on the left side of the base plate 571 in the front view toward the right side in the front view (arrow R direction). . As a result, the game ball passed through the fourth opening 571d and thrown to the front side of the base plate 571 is placed on the upper surface of the fourth wall portion 573, and the inclination of the upper surface of the fourth wall portion 573 causes the base plate 571 to move. You can throw the ball to the right side of (arrow R direction side).

The fifth wall portion 574 serves as a rolling surface for a game ball thrown from the curved wall portion 565b of the first wall portion 565 described above. It protrudes at a position spaced below the diameter and extends in the left-right direction of the base plate 571 (direction of arrows LR). In addition, the upper surface (the surface on the arrow U direction side) of the fifth wall portion is inclined downward from the curved wall portion 565b side (the arrow R direction side) toward the later-described concave portion 574g side (the arrow L direction side). formed by Thereby, the game ball thrown from the curved wall portion 565b to the upper surface of the fifth wall portion 574 can roll toward the concave portion 574g. Furthermore, the fifth wall portion 574 includes a first receiving recess 574a and a second receiving recess 574b that are recessed downward on the rolling surface of the game ball.

The first receiving recess 574 a and the second receiving recess 574 b are arranged side by side in the extending direction of the fifth wall portion 574 . The first receiving recess 574a and the second receiving recess 574b are set such that the width and depth of the recess are larger than the diameter of the game ball. Furthermore, a fifth opening 571e that opens to the base plate 571 is formed inside the first receiving recess 574a and the second receiving recess 574b. Thereby, the game ball flowing into the first receiving recess 574a or the second receiving recess 574b passes through the fifth opening 571e and is thrown to the back side of the base plate 571.

The recessed portion 574g is formed above the downstream end (the end in the direction of the arrow L) of the fifth wall portion 574, and the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the fifth wall portion 574 is placed in the recessed portion. 574g, and can be thrown to the upper portion of the sixth wall portion 575 formed below the recessed portion 574g (in the direction of arrow D).

The sixth wall portion 575 is a portion that serves as a rolling surface for a game ball that rolls on the fifth wall portion 574 and is thrown to the concave portion 574g. It projects from the base plate 571 at a position spaced apart from the diameter of the base plate 571 and extends in the left-right direction (arrows LR) of the base plate 571 . The upper surface of the sixth wall portion 575 is inclined downward from the recessed portion 574g side (arrow L direction side) toward the above-described third wall portion 567 side. As a result, the recessed portion 574
A game ball thrown from g to the upper surface of the sixth wall portion 575 can roll toward the ball-throwing path formed by the third wall portion 567 . In addition, the sixth wall portion 575 includes a third receiving recess portion 575a and a fourth receiving recess portion 575b recessed downward on the rolling surface of the game ball.

The third receiving recess 575 a and the fourth receiving recess 575 b are arranged side by side in the extending direction of the sixth wall portion 575 . The third receiving recess 575a and the fourth receiving recess 575b are set such that the width and depth of the recess are larger than the diameter of the game ball. Furthermore, a sixth opening 571f that opens to the base plate 571 is formed inside the third receiving recess 575a and the fourth receiving recess 575b. As a result, the game ball that has flowed into the third receiving recess 575a and the fourth receiving recess 575b passes through the sixth opening 571f and is thrown to the back side of the base plate 571.

The third path member 580 includes a first covering member 581 disposed on the back surface of the second path member 570 on the upper side in the gravitational direction (arrow U direction side), and the gravitational direction lower side of the second path member 570 (arrow U direction side). D direction side), the second covering member 582, the first covering member 581, and the second covering member 5
82 and a second driving unit 584 disposed behind the second covering member 582 .

The first covering member 581 includes a curved portion 581a disposed on the rear side of the first opening 571a and the fourth opening 571d, and a plate-shaped mounting portion 58 continuing below the curved portion 581a.
1b and .

The curved portion 581a includes a first opening portion 571a and a fourth opening portion 571d (the second path member 570).
) side is curved to have a U-shaped cross section, and the first rolling portion 576 is disposed inside thereof (see FIG. 24(a)). In addition, the wall surface on the inner side of the curve of the curved portion 581a and the first rolling portion 576
is set larger than the diameter of the game ball. This allows the first
A game ball that rolls on the rolling portion 576 can flow down along the inner wall of the curved portion 581a and be thrown to the lower side of the first rolling portion 581a. Therefore, by throwing the game ball to the curved portion 581a that curves toward the back side, the rolling time of the game ball can be lengthened. As a result, even if the rolling surface of the game ball cannot be secured on the plane parallel to the game area of the game board 13, the rolling speed of the game ball can be slowed down.

Further, the curved portion 581a is arranged such that the lower end thereof is slightly higher than the lower inner edge of the fourth opening 571d. As a result, it is possible to suppress the game ball flowing down from the first rolling portion 576 along the inner wall of the curved portion 581a and thrown to the fourth opening portion 571d to flow back and flow into the curved portion 581a.

The mounting portion 581b has two through holes 581b1 through which screws for fastening the first covering member 581 to the rear surface of the second path member 570 are inserted. In addition, the mounting portion 581b is
It has a columnar body 551a projecting in a columnar shape toward the rear side. A screw hole for fastening a second unit 552 to the first unit 551 is formed at the tip of the columnar body 551a. Thereby, the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 can be fastened by screwing the screw inserted from the back side of the second unit 552 into the columnar body 551a.

The second covering member 582 has a second curved portion 582a disposed on the back side of the sixth opening 571f.
and the rear side wall portion 58 disposed on the rear side of the first receiving recess 574a to the fourth receiving recess 575b.
2b and .

The second curved portion 582a is curved to have a U-shaped cross section that is open on the sixth opening 571f (second path member 570) side (see FIG. 24(c)). In addition, the second curved portion 582a has an erecting wall 582a1 erected from the front side toward the back side inside the U shape. Standing wall 5
Due to 82a1, the internal space of the second curved portion 582a is located at the first position on the left side (arrow L direction side) in front view.
It is divided into a space 582a2 and a second space 582a3 formed next to the first space 582a2 with an upstanding wall 582a1 interposed therebetween.

The first space 582a2 and the second space 582a3 are spaces larger than the diameter of the game ball, and are formed from the front side to the back side. Also, the first space 582a2 and the second space 582a2
2a3 are connected on the back side. In addition, the inner surface of the first space 582a2 is inclined downward toward the back side, and the inner surface of the second space 582a3 is inclined downward toward the front side. As a result, the game ball thrown from the recessed portion 571g to the second curved portion 582a rolls to the rear side due to the inclination of the first space 582a2, and is pushed to the second curved portion 582a at the end of the rear side.
The ball is thrown to the second space 582a3 by the bending of the curved portion 582a, rolled to the front side by the inclination of the second space 582a3, passes through the opening of the sixth opening 571f, and is thrown to the front side of the base plate 571. .

The rear side wall portion 582b is fed to the first receiving recess 574a to the fourth receiving recess 575b,
It is a wall on the back side of the ball-throwing path that guides game balls passing through the fifth opening 571e and the sixth opening 571f below the special winning device 550. FIG. As a result, the first receiving recess 574a to the fourth receiving recess 574a
A game ball sent to the receiving recess 575b can be collected. Therefore, the first receiving recess 5
74a~fourth receiving concave portion 575b, the game ball passed through the detection devices SE3~SE6 to be described later to give the game value to the player flows down the game area again, and the game value is given to the player again. can prevent it from being done.

The first drive unit 583 includes a first solenoid 583a having a shaft that is displaced in the front-rear direction by electric power, a first variable plate 583b connected to the shaft of the first solenoid 583a, a first
and a first protection member 583c surrounding the solenoid 583a and the first variable plate 583b.

The first variable plate 583b is a rectangular plate member elongated in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR), and is displaced in the front-rear direction (direction of arrows FB) according to the displacement of the shaft of the first solenoid 583a. .
Further, in a state in which the first variable plate 583b projects toward the front side, the tip of the first variable plate 583b is inserted into the above-described fifth opening 571e, and the first receiving recess 574a and the second receiving recess 574a are inserted.
It is arranged above the receiving recess 574b. As a result, in a state where the first variable plate 583b projects toward the front side, the first variable plate 583b can prevent game balls from flowing into the first receiving recess 574a and the second receiving recess 574b.

The first protection member 583c is formed in a box-like shape that is open on the second path member 570 side, and a mechanism for connecting the shaft of the first solenoid 583a and the first variable plate 583b is arranged inside thereof. In addition, the first protection member 583c includes a plurality of through holes 583c1 penetrating in the front-rear direction.

The through hole 583c1 is a portion through which a screw for fastening the first drive unit 583 to the second path member 570 is inserted. The screw inserted through the through-hole 583c1 is connected to the first covering member 581.
or through the through hole 582b1 of the second covering member 582, the second
It is screwed into a hole drilled in the path member 570 . Therefore, by disposing the first drive unit 583 on the second path member 570 , the first covering member 581 and the second covering member 582 can be disposed on the second path member 570 . As a result, the screw fastening portions of the first covering member 581 and the second covering member 582 can be reduced, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

In addition, since the first covering member 581 or the second covering member 582 can be sandwiched between the second path member 570 and the first driving unit 583, the first driving unit 583 can
If it is forcibly removed from the special winning device 550, the first covering member 581 or the second covering member 5
The connection between 82 and the second path member 570 is incomplete, and the game ball is likely to be unable to pass through the first covering member 581 or the second covering member 582 . As a result, it is possible to suppress the continuation of the game in a state of cheating.

As with the first drive unit 583, the second drive unit 584 includes a second solenoid 584a having a shaft that is displaced in the front-rear direction by electric power, a second variable plate 584b connected to the shaft of the second solenoid 584a, and a second protection member 584c that covers the periphery of the second solenoid 584a and the second variable plate 584b.

The second variable plate 584b is formed of a plate-like body that is elongated in the left-right direction (the direction of the arrows LR) and is bent into a crank shape when viewed from the front. Further, in a state where the second variable plate 584b protrudes toward the front side, the tip of the second variable plate 584b is positioned at the sixth opening 57 described above.
1f and arranged above the third receiving recess 575a and the fourth receiving recess 575b. As a result, in a state where the second variable plate 584b projects toward the front side, the second variable plate 584b can prevent game balls from flowing into the third receiving recess 575a and the fourth receiving recess 575b.

The second protection member 584c is formed in a box shape that opens on the side of the second path member 570, and a mechanism for connecting the shaft of the second solenoid 584a and the second variable plate 584b is arranged inside. The second protection member 584c also includes a rear side wall portion 584c1 that covers the rear side of the ball-throwing path formed by the second wall portion 566 of the first path member 560. As shown in FIG. As a result, the rear side wall portion 584c
1 and the second wall portion 566 can form a ball throwing path, and the rear side wall portion 584c1 and the second wall portion 584c1 can form a ball throwing path.
The second path member 570 can be covered with the wall portion 566 . As a result, the first unit 55
Detecting device SE3 to which an illegal member is inserted from one side surface and disposed on the second path member 570
It is possible to easily suppress the SE6 from being fraudulent.

Next, the throwing path of the game ball flowing into the first unit 551 from the first receiving portion 561 will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 to 24. FIG. FIG. 21 is XXI-XX in FIG. 18(b)
It is a sectional view of the 1st unit 551 in line I. 22 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit 551 shown in FIG. 21. FIG. FIG. 23 is a cross-sectional view of the first unit 551 taken along line XXIII-XXIII in FIG. 18(b). FIG. 24(a) shows XXIVa-XXIV in FIG.
FIG. 24B is a cross-sectional view of the first unit 551 taken along line a, and FIG. 24B is XXIVb of FIG.
24(c) is a cross-sectional view of the first unit 551 along the line XXIVc-XXIVc of FIG. 21. FIG.

The game balls flowing into the first unit flow through main paths SK1 to SK6 in the order of main path SK1, main path SK2, main path SK3, main path SK4, main path SK5, and main path SK6. Alternatively, the main route SK from the main route SK3 on the way down the main routes SK1 to SK6
3 and flows down the sub-path HK1. Or main route SK
1 to a secondary route HK that communicates with the main route SK5 from the main route SK5 on the way down the main route SK6
2 or sub-path HK3 and flows down either sub-path HK2 or sub-path HK3.

Detecting devices SE3 to SE6 for detecting the passage of game balls are arranged on the sub paths HK1 to HK3, and the detection of the game balls by the detecting devices SE3 to SE6 allows the player to obtain a predetermined game value. Granted. In this embodiment, game value is given to the player by a predetermined number of prize balls.

As shown in FIGS. 21 to 24, the main path SK1 is the curved portion 581 of the first covering member 581.
a and the first rolling portion 576 (see FIG. 24(a)) of the second path member 570, and communicates the first opening 571a and the fourth opening 571d. As described above, the curved portion 581a is curved in a U-shaped cross section in which the sides of the first opening 571a and the fourth opening 571d (the second path member 570) are open, and the game passing through the main path SK1 is formed. The ball can be detoured to the back side. As a result, when the game ball passes through a space (the inside of the first opening 571a or the fourth opening 571d) where the area in the front view is limited, the amount of movement of the game ball in the horizontal direction can be reduced. It is possible to make it easier for the player to see the game ball passing through the main path SK1, thereby making it easier for the player to see the game ball passing through the first unit 551, thereby increasing the interest of the player. can.

Further, as will be described later, since the game ball flowing into the main path SK1 is given a predetermined game value to the player, the rolling of the game ball that may give the game value to the player is This makes it easier for people to see. As a result, it is possible to make the game more interesting to the player. The main path SK1 communicates with a main path SK2, which will be described later, so that game balls passing through the main path SK1 can flow into the main path SK2.

Further, the curved portion 581a of the main path SK1 corresponds to the concave portion 86b of the center frame 86 described above.
2 (see FIG. 17). As a result, when game balls clog the main path SK1 (flow is slow), the defect can be detected by the detection device 86b3 (see FIG. 17) and an error can be reported.

Furthermore, the passage width of the main route SK1 is set slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball,
It is set smaller than the opening through which the game balls of the detection devices SE3 to SE7 (see FIG. 23) pass. As a result, if a gaming ball (illegal gaming ball) with a diameter larger than the standard gaming ball (11 mm) is manufactured and fraudulent (game) is performed with that ball, the ball is sent to the main path. S.
It can be clipped inside K1. Therefore, it is possible to prevent illegal game balls from flowing down to the detection devices SE3 to SE7 arranged downstream of the main path SK1, thereby preventing fraudulent activities. Further, by keeping the illegal game ball on the main path SK1, it can be detected by the detection device 86b3 (see FIG. 17) and an error (illegal) can be notified. In addition, the fraud in this case means that the detection device S
An illegal game ball is inserted into one of the openings E3 to SE7, and the detecting devices SE3 to SE7 are allowed to continue the detection to obtain the payout of the illegal game ball (game value).

The main path SK2 consists of the first wall portion 565 of the first path member 560 and the fourth wall portion 565 of the second path member 570.
This is a space formed between the wall portion 573 and the wall portion 573 . The game ball flowing into the main path SK2 rolls on the upper surface of the fourth wall portion 573 and flows down. As described above, the fourth wall portion 573 extends in the left-right direction (
It extends in the direction of the arrows LR) and slopes downward as it separates from the fourth opening 571d.

Therefore, the above-described curved portion 581a (curved path to the back side) is formed at the switching portion of the throwing direction of the game ball (the connecting portion between the main path SK1 and the main path SK2), so that the player can easily move the main path. Loss of sight of a game ball flowing down SK1 can be suppressed. That is, when a path that curves toward the back side is formed in the middle of a straight ball-throwing path (for example, the main path SK2) that extends in the left-right direction, the game ball that rolls on the curved path at a constant acceleration is Since the acceleration is changed (decreased), the line of sight that has been chasing the game ball is ahead of the game ball, and the player may lose sight of the game ball.

On the other hand, since the rolling direction of the game ball is switched and the curved path to the back side is formed in the part where the rolling speed of the game ball is originally slowed down, the player's line of sight precedes the game ball. can be suppressed to prevent the player from losing sight of the game ball.

The curved portion 581a, which is the inner wall of the main path SK1, is located on the left side (in the direction of the arrow L) of the first unit 551 arranged slightly to the right (in the direction of the arrow R) with respect to the central portion of the game board 13 in the left-right direction. side edge). Therefore, a curved path (main path SK1) to the back side is formed on the side where the first unit 551 is easily visible from the player positioned in front of the game board 13, so that the player can move from the main path SK1 to the main path. Losing sight of a game ball passing through SK2 can be easily suppressed.

In addition, the main route SK2 communicates with the curved route WK1, and through the curved route WK1,
It communicates with the main route SK3, which will be described later. As a result, game balls passing through the main path SK2 flow into the main path SK3 via the curved path WK1. A detailed description of the curved path WK1 will be given later.

The main path SK3 is a space formed between the fourth wall portion 573 and the fifth wall portion 574 of the second path member 570 . The game ball flowing into the main path SK3 rolls on the upper surface of the fifth wall portion 574 and flows down. Also, the first variable plate 583b of the first drive unit 583 described above protrudes onto the main path SK3 when the first drive unit 583 is extended. First variable plate 5 on main path SK3
In the state where 83b protrudes, the game ball rolling on the upper portion of the fifth wall portion 574 is pushed by the first variable plate 58
The ball rolls on the upper surface of 3b and is thrown to the main path SK4.

On the other hand, when the first variable plate 583b is retracted from the main path SK3, the secondary path HK1 in the space formed inside the first receiving recess 574a and the second receiving recess 574b formed in the fifth wall 574 Game balls flow in. The secondary path HK1 is thrown to the recovery path formed by the rear side wall portion 582b through the fifth opening 571e.

In this way, the first unit 551 includes the first variable plate 583b that protrudes on the ball throwing path of the game ball or retreats from the ball throwing path. The case where the game ball flowing down the route SK3 is guided to the secondary route HK1 and the main route S
Since it is possible to change to the case where it is guided by K4, it is possible to give a change to the flowing direction of the game ball flowing down the first unit 551.

In this case, since the game ball flowing into the sub-path HK1 is given a predetermined game value to the player, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether the game ball has flowed into the sub-path HK1. In addition, the first variable plate 583b is arranged in the middle of the ball-throwing path formed in the first unit 551, and is displaced in the player's viewing direction (arrow FB direction). 583
It is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the displacement of b. As a result, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the falling game ball of the first unit 551, and it is possible to easily give the player interest in the falling game ball.

The secondary path HK1 includes a main path SK3 for throwing a game ball from the right side (arrow R direction) to the left side (arrow L direction) in a front view, and a main path SK3 positioned below the main path SK3 for throwing a game ball from the left side. It is formed in the fifth wall portion 574 that forms a gap with the main path SK6 that throws the ball to the right. Therefore,
Since the secondary path HK1 is formed using the space between the left and right throws of the game ball, it is possible to prevent the outer shape of the first unit 551 from increasing in the vertical direction. As a result, by reducing the outer shape of the first unit 551, the range in which the player can follow the game ball with his/her eyes can be narrowed.
It is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball flowing down the first unit 551 .

The main path SK4 is a space formed by the recessed portion 571g and the protrusion 568 of the first path member 560. As shown in FIG. A game ball flowing into the main path SK4 contacts the projection 568 and moves into the concave portion 571g.
After the ball is thrown to the inside (back side) of the recessed portion, it rolls around the protrusion 568 along the inner surface of the recessed portion and is thrown to the outside (front side) of the recessed portion. That is, the game ball rolls around the protrusion 568 . Further, the main path SK4 is communicated with the main path SK5, and game balls passing through the main path SK4 can flow into the main path SK5.

The main path SK5 is the first space 582 of the second covering member 582 of the third path member 580 described above.
This is the space formed by a2 and the second space 582a3. The game ball flowing into the main path SK5 rolls to the back side inside the first space 582a2 as described above, and then moves to the second space 5
The inside of 82a3 rolls to the front side. In addition, the second variable plate 584b of the second drive unit 584 described above protrudes onto the main path SK5 when extended. This main route SK
5, the game ball rolling inside the second curved portion 582a is thrown to the main path SK6.

On the other hand, when the second variable plate 584b is retracted from the main path SK5, the secondary path HK2 in the space formed inside the third receiving recess 575a and the fourth receiving recess 575b formed in the sixth wall 575 A game ball flows down. The secondary path HK2 is fed through the sixth opening 571f to the recovery path formed by the rear side wall portion 582b.

Further, the second curved portion 582a forming the main path SK5 is curved toward the back side as described above, and can detour the game ball passing through the main path SK5 to the back side.
As a result, even when the area in the front view is set to a predetermined limited space, it is possible to increase the rolling distance of the game ball.

Further, the second variable plate 584b is configured such that a portion on the upstream side of the main path SK5 and a portion on the downstream side of the main path SK5 are extended or retracted. and the downstream side of the main path SK5, a curved path to the rear side is formed, so that the main path S
A game ball passing through K5 can extend the time during which a game value can be imparted to a player. As a result, it is possible to lengthen the time during which the player is entertained.

A secondary route HK3 is communicated with the communicating portion of the main route SK4 and the main route SK5. Alternate path H
K3 is the second wall portion 566 of the first path member 560 and the rear side wall portion 58 of the third path member 580.
This is the space formed between facing 4c1.

The secondary path HK3 is in a direction (left direction in front view (arrow L direction)) different from the flow direction of the game ball (right direction in front view (direction of arrow R)) when the game ball flows from main path SK4 to main path SK5. In addition, the secondary path HK3 is set such that the lower inner edge of the inflow port is located below the second variable plate 584b (in the direction of the arrow D).

Here, when the game ball normally flows down from the main path SK4 to the main path SK5 (with no external force other than gravity acting on it), the game ball flows from the main path SK4 to the main path SK5 or the sub path HK2. be. On the other hand, at the timing when the game ball flows from the main path SK4 to the sub path HK2, the second variable plate 584b is projected and the tip surface of the second variable plate 584b contacts the game ball, and the game ball receives an external force other than gravity. , the second variable plate 584b pushes the game ball into the inlet of the sub-path HK3 and flows into the sub-path HK3.

Therefore, the first unit 551 is provided with a second variable plate 584b that protrudes onto the ball throwing path of the game ball or retreats from the ball throwing path. Or the game ball flowing down the main route SK5 is the main route SK5 and the sub route HK2
Or, since it is guided to either of the subpaths HK3, it is possible to change the flow direction of the game ball flowing down the first unit 551.例文帳に追加

In this case, since the game ball flowing into the sub-path HK2 or the sub-path HK3 gives the player a predetermined game value, the player watches whether the game ball has flowed into the sub-path HK2 or the sub-path HK3. can be made Also, since the second variable plate 584b is arranged in the middle of the ball-throwing path formed in the first unit 551, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the displacement of the plate member 584b2. As a result, the first unit 551 can be made to pay attention to the game ball flowing down, and it is possible to easily give the player interest in the falling game ball.

Further, as described above, on the upstream side of the main path SK4, the path along which the game ball flows is switched by the first variable plate 583b. Therefore, the game balls that have not flowed into the upstream subpath HK1 and are not given game values to the player are allowed to flow further downstream to the subpath HK2 or HK1.
It can flow into K3. Therefore, by letting the game ball, which may have once given the game value to the player, pass through the switching portion of the flow-down path, the game ball can be transferred to the secondary paths HK2 and H
Players can again have a desire to flow into K3.

Further, a main path SK4 curved toward the back side is arranged between the main path SK3 and the main path SK5 where the path along which the game ball flows is switched. Therefore, the game ball can be rolled within a predetermined range when viewed from the front, making it easier for the player to recognize the position of the game ball. That is, by making the player recognize the position of the game ball through the main path SK4 after flowing down the main path SK3, the player can watch the game ball rolling on the main path SK5 connected downstream of the main path SK4. You can make it easier. As a result, the game balls flowing into the secondary paths HK2 and HK3 can be easily visually recognized by the player, and the interest of the player can be improved.

In addition, inclined surfaces 584b1 (see FIG. 24(c)) are formed at both left and right end portions on the front side of the second variable gate 584b. This will
When the second variable plate 584b is projected at the timing when the game ball flows from the main path SK4 into the subpath HK2, and the tip surface of the second variable plate 584b and the game ball come into contact with each other, the game ball is pushed by the inclined surface 584b1. can be pushed out to the inlet side of the secondary path HK3. Therefore, the inclined surface 584b1
And the secondary path HK2 can prevent the game ball from being caught between the second variable plate 584b and the first path member 560, and a path in which the flowing direction is switched depending on the difference in timing when the game ball flows down is provided. A plurality (three paths in this embodiment) can be formed.

The main path SK6 is a space surrounded by the third wall portion 567 of the first path member 560 . A game ball that flows down the main path SK6 is thrown to the game area of the game board 13 . Therefore, the first receiving section 5
61 does not flow into the first receiving recess 574a to the fourth receiving recess 575b, the game value is not given to the player, and the ball is thrown to the game area of the game board 13 from the main path SK6. , are collected from an out port 71 formed on the game board 13 .

<Guiding means for displacing the game ball in the front-rear direction>
Next, referring to FIGS. 25 to 28, the flow of the game ball from the main path SK2 to the main path SK3 will be described. 25(a) and 26(a) are partial enlarged views of the first unit 551 in the range XXVa of FIG. 21, and FIGS.
) is a sectional view of the first unit 551 along line XXVb-XXVb of FIG. 27(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit 551 taken along line XXVIIa-XXVIIa of FIG. 25(a), and FIG. 27(b) is a first unit 551 taken along line XXVIIb-XXVIIb of FIG.
FIG. 27(c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the unit 551, and FIG. 25(a) XXVIIc-X
It is a schematic cross section of the 1st unit 551 in the XVIIc line. FIG. 28(a) is the
FIG. 28 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit 551 along line XXVb-XXVb of (a); FIG.
(b) is the first unit 55 on line XXVIIIb-XXVIIIb of FIG. 25(a)
1 is a schematic cross-sectional view of FIG. In addition, in FIG. 26, a game ball flowing down the curved path WK1 is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 25 to 28, the main route SK2, the main route SK3 and the curved route WK1 are
The base plate 571 of the second path member 570 is concavely provided with an arcuate cross section toward the rear side.
A recessed portion 571h, a second recessed portion 571i, and a third recessed portion 571j, a first stepped portion 571k protruding stepwise from the inner wall on the main route SK2 toward the front side, and a second recessed portion 571k protruding stepwise from the inner wall on the main route SK3. and a stepped portion 571m.

The front plate 564 of the first path member 560 includes a first concave portion 571h, a second concave portion 571i and a third concave portion 571i.
A first convex portion 564b, a second convex portion 564c and a third
A projecting portion 564d is provided.

The facing dimension L11 (see FIG. 28(a)) between the second concave portion 571i and the second convex portion 564c is
While it is set to a value larger than the diameter of the game ball, it is set to a value smaller than the distance dimension L12 (see FIG. 28(a)) between the front plate 564 and the base plate 571 facing each other. This will
The first concave portion 571h, the second concave portion 571i and the third concave portion 571j, the first convex portion 564b, the second
The game ball thrown between the convex portion 564c and the third convex portion 564d facing each other is the first concave portion 571h,
By contacting the second recess 571i and the third recess 571j, the first protrusion 564b, the second protrusion 564c and the third protrusion 564d, the rolling (flowing down) speed of the game ball can be slowed down.

Also, the dimension between the first concave portion 571h and the first convex portion 564b and the dimension between the third concave portion 571j and the third convex portion 564d are equal to the dimension between the second concave portion 571i and the second convex portion 564c. It is set to be approximately the same distance as L11.

Furthermore, the projecting tip surfaces of the first projecting portion 564b, the second projecting portion 564c, and the third projecting portion 564d,
The distance dimension L13 (see FIG. 28(a)) between the front face of the base plate 571 excluding the first recessed portion 571h, the second recessed portion 571i and the third recessed portion 571j is set smaller than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the first concave portion 571h, the second concave portion 571i and the third concave portion 571j and the first
A game ball thrown between facing the convex portion 564b, the second convex portion 564c and the third convex portion 564d can collide with the first convex portion 564b, the second convex portion 564c and the third convex portion 564d.
As a result, the rolling (flowing down) speed of the game ball can be slowed down.

Also, in this case, the game ball that abuts on the first convex portion 564b, the second convex portion 564c and the third convex portion 564d flows down inside the first concave portion 571h, the second concave portion 571i and the third concave portion 571j. . Therefore, the game ball that flows down the first recessed portion 571h, the second recessed portion 571i and the third recessed portion 57
It can be guided in the recessed direction of 1j.

The stepped portion 571k protrudes forward from the inner wall of the main path SK2 on the back side. In addition, the stepped portion 5
71k is formed downstream in the main path SK2. The stepped portion 571k has an upstream end of the main path SK2 protruding from the front surface of the base plate 571 toward the front side, and a downstream end of the stepped portion 571k at the same position as the back surface of the curved path WK1. set. This will
A game ball flowing down the main path SK2 can be brought into contact with the stepped portion 571k and moved to the front side.

In addition, the stepped portion 571k is formed as an inclined surface that protrudes from the upstream side toward the downstream side toward the front side. As a result, the game ball flowing down the main path SK2 and coming into contact with the upstream end of the stepped portion 571k can be guided to the front side and flowed downstream.

Further, the stepped portion 571k has an upstream end portion that is located at the first convex portion 564 formed on the front plate 564.
b is formed on the upstream side of the main route SK2. As a result, the game ball guided to the front side in contact with the stepped portion 571k can be easily brought into contact with the first convex portion 564b.

The first recessed portion 571h is recessed in the base plate 571 forming the main path SK2, and is formed in an elliptical shape elongated in the horizontal direction (direction of arrows LR) when viewed from the front. Further, the first concave portion 571h is formed in the base plate 571 at a position protruded to the front side by the stepped portion 571k. The recess depth to the rear side at the center of the vertical direction of the first recess 571h is
It is set substantially the same as the height dimension L22 (see FIG. 27(b)) to the front side of k. As a result, the game ball that is thrown along the main path SK2 without rioting is allowed to flow into the first recess 571h without being displaced in the recess direction (back side (arrow B direction)) of the first recess 571h. be able to.

On the other hand, a game ball thrown on the main path SK2 in a violent state is brought into contact with the upstream end of the stepped portion 571k, guided to the front side of the main path SK2, and guided to the first convex of the front plate 564. It is brought into contact with the portion 564b. As a result, the game ball can be thrown to the inside of the first concave portion 571h while suppressing the game ball from rampaging.

Furthermore, the first recessed portion 571h has a height dimension Y8 ( Figure 25
(a)) is set to the radius of the game ball, and the concave bottom surface in the direction orthogonal to the rolling surface of the game ball on the downstream side of the main path SK2 (surface on the arrow U direction side of the fourth wall portion 573) Height dimension Y up to
9 (see FIG. 25(a)) is set higher than the radius of the game ball. As a result, the main route S
When the game ball flowing down K2 is thrown along the first concave portion 571h, the gravity direction upper side (arrow U
The rolling speed of the game ball can be reduced by applying resistance in the direction of lifting the game ball. As a result, the rolling speed of the game ball flowing into the curved path WK1 can be made sufficiently small, and the game ball can be easily made to flow down smoothly.

The radius X11 (see FIG. 27(b)) in the section of the first recessed portion 571h is set to a value larger than the radius of the game ball, and when the game ball is thrown inside the first recessed portion 571h, the A game ball can be brought into contact with the inner wall. As a result, it is possible to suppress the number of contact portions of the game ball contacting the first recess 571h from becoming two, thereby suppressing an increase in the resistance to rolling of the game ball due to an increase in the contact portions. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from stopping on the main path SK2.

A first protrusion 564b formed at a position facing the first recess 571h
is formed at a position separated from the upstream end of the main path SK2 in the throwing direction of the game ball (arrow R direction in FIG. 27(b)), and the value of the separation is set to a dimension smaller than the radius of the game ball. be done.
As a result, the game ball flowing down the main path SK2 is brought into contact with the first convex portion 564b, and the first concave portion 5
It makes it easier to throw the ball inside 71h.

The second recess 571i is recessed in the base plate 571 of the curved path WK1, and has an elliptical shape elongated in the direction of gravity (arrow UD direction) when viewed from the front. Also, the second concave portion 5
71i is set such that its center position in the vertical direction (the direction of arrows UD) in a front view is set at the intermediate position of curved route WK1. Further, the second concave portion 571i is formed so that the central position in the left-right direction (the direction of the arrows LR) in a front view is the central position in the direction perpendicular to the throwing direction of the curved path WK1.

The main path SK1, the curved path WK1, and the main path SK2 all have the same width dimension L18 (see FIG. 25(a)) perpendicular to the throwing direction of the game ball when viewed from the front. The width dimension L18 is set to approximately 1.1 times the diameter of the game ball.

In addition, the maximum width dimension in the lateral direction in the front view of the first recessed portion 571h, the second recessed portion 571i, and the third recessed portion 571j is set to approximately 1/2 of the width dimension L18 described above. As a result, the center of the game ball passing through each path (main path SK1, curved path WK1 and main path SK2) can pass through the front side of the first recess 571h, the second recess 571i and the third recess 571j. , the game ball can be easily thrown to the inside of the first recessed portion 571h, the second recessed portion 571i and the third recessed portion 571j.

The step portion 571m protrudes forward from the inner wall on the back side of the main path SK3. In addition, the stepped portion 5
71m is formed on the upstream side in the main route SK3. The stepped portion 571m is set at a position where the downstream end of the main path SK3 protrudes to the front side of the base plate 571,
The upstream end is set at the same position as the back surface of the curved path WK1. As a result, the main route S
After the game ball flowing down K3 is thrown to the downstream side of the stepped portion 571m, it is possible to prevent the game ball from flowing back (rebounding) to the upstream side beyond the stepped portion 571m.

The third recessed portion 571j is formed in the base plate 571 forming the inner wall of the main path SK3, and is formed in an elliptical shape elongated in the horizontal direction (directions of arrows LR) when viewed from the front. Further, the third recessed portion 571j is located at the position where the base plate 571 protrudes to the front side by the stepped portion 571m.
formed in The recess depth toward the rear side at the vertical center of the third recess 571j is set to be substantially the same as the height dimension L23 (see FIG. 27C) toward the front side of the stepped portion 571m. This makes it easier for the game ball thrown through the main path KR3 to flow out from the inside of the third recess 571j to the outside.

Furthermore, the end portion of the third recessed portion 571j on the downstream side of the main route SK3 is connected to the secondary route H
The first variable plate 583b that switches the path flowing down to K1 is arranged above the upstream end (the end in the direction of arrow R) of the main path SK3 in the direction of gravity (in the direction of arrow U). As a result, when the stop position of the first variable plate 583b shifts upward in the direction of gravity due to its displacement (the variable plate 583
b is arranged above the downstream end of the curved wall portion 565b), by throwing the game ball passing through the main path SK3 along the inner surface of the third recess 571j, the first variable plate 583b
You can throw the ball without getting caught. As a result, it is not necessary to dispose the first variable plate 583b downward in the portion where the first wall portion 565 and the first variable plate 583b are adjacent, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the vertical dimension of the first unit 551. .

In this case, the longitudinal direction of the third concave portion 571j in front view is the horizontal direction (arrow L
−R direction), and is spaced upward from the game ball flowing down the main path SK3. It is possible to apply resistance in the lifting direction to the side. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball thrown from the first wall portion 565 to the first variable plate 583b from being caught on the first variable plate 583b.

Furthermore, the first unit 551 is positioned horizontally on one side of the game board 13 when viewed from the front (
A main route SK2 for throwing game balls in the direction of arrow R), a main route SK3 for throwing game balls thrown from the main route SK2 to the other side of the horizontal direction opposite to the guiding direction of the main route SK2,
A curved path WK1 that connects one side of the main path SK2 and the main path SK3 is provided, and the curved path WK1 is a guide means (second Since the two convex portions 564c and the second concave portions 571i) are provided on the inner wall on the front side and the back side with respect to the game board, the game ball passing through the curved path WK1 direction).

Therefore, compared to the case where the ball-throwing path of the game ball passing through the curved path WK1 is formed on the same plane in the front-rear direction in a front view, the game ball accelerated by rolling on the main path SK2 (first path) flows down. can slow down. Therefore, the game ball that has collided with the inner wall of the curved path WK1 returns to the main path SK2, or the ball-throwing direction of the main path SK2 inside the curved path WK1 (horizontal direction in front view ( Swaying (shake) in the direction of arrows LR) can be suppressed. As a result, the player's line of sight can follow the game ball passing through the curved path WK1 in a certain direction. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball thrown to the curved path WK1.

In addition, since it is possible to suppress the game ball from swaying (shaking) in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction when viewed from the front) with respect to the game board 13 when viewed from the front, the curved path WK1 connecting the main paths SK2 and SK3 can be reduced accordingly. It is no longer necessary to lengthen the path to suppress the swinging of the game ball,
The curved path WK1 can be shortened. As a result, the first unit 551 can be accommodated within a predetermined area with respect to the game board 13, and the first unit 551 with respect to the game board 13
can be secured.

Furthermore, the width of the first recess 571h increases toward the upstream side of the main route SK2 in a direction perpendicular to the flow direction of the main route SK2 (arrow UD direction). Thereby, the game ball flowing down the main path SK2 can be easily received in the first concave portion 571h. Further, since the width of the first recessed portion 571h is set smaller toward the downstream side of the main path SK2, the game ball received in the first recessed portion 571h is easily released from the same position. That is, the first concave portion 5
71h can easily receive a game ball on the upstream side of the main path SK2, and make it easy to release the game ball from the same position on the downstream side of the main path SK2. As a result, it is possible to easily throw the game ball to the second concave portion 571i of the curved path WK1 communicating with the downstream side of the main path SK2.

In this case, the recessed end portion of the first recessed portion 571h in the downstream direction (arrow R direction) of the main path SK2 is the rolling surface of the main path SK2 (fourth
It is formed at a position above the upper surface of the wall portion 573). Therefore, it is possible to make the game ball exiting the first recess 571h less susceptible to the rolling surface of the main path SK2. As a result, the game ball that escaped from the first recessed portion 571h can be easily thrown to the second recessed portion 571i of the curved path WK1.

Further, the main path SK2 extends from the fourth opening 571d side toward the curved wall portion 565b side (that is, from the left side in the front view (the direction of the arrow L) to the right side in the front view (the side of the arrow R)). A space is formed so as to be inclined toward the front plate 564 (front side (arrow F direction side)). Also, the main route S
K2 is formed such that its rolling surface (the upper surface of the fourth wall portion 573 in the direction of gravity) is inclined downward toward the front side. As a result, the game ball flowing down the main path SK2 can be easily rolled on the front plate 564 side, and the game ball can be easily brought into contact with the first convex portion 564b formed on the front plate 564. As a result, the rolling speed of the game ball can be easily slowed down by the first convex portion 564b, and the reaction force of the game ball flowing down the main path SK2 colliding with the curved wall portion 565b causes the main path SK2 to roll.
backflow can be suppressed. As a result, the game ball can be stably flowed down at the point where the throwing direction of the game ball is changed.

The second recess 571i has its upper end (the end in the direction of the arrow U) linearly drawn along the rolling trajectory of the center of the game ball rolling on the main path SK2 (fourth wall portion 573). It is formed at a position in contact with the imaginary line IL3 (see FIG. 25(a)). As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the second concave portion 571i to receive the game ball that is thrown through the main path SK2 at a relatively high speed and flows into the curved path WK1.

A second concave portion 571i and a second convex portion 564c are formed at a change location (curved path WK1) of the throwing direction of the game ball. As described above, the first convex portion 564b, the second convex portion 564c and the third convex portion 564c
The projecting tip surface of the convex portion 564d, the first concave portion 571h, the second concave portion 571i, and the third concave portion 571
Since the distance dimension L13 (see FIG. 28(a)) between the front face of the base plate 571 excluding j is set smaller than the diameter of the game ball, the distance between the second concave portion 571i and the second convex portion 564c A game ball flowing down can be brought into contact with the second convex portion 564c and pushed into the second concave portion 571i. Therefore, it flows into the main path SK3 (the second concave portion 571i and the second convex portion 564c
The game ball that escapes from between can be made to flow down along the arc of the inner surface of the second recess 571i.

Here, the game ball thrown from the main path SK2 to the curved path WK1 tends to flow down at a position closer to the rolling direction of the game ball on the main path SK2. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the inside of the second recess 571i contacts the inner surface of the area on the right side (arrow R direction side) of the second recess 571i when viewed from the front and flows down. Therefore, the throwing direction of the game ball flowing into the main path SK3 can be easily directed to the downstream direction of the main path SK3 (from the curved wall portion 565b side to the concave portion 571g (see FIG. 21) side). As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from colliding with the curved wall portion 565b at the location where the game ball throwing direction is changed and the flow of the game ball temporarily stopping (see FIG. 28).

Furthermore, the throwing direction of the game ball thrown from the curved path WK1 to the main path SK3 is the main path SK
3, it is possible to reduce the force with which the game ball collides with the curved wall portion 565b. As a result, damage to the curved wall portion 565b due to repeated collisions of game balls with the curved wall portion 565b can be suppressed.

Further, the first convex portion 564b is formed on the first path member 560 arranged on the front side,
The recess 571h is formed in the second path member 570 arranged on the back side.

Here, a recess (the second path member 570
(corresponding to the first recess 571h) is formed, the first path member 56
It is necessary to increase the plate thickness of 0. Therefore, as the plate thickness of the first path member 560 increases, the permeability of the first path member 560 deteriorates, making it difficult for the player to visually recognize game balls passing through the first unit 551 .

Further, if a recessed portion is formed on the rear surface of the bulging portion that partially bulges on the front side of the first path member 560, the game board 13 will bulge to the front side of the first path member 560 by the amount of the bulging portion. It is necessary to increase the gap between the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) disposed on the front side of the . Therefore, the distance of the first path member 560 from the glass unit 16 makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize the game ball passing through the inside of the first path member 560 .

On the other hand, the first protrusion 564b is formed in the first path member 560 arranged on the front side, and the first recess 571h is formed in the second path member 570 arranged on the back side. , the thickness of the first path member 560 disposed on the front side can be reduced. In addition, since no part of the first path member 560 protrudes toward the front side, the first path member 560 can be arranged closer to the glass unit 16 . As a result, the game ball passing through the inside of the first path member 560 can be easily visually recognized by the player.

The second convex portion 564c is positioned below the main path SK2 (upper surface of the fourth wall portion 573) in the direction of gravity (in the direction of arrow D), and descends in substantially the same direction as the rolling direction of the main path SK2 when viewed from the front. Formed at an angle. As a result, the game ball flowing down between the opposing second convex portion 564c and the second concave portion 571i is guided to the area on the right side (arrow R direction side) of the second concave portion 571i in front view by the inclination of the second convex portion 564c. can do. As described above, the second recessed portion 571i is formed with a curved recessed surface. The ball can be thrown in the downstream direction of the main path SK3 (from the side of the curved wall portion 565b to the side of the concave portion 571g (see FIG. 21)). As a result, the curved path WK
The inflow of game balls from 1 to the main route SK3 can be made smooth.

In addition, the second concave portion 571i has an end portion on the lower side (arrow D direction side) in a front view, which is the main path S.
A virtual line IL4 (Fig. 25
(a)) is formed at a position in contact with. Thereby, the height of the center of the game ball ejected from the downstream end of the second recess 571i can be set on the imaginary line IL4. As described above, in the present embodiment, the game ball discharged from the second recessed portion 571i is thrown in the downstream direction of the main path SK3 (from the curved wall portion 565b side to the recessed portion 571g (see FIG. 21) side). Therefore, the game ball ejected from the second recessed portion 571i is either the main path SK3 or the curved path WK
A game ball sent to the main path SK3 in contact with the inner surface of 1 can be prevented from colliding with the inner wall of the curved path WK1 and staying inside those paths.

The downstream direction of the game ball flowing into the main path SK3 can be directed in the throwing direction of the main path SK3 at a position near the rolling surface of the main path SK3. As a result, from the curved route WK1 to the main route S
It is possible to suppress the game ball flowing into K3 from being thrown in a direction orthogonal to the throwing direction of the game ball on the curved path WK1. As a result, the game ball sent to the main path SK3 is
Collision with the inner wall of K1 and stagnation can be suppressed.

<Arranging the first member to which a high game value is imparted on the front side>
Next, the configuration of the second unit 552 will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 to 31. FIG. 29(a) is a front view of the second unit 552, and FIG. 29(b) is a front view of the second unit 55. FIG.
2 is a rear view of FIG. FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective front view of the second unit 552, and FIG.
FIG. 12 is an exploded perspective rear view of the second unit 552;

As shown in FIGS. 29 to 31, the second unit 552 includes a fourth path member 610 disposed on the first unit 551 side (front side (arrow F direction side)), and the fourth path member 610. A game ball throwing path is formed between the fifth path member 620 arranged on the back side (arrow B direction side) and the fifth path member 620 arranged on the back side of the fifth path member 620 and facing the fifth path member 620. and a decorative member 650 arranged on the side surface of the second unit 552 .

The fourth path member 610 is connected to the first unit 551 via the center frame 86 described above.
is attached to the back side (arrow B direction side) of the . The fourth path member 610 includes a mounting plate 611 formed in a vertically long rectangular plate shape when viewed from the front, and an end portion of the mounting plate 611 standing on the first unit 551 side (front side (arrow F direction side)). a side wall portion 612 provided therein;

The mounting plate 611 includes an insertion portion 617 which is recessed in a circular shape on the side of the first unit 551 (front side (direction of arrow F)) and has a through hole formed in the bottom surface of the recess, and a fifth path member 620 . side(
A path-side fastening portion 618 and a decoration-side fastening portion 619 , which protrude in a circular shape on the back side (arrow B direction side) and have holes for screws to be screwed in the projecting tip surface, and a mounting plate 611 . and a second insertion portion 614 opened outside the opening 613 .

The insertion portion 617 is a portion through which the tip of a screw for fastening the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 is inserted, and is formed at a plurality of locations (three locations in this embodiment) on the mounting plate 611 .

The path-side fastening portion 618 is a portion into which a screw inserted through an insertion hole 632 of the sixth path member 630 described later is screwed, and is formed at a position facing the insertion hole 632 . As a result, the sixth
A path member 630 can be fastened to the fourth path member 610 .

The decoration-side fastening portion 619 is a portion into which a screw inserted through a fastening hole 652 formed in the decoration member 650 described later is screwed, and is formed at a position facing the fastening hole 652 . Thereby, the decorative member 650 can be fastened to the fourth path member 610 .

The opening 613 is formed at a position facing the first solenoid 583 a and the second solenoid 584 a arranged in the first unit 551 . Accordingly, when the fourth path member 610 is arranged on the rear surface of the first unit 551, the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a can be arranged inside the opening 613. FIG. Therefore, when the fourth path member 610 is arranged on the back surface of the first unit 551, the fourth path member 610 can be prevented from becoming large in the front-rear direction, and the circumference of the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a can be prevented. fourth
It can be surrounded by a path member 610 .

The first communication path 615 and the second communication path 616 are formed in a U shape with an open upper side (arrow U direction side) when viewed from the front, and extend in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). . Also,
The first communicating path 615 and the second communicating path 616 have their front end portions abutted against the rear side of the second rolling portion 577 and the third rolling portion 578 of the first unit 551, The ends are brought into contact with the front sides of the ends of the first inlet 625 and the second inlet 626 of the fifth path member 620, which will be described later. Further, the first communication path 615 and the second communication path 616 are connected from the first unit 551 side to the fifth
It is inclined downward toward the path member 620 . As a result, the game ball thrown from the second rolling portion 577 and the third rolling portion 578 of the first unit 551 to the first communication path 615 and the second communication path 616 is transferred to the first communication path 615 and the second The communication path 616 can be rolled to flow into the first inlet 625 and the second inlet 626 of the fifth path member 620 .

The second insertion portion 614 is a hole through which a screw to be screwed into the screw hole 86b4 of the projecting portion 86b is inserted when fastening the fourth path member 610 to the projecting portion 86b of the center frame 86. It is formed at a position corresponding to the screw hole 86b4 (see FIG. 35) formed in 86b. Thereby, the fourth path member 610 can be arranged on the rear surface of the projecting portion 86 b of the center frame 86 .

The side wall portion 612 is arranged on the side surface of the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a arranged on the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the first unit 551 when the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 are fastened together. It is a plate member that covers the side surface of the mounting plate 611 and is erected from the entire end portion of the mounting plate 611 toward the first unit 551 (front side (arrow F direction side)). The vertical length of the side wall portion 612 toward the front side (first unit 551 side) is set to a length that abuts on the projecting portion 86 b of the center frame 86 . As a result, the side wall portion 612 is arranged between the first unit 551 and the second unit 552, so formation of a gap between the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the insertion of unauthorized objects between the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 .

The fifth path member 620 includes a plate member 621 formed of a substantially rectangular plate in front view, a first inlet 625 and a second inlet 626 opened in the plate member 621, and a periphery of the second inlet 626. from below the second inlet 626 to the sixth path member 630 side (back side (arrow B direction side))
a second standing wall 623 erected on the side of the first inflow port 625 and extending downward from the first inflow port 625 toward the sixth path member 630; From the plate member 621 to the sixth
and a fastened portion 627 protruding toward the path member 630 .

The plate member 621 is formed to have an outer shape smaller than the outer shape of the fourth path member 610 when viewed from the front, and is disposed on the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the fourth path member 610 . Further, the plate member 621 has a central opening 622 that opens in the center when viewed from the front. The central opening 622 is formed to be larger than the external shape of the second solenoid 584a in a rear view, and is formed at a position corresponding to the second solenoid 584a. As a result, the plate member 621 (
When the fifth path member 620) is arranged on the back side of the fourth path member 610, the fourth path member 61
A second solenoid 584 a that passes through the inner side of the opening 613 at No. 0 can be placed inside the central opening 622 .

The first inlet 625 and the second inlet 626 are the first inlets of the fourth path member 610 as described above.
It is a portion (opening for inflow) that receives the game ball interlocking the communication path 615 and the second communication path 616 between the opposing fifth path member 620 and the sixth path member 630 .

The to-be-fastened part 627 is a part into which the tip of a screw inserted through a fastening hole 633 formed in the sixth path member 630 described below is screwed, and is formed at a position corresponding to the fastening hole 633 . Thereby, the fifth path member 620 and the sixth path member 630 are fastened. Moreover, the to-be-fastened part 62
7 to the sixth path member 630 side is set larger than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, a gap is formed between the fifth path member 620 and the sixth path member 630 to allow the game ball to flow down.

The first standing wall 624 extends from the first inlet 625 to the fifth path member 620 and the sixth path member 63 .
It is a wall that guides the game ball that flows into the gap between 0 and is extended downward and connected to the second erected wall 623 . The second upright wall 623 is a wall that guides the game ball that has flowed into the fifth path member 620 from the second inlet, and extends vertically from the plate member 621 . In addition,
The ball throwing path formed by the first erected wall 624 and the second erected wall 623 will be described later.

The sixth path member 630 includes a base plate 631 formed of a substantially rectangular plate when viewed from the front, and a second central opening 634 opened in the base plate 631 at a position facing the central opening 622 of the fifth path member 620 . and an insertion hole 6 formed through the periphery of the second central opening 634 of the base plate 631
32 and fastening holes 633 .

The second central opening 634 is formed to have substantially the same size as the central opening 622 of the fifth path member 620 in front view, and when the fifth path member 620 and the sixth path member 630 are combined, It communicates with the central opening 622 of the fifth path member 620 . Thereby, when the second unit 552 is arranged on the rear side of the first unit 551 , the first solenoid 583 a of the first unit 551 can be arranged inside the second central opening 634 .

Next, referring to FIG. 32, the ball throwing path formed by the fifth path member 620 will be described. 32 is a cross-sectional view of the second unit 552 taken along line XXXII-XXXII in FIG. 29. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 32 , the second unit 552 includes the first standing wall 624 of the fifth path member 620
and a sub-path HK4 formed surrounded by the second standing wall 623.
K5.

After extending downward from the first inlet 625, the sub-path HK4 is bent toward the sub-path HK5, which will be described later, and communicates with the sub-path HK5. Further, the secondary path HK4 is provided with a detection device SE7 for detecting passage of a game ball in a downwardly extending portion. Thereby, it can be detected that the game ball has passed through the sub-path HK4. Also, when the detection device SE7 detects the passage of the game ball,
A predetermined game value is given to the player (in this embodiment, prize balls for game balls).

In the present embodiment, the number of game balls awarded to the player as the game balls pass through the detection device SE7 (for example, three) is determined by the detection device SE3 provided in the first unit 551. ~
The number of game balls awarded to the player as the game balls pass through SE6 (for example, 15)
less than That is, the game value given to the player as the game ball passes through the detection device SE7 is given to the player as the game ball passes through the detection devices SE3 to SE6 arranged in the first unit 551. It is set higher than the game value that is given. This makes it easier to draw attention to the game ball passing through the first unit 551 . As a result, it is possible to make the game more interesting to the player.

The secondary path HK5 extends downward from the second inlet 626 and extends downward from the second unit 552.
is communicated with the recovery path of the pachinko machine 10 below. Therefore, the game balls flowing down the sub-path HK5 are collected without giving game values to the player. Also, the game ball that has flowed down the subpath HK4 and has been detected by the detection device SE7 is thrown to the subpath HK5 and collected by the pachinko machine 10 .

In addition, the special winning device 550 includes a first unit 551 which is formed of a light-permeable material and is arranged on the front side of the game area, and a second unit which is arranged on the back side of the first unit 551. 552, the first unit 551 is a first receiving portion 561 capable of entering a game ball
The second unit 552 includes a second receiving portion 562 and a third receiving portion 5 that can enter the game ball
63, the game ball entering the first receiving part 561 has a higher game value for the player than the game ball entering the second receiving part 562 and the third receiving part 563 (payout of the game ball). is given.

Therefore, the game ball throwing paths of the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 are complicatedly arranged (for example, the ball throwing path of the first unit 551 and the ball throwing path of the second unit 552 are arranged in the front-rear direction when viewed from the front). ), when the game balls flow down to the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 at the same timing, the player can easily watch the game balls flowing down the first unit 551 . Therefore, the first receiving unit 5 with high game value
It is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball flowing down the first unit 551 provided with 61 . As a result, it is possible for the player to visually recognize a game ball passing through a path that gives the player a high game value, so that the player's interest can be easily improved.

In addition, the inflow port (first receiving portion 561) of the ball throwing path for throwing the game ball to the first unit 551
Since the inflow ports (the second receiving portion 562 and the third receiving portion 563) of the ball-throwing path for throwing the game ball to the second unit 552 are formed at adjacent positions, the first unit to which a high game value is imparted It is possible to make it difficult for the player to judge whether the game ball will flow into the unit 551 or flow into the second unit 552 to which a low game value is given until the game ball flows. As a result, it is possible to easily keep the player interested until just before the game balls flow into the special winning device 550.例文帳に追加

Next, with reference to FIGS. 33 to 37, the special winning device 550 to the center frame 86
will be described. FIG. 33(a) is a front view of the center frame 86,
33(b) is a side view of the center frame 86. FIG. 34(a) is a perspective front view of the center frame 86, and FIG. 34(b) is a perspective rear view of the center frame 86. FIG. 35 is an exploded perspective rear view of the center frame 86. FIG. XX in FIG.
FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the center frame 86 taken along line XVI-XXXVI; FIG. 37(a) shows
FIG. 37B is a schematic exploded sectional view of the game board 13. FIG.
37(a) and 37(b) correspond to the cross section of FIG.

<Fixing means for biasing the first member toward the base member>
As shown in FIGS. 33 to 37, the special prize winning device 550 includes a first unit 551 that can be removed on the front side of the center frame 86 and a removable first unit 551 that can be removed on the back side of the center frame 86 with the center frame 86 interposed therebetween. and a possible second unit.

The first unit 551 is configured such that the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a disposed on the rear side of the first unit 551 are inserted into the opening 86b1 of the center frame 86, and the front side of the projecting portion 86b is inserted. is placed in In addition, the first unit 551 includes a columnar body 551a projecting in a columnar shape toward the second unit 552 side.

The columnar body 551 a is the insertion portion 61 formed in the fourth path member 610 of the second unit 552 .
7 and has a hole at its tip into which a screw inserted through the insertion portion 617 is screwed.

The first unit 551 is fixed to the center frame 86 by screws that are inserted through the insertion portion 617 and the second insertion portion 614 formed in the fourth path member 610 of the second unit 552 . More specifically, the first unit 551 is arranged with the projecting portion 86b of the center frame 86 interposed between it and the fourth path member 610 arranged on the rear side (the arrow B direction side). Further, the first unit 551 is fastened to the second unit 552 by screwing a screw inserted from the insertion portion 617 of the fourth path member 610 into the columnar body 551a.

Furthermore, in a state where the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 are fastened, the screw inserted through the second insertion portion 614 formed in the second unit 552 is inserted into the screw hole 86b4 ( 35), the projecting portion 86b and the fourth path member 610 can be fastened. As described above, the fourth path member 610 and the first unit 551 are fastened and fixed.
is fastened to the projecting portion 86b.

Further, as shown in FIG. 37, the opening dimension Y1 in the vertical direction of the first opening 60a of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 37(b)) corresponds to the vertical dimension of the first unit 551 (second path member 570). It is set slightly smaller than Y2 (see FIG. 37(b)). Also, the first unit 55
The distance dimension Y4 (see FIG. 37(b)) from the contact surface of the base plate 60 of No. 1 to the contact surface of the second unit 552 with the base plate 60 is the distance between the first unit 551 and the second unit. 552
is set to be slightly smaller than the thickness dimension Y3 of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 37(b)).

Accordingly, when the first unit 551, the second unit and 552 are fastened together, the first unit 551 can be biased toward the base plate 60 (back side). Therefore, the base plate 6
0 and the first unit 551 can be prevented from being formed. Therefore, it is not necessary to fasten the first unit 551 from the front side of the base plate 60 with screws.
Since no screw fastening allowance is required in front of the first unit 551, the area on the front side of the first unit 551 can be used as a throwing space for game balls. As a result, the first
A throwing space for a game ball formed in the unit 551 can be secured.

In addition, the fastening portion (columnar body 551a) between the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 is
Since the first unit 551 is protrudingly formed on the back side, compared to the case where the fastening portion is formed on the front side of the base plate 60, it is possible to secure a throwing space for the game balls formed in the first unit 551. can.

Moreover, since the second unit 552 can be biased toward the base plate 60 (front side), formation of a gap between the second unit 552 and the base plate 60 can be suppressed. Therefore,
It is possible to prevent the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a of the first unit 551 from being tampered with by an unauthorized object such as a wire or piano wire inserted between the second unit 552 and the base plate 60 facing each other.

Further, since the first unit 551 is arranged on the base plate 60 by screws that are inserted from the rear side of the base plate 60, the front side of the first unit 551 has a fastening margin with the base plate 60 (the screw is inserted). It is no longer necessary to form an extension portion in which an opening is formed. As a result, the entire area of the outer shape of the first unit 551 in a front view can be used as a throwing path, and the throwing path of the first unit 551 can be enlarged.

In addition, since the fastening portion between the base plate 60 and the first unit 551 is located on the back side of the base plate 60, the fastening portion between the base plate 60 and the first unit 551 may be dislodged due to fraud from the front side of the game board 13. can be suppressed. As a result, fraudulent use of the first unit 551 can be suppressed. Furthermore, since the fastening portion between the base plate 60 and the first unit 551 is on the back side of the base plate 60, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the head of the screw. As a result, the first
When the player recognizes the configuration for fixing the unit 551 to the base plate 60,
It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest of the player.

In addition, the first unit 551 includes fixing means (screws) fastened from the back side of the base plate 60.
As a result, it is disposed on the base plate 60 in a state of being biased toward the rear side with respect to the base plate 60,
Due to the biasing force acting on the first unit 551 toward the rear side, the first unit 551 and the base plate 60 can be arranged in a state of being in close contact with each other.

Further, since the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 are arranged in the center frame 86 in a state in which ball throwing paths capable of throwing game balls are formed in each of the first unit 551 and the second unit 552, the first unit 552
51 and the ball throwing path of the second unit 552 can be prevented from being shifted when the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 are assembled. As a result, the game balls flowing down inside the first unit 551 and the second unit 552
It is possible to suppress stopping on the second throwing path.

Also, the first unit 551 has a rolling surface (second rolling portion 577 and third rolling portion 578 ) for causing the game ball thrown to the first unit 551 to flow into the second unit 552 .
Therefore, each of the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 is the center frame 8
6 projecting portion 86b, an error occurs in the assembly of the first unit 551 to the center frame 86, and a game ball is smoothly thrown from the first unit 551 to the second unit 552. I was afraid I would lose my mind.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the first unit 551 is the second unit 5 as described above.
52, the error at the time of fastening the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 can be minimized (where error occurs at the time of fastening). As a result, the game ball can be smoothly thrown from the first unit 551 to the second unit 552 .

The fifth and sixth path members 620 and 630 fastened to the fourth path member 610 are arranged at positions overlapping at least a part of the insertion portion 617 and the second insertion portion 614 of the fourth path member 610 in a rear view. . Thereby, the first unit 551 can be removed from the center frame 86 only after removing the fifth and sixth path members 620 and 630 fastened to the fourth path member 610 . As a result, the first unit 55 forming the main paths SK1 to SK6
1 is removed from the center frame 86 and the main routes SK1 to SK6 are tampered with.

Furthermore, the projecting portion 86b has an erecting portion 86b5 erected (folded back) on the end portion toward the second unit 552 (see FIG. 33(b)). As a result, in a state where the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 are arranged on the center frame 86 with the projecting portion 86b of the center frame 86 interposed therebetween, the standing portion 86b5 of the first unit 551 It surrounds the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a arranged on the rear side.

Therefore, in a state where the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 are arranged on the center frame 86, it is possible to prevent an illegal object such as a wire or piano wire from being inserted between the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 facing each other. can be suppressed. As a result, tampering with the first solenoid 583 a and the second solenoid 584 a of the first unit 551 while the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 are arranged on the center frame 86 can be suppressed.

A first solenoid 583a is provided between the first unit 551 and the second unit 552.
And a part of the front side of the second solenoid 584a is disposed, and a standing portion 86b5 is interposed. Therefore, the first solenoid 583a can be
and part of the front side of the second solenoid 584a. Therefore, the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 5 are partially housed between the first unit 551 and the second unit 552, and the front side portions of the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a are accommodated between the first unit 551 and the second unit 552.
84a can be suppressed from protruding to the rear side. As a result, the rear side of the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a can be easily surrounded by the second unit 552, preventing the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a from being tampered with from the rear side. 2 unit 552 can suppress.

Furthermore, between the first unit 551 and the second unit 552, a first solenoid 583
A and a part of the front side of the second solenoid 584a are arranged, so that the game ball flowing down the second unit 552 is hidden by the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the game ball. can be done. As a result, even when the flow line of the game ball flowing down the first unit 551 and the flow line of the game ball flowing down the second unit 552 overlap in a front view, the game ball flowing down the first unit 551 can be moved. It can be made easy for the player to visually recognize. As a result, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the game ball flowing down the first unit 551, which provides the player with a game value higher than the game value given to the player by the game ball flowing down the second unit 552. Since it can be done, it is possible to easily give interest to the player.

In addition, when the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 are arranged on the center frame 86 , the decorative member 650 is arranged to cover the inner side surface of the base frame 86 a of the center frame 86 . As a result, it is possible to prevent an illegal object such as a wire or piano wire from being inserted into the special winning device 550 through (inserted through) the opening of the base frame 86 a of the center frame 86 .

As shown in FIGS. 36 and 37, the first solenoid 58 arranged in the first unit 551
3 a is inserted inside the central opening 622 and the second central opening 634 formed in the fourth path member 610 and the fifth path member 620 of the second unit 552 . This will
It is possible to suppress the second unit 552 from bulging to the rear side (arrow B direction side), and
It is possible to prevent unauthorized objects such as wires and piano wires from accessing the solenoid 583a.

In addition, since the load of the first solenoid 583a can be supported by the second unit 552, the second path member 570 of the first unit 551 in which the first solenoid 583a is arranged
bending can be suppressed. As a result, passage of game balls through the first unit 551 can be stabilized.

Furthermore, as described above, the opening 8 of the projecting portion 86b formed in the center frame 86
Since the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a are surrounded by 6b1, the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a with relatively large (heavy) loads are supported by the opening 86b1 (projection 86b). can do. As a result, it is possible to prevent the protruding portion 86b from bending due to the load of the special winning device 550. FIG.

Therefore, bending (deflection) of the center frame 86 arranged on the base plate 60 can be suppressed.
positional deviation can be suppressed. As a result, game balls can be smoothly flowed from the game area of the game board 13 to the first unit 551 (special winning device 550).

In addition, the second rolling portion 57 for throwing the game ball from the first unit 551 to the second unit 552
7 and the third rolling portion 578 are formed outside the opening 86b1 of the projecting portion 86b. As a result, the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 5 arranged inside the opening 86b1
By the electromagnetic force generated by the driving of 84a, from the first unit 551 to the second unit 552
It is possible to suppress the hindrance of the rolling of the game ball to be thrown. In other words, the projecting portion 86b can suppress the electromagnetic force generated by driving the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a from acting on the outside of the projecting portion 86b. As a result, the throwing of game balls from the first unit 551 to the second unit 552 can be stabilized.

As described above, the first solenoid 583a is arranged with its rear side inserted into the central opening 622 and the second central opening 634 of the second unit 552 . As a result, the wires of the detection devices SE3 to SE6 and the first solenoid 583a of the first unit 551 can be arranged by being inserted through the central opening 622 and the second central opening 634. As shown in FIG. In addition, since these wirings can be arranged along the first solenoid 583a, it is possible to prevent the wirings from becoming entangled.

Furthermore, since the load of the first solenoid 583a can be supported by the central opening 622 and the second central opening 634 of the second unit 552, the protruding portion 86b on which the first unit 551 is arranged does not bend. can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the center frame 86 arranged on the base plate 60 from bending (deflecting), thereby preventing the first unit 551 arranged on the center frame 86 from being displaced with respect to the base plate 60 . can be suppressed. As a result, game balls can be smoothly flowed from the game area of the game board 13 to the first unit 551 (special winning device 550).

<Displacement member for arranging the fixing member of the substrate unit on the back member>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 38 to 42, the connection structure of the rear case 300 and the board unit 110 will be described in detail. First, referring to FIGS. 38 and 39, rear case 30
0 structure will be described.

38(a) is a front view of the rear case 300, and FIG. 38(b) is a front view of the rear case 30. FIG.
0 is a rear view. FIG. 39(a) is an exploded perspective front view of the rear case 300, and FIG.
(b) is an exploded perspective rear view of the rear case 300. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, the rear case 300 includes an engaging member 310 disposed on the front side of the bottom wall portion 301 (box-shaped open side (arrow F direction side)), and a rear side. case 300
The board box 100 (main controller 110
), and a fixing member 320 for fixing .

In addition, the rear case 300 has projecting portions 30 projecting from the bottom wall portion 301 from two locations on the front side.
1b, a first opening 301c that opens at a position facing the fixing member 320, and the engaging member 31
and a second opening 301d that opens at a position facing 0.

The projecting portion 301b is a shaft for holding the engaging member 310 in a slidable state,
It is inserted inside a sliding groove 314 that opens to an engaging member 310, which will be described later. Moreover, the projecting portion 30
1b is annularly protruding, and a screw can be screwed to the inner side of the annular shape. Therefore, after inserting the protruding portion 301b into the sliding groove 314, a screw having a head portion larger in diameter than the groove width of the sliding groove 314 is screwed into the protruding portion 301b, whereby the engaging member 310 to rear case 3
00.

The first opening 301c is an opening for inserting a portion of the fixing member 320 (the engaging portion with the engaging member 310) described later, and is an engaging portion of the fixing member 320 (the engaged portion 332 described later). )
is formed into a shape that allows the insertion of the As a result, the fixing member 320 arranged on the rear side of the rear case 300 (bottom wall portion 301) is engaged with the engaging member 310 arranged on the front side of the rear case 300 (bottom wall portion 301). be able to.

The first opening 301c has a protruding wall 301c1 protruding rearward at the end opposite to the engagement side (arrow L direction) between the fixing member 320 and the engaging member 310 (arrow R direction). Prepare. The protruding wall 301c1 is formed in a hook shape in which the protruding tip on the back side is bent by approximately 90 degrees, and the bending direction is set in the direction away from the first opening 301c (direction of arrow R).

The projecting wall 301c1 has its tip inserted into a locking portion 331 of the fixing member 320, which will be described later. Thereby, the opposite side (arrow R direction side) of the engaging portion between the fixing member 320 and the engaging member 310 can be locked. As a result, the fixing members 320 arranged on the rear case 300 are moved left and right (
arrows LR direction), and suppresses the concentration of force on the engagement portion between the fixing member 320 and the engaging member 310, thereby separating the fixing member 320 and the engaging member. 310
damage can be suppressed. A detailed description of the arrangement of the fixing member 320 in the first opening 301c will be given later.

The second opening 301d is an opening for inserting a part of the engaging member 310 (manipulator 315), which will be described later, on the back side of the rear case 300, thereby allowing the engaging member 310 to move toward the back side of the rear case. can be operated from Therefore, as described above, after the fixing member 320 is arranged on the rear surface of the rear case 300, the engaging member 310 is operated from the rear surface side of the rear case 300 to move the fixing member 320 and the engaging member to the rear case 300 ( It can be engaged on the front side of the bottom wall 301).

The engaging member 310 has a crank-like outer shape when viewed from the front.
It is composed of a third piece 313 that connects the 12 ends to each other in a direction orthogonal to the extending direction of the first piece 311 and the second piece 312 .

The two sliding grooves 314 described above are formed one each on the first piece 311 and the second piece 312, and are long in the extending direction (arrow LR direction) of the first piece 311 and the second piece 312. It is opened in the shape of an elongated hole. As a result, the engaging member 310 is slidable in the extension direction of the first piece 311 and the second piece 312 (arrow LR direction).

The first piece 311 has an end portion on one side (arrow R direction side) opposite to the other side (arrow L direction side) to which the third piece 313 is connected. An engaging portion 316 protrudes outward on both sides in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction), which is a direction substantially perpendicular to the extending direction of the first piece 311, and the two engaging portions 316. A concave portion 317 recessed in the extending direction (arrow LR direction) of the first piece 311 from a substantially intermediate position toward the bottom wall portion 301 side of the back case 300 (back side (arrow B direction side)). and a protruding operator 315 .

The engaging portion 316 has a substantially triangular outer shape when viewed from the front, and one side (arrow R direction side)
is formed as an inclined surface that protrudes outward from the first piece 311 as it goes from one end to the other side (arrow L direction side), while the other outer surface of the first piece 311 Extension direction (arrow L-R
direction), which extends in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction).

The concave portion 317 is formed by notching the first piece 311 in the thickness direction, and the first piece 311
is recessed toward the other side (arrow L direction side) from one side (arrow R direction side) end. Therefore,
One side of the first piece 311 is divided into two. Thereby, the rigidity of one side of the first piece 311 can be made lower than that of the other side. As a result, one side of the first piece 311 can be easily elastically deformed, and the engaging member 310 can be easily engaged with the fixing member 320 . A detailed description of the engagement between the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 will be given later.

The manipulator 315 is a manipulating part for manipulating the engaging member 310 , is formed at the other end of the first piece 311 , and has a projecting dimension larger than the plate thickness of the bottom wall portion 301 of the back case 300 . is set to a value, and protrudes to the rear side of the rear case 300 at least by a dimension that can be grasped by an operator's fingers. As a result, the manipulator 315 can be projected from the second opening 301d of the bottom wall 301, and the projecting portion (the tip of the manipulator 315) can be grasped and operated.

The second piece 312 has a fastening hole 318 formed in a circular recess on the front side. The fastening hole 318 is
This is a portion into which a screw inserted through a hole (see FIG. 89) that penetrates a back base 720 of the rotation unit 700, which will be described later, is screwed. As a result, the inside of the rear case 300 (bottom wall portion 301
After disposing the rotating unit 700 on the front side of the rotating unit 700, the engaging member 310 disposed on the back side of the rotating unit 700 is operated to move the engaging member 310 to a specified position (engagement with a fixing member 320 described later). The engaging member 31 can be operated to the engaged position), and the engaging member 31 can be operated by screwing a screw into the fastening hole 318 .
0 and the rotation unit 700 (back base 720) can be fastened. Therefore, the operator 315 protruding from the rear side of the rear case 300 is the engaging member 310 arranged at the specified position.
operation alone can render it inoperable. As a result, while the pachinko machine 10 is assembled, the manipulator 315 is illegally operated, and the fixing member 320 and the board box 100 (
It is possible to prevent the main controller 110) from being easily replaced with an illegal board box.

In this case, the fastening hole 318 is inserted through the hole of the rear base 720 of the rotation unit 700 .
The screw to be fastened to the game board 13 may be operable through a hole obtained by removing the first winning port 64 provided on the game board 13 . In this case, it is not necessary to release the connection between the game board 13 and the rear case 300, so that the work of exchanging the board box 100 to a normal board box 100 can be prevented from becoming complicated. As a result, it is possible to simplify the work of replacing a normal board box 100 .

The fixing member 320 is composed of a member separate from the rear case 300 . As a result, the board box 100 can be crimped and fixed to the fixing member 320 having a smaller outer shape than the rear case 300 , so that the board box 100 can be secured more easily than when the fixing member 320 is integrally formed with the rear case 300 . Can be easily installed. As a result, the board box 100 can be easily installed in the rear case 300 in a state in which the board box 100 is difficult to be removed from the fixing member 320 .

In addition, while the rear case 300 can be used as a component having the same shape for each model of pachinko machine, the board box 100 differs in shape and size depending on the model of the pachinko machine 10. The fixing member 320 on which is arranged cannot be used as a diversion product from another pachinko machine. Therefore, compared to the case where the fixing member 320 is integrally formed with the back case 300, the same mold can be used when molding the back case 300 as that of another pachinko machine. As a result, it is only necessary to form a mold for the fixing member 320 having a smaller outer shape than that of the rear case 300, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

The fixing member 320 is composed of an interposed member 330 that engages with the engaging member 310 described above, and a pivot member 340 that is fastened to the interposed member 330 . As a result, the pivot member 340 can be used as a diversion product having the same shape as the fixing member of another game machine.

The interposed member 330 is formed in a box shape with an open front side (arrow F direction side) and the other side (arrow L direction side).
and an engaged portion 332 protruding from the other side (arrow L direction side) toward the rear case 300 (front side) and formed in a frame shape. , an insertion hole 333 that opens in a circular shape on the bottom surface of the box, and a protrusion 334 that protrudes from the rear surface toward the pivot member 340 .

The locking portion 331 has an opening for engaging the other side (arrow L direction side) of the fixing member 320 with the bottom wall portion 301, and the opening has an L-shaped cross section from the periphery of the first opening portion 301c. It is engaged with the bottom wall portion 301 by inserting the protruding wall 301c1 that protrudes from the bottom wall portion 301 . As a result, when the interposed member 330 (fixed member 320) is arranged in the rear case 300, the protruding wall 301c1 is inserted into the engaging portion 331 of the interposed member 330, and one side of the interposed member 330 (arrow R direction side) can be locked to the rear case 300 .

The engaged portion 332 is a portion that engages with the engaging member 310, and has a projection dimension toward the rear case 300 side (arrow F direction side) that exceeds the engaging member 310 disposed on the rear case 300. , and the distance dimension from the inner surface of the front side (arrow F direction side) of the enclosed space to the front surface of the bottom wall portion 301 is larger than the distance from the front surface of the engaging member 310 to the front surface of the bottom wall portion 301. set. As a result, the space surrounded by the engaged portion 332 and the engaging member 310 are arranged to overlap each other in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction).

The insertion hole 333 is a through hole through which a screw for fastening the interposition member 330 to a shaft support member 340 described later is inserted, and is set coaxially with the fastening hole 343 of the shaft support member 340 .

The protruding portion 334 is formed to have a substantially L-shaped cross section, and the distance between the tip portion on the bent side and the bottom surface of the interposing member 330 is set to be larger than the plate thickness of the insertion portion 344 of the pivot member 340, which will be described later. be done.
As a result, the insertion portion 3 is inserted between the tip portion of the protrusion 334 on the bending side and the bottom surface of the interposition member 330 facing each other.
44 can be inserted and arranged.

The shaft support member 340 has a box-like main body 341 that opens toward the rear case 300 (arrow F direction), and a substantially U-shaped cross section from the rear side (arrow B direction) of the main body 341. and a bulging support portion 342 .

The main body portion 341 has the insertion portion 3 protruding upward from the side surface on the upper side (the side in the direction of the arrow U).
44 and a fastening hole 343 recessed from the bottom side (direction of arrow D) of a main body 341 formed in a box shape toward the rear side (direction of arrow B).

The insertion portion 344 is a plate member that is inserted between the bending-side distal end portion of the protrusion 334 and the bottom surface of the interposing member 330 , as described above. As a result, it is possible to prevent the upper side of the pivot member 340 from tilting toward the rear side of the rear case 300 .

The fastening hole 343 is arranged on the lower side (arrow D direction side) toward the end opposite to the insertion portion 344 . Further, as described above, the fastening hole 343 corresponds to the insertion hole 333 (FIG. 39) of the interposing member 330.
(b)) is a hole for fastening a screw to be inserted. Therefore, the axial support member 340 is located on the upper side (
The insertion portion 344 in the direction of the arrow U) is inserted into the protrusion 334 of the interposition member 330, and the lower side is fastened and fixed to the interposition member 330. As shown in FIG. Therefore, since the axial support member 340 is fixed to the interposition member 330 only by tightening the screw on the lower side, the number of tightened portions can be reduced, and the manufacturing process can be simplified.

The support portion 342 is a portion that is crimped to the bearing portion 117 of the substrate box 100 (main controller 110) described above, and is formed in a hollow shape in which a crimp fitting can be arranged. Note that the circuit board box 100 is held in a rotatable state with respect to the pivot member 340 by fastening with a caulking fitting.

Next, referring to FIGS. 40(a) to 41(b), the engagement member 310 and the fixing member 320
Engagement with will be described. FIG. 40(a) is a front view of the rear case 300 before engagement of the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320, and FIG. 2 is a rear view of the rear case 300 in the state of . Figure 41(a)
) is a front view of the rear case 300 after the engagement of the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of case 300. FIG. 40(b) and 41(b), a portion of the outer shape of the engaging member 310 that overlaps the rear case 300 is illustrated with a dashed line.

As shown in FIGS. 40(a) and 40(b), before the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 are engaged, the interposing member 330 and the pivot member 340 are positioned on the interposing member 330 side (front side (arrow They are fastened and combined by screws inserted from the F direction side)). As a result, the interposing member 330
In addition, it is possible to prevent the pivot member 340 from being illegally disassembled from the rear side of the rear case 300 (removal of the fastened screw). As a result, it is possible to prevent the board box 100 crimped and fixed to the pivot member 340 from being replaced with an illegal board box.

The intervening member 330 and the pivot member 340 (fixing member 320) in the fastened state are connected to the projecting wall 30 formed in the first opening 301c inside the locking portion 331 of the intervening member 330 as described above.
1c1 is inserted. In this case, the interposed member 330 and the pivot member 340 (
The fixing member 320) extends from the bending side (arrow R direction side) of the projecting wall 301c1 to the first opening 301c.
is placed in

When the fixing member 320 is arranged in the rear case 300 , the space surrounded by the engaged portion 332 is arranged at a position facing one side (engaging portion 316 side) end of the engaging member 310 . As a result, by slidingly displacing the engaging member 310 , one side (arrow R direction) end portion of the engaging member 310 can be inserted into the space surrounded by the engaged portion 332 .

Here, the outer dimension of the two engaging portions 316 of the engaging member 310 in the vertical direction (the direction of the arrows UD) is the opening in the vertical direction of the space surrounded by the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320 described above. It is set larger than the dimension. Therefore, there is a problem that the engaging member 310 cannot be arranged in the space surrounded by the engaged portion 332 .

On the other hand, the engaging member 310 can easily elastically deform the first piece 311 by the recessed portion 317 provided on one side (the arrow R direction side) of the first piece 311 as described above, and can also be engaged. Due to the triangular shape of joint portion 316 , force when engaging member 310 is slid and comes into contact with the inner edge of engaged portion 332 can be applied to concave portion 317 side of engaging member 310 . As a result, the bifurcated first piece 311 can be elastically deformed and inserted into the space surrounded by the engaged portion 332 .

As shown in FIGS. 41(a) and 41(b), the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 are
The engaging member 310 is slid and displaced so that the first piece 311 of the engaging member 310 is moved to the interposing member 33 .
When it is inserted into the space surrounded by the engaged portion 332 of 0, the elastically deformed first piece 311 returns to the shape before deformation. As described above, the engaging portion 316 has the first piece 311 on the other side surface.
extending in a direction substantially orthogonal to the extending direction of the . Therefore, the force for elastically deforming the first piece 311 toward the concave portion 317 does not act only by the force for sliding the engaging member 310 in the opposite direction. That is, the inclined surface of the engaging portion 316 and the concave portion 317 cause the first piece 311 to move toward the engaged portion 332 .
It can be easily inserted into the space surrounded by, and the other side (arrow L direction side) of the engaging portion 316
can make it difficult for the first piece 311 inserted into the space surrounded by the engaged portion 332 to come off. As a result, it is possible to prevent the fixing member 320 from being removed from the rear side of the back case 300 due to fraudulent actions by the player, and the board box 100 (main controller 110) crimped to the fixing member 320 can be prevented from becoming an illegal board box. can be suppressed from being exchanged for

In addition, the rear case 300 is arranged between the base plate 60 and the rear case 300, and is located on the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the base plate 60, and the base plate 60 and the rear case 300 (bottom wall portion 301). The locking member 320 includes an engaging member 310 operable from the outside between the opposing sides of the
An engaged portion 332 protruding toward the front side (direction of arrow F) of the rear case 300 is provided, and the engaged portion 332 and the engaging member 310 are engaged with each other to be arranged in the rear case 300. , the engaging member 310 is operated from the outside between the base plate 60 and the rear case 300 in a state where the accessory device (rotation unit 700 in this example) is arranged between the base plate 60 and the rear case 300. , the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 can be engaged.

Therefore, the fixing member 320 can be arranged on the rear case 300 without the engaging member 310 being obstructed by the accessory device arranged between the base plate 60 and the rear case 300 . As a result, the fixing member 320 can be easily arranged on the rear case 300 .

In addition, since the engaging member 310 is engaged with the engaged portion 332 disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the rear case 300, the engaging portion between the rear case 300 and the fixing member 320 is formed on the base plate. 60 and rear case 300. As a result, the base plate 6
It is difficult to access the engaging portion between the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 from the back side (the side in the direction of the arrow B) of . As a result, the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 3 are separated from the back side of the base plate 60 .
20 is released and the fixing member 320 is prevented from being tampered with (for example, replaced with an incorrect fixing member).

In addition, the rear case 300 includes a first opening 301c that opens in a portion where the fixing member 320 is arranged, and a second opening 301d that opens in a portion where the engaging member 310 is arranged. The engaging member 310 is arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the back case 300 and is inserted through the second opening 301d from the back side (arrow B direction side) of the back case 300. Since the engaging portion 332 of the fixing member 320 that has passed through the first opening 301c is arranged on the front side of the rear case 300, the engaging member 310 and the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320 are arranged on the front side of the rear case 300. can be made difficult to access from the rear side of the rear case 300 to the engaging portion with the . the result,
The fixing member 320 can be fixed to the back case 300 regardless of the size of the accessory device arranged on the back case 300, and the board box can be replaced with an illegal board box by being operated from the back side of the game board 13. can be prevented.

Furthermore, since the engaging member 310 is provided with an operator 315 that is inserted through the second opening 301d and protrudes toward the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the rear case 300, the front side (arrow F direction side) of the rear case 300 is provided. ), the engagement member 310 can be easily operated.
As a result, the engaging operation between the engaging member 310 and the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320 can be facilitated.

In addition, since the engaging member 310 can be slidably displaced on a plane parallel to the front side of the back case 300 (bottom wall portion 301), the engaging member 310 can move forward and backward with respect to the back case 300 (as shown by the arrows). FB direction), the front side (arrow F direction side) of the engaging member 310 can be easily used as an arrangement space for a accessory device arranged in the rear case 300 . As a result, the area on the front side of the rear case 300 (bottom wall portion 301) can be easily used as a space for arranging the accessory device.

Next, an operation for removing the fixing member 320 from the back case 300 from the state shown in FIG. 41 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 41, the first opening 301c has a substantially L-shape when viewed from the front, and the concave portion 317 of the engaging member 310 in the engaged state with the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320 is the first opening. It is possible to operate from the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the rear case 300 through the 1 opening 301c.

Therefore, by elastically deforming the outer portion of the recessed portion 317 of the engaging member 310 toward the recessed side of the recessed portion 317 using a special tool or the like, the engagement between the engaging portion 316 of the engaging member 310 and the engaged portion 332 can be achieved. combination is canceled. In this disengaged state, the engaging member 310 is displaced in the direction (arrow L direction) pulled out from the internal space engaged by the engaged portion 332, and then the deformation of the engaging member 310 is restored. , the engagement between the engaging member 310 and the engaged portion 332 can be released.

It is preferable that the gap between the outer portion of the concave portion 317 of the engaging member 310 and the first opening 301c is formed as small as possible. According to this, from the rear case 300 to the fixing member 3
The fingers of the person removing 20 can be made non-insertable and the insertion of special tools is possible.
As a result, only a worker with a dedicated tool can replace the board box 100 (main controller 110), and it is possible to prevent the board box 100 from being replaced with an illegal board box 100. FIG.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 42(a) and 42(b), the circuit board box 100 (main controller 110) crimped to the pivot member 340 will be described. FIG. 42(a) is a perspective rear view of the rear case 300 and the board box 100 (main controller 110), and FIG.
b) is a rear view of the rear case 300 and the board box 100 (main controller 110). In FIG. 42(b), the outer shape of the engaging member 310 that overlaps the board box 100 is illustrated with a dashed line.

As shown in FIGS. 42(a) and 42(b), the board box 100 has one end side (arrow R
direction side) end portion. The bearing portion 117 extends vertically (arrow U
-D direction) with a predetermined gap therebetween. The pair of bearing portions 117 is a portion that is crimped to the support portion 342 of the shaft support member 340 as described above, and the vertical dimension of the support portion 342 (direction of arrows UD) and the distance between the opposing portions are substantially equal. set to be the same. As a result, the substrate box 100 is fastened to the shaft support member 340 by arranging the support portion 342 between the pair of bearing portions 117 facing each other and inserting a crimp pin from above the bearing portion 117 to crimp and fix the substrate box 100 . be done.

According to the board box 100 configured as described above, the board box 100 is rotatably held with respect to the pivot member 340 and is arranged on the rear side of the engaging member 310. Thus, when operating the manipulator 315 to engage the engaging member 310 with the fixing member 320 , the manipulator 315 can be easily operated by rotating the board box 100 . Further, after engaging the engaging member 310 with the fixing member 320, the board box 10
By arranging 0 on the back side of the engaging member 310 , it becomes difficult to operate the operator 315 from the back side of the back case 300 . As a result, after the pachinko machine 10 is assembled, the operator 3
15 is manipulated and replaced with an illegal board box.

The other end of the board box 100 (in the direction of the arrow L) is the bottom wall 3 of the rear case 300.
01 , it is inserted from the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the board box 100 and fixed by a screw fastened to the rear case 300 . As a result, the board box 100 is arranged on the rear side of the rear case 300 in a non-rotatable (operable) state.

Next, a detailed configuration of the downward displacement unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 69. FIG. First, a structure for displacing the lower displacement member 440 will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 46. FIG.

43 is a front view of the lower displacement unit 400, and FIG. 44 is a rear view of the lower displacement unit 400. FIG. 45 is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement unit 400, and FIG. 46 is an exploded perspective rear view of the lower displacement unit 400. FIG. 43 to 14 illustrate a state in which the lower displacement member 440 is arranged at the retracted position (the lowest position with respect to the base member 410).

As shown in FIGS. 43 to 46, the lower displacement unit 400 includes a base member 410 arranged on the bottom wall portion 301 (see FIG. 6) of the rear case 300, and a transmission member arranged on the base member 410. 420, a link member 430 connected to the base member 410 and displaced along with the displacement of the transmission member 420, one end slidably connected to the base member 410 and the other end connected to the link member 430. and a lower displacement member 440 that is displaced by receiving driving force from the link member 430 .

The base member 410 is formed by combining two oblong rectangular plate members in the front-rear direction, and includes a front base 411 arranged on the front side and a rear base 412 arranged on the rear side. A transmission member 420 and a link member 430 are arranged between the front base 411 and the rear base 412 facing each other.

The front base 411 has two sliding grooves 411 penetrating in the front-rear direction (the depth direction of the paper in FIG. 43).
a, 411b, two cylindrical support pins 411c, 411d protruding toward the rear side, and a curved wall portion 411e protruding in an arc around the support pin 411d. .

The sliding grooves 411a and 411b are formed by two protrusions 47 protruding from the rear side of the lower displacement member 440.
2 and 473 are holes through which they are respectively inserted. The sliding grooves 411a and 411b are formed to extend in the horizontal direction. Therefore, the protrusions 47 inserted through the sliding grooves 411a and 411b
2, 473 are displaced along the slide grooves 411a, 411b, the lower displacement member 440 can be slid in the left-right direction.

The sliding grooves 411a and 411b are curved in an arc shape, and extend upward (FIG. 4) from the left (left in FIG. 43) end of the front base 411 to the right (right in FIG. 43) end.
3 upward). Furthermore, the sliding grooves 411a and 411b are arranged at positions where the axes of the respective arcs are different, and the gap between them in the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 43) is narrowed from the left end to the right end.

Since the distance between projections 472 and 473 of the base member 470 of the lower displacement member 440 to be described later does not change, when the lower displacement member 440 is slid along the sliding groove, the lower displacement member 440 is rotated. It can be displaced while moving. That is, two sliding grooves 411a and 411b
By changing the distance between , it is possible to rotate the lower displacement member 440 as it slides without applying a rotational driving force to the lower displacement member 440 . A detailed displacement mode of the lower displacement member 440 will be described later.

The shaft support pin 411c is a protrusion that is inserted into a shaft portion 422a of a cam member 422 of a transmission member 420, which will be described later, and is formed in a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft portion 422a. Also,
The pivot pin 411 c is formed from a metal rod-like body and fitted onto the front base 411 . Therefore, when a force acts on the cam member 422 from its outer peripheral surface in the axial direction, the shaft support pin 4
It is possible to suppress breakage (damage) of 11c.

The pivot pin 411d extends through a through hole 431 formed at one end of a first link member 431, which will be described later.
It is a protrusion inserted into the through hole 431a, and is formed in a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the through hole 431a. Further, the pivot pin 411d is formed of a metallic rod-like body and fitted onto the front base 411. As shown in FIG. Therefore, when a force acts on the first link member 431 in the direction of the through hole 431a, it is possible to prevent the pivot pin 411d from breaking (breaking).

The curved wall portion 411 e protrudes from the back side of the front base 411 and extends from the pivot pin 411 .
It is curved around the axis d. The protruding distance of the curved wall portion 411e is set to a distance at which the protruding tip surface of the plate-like protrusion 431b of the first link member 431, which will be described later, abuts. Therefore, the first link member 431 is prevented from being displaced forward. Also, the curved wall portion 411e
is curved around the axis of the pivot pin 411d.
b can be brought into contact with the projecting tip surface of the curved wall portion 411e.

The recovery port 411f is an opening for recovering the ball emitted from the emission opening 471 by moving the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440, which will be described later, into the recovery port 411f. The downstream side of the recovery port 411f is connected to a ball recovery path. The recovery port 411f is connected to the front base 41
1, the opening surface of which faces the lower displacement member 440 in the retracted state and the exit opening 471 of the lower displacement member 440 in the first overhang state in the direction of gravity. It is considered to be the side located on the side.

In addition, the exit opening 471 of the lower displacement member 440 in the retracted state is arranged above the recovery port 411f. Therefore, the ball emitted from the emission opening 471 can be received in the recovery port 411f and recovered quickly.

The rear base 412 has grooves 412a and 412b recessed from the front side (the front side of the paper surface of FIG. 44) toward the rear side, and a locking portion 412c protruding toward the front side near the groove 412b. Formed by the Lord.

The groove portion 412a is a hole into which the tip side of the pivot pin 411c of the front base 411 is inserted. recessed in position. Therefore, the cam member 422 is held by the base member 410 so as not to fall off by combining the front base 411 and the rear base 412 after the pivot pin 411c is inserted into the shaft portion 422a. In addition, since the back base 412 can hold the tip of the pivot pin 411c, when force is applied to the cam member 422 in the axial direction from the outer peripheral surface, the pivot pin 411c will not come into contact with the front base 411. It is possible to suppress bending and breaking from the connecting portion.

The groove portion 412b is a hole into which the front end side of the pivot pin 411d of the front base 411 is inserted, and is formed in a circular shape with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the pivot pin 411d and faces the pivot pin 411d. recessed in position. Therefore, the first link member 431 has a through hole 431
The front base 411 and the rear base 412 are combined after the pivot pin 411d is inserted through the base member 410 so that they cannot be removed from the base member 410 . Also, the rear base 412
However, since the tip portion of the pivot pin 411d can be held, the pivot pin 411d is bent from the connecting portion with the front base 411 when a force acts on the first link member 431 in the direction of the through hole 431a. can be suppressed.

The locking portion 412c is a plate that locks one end of the biasing spring SP1, which will be described later.
Formed outside P1. Thereby, the one end side of the biasing spring SP1 can be locked. A detailed description of the biasing spring SP1 will be given later.

The transmission member 420 includes a transmission gear 421 connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM1 attached to the front side of the front base 411, and a cam meshed with the transmission gear 421 and rotated as the transmission gear 421 is driven. The member 422 is mainly provided.

The transmission gear 421 is a gear having a meshing surface over the entire outer peripheral surface, and is fitted onto the shaft of the drive motor KM1. Therefore, when power is applied to the drive motor KM1 to rotate the shaft, the transmission gear 421 is also rotated.

The cam member 422 is formed of a plate-like body having a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction and having a shape in which ends of two semicircles having different sizes are combined with each other when viewed from the front. A semicircular portion of the cam member 422 having a small outer shape has a tooth surface 4 that meshes with the transmission gear 421 on the outer peripheral surface.
22b is engraved, and a shaft portion 422a is formed through the center of the semicircle. cam member 42
2, a sliding groove 422c is formed recessed on the rear side facing the link member 430 described later.

The shaft portion 422a is a hole through which the pivot pin 411c is inserted as described above.
By rotatably supporting the shaft portion 422a on the shaft 1c, the cam member 422 is supported by the shaft support pin 411c.
rotatably held about the axis of

The cam member 422 engages with the transmission gear 421 at the tooth surface 422b thereof.
, the cam member 422 can rotate about the axis of the shaft portion 422a when the transmission gear 421 is rotated.

The sliding groove 422c is recessed along the outer periphery of the semicircular portion of the cam member 422 having a large radius. Therefore, the distance from the shaft portion 422a increases from one end side toward the other end side. The sliding groove 422c includes a stepped portion 422c1 extending from the sliding projection 431d of the first link member 431 toward the through hole 431a when the lower displacement member 440 is in a retracted state, which will be described later, and a lower displacement groove 422c. A stepped portion 422c3 extending in the direction of the through hole 431a from the sliding projection 431d when the member 440 is positioned in a second extended state, which will be described later, and the lower displacement member 440 are positioned between the retracted state and the second extended state. and a stepped portion 422c2 that extends from the sliding projection 431d toward the through hole 431a when positioned in the intermediate first projecting state.

Link member 430 is formed from two link members, a first link member 431 and a second link member 432 . Further, the link member 430 is formed by rotatably connecting the ends of the first link member 431 and the second link member 432 .

The first link member 431 is bent in a substantially V-shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a plate shape having a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction. The first link member 431 is a link that is displaced in accordance with the displacement of the cam member 422. The first link member 431 has a through hole 431a penetrating in the front-rear direction at one end and a columnar connecting projection 431c projecting rearward at the other end. , a plate-like projection 431b projecting to a position facing the curved wall portion 411e described above, and a cylindrical sliding projection 4 projecting to the front side of the bent portion.
31d.

The through hole 431a is a through hole into which the pivot pin 411d is inserted as described above. first
The link member 431 is rotatably held with respect to the base member 410 by combining the front base 411 and the rear base 412 with the pivot pin 411d inserted into the through hole 431a.

The plate-like protrusion 431b is a protrusion that suppresses the first link member 431 from being displaced in the front-rear direction and suppresses the first link member 431 from colliding with the cam member 422 arranged in front. The cam member 422 is formed into a plate-like body projecting in a curved shape around the hole 431a, and the projecting length is set to be greater than the thickness of the cam member 422 in the front-rear direction. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress collision between the rear surface of the cam member 422 and the front surface of the first link member 431 .

The projecting dimension of the plate-shaped projection 9431b is set larger than the thickness of the cam member 422 (the dimension in the direction of arrow FB). Furthermore, there is a slight gap (distance X14 (see FIG. 55(a)) between the base member 410 (curved wall portion 411e) facing the projecting tip surface of the plate-like projection 431b.
).

The cam member 422 is arranged so as to be displaceable in a region between the front surface of the first link member 9431 excluding the plate-like projection 431b and the projecting surface (back surface) of the curved wall portion 411e. Also, the dimension of the two gaps, which is the gap between the cam member 422 and the first link member 431 facing each other and the gap between the cam member 422 and the base member 410 facing each other, is the distance X1 described above.
It is set larger than 4.

As a result, the first link member 9 moves in the direction (arrow F direction) in which the distance X14 described above becomes smaller.
431 can bring the protruding distal end surface of the plate-shaped projection 431b into contact with the opposing base member 410 (curved wall portion 411e) when the plate-like projection 431b is bent. Therefore, the cam member 422 is formed between the front surface of the first link member 9431 excluding the plate-like projection 9431b and the projecting surface (back surface) of the curved wall portion 411e.
It is possible to suppress the restriction of the displacement due to the pinching.

The connecting projection 431c is a shaft portion that is connected to a second link member 432, which will be described later.
A screw or the like larger than 32a is fastened. Thereby, the first link member 431 and the second link member 432 are rotatably connected.

A wall portion 431f that protrudes toward the rear side is formed at the edge of the through hole 431a. wall 431
f is a wall surface for fitting and holding an urging spring SP1, which will be described later, on the outer peripheral surface thereof.

The link-side engaging portion 431e is a protrusion that engages the other end side of the biasing spring SP1 fitted in the wall portion 431f, and is formed to protrude in the shape of a hook on the back side of one end side of the first link member 431. .
Therefore, one end of the biasing spring SP1 is engaged with the engaging portion 412c of the rear base 412, and the other end thereof is engaged with the link side engaging portion 431e of the first link member 431. be. Therefore, the biasing force of the biasing spring SP1 can act in a direction to rotate the other end side of the first link member 431 upward with respect to the base member 410 . As a result, when the lower displacement member 440 is rotationally displaced, the biasing force of the biasing spring SP1 acts.
The energy consumption of M1 can be suppressed.

431 d of sliding protrusions are formed in the position spaced apart from the through-hole 431a by substantially the same distance as the separation distance with the axial part 422a of the cam member 422 from the through-hole 431a. Further, the tip portion of the sliding projection 431d is inserted inside the sliding groove 422c. That is, the sliding protrusion 431d is formed so that its outer diameter is smaller than the width dimension between the opposing sliding grooves 422c.

The sliding projection 431d is arranged inside the sliding groove 422c, so that it slides and displaces inside the sliding groove 422c as the cam member 422 is rotationally displaced. That is, by displacing the cam member 422, the first link member 431 is rotationally displaced around the axis of the through hole 431a. A detailed description of the displacement of the first link member 431 will be given later.

In addition, since the sliding protrusion 431d and the plate-like protrusion 431b are formed at positions close to each other, the plate-like protrusion 431b suppresses forward displacement of the first link member 431. As shown in FIG. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the sliding protrusion 431d from pushing the cam member 422 forward. As a result, there is no need to deepen the recess depth of the sliding groove 422c recessed in the cam member 422, and the cam member 42
The rigidity can be ensured without increasing the thickness of 2 in the front-rear direction.

The second link member 432 is formed in a plate shape with a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction while being formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, one end of which is long. The second link member 432 is mainly formed with a through hole 432a penetrating in the front-rear direction at one end and a through hole 432b penetrating in the front-rear direction at the other end.

The through hole 432a is a hole for connecting with the first link member 431 as described above, and the connecting protrusion 431c is inserted therein. Thereby, the second link member 432 is rotatably connected to the first link member 431 .

The through hole 432b is connected to a lower displacement member 440, which will be described later, so that the displacement of the link member 430 can be transmitted to the lower displacement member 440. As shown in FIG. The through hole 432b is formed by a protrusion 48 of a rear case 482, which will be described later.
A hole 2a is inserted, and its inner diameter is formed to be larger than the outer diameter of the projection 482a. Therefore, by inserting the protrusion 482a into the through hole 432b and fastening a screw or the like having a head larger than the inner diameter of the through hole 432b to the tip of the protrusion 482a, the lower displacement member 440 can move the second link member 432. rotatably held with respect to the Therefore, the driving of the lower displacement member 440 is transmitted through the link member 430 when the cam member 422 is rotationally displaced.

Next, displacement operation of the lower displacement member 440 will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 52. FIG. 47 is a front view of the lower displacement unit 400 in the retracted state, FIG. 48 is a front view of the lower displacement unit 400 in the first extended state, and FIG. 49 is a lower displacement unit in the second extended state. FIG. 4 is a front view of 400; FIG. 50 shows the lower displacement unit 40 in the retracted state.
51 is a rear view of the lower displacement unit 400 in the first extended state, and FIG. 52 is a rear view of the lower displacement unit 400 in the second extended state. In addition, Fig. 5
0 to 52 illustrate the state in which the rear base 412 is seen transparently. 50 to 52, the plate-like projection 431b of the first link member 431 and part of the curved wall portion 411e are illustrated by chain lines.

The retracted state means that the sliding projection 431d arranged inside the sliding groove 422c
42c1, and the lower displacement member 440 is arranged on the lower side. The second overhanging state means that the sliding projection 431d is arranged between the stepped portions 442c3 and the lower displacement member 440
is arranged at the top. The first overhanging state is a state in which the sliding protrusion 431d is arranged between the opposing stepped portions 442c2, and the lower displacement member 440 is arranged in an intermediate state between the retracted state and the second overhanging state.

As shown in FIGS. 47 and 50, the lower displacement unit 400 in the retracted state has the cam member 422 at the first position rotated by the transmission gear 421 to the other end side of the sliding groove 422c (the stepped portion 422).
c3 side) is located on the right side of the shaft portion 422a in rear view (the right side in FIG. 50). In this case, the sliding projection 431d of the first link member 431 is guided along the inner wall of the sliding groove 422c and positioned at the stepped portion 422c1. Therefore, the first link member 431 is positioned such that the other end side (connecting protrusion 431c side) is located on the right side of the through hole 431a on the one end side (the right side in FIG. 50) when rotated about the through hole 431a. The end side is positioned at the lower end of the rotatable range (first driven position).

Since the second link member 432 is connected to the first link member 431, the first link member 4
31 (through hole 432a side) is located on the right side in rear view (the right side in FIG. 50). As a result, the lower displacement member 440 connected to the second link member 432 is
11 are located on the right side of the sliding grooves 411a and 411b (see FIG. 5).
0 right). As described above, the distance between the sliding grooves 411a and 411b facing each other in the vertical direction is larger on the right side in rear view than on the left side.
0 is arranged with the longitudinal direction substantially parallel to the left-right direction. That is, it is arranged in front of the front base 411 .

The displacement from the retracted state shown in FIGS. 47 and 50 to the first extended state shown in FIGS. 46 and 51 is performed by displacing the cam member 422 .

In the first protruded state, the transmission gear 421 is rotated by the driving force of the drive motor KM1, and the cam member 422 is rotated approximately 90 degrees from the retracted state to the third position. As a result, the other end of the cam member 422 (the side of the stepped portion 422c3) is positioned above the shaft portion 422a. This rotational displacement causes the first link member 43 to be guided by the inner wall of the sliding groove 422c.
One sliding projection 431d is displaced as the sliding groove 422c is displaced and arranged at the third driven position. In addition, in the first projecting state, the sliding projection 431d
It is guided between the two inner walls facing each other.

Therefore, the first link member 431 is rotated approximately 30 degrees around the through hole 431a by the displacement of the sliding protrusion 431d, and the other end side (connecting protrusion 431c side) is shifted from the retracted position to the upper left side in rear view (FIG. 51). upper left).

Due to the rotational displacement of the first link member 431, the second link member 432 connected to the first link member 431 is displaced, and the lower displacement member 440 connected to the second link member 432 is displaced. In this case, the projections 472 and 473 of the lower displacement member 440 are slidably connected to the sliding grooves 411a and 411b of the front base 411, so that the lower displacement member 440 is displaced along the shape of the sliding grooves 411a and 411b. As described above, the distance between the sliding grooves 411a and 411b facing each other in the vertical direction is narrowed from the right side to the left side in the rear view, so that the lower displacement member 440 slides to the right side in the front view (the right side in FIG. 48). While being displaced, the tip side is rotationally displaced upward.

In addition, in the first overhanging state, the recovery port 411f is positioned on the lower side in the direction of gravity on the tip side. That is, when the lower displacement member 440 is shifted from the retracted state to the first protruding state, the distal end side of the lower displacement member 440 protrudes to the right side of the base member 410 in the front view by rotating while slidingly displacing it. can be displaced without As a result, it is possible to easily form a displacement region that is different from the variable regions of other displacement roles. You can suppress collisions with other displaceable objects.

In addition, since the recovery port 411f is positioned below one end of the lower displacement member 440 (the side opposite to the protrusions 472 and 473 connected to the front base 411), the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440, which will be described later, When the shooting operation is performed and the ball falls downward as it is from the emission opening 471, the ball can be thrown to the recovery port 411f.

The displacement from the first extended state shown in FIGS. 48 and 51 to the second extended state shown in FIGS. 49 and 52 is performed by further displacing the cam member 422 from the first extended state.

In the second extended state, the transmission gear 42 is driven by the driving force of the drive motor KM1 from the first extended state.
1 is rotated, and the cam member 422 is arranged at the second position rotated approximately 90 degrees from the first extended position (third position). Therefore, the other end side of the cam member 422 (stepped portion 422c3 side) is positioned above the shaft portion 422a. The moving projection 431d is displaced as the sliding groove 422c is displaced, and is disposed at the second driven position.
is guided between the opposing inner walls of the stepped portion 422c1 of the sliding groove 422c.

Therefore, the first link member 431 is rotated approximately 30 degrees around the through hole 431a by the displacement of the sliding projection 431d, and the other end side (connecting projection 431c side) of the first link member 431 is shifted from the position of the first projecting state to approximately It is displaced to the upper left (upper left in FIG. 52).

Due to the rotational displacement of the first link member 431, the second link member 432 connected to the first link member 431 is displaced, and the lower displacement member 440 connected to the second link member 432 is displaced. In this case, the projections 472 and 473 of the lower displacement member 440 are slidably connected to the sliding grooves 411a and 411b of the front base 411, so that the lower displacement member 440 is displaced along the shape of the sliding grooves 411a and 411b. As described above, the distance between the sliding grooves 411a and 411b facing each other in the vertical direction is narrowed from the right side to the left side in the rear view, so that the lower displacement member 440 slides to the right side in the front view (the right side in FIG. 49). While being displaced, the tip side is rotationally displaced upward.

In addition, in the same manner as in the first protruding state, in the second protruding state, the recovery port 41 is located downward in the direction of gravity on the distal end side.
1f is positioned. That is, when the lower displacement member 440 is shifted from the retracted state to the second protruding state, the distal end side of the lower displacement member 440 protrudes to the right side of the base member 410 in the front view by rotating while slidingly displacing it. can be displaced without As a result, it is possible to easily form a displacement region that is different from the variable regions of other displacement roles, and to suppress collisions with other displacement roles.

Next, referring to FIG. 53, the positional relationship between the first link member 431 and the cam member 422 in each state will be described. 53(a) is in the retracted state, FIG. 53(b) is in the first extended state, and FIG. 53(c) is in the second extended state. The first link member 431 and the cam member 42
2 is a rear view of FIG. 53(a) to 53(c), the first position of the cam member 422
A portion that overlaps with the link member 431 is illustrated by a dashed line.

As shown in FIG. 53(a), in the retracted state, the sliding protrusion 431d of the first link member 431
is disposed between the opposing inner walls of the stepped portion 422c1 of the sliding groove 422c. Further, as described above, the sliding projection 431d is formed at a position spaced apart from the through hole 431a by substantially the same distance as the distance between the shaft portion 422a of the cam member 422 and the through hole 431a. Therefore, when a force rotating about the axis of the through hole 431a acts on the first link member 431 positioned in the retracted state,
The force can be applied to the shaft portion 422a of the cam member 422 from the sliding projection 431d. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the rotation of the cam member 422 by the torque of the first link member 431 . As a result, in the retracted state, the first link member 431 through the second link member 432
It is possible to suppress the displacement of the lower displacement member 440 connected to .

As shown in FIG. 53(b), in the first extended state, the sliding projection 43 of the first link member 431
1d, disposed between the opposing inner walls of the stepped portion 422c2 of the sliding groove 422c. Therefore, as in the retracted state, when a force rotating about the through hole 431a acts on the first link member 431 positioned in the first extended state, the force is transferred from the sliding projection 431d to the cam member 422. Axle 422a
can act on Therefore, the rotational force of the first link member 431 causes the cam member 422 to rotate.
can be prevented from rotating. As a result, in the first extended state, the second link member 432
Displacement of the lower displacement member 440 connected to the first link member 431 via the can be suppressed.

Here, since the first projecting position is the middle position of the displacement of the lower displacement member 440, in order to maintain the stopped state, it is necessary to keep the drive motor KM1 in the stopped state. Therefore, if the lower displacement member 440 is stopped at the first projecting position (intermediate position of displacement), there is a problem that energy consumption increases.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the first extended state, the sliding projection 4 of the first link member 431
31d is arranged between the opposing inner walls of the stepped portion 422c2 of the slide groove 422c, so that the displacement of the lower displacement member 440 can be suppressed as described above. Therefore, even if the electric power of the drive motor KM1 is stopped when the lower displacement member 440 is stopped at a position in the middle of displacement, the displacement of the lower displacement member 440 can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in energy consumption of the drive motor KM1 when the lower displacement member 440 is stopped in the middle of displacement.

As shown in FIG. 53(c), in the second extended state, the sliding projection 43 of the first link member 431
1d, disposed between the opposing inner walls of the stepped portion 422c2 of the sliding groove 422c. Therefore, similarly to the retracted state and the first extended state, the through hole 4 is formed in the first link member 431 positioned in the second extended state.
When a force rotating about the axis of 31a acts, the force can be applied to the shaft portion 422a of the cam member 422 from the sliding projection 431d. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the rotation of the cam member 422 by the torque of the first link member 431 . As a result, in the second projecting state, it is possible to suppress displacement of the lower displacement member 440 that is connected to the first link member 431 via the second link member 432 .

Moreover, each of the stepped portions 422c1, 422c2, and 422c3 is connected to the sliding projection 431d and the through hole 43.
1a, the width dimension of the sliding groove 422c in the direction in which the sliding protrusion 431d of the first link member 431 is displaced can be reduced. Therefore, the clearance between the sliding groove 422c and the sliding protrusion 431d, which allows the first link member 431 to rotate about the axis of the through hole 431a, is reduced at the retracted position, the first projecting position, and the second projecting position. can. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the gap in which the first link member 431 in each state can be rotationally displaced about the axis of the through hole 431a. As a result, the swing width of the lower displacement member 440 in each state due to vibration or inertial force when the displacement is stopped can be reduced, making it easier for the player to visually recognize the stopped state.

Therefore, the transmission member 420 and the link member 430 (driving mechanism) for driving the lower displacement member 440 restrict the displacement of the lower displacement member 440 in the reaction direction when the game ball is ejected from the ball receiving portion 467. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the lower displacement member 440 with respect to the base member 410 due to the reaction. As a result, rattling of the lower displacement member 440 can be suppressed.

Next, referring to FIG. 54, the relationship between the link member 430 and the cam member 422 in the front-rear direction will be described. FIG. 54(a) shows the lower displacement unit 4 on the LIVa-LIVa line in FIG.
00, and FIG. 54(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the lower displacement unit 400 along line LIVb-LIVb in FIG. 51 and 52, the rear base 412
54(a) and 54(b) show cross-sectional views of the lower displacement unit 400 in a non-transparent state.

As shown in FIG. 54(a), the link member 43 of the lower displacement unit 400 in the retracted state
0 is located between the rear base 412 and the cam member 422 . Therefore, the lower displacement member 44
0 can be suppressed from swinging in the front-rear direction. That is, the other end side of the first link member 431 is connected to the lower displacement member 440 configured by combining a plurality of fixtures via the second link member 432, so that the load of the lower displacement member 440 moves forward and backward. Since the cam member 422 is arranged forward where there is a risk of bending, the forward bending of the first link member 431 can be suppressed. As a result, forward movement of the first link member 431 can be suppressed, so that the lower displacement member 44
0 can be suppressed from swinging back and forth.

As shown in FIG. 54(b), the link member 430 of the lower displacement unit 400 in the first extended state is arranged between the rear base 412 and the cam member 422 as in the retracted state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the lower displacement member 440 from swinging in the front-rear direction.

In addition, in the retracted state and the first extended state, the cam member 422 is arranged on the front side of the connecting portion between the first link member 431 and the second link member 432 of the link member 430 . Therefore, if the link member 430 is formed of two members, it is necessary to make the connecting portion rotatable. Since the member 422 is arranged, it is possible to suppress bending of the connecting portion of the link member 430 . As a result, it is possible to prevent the lower displacement member 440 from swinging in the front-rear direction.

<Displacement of Displaceable Member is Regulated by Regulating Means for Regulating Displacement of Driven Member>
Next, the relationship between the cam member 422 and the curved wall portion 411e will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56. FIG. FIG. 55(a) shows the lower displacement unit 4 on the LVa-LVa line in FIG.
00, FIG. 55(b) is a cross-sectional view of the lower displacement unit 400 taken along line LVb-LVb of FIG. 51, and FIG. 55(c) is a cross-sectional view of the lower displacement unit taken along line LVc-LVc of FIG. 400 is a cross-sectional view.

As shown in FIG. 55(a), when the lower displacement unit 400 is in the retracted state (first position), the cam member 422 and the curved wall portion 411e move in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). placed in different positions. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in the resistance acting on the cam member 422 when displacing the lower displacement unit 400 from the retracted state (first position) to the first extended state (third position). As a result, the start of displacement of the lower displacement member 440 can be stabilized.

As shown in FIGS. 55(b) and 55(c), the lower displacement unit 400 is in the first extended state (
3rd position), a part of the cam member 422 is arranged at a position with a predetermined gap on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the curved wall portion 411e. As a result, when the cam member 422 is displaced in the front direction, the axial side surface of the cam member 422 is brought into contact with the curved wall portion 411e, thereby suppressing the cam member 422 from being displaced in the front direction.

Note that the surface of the cam member 422 on the front base 411 side (arrow F direction side) faces the front base 41
1 (see FIG. 45). Accordingly, when the cam member 422 is displaced toward the curved wall portion 411e, the flat surface of the cam member 422 can be brought into contact with the curved wall portion 411e. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the cam member 422 from partially coming into contact with the curved wall portion 411e and to prevent the force from being concentrated on a part of the curved wall portion 411e. As a result, damage to the cam member 422 can be suppressed.

Here, as described above, when the lower displacement member 440 is displaced from the retracted state (first position) to the first extended state (third position), the tip side (the projection 473 connected to the front base 411 and the opposite side in the longitudinal direction) are rotationally displaced upward (in the direction of arrow U). Therefore, the force component for tilting the lower displacement member 440 in the front-rear direction is increased by the amount that the component in the longitudinal direction of the lower displacement member 440 approaches the direction of gravity. Therefore, in the first extended state (third position), the front-rear force acting on the link member 430 supporting the lower displacement member 440 is greater than in the retracted state (first position). be enlarged. As a result, the cam member 422 connected to the link member 430 is easily displaced in the front-rear direction.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the lower displacement unit 400 is moved from the retracted state (first position) to the first position.
When the cam member 422 is displaced beyond the overhanging state (third position), a portion of the cam member 422
Since it is disposed on the front side of 1e, displacement of the cam member 422 toward the front side can be restricted. As a result, it is possible to prevent the lower displacement member 440 from swinging in the front-rear direction between the first extended state (third position) and the second extended state (second position). can be easily made visible.

In addition, the displacement of the link member 430 to the rear side can be restricted by arranging the link member 430 between the rear base 412 and the cam member 422 as described above. That is, when the link member 430 swings toward the rear side, the link member 430 is brought into contact with the rear base 412 to restrict the displacement of the link member 430 . As a result, it is possible to prevent the lower displacement member 440 from rocking in the front-rear direction.

In addition, the front base 411 includes restricting means (curved wall portion 411e) that restricts the swinging of the link member 430 in directions other than the driven direction, and the cam member 422 is displaced between the first position and the second position. and displacing a first displacement region displacing a third position intermediate between the first position and the second position from the first position, and a second displacement region displacing the second position from the third position, When the cam member 422 is displaced from the first position to the second position, the link member 430 is driven from the first driven position to the second driven position, and moves from the first driven position to the first driven position and the second driven position. and a second driven region displacing the second driven position from the third driven position, wherein the second displacement region and the first driven region are set in the same region, and when the cam member 422 is displaced through the second displacement region, the restricting means (curved wall portion 4
11e) restricts the swinging of the cam member 422 in directions other than the displacement direction, so that the same portion of the restricting means (the curved wall portion 411e) is used to restrict the swinging of the link member 430 and the cam member 422. be able to.

Therefore, the restricting means (curved wall portion 411e) may be formed at one location, so that the cam member 42
2 and link member 430, respectively, the shape of the restricting means can be simplified, and the manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

Further, the swinging of the link member 430 and the cam member 422 is restricted by means (curved wall portion 411e).
can be regulated by using the same portion of , one regulating means (curved wall portion 411e)
Since it is not necessary to form the link member 430, the cam member 422, and the restricting portion respectively, the restricting means (curved wall portion 411e) can be reduced accordingly.

Further, when the lower displacement unit 400 is displaced from the retracted state to the second extended state, the protrusions 472 and 473 of the lower displacement member 440 are inserted into the sliding grooves 411a and 411b formed in the front base 411. As the cam member 422 displaces, the collar C (see FIG. 14) provided on the protrusions 472 and 473 moves toward the front side (arrow F direction side) of the other end side of the cam member 422 (the side of the stepped portion 422c3). (see FIGS. 50-52). As a result, when the other end side of the cam member 422 (the side of the stepped portion 422c3) is pushed rearward by the projections 472 and 473 (the collars C arranged on the projections 472 and 473), the cam member 422 moves toward the shaft portion. There is a risk that it will be rotationally displaced in the front-rear direction about 422 a and will come into contact with the link member 430 .

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the cam member 422 can be restrained from being displaced toward the front side by being brought into contact with the curved wall portion 411e.
can be suppressed from being rotationally displaced in the front-rear direction about the . As a result, contact between the link member 430 and the cam member 422 can be suppressed.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the cam member 422 is displaced beyond the first extended state (third position), the displacement is restricted by the curved wall portion 411e. It is possible to suppress an increase in frictional resistance due to contact with the wall portion 411e. As a result, the initial motion of the cam member 422 can be stabilized.

Next, referring to FIG. 56, cam member 422 and first link member 431 when lower displacement unit 400 is in the second displacement state will be described. FIG. 56(a) is L in FIG.
56(b) is a front view of the first link member 431 and the cam member 422 of the lower displacement unit 400 in the second extended state (second position). is. In addition, in FIG.56(b), the outer shape of the base member 410 is illustrated by the chain line.

As shown in FIG. 56 , when the lower displacement unit 400 is in the second displacement state, the end of the cam member 422 abuts on the plate-like projection 431 b of the first link member 431 . Thereby, the rotational displacement of the cam member 422 in the direction in which the lower displacement unit 400 is displaced from the retracted state (first position) to the second displaced state can be restricted. As a result, the operation of stopping the rotational displacement of the cam member 422 can be distributed to the meshing portion of the transmission gear 421 and the tooth surface 422b and the contact portion of the cam member 422 and the first link member 431. gear 421 and tooth surface 42
Damage to the tooth surface of 2b can be suppressed.

Further, when the lower displacement unit 400 is in the second displacement state, the first link member 431
A contact surface between the plate-shaped projection 431b and the cam member 422 is set in a direction perpendicular to the imaginary line KS1 passing through the shaft portion 422a of the cam member 422 and its contact portion. As a result, when a force displacing the first link member 431 from the second displaced state toward the retracted state (first position) acts around the axis of the first link member 431 , the force acts on the shaft portion 422 a of the cam member 422 . Acting in the direction of rotation can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the cam member 422 from rotating due to the force acting on the first link member 431 .

Here, as described above, the lower displacement member 440 is rotationally displaced upward (in the direction of the arrow U) at its distal end side (longitudinal side opposite to the protrusion 473 connected to the front base 411). Therefore, since the longitudinal direction component of the lower displacement member 440 approaches the direction of gravity, the first supporting member 440 supports the lower displacement member 440 .
Since the transmission of force from the first link member 431 to the cam member 422 is suppressed when the force in the rotational direction acting around the axis of the through hole 431a of the link member 431 is maximized, the lower displacement member 440 is moved to the second position. It can be easily maintained in the position of the displaced state.

Furthermore, when the cam member 422 is arranged at the position of the second displacement state, the lower displacement member 440
A force that rotates the first link member 431 around the axis of the through hole 431a is applied by the load of . In this case, the end portion of the cam member 422 is pushed out by the plate-shaped projection 431b and the force PW1 (see FIG.
2 slide groove 422c is pushed out from the slide projection 431d, and the cam member 422 is moved to the shaft portion 4.
The force PW2 (see FIG. 56(b)) in the direction of rotation about the axis of 22a acts in the direction of canceling out. As a result, it is possible to prevent the cam member 422 from rotating due to the force applied from the first link member 431 .

Next, the configuration of the lower displacement member 440 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 57 to 60. FIG. 57(a) is a front view of the lower displacement member 440, and FIG. 57(b) is a rear view of the lower displacement member 440. FIG. 58 is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement member 440, and FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective rear view of the lower displacement member 440. FIG. 60(a) and (b) show the lower displacement member 4
40 is a front view of FIG.

60(a) shows a state in which the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 440 is seen transparently, and in FIG. 60(b), the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 440 and the front case 481 are seen transparently. is shown.

57 to 60, the lower displacement member 440 includes a base member 470 connected to the front base 411, a case member 480 covering the front and rear of the base member 470, and the case member 480 and the base member 470. It mainly includes a transmission mechanism 460 displaceably disposed therebetween and a decorative member 450 formed to cover the front and rear of the case member 480 .

The base member 470 is a plate member that is rectangular and horizontally long when viewed from the front. , a protruding wall 477 projecting from the upper end of the central portion in the lateral direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 57) to the front side in an upside down U-shape; A rack gear 476 provided, shafts 474 and 475 protruding to the front side, a rectangular wiring locking portion 478 attached to the rear surface of one end side of the base member 470, and a vertical central portion of the base member 470. It is mainly formed with an opening 479 extending from one end side to the other end side.

The protrusions 472 and 473 are formed in the sliding grooves 411a and 411b of the front base 411 as described above.
is inserted into the lower displacement member 440 to connect the front base 411 with the lower displacement member 440 . Therefore, the sliding grooves 411a and 411b are formed in a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter smaller than the dimension between the facing inner walls of the sliding grooves 411a and 411b.

The standing wall 471a is a wall portion for forming a gap between the front case 481 and the base member 470 when the front case 481, which will be described later, is attached to the base member 470.
The standing dimension is set to be larger than the diameter of the sphere.

The shaft portions 474 and 475 are protrusions that are inserted into the shafts of the transmission gears 462 and 463 of the transmission mechanism 460 to be described later and hold the transmission gears 462 and 463 rotatably.
It is formed in a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft hole.

The rack gear 476 is engraved with a tooth surface that meshes with a transmission gear 465, which will be described later. As a result, the movable rack 464, which will be described later, slides relative to the base member 470,
Transmission gear 465 can be rotated.

The projecting wall 477 receives a ball thrown from a ball-throwing unit 600, which will be described later, in front of the base member 470 through the opening 451a of the decorative member 450.
It is a wall surface for suppressing falling to the outside of the sphere, and the distance between the opposing walls formed in a substantially U shape is formed to be larger than the diameter of the sphere.

The wiring locking portion 478 is a member for locking a flexible wiring (not shown) to the control board arranged on the back side of the base member 470 , and one end of the flexible wiring between the base member 470 and the base member 470 . It is attached to the back side of the base member 470 in a state in which the . As a result, even if the lower displacement member 440 is displaceably arranged with respect to the base member 410, it is possible to suppress entanglement of the flexible wiring.

In addition, the wire locking portion 478 has a projection 478a protruding in a columnar shape on the back side. The projecting distance of the protrusion 478 a is set to a distance that projects further to the rear side than the link member 430 connected to the rear side, and is set to a distance that allows contact with the front surface of the rear base 412 . As a result, the lower displacement member 440 can be prevented from swinging rearward, and the link member 430
can be suppressed from colliding with the rear base 412 .

The opening 469 is an opening that defines the sliding displacement direction of the movable rack 464 disposed on the front side, and a guide plate 464d of the movable rack 464, which will be described later, is inserted therein.

The transmission mechanism 460 is a member arranged in front of the base member 470, and is a transmission gear 461.
, 462 and 463, a drive motor KM2 whose shaft portion is connected to the transmission gear 461 thereof, and a movable motor KM2 having a tooth surface that meshes with the transmission gear 463 and slidably displaceable in front of the base member 470. a rack 464, a transmission gear 465 rotatably disposed on the movable rack 464 and meshing with the rack gear 476, and a tooth surface meshing with the transmission gear 465. a rack 466 disposed so as to be slidably displaceable forward;
A ball receiving portion 467 that is rotatably disposed on one end side of the rack 466 is mainly provided.

The transmission gear 461 is a gear in which the shaft portion of the drive motor KM2 is fitted in the shaft hole. is placed in

As described above, the transmission gears 462 and 463 are mounted on the shaft portions 474 and 474 of the base member 470 in the shaft holes.
475 is inserted and rotatably retained in the base member. Also, transmission gears 461 to 46
A transmission gear 463 at the end is rotated by the transmission gear 461 being rotated by the drive motor KM2.

The movable rack 464 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long rectangular plate when viewed from the front. an abutment plate 464c, a guide plate 464d protruding from one end to the other end at a substantially central position in the vertical direction, and a rack guide portion 464e protruding toward the front side opposite to the guide plate 464d;
It mainly includes a collision portion 464f protruding to the other end of the lower portion.

The rack gear 464 a is a tooth surface that meshes with the transmission gear 463 . Therefore, the base member 4
By arranging the rack gear 464a and the transmission gear 463 in mesh with each other in 70, the movable rack 464 can be displaced by driving the drive motor KM2.

The shaft portion 464b is a shaft portion on which the transmission gear 465 is rotatably held, and the transmission gear 46
It is formed in a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter smaller than that of the shaft hole 5 .

The contact plate 464c is a contact portion that contacts a sorting member 540 of the sorting unit 500, which will be described later, to displace the sorting member 540. As shown in FIG. That is, the distributing member 540 can be displaced by the displacement of the movable rack 464 . The manner in which the contact plate 464c and the distribution member 540 contact each other will be described later.

As described above, the guide plate 464d is a plate-like body inserted into the opening 479 of the base member 470, and can define the displacement direction of the movable rack 464 displaced by driving the drive motor KM2. That is, the movable rack 4 displaced by driving the drive motor KM2
64 can be displaced along the extending direction of the opening 479 . In addition, in this embodiment,
Since the opening 479 extends in the left-right direction, the movable rack 464 can be slid in the left-right direction with respect to the base member 470 .

The rack guide portion 464e is a protruding wall for restricting the displacement direction of the rack 466, which will be described later, and protrudes from one end to the other end in the left-right direction.

The collision portion 464f abuts on a protrusion 492b of the displacement member 492, which will be described later, to move the displacement member 492.
is a wall portion that displaces the , and is formed so as to protrude from the lower end of the movable rack 464 . Also, the collision portion 464f is formed in a state where the other end side is inclined. As a result, the protrusion 4 of the displacement member 492
92b can be displaced by sliding along its inclined surface.

The rack 466 is formed of a horizontally long rod-shaped body that is rectangular when viewed from the front, and includes a rack gear 466a engraved on the upper end surface, a shaft portion 466b projecting from the other end side to the rear in a columnar shape, and a shaft 466b projecting to the front. and a recessed portion 466 recessed from one end to the other end on the back side.
d.

The rack gear 466 a meshes with a transmission gear 465 attached to the movable rack 464 .
As a result, when the rack 466 is arranged in front of the movable rack 464 , the movable rack 464 is slidably displaced, and the transmission gear 465 is rotated along with the slidable displacement, and the driving force is transmitted to the rack 466 . . Therefore, rack 466 can be displaced relative to movable rack 464 .

The shaft portion 466b is a protrusion that is inserted into a shaft hole 467b of a ball receiving portion 467, which will be described later, and is formed in a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter larger than the inner diameter of the shaft hole 467b. Thereby, the ball receiving portion 467 can be rotatably held.

The sliding plate 466c is a protrusion inserted into an opening 481a of a front case 481, which will be described later, and is formed of a plate-like body having a predetermined thickness. As a result, the transmission gear 46 is attached to the rack 466 .
5 and the rack 466 is displaced with respect to the movable rack 464,
The direction of displacement of the rack 466 can be defined as the direction in which the opening 481a extends.

When the rack 466 is arranged in front of the movable rack 464, the concave portion 466d is in a state in which the rack guide portion 464e is arranged inside. As a result, the transmission gear 4 is attached to the rack 466 .
65, and the rack 466 is displaced with respect to the movable rack 464, the displacement direction of the rack 466 can be defined in the extending direction of the rack guide portion 464e.

Here, in order to regulate the displacement direction of the rack 466, if the concave portion 466d and the rack guide portion 464e are formed, the displacement direction of the rack 466 can be defined in the extension direction of the rack guide portion 464e. However, since the lower displacement member 440 is slidably displaced in the horizontal direction and rotationally displaced, depending on the displaced state of the lower displaceable member 440, the state of meshing between the transmission gear 465 and the rack 466 changes due to its own weight. gear 465 to rack 46
There was a fear that the driving force would not be transmitted to 6 well.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the portion that defines the displacement direction of the rack 466 is the sliding plate 46
6c, the opening 481a, the concave portion 466d, and the rack guide portion 464e.
It is possible to suppress the change of the meshing state of. As a result, it is possible to prevent the transmission of drive from the transmission gear 465 to the rack 466 from being obstructed.

The sliding plate 466c is formed to protrude from two locations in the left-right direction of the rack 466 (the left-right direction in FIG. 57(a)). At the rack's displacement end position (the position where the rack 466 projects most with respect to the movable rack 464), it is arranged below the transmission gear 465 (lower side in FIG. 57).

Here, at the displacement end position, as will be described later, the ball receiving portion 467 disposed on the shaft portion 466b of the rack 466 performs a shooting operation (rotational displacement), so that the ball receiving portion 467 disposed on one end side of the rack 466 The other end side of the rack tends to be displaced by the inertial force due to the displacement of the portion 467 . Therefore, load is likely to be applied to the meshing surfaces of the transmission gear 465 and the rack 466, and the transmission gear 465 and the rack 466
was likely to be damaged.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the sliding plate 466c on the other end side (opposite side of the shaft portion 466b) is
At the end position of the rack displacement (the position where the rack 466 protrudes most with respect to the movable rack 464), it is arranged below the transmission gear 465 (lower side in FIG. When the transmission gear 465 and the rack 466 mesh with each other, the displacement of the rack 466 at the position where the transmission gear 465 and the rack 466 are meshed can be suppressed. As a result, damage to the transmission gear 465 and the rack 466 can be suppressed.

The ball receiving portion 467 is a portion for holding a game ball, is formed in a substantially U shape in a front view, and is formed so as to be able to receive the ball inside the U shape. That is, the inner side of the U-shape of the ball receiving portion 467 is formed slightly larger than the outer shape of the ball. As a result, one ball can be inserted into the inner portion of the ball receiving portion 467 . Further, the ball receiving portion 467 includes a shaft hole 467b penetrating in the front-rear direction at the lower end position of the U shape,
It is mainly formed with a leg portion 467a protruding downward from the lower outer peripheral surface.

The shaft hole 467b is a shaft hole for rotatably holding the ball receiving portion 467 in the rack 466, as described above, and is formed with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 466b of the rack 466. Therefore, the ball receiving portion 467 can be rotatably held by inserting the shaft portion 466b of the rack 466 into the shaft hole 467b. After the shaft portion 466b is inserted into the shaft hole 467b, the biasing spring SP2 is arranged around the shaft portion 466b, and a screw or the like having a head larger than the inner diameter of the shaft hole 467b is fastened to the shaft portion 466b. be. As a result, the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged on the rack 466 while being biased clockwise in a front view. A detailed description of the form of the ball receiving portion 467 will be given later.

The leg portion 467a is a protrusion that biases the ball receiving portion 467 to be rotated by the biasing spring SP2. It is set at a position where it contacts the bottom wall portion 481 b of the case 481 . As a result, rotation of the ball receiving portion 467 can be restricted.

The case member 480 is a member that covers the front and rear of the base member 470 .
0 and a rear case 482 arranged on the rear side.

The front case 481 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long rectangular plate when viewed from the front. It is mainly formed with a shaft hole 481c penetrating in the front-rear direction.

The opening 481a is formed through the base member 470 in the front-rear direction, as described above.
When the front case 481 is arranged in the front case 481, the sliding plate 466c of the rack is inserted inside.

The bottom wall portion 481b protrudes from the lower end portion of the front case 481 toward the back side and extends in the left-right direction. Further, when the front case 481 is arranged on the base member 470, the bottom wall portion 481b is in a state in which the leg portion 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 is in contact with the upper surface thereof.

The rear case 482 is a plate member for arranging the control board 491 on the rear side of the base member 470 , and has a horizontally elongated rectangular shape that is smaller than the base member 470 when viewed from the front. In addition, the rear case 482 has a projection 482a projecting to the rear side.

As described above, the protrusion 482a is a connecting portion that is connected to the through hole 432b of the second link member 432, and is formed in a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the through hole 432b. Therefore, after inserting the protrusion 482a into the through hole 432b, the tip of the protrusion 482a is inserted into the through hole 432b.
The rear case 482 and the second link member 432 can be rotatably connected by fastening a screw or the like whose head is larger than the inner diameter of the rear case 482 .

The decorative member 450 is formed in an external shape that imitates a pattern or character, and the pattern or character is drawn on the surface. The decorative member 450 includes a front-side decorative portion 451 arranged on the front side of the front case 481 and a rear-side decorative portion 452 arranged on the rear side of the rear case 482 .
and are formed mainly. In this embodiment, a shark pattern (character) is drawn on the decorative member 450 .

The front-side decorative portion 451 is formed to have an outer diameter larger than the outer shape of the front case 481 when viewed from the front, and is attached to the front case 481 . As a result, the members (case member 480, base member 470, etc.) arranged on the back side of the front-side decorative portion can be made invisible to the player.

The back-side decorative portion 452 is arranged behind the upper end of the front-side decorative portion 451 . As a result, the members arranged on the back side of the front-side decorative portion 451 from above the back-side decorative portion 452 can be made invisible to the player.

A displacement member 492 is arranged on the same plane as the front-side decorative portion 451 in the front-rear direction. The displacement member 492 mainly includes a shaft portion 492a projecting to the rear side and a projection 492b.

The shaft portion 492 a is formed in a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft hole 481 c of the front case 481 . Therefore, by inserting the shaft portion 492a into the shaft hole 481c, the displacement member 492 can be rotatably connected to the front case. Moreover, the shaft portion 492 inserted into the shaft hole 481c
A biasing spring SP3 is arranged on the tip side of a. As a result, the displacement member 492 can be arranged in a biased state. A detailed description of the displacement of the displacement member 492 will be given later.

The shaft portion 492a collides with the collision portion 464f of the movable rack 464 described above, thereby transmitting a driving force to the displacement member 492 to rotate about the axis of the shaft portion 492a. That is, the movable rack 464 can rotationally displace the displacement member 492 as it is displaced.

Therefore, the lower displacement member 440 includes a displacement member 492 (displacement member) displaceably arranged on the lower displacement member 440 (base member), and the ball receiving portion 467 (displacement member) can hold a game ball. In addition, since the displacement member 492 is formed to be capable of being ejected and is displaceable when the game ball is ejected from the ball receiving portion 467, it is possible to suppress the lower displacement member 440 from rattling.

That is, when the game ball is shot from the ball receiving portion 467, the lower displacement member 440 is moved by the weight of the game ball.
When the position of the center of gravity is changed, for example, when adopting a configuration that displaces the displacement member 492 in a direction that offsets the change in the position of the center of gravity due to the launch of the game ball, the lower displacement member 440 accompanying the change in the position of the center of gravity Rattling can be suppressed. Also, when a game ball is shot from the ball receiving portion 467, the lower displacement member 440 receives a reaction accompanying the shooting of the game ball. When a displacing configuration is adopted, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of rattling of the lower displacement member 440 due to the reaction.

Further, as described above, when the cam member 422 is arranged at the position of the second displaced state, the force PW1 (see FIG. 56B) in the direction in which the cam member 422 rotates about the axis of the shaft portion 422a is applied. and the force PW2 (see FIG. 56(b)) in the direction in which the cam member 422 rotates about the axis of the shaft portion 422a act in the direction of canceling each other, and the cam member 422 is acted from the first link member 431. Can suppress rotation by force. Therefore, in the second displaced state, the cam member 422 and the link member 430 can be stably arranged. Therefore, when a game ball is shot from the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 at the position of the second displacement state, the first link member 431 or the cam member 422 swings due to the inertia force caused by the shooting of the game ball. can be suppressed.

Further, the displacing member 492 is displaced when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced so that the collision portion 464f collides with the shaft portion 492a. . That is, the drive motor KM2 for displacing the ball receiving portion 467 is
It can also be used as driving means for displacing the displacement member 492 . Therefore, the weight of the lower displacement member 440 can be reduced by that amount, making it easier to suppress rattling.

Further, since the displacement member 492 can be displaced in mechanical synchronization with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467, for example, the position of the ball receiving portion 467 is detected by a sensor device, and the displacement member 492 is moved according to the detection result. can be made unnecessary, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly, and the reliability of the displacement operation of the displacement member 492 with respect to the ball receiving portion 467 can be ensured.

Next, transition of the transmission mechanism 460 will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 64. FIG. Figure 6
1 is a front view of the lower displacement member 440 at the first position, FIG. 62 is a front view of the lower displacement member 440 at the second position, and FIG. 63 is a front view of the lower displacement member 440 at the third position. is. 64(a) to (c) are partial enlarged views of the lower displacement member 440. FIG.

Note that the first position is a position where the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged at a substantially central position in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 61) with respect to the base member 470 . The second position is a position where the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged on the lower side of the projecting wall 477 in the direction of gravity (lower side in FIG. 62). The third position is a position where the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged at the right end of the base member 470 in the left-right direction.

61 to 64, the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 440 and the front case 48
1 is seen transparently, and the outer shape of the bottom wall portion 481b of the front case 481 is illustrated with a dashed line. Further, FIGS. 64(a) and (b) sequentially illustrate transition states immediately before being displaced to the third position, and FIG. 64(c) illustrates the lower displacement member 440 at the third position.

As shown in FIG. 61 , the lower displacement member 440 at the first position is in a state where the movable rack 464 is positioned at the left end in the left-right direction with respect to the base member 470 . At the first position, the rack 466 is arranged in front of the movable rack 464, and the rack 466 and the movable rack 464 overlap in the front-rear direction. That is, like the movable rack 464 , the rack 466 is also positioned at the left end in the left-right direction with respect to the base member 470 . Therefore, the ball receiving portion 467 connected to the rack 466 is arranged at the substantially central position in the left-right direction with respect to the base member 470 .

In the first position, movable rack 464, rack 466 are mounted on base member 470, as described above.
are collected at the left end in the left-right direction. Here, since the lower displacement member 440 is slidably displaced and rotationally displaced (displaced from the retracted state to the first and second overhanging states), the position of the center of gravity of the lower displaceable member 440 is arranged near the axis of rotation. It is desirable to be in a state where

According to this embodiment, the transmission mechanism 460 for displacing the ball receiving portion 467 is in a state in which the movable rack 464 and the rack 466 are superimposed on each other (two-stage rack). It can be brought close to the grooves 411a and 411b (rotating shaft side of the lower displacement member 440).

Therefore, when the lower displacement member 440 is displaced from the retracted position to the first and second extended positions as described above, the lower displacement member 440 is set to the first position.
It is possible to reduce the driving force for rotationally displacing 0. Therefore, the energy consumption of the drive motor KM1 that displaces the lower displacement member 440 can be suppressed.

The displacement from the first position shown in FIG. 61 to the second position shown in FIG. 62 is performed by driving the drive motor KM2.

When the drive motor KM2 is driven from the first position, the transmission gear 461 connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM2 is rotated. Thereby, the transmission gear 462 and the transmission gear 463 are rotated. When the transmission gear 463 is rotated, a driving force is transmitted to the movable rack 464 from the rack gear 464 a meshing with the transmission gear 463 , and the movable rack 464 is slid rightward with respect to the base member 470 .

When the movable rack 464 is slid and displaced, the movable rack 46 is moved along with the sliding displacement.
4 is rotated by the rack gear 476 of the base member 470 . As a result, the driving force is transmitted to the rack 466 by the rack gear 466 a meshing with the transmission gear 465 . As a result, the rack 466 is slid rightward in the horizontal direction with respect to the movable rack 464, and the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the second position.

The displacement from the second position shown in FIG. 62 to the third position shown in FIG. 63 is performed by driving the drive motor KM2 in the same manner as the displacement from the first position to the second position. Since the transmission of drive from the drive motor KM2 to the rack 466 is the same as the displacement from the first position to the second position, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 63 and 64, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position, the ball receiving portion 46
7, the contact state between the leg portion 467a and the bottom wall portion 481b of the front case 481 is released, and the shaft portion 466b is rotated about the axis of the shaft hole 467b by the biasing force of the biasing spring SP2 disposed on the shaft portion 466b. .

More specifically, in the first and second positions (the state in which the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged on the left side of the ball receiving portion 467 in the third position in front view), the tip of the leg portion 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 It is in contact with the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 481b of the case 481, and is restricted from rotating clockwise in the front view about the shaft hole 467b by the biasing force of the biasing spring SP2.

On the other hand, when the tip portion of the leg portion 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position, the bottom wall portion 48
1b on the right side in front view, and the bottom wall portion 481b and the standing wall 4 of the base member 470
It is arranged inside the recessed portion 481b1 formed between the opposing portions 71a. Therefore, the ball receiving portion 46
7 is rotated about the axis of the shaft hole 467b by the biasing force of the biasing spring SP2. When the ball receiving portion 467 is rotated at the third position, the tip of the leg portion 467a comes into contact with the end face of the bottom wall portion 481b, and rotation of the ball receiving portion 467 around the shaft hole 467b is restricted. As a result, the ball receiving portion 467 is stopped at a position rotated approximately 40 degrees around the shaft hole 467b. In addition, below, the rotational displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 at the third position will be referred to as a shooting operation.

Further, a concave portion 481b1 is provided in a track area when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced from the first position to the third position direction (first direction). , recess 4
Since the leg 467a engaged with the 81b1 is provided, and the leg 467a is engaged with the recess 481b1, the posture can be changed. can be

Further, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced from the second position to the third position, the collision portion 464f is slid rightward in front view due to the displacement of the movable rack 464, and the protrusion 492 of the displacement member 492 is displaced.
collide with b. As a result, the displacement member 492 is rotationally displaced about the axis of the shaft portion 492a.

That is, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position, the ball receiving portion 467 is rotationally displaced and the displacement member 492 is rotationally displaced. Therefore, the ball receiving portion 467 performs a shooting operation, the ball is discharged from the inside of the ball receiving portion 467, and the lower displacement member 440 becomes lighter.
, and the inertial force that rotates and displaces the displacement member 492 can act in opposite directions. As a result, swinging of the lower displacement member 440 when a ball is ejected from the inside of the lower displacement member 440 can be suppressed.

Next, referring to FIG. 65, the operation of receiving the ball into the ball receiving portion 467 will be described. Figure 65
(a) to (c) are front views of the lower displacement member 440. FIG. 65(a) to (c)
, the transition state in which the ball is received into the ball receiving portion 467 is illustrated in order.

65(a) to (c), the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 440 and the front case 481 are seen transparently, and the outer shape of the bottom wall portion 481b of the front case 481 is illustrated by chain lines.

Further, in FIGS. 65(a) to 65(c), the horizontal direction in which the lower displacement member 440 is in the retracted state is indicated by a two-dot chain line with the symbol of the imaginary line H1, and the lower displacement member 440 is in the first tension position. The horizontal direction in the out state is indicated by a phantom line H2. Also, the angle by which the lower displacement member 440 is rotated from the position in the retracted state to the position in the first protruding state is illustrated with the symbol θ. The virtual line H1, the virtual line H2, and the angle θ are also illustrated in the drawings after FIG. 65 .

As shown in FIG. 65(a), in the lower displacement unit 400 in the retracted state (the longitudinal direction of the lower displacement member 440 is parallel to the imaginary line H1), the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 is moved to the first position. , a game ball T1 is thrown from a sorting unit 500 (to be described later) to an opening 451a formed in the front-side decorative portion 451 of the lower displacement member 440. As shown in FIG. The game ball T1 thrown to the opening 451a is thrown to the inside of the projecting wall 477 and is thrown to the inside of the lower displacement member 440. - 特許庁

As shown in FIG. 65(b), when the game ball T1 is thrown to the opening 451a, the lower displacement member 44
0 is displaced to the second position. Therefore, as described above, in the second position, the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged below the projecting wall 477, so that the game ball T1 thrown to the inside of the projecting wall 477 is moved to the inside of the ball receiving portion 467. I can throw. By receiving the game ball T1 in the ball receiving portion 467, the game ball T1 can be displaced with the operation of the ball receiving portion 467.

As shown in FIG. 65(c), when the game ball T1 is thrown to the ball receiving portion, the lower displacement member 440 is displaced to the first position. As a result, the first
A state in which the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged at the position can be obtained.

Here, a game machine is known that includes a base member, a base member displaceably arranged on one side of the base member, and a displacement member displaceably arranged on the base member. According to this gaming machine, in addition to an effect in which the base member is displaced between a projecting position in which the base member is projected into the game area and is visible to the player, and a retracted position in which the base member is retreated from the game area, It is possible to perform an effect of displacing the displacement member in the state of being arranged at the overhanging position.

However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, one side of the base member is displaceably disposed on the base member, so that when the displacement member is displaced, the base member rattles with respect to the base member with the one side as the dead point. There was a problem that sticking was likely to occur. In particular, when the displacement member is displaced from a stopped state, the change in acceleration is maximized, so the base member is likely to rattle due to the influence of inertial force.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the ball receiving portion 467 starts to be displaced from the second position,
and a mode in which displacement is started from a first position closer to one side of the lower displacement member 440 (base member) than the first position, and at least the lower displacement member 440 is at a predetermined position with respect to the base member 410. In the arranged state (for example, the first projecting state in which the lower displacement member 440 projects into the game area and is visible to the player), since the displacement starts from the first position, the lower displacement member 440 of the base member It is possible to suppress rattling. That is, the first position is more
Since the position is close to one side of the lower displacement member, by setting the first position as the displacement start position of the ball receiving portion 467, the weight of the ball receiving portion 467 is transferred to the base member 410 by the lower displacement member 440. On the other hand, it is possible to bring the lower displacement member 440 closer to the dead center when it rattles. As a result, rattling of the lower displacement member 440 can be easily suppressed.

Further, as described above, the lower displacement member 440 is slidably displaced and rotationally displaced (displaced from the retracted state to the first and second extended states). Therefore, when the lower displacement member 440 is rotationally displaced while the game ball T1 is disposed far from the rotation axis, centrifugal force is likely to occur in the game ball T1, and the game ball T1 moves to move the inner wall of the ball receiving portion 467. A collision sound is generated by collision with the game ball T1,
Alternatively, there is a problem that the ball receiving portion 467 is damaged.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, after receiving the game ball T1 in the ball receiving portion 467, the lower displacement member 440 can be displaced to the first position. It can be placed in the vicinity (brought closer). Therefore, the game ball T is placed on the lower displacement member 440
1, when the lower displacement member 440 is rotationally displaced (displaced from the retracted state to the first and second overhanging states), it is possible to suppress the generation of centrifugal force on the game ball T1. As a result, when the game ball T1 collides with the ball receiving portion 467, it is possible to suppress the generation of a collision sound or the breakage of the ball receiving portion 467.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the lower displacement member 440 is the transmission mechanism 4 that operates the ball receiving portion 467 .
60 is formed by a movable rack 464, a transmission gear 465 (pinion gear) and a rack 466 (rack member), and a ball receiving portion 467 is disposed on the rack 466, so that the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 starts from the first position. In some cases, not only the weight of the rack 466 but also the weights of the movable rack 464 and the rack 466 should be brought close to one side of the lower displacement member 440 (the fulcrum when the lower displacement member 440 rattles with respect to the base member 410). can be done. As a result, rattling of the lower displacement member 440 when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced from the stopped state can be easily suppressed.

Further, in the state where the game ball T1 is received in the ball receiving portion 467, the load of the lower displacement member 440 is increased by the load of the game ball T1. Therefore, as described above, by setting the lower displacement member 440 to the first position, the center of gravity of the lower displacement member 440 is aligned with the sliding groove 4 of the front base 411 .
11a, 411b side (rotating shaft side of the lower displacement member 440) can be easily moved. Therefore, when displacing the lower displacement member 440 from the retracted position to the first and second extended positions,
By setting the lower displacement member 440 to the first position, it is possible to reduce the driving force required to rotationally displace the lower displacement member 440 . Therefore, the energy consumption of the drive motor KM1 that displaces the lower displacement member 440 can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 66, the ball payout operation will be described. Figure 66 (a) to (c)
4] is a front view of the lower displacement member 440. [FIG. 66(a) to (c) sequentially show transition states of the lower displacement member 440 in the ball dispensing operation. Also, from FIG. 66(a) to (c
), the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 440 and the front case 481 are seen transparently, and the outer shape of the bottom wall portion 481b of the front case 481 is illustrated by chain lines. Furthermore, the ball payout operation is an operation to pay out the game ball T1 received in the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 from the emission opening 471 to the outside of the lower displacement member 440. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 66( a ) to 66 ( c ), the dispensing operation of dispensing the ball received in the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 sequentially displaces the lower displacement member 440 from the first position to the third position. It is done by

That is, by receiving the game ball T1 inside the ball receiving portion 467 in the receiving operation and displacing the lower displacement member 440 arranged at the first position to the third position, the game ball T1 is moved to the ball receiving portion 467. As it is displaced, it is transported to the exit opening 471 side. The game ball T1 moved to the side of the exit opening 471 is given an inertial force toward the exit opening 471 by the sliding displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 and the shooting operation of the ball receiving portion 467 at the third position. It pops out from the inside of the portion 467 . As a result, the ball can be ejected from inside the lower displacement member 440 .

Here, since the displacement direction when the ball receiving portion 467 (displacement member) starts to be displaced from the first position is the direction away from the position side of the lower displacement member 440, the ball receiving portion 467 is moved to the first position. In the arranged state, the rack 466 (rack member) can be brought closer to the base member 410 from one side of the lower displacement member 440 . That is, in order for the ball receiving portion 467 (rack 466) to be displaced away from one side of the lower displacement member 440, the rack 466 must move the transmission gear 465 ( rack gear 466a with which a pinion gear) is meshed
The side portion is directed to one side of the lower displacement member 440 . Therefore, the weight of the rack 466 can be brought closer to one side of the lower displacement member 440 (the fulcrum when the lower displacement member 440 rattles with respect to the base member 410). It is possible to easily suppress rattling of the lower displacement member 440 when it is displaced from the stopped state.

The ball receiving portion 467 is displaced in the direction of the third position (first direction), and when it reaches the third position, it is formed so that the posture can be changed. While making it easy to maintain the state held by the part 467 and suppressing the game ball T1 from falling off from the ball receiving part 467, the second
When the position is reached, the change in the posture of the ball receiving portion 467 is used to move the game ball T1 to the ball receiving portion 467.
can be easily dispensed from the inside of the

In addition, when the lower displacement member 440 is in the retracted state (the longitudinal direction of the lower displacement member 440 is arranged horizontally with the imaginary line H1), the ball receiving portion 467 shown in FIGS. When performing the action, the game ball put out to the outside of the lower displacement member 440 is thrown into the recovery port 411f.

On the other hand, when the lower displacement member 440 is in the first extended state (a state in which the longitudinal direction of the lower displacement member 440 is rotated by an angle θ from the virtual line H1), the ball receiving portion 467 is dispensed. 4
The game ball put out to the outside of 40 is thrown to the upper part of the ball cradle 710 of the rotating unit 700. - 特許庁

Next, referring to FIGS. 67 and 68, the ejection operation when two or more balls are thrown into the lower displacement member 440 will be described. Figures 67(a) to (c) and Figures 68(a) to (c)
) is a front view of the lower displacement member 440. FIG.

43(a) to (c) and FIGS. 44(a) to (c) illustrate the transition states of the discharging operation in order. 43(a) to (c) and FIGS. 44(a) to (c), the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 440 and the front case 481 are seen transparently, and the bottom wall portion 481b of the front case 481 is shown transparently. is indicated by a two-dot chain line.

As shown in FIGS. 67(a) to 67(c), when two or more balls are consecutively thrown from a sorting unit 500, which will be described later, the lower displacement member 440 is operated to receive the second ball. The game ball T2 can be dropped onto the displacement path of the ball receiving portion 467.

That is, the ball receiving portion 467 can be displaced from the first position to the second position to throw the first game ball T1 inside the ball receiving portion 467, and the second game ball T2 can be moved to the first ball. 67(b)). By displacing the ball receiving portion 467 to the first position after receiving the first game ball T1 at the second position, the ball receiving portion 467 receives the first game ball T1. 467 is displaced to the first position, and the second game ball T2 can be dropped onto the displacement path of the ball receiving portion 467.

Here, in a game machine that displaces a ball received in the ball receiving portion 467 at the second position to the third position by displacing the ball receiving portion 467, if a distributing member 540 of the distributing unit 500, which will be described later, malfunctions. There is a possibility that more than a specified number of game balls are thrown into the orbital area of the ball receiving portion 467, and in this case, there is a problem that the game balls exceeding the specified number may cause a problem. For example, the transmission mechanism 4 that drives the ball receiving portion 467 for game balls exceeding the specified number
60 and get caught in the moving parts, there is a risk of causing damage. Alternatively, game balls exceeding the specified number are outside the game area (for example, the back side of the game board 13 or the back case 3
00 inside).

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, the ball receiving portion 467 is formed to be displaceable from the second position to the first position opposite to the throwing direction of the ball. The track area can be expanded. Therefore, for example, even if the distributing member 540 malfunctions and more than the specified number of game balls are thrown, the ball receiving portion 467 expands the trajectory area, so that the game balls exceeding the specified number are distributed. Can be accepted in the orbital area. As a result, game balls exceeding the specified number,
It can be moved as the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position. Therefore, the game balls exceeding the specified number can be prevented from entering the transmission mechanism 460 for driving the ball receiving portion 467 and flowing out of the game area. It is possible to make it difficult to cause problems caused by the ball.

In addition, the ball receiving portion 467 is capable of receiving and holding one game ball T1 thrown from a sorting unit 500 (described later) at the second position, and moving from the second position to the first position (second direction). ) to at least a distance exceeding the diameter of the game ball,
After receiving one game ball at the second position, move the ball receiving portion 467 from the second position to the third direction (
By displacing it in the first direction), the game balls exceeding the specified number are moved to the trajectory area of the ball receiving portion 467 (
The ball can be thrown to the area in the first direction from 467 of the ball receiving portion. Therefore, the second and subsequent game balls T2 can be moved as the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced in the third position direction (first direction).

In this case, the ball receiving portion 467 holds the first game ball T1, and the second and subsequent game balls T2 can be thrown to the trajectory area of the ball receiving portion 467. Game ball T after the ball eye
2 can be separated. Therefore, for example, by displacing the ball receiving portion 467 in the third position direction (first direction), while maintaining the state in which the ball receiving member holds the first game ball T1,
It is possible to perform the operation of discharging only the game balls T2 after the ball from the trajectory area.

Further, after the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the second position to receive the first ball, it is displaced to the third position to discharge the game ball T1 from the inside of the ball receiving portion 467. game ball T2
drops to the upper part of the rack 466, and the second game ball T2
There is a possibility that the second game ball T2 cannot be discharged to the outside of the lower displacement member 440.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, after receiving the game ball T1 inside the ball receiving portion 467 at the second position, the receiving operation for receiving the ball in the ball receiving portion 467 is performed at the first position opposite to the exit opening 471. Since the second game ball T2 can be displaced to the outside of the lower displacement member 440, it can be suppressed that it cannot be discharged.

In other words, in a gaming machine equipped with a role object that performs a discharge operation for discharging a game ball thrown into the role object, the motion of the member for discharging the ball (the ball receiving portion 467 in this embodiment) is adjusted to the position where the ball is received. (second position) and the ball discharging position (third position), when two or more game balls are thrown into the accessory, the ball is discharged from the member for discharging the ball. Exit (exit aperture 471)
However, in this embodiment, after receiving the first game ball T1, the ball receiving portion 467 is moved to the first By displacing it to the position, the second game ball T2 can be thrown between the ball receiving portion 467 and the exit opening 471. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 68(a) to (c), after throwing the second game ball T2 onto the displacement path of the ball receiving portion 467, the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position before the shooting operation. 2
It is possible to roll the game ball T2 in contact with the ball receiving portion 467 toward the exit opening 471 side. As a result, the second game ball T2 can be ejected from the ejection opening 471. FIG.

In this case, the lower end surface of the U-shaped portion of the ball receiving portion 467 is above the center position of the second game ball T2 thrown on the displacement path of the ball receiving portion 467 (upward in FIG. 68(a)). placed in In addition, when the leg portion 467a is in contact with the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 481b, it is arranged in a state of being inclined approximately 45 degrees with respect to the contact surface with the bottom wall portion 481b. Furthermore, since the right side of the U-shape of the ball receiving portion 467 (the right side in FIG. 68(a)) is arranged at the same position in the vertical direction as the right end of the leg portion 467a, the second game ball The outer surface of T2 can abut leg 467a.

In addition, since the leg portion 467a is inclined approximately 45 degrees with respect to the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 481b, the outer surface of the lower hemisphere of the second game ball T2 (lower hemisphere on the side of the bottom wall portion 481b) abutted.
As a result, when the second game ball T2 rolls toward the exit opening 471, the inclined surface of the leg portion 467a can generate a force that lifts the second game ball T2 upward. Therefore,
The frictional force between the second game ball T2 and the bottom wall portion 481b can be reduced when the second game ball T2 rolls on the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 481b. As a result, when the second game ball T2 rolls toward the exit opening 471, it is possible to prevent the ball receiving portion 467 from being stopped.

In other words, the leg portion 467a protrudes from the ball receiving portion 467 in the direction from the first position to the third position (first direction), and the tip of the projecting portion extends along the track of the ball receiving portion 467. Since the ball receiving portion 467 is formed so as to be able to contact the lower half surface of the game ball (that is, the game ball T2 after the second ball) thrown to the area, the ball receiving portion 467 moves from the first position to the third position direction (first direction). When the game ball is displaced, the lower half of the game ball can be moved while being pushed by the leg portion 467a. As a result, the second and subsequent game balls T2 can be easily discharged from the orbit area of the ball receiving portion 467. FIG.

In addition, the leg portion 467a is provided between the first game ball T1 held by the ball receiving portion 467 and the game ball (the second and subsequent game balls T2) thrown to the trajectory area of the ball receiving portion 467. By interposing, the distance between the first game ball T1 and the second and subsequent game balls T2 can be ensured by the projecting length of the leg portion 467a. Therefore, while maintaining the state in which the ball receiving portion 467 holds the first game ball T1, only the second and subsequent game balls T2 can be easily discharged from the track area.

Furthermore, since the leg portion 467a serves both to change the posture of the ball receiving portion 467 and to move the game ball while pushing its lower half surface, the number of parts can be reduced accordingly. It is possible to reduce the product cost by reducing it.

Also, since the size of the concave portion 481b1 in the direction from the first position to the third position (first direction) is smaller than the diameter of the game ball, the game ball thrown to the trajectory area of the ball receiving portion 467 (that is, When the second and subsequent game balls T2) are moved along with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 in the first direction, they can easily pass through the recessed portion 481b1. As a result, the second and subsequent game balls T2 can be easily ejected from the trajectory area.

As described above, when the lower displacement unit 400 is placed in the retracted state, the lower displacement member 440
The recovery port 411f is arranged below the emission aperture 471 of the . Therefore, the game ball T2 ejected in the retracted state is thrown to the recovery port 411f.

On the other hand, when the lower displacement unit 400 is arranged in the first overhanging state, the recovery port 411f is positioned below the emission opening 471 . Further, the opening of the recovery port 411f is opened on the upper side. Therefore, the ejected game ball T2 is thrown to the recovery port 411f.

That is, the recovery port 411f is located on the first direction side (upright wall 471a side) of the base member 470.
The ball receiving portion 467
is moved in the third position direction (first direction), and the game balls discharged from the track area of the ball receiving portion 467 (that is, the game balls T2 after the second ball) are returned to the opening of the recovery port 411f. can be received and collected from

In addition, the opening of the recovery port 411f is perpendicular to the end of the base member 470 on the first direction side (upright wall 471a side) at least in each of the retracted state, the first extended state, and the second extended state. direction downward. As a result, even when the lower displacement unit 400 is displaced to any of the retracted position, the first extended state, and the second extended state, the game ball discharged from the track area of the ball receiving portion 467 (that is, the second ball The subsequent game balls T2) can be received and collected from the opening of the collecting member.

67(a) to 68(c) and FIGS. When performing the ejection operation of the ball receiving portion 467 shown in , the game ball paid out to the outside of the lower displacement member 440 is
The ball is thrown inside the recovery port 411f. Further, when the ball receiving portion 467 is ejected while the lower displacement member 440 is in the first extended state (the longitudinal direction of the lower displacement member 440 is rotated by an angle θ from the virtual line H1), the lower displacement member The game balls put out to the outside of 440 are thrown to the recovery port 411f as described above.

Next, referring to FIG. 69, the configuration when the second game ball T2 is ejected from the ejection opening 471 will be described. 69(a) is a partially enlarged view of the lower displacement member 440 in the range LXIXa of FIG. 68(b), and FIG. 69(b) is a partially enlarged view of the lower displacement member 440 in the range LXIXb of FIG. 68(a). It is a diagram.

As shown in FIG. 69, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position immediately before the shooting operation, the game ball T2 is brought into contact with the side surface of the ball receiving portion 467 on the erected wall 471a side, and the exit opening is opened. 471 can be extruded to the outside of the lower displacement member 440 .

In this case, when the leg portion 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 is inserted between the bottom wall portion 481b and the standing wall 471a and the ball receiving portion 467 rotates, the game ball T2 and the ball receiving portion 467 come into contact with each other. By doing so, the rotational force of the ball receiving portion 467 can be transmitted to the game ball T2. As a result, the game ball T2 can be easily discharged from the exit opening 471. - 特許庁In addition, it is possible to return the ball receiving portion 467 to the state before the rotating operation by utilizing the repulsive force when the ball receiving portion 467 is brought into contact with the game ball T2. Therefore, when discharging the game ball T2 thrown to the orbit area of the ball receiving portion 467, the ball receiving portion 46
It is possible to suppress the dropping of the first game ball T1 held at 7.

Furthermore, the lower displacement member 440 is such that the ball receiving portion 467 is moved from the second position to the third position direction (first direction).
The recess 481b is erected at a height lower than the radius of the game ball in the trajectory area when displacing to
A standing wall 471a located on the first direction side of the ball receiving portion 467 is provided, and the second and subsequent game balls thrown to the orbital area of the ball receiving portion 467 move along with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 in the first direction. When the game ball T2 is moved, it is brought into contact with the standing wall 471a and the ball receiving portion 467, and the posture change of the ball receiving portion 467 is formed to be regulated. While maintaining the state held by the ball receiving part 467, only the game balls after the second ball can be easily discharged from the track area.

That is, the erected wall 471a is erected so that the height from the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 481b to the erected tip is lower than the radius of the game ball, so that the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced in the first direction. When the game ball T2 is moved by being pushed by the leg along with the movement, the lower half surface of the game ball T2 is brought into contact with the standing wall 471a,
The game ball can easily get over the standing wall 471a. In this case, the game ball T2 is brought into contact with the ball receiving portion 467 (that is, the game ball T2 is interposed between the ball receiving portion 467 and the standing wall 471a).
Since a reaction force can be applied from the game ball T2 to the ball receiving portion 467, the posture change of the ball receiving portion can be regulated, and the first game ball held by the ball receiving portion 467 can be prevented from falling off. can be suppressed.
As a result, while maintaining the state in which the ball receiving portion 467 holds the first game ball, only the second and subsequent game balls T2 can be easily discharged from the game area.

On the other hand, when the second and subsequent game balls T2 are not thrown into the trajectory area of the ball receiving portion 467, no game ball is interposed between the erected wall 471a and the ball receiving portion 467. Part 467a
is engaged with the concave portion 481b1, the posture of the ball receiving portion 467 can be changed. As a result, using the change in the posture of the ball receiving portion 467, the first game ball T1 (that is, the ball receiving portion 4
67) can be easily discharged from the ball receiving part 467.例文帳に追加

Next, the sorting unit 500 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 70 to 72. FIG. 70(a) is a top view of the sorting unit 500, and FIG. 70(b) is a rear view of the sorting unit 500. FIG. 71 is an exploded front perspective view of the sorting unit 500, and FIG. 72 is an exploded rear perspective view of the sorting unit 500. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 70 to 72, the sorting unit 500 includes a base plate 520 formed in a substantially rectangular plate-like body when viewed from the front, and a base plate 520 attached to the front side of the base plate 520 and facing the base plate 520. A path-forming member 510 that forms a plurality of flow-down paths through which balls can flow down, and a base plate 52
A distribution member 540 rotatably attached to the back side of 0, and an extension that extends the flow-down path of the spheres that is attached to the end face of the base plate 520 and formed between the base plate 520 and the path forming member 510 facing each other. The path member 530 is mainly provided.

The base plate 520 includes a columnar shaft portion 523 protruding toward the rear side, a first opening 521 penetrating in an arc shape centering on the axis of the shaft portion 523 , and a radius larger than that of the first opening 521 . A second opening 522 penetrating in a large circular arc shape, a rolling part 525 having a U-shaped cross section with an open upper end side and extending in the left-right direction, and a hook-like protrusion on the back side. It is mainly formed with a locking portion 524 that engages.

The shaft portion 523 is inserted into a shaft hole 545 of the distributing member 540 to be described later, and the distributing member 54
0 is attached to the base member in a rotatable state, and is formed to have an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft hole 545 .

The first opening 521 and the second opening 522 are openings through which the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542 of the distribution member 540, which will be described later, are inserted. It is formed. Also, the distribution member 540 is rotatably attached to the base plate 5 .
20, the arc length of the first opening 521 and the second opening 522 is formed to be larger than the circumferential dimension of the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542 when viewed from the front.

The locking portion 524 is an engaging portion that locks the urging spring SP4 with a locking portion 544 formed in the distribution member 540, and one end of the urging spring SP4 is locked.

The rolling part 525 is a bottom surface on which the ball rolls, and is inclined downward toward one end on the left side in the rear view (left side in FIG. 70(b)) and has a U-shaped curved shape. It is formed larger than the outer shape of the sphere. Therefore, the ball rolling on the rolling portion 525 can be prevented from stopping at the rolling portion, and the ball can roll toward the one end side.

Further, the rolling part 525 includes a plurality of protrusions 525 protruding from the front and rear side surfaces toward the inside of the U shape.
and an opening 525a that opens to the rear side at the end on one end side.

The protrusions 525b are formed on the front and rear side surfaces at regular intervals, and are formed at positions where the protrusions 525b formed on the front side and the protrusions 525b formed on the back side are alternated when viewed from the front. Therefore, the ball rolling on the rolling portion 525 can collide with the projection 525b, so that the rolling speed of the ball rolling on the rolling portion 525 can be reduced.

Here, as described above, the ball is thrown to the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement unit 400 while the ball receiving portion 467 is placed at the first position (FIGS. 65(a) and 65(b)). )reference).
Therefore, when the game ball rolling on the rolling portion 525 of the third ball path KR3 is thrown faster, the game ball is thrown into the lower displacement member 440 before the ball receiving portion 467 moves to the second position. there is a risk of being

On the other hand, in this embodiment, a plurality of projections 525b projecting from the inner surface of the rolling portion 525 of the third ball-throwing route KR3 are formed so that a game ball passing through the rolling portion 525 of the third ball-throwing route KR3 Since resistance can be applied, the speed of the game ball passing through the third throwing path KR3 can be slowed down. Therefore, the time required for the ball receiving portion 467 to be displaced from the switching position (first position) to the receiving position (second position) can be lengthened accordingly.
7 can be made to reliably receive the game ball. In addition, the output of the displacement speed of the drive motor KM2 can be reduced by the amount that the displacement speed required for the ball receiving portion 467 can be reduced, and the product cost can be reduced.

The opening 525a is formed open on the back side of one end of the rolling part 525, and its external shape in rear view is formed to be larger than the size of a sphere. Therefore, the ball rolling on the rolling portion 525 toward one end is discharged from the opening 525a.

The path forming member 510 is formed in the shape of a rectangular plate having a width in the left-right direction smaller than that of the base plate 520, and a plurality of walls larger than the outer diameter of the game ball are formed on the back side. By forming the space between the opposing spheres to be larger than the outer diameter of the sphere, a plurality of flow-down paths of the sphere are formed inside.

The path forming member 510 has a first opening 511 that opens in the upper end surface, a first ball throwing path KR1 formed between opposing side walls of the first opening 511, and a second ball throwing path connected to the first ball throwing path KR1. A second opening 512 and a third opening 513 that open in the side surface of the path forming member 510 at the ends of KR2 and the third ball throwing path KR3, and the second opening 512 and the third opening 513 that are formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction. a plurality of openings 514, 515, 516 and openings 514, 515, 5
16, and a fourth opening 517 opening in the side surface of the path forming member 510 at the end of the fourth ball throwing path KR4.

The first opening 511 is an opening for allowing a ball thrown from a ball-throwing unit 600, which will be described later, to flow into the sorting unit. formed large. Also, the first opening 511 is the ball throwing unit 60
0 to allow the ball thrown from the ball throwing unit 600 to flow in.

The first ball feeding path KR1 is a path through which the ball that has flowed in from the first opening 511 flows down between the base plate 520 and the path forming member 510, and is formed extending downward. In addition, the fourth ball throwing path KR4 is formed by extending approximately one third of the path forming member 510 in the vertical direction, and the downstream end is connected to the second ball throwing path KR2 and the third ball throwing path KR3. be done. Namely
A ball flowing down the first ball-throwing path KR1 is formed so as to be able to flow down the second ball-throwing path KR2 or the third ball-throwing path KR3.

The second ball-throwing route KR2 is a route formed by being connected to the first ball-throwing route KR1, and the downstream end thereof is connected to the second opening 512, as described above. That is, when the ball that flows down the first ball-throwing path KR1 from the first opening 511 flows down the second ball-throwing path KR2, the second opening 511
12 to the outside of the sorting unit 500 .

The second opening 512 is connected to a recovery path (not shown) for recovering balls. Therefore, the balls discharged from the second opening are recovered by the recovery path. Also, the inside of the second opening 512 (the second
A sensor device SE2 for detecting passage of a game ball is arranged at the downstream end of the ball throwing route KR2. Therefore, the sensor device SE1 detects the number of game balls passing through the third winning hole 82, and the sensor device SE2 detects the number of game balls passing through the second ball throwing path KR2. The number of game balls passing through the route KR3 can be detected.

In other words, it is possible to detect whether or not a predetermined number (one ball) of game balls are stored upstream of the regulating plate 541, which will be described later, based on the difference between the sensor devices SE1 and SE1. For example, when the third electric accessory 82a is opened once, the number of balls passing through the third prize winning opening 82 (sensor device SE1) is eight, and the ball passing through the second ball throwing route KR2 (sensor device SE2). If the number is 7,
It can be detected that one game ball has flowed down (stored) in the third throwing path KR3.

As described above, the third ball throwing route KR3 is a route formed by being connected to the first ball throwing route KR1, and the downstream end thereof is connected to the third opening 513 . That is, when the ball flowing down the first ball-throwing path KR1 from the first opening 511 flows down the third ball-throwing path KR3, the third opening 5
13 is discharged.

The third opening 513 is formed above the other end of the rolling portion 525 of the base plate 520 (the end opposite to the opening 525a). Therefore, the ball ejected from the third opening 513 is
The ball is thrown inside the That is, the ball thrown to the third ball path KR3 is thrown to the rolling portion 525 through the third opening 513. As shown in FIG.

The openings 514 to 516 are respectively formed on the back side of the third prize winning opening 82 formed in the game board 13, and the winning ball in the third winning opening 82 is thrown. That is, when the ball flowing down the game area on the front side of the game board 13 wins the third prize winning opening 82, the ball is sent to the inside of the sorting unit 500 from the openings 514 to 516.

The fourth throwing path KR4 is formed by connecting to the openings 514 to 516, and is formed downstream by 1
, and connected to a fourth opening formed in the lower end surface of the path forming member 510 . The fourth opening is connected to a recovery path (not shown) for recovering balls. Therefore, the ball that has won the third prize winning port 82 of the game board 13 is ejected from the fourth opening 517 and collected after being thrown to the fourth ball throwing path KR4 of the sorting unit 500 .

The extension path member 530 is formed to have a U-shaped cross section with an open bottom and extends in the left-right direction. Further, the extension path member 530 is formed such that the inner diameter of the U-shape is larger than the outer diameter of the sphere. Therefore, by being arranged above the rolling portion 525 of the base plate 520, a ball thrown to the upper portion of the rolling portion 525 can be thrown inside the rolling portion 525 and the extension path member 530. , the ball rolling on the rolling portion can be prevented from falling from the rolling portion 525 .

Further, the extension path member 530 has projections 531 formed at the same positions in the left-right direction as the projections 525b formed on the rolling portion 525 at regular intervals. As a result, the rolling speed of the ball rolling on the rolling portion 525 can be slowed down, similar to the projection 525b.

The distribution member 540 is formed in a rectangular shape in front view with one side being longer, and is formed with a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction. The distribution member 540 includes a regulating plate 541 protruding in the form of a plate on the front side.
and a storage plate 542, a shaft hole 545 formed through one end of the upper portion, and a locking portion 544 formed in a hook shape on the rear side.

The shaft hole 545 is a through hole into which the shaft portion 523 of the base plate 520 is inserted, as described above, and is formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction. The distributing member 540 is attached to the shaft portion 523 of the base plate 520 .
is inserted into the shaft hole 545, and a screw or the like having a head larger than that of the shaft hole is inserted from the rear side into the shaft portion 523.
It is attached to the base plate 520 in a rotatable state by fastening to the base plate 520 .

The restricting plate 541 is arranged at the connecting portion between the first ball-throwing path KR1 and the second ball-throwing path KR2 through the first opening 521, and prevents the ball flowing down the first ball-throwing path KR1 from flowing into the second ball-throwing path KR2. It is formed so as to protrude forward from the front end face of the shaft hole 545, and the distance from the base plate 520 to the front side is set larger than the radius of the sphere.

Further, the regulation plate 541 is curved in an arc shape centering on the axis of the shaft hole 545 . As a result, when the distribution member 540 is rotationally displaced about the axis of the shaft hole 545, the restriction plate 54
1 displacement area can be minimized.

The storage plate 542 is a plate member that is arranged on the second ball-throwing path KR2 through the second opening 522 and stores the ball flowing down the second ball-throwing path KR2 on the upstream side of the storage plate 542. It is formed to protrude toward the front side from the end face on the front side, and the distance from the base plate 520 to the front side is set larger than the radius of the sphere.

Further, the storage plate 542 is curved in an arc shape centering on the axis of the shaft hole 545 , and the radius of the arc is formed larger than the radius of the curved portion of the regulation plate 541 . Therefore,
The storage plate 542 is formed at a position spaced apart from the shaft hole 545 more than the regulation plate 541 . As a result, the restricting plate 541 can be protruded from the connecting portion between the first ball-throwing route KR1 and the second ball-throwing route KR2, and the storage plate 542 can be arranged on the second ball-throwing route KR2.
Furthermore, the displacement area when the distribution member 540 is rotationally displaced about the axis of the shaft hole 545 can be minimized.

The projecting portion 543 is a drive transmission member that applies a rotational driving force to the distributing member 540 by colliding with the contact plate 464c of the lower displacement member 440 described above. It is formed. That is, a projection 543 to which driving force is transmitted is formed on the side opposite to the one end side where the shaft hole 545 serving as the rotating shaft of the distribution member 540 is formed. Thereby, the force with which the contact plate 464c of the lower displacement member 440 collides can be reduced.

Therefore, the driving force of the drive motor KM3 that displaces the contact plate 464c can be reduced, so that the energy consumption of the drive motor KM3 can be reduced. In addition, since the energy generated when the contact plate 464c collides with the protrusion 543 during driving can be reduced, the collision noise can be reduced when the contact plate 464c and the protrusion 543 collide. In addition,
A detailed aspect of the collision between the contact plate 464c and the protrusion 543 will be described later.

Further, a bulging portion 543a that bulges in a circular shape is formed at a portion of the projecting tip of the projection 543 that contacts the contact plate 464c. By bringing the contact plate 464c into contact with the bulging portion 543a, the contact area between the contact plate and the distribution member 540 can be reduced. Therefore, the distribution member 5
40 can be rotationally displaced, the frictional resistance between the protrusion 543 (bulging portion 543a) and the contact plate 464c can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the energy consumption of the drive motor KM3.

The locking portion 544 is connected to the locking portion 524 of the base plate 520 by the biasing spring SP as described above.
4 is the part that locks. Therefore, since the other end side of the distribution member 540 can always apply a rotating force toward the locking portion 524 side, the vibration of the distribution member 540 due to the vibration of the pachinko machine 10 or the like can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 73, a detailed description will be given of the ball flow path of the sorting unit 500. FIG. FIG. 73 is a cross-sectional view of the sorting unit 500 along line LXXIII-LXXIII in FIG. 70(a). In addition, in FIG. 73, the distribution member 540 is illustrated with a dashed line. Also, FIG. 73 illustrates a state in which the distribution member 540 is arranged at the storage position.

Here, the state in which the sorting member 540 is arranged at the storage position means the state in which the sorting member 540 is rotated by the biasing force of the biasing spring SP4 and the storage plate 542 is arranged on the second ball throwing path KR2. .

As shown in FIG. 73, the first ball throwing route KR1 has a base plate 52 at its lower end side.
0 (horizontal direction in FIG. 73), and the tilted portion is gently curved in an S shape. In addition, the S-shaped curved tip portion is connected to the third throwing path KR3, and the second throwing path KR2 is tilted at the end of the first throwing path KR1 in the direction opposite to the tilting direction of the first throwing path KR1. connected in the state of

As a result, the ball flowing down the first throwing path KR1 collides with the lower surface of the inclined portion,
The flowing direction of the ball can be directed from the direction of gravity to the tilting direction of the first throwing path KR1.
Therefore, the ball can flow down toward the entrance of the third ball-throwing route KR3 (the connecting portion between the first ball-throwing route KR1 and the third ball-throwing route KR3). Therefore, in a state where the distribution member 540 is not arranged, the ball flowing down the first ball throwing route KR1 can be thrown to the third ball throwing route KR3.

Here, a flow-down path along which a game ball flows down, a first branch passage and a second branch passage branched from the flow-down passage, and a game ball flowing down the flow-down passage to either the first branch passage or the second branch passage A game machine that distributes is known.

However, the conventional game machine has a structure in which the game balls flowing down the flow-down passage are alternately distributed one by one to the first branch passage and the second branch passage. It is distributed evenly (that is, half by half) to the passage and the second branch passage. That is, there is a problem that the number of game balls distributed to the first branch passage cannot be changed.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a ball receiving portion 467 formed displaceably and receiving a game ball from the third ball-throwing path KR3 is provided, and a contact plate 464c interlocking with the ball receiving portion 467 contacts the distribution member 540. Since the distributing member 540 is displaced by contacting and displacing, the ball receiving portion 46
7, the number of game balls distributed to the third ball throwing route KR3 or the second ball throwing route can be changed. That is, the number of game balls distributed to the third throwing route KR3 can be changed.

It should be noted that the displacement of the distribution member 540 is determined by utilizing the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467.
can be displaced, there is no need to separately provide a driving means or a transmission mechanism for displacing the distributing member 540 . Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced accordingly, and the product cost can be reduced.

Further, for example, in a structure that controls the displacement of the sorting member 540 using position detection by a sensor device and driving by a driving means, malfunction due to detection failure or control failure may reduce the reliability of the sorting operation of the sorting member. Inevitably, according to this embodiment, the distribution destination by the distribution member 540 can be switched in mechanical synchronization with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467, so that the reliability of the distribution operation can be improved.

In particular, the ball receiving portion 467 is a member that receives a game ball from the rolling portion 525 of the third ball-throwing route KR3.
By switching to the throwing path, the game ball distributed to the third throwing path KR3 can be reliably received by the displacement member.

Furthermore, in the conventional game machine, the game balls flowing down the flow-down path are only distributed to either the first branch passage or the second branch passage.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the distribution destination by the regulation plate 541 (distribution means) is the third
In the state of the ball-throwing route KR3 (first branched passage), the downflow of the game ball in the third path is regulated, and in the state of the second ball-throwing route KR2 (second branched passage), the distribution destination by the distribution member 540 is set. Since the storage plate 542 (flowing state changing means) that allows the game ball to flow down in the third ball throwing route KR3 is provided, it is possible to give interest to the player.

That is, when the third throwing path is set as the distribution destination by the regulating plate 541, the third throwing path KR3
When the control plate 541 designates the second ball route KR2 as the distribution destination, the third ball route KR3
, and the game balls stored in the third throwing path KR3 can be allowed to flow down (released). As a result, in addition to the action of allocating game balls flowing down the first ball-throwing route KR1 (flowing-down route) to either the third ball-throwing route KR3 or the second ball-throwing route KR2,
It is possible to form an action to flow down (release) the game ball distributed to the third throwing path KR3. Furthermore, these storage and release operations can be alternately formed in conjunction with the sorting operation. As a result, it is possible to give interest to the player.

In addition, since the distribution member 540 (integrated member) in which the regulation plate 541 (dividing means) and the storage plate 542 (flow state changing means) are integrally formed, the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542
simplification of the structure for operating and improvement in reliability of operation can be achieved. This complicates the structure for operating the two parts and lowers the reliability of the operation.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542 can be formed as a single part, the structure can be simplified accordingly, and the product cost can be reduced and the reliability of operation can be improved. be able to.

Furthermore, the sorting member 540 is positioned between the storage position (first state position) and the regulation position (second state position).
, and when the distribution member 540 is displaced to the storage position, the regulation plate 5
41 is arranged at a position where the third ball-throwing route KR3 (first branch passage) is the distribution destination, and the storage plate 542 is arranged at a position for regulating the flow of game balls in the third ball-throwing route KR3, and the distribution member 540 is arranged to regulate When displaced to the position, the regulation plate 541 is arranged at the position where the second ball throwing route KR2 is the distribution destination, and the storage plate 542 is arranged at the position allowing the game ball to flow down the third ball throwing route. By displacing the distribution member 540 between two positions (storage position and regulation position), game balls flowing down the first ball-throwing route KR1 (flowing-down passage) are moved to the third ball-throwing route KR3.
Alternatively, in addition to the action of allocating to one of the second throwing paths, the action of temporarily stopping (accumulating) the flow of game balls distributed to the third throwing path KR3 and the stopped (accumulated) game balls flowing down. It is also possible to alternately form these storage and release actions in conjunction with the sorting action. That is, it is possible to simplify the structure, reduce the product cost, and improve the operational reliability.

The distribution member 540 (integral member) is rotatably formed, and the storage plate 542 (flowing state changing means) is formed so as to be able to protrude and retract from the third ball throwing route KR3 (first branch passage). By protruding to KR3, the game ball is restricted from flowing down, and since it is formed in an arc-shaped curved shape centered on the rotation axis of the distribution member 540, the third ball throw path KR3 is formed for the appearance and disappearance of the regulation plate 541. The area of the hole (recess 519) opened in the inner wall of the can be reduced.

Since the storage plate 542 (flowing-down state changing means) is arranged in such a manner that the upstream side of the third ball throwing route KR3 (first branch passage) is concave, the storage plate 542 protrudes toward the third ball throwing route KR3. In the initial state (that is, the state in which only the tip side of the flow state changing means protrudes into the passage), the shape of the tip side of the storage plate 542 can be arranged in a direction that facilitates regulating the flow of the game ball, It is possible to easily regulate the flow of game balls distributed to the third throwing route KR3.

In addition, in a state where the storage plate 542 protrudes to the third ball-throwing path to the maximum and restricts the downflow of the game ball, the concave portion of the storage plate 542 can stably hold the game ball, so that the game ball can be prevented from running wild.

The sorting unit 500 applies a biasing force to the sorting member 540 (integral member), and a biasing spring SP4 (biasing means ), and the distance from the regulation plate 541 to the rotation axis of the distribution member 540 is the regulation plate 541
to the rotation axis of the distributing member 540, the biasing force of the biasing spring SP4 is used to set the distributing member 540 in a posture in which the storage plate 542 protrudes toward the third emergency path (that is, the storage position ) can be easily maintained.

In this case, since the distance from the storage plate 542 to the rotation axis of the distribution member 540 is made larger than the distance from the regulation plate 541 to the rotation axis of the distribution member 540, when the falling game balls collide, the rotation axis Since the distance from the storage plate 542 is large, even if the same impact force acts
is likely to be immersed, the urging direction of the urging spring SP4 is that the storage plate 542 is in the third throwing path KR
3, it is possible to suppress the storage plate 542 from sinking into the concave portion 519 by the amount of the urging force.

In addition, since the distribution member 540 (integrated member) is rotated in the direction in which the storage plate 542 (flowing-down state changing means) protrudes into the third ball throwing path (first branch path) due to its own weight, the weight of the distribution member 540 is utilized. The distribution member 540 can be easily maintained in the posture (that is, the storage position) in which the storage plate 542 protrudes toward the third ball throwing path KR3. Therefore, when the game ball collides, it is possible to suppress the storage plate 542 from sinking into the concave portion 519 by its own weight.

Further, even if the biasing spring SP4 (biasing means) falls off, the distribution member 540 is maintained in a posture in which the regulation plate 541 protrudes toward the third ball throwing route KR3 due to its own weight, and the game moves toward the third ball throwing route KR3. You can suppress the ball from flowing down.

Further, a biasing spring SP4 is provided to apply a biasing force to the distribution member 540 to maintain the distribution destination of the distribution member 540 to either the third ball throwing route KR3 or the second ball throwing route KR2. By displacing the ball 540 in the direction against the direction of the biasing spring SP4, the distribution destination by the distribution member 540 is switched to the other of the third ball throwing route KR3 and the second ball throwing route KR2, and the biasing force of the biasing spring , the distribution destination by the distribution member 540 is returned to either the third ball throwing route KR3 or the second ball throwing route KR2.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the distribution destination of the distribution member 540 from being carelessly switched. In this case, the distributing member 540 is displaced with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467, and after the distributing destination is switched, the return to the distributing destination before switching can be performed by the biasing force of the biasing spring SP4. Therefore, the contact plate 464c interlocked with the ball receiving portion 467
It can be made unnecessary to be in contact with. That is, the abutment plate 464 c interlocked with the ball receiving portion 467 can be separated from the distribution member 540 . Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the movable range of the ball receiving portion 467 can be increased.

Next, displacement of the distribution member 540 will be described with reference to FIG. Figure 74(a)
and (b) is a partially enlarged view of the sorting unit 500 in range LXXIV of FIG. 73 . It should be noted that FIG. 74(a) shows the state in which the sorting member 540 is located at the storage position.
) each illustrate a state in which the distribution member 540 is located at the regulating position. Further, the state in which the distribution member 540 is arranged at the regulated position means that the contact plate 464c of the lower displacement member 440 collides with the protrusion 543 of the distribution member 540, and the distribution member 540 moves about the axis of the shaft hole 545. It is a state in which the regulating plate 541 is arranged at the connecting portion between the first ball-throwing path KR1 and the third ball-throwing path KR3 after being rotated.

As shown in FIG. 74(a), when the distribution member 540 is arranged at the storage position, the storage plate 542 is arranged on the third ball throwing path KR3, and the regulation plate 541 is positioned on the path forming member 51.
0 is located inside a recess 518 formed in the rear wall of 0.

In this case, the distance L1 between the end of the tip of the storage plate 542 protruding inside the third ball throwing path KR3 and the inner wall of the third ball throwing path KR3 facing the tip is made smaller than the diameter of the ball. Therefore, the ball thrown from the upstream of the third ball-throwing path KR3 (the first ball-throwing path KR1) is stopped on the upstream side of the storage plate 542.

Also, from the inside of the curved portion of the storage plate 542, the first ball-throwing path KR1 and the third ball-throwing path KR
3 is set larger than the radius of the sphere and smaller than the diameter of the sphere. As a result, the number of balls stopped on the upstream side of the storage plate 542 is reduced to one.
It can be a sphere. Hereinafter, the state of the sorting unit 500 in which one ball is stopped on the upstream side of the storage plate 542 is referred to as a storage state.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 74(b), when the sorting member 540 is arranged at the regulation position, the regulation plate 541 is arranged at the connecting portion between the first ball-throwing path KR1 and the third ball-throwing path KR3. , the storage plate 542 is arranged inside the recess 519 formed in the wall portion on the back side of the path forming member 510 .

In this case, the distance dimension L3 between the end of the tip of the regulating plate 541 protruding inside the first ball-throwing path KR1 and the inner wall of the entrance of the third ball-throwing path KR3 is made smaller than the diameter of the ball. Therefore,
A ball flowing down the first ball-throwing route KR1 collides with the regulation plate 541 and is thrown to the second ball-throwing route KR2.

That is, by switching the distribution member 540 between the regulation position and the storage position, the first throwing path K
A state in which a ball thrown with R1 is thrown to the third ball path KR3 and is stopped on the third ball path KR3, and a state in which a ball flowing down the first ball path KR1 cannot flow into the third ball path KR3, 2, a state in which the ball is thrown to the ball-throwing route KR2 can be formed.

Therefore, by displacing one distributing member 540, when one flow path is divided into two flow paths, the flow path of the sphere can be reliably switched to one of them.

In addition, the biasing spring SP4 applies a biasing force to the distribution member 540 to maintain the distribution destination of the distribution member 540 on the second ball throwing path KR2. It is possible to suppress switching of the distribution destination by the distribution member 540 to the third throw path.

Furthermore, the regulation plate 541 (distribution means) is formed so as to be able to appear and retract with respect to the first ball throwing route KR1 (downstream passage) or the third ball throwing route KR3 (first branch passage).
Since it is the inner wall on the downstream extension line of the first ball-throwing path KR1, the regulation plate 541 can be protruded at a position close to the game ball flowing down from the bottom end of the first ball-throwing path KR1. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time required from when the regulating plate 541 starts to protrude into the downstream passage or the third ball throwing route KR3 (first branch passage) to when the game balls can be sorted. As a result, it is possible to reliably switch the distribution destination by the regulation plate 541 .

In addition, the regulation plate 541 (distribution means) protrudes into the third ball-throwing route KR3 (first branch passage), thereby diverting the game ball flowing down the first ball-throwing route KR1 (flow-down passage) into the second ball-throwing route ( second branch path), and the projecting direction of the regulating plate 541 is set in a direction pointing to the upstream end of the second ball-throwing path KR2, so the game ball flowing down the first ball-throwing path KR1 projects When the game ball comes into contact with the regulating plate in the middle, the game ball can be pushed into the second ball-throwing path KR as the regulating plate protrudes. As a result, the distribution to the second throwing route KR2 can be performed more reliably.

In this embodiment, the regulation plate 541 of the distribution member 540 is arranged at a position closer to the shaft hole 545 than the storage plate 542, but the regulation plate 541 is located farther from the shaft hole 545 than the regulation plate 541. may be placed in 74(a).
And the axis of the distribution member 540 may be arranged at the position of the point P on the rear surface on the downstream side of the third ball throwing path KR3 shown in FIG. 74(b). In this case, the regulation plate 54 formed on the distribution member 540
1 and the storage plate 542 are formed at the same positions as in the present embodiment.

In a state where the shaft hole 545 is arranged at the point P, the displacement speed of the regulation plate 541 can be made faster than that of the storage plate 542 when the distribution member 540 is rotationally displaced. Therefore, as will be described later, when the distribution member 540 is displaced from the storage position to the regulation position, the regulation plate 541 can be quickly protruded onto the flow-down path. As a result, at the timing when the distribution member 540 is switched from the regulating position to the storage position, it is possible to suppress the game balls flowing down the first ball-throwing path KR1 from flowing into the third ball-throwing path KR3.

Also, in this case, the shape of the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542 when viewed from the front is the point P
is formed in an arc shape centered on . As a result, the displacement regions of the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542 can be minimized when the distribution member 540 is displaced from the regulation position to the storage position (or vice versa). Furthermore, recessed portions 518 and 519 for receiving the restricting plate 541 and the storage plate 542 outside the third throwing path KR3 are recessed along the displacement trajectory of the restricting plate 541 and the restricting plate 541 .

Next, with reference to FIGS. 75 and 76, a case where two or more balls are thrown from the ball-throwing path when the sorting member 540 is arranged at the storage position will be described. 75(a) and (b) are partial enlarged views of the sorting unit 500. FIG. 76(a) and (b) are partially enlarged views of the sorting unit 500. FIG.

78(a) and (b) correspond to the partially enlarged view of the sorting unit 500 of FIG. 74(a). Also, FIGS. 75(a) to 76(b) sequentially illustrate the transition states of the sphere when the sphere is introduced. Further, FIGS. 75(a) to 76(b) show a state in which the sorting member 540 is arranged at the storage position.

As shown in FIGS. 75(a) and 75(b), when the first game ball T1 is thrown to the first ball path KR1 with the sorting member 540 arranged at the storage position, as described above, , the game ball T1 is thrown to the third ball-throwing path KR3 and stopped above the storage plate 542. As shown in FIG.

In this case, the storage plate 542 is located downstream of the upper end of the third throwing path KR3 by a distance between the radius and the diameter of the ball. but,
It is in a state of protruding toward the first throwing path KR1 (see FIG. 75).

Therefore, as described above, the third ball throwing path KR3 (first branch path) is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the downstream, and the game ball is formed to roll on the inner wall in the direction of gravity, Since the storage plate 542 (flowing state changing means) is formed so as to be able to protrude into the third ball throwing route KR3 from the inner wall on the lower side in the direction of gravity, the game ball is started to protrude into the third ball throwing route KR3. It is possible to shorten the time required to reach a state in which the flow of water can be regulated. the result,
The distribution destination of the regulation plate 541 is from the second ball throwing route KR2 (second branch passage) to the third ball throwing route KR
3 and the game ball is distributed to the third ball throwing route KR3, the projection of the storage plate 542 can be easily made to regulate the flow of the game ball.

In addition, the regulation plate 541 is formed so as to be retractable with respect to the third ball-throwing route KR3, and in the state of maximum projection to the third ball-throwing route KR3, a force component in the projecting direction acts on the storage plate 542 from the game ball. Therefore, when restricting the flow of the game ball distributed to the third ball throwing route KR3, it is possible to suppress the storage plate 542 from sinking into the concave portion 519 due to the impact when the game ball collides.
Therefore, it is possible to easily regulate the flow of the game ball.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 76(a) and (b), when the sorting unit 500 is in the storage state and the second game ball T2 is thrown to the first ball-throwing path KR1, the game ball T2 The ball is thrown from the first throwing path KR1 to the upper end of the third throwing path KR3. Since the game ball T1 is stopped at the upper end of the third ball-throwing path KR3, the game ball T2 collides with the game ball T1 and is thrown to the second ball-throwing path KR2.

In this case, as described above, the game ball T1 protrudes toward the first ball-throwing path KR1.
2, the game ball T2 can be thrown to the second ball path KR2 without remaining inside the third ball path KR3. Therefore, it is possible to stabilize the ball throwing on the first ball throwing route KR1 and the second ball throwing route KR2.

That is, the second ball-throwing route KR2 (second branch passage) in the first ball-throwing route KR1 (flow-down passage)
The inner wall on the side facing the third ball path KR3 (first
The game ball at the end of the prescribed number (one ball) of game balls stored in the branch passage) is transferred to the third throw path K
Since it is formed so as to be able to be guided to the side surface of R3, the game ball flowing down the first ball-throwing route KR1 is caused to collide with the last game ball among the prescribed number of game balls, and then flow down to the second ball-throwing route KR2. It can be done easily.

Among the prescribed number of game balls, the last game ball means a game ball located on the upstream side (the side opposite to the regulation plate 541). Also, in the present embodiment, the prescribed number is set to one ball. In this case, the last game ball means the game ball itself stored in the third throwing route KR3.

Further, as described above, the first ball throwing path KR1 (downstream passage) is tilted toward the central portion of the base plate 520 in the left-right direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 73) at the lower end of the downflow path. A portion is formed in a gentle S-shaped curve. That is, since the downstream end of the first ball-throwing route KR1 (flowing-down passage) flows in the downstream direction of the upstream end of the third ball-throwing route KR3, the game ball flowing down the first ball-throwing route KR1 flows in the third ball-throwing route KR1. When the last game ball among the specified number of game balls stored in the ball-throwing path collides, the direction of the repulsive force acting on the last game ball must be different from the flowing direction of the upstream end of the third ball-throwing path KR3. can let As a result, due to the repulsive force at the time of collision, the trailing game ball jumps out of the upstream end of the third ball-throwing route KR3 and moves to the second ball-throwing route KR2.
can be suppressed from flowing into

Furthermore, the upper end of the third ball path KR3 is inclined in the direction of inclination of the lower end of the first ball path KR1. In addition, it can be on the side of the second throwing path KR2. Therefore, the rebound direction of the game ball T2 that has collided with the game ball T1 can be the entrance (upper end) side of the second ball throwing route KR2. Therefore, the game ball T2 that collides with the game ball T1 can be easily thrown to the second ball-throwing path KR2. As a result, it is possible to suppress the stagnation of the ball on the first ball-throwing path KR1 and the second ball-throwing path KR2.

Further, the distribution destination by the regulation plate 541 is set to the third ball throwing route KR3 (first branch passage), and the downflow of the game ball in the third ball throwing route KR3 is indicated by the storage plate 542 (flowing state changing means).
and a specified number (1 ball) of game balls are stored in the third throwing route KR3,
Since the game balls flowing down the first ball-throwing route KR1 (flowing-down passage) are formed so as to be able to flow down the second ball-throwing route KR2 (second branched passage), when a prescribed number or more of game balls flow down the flow-down passage, It is possible to suppress the game balls (game balls T2 after the second ball) from staying on the first ball throwing route KR1 in excess of the specified number. Therefore, the displacement of the regulating plate 541 (the movement to set the distribution destination to the second throwing path KR2)
However, it is possible to suppress the obstruction by the game ball stuck in the first throwing path KR1.

Next, with reference to FIG. 77, a case where a ball is thrown to the ball-throwing path when the sorting member 540 is arranged at the regulating position will be described. 77(a) and (b) show the sorting unit 500.
is a partially enlarged view of.

77(a) and (b) correspond to the partially enlarged view of the sorting unit 500 of FIG. 74(a). Also, FIGS. 77(a) and (b) respectively illustrate the transition states of the sphere when the sphere is injected. Further, FIGS. 77(a) and 77(b) show a state in which the distribution member 540 is arranged at the restricted position.

As shown in FIGS. 77(a) and 77(b), when a ball is thrown along the first throwing path KR1 with the sorting member 540 arranged at the regulating position, the thrown game ball T1 is placed on the first throwing path KR1. Route KR
1 collides with the regulation plate 541 at its lower end. As a result, the game ball T1 is guided to the second ball-throwing route KR2 and flows down the second ball-throwing route KR2.

Next, with reference to FIG. 78, the operation for causing the ball to flow downstream on the third throwing path KR3 will be described. 78(a) and (b) are partial enlarged views of the sorting unit 500. FIG.

78(a) and (b) correspond to the partially enlarged view of the sorting unit 500 of FIG. 74(a). Also, FIGS. 78(a) and (b) illustrate the transition states of the sphere when the sphere is injected. Further, FIG. 78(a) shows a state in which the sorting member 540 is arranged at the storage position, and FIG. 78(b) shows a state in which the sorting member 540 is arranged at the restricting position.

As shown in FIGS. 78(a) and (b), the sorting unit 500 is in the storage state (FIG. 78(a)
), when the distributing member 540 is displaced and arranged at the regulating position,
The game ball T1 stagnated above the storage plate 542 flows down to the downstream side of the third ball throwing route KR3.

That is, only the ball stagnated above the storage plate 542 flows down the third throwing path KR3. Also, as described above, the ball stagnating above the storage plate 542 is set to 1, so the third
Balls can flow down the throwing path KR3 one ball at a time. Therefore, the third throwing path KR3
Therefore, it is possible to prevent an unintended number of balls from flowing down the third throwing path KR3.

Therefore, the distributing member 540 (distributing means) moves to the third position as the distributing member 540 is displaced.
A regulating plate 541 (first retractable portion) and a storage plate (second retractable portion) formed to be retractable from the ball throwing path (first branch passage) are provided, and the regulating plate 541 protrudes to the third ball throwing path. By doing so, the first
A game ball flowing down the ball-throwing path KR1 (flowing-down path) is formed to be able to be distributed to the second ball-throwing path KR2 (second branch path), and the storage plate 542 is located downstream of the third ball-throwing path KR3 from the regulation plate 541. By being positioned and protruding into the third ball-throwing route KR3, the control plate 541 and the storage plate 542 are formed so as to be capable of regulating the flow of game balls distributed to the third ball-throwing route KR3.
, when one protrudes into the passage of the third ball throwing route KR3, the other is retracted outside the passage of the third ball throwing route KR3 (inside the concave portions 518 and 519), so the ball receiving portion 467 (displacement member) By displacing the distributing member 540 along with the displacement, only a prescribed number (one ball) of game balls can be distributed to the third ball throwing route KR3 and received by the ball receiving portion 467. FIG.

That is, the restriction plate 541 protrudes to set a first state in which game balls flowing down the first ball throwing path KR1 are distributed to the second ball throwing path, and the restriction plate 541 retracts to set the first ball throwing path KR1.
A second state in which game balls flowing down are distributed to the third ball path KR3, and the protrusion of the second haunting portion restricts the flow of game balls distributed to the third ball path KR3 (reserves game balls). the third
and a fourth state in which the game balls stored in the third ball throwing path are made to flow down and received by the ball receiving portion by retracting the second haunting portion. By combining the above, only a prescribed number (one ball) of game balls are distributed to the third ball throwing route KR3, and the ball receiving portion 46
7 can be received.

In addition, since the distribution member 540 is provided with the regulation plates 541 and 542, that is, formed as one component, the structure of the distribution member 540 (the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542 are operated,
The structure for exhibiting those functions) can be simplified. Furthermore, when one of the restricting plate 541 and the storage plate 542 protrudes into the passage of the third ball-throwing route KR3, the other is retracted out of the passage of the third ball-throwing route KR3. It is sufficient that the distribution member 540 is also formed so as to be displaceable between two positions according to the positions (first position and second position). That is, by displacing the distribution member 540 at two positions, the first to fourth states described above can be formed. Therefore, with the structure of the distribution member 540 and the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467, the distribution member 54
The structure for displacing 0 can be simplified, and the reliability of the game ball sorting operation can be improved accordingly.

79 to 80, sorting unit 500 and lower displacement unit 40
0 will be explained. 79 is a front view of the sorting unit 500 and the lower displacement unit 400. FIG. 80 is a top view of the sorting unit 500 and the downward displacement unit 400. FIG.
It should be noted that the lower displacement unit 400 is illustrated in a state of being arranged at the retracted position.

As shown in FIGS. 79 and 80, the sorting unit 500 is arranged on the front side of the lower displacement unit 400 (lower side in FIG. 80). In this case, an opening 525a formed in the rolling portion 525 of the distribution unit 500 and an opening 451a formed in the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 440
are arranged at positions overlapping each other in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the ball rolling on the rolling portion 525 is thrown into the lower displacement member 440 through the opening 525a and the opening 451a.

In other words, the throwing of the ball to the lower displacement member 440 is performed by sending the ball flowing down the game area in front of the game board 13 from the third winning hole 82 formed in the game board 13 through the ball throwing unit 600 and the sorting unit 500. is done.

Therefore, the sorting unit 500 has a rolling portion 525 that communicates with the track area of the ball receiving portion 467.
, and the distribution member 540 regulates the passage of game balls through the rolling portion 525. Therefore, for example, even if the distribution member 540 malfunctions and the game ball T2 after the second ball is thrown, two balls The game ball T2 after the first can be reliably thrown to the track area of the distribution member 540 via the rolling part 525. - 特許庁As a result, it is possible to prevent troubles caused by the game ball T2 after the second ball.

Next, the relationship between the distribution member 540 and the lower displacement member 440 will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 to 86. FIG. 81, 83 and 85 are front views of the lower displacement unit 400, and FIGS. 82, 84 and 86 are sectional views of the sorting unit 500. FIG. In addition, FIG.
83 and 85, the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 440 and the front case 481 are seen transparently, and only the sorting member 540 of the sorting unit 500 arranged on the front side is illustrated. 82, 84 and 86, the distributing member 540 is illustrated with a chain line, and the contact plate 464c of the lower displacement member 440 arranged on the back side is illustrated with a chain line.

81 and 82 show a state in which the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 is arranged at the first position and the distributing member 540 is arranged at the regulated position.
0 is shown in the retracted state. 83 and 84 show a state in which the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 is arranged at the second position, and the distributing member 540 is arranged at the storage position, and the lower displacement member 440 is positioned in the retracted state. The states are illustrated. 85 and 86 show a state in which the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 is arranged at the first position, and the distributing member 540 is arranged at the storage position. is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 81 and 82, in the state where the lower displacement member 440 is arranged in the retracted state and in the state where the ball bearing portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 is arranged in the first position, the ball bearing portion A rack 466 for driving 467 is arranged on the other end side of the lower displacement member 440 (on the left side of the lower displacement member 440 when viewed from the front), and a movable rack 464 is arranged on the back side so as to overlap in the front-rear direction.

That is, the movable rack 464 is placed on the other end side of the lower displacement member 440 (on the left side of the lower displacement member 440 when viewed from the front), similarly to the rack 466 . Therefore, the contact plate 464 c formed on the movable rack 464 is positioned on the other end side of the lower displacement member 440 . In this case, the side surface of the contact plate 464c on the other end side (the left side surface in the front view) is brought into contact with the projecting portion 543 of the distribution member 540 . As a result, the distribution member 540 is subjected to a rotational driving force around the axis of the shaft hole 545, and is displaced to a position (restriction position) where the restriction plate 541 protrudes into the first ball throwing path KR1.

Therefore, when the lower displacement member 440 is retracted and the ball receiving portion 467 is placed at the first position, the ball thrown on the first ball-throwing path KR1 of the sorting unit 500 is not on the third ball-throwing path KR3. The ball is thrown to the second throw route KR2 without flowing down. Also, as mentioned above,
By displacing the distribution member 540 from the storage state in which the balls are stored above the storage plate 542 to the regulating position, the game ball can be thrown to the downstream side of the third ball throwing path KR3 (downstream side of the storage plate 542). At this time, the game ball can be thrown to the inside of the ball receiving portion 467 by causing the ball receiving portion 467 to receive the ball.

In addition, the third electric accessory 82a for storing the game balls in the sorting unit 500
is performed before the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the first position, and when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the first position, the third electric accessory 82a is closed. . As a result, when the distribution member 540 is displaced from the storage position to the regulation position, the game balls passing through the first ball-throwing path KR1 are not restricted from flowing down by the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542, and unintended game balls 3
It is possible to suppress the ball from being thrown to the downstream side of the ball throwing route KR3.

In addition, since the distribution member 540 is formed to be operable in conjunction with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467, the throwing of the game ball to the track area of the ball receiving portion 467 is restricted according to the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467. Or acceptable. That is, the control or permission of throwing a game ball can be switched mechanically in synchronization with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467. Driving means for driving 540 or control of each of these means can be made unnecessary, so that the product cost can be reduced and the reliability of operation can be improved.

Further, in the distribution member 540, the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged in the first position direction (second direction) from the second position.
Since the game ball T2 is allowed to be thrown to the trajectory area of the ball receiving portion 467 in conjunction with being displaced to the trajectory area of the ball receiving portion 467, the first direction than the ball receiving portion 467 A game ball can be surely thrown to the area on the side.

The ball receiving portion 467 is formed to be displaceable between a switching position for switching the distribution member 540 and a receiving position (second position) set at a position different from the switching position (first position). When the portion 467 is displaced to the switching position, the distribution destination by the distribution member 540 is switched to the third throwing path KR3. 467 is enabled to receive game balls,
Since the distribution destination by the distribution member 540 is switched to the second ball-throwing route KR2, game balls exceeding the prescribed number (one ball in this embodiment) that the ball receiving part 467 can receive are distributed to the third ball-throwing route KR3. can be suppressed.

That is, when the switching position and the receiving position are set to the same position, the distribution member 5
Since the ball receiving portion 467 receives the game ball while the distribution destination by 40 has been switched to the third ball throwing route, the number of game balls exceeds the prescribed number that the ball receiving portion 467 can receive, and the number of game balls reaches the third ball throwing route KR3. are likely to be distributed to If a separate means for restricting the inflow of game balls into the third ball throwing path KR3 is provided, the structure becomes complicated, the reliability is lowered, and the product cost is increased.

On the other hand, in the embodiment, after the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the switching position and a specified number (one ball in this embodiment) of game balls are distributed to the third ball throwing route KR3, the distribution member 540
is displaced to the receiving position, the distribution destination is switched to the second ball throwing route KR2, so that more than one game ball can be prevented from flowing down to the third ball throwing route. Therefore,
The ball receiving portion 467 can suppress the game balls exceeding the defined number (one ball) that can be received from being distributed to the third ball throwing route KR3. Further, since there is no need to separately provide the aforementioned means (means for regulating the inflow of game balls into the third ball throwing path KR3), reliability can be improved and product costs can be reduced.

Moreover, when the power is turned on (turned on), the pachinko machine 10 starts from the position where each operation unit is turned off (turned off). Furthermore, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, only the control may be reset. In this case, if the sorting member 540 is provided with a driving means, when the power is turned on, the sorting unit 500 in the storage state operates during the initial operation to cause the game balls to flow down the third ball throwing route KR3, A game ball may be thrown to the withdrawal side (first position side) of the ball receiving portion 467 arranged at the third position.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the displacement of the distribution member 540 and the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 are synchronized. When the machine 10 is powered on, it is possible to prevent unintended game balls from being thrown to the trajectory area of the ball receiving part 467.例文帳に追加As a result, clogging of game balls inside the lower displacement member 440 can be suppressed.

Furthermore, when the power is turned off with the game ball left in the track region of the lower displacement member 440, the ball receiving portion 467 is caused to perform the above-described discharging operation, so that the ball is left in the track region of the ball receiving portion 467. The game ball can be discharged to the outside of the lower displacement member 440 and recovered from the recovery port 411f.

Next, description will be made with reference to FIGS. 83 and 84. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 83 and 84, the lower displacement member 440 is in the retracted state and the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 is in the second position.
position or the third position (a position other than the first position), the rack 466 for driving the ball receiving portion 467 is positioned substantially at the center of the lower displacement member 440 in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 83), as described above. In addition, the movable rack 464 is moved from the other end of the lower displacement member 440 (the left side in the horizontal direction in FIG. 83) to the one end side.

Therefore, the contact plate 464c formed on the movable rack 464 is arranged at a position spaced from the other end of the lower displacement member 4440 toward one end. In this case, the surface of the contact plate 464 c on the other end side (the surface on the left side in front view) is separated from the projecting portion 543 of the distribution member 540 . As a result, the distributing member 540 is rotated about the axis of the shaft hole 545 by the biasing force of the biasing spring SP4 interposed between the distributing member 540 and the base plate 520, and the storage plate 542 moves to the third position.
It is displaced to a position (storage position) projected onto the throwing path KR3.

Therefore, when the lower displacement member 440 is in the retracted state and the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged at the second position or the third position (a position other than the first position), the distribution unit 500 is in the first position.
A ball to be thrown to the ball-throwing path KR1 is stopped above the storage plate 542 . Also,
As described above, when the sorting unit 500 is in the storage state, the ball thrown to the first ball path KR1 collides with the ball stopped above the storage plate 542 and is thrown to the second ball path KR2.

Next, description will be made with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 85 and 86, when the lower displacement member 440 is arranged in the first extended state or the second extended state, the lower displacement member 440 slides relative to the front base 411 as described above. It is displaced and rotationally displaced. Therefore, the contact plate 464 c formed on the movable rack 464 is displaced with the displacement of the lower displacement member 440 and separated from the projecting portion 543 of the distribution member 540 . As a result, the distributing member 540 is rotated about the axis of the shaft hole 545 by the biasing force of the biasing spring SP4 interposed between the distributing member 540 and the base plate 520, and the storage plate 542 is moved to the third throw. It is displaced to a position (storage position) projected onto the route KR3.

Therefore, when the lower displacement member 440 is in the first protruding state or the second protruding state, the ball thrown to the first ball throwing path KR1 of the sorting unit 500 is stopped above the storage plate 542. be done. Further, as described above, when the sorting unit 500 is in the storage state, the ball thrown to the first ball path KR1 collides with the ball stopped above the storage plate 542 and is thrown to the second ball path KR2. .

That is, the lower displacement member 440 is in the first protruding state and the second protruding state (states other than the retracted state).
In this case, the position of the opening 451a of the decorative member 450 is displaced as the lower displacement member 440 is displaced, so that the spherical communication between the opening 451a and the opening 525a of the sorting unit 500 is released. . Therefore, when a ball flows down the third ball throwing path KR3, there is a risk that the ball will be discharged into the interior of the rear case 300 through the opening 451a. It is possible to suppress the ball from flowing down the downstream side of the route KR3. As a result, it is possible to suppress the balls of the rear case 300 from being discharged inside.

In other words, the lower displacement member 440 of the lower displacement unit 400 is formed to be displaceable between the retracted state, the first extended state, and the second extended state, and when the lower displacement member 440 is positioned in the retracted state, Since the ball receiving portion 467 is disposed on the lower displacement member 440, there is a state in which the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced while the lower displacement member 440 is disposed in the retracted state, and a state in which the ball receiving portion 467 is disposed in the first or second extended state. , the ball receiving portion 467 can be displaced. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect accordingly.

In this case, when the lower displacement member 440 is arranged in the first or second overhanging state, the ball receiving portion 4
67 is unable to receive the game ball from the rolling portion 525 of the third throwing route KR3 (the third throwing route KR
3 and the opening 451a of the lower displacement member 440 are in a state of non-communication), the contact plate 464c interlocking with the ball receiving portion 467 cannot contact the distributing member 540. Therefore, in a state in which the ball receiving portion 467 cannot receive a game ball (a state in which the lower displacement member 440 is arranged in the first protruding state or the second protruding state), the distribution destination by the distribution member 540 is the third throw ball. It is possible to suppress switching to the route KR3.

Further, since the distributing member 540 is disposed on the base plate 520 of the distributing unit 500 formed as a separate member from the base member 470 of the lower displacement member 440, the lower displacement member 44
40 of the base member 470 can be suppressed.

Here, the displacement of the lower displacement member 440 from the first protruded state to the retracted state is not only laterally rotationally displaced but also rotationally displaced. , the projecting portion 543 of the distribution member 540 contacts the upper surface of the contact plate 464c, and the distribution member 540
may not be able to rotate.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, when the lower displacement unit 400 is displaced from the first overhang position shown in FIG. (
second position or third position). As a result, the contact plate 464 c of the lower displacement member 440 displaced to the retracted state can be prevented from colliding with the projecting portion 543 . As a result, the protrusion 543 of the distribution member 540 comes into contact with the upper surface of the contact plate 464c, and the distribution member 5
40 can be prevented from being rotationally displaced.

Further, since the distributing member 540 is formed with the bulging portion 543a as described above, when the lower displacement unit 400 is displaced from the first extended state to the retracted state due to control failure or the like, the abutment plate 464c may be displaced. Even when the protrusion 543 of the distribution member 540 abuts on the upper surface, the distribution member 5
40 can be rotationally displaced.

That is, since the contact area with the contact plate 464c can be reduced by the bulging portion 543a, the bulging portion 543a can be easily slid along the surface when the contact plate 464c contacts. Therefore, the distribution member 540 can be easily rotationally displaced. As a result, it is possible to prevent the distribution member 540 from being rotationally displaced due to the protrusion 543 of the distribution member 540 coming into contact with the upper surface of the contact plate 464c.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 87 to 90, the configuration of the drive transmission portion of rotation unit 700 will be described. 87 is a front view of the rotation unit 700, FIG. 88 is a rear view of the rotation unit 700, FIG. 89 is an exploded perspective front view of the rotation unit 700, and FIG.
4] is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotation unit 700. [Fig.

As shown in FIGS. 87 to 90, the rotation unit 700 includes a decoration unit 750 composed of a plurality of displacement members, and a ball bearing base 71 arranged above the decoration unit 750 in the direction of gravity.
0, the ball receiving base 710 and the rear base 720 arranged on the rear side of the decoration unit 750
, a left transmission member 730 disposed on the left side of the decoration unit 750 when viewed from the front, and a right transmission member 740 disposed on the right side of the decoration unit 750 when viewed from the front.

The ball receiving base 710 is a member for dropping a game ball ejected from the ejection opening 471 on one side of the lower displacement member 440 of the lower displacement unit 400 described above. As a result, the ball thrown to the inner side of the lower displacement member 440 can be thrown to the rotation unit 700 . In addition, the ball cradle 71
0 will be described in detail later.

The decoration unit 750 is a substantially D-shaped block with a curved portion arranged upward in a side view, and the front side is decorated with characters and patterns. Also, the decoration unit 750 is composed of a plurality of members, and is configured to be displaceable by transmission of a driving force, which will be described later. Note that the configuration of the decoration unit 750 will be described later.

The rear base 720 is a plate member that connects the rear side of the ball holder 710 and the rear side of the decoration unit 750, and is formed in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front. As described above, the decoration unit 750
Since it is composed of a plurality of movable members, the fastening portion is limited. The decorative unit 750 and the ball receiving base 710 can be assembled as one unit while ensuring the movable range of the ball 750 .

The left transmission member 730 is mounted with a drive motor KM4 disposed on the left side (left side in FIG. 87) of the decoration unit 750, a transmission member 730 for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor KM4, and the drive motor KM4. A motor base 732 and a gear cover 7 covering the transmission member 730
33 and a ball throwing path cover 734 which is attached to the gear cover 733 and which forms a predetermined gap between the gear cover 733 and the gear cover 733 .

The drive motor KM4 is a drive source for moving each member of the decoration unit 750, which will be described later. Drive of the drive motor KM4 is transmitted by a transmission member 730, which will be described later.

The transmission member 730 includes a transmission gear 731a attached to the shaft of the drive motor KM4, a transmission gear 731b meshing with the transmission gear 731a, a transmission gear 731c meshing with the transmission gear 731b, and a transmission gear 731c. and a transmission gear 731d arranged coaxially with a shaft 735, and a load gear 731e meshing with the transmission gear 731d.

The transmission gear 731a is attached to the drive motor KM4 as described above, and rotates when the drive motor KM4 is rotationally driven.

A one-way clutch OW1 is disposed inside the transmission gear 731b, and the inner ring of the one-way clutch OW1 is connected to a shaft portion JB1 that transmits the rotational driving force of the decoration unit 750 to the right transmission member 740 on the right side.

The one-way clutch OW1 includes an inner ring having a cam surface formed on its outer peripheral surface, an outer ring arranged outside the inner ring, and a plurality of springs and rollers between the inner ring and the outer ring. When the outer ring tries to rotate in one direction with respect to the inner ring, the contact surface pressure between the cam surface and the roller increases, acting as resistance and transmitting power to the inner ring, causing the outer ring to rotate in the other direction with respect to the inner ring. This is a cam-type clutch that slides and disconnects the power transmission when the roller rotates to the right, the contact surface pressure between the cam surface and the roller decreases.

Therefore, when the driving force in one direction is transmitted from the drive motor KM4, the transmission gear 731b
Rotational driving force can be transmitted to the shaft portion JB1, and when driving force in the other direction is transmitted from the drive motor KM4, the outer ring slides on the inner ring and the transmission of the driving force to the shaft portion JB1 is interrupted.

The transmission gear 731c is internally provided with a one-way clutch OW1 like the transmission gear 731b. A shaft 735 is arranged inside the one-way clutch OW1 of the transmission gear 731c.

Therefore, when the driving force in one direction is transmitted from the drive motor KM4, the transmission gear 731c
Rotational driving force can be transmitted to the shaft 735, and when driving force in the other direction is transmitted from the drive motor KM4, the outer ring slides against the inner ring and transmission of the driving force to the shaft 735 is interrupted. Also,
The transmission gear 731c is meshed with the transmission gear 731b, and the directions of rotation thereof are opposite to each other. Therefore, when the transmission gear 731b rotates in one direction, the transmission gear 731c
is the rotation in the other direction. On the other hand, when the transmission gear 731b is rotated in the other direction, the transmission gear 731b is rotated in one direction. That is, by switching the rotation direction of the drive motor KM4, the mode is switched to the mode in which the shaft portion JB1 rotates or the mode in which the shaft 735 rotates.

Transmission gear 731 d is attached to shaft 735 . As described above, the shaft 735 is connected to the transmission gear 7
It is rotated only if 31c is rotated in one direction. Therefore, the transmission gear 731c rotates in one direction only when the transmission gear 731c is rotated in one direction, and does not rotate in the other direction.

The load gear 731 e has a shaft portion 791 a of a resistance member 791 with a shaft hole attached to the box member 760 .
connected to The resistance member 791 is formed with a shaft portion 791 a rotatable with respect to a base portion fastened to the box member 760 . The resistance member 791 is formed to provide a predetermined amount of resistance when the shaft portion 791a rotates with respect to the base portion. That is, since a predetermined amount of force is required to rotate the shaft portion 791a, the load gear 73 connected to the shaft portion 791a
Similarly, the force for rotating 1e must be equal to or greater than a predetermined amount.

As a result, when the rotating body 800 meshing with the transmission gear 731d is rotated by the rotation of the transmission gear 731d and stopped, it is possible to suppress the rotation due to the inertial force. Namely
The resistance when the shaft portion 791a rotates with respect to the base portion is set larger than the inertial force acting around the axis of the rotating body 800 when the rotation of the rotating body 800 stops.

In addition, the load gear 731e is connected to a transmission gear 731d coaxially arranged with the transmission gear 731c. Therefore, the resistance of the load gear 731e applied to the drive motor KM4 is expressed by the transmission gear 7
31d can only be rotated in one direction. That is, the transmission gear 731c
When rotating in the other direction, the drive transmission between the transmission gear 731c and the transmission gear 731d is interrupted, so that the resistance of the load gear 731e can be suppressed. As a result, when the transmission gear 731b is rotated in one direction, it is possible to suppress the resistance of the load gear 731e.

The motor base 732 is formed in a box-like body that is open on the decoration unit 750 side, and the drive motor KM4 is arranged outside the bottom portion of the box (on the left side in FIG. 87) with its shaft inserted through the inside of the box. As a result, the transmission gear 731a connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM4 is moved to the motor base 73.
2 can be placed inside. That is, the depth dimension of the box of the motor base 732 is equal to that of the transmission gear 731a.
is set larger than the width dimension of As a result, the drive motor KM4 and the transmission gear 731a can be arranged in the decoration unit 750 with the drive motor KM4 and the transmission gear 731a attached to the motor base 732, and the collision of the transmission gear 731a with the decoration unit 750 can be suppressed.

The gear cover 733 is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the rear, and is fastened to the decoration unit 750 with the left transmission member 730 arranged therebetween. A through hole 733a is formed through the decoration unit 750 at a position facing the shaft hole of the rotating body 800, which will be described later. As a result, the ball rolling inside the rotating body 800 can be ejected to the outside through the through hole 733a. The ball thrown to the rotating body 800 will be described later.

The ball feed path cover 734 is a member arranged outside the gear cover 733 (on the left side in FIG. 87). As a result, a gap can be formed between the gear cover 733 and the ball feed path cover 734, and the ball inserted through the through hole 733a of the gear cover 733 can be passed through the gap and discharged to the outside of the rotation unit 700. can be done. The ball ejected from the gap between the gear cover 733 and the ball throwing path cover is thrown to a recovery path (not shown) and recovered.

The right transmission member 740 includes a rotating member 741 connected to the other end side of the shaft portion JB1 described above,
It mainly includes an arm member 742 whose one end is connected to the rotating member 741 and a crank cover 743 which is arranged in the decoration unit 750 while covering the rotating member 741 and the arm member 742 .

The rotating member 741 includes a body portion 741b formed in a disk-like plate shape, and a main body portion 741b.
The one-way clutch OW1 fitted on the shaft of and the opposite side of the decoration unit 750 (Fig. 87
It is mainly formed with a columnar protrusion 741a protruding to the right).

One-way clutch OW1 attached to rotating member 741 has an inner ring shaft hole inserted into the other end side of shaft portion JB. In addition, the one-way clutch OW1 is arranged so that the inner ring and the outer ring are not transmitted when rotation opposite to the rotation direction of the shaft portion JB1 is input to the inner ring.

As a result, when a driving force having a rotational speed higher than the rotational speed transmitted from the shaft portion JB1 to the rotating member 741 is input to the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1, only the outer ring is rotated and the rotating member 741 is driven by the drive motor KM4. It can be rotated by driving force other than drive. As a result, the rotating member 741 can be rotated at two or more different speeds.

The arm member 742 has a shape that combines a C shape and an I shape when viewed from the side, and has an I shape at one end of the C shape.
The other end of the character is connected and formed. In addition, the arm member 742 includes a shaft hole 742a penetrating through a connecting portion between the C-shaped portion and the I-shaped portion, an elliptical first sliding groove 742b penetrating through one end of the I-shaped portion, and a C-shaped portion. A second elliptical sliding groove 742c penetrating through the other end of the letter portion is formed.

The shaft hole 742a is formed by a shaft portion 764a formed in a right side plate 764 of a box member 760, which will be described later.
is inserted, and is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 764a. Therefore, the arm member 742 is arranged in the decoration unit 750 with the shaft portion 764a inserted into the shaft hole 742a, so that the arm member 742 is rotatable with respect to the decoration unit 750. As shown in FIG.

The first sliding groove 742b is a hole into which the protrusion 741a of the rotating member 741 is inserted, and the width dimension in the lateral direction of the oval is set larger than the outer diameter of the protrusion 741a. Therefore,
The projection 741a can be inserted inside the first sliding groove 742b, and the rotation of the rotating member 741 can cause the arm member 742 to be rotationally displaced.

The rotary member 741 has an outer diameter that is smaller than the longitudinal dimension of the I-shaped portion of the arm member 742, and a shaft that extends from the shaft hole 742a of the arm member 742 to half the longitudinal dimension of the I-shaped portion. placed farther apart than Accordingly, by rotating the rotating member 741, the arm member 742 can be caused to reciprocate in rotation about the axis of the shaft hole 742a.

The second sliding groove 742c is a hole into which a projection 773a of the right lid portion 773, which will be described later, is inserted.
Therefore, the projection 773a can be inserted inside the second sliding groove 742c. Also, the right lid portion 773
are formed to be rotationally displaceable with respect to the box member 760 . Therefore, the rotating member 741 is rotated as described above, and the arm member 742 reciprocates in rotation, thereby rotating the right lid portion 773 connected to the other end of the arm member 742 with respect to the box member 760. be able to.

The crank cover 743 mainly includes an elliptical portion 743a formed in an elliptical shape when viewed from the rear, and a ball-throwing portion 743b formed continuously on the rear side of the elliptical portion 743a.

The elliptical portion 743a is a cover that covers the arm member 742, and has an outer shape larger than the arm member 742 and the displacement region of the arm member 742 when viewed from the side. A wall is formed which protrudes more than the thickness of the . Accordingly, when the crank cover 743 is arranged on the decoration unit 750, the arm member 742 can be arranged between the crank cover 743 and the decoration unit 750 facing each other.

The ball throwing part 743b is a path member for throwing the ball to the recovery path when the ball flowing down the flow-down area in front of the game board 13 is recovered from a predetermined recovery port. It is shaped like a bar with a space of height. The ball feeding portion 743b is connected at its upper end to an opening of the game board 13 and connected to an opening formed in the decoration unit 750 at its lower end. As a result, the balls collected on the game board 13 can be passed through the interior of the decoration unit 750 via the ball feeding portion 743b and guided to a collection path (not shown).

Next, the decoration unit 750 will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 95. FIG. 91 is a front view of the decoration unit 750. FIG. 92(a) is a side view of the decoration unit 750 as viewed in the direction of arrow XCIIa in FIG. 91, and FIG. 92(b) is a side view of arrow XCIIb in FIG.
It is a side view of the decoration unit 750 in direction view. 93 is an exploded perspective front view of the decoration unit 750, and FIG. 94 is an exploded perspective rear view of the decoration unit 750. FIG. 91(b) and 91(c), the right side plate 764 and the left side plate 76 of the box member 760
5 and a transparent state are illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 91 to 94, the decoration unit 750 includes a box member 760 serving as a decoration portion on the outside of the decoration unit 750 and a lid disposed above the box member 760 in the gravitational direction (upper side in FIG. 91(a)). A member 770 and a rotating body 80 arranged inside the box member 760 and the lid member 770
0 and .

The box member 760 includes a base member 762 arranged below the rotating body 800, a front plate 761 arranged in front of the base member 762, a lower plate 763 arranged on the bottom surface of the base member 762, It mainly includes a right side plate 764 arranged on the right side of the base member 762 in front view, and a left side plate 765 arranged on the left side of the base member 762 in front view.

The base member 762 is formed in a horizontally elongated rectangular shape that is larger than the rotating body 800 when viewed from above, and is formed with a thickness in the direction of gravity greater than the outer diameter of the sphere. The base member 762 has a curved upper surface coaxial with the axis of the rotating body 800 . As a result, collision between the base member 762 and the rotating body 800 can be suppressed when the base member 762 is arranged in the vicinity of the rotating body 800 .

The base member 762 mainly includes a recess 762a recessed downward in the left-right direction on the top surface and a ball-throwing part 762b recessed in a substantially L shape on the bottom surface.

The concave portion 762a is a groove in which the above-described shaft portion JB1 is arranged, and the decorative unit 75
0 on the shaft of the transmission gear 731b. Thereby, the driving force of the driving motor KM4 can be transmitted via the shaft portion JB1.

The ball-feeding part 762b is bent in an L-shape and recessed on the bottom surface, and one end side is the right side plate 7.
64, and the other end side is connected to the rear side of the winning opening 761a of the front plate 761. As shown in FIG. Also, the recessed width of the ball feeding portion 762b is formed to be larger than the diameter of the ball. Accordingly, the ball can be thrown inside the box member 760 by arranging the lower surface plate 763 on the lower side.

The front plate 761 is formed to have a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed to have a predetermined thickness on the back side. In addition, the front plate 761 is formed with a winning opening 761a having a size that allows a ball to be inserted on the front side. The prize winning opening 761a is connected to the ball throwing portion 762b of the base member 762 arranged on the back side as described above. Therefore, the ball thrown into the winning opening 761 a is thrown to the ball-throwing portion 762 b of the base member 762 .

The right side plate 764 is formed in a D shape with an upwardly curved outer shape when viewed from the side. The right side plate 764 includes a shaft portion 764a protruding outside the decoration unit 750, a bearing portion 764c penetrating the shaft portion 764a below the shaft portion 764a, and a curved shape having the same axis as the rotation axis of the rotating body 800. A curved opening 764d formed in the opening and a ball feeding portion 762b of the crank cover 743
, and an engaging portion 764e penetrating on the rotation axis of the rotating body 800 in a semicircular shape in a side view.

The opening 764b allows the ball thrown from the ball-throwing portion of the crank cover 743 to pass through the base member 76.
2, and is formed to be larger than the outer diameter of the ball. As a result, the ball thrown to the crank cover 743 can be thrown to the base member 762 .

The bearing portion 764c is a hole into which the above-described shaft portion JB1 is inserted, and is formed with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion JB1. Thereby, the driving force can be transmitted to the right transmission member 740 described above.

The curved opening 764d is an opening through which a protrusion 773a protruding from the right lid portion 773 is inserted. Further, since the lid member 770 is rotationally displaced, the curved opening 764d is formed by the lid member 770.
It is formed in an arc shape coaxial with the rotation axis of. Thereby, when the cover member 770 is rotationally displaced, it is possible to suppress collision between the projection 773a and the curved opening 764d.

The engaging portion 764e is a member that engages with the right end portion of the base plate 810 disposed inside the rotating body 800 in a front view to hold the base plate 810 so as not to rotate. That is, the tip portion 811a of the right end portion 811 of the base plate 810 is inserted into the engaging portion 764e. This will
The base plate 810 is made non-rotatable.

The left side plate 765 is formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the right side plate 764 when viewed from the side.
The left side plate 765 includes a through hole 765a formed through the shaft of the rotating body 800, a shaft portion 765b projecting toward the rotating body 800, and a through hole into which the shaft portion 791a of the resistance member 791 is inserted. It is formed mainly with holes 765c.

The through-hole 765a is an opening for inserting the ball ejected from the opening on the left side of the rotating body 800 in front view into the through-hole 733a of the motor base 732 described above. That is, the through hole 7
65a is formed on the axis of the rotating body 800, and its inner diameter is set to the same size as the inner diameter of the opening of the rotating body 800 on the left side in the front view.

The shaft portion 765b is inserted into a shaft hole 781 formed in a rotation restricting member 780, which will be described later.
The rotation restricting member 780 can be held in a rotatable state. Displacement of the rotation restricting member 780 will be described later.

The through hole 765c is a hole through which the shaft portion 791a of the resistance member 791 is inserted as described above, and is formed at a position facing the side surface of the load gear 731e described above.

The lower surface plate 763 is a plate member that is disposed on the lower surface of the base member 762 so that the ball throwing portion 762b of the base member 762 and the lower surface plate 763 form a ball-throwing path through which the ball can pass.
In addition, the bottom plate 763 is formed with an opening 763a penetrating in the vertical direction. Opening 763a
is an opening for throwing a ball thrown inside the ball-throwing portion 762b to a recovery path (not shown). Therefore, the winning ball and the ball sent from the winning hole 761 a of the front plate 761 and the game area to the ball feeding portion 743 b of the right transmission member 740 can be ejected from the interior of the decoration unit 750 .

The lid member 770 includes a curved lid portion 771 formed in a curved shape coaxial with the axis of the rotating body 800 , a right lid portion 773 fastened to the right side surface of the curved lid portion 771 when viewed from the front, and the curved lid portion 771 . It mainly includes a left lid portion 772 that is fastened to the left side surface of the front view.

As described above, the curved lid portion 771 has a curved shape coaxial with the axis of the rotating body 800 and has a radius larger than that of the rotating body 800 when viewed from the side. The curved lid portion 771 has a transparent portion 771a formed of a transparent plate on a part of the front side.

The transparent portion 771a is a plate that allows the player to visually recognize patterns, characters, and the like drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 800 from the player. That is, the player does not know that the rotating body 800 is attached to the cover member 770
The display of the rotating body 800 can be visually recognized through the transparent portion 771a even in a mode in which the upper end side is covered.

The right lid portion 773 is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the side, and the radius of the outer side of the annular ring is set substantially equal to the radius of the curved lid portion 771 . In addition, the inner diameter of the right lid portion 773 is formed to be larger than the size of the outer shape of the right end portion 811 of the rotating body 800 when viewed from the side. As a result, the right lid portion 773 is
It is disposed in a state in which the right end portion 811 of the rotating body 800 is inserted through the annular inner portion.

Further, the right lid portion 773 is mainly formed with a protrusion 773a projecting to the outside (right side in front view) of the decoration unit 750, and a recess 773b recessed radially inward in the outer peripheral edge portion. . The protrusion 773a is a protrusion that is inserted into the second slide groove 742c of the arm member 742, as described above.

The concave portion 773b can rotate the opening/closing member 870 by inserting a protrusion 871 of the opening/closing member 870, which will be described later. Therefore, the width of the recessed portion 773 b is set to be larger than the outer shape of the projection 871 . Further, the recess 773b is formed at a position substantially opposite to the edge of the right lid portion 773 where the curved lid portion 771 is arranged.

The left lid portion 772 is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the side, and the radius of the outer side of the annular ring is set substantially equal to the radius of the curved lid portion 771 . In addition, the inner diameter of the left lid portion 772 is formed to be larger than the outer diameter of the tooth surface 881a of the left rotating portion 880, which will be described later. As a result, the left lid portion 772 is arranged in a state in which the left rotating portion 880 of the rotating body 800 is inserted through the annular inner portion.

Further, the left lid portion 772 is formed with a plate-shaped sensor plate 772a projecting to the outside of the decoration unit 750 (left side in front view). The sensor plate 772a can detect the position of the left side lid portion 772 by being arranged between opposing bifurcated sensors (not shown).

Here, the lid member 770 for the rotating body 800 will be described. The arrangement of the lid member 770 in the assembled state of the rotating body 800 is the state in which the right and left ends of the rotating body 800 are respectively inserted inside the right lid portion 773 and the left lid portion 772 (separate members) before assembly. do. after that,
By assembling the right lid portion 773 , the left lid portion 772 , and the curved lid portion 771 , the rotating body 800 and the lid member 770 are connected. Therefore, the lid member 770 is rotatable about the axis of the rotating body 800 with respect to the rotating body.

The rotation restricting member 780 is bent in a substantially L-shape when viewed from the side. The rotation restricting member 780 mainly includes a shaft hole 781 passing through the bent portion, a protrusion 782 projecting in the bending direction on one end side, and a flat contact surface 783 formed on the tip of the other end side. be done.

The shaft portion 765b of the left side plate 765 is inserted into the shaft hole 781 as described above. Thereby, the rotation restricting member 780 is rotatably held with respect to the left side plate 765 . Also, a biasing spring SP5 is inserted into the shaft portion. As a result, a unidirectional rotational force acts on the rotation restricting member 780 .

The projection 782 engages with an engaging projection 882 of a left rotating portion 880 to be described later, thereby rotating the rotating body 8 .
00 rotational displacement can be regulated. The abutment surface 783 is a surface with which the rear end of the lid member 770 abuts, and the rotation restricting member 780 can be rotated by the abutment of the lid member 770 . It should be noted that the manner in which the rotation restricting member 780 and the rotating body 800 are restricted will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 95 to 96, the drive force transmission path when the drive motor KM4 is rotated will be described. 95(a) and 96(a) show the rotation unit 700 as viewed in the direction of arrow XCVa in FIG. 89, and FIGS.
Rotation unit 700 at Vb.

In FIG. 95, the direction of displacement of each member when the shaft of the drive motor KM4 is rotated in the positive direction (clockwise) is indicated by a chain double-dashed line. In FIG. 96, the direction of displacement of each member when the shaft of the drive motor KM4 is rotated in the negative direction (counterclockwise) is indicated by a chain double-dashed line.

As shown in FIGS. 95(a) and 95(b), when the drive motor KM4 is driven in the forward direction, the transmission gear 731a rotates in the forward direction. When the transmission gear 731a rotates in the positive direction, the transmission gear 731b rotates in the negative direction, and the transmission gear 731c rotates in the positive direction.

In this case, the one-way clutch OW1 provided in the transmission gear 731b does not transmit the rotation of the outer ring to the inner ring, and the shaft portion JB1 does not rotate. Therefore, the driving force is not transmitted to the rotating member 741 connected to the shaft portion JB1, and the arm member 742 is brought into a stopped state.

On the other hand, the one-way clutch OW1 provided in the transmission gear 731 is in a state of transmitting the rotation of the outer ring to the inner ring, and the shaft 735 is rotated. Therefore, the transmission gear 7 connected to the shaft 735
31d is rotated. As a result, the load gear 731e meshing with the transmission gear 731d and the tooth surface 881a of the rotor 800 are rotated. That is, when the driving motor KM4 rotates forward, the driving force to the lid member 770 is not transmitted, and the driving force to the rotating body 800 is transmitted.

As shown in FIGS. 96(a) and 96(b), when the drive motor KM4 is driven in the negative direction, the transmission gear 731a is rotated in the negative direction. When the transmission gear 731a is rotated in the negative direction, the transmission gear 731b is rotated in the positive direction, and the transmission gear 731c is rotated in the negative direction.

In this case, the one-way clutch OW1 provided in the transmission gear 731b is in a state of transmitting the rotation of the outer ring to the inner ring, and the shaft portion JB1 is rotated. Therefore, the driving force is transmitted to the rotating member 741 connected to the shaft portion JB1, and the rotating member 741 is rotated. As a result, the arm member 742 rotates and reciprocates about the axis of the shaft hole 742a, and the cover member 770 is displaced.

On the other hand, the one-way clutch OW1 arranged on the transmission gear 731 does not transmit the rotation of the outer ring to the inner ring, and the shaft 735 does not rotate. Therefore, the transmission gear 73 connected to the shaft 735
The driving force is not transmitted to 1d, and the rotating body 800 and the load gear 731e are in a non-rotating state. That is, when the driving motor KM4 rotates in the negative direction, the driving force to the lid member 770 is transmitted, and the driving force to the rotating body 800 is not transmitted.

Therefore, the transmission gear 731c for transmitting the driving force from the driving motor KM4 to the rotating body 800
(rotating side driving means) and a transmission gear 731b (displacement side transmitting means) that transmits to an opening/closing member 870 to be described later via the cover member 770 are provided with a one-way clutch OW1, so that the rotational direction of the drive motor KM4 is reduced. Accordingly, the rotational force is transferred to the transmission gear 731c or the transmission gear 731b.
can be transmitted to one side and blocked from being transmitted to the other side. As a result, the drive motor K
Only by switching the rotation direction of M4, the driven object to be driven by the rotational driving force can be switched. can switch between displacement of 870 and its stop,
The structure can be simplified while making it possible to form a plurality of modes.

Here, in a structure in which the one-way clutch OW1 is used to switch the driven object (the rotating body 800 or the opening/closing member 870 (cover member 770) according to the rotation direction of the driving means, transmission of the driving force from the driving motor KM4 is When cut off, the rotating body 8 can be freely rotated or displaced in the direction in which it was driven by the driving force.
00 is switched to the opening/closing member 870 (cover member 770), and the transmission of the driving force is interrupted, the rotating body 800 becomes rotatable and may continue to rotate (rotate) due to inertial force.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the load gear 731e (loading gear) meshing with the transmission gear 731d driven by the transmission gear 731c is provided, transmission of the rotational driving force from the drive motor KM4 is interrupted. However, the load (resistance) generated when the load gear 731e is rotated can be used to prevent the rotating body 800 from continuing to rotate.

Next, displacement of the lid member 770 will be described with reference to FIGS. 97 and 98. FIG. Figure 97
97(b) and 98(b) are in the intermediate state, and FIGS. 97(c) and 98(a) are in the open state, respectively. 750 and a side view of the right transmission member 740. FIG.

97(a) to 97(c) and FIGS. 98(a) to 98(c) illustrate a state in which the crank cover 743 of the right transmission member 740 is removed. The closed state of the decoration unit 750 is a state in which the lid member 770 is arranged to cover the upper half of the rotating body 800 (upper side in FIG. 97(a)). It is in a state of being displaced and arranged on the back side of the rotating body 800 (the right side in FIG. 97(c)). The intermediate state is a state in which lid member 770 is positioned between the closed state and the open state.

Further, in FIGS. 97(a) to 97(c), the state of being displaced from the closed state to the open state is illustrated in order, and in FIGS. 98(a) to 98(c), the displacement from the open state to the closed state is illustrated. The states to be executed are illustrated in order.

First, referring to FIG. 97, the displacement of the lid member 770 when it is displaced from the closed state to the open state will be described. Transmission of the driving force to the arm member 742 is performed by the driving motor K
This is done by rotating M4 in the negative direction.

In the closed state, the projection 741a of the rotating member 741 is arranged on the rear side (right side in FIG. 97(a)) of the shaft hole 742a of the arm member 742. As shown in FIG. Therefore, the arm member 742
, the first sliding groove 742b into which the projection 741a is inserted is arranged on the back side of the shaft hole 742a.

The shaft hole 742a of the arm member 742, the first sliding groove 742b and the second sliding groove 742c are formed substantially on the same straight line. Therefore, the second sliding groove 742c formed at the opposite end of the first sliding groove 742b is positioned closer to the front side (left side in FIG. 97(a)) than the shaft hole 742a. As a result, the protrusion 773 a protruding from the right side surface of the lid member 770 is guided by the second slide groove 742 c so that the curved lid portion 771 of the lid member 770 is arranged above the rotating body 800 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 97(b), the rotating member 741 is rotated approximately 90 degrees so that the protrusion 741
a below the shaft of the rotating member 741, the first sliding groove 742b of the arm member 742
is displaced downward in the gravitational direction (downward in FIG. 97(b)) of the shaft hole 742a as the projection 741a is displaced.

Therefore, the second sliding groove 742c formed at the opposite end of the first sliding groove 742b is positioned above the shaft hole 742a in the gravitational direction (upper side in FIG. 97(b)). As a result, the protrusion 773a of the lid member 770 is guided by the second sliding groove 742c, and the curved lid portion 771 of the lid member 770 is placed in a position where it is rotationally displaced toward the back side of the rotating body 800. .

In this case, the center of gravity of lid member 770 is arranged on the back side of the rotation axis of lid member 770 (the center position of rotating body 800 formed in a cylindrical shape). Therefore, due to the load of the lid member 770, a rotational force acts in the direction of displacing the lid member 770 from the closed state to the open state. As described above, the rotating member 741 is provided with the one-way clutch OW1, and is configured such that the outer ring is rotatable ahead of the inner ring.
4 can be stopped and the cover member 770 can be continuously rotated.

As shown in FIG. 97(c), when the lid member 770 is displaced to the rear side of the rotating body, the projection 741a of the rotating member 741 is stopped at a position rotated approximately 90 degrees from the intermediate position.
That is, it is the leftmost (left side in FIG. 97) end of the displacement area of the projection 741a. Therefore, the rotation of the arm member 742 is restricted and the rotation of the lid member 770 is stopped.

That is, the displacement of the lid member 770 from the closed state to the open state is performed by driving the drive motor KM4 to displace it to the intermediate state and by dropping the lid member 770 under load.

As a result, when displacing the cover member 770 from the closed state to the open state, the drive motor KM
4 can be reduced to half of the entire interval, the energy consumption of the drive motor KM4 can be reduced.

Furthermore, the speed of displacement from the closed state to the intermediate state can be made to follow the rotation speed of the drive motor KM4, and the speed of displacement from the intermediate state to the open state can be made to follow the load of the lid member 770. The displacement speed from the closed state to the open state can be changed in two steps. Therefore, since the displacement speed of the lid member 770 can be changed without changing the displacement speed of the drive motor KM4, it is not necessary to complicate the control. As a result, the control can be simplified, and the occurrence of control failure can be suppressed.

A section in which the cover member 770 is displaced according to the rotation speed of the drive motor KM4 is called a first section.
A section in which the lid member 770 is displaced according to the load of the lid member 770 is called a second section.
The code of K1 is assigned to the second interval, and the code of DK2 is assigned for the description.

Next, referring to FIG. 98, the displacement of the lid member 770 when it is displaced from the open state to the closed state will be described.

As described above, in the open state, the protrusion 741a of the rotating member 741
The lid member 77
0 curved lid portion 771 is arranged on the back side of the rotating body 800 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(b), the rotating member 741 is rotated approximately 90 degrees so that the protrusion 741
a above the axis of the rotating member 741, the first sliding groove 742b of the arm member 742
is displaced downward in the gravitational direction (downward in FIG. 98(b)) of the shaft hole 742a as the projection 741a is displaced.

Therefore, the second sliding groove 742c formed at the opposite end of the first sliding groove 742b is positioned above the shaft hole 742a in the gravitational direction (upper side in FIG. 98(b)). As a result, the protrusion 773a of the lid member 770 is guided by the second sliding groove 742c, and the curved lid portion 771 of the lid member 770 is rotated upward by about 45 degrees from the state where it is located on the back side of the rotating body 800. It is placed in the position where the

In addition, the lid member 770 displaced to the closed position (the position of FIG. 97(a)) is arranged in the game area (the front side of the game board 13), and is placed in the open position (the position of FIG. 97(c)). position) is placed outside the game area (on the back side of the game board 13). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball flowing down the game area from colliding with the rotating body 800 and rotating the rotating body 800 . In particular, in the present embodiment, as will be described later, the rotating body 800 is provided with an opening/closing member 870 that displaces toward the game area side. It is possible to suppress the opening (extending) of the opening/closing member 870 .

Also, since the lid member 770 is placed outside the game area in the open position, the displacement of the lid member 770 to the open position creates a space for the opening/closing member 870 to protrude into the game area. can be secured. Accordingly, the outer surface of the rotating body 800 can be brought closer to the game area side, and the opening/closing member 870 can be easily recognized by the player.

Further, the cover member 770 is rotatable about an axis substantially parallel to the rotation axis of the rotating body 800 and is formed in a curved plate shape along the outer surface of the rotating body 800. The space required for shifting between the position (covered position) and the open position (retracted position) can be reduced, so that space for arranging other members can be secured accordingly. In addition, by forming the lid member 770 in such a curved manner, the game balls flowing down the game area are
It is possible to prevent the liquid from being retained on the lid member 770 arranged in the closed position, and allow the liquid to smoothly flow down.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(c), the rotating member 741 is further rotated by approximately 90 degrees, and the protrusion 7 is
1a is displaced to the right side of the axis of the rotating member 741, the first sliding groove 742 of the arm member 742
b is displaced to the rear side (right side in FIG. 98(c)) of the shaft hole 742a as the projection 741a is displaced.

Therefore, the second sliding groove 742c formed at the opposite end of the first sliding groove 742b is positioned closer to the front side (left side in FIG. 98(c)) than the shaft hole 742a. As a result, the protrusion 773 a of the lid member 770 is guided by the second sliding groove 742 c to place the curved lid portion 771 of the lid member 770 above the rotating body 800 .

In this case, as the lid member 770 is displaced, the center of gravity of the lid member 770 is displaced from the rotation axis of the lid member 770 to the front side. Therefore, during the transition from the intermediate state to the closed state, the lid member 77
With a load of 0, a rotational force acts in the direction of displacing the lid member 770 from the open state to the closed state. Therefore, even when the driving of the drive motor KM4 is stopped, the lid member 770 can be continuously rotated by the load of the lid member 770 .

Therefore, the lid member 770 can be brought into the closed state by the load of the lid member 770.
The lid member 770 can be securely closed.

Here, if the rotational displacement of the lid member 770 is caused only by the drive motor KM4, there is a possibility that the lid member 770 cannot be stopped at the normal position if the driving stop operation of the drive motor KM4 is deviated. Also, in the case where the rotating member 741 rotates in one direction as in the present embodiment, if the stopping operation of the driving motor KM4 is delayed, one rotation is required to return the driving motor KM4 to the normal position.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the position where the lid member 770 is to be stopped can be mechanically stopped by using the load of the lid member 770, so that the deviation of the stop position of the lid member 770 can be suppressed. can.

Here, a game machine is known that includes driving means for generating a driving force, a displacement member displaced by the driving force of the driving means, and transmission means for transmitting the driving force to the displacement member. However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the state of transmission of the driving force from the driving means to the displacement member by the transmission means is always constant. It is displaced at a speed, and the displacement mode of such a displacement member cannot be changed. Therefore, there is a problem that the performance effect of the performance accompanying the displacement of the displacement member is insufficient.

The displacement speed of the displacement member can be changed by increasing or decreasing the driving speed of the driving means. In order to obtain the speed, it is necessary to arrange a sensor device for detecting the position of the displacement member, and control to increase or decrease the output of the driving means according to the detection result of the sensor device.
This leads to increased product costs and control costs. In addition, the structure and control become complicated, resulting in a decrease in reliability.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the transmission means (the rotating member 741 and the arm member 742) are
The one-way clutch OW1 is provided, and when the inner ring (first member) of the one-way clutch OW1 is displaced in one direction with respect to the outer ring (second member) of the one-way clutch OW1, the rollers are engaged with the inner ring and the outer ring. When the driving force is transmitted and the inner ring is displaced in the other direction with respect to the outer ring, the engagement of the rollers with the inner ring and the outer ring is released, the transmission of the driving force is interrupted, and the lid member is operated. In the second section DK2 (predetermined section) of the displacement section of 770 (displacement member), the outer ring is displaced in one direction with respect to the inner ring. The displacement speed of lid member 770 in section DK2 can be made faster than the displacement speed of lid member 770 in other sections. Therefore, the cover member 770 can be varied to enhance the presentation effect associated with the displacement of the cover member 770 .

In addition, regardless of the drive state of the drive motor KM4, the outer ring can be driven ahead of the inner ring in one direction. It can be driven, and there is no need to increase or decrease the drive speed of the drive motor KM4 during the displacement section of the cover member 770 (that is, depending on whether it is the first section DK1 or the second section DK2). As a result, the control can be simplified, the control cost can be reduced, and the operational reliability can be improved. Alternatively, in the second section DK2, the operation of the driving means can be stopped, and in this case, it is possible to reduce energy consumption.

Further, in the driving state in which the inner ring is displaced in the other direction with respect to the outer ring, the engagement of the roller is released and the transmission of the driving force is interrupted, so that the displacement member is brought into a stopped state (driven state). The driving force of the driving means (driving motor KM4) in such a driving state can be transferred to the rotating body 8
00 can be used as a driving force. That is, by switching the driving direction of the driving means (driving motor KM4), the lid member 770 and the rotating body 800 can be displaced.

Further, the lid member 770 is formed rotatably, and its center of gravity is arranged at a position eccentric from the center of rotation. In the second section DK2, the weight of the lid member 770 displaces the outer ring in one direction. Since it is formed to be operable in one direction, the weight of the lid member 770 can be used to displace the outer ring in one direction ahead of the inner ring. That is, the displacement speed of the lid member 770 in the second section DK2 can be made faster than the displacement speed of the lid member 770 in the first section DK1. As a result, it is possible to change the displacement mode of the lid member 770 and enhance the presentation effect associated with the displacement of the displacement member.

Furthermore, the transmission of the driving force is performed by the body portion 741 to which the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 is attached.
and a rotating member 741 (crank member) having a projection 741a (pin portion) that protrudes from b and its main body portion 741b and is displaced from the rotation center of its main body portion 741c, and an arm member 742. The outer ring rotates the rotating member 741, and the protrusion 741a
is slid along the first slide groove 742b, the other end side (the second slide groove 742c side) of the rotating member 741 can be reciprocated. In this case, the other end side of the arm member 742 can reciprocate the lid member 770 between the open state position and the closed state position as the lid member 770 reciprocates. That is, the displacement direction of the lid member 770 can be switched without switching the driving direction of the drive motor KM4.

Further, in this case, the section of the second section DK can be formed in both of the reciprocating motions. The displacement speed of the lid member 770 can be increased. As a result, the displacement mode of the lid member 770 can be changed, and the presentation effect associated with the displacement of the lid member can be enhanced.

Next, displacement of the rotation restricting member 780 will be described with reference to FIG. 99 . Figure 99(a)
) is a side view of the decoration unit 750 in the closed state, and FIG. 99(b) is a side view of the decoration unit 750 in the open state. 99(a) and 99(b) show a state in which the left side plate 765 of the box member 760 is seen transparently.

As shown in FIG. 99(a), when the lid member 770 is closed, the rotation restricting member 780 is pushed downward on the projection 782 side by the biasing force of the biasing spring SP5 (
99(a), rotated clockwise around the axis of the shaft hole 781).

Therefore, the distance dimension L4 from the rotation axis of the rotating body 800 to the outside of the engaging projection 882 is made smaller than the distance dimension L5 from the rotation axis of the rotating body 800 to the tip of the projection 782 of the rotation restricting member 780 (L4 <L5).

Therefore, the rotating body 800 and the rotation restricting member 780 are not engaged with each other, and the rotating body 800 is allowed to rotate.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 99(b), when the lid member 770 is in the open state, the rotation restricting member 780 has the lid member 770 whose contact surface 783 is displaced toward the back side of the rotating body 800. The contact surface 783 is pushed downward (in FIG. 99(b), it is rotated counterclockwise about the axis of the shaft hole 781).

Therefore, the distance dimension L4 from the rotation axis of the rotating body 800 to the outer side of the engaging projection 882 is made larger than the distance dimension L6 from the rotation axis of the rotating body 800 to the tip of the projection 782 of the rotation restricting member 780 (L6 <L4).

As a result, the protrusion 782 of the rotation restricting member 780 can be inserted inside the engaging protrusion 882 of the rotating body 800 in which the engaging protrusion 882 of the left rotating portion 880 is arranged at the lowest position in the gravity direction. That is, since the rotating body 800 and the rotation restricting member 780 are engaged with each other, the rotating body 8
00 is non-rotatable. In the present embodiment, the position where the rotation of the rotating body 800 is disabled (the position where the protrusion 782 is inserted inside the engaging protrusion 882) is the position where the opening/closing member 870 of the rotating body 800, which will be described later, is in the open state. is set to

That is, the rotation restricting member 780 (rotation restricting means) that restricts the rotation of the rotating body 800 is such that the opening/closing member 870 (displacement member) is displaced to the open position (second position), and the other side of the displacement member is extended to the game area. Since the rotation of the rotating body 800 is restricted when the opening/closing member 870 is extended, the rotating body 800 is rotated in a state in which the opening/closing member 870 is projected, and other members positioned on the rotation trajectory move the opening/closing member 87 .
0 interference can be suppressed. In addition, it is possible to suppress the rotating body 800 from rotating due to the weight of the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the displacement member and the load acting when the displacement member receives the game ball flowing down the game area.

Here, a displaceable first member and a second member are provided, the first member covering at least a portion of the second member invisibly, and a state arranged at the covering position. A gaming machine is known which is formed to be displaceable between a retracted position that reduces an area covering the second member invisibly. According to this gaming machine, the second member is exposed by displacing the first member to the retracted position from a state in which the first member is arranged at the covering position and the second member is invisible to the player. It is possible to perform an effect that is visually recognized by the player.

However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the second member is formed to be displaceable, so there is a possibility that the second member will be displaced when the second member is exposed. Therefore, there is a problem that the player cannot visually recognize the second member in a proper state, and the presentation effect is lowered.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the lid member 770 (first member) can restrict the displacement of the rotating body 800 (second member) in the state of being displaced to the open position (retracted position). Since it is formed, the rotating body 800 can be visually recognized by the player in an appropriate state, and the production effect can be ensured. That is, when performing the effect of displacing the lid member 770 to the open position and exposing the rotating body 800, the displacement of the lid member 770 to the open position, which is unavoidable for the effect, is performed by rotating the lid member 770. It is used as means for restricting the displacement of body 800 . Therefore, there is no need to separately provide a mechanism for restricting the displacement of the rotating body 800 or perform control.
Structure can be simplified.

Further, the rotating body 800 has an outer peripheral surface formed asymmetrically with respect to the center of rotation, as will be described later (see FIG. 101). Therefore, the rotating body 800 is formed to be rotatable and its center of gravity position is eccentric from the center of rotation, so that the degree of freedom in designing the rotating body 800 can be increased. That is, the rotating body 800 does not need to have a shape in which the center of gravity is positioned at the center of rotation, and a shape asymmetrical with respect to the rotation axis can be adopted, so that the rendering effect of the rotating body 800 can be enhanced. On the other hand, if the center of gravity of the rotating body 800 is eccentric in this way, the rotating body 800 will be displaced to the closed state position due to its gravity rotating around the center of rotation (there is a risk of being rotated). A configuration in which the lid member 770 is formed so as to be capable of regulating the displacement of the rotating body 800 is particularly effective, whereby the rotating body 800 can be visually recognized by the player in an appropriate state, and the production effect can be ensured.

Note that the rotating body 800 may be formed symmetrically about the axis. In this case, rotating body 8
By forming 00 from two or more members having different specific gravities, the center of gravity can be arranged at a position different from the rotation axis. For example, by forming one half of the surface from a metal material and forming the other half from a flexible material, the center of gravity can be positioned on the side of the metal material, which generally has a higher specific gravity than the flexible material.

Next, the configuration of rotating body 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 100 to 102. FIG. Figure 1
100(a) is a front view of the rotating body 800, FIG. 100(b) is a side view of the rotating body 800 as viewed in the direction of arrow Cb in FIG. 100(a), and FIG. 100(a) is a side view of the rotating body 800 viewed in the direction of arrow Cc. 101 is an exploded perspective front view of the rotating body 800, and FIG. 102 is an exploded perspective rear view of the rotating body 800. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 100 to 102, rotating body 800 is formed in a cylindrical shape by combining a plurality of members. Rotating body 800 includes a base plate 810 arranged on a shaft portion, and a first display portion 830, a second display portion 840, a third display portion 850 and a fourth display portion 830, which are arranged to surround the base plate 810 and are combined in an annular shape. A display portion 860, a right rotating portion 89 arranged at one end in the axial direction, a left rotating portion 880 arranged at the other end in the axial direction, and an opening/closing member arranged inside the first display portion 830. 870.

The base plate 810 has a substantially L-shaped cross section when viewed in the axial direction, and is formed in a shape extending in the axial direction. The base plate 810 is formed with a right end portion 811 and a left end portion 812 protruding outward from both left and right ends.

The right end portion 811 is formed to protrude from the right side of the base plate 810 in a front view (the right side in FIG. 100(a)) in an annular shape. The right end portion 811 is mainly formed with a tip portion 811a that partially protrudes from the projecting tip of the right end portion 811 and a communication hole 811b in the annular inner portion.

The tip portion 811a further protrudes in the axial direction from the tip portion of the right end portion 811,
The projecting region in the right side view (viewed in the direction of FIG. 100(c)) is the engaging portion 7 of the right side plate 764.
It is set smaller than the area inside 64e. The tip portion 811a is inserted inside the engaging portion 764e of the right side plate 764 as described above. As a result, the base plate 810 and the right side plate 764 (cover member 770) are engaged with each other. As a result, the base plate 810 can be stopped against rotational displacement of each display surface (first display section 830, second display section 840, third display section 850, and fourth display section 860) to be described later.

The communication hole 811b is an opening through which a wiring (not shown) connected to the LED board 820 described later is inserted, and is formed through the right side surface of the base plate 810 in front view. Thereby, wiring can be inserted.

The left end portion 812 is formed to protrude from the left side of the base plate 810 in a front view (the left side in FIG. 100(a)) in an annular shape. The left end 812 has a tip 8 projecting from the lower semicircle of the left end 812 .
12a and a communicating hole 812b in the annular inner portion.

The tip portion 812a further protrudes in the axial direction from the tip portion of the left end portion 812, and
The projecting shape in the left side view (viewed in the direction of FIG. 100(b)) is a lower semicircle of an annular ring.

The communication hole 812b is a path through which a ball thrown into the rotating body 800 by an opening/closing member 870, which will be described later, is discharged to the outside of the rotating body 800. FIG. The communication hole 812 b has an inner diameter larger than that of the ball and substantially the same as the through hole 733 a formed in the gear cover 733 .

The communication hole 812b is an opening connected to the through hole 733a of the gear cover 733, and the projection distance of the left end portion 812 is set to a distance that contacts the through hole 733a. Furthermore, a projection 733b is formed on the upper hemisphere of the end face of the through hole 733a. The protrusion distance of the protrusion 733b is set substantially equal to the protrusion distance of the tip portion 812a. As a result, base plate 810 and gear cover 733 (left transmission member 730) are engaged with each other. As a result, the base plate 810 can be stopped against rotational displacement of each display surface (first display section 830, second display section 840, third display section 850, and fourth display section 860) to be described later.

A reverse rotation prevention member 813 is rotatably disposed on the bottom surface of the base plate 810 . The reverse rotation prevention member 813 is formed in a substantially circular shape when viewed from above, and has a projection 813a inclined toward one end side.
is formed. In addition, the reverse rotation prevention member 813 and the base plate 810 are provided with a biasing spring SP6.
is disposed so that the projection 813a is always on the left side in front view (left side in FIG. 100(a))
is biased to

The right rotating portion 890 is formed in a plate shape with a predetermined thickness and has an annular shape when viewed from the side. The right rotation part 890 is formed such that the inside diameter of the ring is larger than the size of the right end part 811 of the base plate 810 . As a result, the right end portion 811 of the base plate 810 is positioned inside the right rotation portion 890 .
can be inserted. In addition, the right rotating portion 890 includes a shaft hole 891 penetrating in the left-right direction and the shaft hole 891 of the shaft hole 891 .
A sliding groove 892 that is curved and opened around 91 is mainly formed.

The shaft hole 891 is a hole into which a shaft portion 872 of the opening/closing member 870 described later is inserted.
2 with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the shaft portion 872 of the opening/closing member 870 from being displaced with respect to the first display portion 830 .

The sliding groove 892 is formed in a curved shape centering on the shaft hole 891 , and its radius is set to be the same as the separation distance between the projection 871 and the shaft portion 872 of the opening/closing member 870 . Accordingly, by inserting the projection 871 of the opening/closing member 870 into the sliding groove 892 , the projection 871 can slide inside the sliding groove 892 when the opening/closing member 870 is displaced.

The counterclockwise rotating portion 880 is formed in a plate shape with a predetermined thickness and has an annular shape when viewed from the side. The left rotating portion 880 is formed such that the inner diameter of the ring is larger than the size of the left end portion 812 of the base plate 810 . As a result, the left end portion 81 of the base plate 810 is positioned inside the left rotating portion 880 .
2 can be inserted. The counterclockwise rotation portion 880 mainly includes a wall portion 881 projecting from the inner edge portion in an annular shape, an engaging projection 882 projecting from the side wall, and a locking portion 883 in which inclined surfaces are continuously arranged on the inner edge portion. formed with.

The wall portion 881 is formed so as to protrude to the left side of the rotating body 800 when viewed from the front. The wall portion 881 has a gear tooth surface 881a engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the projecting tip, and a communication hole 881b opening inward.
Prepare. The tooth surface 881a meshes with the transmission gear 881d as described above. Thereby, the driving force of the driving motor KM4 can be transmitted to the rotating body 800. FIG.

The communication hole 881b is an opening that communicates the internal space and the external space of the rotating body 800, and can discharge the ball thrown into the rotating body 800 by opening the opening/closing member 870, which will be described later.

The engagement protrusion 882 is a protrusion with which the rotation restricting member 780 is engaged, as described above. The engaging protrusion 882 is formed to protrude from the left side surface of the left rotating portion 880 in a front view. Two engaging projections 882 are formed at positions spaced apart by a predetermined distance, and the projection 782 of the rotation restricting member 780 can be inserted between them.

The locking portion 883 has a serrated cross section. The counterclockwise rotating part 880 includes the base plate 810
, the tip of the projection 813a of the reverse rotation preventing member 813 is brought into contact with the engaging portion 883. As shown in FIG. As a result, when a rotational force that rotates the left rotating portion 880 in one direction acts, the projection 813a is slid along the inclined surface of the locking portion 883 so that the left rotating portion 880 rotates.
However, when a rotational force that rotates the counterclockwise rotation portion 880 in the other direction acts, the surface of the locking portion 883 is caught by the projection 813a and the rotation is suppressed.

As a result, it is possible to restrict the rotating body 800 from rotating in the direction opposite to the direction in which it is rotated by the rotational driving force of the drive motor KM4. It is possible to suppress reverse rotation of the rotating body due to a collision or the like.

The first display portion 830 to the fourth display portion 860 are each formed in the same curved shape, and can be formed into a single circular ring shape by connecting the end surfaces thereof. In addition, the inner diameters of the first display portion 830 to the fourth display portion 860 formed into one ring are set to be substantially the same as the outer diameters of the left and right rotating portions 880 and 890 . As a result, the display units 830 to 860 are rotated by the left and right rotating units 880 and 89.
0, the first display portion 830 to the fourth display portion 860 can be formed in a columnar shape.

Characters and patterns are drawn on each of the first display portion 830 to the fourth display portion 860, and as described above, the driving force is transmitted from the counterclockwise rotation portion 880 to rotate and display each character. The pattern can be visually recognized by the player.

The first display portion 830 mainly includes an opening 831 opened in its curved surface and a bearing portion 832 that opens toward the shaft and protrudes in a U-shape.

The opening 831 is an opening in which an opening/closing member 870 (to be described later) is arranged.
It is formed in an opening with an inner diameter that is substantially the same as the outer shape of the . The bearing portion 832 is formed in a size that allows the shaft portion 872 of the opening/closing member 870 to be inserted into the opened U-shaped portion. Therefore, by inserting the opening/closing member 870 into the opening 831 and inserting the shaft portion 872 of the opening/closing member 870 into the bearing portion 832 , the opening/closing member 870 can be rotationally displaced with respect to the first display portion 830 . A description of the displacement mode of the opening/closing member 870 will be given later.

The LED board 820 is supplied with power so that the LEDs mounted on the LED board 820
Light can be emitted. Also, the LED board 820 is attached to the back side of the base plate 810 .

Next, with reference to FIG. 103, opening and closing of the opening/closing member 870 will be described. Figure 103(a)
) is a side view of the rotating body 800 with the opening/closing member 870 closed. Figure 103(b)
8] is a side view of the rotating body 800 in which the opening/closing member 870 is opened. [Fig. Note that in FIG. 103, when the opening/closing member 870 overlaps with another member, the outer diameter thereof is indicated by a dashed line.

The closed state of the opening/closing member 870 means that the outer peripheral surface of the opening/closing member 870 is
is arranged substantially parallel to the outer peripheral surface of the On the other hand, the open state of the opening/closing member 870 is a state in which the outer peripheral surface of the opening/closing member 870 intersects with the outer peripheral surface of the first display portion 830 .

As shown in FIG. 103(a), the rotating body 800 in which the opening/closing member 870 is in the closed state is such that the protrusion 871 of the opening/closing member 870 is positioned at one end of the sliding groove 892 of the right rotating portion 890 (FIG. 103(a)).
is located below the shaft portion 872).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 103(b), when the opening/closing member 870 is in the open
, the protrusion 871 of the opening/closing member 870 is positioned on the other end side of the sliding groove 892 of the right rotating portion 890 . That is, the opening/closing member 870 is displaced by the projection 871 sliding inside the sliding groove 892 of the right rotating portion 890 .

Next, referring to FIG. 104, displacement of the protrusion 871 will be described. 104(a) and (b) are side views of the decoration unit 750. FIG. Note that FIGS. 104(a) and 104(
In b), the right side plate 764 of the box member 760 is shown transparently.

FIG. 104(a) illustrates a state in which the decoration unit 750 is closed and the opening/closing member 870 is closed. FIG. 104(b) illustrates a state in which the decoration unit 750 is in the open state and the opening/closing member 870 is in the open state.

As shown in FIG. 104(a), when the decoration unit 750 is closed, the right lid portion 7 is closed.
The outer edge of 73 is brought into contact with projection 871 . When the decoration unit 750 is in the closed state, the outer diameter L7 from the rotation axis of the lower half surface of the right lid portion 773 is made smaller than the distance L8 from the axis of the right rotation portion 890 to one end side of the slide groove 892 (L7 <L8).

Also, the difference in dimension between L7 and L8 is set to be substantially the same as the outer diameter of the projection 871 . Therefore,
When the outer edge of the right lid portion 773 is in contact with the protrusion 871 , the protrusion 871 is displaced toward one end of the slide groove 892 . As a result, the opening/closing member 870 is closed. That is, when the decoration unit 750 is closed, it is possible to prevent the opening/closing member 870 from being displaced to the open state.

As shown in FIG. 104(b), when the decoration unit 750 is opened, the right lid portion 7 is opened.
A concave portion 773b formed in the outer edge portion is displaced along with the displacement of 73 . In this case, recess 773
A protrusion 871 is inserted inside b. Thereby, the projection 871 can be displaced to the other side of the sliding groove 892 . As a result, the opening/closing member 870 is opened by the biasing force of the biasing spring SP7 arranged between the shaft portion 872 and the first display portion 830 .

As described above, the opening/closing member 870 can be displaced to the open state according to the displacement of the lid member 770 . Therefore, since it is not necessary to dispose a drive source for driving the opening/closing member 870 in the rotating body 800, the rotating body 800 can be made small.

Further, the drive motor KM4 for displacing the opening/closing member 870 can also be used as driving means for displacing the cover member 770. FIG. In this case, when the opening/closing member 870 and the lid member 770 are displaced by driving forces of separate driving means, the opening/closing member 870 and the lid member 770 may interfere with each other if control failure occurs. and lid member 770 can be mechanically connected to synchronize their displacements.
can be suppressed from interfering with

As shown in FIG. 104(b), when the opening/closing member 870 is opened, the leading end side of rotation is arranged above the winning opening 761a of the box member 760. As shown in FIG. As a result, a ball thrown from a ball throwing portion 711c of the ball receiving base 710, which will be described later, can be dropped onto the upper surface of the opening/closing member 870. As shown in FIG.

In this case, the open/close member 870 is arranged above the shaft portion 872 on the rotating distal end side. Therefore, the ball falling on the upper surface can be rolled toward the inside of the rotating body 800 . rotating body 80
0 is rolled on the upper surface of the base plate 810 arranged inside the rotating body 800 . Further, since the base plate 810 is inclined downward toward the left end portion 812 side, the ball rolling on the upper surface of the base plate 810 rolls toward the left end portion 812 side and rotates from the inside thereof. It can be discharged outside the body 800 . That is, the inside of the rotating body 800 can be used as a ball-throwing path.

Further, as described above, the rotating body 800 is provided with the rotation restricting member 780 that restricts the rotation of the rotating body 800. Therefore, the lid member 770 is displaced to the open position to expose the rotating body 800. Further, by displacing the opening/closing member 870, the effect of the presentation can be enhanced. On the other hand, the rotating body 800 may be rotated (rotated). Therefore, the configuration in which the lid member 770 displaced to the open position is formed so as to be able to regulate the displacement of the rotating body 800 is particularly effective, thereby allowing the player to visually recognize the rotating body 800 in an appropriate state. It is possible to ensure the performance effect.

Here, a game machine is known which is provided with a rotating member which is rotatably formed and whose outer surface around the rotation axis is arranged so as to be visible to the player. According to this gaming machine, the rotating member is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the display (pattern) on the outer peripheral surface can be visually recognized by the player while rotating the rotating member or stopping the rotating member. However, in the above-described conventional game machine, there is a problem that the rotating member is used only as a member for holding a display on its outer surface for the player to see, and the utilization of the rotating member is insufficient. . That is, the rotating member is formed relatively large because it is necessary to maintain a display that is visible to the player. Therefore, while the occupied space increases, the portion other than the outer surface is not utilized.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the rotating body 800 (rotating member) communicates the internal space formed therein with the outside, and has an opening 831 and a communicating hole 881b through which a game ball can pass. Since the (communication port) is provided, the game ball flowing down the game area can flow into or out of the internal space through the opening 831 and the communication hole 881b. Therefore, the internal space of the rotating body 800, which is a dead space, can be made to function as a game ball storage space or a ball-throwing passage, and the rotating body 800 can be utilized accordingly.

In addition, in the above-described conventional game machine, it is only possible to form an effect mode in which the display on the outer peripheral surface is visually recognized by the player when the rotating member is stopped. There was a problem that

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since the opening/closing member 870 (displacement member) is displaceably disposed on the outer surface of the rotating body 800 (rotating member), the outer surface of the rotating body 800 rotates or stops. In addition to the presentation mode in which the player visually recognizes the display of , it is possible to form the presentation mode in which the opening/closing member 870 is displaced.

When the lid member 770 (displacement member) is displaced to the closed position (first position), the rotating body 800 (
Since a part of the outer surface of the rotating member) is formed by the opening/closing member 870, the outer shape of the rotating body 800 can be reduced, and the space required for the rotating body 800 to rotate can be reduced accordingly. On the other hand, when the opening/closing member 870 is displaced to the open position (second position), the opening/closing member 870 protrudes outward in the radial direction of the rotating body 800, so that the displacement of the opening/closing member 870 can easily be visually recognized by the player. It is possible to enhance the performance effect. Further, by rotating the rotating body 800 with the opening/closing member 870 placed at the closed position, and disposing (displacing) the opening/closing member 870 at the open position when the rotation is stopped, the outer surface of the rotating body 800 can be The visually recognizable portion (opening/closing member 870) can be projected outward in the radial direction of the rotating body 800, which can enhance interest.

Also, an LED board 820 that emits light is arranged on the base plate 810 in the internal space of the rotating body 800 . Therefore, by setting the opening/closing member 870 to the open position, the outer surface of the rotating body 800 is opened, the internal space is communicated with the outside, and the light emitted from the LED board 820 can be emitted to the outside. On the other hand, when the opening/closing member 870 is in the closed position, the outer surface of the rotating body 800 is closed, and the light emission from the LED board 820 can be blocked from being emitted to the outside. As a result, the performance effect can be enhanced.

Here, in order to make the rotating body 800 rotatable and displaceably displace the opening/closing member 870 on the rotating body 800, a driving means is required for each of the rotating body 800 and the opening/closing member 870, which increases the product cost. increases. Moreover, if the driving means for displacing the opening/closing member 870 is mounted on the rotating body 800, the weight of the rotating body 800 increases, making it difficult to start or stop the rotation of the rotating body 800 smoothly.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, the opening/closing member 870 is displaced along with the displacement of the lid member 770, and the lid member 770 and the rotating body 800 are displaced by the same driving motor KM4. KM4 can also be used to rotate the rotating body 800 and displace the opening/closing member 870 . Therefore, it is possible to reduce the product cost. Further, since it is not necessary to mount a driving means for displacing the opening/closing member on the rotating body 800, the weight of the rotating body 800 can be reduced, and the rotation of the rotating body 800 can be smoothly started or stopped.

In addition, since the opening 831 (first communication port) and the communication hole 881b (second communication port) are formed at different positions, the opening 831 is used as an inflow port for inflowing game balls from the outside into the internal space, and the communication hole 881b can be used as an outlet for discharging game balls from the internal space to the outside. Namely
Even if the rotating body 800 (rotating member) is not rotated (maintained in a stopped state), the rotating body 8
00 can be utilized as a ball-throwing path for game balls.

Furthermore, since the opening 831 is formed in the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 800 and the communication hole 881b is formed in the axial end surface of the rotating body 800, the game ball can flow into the internal space of the rotating body 800 (rotating member). The inflow can be easily visually recognized by the player, and the game ball can be discharged while the rotating body 800 is maintained in a stopped state.

That is, the rotating body 800 is arranged so that the outer surface thereof can be visually recognized by the player, and on the outer surface thereof,
Since the opening 831 (inflow port) is formed, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the inflow of the game ball. On the other hand, if the communication hole 881b is formed on the outer surface of the rotating body 800, and the rotating body 800 is arranged at the rotational position where the communicating hole 881b is upward, the game ball cannot flow out from the internal space. Since the communication hole 881b (outflow port) is formed in the end surface of the rotating body 800 in the rotation axis direction, regardless of the rotational position of the rotating body 800, a state in which the game ball can flow out from the internal space can be formed.

In addition, a displaceable opening/closing member 870 (displacement member) is provided inside the opening 831 (first communication port).
is provided, and when the opening/closing member 870 is displaced to the closed position (first position), the opening 831 is blocked by the opening/closing member 870, and when the opening/closing member 870 is displaced to the open position (second position),
Since the opening 831 is opened, the inflow of game balls through the opening 831 can be switched between the blocking state and the allowing state.

Furthermore, one side of the opening/closing member 870 (displacement member) is rotatably supported by the rotating body 800 (rotating member), and when the opening/closing member 870 is displaced to the open position (second position), the one side and the opposite side are rotatably supported. Since the other side is projected to the game area, the upper surface of the opening/closing member 870 can receive the game ball flowing down the game area. Thus, when opening 831 is formed as an inlet,
The opening/closing member 870 can be used to make it easier for the game balls flowing down the game area to flow into the internal space of the rotating body 800 .

In addition, it is possible to make it easier to stop the game ball flowing down the game area on the upper surface of the opening/closing member 870 . Therefore, for example, when an inlet for game balls is formed in the rotating body 800, the opening/closing member 870 can be used to make it easier for the game balls flowing down the game area to flow into the inlet. In this case, if the opening/closing member 870 catches the game ball flowing down the game area, the rotating body 800 may be rotated by the load acting at that time and the weight of the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the displacement member. . Therefore, the lid member 770 displaced to the open state position moves toward the rotation restricting member 78
0 is displaced so that the displacement of the rotating body 800 can be restricted is particularly effective, thereby making it easier to maintain the state in which the opening/closing member 870 protrudes at a predetermined position in the game area.

A shaft portion 872 of the opening/closing member 870 is arranged on the rotating direction side of the rotating body 800 . In other words, one side of the opening/closing member 870 (displacement member) is positioned forward of the other side in the rotational direction of the rotating body 800 (rotating member). Therefore, even if the opening/closing member 870 interferes with a member disposed around the rotating member when the rotating body 800 is rotated, the force generated by such interference closes the opening/closing member 870 (displaces it to the closed position). It can be made to act in the direction of
That is, when the rotating body 800 rotates, the opening/closing member 870 interferes with other members and protrudes (second
position). In addition, it is possible to prevent the opening/closing member 870 from engaging with another member and hindering the rotation of the rotating body 800 .

Further, a base plate 810 (fixing member) arranged in the internal space of the rotating body 800 is
00 is non-rotatable with respect to the box member 760 (base member) rotatably disposed,
By rolling the game ball flowing into the internal space of the rotating body 800 from the opening 831 toward the communication hole 881b on the upper surface of the base plate 810, the game ball rampages in the internal space as the rotating body 800 rotates. Alternatively, it is possible to prevent the game ball from staying in the internal space due to hindrance to rolling.

As described above, the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing member 870 is restricted by the displacement of the lid member 770, so that the opening/closing member 870 displaced to the open state (second position) does not interfere with members around the rotating body 800. can be suppressed.

As described above, the rotator 800 has the communication hole 811b through which the wiring to the LED board 820 attached to the back side of the base plate 810 is inserted, and the rotator 800 has the communication hole 881b.
It is formed on the end face opposite to the 0 end face. Therefore, it is possible to easily secure a space that can be used for each of the communication hole 881b and the communication hole 811b.

That is, when electrical wiring is to be performed on the LED board disposed inside the rotating body 800, the rotating body 8
00, the wires are entangled by the rotation of the rotating body 800. Therefore, it is preferable to wire from the axial end faces of the rotating body. If the opening through which the game balls flow out is formed, it becomes difficult to secure a space for inserting the wiring.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the inlet of the game ball of the rotating body 800 can be the outer peripheral surface, one of the axial end faces of the rotating body 800 is used as the outlet for the game ball, and the other is used for inserting the wiring. Since it can be used as an opening, it is possible to easily secure a space for inserting the wiring.

As a result, the game ball can be discharged smoothly through the communication hole 881b, and the wiring work to the opening of the electrical connection line (the wiring to the LED board 820) can be easily performed. In addition, since the communicating holes 881b and 811b can be separated from each other as much as possible, interference between the game ball rolling in the internal space of the rotating body 800 to the communicating hole 881b and the electrical connection line can be easily suppressed.

Next, referring to FIGS. 105 and 106, the lower displacement unit 400 and the rotation unit 7
00 will be explained. 105 is a front view of the lower displacement unit 400 and the rotation unit 700, and FIG. 106 is a top view of the lower displacement unit 400 as viewed in the direction of arrow CVI in FIG. 105 and 106, the lower displacement unit 40 in the retracted state
0 is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, the lower displacement unit 400 and the rotation unit 700 are arranged adjacent to each other in the left-right direction. In addition, the lower displacement unit 400 and the rotation unit 700 in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 106) have the emission opening 471 of the lower displacement member 440 arranged at the approximately central position of the ball bearing table 710 in the front-rear direction.

Next, with reference to FIG. 107, a manner of throwing a ball from the lower displacement unit 400 to the rotation unit 700 will be described. 107 is a front view of the lower displacement unit 400 and the rotation unit 700. FIG. Note that FIG. 107 illustrates a state in which the lower displacement unit 400 is arranged in the first extended state.

As shown in FIG. 107, the lower displacement unit 400 is in the first extended state, and the lower displacement member 4
40, the ball receiving portion 467 disposed inside the ball receiving portion 40 receives the ball inside (ball receiving operation). The ball placed inside the portion 467 is ejected to the outside of the lower displacement member 440 .

The ball ejected from the exit opening 471 of the lower displacement member 440 freely falls onto the ball receiving base 710 of the rotating unit 700 arranged on the right side in the front view. As a result, the ball can be thrown from the lower displacement unit 400 to the rotor 800 .

Next, with reference to FIGS. 108 and 109, the configuration of ball cradle 710 will be described. FIG. 108(a) is a top view of ball cradle 710, FIG. 108(b) is a front view of ball cradle 710, and FIG. 108(c) is CVIIIc-CVIIIc of FIG. 108(a). 7 is a cross-sectional view of ball cradle 710 at line; FIG. 109 is an exploded perspective view of the ball cradle 710. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 108 and 109, the ball cradle 710 has a box-shaped dish receiving portion 711.
, a solenoid 712 arranged inside the plate receiving portion 711 , a displacement member 713 connected to the solenoid 712 , and a cover member 714 covering the solenoid 712 .

The plate receiving portion 711 includes a bottom plate 711a forming a bottom surface, a standing portion 711b erected on the edge of the bottom plate 711a, a ball throwing portion 711c protruding from a portion of the outer edge of the bottom plate 711a, and a ball throwing portion 711c. and a shaft hole 711d penetrating a standing portion 711b erected on the edge of the shaft.

The bottom plate 711a is bent downward toward the ball feeding portion 711c, which will be described later. As a result, the ball thrown to the upper part of the bottom plate 711a is deflected (inclined) by the ball-throwing portion 711c.
You can roll to the side.

In addition, the bottom plate 711a is made of a flexible material, and the lower surface of the bottom plate 711a (FIG. 10).
8(c) lower surface) is textured to form fine unevenness on the surface. This will
When the bottom plate 711a is molded, the heat shrink ratio is made different between the top surface and the bottom surface so that the bottom plate 711a can be easily bent toward the bottom surface. That is, when the bottom surface to which texturing is applied is thermally shrunk due to the unevenness, it is difficult for a force to act in the direction of convexly curving the bottom plate side. On the other hand, since the upper surface side is formed flat, a pulling force acts in the horizontal direction when thermally shrunk, and the end portion tends to change upward (the upper surface side tends to form a concave curve). Therefore, it is possible to easily bend in the direction in which the balls roll easily when thermally shrunk. As a result, it is possible to suppress defective products when the bottom plate 711a is molded.

The erected portion 711b is positioned above the outer edge of the ball feeding portion 711c in the direction of gravity (upper side in FIG. 108(c)).
It is a wall part that is set up on the wall. The erected distance of the erected portion 711b is set larger than the outer diameter of the sphere. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball thrown to the upper part of the bottom plate 711a from falling downward from the edge thereof. In this embodiment, the standing dimension of the standing portion 711b is approximately 1.5 times the diameter of the sphere.
set to double.

Also, the erected portion 711b has a central erected portion 711b1 that divides the region of the bottom plate 711a into two.
is connected to the standing portion 711b. The upper area of the bottom plate 711a is divided into an area in which a ball is thrown on one side and an area in which a solenoid 712 (to be described later) is arranged on the other side by the central standing portion 711b1.

The ball feeding portion 711c is formed on the front side of the bottom plate 711a. In addition, the horizontal direction (Fig. 108 (
a) in the left-right direction) is arranged on the right side (the right side in FIG. 108) of the substantially central position of the bottom plate 711a. Further, the ball feeding portion 711c protrudes from the bottom plate and thus is curved downward. As a result, the ball thrown from the bottom plate 711a can drop downward through the ball-throwing portion 711c. A prize winning opening 761a of the cover member 770 is provided on the lower side of the ball throwing section 711c (see FIG. 106), and the ball falling from the ball throwing section 711c can be thrown into the prize winning opening 761a.

A shaft portion 713a of a displacement member 713, which will be described later, is inserted into the shaft hole 711d. This will
The displacement member 713 can be rotationally displaced about the axis of the shaft hole 711d.

The solenoid 712 can piston-displace the shaft inserted inside the solenoid 712 by applying electric power. A transmission member 712 a is attached to the shaft of the solenoid 712 . The transmission member 712a is a member that transmits the driving force of the solenoid 712 to a displacement member 713, which will be described later.

The displacement member 713 is formed to have a C-shaped cross section, and a projection 71 protruding outward from the C-shape at one end thereof.
3b and axial portions 713a protruding inward of the C shape at both ends.

The protrusion 713b is a protrusion inserted into the communication hole 712a1 of the solenoid 712, and is formed in a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter larger than the inner diameter of the communication hole 712a1. As a result, the solenoid 7
12 displacement is transmitted to the displacement member 713 via the transmission member 712a.

The shaft portion 713a is a shaft inserted into the shaft hole 711d. By inserting the shaft portion 713a into the shaft hole 711d, the displacement member 713 can rotate about the axis of the shaft portion 713a. That is, the displacement member 713 is driven by the displacement of the solenoid 712 .

The cover member 714 is formed to have an outer shape larger than the outer shape of the solenoid 712, and is arranged above the solenoid 712 arranged on the upper part of the bottom plate 711a.
1 is fastened and fixed. Thereby, the solenoid 712 can be fixed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 110, the ball falling onto the ball cradle 710 will be described. Figure 110 (
110(b) are cross-sectional views of the ball cradle 710. FIG. 110(a) and 110(b) correspond to the cross section of the ball receiving base 710 of FIG. 108(c).

As shown in FIG. 110, the ball thrown from the lower displacement member 440 of the lower displacement unit 400 freely falls in the direction of gravity, and the shooting action of the ball receiving portion 467 causes the ball to fall toward the rotation unit 700 (right side in FIG. 110(a)). ). That is, the ball is dropped onto the bottom plate 711a of the ball receiving table 710 in the lower right direction in a front view.

In this case, as described above, the bottom plate 711a is bent downward toward the ball-feeding portion 711c, and the ball-feeding portion 711c is formed on the right side of the bottom plate 711a. can be made into an inclined surface that slopes downward toward the right side. Therefore, the displacement direction of the ball and the tilting direction of the bottom plate 711a on which the ball falls can be made parallel to each other.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 110(b), the ball falling on the bottom plate 711a moves upward
10(b) upward) can be suppressed. Therefore, the ball sent from the lower displacement member 440 of the lower displacement unit 400 to the ball cradle 710 of the rotation unit 700 is
Dropping from 0 can be suppressed.

Furthermore, the ball that has fallen to the bottom plate 711a can be rolled toward the ball feeding portion 711c by the momentum of the drop. Therefore, the rolling time of the ball up to the ball feeding portion 711c can be shortened.
As a result, the ball thrown from the lower displacement member 440 to the ball receiving base 710 can be thrown smoothly.

Next, with reference to FIG. 111, light emission of ball cradle 710 will be described. FIG. 111(a)
and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the rotation unit 700 along line CXI-CXI in FIG. Note that FIG. 111(a) shows the decoration unit 750 in the closed state, and FIG.
A state in which the decoration units 750 are arranged in an open state is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 111(a), when the decoration unit 750 is arranged in the closed state, light is emitted to the ball receiving base 710 by an LED base 721 arranged on the rear side of the rear base 720. .

To explain in detail, the light emitted from the LED 721a of the LED board 721 is
0, the light is incident on the bottom plate 711a of the ball support 710. As shown in FIG. Further, as described above, since the bottom surface of the bottom plate 711a is textured, incident light can be diffusely reflected due to unevenness of the texture. Thereby, the entire bottom surface of the ball receiving base 710 can be illuminated.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 111(b), when the decoration unit 750 is arranged in the open state, the transparent portion 771a is formed on the lid member 770 as described above, so that the LED substrate 7
The LED 721 a of 21 is transmitted without being reflected by the lid member 770 . Since the rotating body 800 is formed inside the cover member 770 , the light can be reflected by the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 800 and made incident on the ball support 710 .

Further, in this case, by rotating the third display portion 850 of the rotating body 800 toward the ball receiving base 710 (the upper side in FIG.
Light emitted from the D 821 can be reflected by the inner wall of the rotating body 800 and emitted from the third display section 850 .

As described above, the inner wall of the third display portion 850 is textured to form a plurality of unevenness on the surface. Therefore, the third display unit 850 makes it easier to emit light to the outside of the rotating body 800 than other display units. Therefore, it is preferable to dispose the third display unit 850 on the ball cradle 710 side.

Next, a detailed configuration of the upper displacement unit 900 will be described with reference to FIGS. 112 to 118. FIG. First, the structure for displacing the upper displacement member 940 will be described with reference to FIGS. 112 to 114. FIG.

112 is a front view of the upper displacement unit 900. FIG. FIG. 113 shows the upper displacement unit 90
0 is an exploded perspective front view of FIG. 114 is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper displacement unit 900. FIG.
112 to 114 illustrate a state in which the upper displacement member 940 is arranged at the retracted position (the position arranged at the uppermost position with respect to the base member 910).

As shown in FIGS. 112 to 114, the upper displacement unit 900 includes a base member 910 arranged on the bottom wall portion 301 (see FIG. 6) of the rear case 300, and a base member 910 arranged inside the base member 910. a transmission member 920, a rotation member 930 rotatably connected to the base member 910 and displaced as the transmission member 920 is displaced, and a rotation member 930 whose one end is slidably connected to the base member 410 and which is displaced along with the displacement of the transmission member 920. and an upper displacement member 940 that is displaced by being connected to the rotary member 930 and driven by the rotation member 930 .

The base member 910 is formed by combining two oblong rectangular plate members in the front-back direction, and includes a front base 911 arranged on the front side and a rear base 912 arranged on the rear side. A transmission member 920 and a rotation member 930 are arranged between the front base 911 and the rear base 912 facing each other.

The front base 911 has three sliding grooves 91 penetrating in the front-rear direction (the depth direction of the paper surface of FIG. 112).
1c, 911d, and 911e, and a pivot pin 911b protruding toward the rear side of the central position in the circumferential direction;
It mainly includes a shaft portion 911f that protrudes forward on one end side (left side in front view) of the front base, and an opening 911a that penetrates in the front-rear direction on the one end side.

The opening 911a is an opening through which the shaft of the drive motor KM5 arranged on the front base 911 is inserted on the rear side. As a result, the shaft of the drive motor KM5 arranged on the front side of the front base 911 can be inserted through the rear side of the front base 911 .

The shaft support pins 911g and 911b are inserted through shaft holes of a transmission gear 922 and a transmission gear 923, which will be described later, and can hold the transmission gear 922 and the transmission gear 923 rotatably. That is, the pivot pins 911g and 911b are formed in a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameters of the shaft holes of the transmission gears 922 and 923 .

The sliding groove 911c is penetratingly formed in an arc shape around the axis of the pivot pin 911b. The slide groove 911c is an opening through which a shaft support pin 923a of a transmission gear 923, which will be described later, is inserted. set. Accordingly, when the transmission gear 923 is rotated with the shaft support pin 923a inserted into the slide groove 911c, collision between the shaft support pin and the inner wall of the slide groove 911c can be suppressed.

The sliding grooves 911d and 911e are grooves into which the pivot pins 951 and 952 of the upper displacement member 940, which will be described later, are inserted. be done.

The sliding groove 911e is formed linearly in the longitudinal direction of the front base 911 (horizontal direction in front view). On the other hand, the sliding groove 911d is formed in an arc shape centering on the lower side of the front base 911. As shown in FIG. That is, the sliding grooves 911e and 911d are formed non-parallel. Therefore, at different positions in the left-right direction, the two sliding grooves 911e and 911d are formed so that the distance dimension between the vertically facing ones is different. As a result, the insides of the slide grooves 911e and 911d are moved by the pivot pin 9.
When the members 51 and 952 are slid, the upper displacement member 940 rotates and slides due to the difference in the distance between the vertically opposed members.

The shaft portion 911f is formed to protrude in a columnar shape toward the front side. The shaft portion 911f can be inserted into a through hole 931 formed at one end of the rotating member 930, which will be described later, and hold the rotating member 930 in a rotatable state. That is, the shaft portion 911f is formed to have an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the through hole 931 of the rotating member 930 .

The rear base 912 is a plate member attached to the rear side of the front base 911 with a predetermined space therebetween. Rear base 912 is formed from a metallic material. As a result, the base member 91
0 overall stiffness can be improved. As a result, the base member 9 is formed into a horizontally long rectangular shape.
When the upper displacement member 940 having a relatively heavy weight is disposed on the base member 910, twisting of the base member 910 can be suppressed.

The transmission member 920 is disposed between the front base 911 and the rear base 912 facing each other. The transmission member 920 includes a transmission gear 921 connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM5 and its transmission gear 921.
21 and a transmission gear 923 that meshes with the transmission gear 922 .

The transmission gear 921 is connected to the drive motor KM5 by inserting the shaft of the drive motor KM5 arranged on the front side of the front base 911 into the shaft hole as described above. As a result, the transmission gear 9
21 can be rotationally displaced by the driving force of the drive motor KM5.

The transmission gear 922 meshes with the transmission gears 921 and 923 as described above.
Thereby, the driving force for rotation of the transmission gear 921 can be transmitted to the transmission gear 923 .

The transmission gear 923 is formed with a pivot pin 923a protruding frontward from its outer peripheral edge. Therefore, when the transmission gear 923 is rotated, the pivot pin 923a is rotationally displaced around the axis of the transmission gear 923. As shown in FIG.

The rotating member 930 is formed in the shape of a long bar on one side, and mainly has a through hole 931 penetrating in the front-rear direction at one end side and an opening 932 extending in the longitudinal direction substantially at the center in the longitudinal direction. formed with.

As described above, the through-hole 931 is an opening into which the shaft portion 911f of the front base 911 is inserted. can hold. Further, a biasing spring SP is provided at the tip of the shaft portion 911f.
8 is provided. As a result, the rotating member 930 is biased in a direction to lift the other end side upward with respect to the front base 911 .

The opening 932 is a groove into which the shaft support pin 923a of the transmission gear 923 is inserted, and the shaft support pin 923a is slidably formed therein. As described above, when the transmission gear 923 is rotationally displaced and the arrangement of the pivot pin 923 a is displaced, the pivot pin 923 a is displaced inside the opening 932 . Therefore, since one end of the rotating member 930 is rotatably supported,
Displacement of the pivot pin 923a rotates about one end.

Further, on the other end side of the rotary member 930, an annular member 933 is arranged which is formed in an annular shape in a front view and is formed in a plate shape having a predetermined thickness on the back side.

The front side of the annular member 933 is formed with two sliding grooves 933a recessed at symmetrical positions along the outer peripheral edge thereof. The annular member 933 is a portion connected to an upper displacement member 940, which will be described later, and the shaft portion 953 of the upper displacement member 940 is inserted inside. The annular member 933 and the upper displacement member 940 are rotatably connected, and the upper displacement member 940 can be displaced as the rotary member 930 is rotationally displaced.

A projection 961 of the upper displacement member 940 is inserted inside the sliding groove 933a, and the projection 961 slides inside the sliding groove 933a by rotationally displacing the upper displacement member 940 with respect to the rotating member. can.

Also, the arc axis of the slide groove 933 a is arranged at a position different from the rotation axis of the upper displacement member 940 with respect to the rotation member 930 . This allows the first opening portion 960 to be displaced when the upper displacement member 940 is rotationally displaced with respect to the rotating member 930 . A detailed description of the first opening portion 960 will be given later.

On one end side (rotating shaft side) of the rotating member 930, a shaft portion cover 913 and a deformation restricting cover 914 formed of a plate-like body are arranged in front. The shaft cover 913 is attached to the rotating member 93
0 and prevents the rotating member 930 from rattling in the front-rear direction. The deformation restricting cover 914 is arranged at a position spaced apart from the rotating shaft by a predetermined distance, and can prevent the rotating member 930 from being deformed in the longitudinal direction by the weight of the upper displacement member 940 arranged on the other end side.

The upper displacement member 940 is a base body 95 connected to the front base 911 and the rotating member 930 .
0, two first openings 960 rotatably disposed on the back side of the base body 950;
It mainly includes two second open portions 970 rotatably disposed on the front side of the base body 950 and a variable portion 980 disposed on one end side.

The base body 950 includes two pivot pins 951 and 952 protruding from the rear surface of one end side,
It is mainly formed with a shaft portion 953 protruding from the rear surface of the other end side.

The pivot pins 951, 952 are positioned in the sliding grooves 911e, 91 of the front base 911 as described above.
It is a protrusion inserted into 1d. Therefore, when the upper displacement member 940 is driven by the rotating member 930, the pivot pins 951 and 952 slide along the sliding grooves 911e and 911d, thereby sliding the upper displacement member 940 in the left-right direction. and the other end side can be rotationally displaced downward.

The shaft portion 953 is a projection that is inserted into the annular member 933 and coupled to the rotating member 930 as described above, and is formed in a columnar shape with an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the annular member 933 . Thereby, the upper displacement member 940 can be rotatably connected to the rotating member 930 . Therefore, rotating member 9
30 is rotationally displaced around one end by the driving force of the drive motor KM5, the annular member 933
A driving force is transmitted to the upper displacement member 940 by the displacement of . As a result, the upper displacement member 940 can be displaced along the sliding grooves 911e and 911d.

The first opening portion 960 is a plate member having a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction, and two of the first opening portions 960 are arranged on the back side of the base body 950 . The first open portion 960 is rotatably pivotally supported on the other end side of the base body 950 . In addition, the first opening portion 960 protrudes toward the rear surface side, and the ring member 9
33 has a protrusion 961 disposed inside the sliding groove 933a. As a result, when the upper displacement member 940 is rotationally displaced with respect to the rotation member 930 due to the displacement of the rotation member 930, the protrusion 9
61 can be slid inside the slide groove 933a.

In this case, as described above, the curved axis of the slide groove 933a is arranged at a position different from the rotation axis of the upper displacement member 940 with respect to the rotary member 930, so that the projection 961 slides inside the slide groove 933a. Along with this, the first open portion 960 pivotally supported by the base body 950 can be rotationally displaced.

The second opening portion 970 is a plate member having a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction, and two of the second opening portions 970 are arranged on the front side of the base body 950 . The second open portion 970 is rotatably supported on the other end side of the base body 950 . Also. The second opening 970 is formed with an engaging protrusion (not shown) that engages when the first opening 960 is displaced to a predetermined extent. As a result, as described above, when the upper displacement member 940 is rotated by a predetermined amount, the first opening portion 960 engages with the second opening portion 970 when it is rotated about the pivotal portion. The second open portion 970 can be rotationally displaced.

Next, displacement of the upper displacement member 940 will be described with reference to FIGS. 115 to 117. FIG. FIG. 115 shows the upper displacement unit 9 with the upper displacement member 940 arranged at the retracted position.
00 front view. FIG. 116 is a front view of the upper displacement unit 900 with the upper displacement member 940 arranged at the intermediate position. FIG. 117 is a front view of the upper displacement unit 900 with the upper displacement member 940 arranged at the extended position.

The retracted position of the upper displacement member 940 means that the pivot pins 951 and 952 are
1 (on the right side of the front base 911 when viewed from the front). Further, the overhang position means that the pivot pins 951 and 952 extend from the front base 911
911d and 911e (the left side of the front base 911 when viewed from the front). Furthermore, the intermediate position is a position in which the upper displacement member 940 is displaced to a position intermediate between the retracted position and the extended position.

As shown in FIGS. 115 to 117, when the upper displacement member 940 is displaced with respect to the front base 911, the longitudinal direction of the upper displacement member 940 changes from the substantially horizontal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 115) to the substantially vertical direction ( (vertical direction in FIG. 117).

In addition, along with the rotational displacement, the position of the one end side of the upper displacement member 940 shifts to the front base 911 .
is displaced from the position of the right end portion when viewed from the front to the approximate center position when viewed from the front. That is, the upper displacement member 940 is slidably displaced and rotationally displaced when the rotating member 930 is rotated by the driving force of the drive motor KM5 as described above.

116 to the extended position shown in FIG. 117, the first opening portion 960 provided on the upper displacement member 940 is rotationally displaced with respect to the base body 950. The second opening portion 970 that is displaced by engaging with the rotational displacement of the first opening portion 960 is also rotationally displaced with respect to the base body 950 . Therefore, at the extended position, the longitudinal direction of the upper displacement member 940 is directed vertically, and the first opening portion 960 and the second opening portion 970 are displaced.

In this embodiment, the upper displacement member 940 is formed in a shape imitating a human arm (including a hand). Therefore, the first opening portion 960 and the second opening portion 960 are displaced from the first position to the third position.
By displacing the open portion 970, the player can visually recognize the displacement that makes the human arm thicker.

Next, with reference to FIG. 118, a detailed description of variable section 980 will be provided. FIG. 118(a) shows
118(b) is a rear view of the variable portion 980. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 118(a) and 118(b), the variable portion 980 is formed in a shape that imitates a human hand. Fingers 982-986 that are connected to form finger portions of a hand.

A drive motor (not shown) is arranged inside the body portion 981, and a variable plate (not shown) arranged inside can be piston-displaced in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 118(a)). be done.

The finger portion 982 is a portion corresponding to the thumb, and the base side thereof is connected to the variable plate of the main body portion 981 . As a result, the finger portion 982 can be displaced by the piston movement of the variable plate.

The finger portions 983 to 986 are mainly formed with a first link RB1 arranged on the base side and a second link RB2 arranged on the tip side inside thereof.

The first link RB<b>1 is rotatably connected to the second link RB<b>2 at its distal end and connected to the variable plate of the main body 981 at its base. Therefore, the piston movement of the variable plate of the body portion 981 causes the first link RB1 and the second link RB to move through the first link RB1.
2 can be displaced. This allows the fingers 983-986 to be displaced. In this embodiment, by displacing the finger portions 982 to 986, the player can visually recognize the action of opening and closing the fingers of the hand.

The front base 411 has two sliding grooves 411 penetrating in the front-rear direction (the depth direction of the paper in FIG. 43).
a, 411b, two cylindrical support pins 411c, 411d protruding toward the rear side, and a curved wall portion 411e protruding in an arc around the support pin 411d. .

The sliding grooves 411a and 411b are formed by two protrusions 47 protruding from the rear side of the lower displacement member 440.
2 and 473 are holes through which they are respectively inserted. The sliding grooves 411a and 411b are formed to extend in the horizontal direction. Therefore, the protrusions 47 inserted through the sliding grooves 411a and 411b
2, 473 are displaced along the slide grooves 411a, 411b, the lower displacement member 440 can be slid in the left-right direction.

The sliding grooves 411a and 411b are curved in an arc shape, and extend upward (FIG. 4) from the left (left in FIG. 43) end of the front base 411 to the right (right in FIG. 43) end.
3 upward). Furthermore, the sliding grooves 411a and 411b are arranged at positions where the axes of the respective arcs are different, and the gap between them in the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 43) is narrowed from the left end to the right end.

Since the distance between the protrusions 472 and 473 of the base member 470 of the lower displacement member 440 does not change, when the lower displacement member 440 is slid along the sliding groove, the lower displacement member 440 is rotated. can be displaced. That is, by changing the distance between the two sliding grooves 411a and 411b, the lower displacement member 44 can be moved without applying a rotational driving force to the lower displacement member 440.
0 can be rotated as it slides.

The shaft support pin 411c is a protrusion that is inserted into a shaft portion 422a of a cam member 422 of a transmission member 420, which will be described later, and is formed in a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft portion 422a. Also,
The pivot pin 411 c is formed from a metal rod-like body and fitted onto the front base 411 . Therefore, when a force acts on the cam member 422 from its outer peripheral surface in the axial direction, the shaft support pin 4
It is possible to suppress breakage (damage) of 11c.

119 to 121, the lower displacement member 2440 in the second embodiment
will be explained. In the first embodiment, the movable rack 464 and the rack 466 are displaced in the same direction by the driving force of the drive motor KM2. It is displaced in the opposite direction by the driving force of the driving motor KM2. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the part same as the said 1st Embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

First, the overall configuration of the lower displacement member 2440 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 119 and 120. FIG. FIG. 119 is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement member 2440 in the second embodiment. 120 is a front view of the lower displacement member 2440. FIG. It should be noted that FIG.
4, the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 2440 and the front case 481 are shown transparently.

As shown in FIGS. 119 and 120, the lower displacement member 2440 in the second embodiment includes a base member 2470 connected to the front base 411, a case member 480 covering the front and rear of the base member 2470, and a case member 480. A transmission mechanism 2460 displaceably disposed between the base member 2470 and the decorative member 4 formed to cover the front and rear of the case member 480.
50.

The base member 2470 is a plate member that is rectangular and horizontally long when viewed from the front. A protruding wall 477 projecting from the upper end of the central portion in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 120) in a U-shape opposite to the vertical direction toward the front side, shaft portions 474 and 475 projecting toward the front side, and the shaft portions 474, 475, and 474 475 is formed mainly by including shaft portions 2470a and 2470b protruding upward.

The shaft portion 2470a is a shaft member on which a transmission gear 2468a, which will be described later, is rotatably supported, and is formed smaller than the shaft hole of the transmission gear 2468a.

The shaft portion 2470b is a shaft member on which a transmission gear 2468b, which will be described later, is rotatably supported, and is formed smaller than the shaft hole of the transmission gear 2468b. As will be described later, transmission gear 246
8a and the shaft portion 2470a are disposed in a state in which gear tooth flanks engraved on the outer peripheral surfaces thereof are meshed with each other. That is, the distance between the shaft portions 2470a and 2470b in a front view is the transmission gear 2
468a and the radius of the transmission gear 2468b.

The transmission mechanism 2460 is arranged in front of the base member 470, and the transmission gears 461, 4
62, 463, a drive motor KM2 whose shaft portion is connected to the transmission gear 461 thereof, and a movable rack having a tooth surface that meshes with the transmission gear 463 and arranged slidably displaceably in front of the base member 470. 2464, a transmission gear 2468a that meshes with the movable rack 2464, a transmission gear 2468b that meshes with the transmission gear 2468a, a rack 46 that meshes with the transmission gear 2468b, and one end of the rack 466 that is rotatable. It is mainly formed with a ball receiving portion 467 arranged in the .

The movable rack 2464 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular plate-like body when viewed from the front. is formed mainly with

The rack gear 2464g meshes with a transmission gear 2468a, which will be described later. As a result, when the drive is transmitted from the drive motor KM4 and the rack 466 is displaced, the transmission gear 2468a can be rotated along with the displacement.

The transmission gears 2468a and 2468b are supported by the shaft portions 2470a and 2470b of the base member 2470, respectively, while meshing with each other as described above. As a result, the transmission gear 2
As 468a is rotated, transmission gear 2468b is rotated. Also, the transmission gear 2468b
is meshed with the rack gear 466a of the rack 466, and when the transmission gear 2468b is rotated, the driving force is transmitted to the rack 466 and the rack 466 is displaced.

That is, the rack 466 can be driven by the driving force of the drive motor KM4. The transmission gears 2468a and 2468b are partially arranged at positions shifted in the front-rear direction, so that the transmission gears 2468a and 2468b are prevented from colliding with the rack 466 and the movable rack 2464, respectively.

Next, referring to FIG. 121, displacement of the lower displacement member 2440 will be described. Figure 121
is a front view of the lower displacement member 2440. FIG. 121, similarly to FIG. 120, the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 2440 and the front case 481 are shown transparently.

As shown in FIG. 121, power is applied to the drive motor KM2 and the transmission mechanism 24 described above is activated.
60 displaces the ball receiving portion 467 to the firing position, the movable rack 464 and the rack 46
6 are displaced in different directions.

More specifically, when the drive motor KM4 is rotated, the movable rack 464 is displaced toward the other end of the lower displacement member 440 (left side in FIG. 121). Along with this displacement, the transmission gear 24
68a and 2468b are rotated to displace the rack 466 to one end side (right side in FIG. 3). Thereby, the ball receiving portion 467 can be displaced to the third position.

Therefore, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced from the first position, a displacement component can be formed in the direction opposite to the displacement direction of the ball receiving portion 467. The displacement of the movable rack 464 can reduce the change in the position of the center of gravity of the displacement member 2440 . As a result, rattling of the lower displacement member 2440 due to changes in the position of the center of gravity can be suppressed.

122 to 127, the lower displacement member 3440 in the third embodiment
will be explained. In the first embodiment, the ball receiving portion 467 is slidably displaced by the rack and pinion mechanism, but in the lower displacement member 3440 in the third embodiment, the ball receiving portion 467 is slidably displaced by the link mechanism. In addition, the same parts as the above embodiments are
The same reference numerals are given and the description thereof is omitted.

First, the overall configuration of the lower displacement member 3440 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 122 to 125. FIG. FIG. 122(a) shows the lower displacement member 344 in the third embodiment.
122(b) is a rear view of the lower displacement member 3440. FIG. 123 is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement member 3440, and FIG. 124 is an exploded perspective rear view of the lower displacement member 3440. FIG. 125(a) and 91(b) are front views of the lower displacement member 3440. FIG.

125(a) shows a state in which the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 3440 is seen transparently, and in FIG. 125(b), the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 3440 and the front case 3481 are seen transparently. is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 122 to 125, the lower displacement member 3440 in the third embodiment includes a base member 3470 connected to the front base 411, a case member 480 covering the front and rear of the base member 3470, the case member 480 and the base. A transmission mechanism 3460 displaceably disposed between a member 3470 and a decorative member 45 formed to cover the front and rear of the case member 480.
0 and .

The base member 3470 is a plate member that is rectangular and horizontally long when viewed from the front. A sliding wall 3470c formed continuously from the base end side of the standing wall 471a and erected at the lower edge of the base member 3470, and the upper end of the central portion in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 122(a)). and an opening 479 extending from one end side to the other end side and recessed in the center portion of the base member 470 in the vertical direction. It is formed.

The sliding wall 3470c is a wall portion that comes into contact with the leg portion 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 to regulate the position (mode) of the ball receiving portion 467. As shown in FIG. That is, the projection is formed to a position below the ball receiving portion 467 . As a result, the ball receiving portion 467 can be held with the opening of the U-shaped portion facing upward.

In addition, the sliding wall 3470c is a recess 3470 recessed below the end on the standing wall 471a side.
c1 is formed. The recessed portion 3470c1 is a groove that receives the tip of the leg portion 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 therein. As a result, when the ball receiving portion 467 is slid toward the standing portion by a transmission mechanism 3460, which will be described later, the ball receiving portion 467 can be received in the recess and rotated. As a result, the ball receiving portion 467 can be caused to perform a shooting operation (an operation of ejecting the ball held inside the U shape to the outside of the lower displacement member 3440).

The transmission mechanism 3460 includes a drive motor KM2 attached to a front case 3480 described later,
A first link member 3468 rotatably arranged to be connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM2, a second link member 3469 rotatably connected to the first link member 3468, and the second link member 3469 mainly includes a ball receiving portion 467 connected to one end side.

The first link member 3468 is formed of a rectangular horizontally long plate-like body, and has a shaft hole 3468b formed through one end, a connecting hole 3468a connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM2, and a A load portion 3468c is formed.

The shaft hole 3468b is a through hole through which a rotating shaft 3469a of a second link member 3469, which will be described later, is inserted.

The connecting hole 3468a is a hole that is fastened to the shaft of the drive motor KM2 as described above, and is formed with an inner diameter that is approximately the same as the outer diameter of the shaft of the drive motor KM2. By fitting the shaft of the drive motor KM2 into the connecting hole 3468a and fastening it, the first link member 3468 is connected to the drive motor KM.
2 driving force to make it rotatable.

The load portion 3468c is formed to protrude toward the other end side from the connecting hole 3468a. Loading part 3
Reference numeral 46c denotes a member for applying a load for positioning the center of gravity of the first link member 3468 on the other end side of the connecting hole 3468a, and is formed to bulge outward from the one end side.

The second link member 3469 is formed in a rectangular horizontally long state, and the first link member 34
It is arranged on the back side of 68 . The second link member 3469 has a rotating shaft 3469a projecting from the other end toward the front in a cylindrical shape and a through hole 3469b formed through the one end in the front-rear direction.
and are formed mainly.

The rotating shaft 3469a is inserted into the shaft hole 3468b of the first link member 3468 as described above. This allows the first link member 3468 and the second link member 3469 to be rotatably connected.

The through hole 3469 b is an opening for connecting the ball receiving portion 467 to the second link member 3469 . Further, the through hole 3469b is formed smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft hole 467b of the ball receiving portion 467. As shown in FIG. Therefore, the shaft hole 467b of the ball receiving portion 467 and the through hole 3469b are arranged coaxially, and a screw having a head larger than the width of the opening 469 in the lateral direction is inserted from the rear side of the base member 3470 to the opening 479 and the shaft hole 467b. By inserting and fastening to the through hole 3469b, the ball receiving portion 4
67 is rotatably connected to the second link member.

The case member 480 is a member that covers the front and rear of the base member 470 .
0 and a rear case 482 arranged on the rear side.

The front case 3481 is formed in the shape of a horizontally elongated rectangular plate when viewed from the front. The front case 3481 has an opening 3481d penetrating at a position facing the drive motor KM2 and a bottom wall portion 481b protruding from the lower end surface on the rear side.
and a shaft hole 481c penetrating in the front-rear direction in the lower edge.

The opening 3481d is a hole through which the shaft of the drive motor KM2 disposed on the front side of the front case 3481 is inserted through the rear side, and is formed with an outer diameter larger than the shaft of the drive motor KM2. As a result, the driving force of the drive motor KM2 arranged on the front side of the front case 3481 can be transmitted to the first link member 3468 arranged on the rear side.

Next, displacement of the lower displacement member 3440 will be described with reference to FIGS. 126 and 127. FIG. FIG. 126(a) is a front view of the lower displacement member 440 in the first position, and FIG.
b) is a front view of the lower displacement member 440 in the second position. 127(a) is a front view of the lower displacement member 440 at the third position, and FIG. 127(b) is a front view of the lower displacement member 440 at the second position.

126(a) to 127(b), transition states of the lower displacement member 440 are illustrated in order. 126(a) and 126(b) or FIGS. 127(a) and 12
7(b) shows a state in which the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 3440 and the front case 481 are seen transparently.

As shown in FIGS. 126 and 127, the lower displacement member 440 in the first position has a first link member 3468 and a second link member 3469 extending in its longitudinal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 126(a)).
are substantially parallel to the longitudinal direction of the base member 3470 (horizontal direction in FIG. 126(a)), and the first link member 3468 and the second link member 3469 are arranged so as to overlap in the front-rear direction.

That is, the connecting portion between the first link member 3468 and the second link member 3469 is placed on one end side of the base member 3470 (left side in FIG. 126(a)). Thereby, the second link member 3469 is arranged on the one end side. As a result, the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged at the first position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 126(b), when the drive motor KM2 is rotated from the state of the first position to rotationally displace the first link member 3468, one end side of the first link member 3468 is moved to the base member 3470. is displaced with respect to Thereby, the second link member 3469 connected to one end side of the first link member 3468 is displaced. In this case, the second link member 346
9 is connected to the ball receiving portion 467 and is slidable along the opening 479 of the base member 3470, so that one end of the second link member 3469 is pushed out to the other end of the base member 3470. . As a result, the ball receiving portion 46 connected to the other end side of the second link member 3469 is connected.
7 can be displaced to the second position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 127(a), when the drive motor KM2 is further rotationally displaced from the state of the second position and the first link member 3468 is rotated approximately 180 degrees from the state of the first position. , the connecting portion between the first link member 3468 and the second link member 3469 is arranged on the other end side of the base member 3470 with respect to the rotation axis. Therefore, the second link member 34
One end side of 69 is further pushed out to the other end side of base member 3470, and ball receiving portion 467 is arranged at the third position.

In this case, the tip of the leg portion 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged inside the recess 3470c1, so that the ball receiving portion 467 is rotated by the biasing spring SP2 to perform the shooting operation.

Further, the load portion 3468c of the first link member 3468 is displaced toward one end of the base member 3470. As shown in FIG. As a result, it is possible to suppress a change in the position of the center of gravity of the lower displacement member 3440 when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced with respect to the base member. As a result, rattling of the lower displacement member 3440 can be suppressed.

That is, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced from the first position, a displacement component can be formed in the direction opposite to the displacement direction of the ball receiving portion 467. The change in the position of the center of gravity of the displacement member 3440 can be reduced by the displacement of the load portion 3468c. As a result, rattling of the lower displacement member 440 due to changes in the position of the center of gravity can be suppressed.

Further, in the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 127(b), by continuing the rotation of the first link member 3468, the ball receiving portion 467 can be retracted to the second position and the first position. Therefore, there is no need to switch the control of the drive motor KM2, and the displacement to the second position or the first position can be performed quickly.

Therefore, when a game ball is ejected from the inside of the ball receiving portion 467, the position of the center of gravity of the lower displacement member 440 changes. By quickly bringing the position of the center of gravity closer to the rotation axis of the lower displacement member 440, rattling of the lower displacement member 3440 can be suppressed.

Further, by immediately displacing the ball receiving portion 467, it is possible to suppress the wobbling of the lower displacement member 3440 due to the reaction of the discharge operation when the game ball is discharged from the inside of the ball receiving portion 467.

That is, when the game ball is ejected from the inside of the ball receiving portion 467, the load of the lower displacement member 440 is reduced by the amount of the ejected game ball, and the lower displacement member 3440 tends to be displaced upward due to the reaction. By immediately displacing the ball receiving portion 467, the reaction due to the rotational displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 acts to displace the base member 470 downward, thereby canceling the reaction when the ball is ejected from the lower displacement member 3440. be able to.

128 to 130, the lower displacement unit 44 in the fourth embodiment
00 will be explained. In the first embodiment, the case in which the lower displacement member 440 arranged in the retracted state is capable of shooting has been described, but the lower displacement unit 440 in the fourth embodiment
0 restricts the firing operation of the lower displacement member 440 arranged in the retracted state. The same reference numerals are given to the same parts as those of the above-described embodiments, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, the overall configuration of the lower displacement unit 4400 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 128. FIG. FIG. 128 is a front view of the lower displacement unit 4400 in the fourth embodiment. In FIG. 128, the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 440 and the front case 481 are shown transparently, and the bottom wall portion 481b of the front case 481 is shown with a dashed line. Further, FIG. 128 illustrates a state in which the lower displacement member 440 is in the retracted state and the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged at the first position.

As shown in FIG. 128, the lower displacement unit 4400 in the fourth embodiment has an opening formed in the base member 470 of the lower displacement member 440 between the standing wall 471a and the bottom wall portion 481b of the front case 481. 4471b is formed.

A tip portion 4411g1 of an engagement wall 4411g, which will be described later, is inserted into the opening 4471b. That is, the opening 4471b is opened larger than the tip portion 4411g1.

The front base 411 is formed with an engagement wall 4411g formed in a substantially L shape that is continuous with the bottom surface of the recovery port 411f.

The engaging wall 4411g can restrict the rotation of the ball receiving portion 467 at the third position (shooting operation) by inserting the substantially L-shaped tip portion 4411g1 into the opening 4471b. . That is, the tip position of the tip portion 4411g1 is set substantially at the same height as the top surface of the bottom wall portion 481b of the lower displacement member 440 positioned in the retracted state.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 129 and 130, a state in which each member of the lower displacement unit 4400 is displaced will be described. 129 and 130 are front views of the lower displacement unit 4400. FIG. 129 and 130, similarly to FIG. 128, the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 440 and the front case 481 are shown transparently, and the front case 48
1 bottom wall 481b is shown in dashed lines.

Further, FIG. 129 illustrates a state in which the lower displacement member 440 is in the retracted state and the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged at the third position. FIG. 130 illustrates a state in which the lower displacement member 440 is in the first overhanging state and the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged at the first position.

As shown in FIG. 129, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position, the tip of the leg portion 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 comes into contact with the upper surface of the tip portion 4411g1 of the engaging wall 4411g and the concave portion 481 is formed.
Entry into b1 or opening 4471b is restricted. This restricts the rotation of the ball receiving portion 467 .

Therefore, when ball receiving portion 467 is caused to perform a payout operation in order to discharge the ball thrown onto the track area of ball receiving portion 467 to the outside of lower displacement member 440, ball receiving portion 467 is positioned at the third position. rotates and
Discharge of the game ball held inside the ball receiving portion 467 can be suppressed.

That is, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position, the posture of the ball receiving portion 467 is changed when game balls exceeding the specified number (one ball) are ejected from the orbit area of the ball receiving portion 467. can be regulated. Therefore, it is possible to easily discharge only the game balls exceeding the specified number from the trajectory area.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 130, when the lower displacement member 440 is displaced to the position of the first extended state (not the position of the retracted state), the lower displacement member 440 is displaced with respect to the base member 470. Therefore, the opening 4471b of the lower displacement member 440 and the engaging wall 4411g are separated. Therefore, in the first protruding state, the ball receiving portion 467 can be displaced to the third position for shooting.

That is, as the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position, when game balls exceeding the specified number (one ball) are ejected from the track area of the ball receiving portion 467, the attitude of the ball receiving portion 467 is By suppressing the change, it is possible to easily maintain the state in which the ball receiving portion 467 holds the specified number of game balls, while the lower displacement member 440 is engaged when displaced to the first and second projecting positions. Wall 4411g is opening 4471b
, the leg portion 467a moves along with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 to the third position.
is engaged with the opening 4471b, the posture of the ball receiving portion 467 is changed, and the prescribed number of game balls can be easily discharged from the ball receiving portion 467.

Next, referring to FIGS. 131 to 135, sorting unit 55 in the fifth embodiment
00 will be explained. In the first embodiment, the distribution member 540 rotates to form the storage state and the regulation state, but in the fifth embodiment, the distribution member 540 slides to form the storage state and the regulation state. do. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

First, the overall configuration of the sorting unit 5500 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 131 to 134. FIG. 131(a) is a top view of the sorting unit 5500 in the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 131(b) is a rear view of the sorting unit 5500. FIG.
132 is an exploded perspective front view of the sorting unit 5500, and FIG. 133 is an exploded perspective rear view of the sorting unit 5500. FIG. Figure 134 is CXXXIV-C of Figure 131(a)
FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view of the sorting unit 5500 taken along line XXXIV; In addition, in FIG. 134, the outer shape of the distribution member 540 is illustrated with a dashed line.

As shown in FIGS. 131 to 133, a sorting unit 5500 according to the fifth embodiment includes a base plate 5520 formed in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and a base plate 5520 attached to the front side of the base plate 5520 and facing the base plate 5520. A path forming member 510 forming a plurality of flow-down paths between which balls can flow down, and a distribution member 5540 slidably attached to the back side of the base plate 5520.
and an extension path member 530 that is attached to the end face of the base plate 5520 and extends the flow-down path of the spheres formed between the base plate 5520 and the path formation member 510 facing each other.

The base plate 5520 includes two cylindrical shafts 5526 protruding to the rear side, a first opening 5521 and a second opening 5522 formed in a rectangular shape, and a U-shaped cross section whose upper end side is open to the side surface of the upper end. It is mainly formed with a rolling portion 525 that is formed in a shape and extends in the left-right direction, and a locking portion 524 that protrudes like a hook on the back side.

Two shaft portions 5526 are formed so as to protrude on the back side, and are inserted into two sliding grooves 5546, which will be described later.

The first opening 5521 and the second opening 5522 are formed by the regulation plate 54 of the distribution member 5540, which will be described later.
1 and the storage plate 5542 are inserted, and the width of the opening is greater than the thickness of the regulation plate 5541 and the storage plate 5542 . In addition, since the distribution member 5540 is attached to the base plate 5520 in a slidable state, the first opening 5521 and the second opening 5522 are larger than the regulation plate 5541 and the storage plate 5542 in the sliding direction of the distribution member 5540. formed in the opening.

The distribution member 5540 is formed in a rectangular shape in a front view with one side being longer, and is formed with a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction. The distribution member 5540 includes a regulating plate 55 that protrudes in a plate shape toward the front side.
41 and a storage plate 5542, a sliding groove 5546 formed in an elongated hole in substantially the same direction as the extending direction of the regulation plate 5541 and the storage plate 5542, and a locking portion 544 formed in a hook shape on the back side.
and are formed mainly.

The regulating plate 5541 connects the first ball-throwing path KR1 and the second ball-throwing path KR1 through the first opening 5521.
A game ball that is disposed at the connecting portion with R2 and flows down the first ball-throwing route KR1 passes through the second ball-throwing route K
It is a plate member that restricts the flow into R2, and the distance projected from the first opening 5521 is set to a distance larger than the radius of the game ball.

In addition, the regulation plate 5541 is formed in a straight line shape when viewed from the front, and its extending direction is set to be substantially the same as the sliding direction of the distribution member 540 . Thereby, when the distribution member 5540 is slid and displaced, the displacement area of the regulation plate 5541 can be minimized. the result,
The opening area of the first opening 5521 can be minimized, and the rigidity of the base plate 5520 can be secured.

The reservoir plate 5542 is a plate member arranged on the second ball-throwing route KR2 via the second opening 5522, and allows game balls flowing down the second ball-throwing route KR2 to flow upstream of the reservoir plate 5542,
The distance projected from the second opening 5522 is set to a distance larger than the radius of the game ball.

In addition, the storage plate 5542 is formed in a straight line shape when viewed from the front, and the direction in which it extends is set to be substantially the same as the sliding direction of the distribution member 540 . Thereby, when the distribution member 5540 is slid and displaced, the displacement area of the storage plate 5542 can be minimized. the result,
The opening area of the second opening 5522 can be minimized, and the rigidity of the base plate 5520 can be ensured.

The sliding groove 5546 is an elongated hole penetrating in the front-rear direction. The shaft portion 5526 of the base plate 5520 is inserted into the slide groove 5546 . Therefore, the shaft portion 5526 is moved into the sliding groove 55
46 and fastening a screw or the like to the tip of the shaft portion 5526 from the rear side, the distribution member 5540 can be held in a slidable state with respect to the base plate 5520 .

The sliding grooves 5546 are formed at two locations with their longitudinal directions parallel to each other. As a result, the distribution member 5540 can be slidably displaced while suppressing the rotational displacement of the distribution member 5540 .

Next, referring to FIG. 135, displacement of the distribution member 5540 will be described. Figure 135
(a) and FIG. 135(b) show the sorting unit 550 in range CXXXV of FIG.
0 is a partially enlarged view. FIG. 135(a) shows a state in which the sorting member 5540 is arranged at the storage position, and FIG. 135(b) shows a state in which the sorting member 5540 is arranged at the restricting position.

As shown in FIG. 135(a), when the distribution member 5540 is placed in the regulating position, the storage plate 5542 is arranged along the third ball throwing path KR3, and the regulating plate 5541 is located on the back side of the path forming member 510. It is located inside a recess 518 formed in the wall.

In this case, the distance dimension L9 between the tip of the storage plate 5542 protruding inside the third ball throwing path KR3 and the inner wall of the third ball throwing path facing the tip is made smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, the ball thrown from the upstream of the third ball path KR3 (first ball path KR1)
42 upstream.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 135(b), when the sorting member 5540 is arranged at the regulation position, the regulation plate 5541 is arranged at the connecting portion between the first ball-throwing route KR1 and the third ball-throwing route KR3. , a regulating plate 5541 is arranged at the connecting portion between the first ball throwing path KR1 and the third ball throwing path KR3, and a storage plate 5542 is a concave portion 5 formed in the wall portion on the back side of the path forming member 510.
19 inside.

In this case, the distance dimension L10 between the end of the tip of the regulating plate 5541 protruding inside the first ball-throwing path KR1 and the inner wall of the entrance of the third ball-throwing path KR3 is made smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, the ball flowing down the first ball-throwing route KR1 collides with the regulation plate 5541 and is thrown to the second ball-throwing route KR2.

That is, by switching the distribution member 5540 between the regulating position and the storage position, the ball thrown on the first ball path KR1 is thrown to the third ball path KR3 and stopped on the third ball path KR3; The ball flowing down the first ball path KR1 cannot flow into the third ball path KR3,
A state in which the ball is thrown to the second ball path KR2 can be formed.

Therefore, by slidingly displacing one distribution member 5540, when one flow path is divided into two flow paths, the flow path of the ball can be reliably switched to either one.

In addition, the regulating plate 5541 (distribution means) is formed so as to be able to appear and retract with respect to the first ball throwing route KR1 (downstream passage) or the third ball throwing route KR3 (first branch passage).
It is an inner wall on the downstream extension line of the first ball throwing path KR1 at the downstream end. Therefore, the regulation plate 5541 can be protruded at a position close to the game ball flowing down from the lower end side of the first throwing path KR1. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time required from when the regulating plate 5541 starts to protrude into the downstream passage or the third ball throwing route KR3 (first branch passage) to when the game balls can be sorted. As a result, it is possible to reliably switch the allocation destination by the regulation plate 5541 .

In addition, the regulation plate 5541 (distribution means) protrudes into the third ball-throwing route KR3 (first branch passage), so that the game ball flowing down the first ball-throwing route KR1 (flow-down passage) is diverted to the second ball-throwing route ( second branch passage), and the projecting direction of the regulating plate 5541 is set in the direction pointing to the upstream end of the second ball-throwing route KR2, so that the game ball flowing down the first ball-throwing route KR1 protrudes. When the game ball comes into contact with the regulation plate in the middle of the second
It can be pushed into the throwing path KR. As a result, the distribution to the second throwing route KR2 can be performed more reliably.

136 to 140, rotating unit 670 in the sixth embodiment
0 will be explained. In the first embodiment, the case where the load gear 731e is connected to drive the rotating body 800 and the rotating body 800 is restricted from operating by inertial force has been described. Gear 731e is removed. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

First, the overall configuration of the rotating unit 6700 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 136 to 138. FIG. 136 is a front view of the rotation unit 6700 in the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 137 is an exploded perspective front view of the rotation unit 6700. FIG. 138 is an exploded perspective rear view of the sorting unit 6500. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 136 to 138, the rotating unit 6700 includes a rotating body 8 that is rotationally displaced.
00, a ball cradle 710 arranged above the decoration unit 6750 in the gravitational direction, a rear base 720 arranged on the rear side of the ball cradle 710 and the decoration unit 6750, and the decoration unit 6750. The left transmission member 7 disposed on the left side of the front view
30 and a crank cover 743 arranged on the right side of the decorative unit 6750 in front view.

The decoration unit 6750 is a box member 760 formed in a box shape whose upper side in the direction of gravity is open.
and a rotor 800 rotatably disposed inside the box member.
That is, in the first embodiment, the decoration unit 750 has the rotor 800 disposed inside the box member 760 and the lid member 770, but in the sixth embodiment, the decoration unit 750 is formed with the lid member 770 removed. be.

The left transmission member 730 is mounted with a drive motor KM4 disposed on the left side (left side of FIG. 136) of the decoration unit 750, a transmission member 6731 for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor KM4, and the drive motor KM4. A motor base 732, a gear cover 733 that covers the transmission member 6731, and a ball throw path cover 734 that is attached to the gear cover 733 and formed with a predetermined gap between facing the gear cover 733. formed with.

The transmission member 6731 includes a transmission gear 731a attached to the shaft of the drive motor KM4, a transmission gear 6731b meshing with the transmission gear 731a, a transmission gear 731c meshing with the transmission gear 6731b, and a transmission gear 731c. and a transmission gear 731 d arranged adjacent to and coaxially arranged by a shaft 735 .

The transmission gear 6731b is a gear that transmits driving force to the transmission gear 731c. In addition, the first
In the embodiment, the one-way clutch OW1 is attached inside the transmission gear 731b, but the one-way clutch OW1 is removed from the transmission gear 6731b of the sixth embodiment. In addition, since the transmission gear 731c and the transmission gear 731d are the same as in the first embodiment,
A detailed description thereof is omitted.

Therefore, when the driving force is transmitted in one direction from the drive motor KM4, the rotational driving force can be transmitted to the shaft 735, and when the driving force is transmitted in the other direction from the drive motor KM4, the inner ring of the one-way clutch OW1 is rotated. As a result, the outer ring slips (idles) and the transmission of the driving force to the shaft 735 is interrupted.

Next, the rotation of rotating body 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 139 and 140. FIG. 139(a) to 139(c) are side views of the decoration unit 6750 viewed in the direction of arrow CXXXIX in FIG. 138, and FIGS. 140(a) to 140(c) are views in the direction of arrow CXXXIX in FIG. is a side view of the decoration unit 6750 in FIG.

139 and 140 show a state in which the left side plate 765 of the box member 760 is seen transparently. 139(a) to 139(c), the center of gravity G of the rotating body 800
140(a) to 140(c) sequentially illustrate modes in which the center of gravity G of the rotor 800 displaces the first section DK1.

As shown in FIG. 139, the rotating body 800 is rotationally displaced to the left (as viewed in the direction of FIG. 139) to the right (clockwise) when a driving force in one direction is transmitted from the drive motor KM4.

The rotating body 800 is formed asymmetrically about the rotation axis as described above, and the center of gravity G is arranged at a position different from the rotation axis. Therefore, the rotating body 800 is rotated from the state in which the center of gravity G shown in FIG. 140(a) is arranged above the rotation axis, and the center of gravity G shown in FIG. 140(b) is displaced to a position substantially horizontal to the rotation axis. When started, the load exerts a rotating force in the direction of rotation.

Therefore, the engagement of the roller interposed between the outer ring and the inner ring of the one-way clutch OW1 arranged in the transmission gear 731c is released, and the outer ring (rotating body 800 side) precedes the inner ring (drive motor side). and drive. That is, in the second interval, the rotating body 800 can be rotated at a higher rotational speed than the driving motor KM4.

Note that the rotating body 800 that rotates the second section DK2 under the load is shown in FIG.
The center of gravity G shown in 9(c) is rotated to a position positioned below the rotation axis.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 140, when the center of gravity G of the rotating body 800 is displaced in the first section DK1, the load of the rotating body 800 acts in the direction opposite to its rotating direction. Therefore, the rotating body 800 is rotated according to the rotational speed of the drive motor KM4.

Therefore, in the sixth embodiment, the displacement speed of the rotor 800 in the second section DK2 can be made faster than the displacement speed of the rotor 800 in the first section DK1. As a result, it is possible to change the displacement mode of the rotating body 800 and enhance the presentation effect according to the displacement of the rotating body 800 .

Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 141 to 144. FIG. In the above-described first embodiment, the cover member 770 causes the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 to lead the inner ring by its own weight (that is, the displacement speed of the cover member 770 is increased). The displacement member 7710 in the form makes the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 ahead of the inner ring by using the weight of the game ball (that is, speeds up the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710). In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

141 and 142 are schematic side views of the displacement unit 7700 in the seventh embodiment. In addition, in FIG. 141, the state in which the displacement member 7710 is arranged at the raised position is
, each schematically illustrates a state in which the displacement member 7710 is arranged at the lowered position.

As shown in FIGS. 141 and 142, the displacement unit 7700 includes a displacement member 7710 which is slidably displaceable, and a driving means (not shown, such as an electric motor) for transmitting rotational driving force to the displacement member 7710. and a load gear 7730 that rotates as the displacement member 7710 slides.

The displacement member 7710 is supported by a support mechanism (not shown) so as to be linearly displaceable along the virtual line L1.
, a rack gear 7712 engraved along the imaginary line L1 on the lower surface of the displacement member 7710, and a ball receiving member 7713 rotatably supported at the tip of the displacement member 7710.

The imaginary line L1 is set as a straight line that slopes down from the raised position shown in FIG. 141 toward the lowered position shown in FIG. That is, at the raised position, the displacement member 7710 is positioned higher in the gravitational direction than at the lowered position.

The driven pin 7711 is inserted into the drive groove 772 in the arm member 7723 of the transmission member 7720.
It is a member that is slidably inserted through the drive groove 7723b, and is formed as a columnar body with an outer shape that is slightly smaller than the groove width of the drive groove 7723b. A load gear 7730 is meshed with the rack gear 7712 , and the load gear 7730 is rotated as the displacement member 7710 slides.

The ball receiving member 7713 is a member for holding a game ball on the upper surface of the displacement member 7710, and by rotating around a rotating shaft 7713a, the upright state shown in FIG. 141 and the tilted state shown in FIG. Formable. In the upright state, one end protrudes from the upper surface of the displacement member 7710 so that the game ball can be held (see FIG. 143). On the other hand, in the tilted state, the game ball can be discharged from the upper surface of the displacement member 7710 by positioning one end side below the upper surface of the displacement member 7710 (see FIG. 144).

The ball receiving member 7713 is maintained in an upright state by a biasing force acting from a biasing spring (for example, a torsion spring) (not shown). An engagement pin 7740 is fixed on the track of the displacement member 7710 (ball receiving member 7713). By engaging 7740, the ball receiving member 7713 is rotated into a tilted state. On the other hand, when the displacement member 7710 is slid to the raised position, the ball receiving member 7713 is rotated by the elastic recovery force of the biasing spring,
It returns to the tilted state.

The transmission member 7720 includes a disk-shaped rotating member 7721 that is rotationally driven by the above-described driving means (not shown), and a rotating member 777 that protrudes from an axial end face of the rotating member 7721 and that rotates.
A cylindrical drive pin 7722 located eccentrically from the rotation center of 21 and its drive pin 772
Arm member 77 having a driven groove 7723a through which 2 is slidably inserted at one end side.
23.

A one-way clutch OW1 is interposed between the rotating member 7721 and the driving means. Specifically, the one-way clutch OW1 has an inner ring connected to the drive means and an outer ring connected to the rotating member 7721. When the inner ring is driven to rotate in the direction of arrow A (clockwise in FIG. 141) by the drive means, When the rotational driving force is transmitted to the outer ring (that is, the rotating member 7721 is rotated in the direction of arrow A), while the inner ring is rotationally driven in the direction opposite to the direction of arrow A (counterclockwise in FIG. 141) by the driving means, , disconnects the power transmission to the outer ring (rotating member 7721).

The arm member 7723 has a drive groove 77 through which the driven pin 7711 of the displacement member 7710 is slidably inserted on the other end side opposite to the one end side where the driven groove 7723a is formed.
23b are formed as openings, and between the driven groove 7723a and the driving groove 7723b (
intermediate portion) is rotatably supported by a rotating shaft 7723c.

The drive pin 7722 is formed as a cylindrical body having an outer shape slightly smaller than the groove width of the driven groove 7723a. Further, the driven groove 7723a and the driving groove 7723b are formed by the arm member 7.
It is formed as a straight groove along the longitudinal direction of 723 .

According to the displacement unit 7700 formed as described above, the displacement member 7710 is shown in FIG.
141), the driving pin 7722 acts on the inner wall surface of the driven groove 7723a, and the arm member 7723 is rotated clockwise in FIG. 141 around the rotation axis 7723c. As the arm member 7723 rotates clockwise, the inner wall surface of the drive groove 7723b acts in a direction to push down the driven pin 7711, thereby sliding the displacement member 7710 along the virtual line L1, as shown in FIG. is placed in the lowered position shown in FIG.

On the other hand, from the state in which the displacement member 7710 is arranged at the lowered position shown in FIG.
721 is further rotated in the direction of arrow A (clockwise in FIG. 141), the drive pin 7722 acts on the inner wall surface of the driven groove 7723a, causing the arm member 7723 to rotate counterclockwise in FIG. is rotated to As the arm member 7723 rotates counterclockwise, the inner wall surface of the driving groove 7723b acts in a direction to push up the driven pin 7711, thereby sliding the displacement member 7710 along the virtual line L1. It is placed in the raised position shown at 141 .

Here, like the load gear 731e in the first embodiment, the load gear 7730 is formed so as to generate a predetermined amount of resistance when rotating. As a result, the weight (self weight) of the displacement member 7710 acts on the arm member 7723, and the rotating member 7721 moves in the direction of arrow A (Fig. 141).
clockwise) prevents the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 from leading the inner ring in one direction (arrow A direction). That is, in a state in which no game ball is held, it is possible to suppress the increase in the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 when moving from the raised position to the lowered position.

That is, the rotating member 7721 moves in the direction of arrow A (FIGS. 141 and 1) due to the rotational driving force of the driving means.
42), the displacement member 7710 reciprocates (slides) between the raised position and the lowered position at a slide speed corresponding to the rotational drive speed of the rotary drive means.
be done.

143 and 144 are schematic side views of the displacement unit 7700 when a game ball is held by the displacement member 7710. FIG. In addition, in FIG. 143, the state in which the displacement member 7710 is arranged at the raised position, and in FIG. 144, the state in which the displacement member 7710 is arranged at the lowered position
Each is schematically illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 143 and 144, the displacement member 7710 is formed to hold a game ball on its upper surface. That is, in this embodiment, the displacement unit 7700 is arranged in the area where the game ball flows down in the game area, and the displacement member 7710 is formed so that the upper surface of the displacement member 7710 can receive the falling game ball. In addition, in FIG. 143, the displacement member 7 is used for the four game balls indicated by symbol T.
A state held on the upper surface of 710 is exemplified.

In this case, when the displacement member 7710 holds the game ball, the weight of the displacement member 7710 as a whole is increased (heavy) by the weight of the game ball, and the resistance accompanying the rotation of the load gear 7730 is exceeded. can be made That is, the weight of the displacement member 7710 as a whole (the weight including the game ball) is applied to the arm member 7723 to rotate the rotating member 7721 in the direction of arrow A (clockwise in FIG. 143), thereby rotating the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1. can be advanced in one direction (direction of arrow A) with respect to the inner ring. As a result, the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 when moving from the raised position to the lowered position can be made faster than the displacement speed when the game ball is not held (see FIG. 141).

Also, the weight of the displacement member 7710 as a whole can be varied according to the number of game balls being held. Thereby, the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 can be varied (changed) not only depending on whether or not the displacement member 7710 holds game balls, but also according to the number of game balls held. As a result, the variation of the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 can be increased, and the effect of the presentation associated with the displacement of the displacement member 7710 can be enhanced accordingly.

As described above, the displacement member 7710 is provided with the ball receiving member 7713 at its tip (the end on the downwardly inclined side). Therefore, when the displacement member 7710 (its upper surface or ball receiving member 7713) receives the game ball flowing down the game area, the displacement member 7710
can act as a force for sliding displacement toward the lowered position. That is, the force can be applied via the arm member 7723 and the rotating member 7721 in a direction to move the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 ahead of the inner ring in one direction (arrow A direction).

As a result, the falling game ball is placed on the displacement member 7710 (its upper surface or the ball receiving member 771
3) when received, the kinetic energy of the game ball can be used to make the displacement speed of the slide displacement in the direction toward the lowered position of the displacement member 7710 faster.

In this case, the flowing game balls have different flowing directions and flowing velocities. Therefore,
The force (magnitude of kinetic energy) acting on the displacement member 7710 can be varied according to the difference in the flowing state (flowing direction and flow speed) of the game ball to be received. As a result, not only whether or not game balls are held by the displacement member 7710 and the number of game balls held,
The displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 is varied (changed) according to the flowing state of the game ball.
be able to. As a result, the variation of the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 can be increased, and the effect of the presentation associated with the displacement of the displacement member 7710 can be enhanced accordingly.

In addition, in the seventh embodiment, the rotating member 7721 rotates in one direction, so there is no need to switch the driving direction of the driving means. In other words, the displacement member 7710 can be reciprocated by continuously rotating the rotating means in one direction. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the time required to switch the driving direction of the driving means. As a result, the displacement member 7710 can be displaced immediately, since switching of the driving means is not required.

In this case, by immediately displacing the displacement member 7710, the ball receiving member 7713 is rotationally displaced and the game ball received by the displacement member 7710 (its upper surface or the ball receiving member 7713) is dropped. Rattling of the displacement member 7710 can be suppressed.

That is, when the game ball is dropped from the displacement member 7710 (ball receiving member 7713), the load of the displacement member 7710 is reduced by the amount of the dropped game ball, and the displacement member 7710 tends to be displaced upward due to the reaction. By immediately displacing the displacement member 7710, the ball receiving member 77
13, a force that displaces the displacement member 7710 downward can be applied, and the reaction when the ball is dropped from the displacement member 7710 can be canceled.

The game ball flowing down the game area is not limited to the game ball moving along the direction of gravity on the front surface of the game board 13, but also includes the game ball moving in a direction different from the direction of gravity. Game balls that move in a direction different from the direction of gravity include, for example, game balls that collide with nails, tulips, accessories, etc. A game ball that moves in a direction different from the direction of gravity is exemplified.

Here, in this embodiment, by providing the load gear 7730, in a state where the displacement member 7710 does not hold the game ball (see FIG. 141), when the displacement member 7710 is slid toward the lowered position , the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 is oriented in one direction with respect to the inner ring (arrow A
direction) (that is, the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 does not increase).

On the other hand, when the load gear 7730 is omitted or the resistance of the load gear 7730 is set to a small value, when the displacement member 7710 is slid toward the lowered position, the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 is moved with respect to the inner ring. may be configured to lead in one direction (arrow A direction) (that is, the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 increases). That is, only the weight (self weight) of the displacement member 7710 is applied to the arm member 7723, and the rotation member 7721 is moved in the direction of arrow A (Fig. 1).
41), the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 may precede the inner ring.

Next, the upper plate 8017 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 145 to 148. FIG. A rotation operation unit 8650 is arranged at the upper plate 8017 in the eighth embodiment at a substantially central position in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

First, FIG. 145 shows the overall configuration of the rotation operation unit 8650 in the eighth embodiment.
will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 145 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth embodiment. 146 is an exploded perspective front view of the rotary operation unit 8650. FIG. Figure 14
7 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 along line CXLVII-CXLVII in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 145 to 147, the rotation operation unit 8650 is arranged in the inner space of the upper tray 8017 of the pachinko machine 10, and the outer peripheral surface of the rotation operation portion 8654, which will be described later, protrudes outside the upper tray 8017. It is arranged in a state where

The rotation operation unit 8650 includes a drive motor KM6, a transmission gear 8651 connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM6, and a transmission gear 86 meshed with the outer peripheral surface of the transmission gear 8651.
52, a shaft portion 8653 fitted inside the shaft hole of the transmission gear 8652, a one-way clutch OW1 having an inner ring fitted onto the shaft portion 8653, and a rotation operating portion 8654 having an outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 fitted inside. and are formed mainly.

Transmission gear 8651 is coupled to the shaft of drive motor KM6. Therefore, the drive motor KM6
The transmission gear 8651 can be rotated by applying a rotational driving force to the . As mentioned above,
A transmission gear 8652 is arranged in mesh with the transmission gear 8651 . Therefore, when a rotational driving force is applied to the drive motor KM6, the transmission gear 865 is rotated through the transmission gear 8651.
2 can be rotated.

The shaft portion 8653 is a rod member formed in a cylindrical shape, and its axial length is equal to that of the rotation operation portion 86 .
It is formed longer than the width dimension of 54 in the horizontal direction. One end of the shaft portion 8653 is fitted into the shaft hole of the transmission gear 8652, and the other end is inserted into the inner ring of the one-way clutch OW1, as described above. As a result, the driving force generated when the transmission gear 8652 is rotated can be transmitted to the one-way clutch OW1.

As described above, the one-way clutch OW1 is composed of an inner ring, an outer ring, and rollers engaged therebetween. When the inner ring rotates in one direction, the rotation of the inner ring can be transmitted to the outer ring and the inner ring rotates in the other direction. When rotated, the rotation of the inner ring can be non-transmitted to the outer ring.

The rotation operation part 8654 is formed in an annular shape, and is disposed with a part of its outer peripheral surface protruding from the upper plate 8017 . In addition, the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 is fitted in the inner circular portion of the rotation operating portion 8654. As shown in FIG. That is, the inward inclination of the rotation operating portion 8654 is formed to be substantially the same as the outer diameter of the one-way clutch OW1. Therefore, rotation is transmitted to the rotation operation portion 8654 by rotating the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1.

As a result, when the drive motor KM6 is driven and rotated in one direction, the rotation is transmitted to the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 via the transmission gears 8651 and 8652 and the inner ring of the one-way clutch OW1, and the rotation operating portion 8654 is rotated. is rotated. On the other hand, drive motor KM6
is driven to rotate in the other direction, the transmission between the inner ring and the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 is disabled, and the transmission of the rotational drive to the rotation operation portion 8654 is interrupted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 148, the case where the player operates the rotation operation section 8654 will be described. 148 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. Note that the cross section of FIG.
corresponds to

As described above, the rotation operation unit 8654 rotates when the drive motor KM6 is rotated, and rotates the rotation operation unit 8654 by making the rotation of the drive motor KM6 non-rotating. A mode in which the displacement is stopped can be formed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 148, the drive motor KM6 is rotated in one direction,
654 is rotated in the A direction, the player operates the outer peripheral surface of the rotation operation part 8654 to cause the rotation operation part 8654 to generate a rotational force in the same direction as the rotation A direction, the one-way clutch O
The outer peripheral surface of W1 and the rotation operating portion 8654 are rotated first. That is, the rotation operation part 865
4 can be operated at a speed faster than the rotation speed of the drive motor KM6 by the player's operation.

Further, when the rotation operation part 8654 is not rotated (the drive motor KM6 is not rotated), the player applies a driving force to the rotation operation part 8654 in the direction of rotation A, thereby rotationally displacing the rotation operation part 8654. be able to.

Therefore, in the eighth embodiment, the rotation operation unit 8654 not only forms a non-rotating or rotating state by driving the drive motor KM6, but also rotates from a stopped state by the player's operation. And the rotation operation part 8654 can be configured to be rotated at a faster speed from the rotating state by the player's operation.

As a result, it is possible to form a plurality of modes in which the player can visually recognize the displacement mode of the rotation operating portion 8654, so that the player can be entertained. Also, by forming a plurality of rotation modes of the rotary operation part 8654, a plurality of performance modes of the pachinko machine 10 can be formed, so that the player can be entertained by the increased performance.

A sensor device or the like that measures the number of rotations is arranged on the side surface of the rotation operation unit 8654, and effects that change based on the number of rotations or the rotation speed of the rotation operation unit 8654 can be performed.

Next, referring to FIG. 149, the first link member 9431 in the ninth embodiment will be described. The plate-like protrusion 9431b of the first link member 9431 in the ninth embodiment has an inclined surface 9431b1 formed with an inclined contact surface with the cam member 422 . In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 149(a) is a perspective front view of the first link member 9431 in the ninth embodiment, and FIG. 149(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the lower displacement unit 400. FIG. In addition, FIG.149(b)
corresponds to the schematic cross-sectional view of FIG. 56(a).

The downward displacement unit 400 in the ninth embodiment includes a base member 410 disposed on the bottom wall portion 301 (see FIG. 6) of the rear case 300, and A transmission member 420 arranged on the base member 410 and its transmission member 4
and a lower displacement member 440 (see FIG. 45) that is displaced by transmission of a driving force from 20 . Further, the lower displacement unit 400 in the ninth embodiment includes a link member 94 that is connected to the base member 410 and the lower displacement member 440 and that is displaced as the transmission member 420 is driven.
30, and the lower displacement member 440 is displaced by displacement of the link member 9430 thereof.

As shown in FIG. 149, the first link member 9431 in the ninth embodiment is bent in a substantially V-shape when viewed from the front, and formed in a plate shape having a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction. The first link member 9431 has a through hole 431a penetrating in the front-rear direction on one end side (direction of arrow D in FIG. 149(a)) and protruding to the rear side on the other end side (direction of arrow U in FIG. 149(a)). a columnar connecting protrusion 431c (see FIG. 46), a plate-like protrusion 9431b protruding at a position facing the curved wall portion 411e of the base member 410, and a columnar sliding protrusion 431d protruding toward the front side of the bent portion. and prepare.

The plate-like protrusion 9431b extends in a curved shape around the axis of the through hole 431a and protrudes toward the front side (front base 411 side (arrow F direction side)). Moreover, the plate-shaped projection 94
The projection dimension of 31b is set larger than the thickness of the cam member 422 (the dimension in the direction of arrow FB). Furthermore, the plate-shaped projection 9431b and the opposing base member 410 (curved wall portion 411e) are arranged with a slight gap (distance X14 (see FIG. 149(b))) therebetween.

The cam member 422 is arranged so as to be displaceable in the region between the front surface of the first link member 9431 excluding the plate-like projection 9431b and the projecting surface (back surface) of the curved wall portion 411e. In addition, the dimension of the two gaps, which is the gap between the cam member 422 and the first link member 9431 facing each other and the gap between the cam member 422 and the base member 410 facing each other, is larger than the distance X14 described above. set large.

As a result, the first link member 9 moves in the direction (arrow F direction) in which the distance X14 described above becomes smaller.
431 can bring the protruding distal end surface of the plate-like projection 9431b into contact with the opposing base member 410 (curved wall portion 411e) when bent. Therefore, between the front surface of the first link member 9431 excluding the plate-like projection 9431b and the projecting surface (back surface) of the curved wall portion 411e, the cam member 42
2 can be suppressed from being restricted in displacement.

In addition, the plate-like projection 9431b has an inclined surface 9431b1 that protrudes toward the cam member 422 toward the cam member 422 on the circumferential side surface on the side of the cam member 422 (arrow L direction in FIG. 149(b)). The inclined surface 9431b1, as shown in FIG.
It is formed with an inclination of approximately 45 degrees toward .

As a result, when the lower displacement unit 400 is in the second displacement state and the end of the cam member 422 comes into contact with the plate-like projection 9431b, the cam member 422 is moved to the rear surface of the first link member 9431 (in the direction of the arrow F). surface) and can be pressed (displaced) against the first link member 94
31 can be pressed against the curved wall portion 411e. As a result, the cam member 422 and the first link member 9431 can be prevented from rocking in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction), and the lower displacement member 440 can be easily maintained at the position of the second displacement state.

In this case, it is preferable that a flat surface parallel to the inclined surface 9431b1 is formed at the end of the cam member 422 at the contact portion with the inclined surface 9431b1. Thereby, the cam member 422
and the inclined surface 9431b1, the cam member 422 can be easily displaced to the rear side (arrow B direction side).

Next, referring to FIG. 150, a general prize winning port unit 10150 in the tenth embodiment
will be explained. In the first embodiment, the general prize winning unit 150 includes the adhesive tape 1
54a is attached to the end of the decorative member 154, but in the tenth embodiment, the adhesive tape 10154a is attached to the inner side of the decorative member 10154 separated from the end by a predetermined width. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 150 is a sectional view of the game board 13 in the tenth embodiment. Note that FIG.
It corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. In addition, the general winning mouth unit 1015 in the tenth embodiment
0 is arranged in the game area of the game board 13 (in front of the base plate 60) in the same manner as the general winning hole unit 150 in the first embodiment, and is capable of changing the path of the game ball flowing down the game area. . In addition, the general prize winning port unit 10150 is located at the lower end of the gravity direction (arrow D direction side) in a front view (arrow B direction view) with respect to the game area formed by being surrounded by the inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77. It is arranged in a position along the part.

Further, the general prize winning port unit 10150 includes a main body portion 151 formed in a crescent shape when viewed from the front, and a first standing portion 152 erected from the end portion of the main body portion 151 to the front side (arrow F direction side). (See FIG. 12), and a second standing portion 153 (see FIG. 12 ( a)), and a plurality of (three in this embodiment) general prize winning openings 63 (see FIG. 12A) formed on the front side of the main body 151 .

As shown in FIG. 150, the general prize winning slot unit 10150 in the tenth embodiment includes a decorative member 10154 arranged on the back surface of the main body 10151. As shown in FIG. The decorative member 10154 has an adhesive tape 10154a adhered to the main body 151 attached to the inner side of the decorative member 10154 separated from the end of the decorative member 10154 by a predetermined width. As a result, the thickness of the adhesive tape 10154a,
A predetermined gap (space) is formed at the end of the decorative member 10154 between the body portion 151 and the decorative member 10154 . As a result, the player can move at an angle greater than a predetermined angle (for example, the pachinko machine 10 (Fig. 1)
When viewing the general winning slot unit 10150 from the viewpoint of the same height as the upper end in the direction of gravity of ), it is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the boundary between the decoration of the decoration member 60c and the decoration of the decoration member 10154. .

More specifically, by forming an air layer between the end of the decorative member 10154 and the main body 151, the inside of the main body 151 is reflected, and the light from the end (inclined surface 151a) of the main body 151 toward the player side is reflected. It is possible to prevent the light L emitted to the 10154 from being affected by the decoration at the end of the decorative member 10154 (make it difficult for the wavelength of the light L to be changed). In addition, the light that passes through the adhesive tape 10154a and is affected by the decoration of the decorative member 10154 is repeatedly reflected inside the main body 151 and emitted to the outside of the main body 151. The influence of the decoration of the decoration member 10154 can be reduced when the light is reflected toward the viewpoint.

Therefore, it is possible to reduce the change in the wavelength of the light L emitted to the player, and when the player visually recognizes the general prize winning port unit 10150 from a predetermined angle or more, the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 10154 are decorated. It is possible to make it difficult to recognize the boundary of As a result, the decorative member 60c can be viewed from a normal angle (for example, from a viewpoint of the same height as the game board 13, which is approximately in the middle position in the direction of gravity).
When the player visually recognizes the decoration of the decorative member 10154, the decoration of the decorative member 60c of the base plate and the decoration of the decorative member 10154 can be easily viewed by the player as one decoration, and at a predetermined angle (for example, pachinko Viewpoint at the same height as the upper end of the gravity direction of the machine 10 (see FIG. 1))
When visually recognizing from the outside, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand that the decoration is divided by making it difficult to see the decoration in the boundary portion.

151 to 153, the lower displacement member 114 in the eleventh embodiment
40 will be explained. In the first embodiment, the control board 491 arranged on the back side of the lower displacement member 440 irradiates the decorative member 450 with light. The light emitted from 491 allows the player to recognize the position of the game ball inside. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

First, referring to FIGS. 151 and 152, the lower displacement member 114 in the eleventh embodiment
40 will be described. FIG. 151 shows the lower displacement member 11 in the eleventh embodiment.
440 is an exploded perspective front view of 440. FIG. 152(a) and 152(b) show the lower displacement member 11
440 is a front view. In FIG. 152(a), the outer shape of the light emitter 11491a arranged on the control board 491 is illustrated by a chain line, and in FIG. 152(b), the state in which the decorative member 11450 is removed is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 152(a) and 152(b), the lower displacement member 11440 in the eleventh embodiment includes a base member 470 connected to the front base 411 (see FIG. 45) and front and rear of the base member 470. The case member 480 covering the case member 480 and the base member 4
70 and a decorative member 11450 formed to cover the front and rear of the case member 480 (arrow FB direction).

The decorative member 11450 is formed in an outer shape that imitates a pattern or character, and the pattern or character is drawn on the surface. The decorative member 11450 includes a front-side decorative portion 11451 arranged on the front side (direction of arrow F) of the front case 481 and a rear-side decorative portion arranged on the rear side (direction of arrow B) of the rear case 482. 452. In this embodiment, a shark pattern (character) is drawn on the decorative member 11450 .

The front-side decorative portion 11451 is formed to have an outer shape larger than the outer shape of the front case 481 when viewed from the front, and is attached to the front case 481 . As a result, the members (case member 480, base member 470, etc.) arranged on the back side of the front-side decorative portion 11451 can be made invisible to the player. Further, the front-side decorative portion 11451 includes a transmission portion 11451b formed of a light-transmitting material on the inner side in front view.

The transmissive portion 11451b is composed of a plurality of light emitters 11491 arranged on a control substrate 491, which will be described later.
11491a, and can guide the light emitted from the plurality of light emitters 11491a to the player side. In addition, the transmitting portion 11451b is located on the front side (arrow F direction side)
is curved toward the back side (arrow B direction side) toward the outer end portion in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction). As a result, the light incident from the rear side of the transmission portion 11451b passes through the transmission portion 11
When the light passes through the inside of 451b and is emitted from the front side, the light is easily diffused.

The transmission mechanism 11460 is a member arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the base member 470, and includes transmission gears 461, 462, and 463, a drive motor KM2 whose shaft portion is connected to the transmission gear 461, A movable rack 464 having a tooth surface that meshes with the transmission gear 463 and arranged slidably displaceable on the front side of the base member 470; a transmission gear 465 rotatably arranged on the movable rack 464; A rack gear 476 formed in the member 470 and having a tooth surface with which the transmission gear 465 meshes, and a movable rack 46 having a tooth surface meshed with the transmission gear 465 .
4 and a rack 11466 arranged to be slidably displaceable on the front side of the rack 11466
and a ball receiving portion 467 rotatably disposed on one end side of the.

The rack 11466 is formed of a horizontally long rod-shaped body that is rectangular when viewed from the front, and has a rack gear 466a engraved on the upper end surface, and a rear side (arrow B direction side) from the other end side (arrow L direction side) of the longitudinal direction. A shaft portion 466b protruding in a cylindrical shape, two sliding plates 466c protruding to the front side (arrow F direction side), and a recessed portion extending from one end (arrow R direction side) to the other end in the longitudinal direction. and a shielding plate 11466e projecting upward (in the direction of arrow U) from the front side of the rack gear 466a.

The shielding plate 11466e is made of a non-light transmissive material and can block light emitted from the light emitter 11491a. In addition, the shielding plate 11466e has an upward projection height (
(height in the direction of arrow U) is higher than the light emitting body 11491a disposed on the back side (position in the direction of arrow U). As a result, as the rack 11466 is displaced, the shield plate 1146
By displacing 6e in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction), the light emitted from the light emitter 11491a can be blocked.

The control board 491 is arranged on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the base member 470, and includes a plurality of light emitters 11491a capable of emitting light to the front side. A plurality of light emitters 11491a are arranged side by side in the longitudinal direction of the lower displacement member 11440 (direction of arrows LR), and the ball receiving portion arranged on the front side (direction of arrow F) via the base member 470. It is disposed above 467 (in the direction of arrow U). Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the ball receiving portion 467 from blocking the light emitted from the light emitting portion 11491a.

Next, referring to FIG. 153, the state in which the game ball is thrown to the inside of the ball receiving portion 467 will be described. 153(a) is a front view of the lower displacement member 11440, and FIG. 153(b) is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the lower displacement member 11440 taken along line CLIIIb-CLIIIb of FIG. 153(a), and FIG. 153(c). ) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the lower displacement member 11440 taken along line CLIIIc-CLIIIc in FIG. 153(a).

As shown in FIG. 153, when a game ball is received in the ball receiving portion 467, the received game ball is arranged at a position overlapping the front side (arrow F direction side) of the light emitter 11491a. As a result, the game ball received by the ball receiving portion 467 can block the light emitted from the light emitter 11491a toward the player. As a result, the player can be made to recognize the position of the game ball thrown inside the lower displacement member 11440 by the shadow formed by blocking the light.

Further, in the eleventh embodiment, the control board 491 is arranged on the back side of the decorative member 11450 and is capable of emitting light toward the displacement area of the ball receiving portion 467 .
7, the light emitted from the control board 491 is blocked by the ball receiving portion 467 or the game ball received by the ball receiving portion 467, and the light amount of the light emitted from the decorative member 11450 is reduced. Since the parts are made different, the amount of light emitted from the decorative member 11450 positioned in front of the ball receiving portion 467 or the game ball received in the ball receiving portion 467 and the amount of light emitted from the decorative members 11450 at other positions. By differentiating the light intensity of the light (darkened to form a shadow), it is possible to indicate that the ball receiving portion 467 or the game ball received in the ball receiving portion 467 is positioned on the back side of the portion with the different light intensity. Players can be made aware of this.

More specifically, when the control board 491 is arranged on the back side of the ball receiving portion 467, the light emitted from the control board 491 is blocked by the ball receiving portion 467 or the game ball received in the ball receiving portion 467. Thus, the amount of light emitted from the decorative member 11450 on the front side of the ball receiving portion 467 or the game ball received in the ball receiving portion 467 can be made darker than other portions of the decorative member 11450 . As a result, the player can be made to recognize that the ball receiving portion 467 or the game ball received in the ball receiving portion 467 is located on the back side of the portion where the amount of light emitted from the decorative member 11450 is small (dark).

Also, the ball receiving portion 467 is formed in a shape to receive the lower hemisphere of the game ball, and the light emitting body 1149 is formed.
Since 1a is arranged at a position higher than the center of the game ball received in the ball receiving portion 467,
It is possible to make it difficult for the ball receiving portion 467 to be irradiated with the light emitted from the light emitter 11491a. Therefore, the light emitted from the light emitter 11491a causes the ball receiving portion 46 to receive the game ball.
7 and the outer shape of the rack 11466 that slides and displaces the ball receiving portion 467 can suppress the formation of a shadow on the transmissive portion 11451b. As a result, only the game ball received in the ball receiving portion 467 can form a shadow on the transmitting portion 11451b, so the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced in a state in which the game ball is not received in the ball receiving portion 467. In this case, it is possible to prevent the player's line of sight from focusing on the ball receiving portion 467 .

Next, referring to FIGS. 154 and 155, the ball receiving portion 12467 in the twelfth embodiment
will be explained. In the eleventh embodiment, the case of blocking the light emitted from the light emitting body 11491a by the game ball received in the ball receiving portion 467 has been described. The three pieces 12467e shield the light emitted from the light emitter 11491a. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 154, the configuration of the ball receiving portion 12467 in the twelfth embodiment will be described. 154(a) is an exploded perspective front view of the ball receiving portion 12467 in the twelfth embodiment, and FIG. 154(b) is a front view of the ball receiving portion 12467. FIG. Note that FIG.
), a portion of the ball receiving portion 12467 is illustrated with a dashed line.

It should be noted that the lower displacement member 12440 in the twelfth embodiment includes a base member 470 connected to the front base 411 (see FIG. 45) and front and rear of the base member 470 in the same manner as the lower displacement member 11440 in the eleventh embodiment. and a case member 480 covering the
and a decorative member 11450 formed to cover the front and rear (arrow FB direction). Further, the lower displacement member 12440 in the twelfth embodiment is the case member 480
and the base member 470 so as to be displaceable, and includes a transmission mechanism 12460 having a ball receiving portion 12467c that can be deformed by receiving a game ball.

As shown in FIG. 154, the ball receiving portion 12467 in the twelfth embodiment includes a first piece 12467c that is bent into a substantially L shape when viewed from the front, and a second piece 12467d that is connected to the first piece 12467c. , and a third piece 12467e connected to the second piece 12467d and arranged on the rear side of the first piece 12467c and the second piece 12467d.

The first piece 12467c and the second piece 12467d are portions for holding a game ball thrown to the inside of the lower displacement member 12440 from the opening 451a (see FIG. 57).
and the second piece 12467d, the second piece 12467d is displaced in the direction of separating from the first piece 12467c, part of the first piece 12467c and the second piece 12
467d are arranged in a U shape in a front view, and a game ball can be held in the inner part of the U shape.

The first piece 12467c is composed of a receiving piece 12467c4 forming one extending side which is L-shaped in front view, a leg portion 467a forming the other extending side, and the receiving piece 12467c4 and the leg portion 467a. An annular bent portion 12467c5 in which a shaft hole 467b penetrating in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) is formed in the connecting portion (bent portion), and a connecting portion 12467c1 protruding to the opposite side with the bent portion 12467c5 interposed therebetween. And prepare.

The receiving piece 12467c4 is a portion that forms a side surface on the other side (the side in the direction of the arrow R) of the U-shape formed by the first piece 12467c and the second piece 12467d. It is formed in a curved shape that is concave in the direction away from the second piece 12467d.

The connecting portions 12467c1 are protruded from two locations at predetermined intervals in the axial direction (arrow FB direction) of the bent portion 12467c5. In addition, the connecting portion 12467c1 is connected to the second piece 1, which will be described later.
2467d and the third piece 12467e, and has a connecting hole 12467c2 extending along the axial direction of the shaft hole 467b and having a circular cross section.

The connecting hole 12467c2 is formed by a shaft portion 12467e projecting from a third piece 12467e, which will be described later.
3 is the opening into which it is inserted. The connecting hole 12467c2 has a shaft portion 12467e3 inserted into an insertion hole 12467d3 formed in a second piece 12467d, which will be described later, on the rear side (arrow B direction side).
inserted from Further, the shaft portion 12467e3 is fastened by a screw inserted from the opposite side (front side (arrow F direction side)) to the insertion side of the connecting hole 12467c2. Thereby, the second piece 12467d and the third piece 12467e can be fastened to the first piece 12467c.

In addition, the first piece 12467c has a recess 12467c3 recessed downward in the direction of gravity (arrow D direction) on the projecting base end side of the connecting portion 12467c1. The recessed bottom surface of the recessed portion 12467c3 is formed at the lowest position (bottom) in the bottom surface where the game ball is held by the first piece 12467c and the second piece 12467d. Thereby, the first piece 12467c and the second piece 12467d
The game ball held in is rolled inside the recess 12467c3.

The second piece 12467d includes the receiving piece 12467c4 of the first piece 12467c and the second piece 124
67d forms a side surface on the other side (in the direction of the arrow L) that is formed in a U shape when viewed from the front. It is formed into a curved shape. Also, the first piece 12467c and the second piece 12467d
an insertion hole 12467d3 that opens circularly in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) in the connecting portion of the
and a recessed portion 12467d2 that is recessed in a circular cross-section from the rear side (arrow B direction side) toward the front side (arrow F direction side).

The second piece 12467d is inserted into the insertion hole 12467d3 and the shaft portion 1246 of the third piece 12467e.
7e3 is inserted, and the connecting shaft 12467e of the third piece 12467e is inserted into the concave portion 12467d2.
4 is inserted. Therefore, when the second piece 12567d is displaced, the third piece 12467e is likewise displaced. Therefore, when the second piece 12567d is rotationally displaced with respect to the first piece 12467c, the third piece 12567e is similarly rotationally displaced with respect to the first piece 12467c.

Furthermore, the second piece 12467d has two connection portions 12 protruding from the first piece 12467c.
467c1 is disposed between the opposing members and connected to the first piece 12467c. This allows the second
When the piece 12467d is twisted in the axial direction of the insertion hole 12467d3, the connecting portion 12467c
The second piece 12467d can be brought into contact with the opposite side surface of the second piece 12467d to prevent the shaft portion 12467e3 from breaking.

The recessed portion 12467d2 is a hole into which a connecting shaft 12467e4 of the third piece 12467e, which will be described later, is inserted, and is recessed in substantially the same shape as the connecting shaft 12467e4.

The third piece 12467e includes a shielding plate 12467e1 formed in a substantially semicircular plate shape when viewed from the front,
A shaft portion 124 projecting from the shielding plate 12467e1 toward the front side (arrow F direction side)
67e3 and a connecting shaft 12467e4.

The shield plate 12467e1 is made of a non-light-transmitting material, and the light emitter 11491a
, the light emitted from the light emitter 11491a can be shielded. The shielding of light from the light emitter 11491a by the shielding plate 12467e1 will be described later.

The shaft portion 12467e3 is a cylindrical body inserted into the connecting hole 12467c2 of the first piece 12467c and the insertion hole 12467d3 of the second piece 12467d as described above. Also, the shaft portion 1
2467e3 has a connecting hole 124 from the side opposite to the insertion side of the shaft portion 12467e3.
A hole into which a screw to be inserted into 67c2 can be screwed is formed. Therefore, when the shaft portion 12467e3 is inserted into the connecting hole 12467c2 and the insertion hole 12467d3, the shaft portion 12467e3
12467c, the second piece 12467d, and the third piece 12467e can be connected, and the third piece 12467e can be connected to the first piece 1246
7c can be made rotatable.

As described above, the connecting shaft 12467e4 is connected to the concave portion 12467d of the second piece 12467d.
2 is inserted. As a result, the second piece 12467d is positioned at the shaft portion 1 with respect to the first piece 12467c.
When rotating about 2467e3, the connecting shaft 12467e4 can be displaced along with the displacement of the second piece 12467d. Therefore, the third piece 12467e is replaced by the second piece 12467
It can be displaced with the displacement of d.

Next, with reference to FIG. 155, displacement of the ball receiving portion 12467 in the twelfth embodiment will be described in detail. 155(a) and 155(b) are front views of the lower displacement member 12440, and FIG. 155(c) is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the lower displacement member 12440 taken along line CLVc-CLVc in FIG. 155(b). be. 155(a) and 155(b), a portion of the lower displacement member 12440 and the light emitter 11491a are illustrated with chain lines. Also, FIG.
In (a), the state before the game ball is received by the ball receiving portion 12467 (before being held) is illustrated, and in FIG. Ta)
The states are illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 155, in the ball receiving portion 12467, before the game ball is received between the first piece 12467c and the second piece 12467d, the load of the third piece 12467e pushes the second piece 12467d to the first position. The third piece 12467e is brought closer to the piece 12467c side.
is located below the light emitter 11491a arranged on the back side of the ball receiving portion 12467. As shown in FIG. Therefore, before the game ball is received by the ball receiving portion 12467, the light emitted from the light emitter 11491a can be emitted to the player side.

On the other hand, when a game ball is received between the first piece 12467c and the second piece 12467d, the received game ball is received by the receiving surfaces of the first piece 12467c and the second piece 12467d (formed in a U shape when viewed from the front). inner side surface) and the recess 12 located at the lowest end of its receiving surface
You will be directed to 467c3. As a result, the second piece 12467d is pushed by the shaft portion 124 with the outer surface of the game ball.
It can be rotated around 67e3 in a direction away from the first piece 12467c. As a result, the third piece 12467e that moves with the displacement of the second piece 12467d is moved to the ball receiving portion 1246.
7 can be arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the light emitter 11491a arranged on the back side of the .

Therefore, the light emitted from the light emitter 11491a is blocked by the shielding plate 1246 of the third piece 12467e.
It can be shielded by 7e1. As a result, only when the game ball is received by the ball receiving portion 12467, the light emitted from the light emitter 11491a can be easily shielded, so that the position of the game ball received by the lower displacement member 12440 can be adjusted to the position of the light emitter 11491a. The position of the shadow that blocks the light can be recognized by the player.

Also, the connecting shaft 12467e4 is inserted into the concave portion 12467d2 of the second piece 12467d, and the load of the third piece 12467e is always applied. The center of gravity G of the third piece 12467e (Fig. 1
54(b)) is set on the opposite side of the connecting portion between the second piece 12567d and the third piece 12567e across the shaft portion 12467e3. As a result, when no force other than gravity acts on the second piece 12467d and the third piece 12467de, the load of the third piece 12467e can rotate the second piece 12467d toward the first piece 12467c4. .

Therefore, when the game ball is ejected (taken out) from the ball receiving portion 12467, the third piece 124
The second piece 12467d can be displaced to the ball receiving piece 12467c4 side of the first piece 12467c by the load of 67e.

Furthermore, similarly to the ball receiving portion 467 in the first embodiment, the ball receiving portion 12467 is rotated around the shaft hole 12467b by the operation of slidingly displacing the inside of the lower displacement member 12440, and the lower displacement member 12440 is emitted. A game ball received from the opening 471 (see FIG. 66) is discharged to the outside.

Here, as a structure for discharging the game ball received in the ball receiving portion 12467, the ball receiving portion 12
In the structure in which the ball receiving portion 12467 rotates about the shaft hole 467b as the ball 467 slides, the sliding speed of the ball receiving portion 12467 moves the ball receiving portion 12 about the shaft hole 467b.
467 rotation speed is changed. Therefore, since the rotational speed depends only on the slide speed of the ball receiving portion 12467, there is a problem that the ejection speed of the game ball from the ball receiving portion 12467 is not stable.

On the other hand, in the twelfth embodiment, the load of the third piece 12467e causes the second piece 12467 to
Since the direction in which d rotates and the direction in which the ball receiving portion 12467 rotates around the shaft hole 467b when the game ball is ejected are set to be substantially the same direction, the game ball ejected from the ejection opening 471 A driving force can be applied when the second piece 12467d is displaced. Therefore, the ball receiving portion 124
Even if the force acting on the game ball from the ball receiving portion 12467 when discharging the game ball from the discharge opening 471 by displacing the 67 is reduced, the speed of the game ball to be discharged can be maintained. As a result, the ejection speed of the game ball ejected from the ball receiving portion 12467 can be stabilized.

Next, referring to FIGS. 156 to 158, the special winning device 13 in the thirteenth embodiment
550 will be explained. In the first embodiment, the first unit 5 of the special winning device 550
51 is switched by the first and second drive units 583, 584 of the third path member 580, but in the thirteenth embodiment, the ball throwing path of the special winning device 13550 is changed. By changing the facing interval, the flowing path of the game ball flowing down inside the special winning device 13550 is adjusted. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 156 and 157, the special winning device 13 in the thirteenth embodiment
The overall configuration of 550 will be described. FIG. 156(a) is a front view of the special winning device 13550 in the thirteenth embodiment, FIG. 156(b) is a perspective front view of the special winning device 13550, and FIG. It is a cross-sectional view of the special winning device 13550 along the CLVIc-CLVIc line of a). 157 is an exploded perspective front view of the special winning device 13550. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 156 and 157, a special winning device 13550 in the thirteenth embodiment
has a first path member 13560 arranged on the front side and a second path member 13570 arranged on the back side of the first path member 13560 .

The first path member 13560 includes a front plate 13564 formed in a plate shape along the front of the game area of the game board 13, and projecting from the left and right ends of the front plate 13564 to the rear side (base plate 60 side). and a first wall portion 13565 that is

The front plate 13564 is a plate member that serves as a wall portion on the front side of a game ball flow-down path formed between facing a second path member 13570 described later, and is formed of a light-transmitting member. Thereby, the player can visually recognize the game ball flowing down inside the special winning device 13550 through the front plate 13564 . The front plate 13564 includes a first protrusion 13564b and a second protrusion 13564c that protrude toward the second path member 13570, and the first protrusion 13564b and the second protrusion 13564c.
A third protrusion 135 located below the protrusion 13564c and protruding toward the second path member 13570
64d.

The first convex portion 13564b and the second convex portion 13564c are projections for guiding game balls flowing down inside the special prize winning device 13550, and are positioned outside the front plate 13564 in the horizontal direction (arrow L
-R direction outside) toward the center of the front plate 13564 in the left-right direction.

The third protrusion 13564d is positioned at the center of the front plate 13564 in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR) and extends in the direction of gravity (direction of arrows UD). In the thirteenth embodiment, in the game area of the game board 13, the throwing paths of the game balls flowing down from the special winning device 13550 are different on the left and right of the center position of the special winning device 13550 in the horizontal direction (direction of arrows LR). , special winning device 1
A game ball flowing down from the left side of the 3550 when viewed from the front is thrown to the first winning hole 64 (see FIG. 2),
A specific game value is given to the player by the thrown game balls (a predetermined number of game balls are paid out). On the other hand, game balls flowing down from the right side of the special winning device 13550 in front view are sent to the out port 71 of the game board 13 and collected by the pachinko machine 10 .

In the thirteenth embodiment, the left side (arrow L direction side) of the special winning device 13550 (
A first prize winning port 64 is arranged on the arrow D direction side. Thereby, the game ball flowing down from the front view left side of the special winning device 13550 can be made to flow into the first winning port 64 .

The first wall portion 13565 is a portion that connects the base plate 60 of the game board 13 and the special prize winning device 13550, and connecting plates 13565a protruding to the left and right outside are attached to the left and right first wall portions 13565, respectively. Prepare two places.

The connection plate 13565a is formed with a through hole 13565a1 for inserting a screw for fastening the special winning device 13550 to the base plate 60 of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. This through hole 13
The special winning device 13550 can be fastened to the base plate 60 by a screw inserted through 565a1.

The second path member 13570 includes a plate-like base plate 13571 facing the front plate 13564 of the first path member 13560, and the left and right ends of the base plate 13571 (in the directions of arrows LR) of the first path member 13560. and a fourth wall portion 13573 protruding toward the front plate 13564 side.

The base plate 13571 is a member that forms a ball-throwing path for game balls in the gap between the first path member 13560 and the front plate 13564 , and has an outer shape smaller than that of the front plate 13564 when viewed from the front. As a result, the front side of the base plate 13571 is connected to the front plate 1356
4, the base plate 13571 can be made difficult to see from the player side.

Further, the base plate 13571 has a fourth convex portion 1357 that protrudes toward the first path member 13560 side.
1b, the fifth convex portion 13571c, and the fourth convex portion 13571b and the fifth convex portion 13571c
and a sixth convex portion 13571d located below and protruding toward the front plate 13564 side.

The fourth convex portion 13571b and the fifth convex portion 13571c are projections for guiding game balls flowing down inside the special prize winning device 13550, and are arranged from the left-right direction outside (arrow (LR direction outside)) of the base plate 13571. It is inclined downward toward the center of the base plate 13571 .

The sixth protrusion 13571d is formed at a position facing the above-described third protrusion 13564d, and is formed to have a length with a predetermined gap from the tip of the third protrusion 13564d. In addition, the third
The gap between the convex portion 13564d and the sixth convex portion 13571d facing each other is set to a dimension smaller than the diameter of the game ball.

The fourth wall portion 13573 is provided with two fastening holes 13573a for fastening screws inserted through the first path member 13560 at two locations in each of the left and right fourth wall portions 13573 . Thereby, the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570 are fastened and fixed.

In addition, around the fastening hole 13573a of the fourth wall portion 13573, the first path member 13560
A shim member SI is provided for adjusting the gap between the facing member 13570 and the second path member 13570 .

The shim member SI is made of a thin plate-like transparent material, and is made difficult to be seen by the player. In addition, in the present embodiment, the shim member SI is arranged at the left end in the front view, and the gap between the facing front plate 13564 and the base plate 13571 on the left side in the front view is increased.

Next, with reference to FIG. 158, game balls flowing down inside the special winning device 13550 in the thirteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 158(a) is a top view of the special winning device 13550, and FIG. 158(b) is a sectional view of the special winning device 13550 along line CLVIIIb-CLVIIIb of FIG. 158(a).

As shown in FIG. 158, the special winning device 13550 has a shim member SI at the left end when viewed from the front.
is provided, and the distance L14 (see FIG. 158(a)) between the front plate 13564 and the base plate 13571 on the left side in front view is the distance between the front plate 13564 and the base plate 13571 on the right side in front view.
3571 (L1
4>L15).

Note that the interval L14 is the interval between the left (arrow L direction) end portions at the positions where the front plate 13564 and the base plate 13571 face each other. Further, the interval L15 is the interval between the right (arrow R direction) ends at the position where the front plate 13564 and the base plate 13571 face each other. Furthermore, the interval L15 is set larger than the diameter of the game ball, and the special winning device 1355
0 can be made to flow into the inside of the special winning device 13550 from any position in the horizontal direction (L14>L15>diameter of game ball).

In addition, the special winning device 13550 is partitioned into left and right on the downstream side by the third convex portion 13564d and the sixth convex portion 13571d. As a result, the game balls flowing down the main path SK1 (see FIG. 158(b)) on the upstream side of the special winning device 13550 are formed on the main path SK2 formed on the left side of the special winning device 13550 when viewed from the front, and on the right side when viewed from the front. It is flowed into one of the sub-paths HK1 to be formed. In addition, as described above, the game area on the downstream side of the special winning device 13550 is
A different ball throwing path is formed at the substantially central position in the left-right direction of the special winning device 13550 .
Therefore, game balls thrown to the game area from the main path SK2 are thrown to a specific winning hole, and game balls thrown to the game area from the secondary path HK1 are thrown to the out hole 71 of the game board 13.

Furthermore, the first convex portion 13564b and the second convex portion 13564c of the front plate 13564 described above
, and the projection dimensions of the fourth projection 13571b and the fifth projection 13571c of the base plate 13571 are set to be substantially the same. That is, the first protrusion 13565b and the second protrusion 13564c that protrude from the front plate 13564 toward the rear side are set to have the same protrusion dimension. Also,
A fourth convex portion 13571b and a fifth convex portion 13 protruding from the base plate 13571 toward the front side
571c has the same projection dimension. Furthermore, the first convex portion 13565b and the fourth
The projection dimension is set to be the same as that of the projection 13571b.

Further, the first protrusion 13564b and the second protrusion 13564c and the fourth protrusion 13571b and the fifth protrusion 13571c are arranged at different heights in the vertical direction. That is, the front plate 13
The first protrusion 13565b and the second protrusion 13564c protruding from 564 toward the back side protrude from the same height. Further, the fourth convex portion 13571b and the fifth convex portion 13571c that protrude from the base plate 13571 toward the front side protrude from the same height. Furthermore, the first protrusion 13565b and the fourth protrusion 13571b are arranged at different heights, and the fourth protrusion 13571b is arranged below the first protrusion 13565b. In addition, the lower side of the first projection 13565b projecting from two locations in the gravity direction is arranged at an intermediate position between the fourth projections 13571b projecting from two locations in the gravity direction.

As a result, the game ball flowing down inside the special winning device 13550 is pushed to the first convex portion 13564b.
, and the fourth protrusion 13571b or the second protrusion 13564c and the fifth protrusion 13571c. As a result, the game ball is moved to the first convex portion 13564b and the second
It can flow down along the extension direction of the projection 13564c, the fourth projection 13571b, and the fifth projection 13571c.

A front plate 13564 and a fourth convex portion 1357 on the left side of the special winning device 13550 when viewed from the front
1b or the distance dimension L16 (see FIG. 158(a)) between the opposing base plate 13571 and the first convex portion 13564b is set larger than the diameter of the game ball by the shim member SI, and the special winning device 13550 Front plate 13564 and fifth convex portion 1357 on the right side in front view
1c or the distance dimension L17 between the opposing base plate 13571 and the second convex portion 13564c is
It is set smaller than the diameter of the game ball.

Note that the interval L16 is the fifth convex portion 13 between the fourth convex portion 13571b and the first convex portion 13564b.
571c and the front plate 13564 at the end on the side of the second protrusion 13564c (arrow R direction side)
Or, it is the distance dimension between the opposing base plate 13571 . In addition, the interval L17 is the fifth convex portion 1
3571c and the fourth convex portion 13571b and the first convex portion 13564b of the second convex portion 13564c
This is the distance between the front plate 13564 or the base plate 13571 at the end on the side (arrow L direction side).

Furthermore, in the thirteenth embodiment, the first winning port 64 is arranged below (in the arrow D direction side) the left side (arrow L direction side) of the special winning device 13550. The flowing game balls can be made to flow into the first prize winning port 64. - 特許庁

Therefore, the special winning device 13
The game ball flowing into the main path SK1 of 550 is the second convex portion 13564c and the fifth convex portion 135
71c, and flow down along the extending direction of the second protrusion 13564c and the fifth protrusion 13571c to be easily guided toward the secondary path HK1. On the other hand, a special winning device 1355
A game ball that flows into the main path SK1 of the special prize winning device 13550 from the front view left side (arrow L direction side) of 0 is made difficult to collide with the first convex portion 13564b and the fourth convex portion 13571b, and is directly directed to the subpath HK1. Easier to throw. As a result, the flowing direction of the game ball that has flowed into the special winning device 13550 can be changed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the first convex portion 13564b, the second convex portion 13564c, the fourth convex portion 13
571b and the fifth convex portion 13571c are connected to the sixth convex portion 13571d and the third convex portion 13564d.
It is formed above (in the direction of the arrow U) the (game ball inlets of the main path HK1 and the sub path SK6). Therefore, most of the game balls flowing down the main route SK1 can be flowed down the sub route HK1, and a relatively smaller number of game balls than the sub route HK1 can be flowed down the main route SK6.

In addition, in the thirteenth embodiment, the shim member SI is used to adjust the facing distance between the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570 and to make it non-parallel.
It is possible to adjust the position of the game ball flowing down between the paths member 13570 (the direction in which the game ball flows down).

Therefore, compared to the case of adjusting the direction in which game balls tend to flow down by changing the angle of the nail nailed to the front of the base plate 60 with respect to the front of the base plate 60, the special winning device 13550
It is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the direction in which the player is likely to be swept down the inside of the . As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing that the game is disadvantageous before playing with the gaming machine, thereby improving the operation rate of the gaming machine.

In addition, only by changing two directions (forward and backward direction (arrow FB direction)) of the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570, the game ball flowing down inside the special prize winning device 13550 can flow down. Since the direction can be changed, the adjustment can be made easier than with a nail that can be adjusted in all directions with respect to the front of the game board 13 (base plate 60). As a result, the game ball can be easily made to flow down in the direction intended by the coordinator.

Note that the intended direction of the adjuster is, for example, the direction between the opposing first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570 on the side of the secondary path HK1 (direction of arrow L) and the direction on the side of main path SK6 (direction of arrow R). The space between the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570 is made larger than the facing distance, and the game ball flowing down inside the special winning device 13550 flows down to the sub path HK1 or the main path SK6 side (arrow R direction side ), the first path member 13560 and the second path member 135 on the sub-path HK1 side (arrow L direction side)
70, and the game ball flowing down inside the special winning device 13550 flows down to the main path SK6.

Further, the second path member 13570 disposed on the back side is moved in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) by sandwiching the shim member SI with respect to the first path member 13560 disposed on the front side. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the distance between the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570 facing each other. That is, since the second path member 13570 arranged far from the player is moved in the front-rear direction, the first path member 13560 and the first path member 13560 closer to the player are displaced. Second path member 1357
It is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the distance between 0 facing each other. As a result, the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 159, an engaging member 14310 in the fourteenth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment described above, the operation element 315 of the engaging member 310 is formed to protrude toward the bottom wall portion 301 side (back side (arrow B direction side)) of the back case 300. The manipulator 14315 in the fourteenth embodiment is formed such that the projecting distal end surface is inclined toward the base end side. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 159(a) is a rear view of the rear case 300 in the fourteenth embodiment, and FIG.
9(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the rear case 300 taken along line CLIXb--CLIXb in FIG. 159(a).

Note that the back case 14300 in the fourteenth embodiment has a substantially rectangular bottom wall portion 301 in a front view, and four outer edges of the bottom wall portion 301 toward the front, similarly to the back case 300 in the first embodiment. An outer wall portion 302 is provided upright, and the wall portions 301 and 302 form a box shape with one side (front side) open. A rectangular opening 301a is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 301. Through the opening 301a, a third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 2) arranged on the rear surface of the bottom wall portion 301 is visible. It is possible.

In addition, the rear case 14300 in the fourteenth embodiment includes an engaging member 14310 disposed on the front side of the bottom wall portion 301 (the box-shaped open side (arrow F direction side)), and the rear case 14300. The board box 100 (main controller 11
0) is mainly provided.

As shown in FIG. 159, an engaging member 14310 according to the fourteenth embodiment has a crank-like outer shape in a front view, and first pieces 143 extending in directions parallel to each other.
11 and the second piece 312, and the ends of the first piece 14311 and the second piece 312 are connected to each other as the first piece 1
4311 and a third piece 313 connected in a direction orthogonal to the extending direction of the second piece 312 .

The first piece 14311 is on one side opposite to the other side to which the third piece 313 is connected (arrow R direction side)
is formed as an engaging portion with the engaged portion 332 (see FIG. 41(a)) of the fixing member 320, and the vertical direction which is a direction substantially perpendicular to the extending direction of the first piece 14311 (Arrow U-
D direction), and a concave portion 317 recessed in the extending direction (arrow LR direction) of the first piece 14311 from a substantially intermediate position between the two engaging portions 316. and an operator 143 protruding toward the bottom wall portion 301 side (back side (arrow B direction side)) of the back case 300.
15 and.

The manipulator 14315 is formed at the end on the other side (arrow L direction side) of the first piece 14311, and its projecting dimension is set to a value larger than the plate thickness of the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300, and at least It protrudes to the rear side of rear case 14300 (bottom wall portion 301) by a size that can be grasped by an operator's fingers. As a result, the manipulator 14315 can be projected from the second opening 301d of the bottom wall 301, and the protruding portion (tip of the manipulator 14315) can be grasped and operated.

In addition, the projecting tip surface of the manipulator 14315 is on the side of the engaging portion 316 (the other side of the first piece 14311 (
It is formed as an inclined surface 14315a that approaches the base end side of the manipulator 14315 toward the direction of the arrow L). As a result, when the operator operates the manipulator 14315 in the direction (arrow L direction) to release the engagement between the engaging member 14310 and the fixing member 320, the engaging member 14310 and the fixing member 320 are engaged. The force acting in the direction of releasing can be reduced.

That is, the force applied by the operator to operate the manipulator 14315 can be dispersed by the inclined surface 14315a. This makes it difficult to release the engagement between the engaging member 14310 and the fixing member 320 by operating the manipulator 14315 from the rear side of the rear case 300 . the result,
A worker who tries to replace the circuit board box 100 illegally arranged on the fixing member 320 can be prevented from removing the fixing member 320 from the rear case 300 by operating the operator 14315 from the rear side of the rear case 300. .

In addition, the end of the inclined surface 14315a on the engaging portion 316 side
1 on the front side (arrow F direction side). Thereby, the engaging member 14310
The hand of the operator who operates the operating element 14315 can be brought into contact with the inclined surface 14315a for the purpose of releasing the engagement between the and the fixed member 320. As shown in FIG. As a result, a worker who tries to illegally replace the board box 100 arranged on the fixing member 320 by making it difficult to operate the manipulator 14315 operates the manipulator 14315 from the rear side of the rear case 300, Removal of the fixing member 320 from the rear case 300 can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 160(a), the engaging member 15310 in the fifteenth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the operator 315 of the engaging member 310 is
00 is formed to protrude toward the bottom wall portion 301 side (back side (arrow B direction side)) of 00. pivoted on. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 160(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the back case 300 in the fifteenth embodiment. Note that the cross section of FIG. 160(a) corresponds to the cross section of FIG. 159(b).

Note that the rear case 15300 in the fifteenth embodiment has a substantially rectangular bottom wall portion 301 in a front view, and four outer edges of the bottom wall portion 301 toward the front, similarly to the rear case 300 in the first embodiment. An outer wall portion 302 is provided upright, and the wall portions 301 and 302 form a box shape with one side (front side) open. The bottom wall portion 301 has a rectangular opening 301a (see FIG. 5) formed in the center thereof, and the bottom wall portion 30 is opened through the opening 301a.
A third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 2) arranged on the back surface of 1 is made visible.

In addition, the rear case 15300 in the fifteenth embodiment includes an engaging member 15310 disposed on the front side of the bottom wall portion 301 (the box-shaped opening side (arrow F direction side)) and the rear case 15300. The board box 100 (main controller 11
0) is mainly provided with a fixing member 320 (see FIG. 41).

As shown in FIG. 160(a), an engaging member 15310 in the fifteenth embodiment has a crank-like outer shape in front view, and a first piece 15311 and a first piece 15311 extending in directions parallel to each other. Two pieces 312 (see FIG. 41) and its first piece 14311 and second piece 312
and a third piece 313 (see FIG. 41) connecting the ends of the first piece 15311 and the second piece 312 in a direction orthogonal to the extending direction.

The first piece 15311 has an end portion on one side (arrow R direction side) opposite to the other side (arrow L direction side) to which the third piece 313 is connected. 41(a)) and protrudes outward on both sides in the vertical direction (direction of arrows UD), which is a direction substantially orthogonal to the extending direction of the first piece 15311. 316 (see FIG. 41), a concave portion 317 (see FIG. 41) recessed in the extending direction (arrow LR direction) of the first piece 15311 from a substantially intermediate position between the two engaging portions 316; It mainly includes an operator 15315 inserted through the second opening 301d of the rear case 300 and a bearing 15319 on which the operator 15315 is pivotally supported.

The bearing portion 15319 protrudes from the first piece 15311 on the other side (arrow L direction side) to which the third piece 313 of the first piece 15311 is connected. Further, the bearing portion 15319 is attached to the operation element 1 described later.
A recess is formed into which a columnar shaft member 15315c is inserted, with the 5315 inserted in the direction of gravity (direction of arrows UD).

The manipulator 15315 is formed in a rod shape, and has a through hole 15315b penetrating in the gravitational direction at the end on the first piece 15311 side, and a shaft member 1531 inserted into the through hole 15315b.
5c.

Therefore, the manipulator 15315 is held so as to be rotatably displaceable with respect to the first piece 15311 by inserting the shaft member 15315c inserted into the through hole 15315b into the concave portion of the bearing portion 15319 . Further, the rotating shaft (shaft member 15315c) of the manipulator 15315 is the first
It is arranged on the front side of the piece 15311 . As a result, the rightward (clockwise) rotation of the manipulator 15315 in the state shown in FIG. Rotation in the left direction (counterclockwise) can be allowed.

Therefore, when the operator operates the manipulator 15315 in the direction of releasing the engagement between the engaging member 15310 and the fixed member 320 (direction of arrow L) (the manipulator 153 in the state shown in FIG. 160(a)).
15 counterclockwise), the force acting in the direction (arrow L direction) to release the engagement between the engaging member 15310 and the fixing member 320 can be reduced. As a result, the operator 15315 is operated from the rear side of the rear case 300 to engage the engaging member 15310 and the fixing member 3 .
20 can be made difficult to release. As a result, a player who attempts to illegally replace the board box 100 arranged on the fixed member 320 can operate the operator 15315 from the rear side of the rear case 300 to remove the fixed member 320 from the rear case 300. can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 160(b), the engaging member 15310 in the sixteenth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the operation of sliding the engaging member 310 is performed by the manipulator 315 has been described.
This is done by manipulating the end of piece 16311 . In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 160(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the rear case 300 in the sixteenth embodiment. Note that the cross section of FIG. 160(b) corresponds to the cross section of FIG. 160(a). Further, the rear case 16300 in the sixteenth embodiment has a substantially rectangular bottom wall portion 301 in a front view and four outer edges of the bottom wall portion 301 toward the front, similarly to the rear case 300 in the first embodiment. An outer wall portion 302 is provided upright, and the wall portions 301 and 302 form a box shape with one side (front side) open. The bottom wall portion 301 has a rectangular opening 301a (see FIG. 5) at the center thereof.
) is formed, and through the opening 301a, the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 2) arranged on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 301 can be visually recognized.

Further, the rear case 16300 in the sixteenth embodiment includes an engaging member 16310 disposed on the front side of the bottom wall portion 301 (box-shaped opening side (arrow F direction side)), and a rear case 16300. The board box 100 (main controller 1
10) is mainly provided with a fixing member 320 (see FIG. 41).

As shown in FIG. 160(b), an engaging member 16310 in the sixteenth embodiment has a crank-like outer shape in a front view, and a first piece 16311 and a second piece 16311 extending in directions parallel to each other. Two pieces 312 (see FIG. 41) and its first piece 16311 and second piece 312
and a third piece 313 (see FIG. 41) connecting the ends of the first piece 16311 and the second piece 312 in a direction orthogonal to the extending direction. Moreover, the engaging member 1 in the sixteenth embodiment
6310 can be slidably displaced by a finger inserted through the second opening 301d formed in the rear case 300 from the rear side.

The first piece 16311 has an end portion on one side (arrow R direction side) opposite to the other side (arrow L direction side) to which the third piece 313 is connected. 41) and protrudes outward on both sides in the vertical direction (direction of arrows UD), which is a direction substantially perpendicular to the extending direction of the first piece 311. 41), and a concave portion 317 (see FIG. 41) recessed in the extending direction (arrow LR direction) of the first piece 16311 from a substantially intermediate position between the two engaging portions 316. Prepare.

As shown in FIG. 160(b), when the engaging portion 316 of the engaging member 16310 and the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320 are engaged with each other, the other side (arrow L direction side) of the first piece 16311 is is arranged horizontally outside the opening of the second opening 301d. Therefore, the engagement member 16
310 and the fixing member 320 are disengaged from each other (in the direction of the arrow L).
When operating the 6310, with a finger inserted from the second opening 301d of the rear case 300,
It is possible to make it difficult to displace the engaging member 16310 in the direction of releasing the engagement between the engaging member 16310 and the fixing member 320 . As a result, the board box 1 arranged on the fixing member 320
00, from the rear side of the rear case 300, the engaging member 1631
0 to remove the fixing member 320 from the rear case 300.

Next, with reference to FIG. 161, the rear case 17300 in the seventeenth embodiment will be described. In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the manipulator 315 of the engaging member 310 protrudes from the second opening 301d of the rear case 300 has been described. An operating element 315 protruding from is covered with a part of the rear case at a predetermined position. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the detailed description is abbreviate|omitted.

161(a) is a rear view of the rear case 17300 in the seventeenth embodiment, and FIG. 161(b) is a rear case 173 taken along line CLXIb-CLXIb in FIG. 161(a).
00 is a cross-sectional view.

As shown in FIG. 161, the back case 17300 in the seventeenth embodiment includes a bottom wall portion 17301 which is substantially rectangular in front view, and outer wall portions 302 erected from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 17301 toward the front. and is formed into a box-like shape with one side (front side) opened by the respective wall portions 17301 and 302 . The bottom wall portion 17301 has a rectangular opening 301 in the center thereof.
An opening a is formed, and the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 2) arranged on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 17301 is visible through the opening 301a.

In addition, the rear case 17300 includes projecting portions 301b projecting from two locations on the front side of the bottom wall portion 17301, a first opening portion 301c opening at a position facing the fixing member 320, and an engaging member 310. It includes a second opening 301d that opens at a position facing each other, and a covering portion 17301e that covers the rear surface of the second opening 301d on the first opening 301c side (arrow R direction side).

The covering portion 17301e is located on the first opening 301c side (arrow R direction side) of the second opening 301d.
is erected from the end of the to the back side (arrow B direction side). In addition, the covering portion 17301e has a bent portion 17301e1 whose standing tip portion is bent toward the inner side of the opening of the second opening portion 301d in a rear view. As a result, the covering portion 17301e is located on the side of the first opening 301c (
It is formed in a box shape that is open on the opposite side (the arrow R direction side) and the opposite side (the arrow L direction side).

Also, the standing distance of the covering portion 17301e (from the rear surface of the bottom wall portion 17301c to the bent portion 1730
1e1) is set larger than the projecting dimension of the manipulator 315 projecting from the bottom wall portion 17301c. Furthermore, the covering portion 17301e is the bent portion 17 in a rear view.
The lateral dimension of 301e1 (in the direction of arrows LR) is set larger than the lateral dimension of manipulator 315 when viewed from the rear.

As a result, when the engaging portion 316 of the engaging member 310 and the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320 are engaged with each other, the manipulator 315 is positioned inside the covering member 17301e as shown in FIG. 161(b). placed in Therefore, the direction (
When the operator operates the engaging member 310 in the direction of the arrow L), it is possible to make it difficult for the operator to grasp the manipulator 315 from the rear side of the rear case 17300 . Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the engaging member 310 from being displaced in the direction of releasing the engagement between the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 (arrow L direction side). As a result, an operator (player) who attempts to illegally replace the circuit board box 100 arranged on the fixing member 320 may
0 to prevent the fixing member 320 from being removed from the rear case 17300 .

Next, referring to FIGS. 162 to 164, the back case 183 in the eighteenth embodiment
00 will be explained. In the first embodiment described above, the engaging member 310 is moved in the linear direction (arrow L-
(R direction)), the engaging member 18310 in the eighteenth embodiment is rotationally displaced with respect to the rear case 18300. As shown in FIG. In addition, the same reference numerals are given to the same parts as those of the above-described embodiments, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIGS. 162 and 163, the rear case 183 in the eighteenth embodiment
00 configuration and the operation of the engagement member 18310 will now be described. Figure 162(a) and Figure 1
63(a) is a front view of the rear case 18300 in the eighteenth embodiment, FIG.
163(b) are rear views of the rear case 18300. FIG. Note that FIG. 162 (
163(a) and 163(b), the engagement member 18310 and the fixing member 18320 are shown in FIGS. 163(a) and 163(b). is shown disengaged.

As shown in FIGS. 162 and 163, the rear case 18300 in the eighteenth embodiment has a substantially rectangular bottom wall portion 18301 when viewed from the front, and the four outer edges of the bottom wall portion 18301 are erected toward the front. An outer wall portion 18302 is provided, and the wall portions 18301 and 18302 form a box shape with one side (front side) open. In addition, the rear case 18300 includes an engaging member 18310 arranged on the front side of the bottom wall portion 18301 (the box-shaped opening side (arrow F direction side)) and an engaging member 18310 arranged on the rear side of the rear case 18300. and a fixing member 18320 for fixing the board box 100 (main controller 110).

The bottom wall portion 18301 has an opening 301a which is rectangular in front view and formed in the center thereof. It is said that In addition, the bottom wall portion 18301 includes a first opening portion 18301c that opens at a position facing the fixing member 18320, and a protruding portion located below the first opening portion 18301c (in the direction of arrow D) and protruding to the front side. 18301b;

The first opening 18301c is an opening for inserting an engaged portion 18332 of a fixing member 18320, which will be described later, and is formed in a shape larger than the engaged portion 18332 in front view. As a result, after disposing the accessory device (rotation unit 700) inside the back case 18300, the engaging portion of the fixing member 18320 can be arranged on the front side of the back case 18300 from the back side of the back case 18300. can.

The protruding portion 18301b is a member that pivotally supports an engaging member 18310, which will be described later.
8301b is projected in a columnar shape from the front. Further, a hole for screwing a screw is recessed in the projecting tip surface of the projecting portion 18301b. As a result, the engagement member 18310 is connected to the rear case 183
00, the engaging member 1831 is screwed into the projecting portion 18301b.
0 can be restricted from coming out of the projecting portion 18301b.

The outer wall portion 18302 extends laterally (arrow L
−R direction). The opening 18302a is formed on the rotational trajectory of the engaging member 18310, which will be described later. Accordingly, the engaging member 18310 can be protruded outside the rear case 18300 by rotating the engaging member 18310 after the engaging member 18310 is arranged inside the rear case 18300 .

The fixing member 18320 is composed of an intervening member 18330 that engages with an engaging member 18310 to be described later, and a pivot member 340 that is fastened to the intervening member 18330 .

The interposed member 18330 is formed in a box-like shape with an open front side, and has a locking portion 18331 protruding from the side surface on the other side (arrow L direction side) and the rear case from the side surface on one side (arrow R direction side). 300
An engaged portion 18332 protruding to the side and formed in a frame shape, an insertion hole 333 (see FIG. 39(b)) having a circular opening in the bottom surface of the box (the side surface in the direction of arrow B), and projecting protrusion 33
4 and , are mainly provided.

The locking portion 18331 has an opening for engaging the other side (arrow L direction side) of the fixing member 320 with the bottom wall portion 18301, and the opening extends from the periphery of the first opening portion 18301c to have an L-shaped cross section. It is engaged with the bottom wall portion 18301 by inserting the projecting wall 18301c1 projecting from the bottom wall portion 18301c1.

As a result, when the interposing member 18330 (fixing member 18320) is arranged in the rear case 18300, the protruding wall 18301c1 is inserted into the engaging portion 18331 of the interposing member 18330, and the other side (arrow L) of the interposing member 18330 direction side) can be locked to the rear case 18300 .

The engaged portion 18332 is a portion that engages with the engaging member 18310 and is attached to the rear case 183.
The projection dimension to the 00 side (arrow F direction side) is
8310, and the distance dimension from the inner surface of the front side (direction of arrow F) of the enclosed space to the front surface of the bottom wall portion 18301 is the distance from the front surface of the engaging member 18310 to the bottom wall portion 1830.
It is set larger than the distance to the front of 1. As a result, the space surrounded by the engaged portion 18332 and the engaging member 18310 are arranged to overlap each other in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction).

The engaging member 18310 is formed in a substantially L-shape when viewed from the front. and a first piece 18311 formed by

The second piece 18312 is provided with a shaft support hole 18312a opening in a circular shape in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) at the end opposite to the side where the first piece 18311 is formed. Axle support hole 18312a
is a hole into which the projecting portion 18301b of the rear case 18300 described above is inserted.

The first piece 18311 extends in an arc around the axis of the shaft support hole 18312a. As a result, the displacement area of the first piece 18311 can be minimized when the engaging member 18310 is rotated about the axis of the pivot hole 18312a. In addition, the first piece 18311 has an engaging portion 18316 protruding radially from the pivot hole 18312a at the end opposite to the connection side with the second piece 18312, and engaging portions 316 at the two locations. from the approximate middle position of the first piece 18
and a recess 18317 that is recessed in the extending direction of 311 .

The two engaging portions 18316 are formed in a substantially triangular outer shape when viewed from the front. Also,
One engaging portion 18316 of the two engaging portions 18316 has a diameter of the first piece 18311 that increases from the end opposite to the connecting portion with the second piece 18312 toward the connecting portion with the second piece 18312 . It is formed in an outer shape that protrudes outward in the direction. The other engaging portion 18316 of the two engaging portions 18316
is formed in an outer shape protruding inward in the radial direction of the first piece 18311 toward the connecting portion side with the second piece 18312 from the end opposite to the connecting portion with the second piece 18312 .

The recessed portion 18317 is formed by notching the first piece 18311 in the thickness direction.
From the end of the piece 18311 opposite to the connection side with the second piece 18312 , it is recessed along the extending direction of the first piece 18311 toward the connection side with the second piece 18312 . Therefore, the first piece 18
The end of 311 is split into two. As a result, the end of the first piece 18311 on the side opposite to the connection side with the second piece 18312 can be elastically deformed more easily than the connection side with the second piece 18312, and the engaging member 18310 can be connected to the fixing member 18320. It can be easily engaged.

Next, engagement between the engaging member 18310 and the fixing member 18320 will be described. Figure 16
3, the interposition member 18330 and the pivot member 340 are fastened together by screws inserted from the interposition member 18330 side before being engaged with the engaging member 18310 .

In addition, the engaging member 18310 is attached to the projecting portion 1830 of the rear case 18300 as described above.
1b, and the connecting portion between the first piece 18311 and the second piece 18312 is
It is disposed so as to protrude from the opening 18302a of the rear case 18300. As shown in FIG.

The center of gravity of the engaging member 18310 pivotally supported by the rear case 18300 is the rear case 1 .
8300 is positioned closer to the opening 18302a than the protruding portion 18301b of the rear case 18300, and in a state in which no external force acts, the connecting portion between the first piece 18311 and the second piece 18312 is pushed by gravity to the opening of the rear case 18300. A force is applied to the engaging member 18310 to rotate in the direction of protruding from the portion 18302a. Thereby, when the engagement between the engaging member 18310 and the fixing member 18320 is incomplete, the engaging member 18310 is protruded to the outside of the rear case 18300, and the engagement between the engaging member 18310 and the fixing member 18320 is performed. It is possible to prevent forgetting to match.

The interposed member 18330 and the pivot member 340 (fixed member 18320) in the fastened state are
A protruding wall 18301c1 projecting from the periphery of the first opening 18301c is inserted into the locking portion 18331 of the interposition member 18330, and the left side (arrow L direction side) of the fixing member 18320 in front view is locked to the rear case 18300. be done. In this case, the engaged portion 1833 of the fixing member 18320
2 is inserted inside the first opening 18301c, and the space surrounded by the engaged portion 18332 is disposed at a position facing the tip of the first piece 18311 of the engaging member 18310. As shown in FIG.

Next, the operator who engages the engaging member 18310 with the fixing member 18320
By pushing the engaging member 18310 (the connecting portion between the first piece 18311 and the second piece 18312) protruding from the opening 18302a of the 8300 into the rear case 18300 (direction of arrow R1) (see FIG. 163), the engaging member 18310 is engaged. The joining member 18310 is rotated around the protrusion 18301b.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 162, the tip of the engaging member 18310 will
2 can be inserted into the internal space. In this case, the spaced dimension between the outer ends of the two engaging portions 18316 is set larger than the vertical opening dimension of the internal space of the engaged portion 18332, but the recessed portion 18317 of the engaging member 18310 Since the first piece 18311 is easily elastically deformed, the end of the first piece 18311 is elastically deformed inside the concave portion 18317 to adjust the distance between the outer ends of the two engaging portions 18316 to the cover. The end portion of the first piece 18311 can be inserted inside the engaged portion 18332 by making it smaller than the vertical opening dimension of the internal space of the engaging portion 18332 .

In addition, since the connecting portion between the first piece 18311 and the second piece 18312 of the engaging member 18310 is inserted inside the opening 18302a of the rear case 18300, the engaging member 18310
However, it is possible to prevent the engaging member 18310 from being operated from the outside of the rear case 18300 in the engaged state. As a result, the engaging member 18310 is illegally operated, and the fixing member 183
It is possible to prevent the board box 100 (main controller 110) connected to 20 from being replaced with an illegal board.

Next, disengagement between the engaging member 18310 and the fixing member 18320 in the eighteenth embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 163(a), the first opening 18301c has a substantially L-shape in front view, and the recessed portion 18317 of the engaging member 18310 in the engaged state with the engaged portion 18332 of the fixing member 18320. can be operated from the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the rear case 1300 through the first opening 18301c.

Therefore, the outer portion of the recessed portion 18317 of the engaging member 18310 is moved to the recessed portion 18 by a special tool or the like.
By elastically deforming the concave portion 317, the engagement between the engaging portion 18316 of the engaging member 18310 and the engaged portion 18332 is released. In this disengaged state, the engaging member 18310
from the internal space engaged by the engaged portion 18332 (in the direction of arrow L), and then the deformation of the engaging member 310 is restored so that the engaging member 18310 and the engaged portion 1833
2 can be disengaged.

The gap between the outer portion of the recess 18317 of the engaging member 18310 and the first opening 18301c is preferably formed as small as possible. This makes it impossible to insert the fingers of a person who removes the fixing member 18320 from the rear case 300, and allows the insertion of a dedicated tool. As a result, only a worker with a dedicated tool can replace the board box 100 (main controller 110), and it is possible to prevent the board box 100 from being replaced with an illegal board box 100. FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 164, the case where the engaging member 18310 is forgotten to be engaged with the fixing member 18320 will be described. FIG. 164(a) is a schematic top view of the game board 13, and FIG.
64(b) is a schematic top view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In addition, FIG.164(a) and FIG.164
(b) shows a state in which the engaging member 18310 is forgotten to be engaged with the engaged portion 18332 . 164(a) and 164(b) illustrate a state in which one piece on the upper side of the outer frame 11, which is formed in a frame shape in a front view, is removed.

As described above, when the engagement between the engaging member 18310 and the engaged portion 18332 is incomplete, the engaging member 18310 can be protruded outside the rear case 18300 by gravity. In this case, the engaging member 183 in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) of the game board 13
10 to the right (arrow R direction) end of the rear case 18300 LR
1 (see FIG. 164(a)) is set larger than the lateral dimension LR2 (see FIG. 164(b)) of the inner side in the lateral direction of the outer frame 11 on which the game board 13 is arranged. As a result, when the engaging member 18310 and the fixing member 18320 are not engaged and the game board 13 is to be inserted into the outer frame 11, the rear side of the engaging member 18310 hits the front of the outer frame 11. can be brought into contact. As a result, when the engaging member 18310 and the fixing member 18320 are not engaged,
By suppressing the game board 13 from being arranged on the outer frame 11, the engaging member 18310 and the fixing member 18
Forgetting to engage with 320 can be suppressed.

165 and 166, the engaging member 1931 in the nineteenth embodiment
0 will be explained. In the eighteenth embodiment, the engaging member 18310 is arranged inside the outer frame 11 to prevent the engaging member 18310 from being illegally operated. By restricting the rotation of the engaging member 18310, unauthorized operation of the engaging member 18310 is suppressed. In addition, the same reference numerals are given to the same parts as those of the above-described embodiments, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 165 is an exploded perspective front view of the engaging member 19310 in the nineteenth embodiment. 166(a) is a front view of the rear case 18300, and FIG. 166(b) is a cross-sectional view of the one-way 19350 along line CLXVIb-CLXVIb in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 165, the engaging member 19310 in the nineteenth embodiment is formed in a substantially L-shape when viewed from the front. and a first piece 18311 formed by bending from one end of 19312 .

The second piece 19312 has a circular fitting hole 19312b opening in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) at the end opposite to the side where the first piece 18311 is formed. The fitting hole 19312b is a hole into which the one-way 19350, which will be described later, is fitted.
It is formed to have substantially the same inner diameter as the 9351.

The one-way 19350 includes an inner ring 19352 having a cam surface formed on its outer peripheral surface, and its inner ring 19352.
9352, and a plurality of springs 19353 and rollers 19354 disposed between the outer ring 19351 and the inner ring 19352 (see FIG. 166(b)). When the inner ring 19352 tries to rotate in one direction with respect to 19351, the contact surface pressure between the cam surface and the roller 19354 increases, acting as resistance to transmit power to the outer ring, causing the inner ring to rotate in the other direction with respect to the outer ring 19351. This is a cam-type clutch that, when rotated, lowers the contact surface pressure between the cam surface and the roller 10354 and slides to cut off power transmission.
A detailed description of the one-way 19350 will be given later.

Further, an operator 19360 is inserted in the center of the inner ring 19352 of the one-way 19350 . The operator 19360 includes an operation portion 19361 arranged on the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the rear case 19300 and an insertion portion 19362 protruding on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the operation portion 19361. Prepare the Lord.

The operation part 19361 is a part where an operator operates the operation element 19360 from the rear side of the rear case 19300, and is formed in a circular shape, and its outer shape is formed to be larger than an opening through which an insertion part 19362, which will be described later, is inserted. . As a result, the operator 19360 is
0, the operating portion 19361 can be prevented from coming out of the rear case 19300 to the front side (arrow F direction side).

The insertion portion 19362 is formed in a columnar shape coaxially with the axis of the operation portion 19361 and protrudes toward the front side (arrow F direction side). In addition, the insertion portion 19362 has a projecting wall 19362a projecting radially from its outer peripheral surface.

The protruding wall 19362a is attached to the inner ring 1935 of the one-way 19350 with respect to the insertion portion 19362.
2 is an engaging portion that prevents idle rotation of the inner ring 19352 and a recess 1935 formed in the inner ring 19352
2a is inserted. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the rotational force acting on the manipulator 19360 from being non-transmitted to the inner ring 19352 .

Furthermore, a concave portion having a circular shape when viewed from the front is formed on the projecting distal end surface of the insertion portion 19362. By screwing a screw into the concave portion from the front side to the back side, the one-way 19350 can be inserted. An operator 19360 can be connected to the .

Next, with reference to FIG. 166, the arrangement state of rear case 19300 and engaging member 19310 will be described. The rear case 19300 includes a bottom wall portion 19301 that is substantially rectangular in front view, and an outer wall portion 302 that is erected from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 19301 toward the front. It is formed in a box-like shape with one side (front side) opened by the.
In addition, the rear case 19300 is located on the front side of the bottom wall portion 19301 (open side formed in a box shape).
an engaging member 19310 disposed on the arrow F direction side)), a fixing member 18320 disposed on the rear side of the rear case 19300 and fixing the board box 100 (main controller 110),
Prepare.

The bottom wall portion 19301 has an opening 301a which is rectangular in front view and formed in the center thereof. It is said that Further, the bottom wall portion 19301 has a first opening portion 18301c that opens at a position facing the fixing member 18320, and a portion below the first opening portion 18301c (arrow D
direction), is opened in the front-rear direction, and inserts 1936 of the operator 19360 described above inside.
an opening (not shown) into which 2 is inserted.

After disposing the engaging member 19310 on the front side of the bottom wall portion 10301 in a state in which the one-way 19350 is viewed inside the fitting hole 19312b, the engaging member 19310 is inserted into the operation element 19360 from the rear side of the rear case 19300. The insertion portion 19362 of the rear case 1930
It is disposed on the bottom wall portion 19301 by inserting it inside the inner ring 19352 of the one-way 19350 through the 0 opening.

Next, the operation of the one-way 19350 will be explained. One-way 1 as described above
9350 is switched between a case where power transmission to the outer ring 19351 is permitted and a case where it is cut off in one direction and the other direction of rotation of the inner ring 19352 .

First, the case where the power of the inner ring 19352 is transmitted to the outer ring will be described. Figure 166 (
b), when the inner ring 19352 is rotated in one direction (arrow LK direction (see FIG. 166(b))), the roller 193 is positioned between the cam surface of the inner ring 19352 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer ring 19351.
54 is pinched, the contact of the roller 19354 acts as a resistance, and the power of the inner ring 19352 is transferred to the outer ring 1
9351. In this case, one direction of rotation is set in a direction that engages the engaging member 19310 with the fixing member 18320 .

Next, the case where the power to the inner ring 19352 is interrupted will be described. When the inner ring 19352 is rotated in the other direction (arrow RK direction (see FIG. 166(b))), the roller 19354 is displaced radially inward of the inner ring 19352 due to the resistance of the roller 19354 coming into contact with the inner peripheral surface of the outer ring 19351 . As a result, the contact surface pressure between the inner peripheral surface of the outer ring 19351 and the roller 19354 is reduced, and the roller 19354 slides on the outer ring 19351 to interrupt power transmission. In this case, the rotation direction of the other direction is set to the direction in which the engaging member 19310 is disengaged from the fixing member 18320 .

As a result, the operator 1 can be
9360 can be rotated to engage engagement member 19310 with securing member 18320 . Furthermore, from the state where the engaging member 19310 and the fixing member 18320 are engaged, the operator 19 is
360 to release the engagement between the engaging member 19310 and the fixing member 18320 is restricted. As a result, the engaging member 19310 (manipulator 19360) is illegally operated,
It is possible to prevent the board box 100 (main controller 110) connected to the fixing member 18320 from being replaced with an illegal board.

167 to 169, the engagement member 2031 in the twentieth embodiment
0 will be explained. In the first embodiment, the movement of the engagement member 310 is caused by the rotation unit 70
Although the case of being regulated by screws inserted into the rear base 720 of No. 0 has been described,
In the 0 embodiment, when the engaging member 20310 is engaged with the fixing member 320, the engaging member 20
310 movement is formed on the rear base 20720 of the rotation unit 20700 engaging portion 20
724a is regulated. In addition, the same reference numerals are given to the same parts as those of the above-described embodiments, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIGS. 167 and 168, the engaging member 2031 in the twentieth embodiment
0 and rotation unit 20700 will be described. FIG. 167 is an exploded perspective view of the rear case 20300 and rotating unit 20700 in the twentieth embodiment. Figure 168(a)
168B is a front view of the engaging member 20310, and FIG. 168B is a rear view of the rotating unit 20700 and the engaging member 20310. FIG.

Note that the back case 20300 in the twentieth embodiment has a substantially rectangular bottom wall portion 301 in a front view and four outer edges of the bottom wall portion 301 toward the front, similarly to the back case 300 in the first embodiment. An outer wall portion 302 is provided upright, and the wall portions 301 and 302 form a box shape with one side (front side) open. The bottom wall portion 301 has a rectangular opening 301a (see FIG. 5) formed in the center thereof, and the bottom wall portion 30 is opened through the opening 301a.
A third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 2) arranged on the back surface of 1 is made visible.

In addition, the rear case 20300 in the twentieth embodiment includes an engaging member 20310 disposed on the front side of the bottom wall portion 301 (box-shaped opening side (arrow F direction side)), and the rear case 20300. The board box 100 (main controller 11
0) is mainly provided. Further, a rotating unit 20700 is arranged in front of the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 20300 in the twentieth embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 167 and 168, an engaging member 20310 disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 20300 in the twentieth embodiment has a crank-like shape in front view. , and the first piece 31 extending in directions parallel to each other
1 and second piece 20312, and a third piece 313 connecting the ends of the first piece 311 and the second piece 20312 in a direction orthogonal to the extending direction of the first piece 311 and the second piece 20312. be done.

The first piece 311 and the second piece 20312 are formed with elongated sliding grooves 314 extending in their extending directions.
It is slidable in the extension direction of 0312 (arrow LR direction).

In addition, the second piece 20312 has a recess 20312c recessed on the side surface parallel to the sliding direction of the engaging member 20310. As shown in FIG. The concave portion 20312c is a concave portion into which the tip of the engaging portion 20724a of the rear base 20720 of the rotation unit 20700 described later is inserted.
It is formed in a shape substantially the same as the outer shape of 24a.

More specifically, the recess 20312c has a dimension SH1 (see FIG. 168(a)) to the end on the side opposite to the side of the second piece 20312 connected to the third piece 313 (direction of arrow L). Dimension SH2 (Fig. 168 (
b) is set to be substantially the same as the reference). The recess 20312c is recessed in the shape of a right-angled triangle when viewed from the front, and the right-angled portion is set on the side of the second piece 20312 connected to the third piece 313 (arrow R direction side).

Rotating unit 20700 rotates through opening 301 of bottom wall 301 of rear case 20300 .
A rectangular rear base 20720 arranged on the right side of the lower part of a (in the direction of arrow R), and a rotor 800 arranged in front of the rear base 20720 (in the direction of arrow F). 9
3), and the player can visually recognize an effect of rotationally displacing the rotating body 800 via a light-transmitting center frame 86 provided on the game board 13 .

The back base 20720 is a plate member that connects the back of the ball cradle 710 and the back of the decoration unit 750 (the arrow B direction side), and is arranged on the back of the ball cradle 710 and the decoration unit 750 . In addition, the rear base 20720 has an erecting wall 20724 erected from the rear surface.

The standing wall 20724 extends in a shape surrounding the outer edge of the engaging member 20310 arranged on the rear case 20300 . Also, the erected wall 20724 may
312c, and has an engaging portion 20724a whose tip is inserted into the recess 20312c.

The engaging portion 20724a protrudes from the erected wall 20724 in the direction (arrow R direction) in which the engaging member 20310 is engaged with the fixing member 320, and is erected in the direction orthogonal to the sliding direction of the engaging member 20310. It is formed with a predetermined gap from the wall 20724 . As a result, the engaging portion 2
By lowering the rigidity of 0724a, it is possible to easily elastically deform the engaging portion 20724a. Also,
A region in which the engaging portion 20724a can be elastically deformed can be secured by the gap between the standing wall 20724 and the engaging portion 20724a.

In addition, the engaging portion 20724a has a bent portion 2 that bends toward the engaging member 20310 at the protruding distal end portion.
0724a1, and the front view shape of the bent portion 20724a1 is the concave portion 2031 described above.
It is formed in a triangular shape having substantially the same shape as 2c. As a result, the engaging member 20310 is positioned inside the concave portion 20312c of the engaging member 20310 before being engaged with the fixing member 320.
0724a1 is placed. Therefore, the engaging member 20310 is moved in its displacement direction (arrows LR
direction) (see FIG. 168(b)).

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the engaging member 20310 from vibrating with respect to the rear case 20300 due to a force such as vibration or shaking and moving in the engaging direction (arrow R direction) with the fixing member 320 . Therefore, before fixing member 320 is arranged on rear case 20300, the position of engaging member 20310 is displaced, and when fixing member 320 is arranged on rear case 20300, fixing member 32
0 of the engaged portion 332 can be prevented from coming into contact with the engaging member 20310 . In other words,
When arranging the fixing member 320 to the rear case 20300, the engaged portion 33 of the fixing member 320
2 (see FIG. 167). As a result, it is not necessary to operate the engaging member 20310 in the direction of releasing the engagement with the fixing member 320, so that workability when engaging the engaging member 20310 and the fixing member 320 can be improved. .

Next, with reference to FIG. 169, the engaging member 20310 and the rotating unit 20700 in the state where the engaging member 20310 and the fixing member 320 are engaged will be described. Figure 169
(a) is a rear view of the rotating unit 20700 and the engaging member 20310, FIG.
b) is a rear view of the rear case 20300. FIG. 169(a) and 169(b)
) shows a state in which the engaging member 20310 and the fixing member 20320 are engaged. In addition, in FIG. 169(b), part of the engaging member 20310 and the outer shape of the standing wall 20724 are illustrated with chain lines.

As shown in FIG. 169, the operator 3 is removed from the rear side of the rear case 20300 (arrow B direction side).
15 is operated so that the engaging member 20310 is arranged on the left side of the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 20300 (in the direction of the arrow L) in a front view.
1 to the right side in front view (arrow R direction side), the concave portion 20 of the engaging member 20310
The bent portion 20724a1 disposed inside the 312c is pushed out into the recess 20312c by the inclined surface of the recess 20312c.

Here, as described above, the recessed portion 20312c has a distance dimension SH1 (see FIG. 168(a)) to the end of the second piece 20312 on the side opposite to the connection side with the third piece 313 (arrow L direction side). However, the dimension SH2 (
168(b)), the engaging member 20310 is set to the fixing member 320.
When the third piece 31 of the second piece 20312 of the engaging member 20310 is displaced to the position where it engages with
3 and the opposite side (arrow L direction side) are connected to the bent portion 20724a1 and the engaging member 20
310 are arranged at positions adjacent to each other in the direction of displacement (direction of arrows LR). Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the engaging member 20310 from being improperly displaced in the direction of releasing the engagement with the fixing member 320 (direction of arrow L).

Note that, as in the first embodiment, the engaging member 20310 has an engaging portion 316 that is attached to the fixed member 3 .
By being hooked (engaged) with the engaged portion 332 of 20, the displacement of the engaging member 20310 in the direction of releasing the engagement with the fixing member 320 is restricted. However, since the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320 is inserted through the first opening 301c of the rear case 300, the engaged portion 3
32 and the engaging portion 316 may be illegally released through the first opening 301c.

In contrast, in the twentieth embodiment, the displacement of the engaging member 20310 in the direction of releasing the engagement with the fixing member 320 is controlled by the engaging portion 316 of the engaging member 20310 engaging with the fixing member 320 .
Since the end on the opposite side can be regulated by contacting the bent portion 20724a1, an unauthorized object may be inserted through the first opening 301c, and the end of the engaging member 20310 and the bent portion 20724a
1 can be suppressed from being disengaged. As a result, the engaging member 20310 and the fixing member 3
20 is illegally released and the board box 100 (main controller 110) connected to the fixing member 320 is replaced with an illegal board.

Note that the fixing member 320 and the engaging member 20310 are separated by removing the rotating unit 20700 disposed inside the rear case 20300 (bottom wall portion 301) from the rear case 20300, and connecting the ends of the engaging member 20310 and the bent portion. 20724a1, the end of the first piece 311 of the engaging member 20310 is elastically deformed, and the end of the engaging member 20310 is pulled out from the internal space of the engaged portion 332, thereby separating both. can be disengaged.

Therefore, when removing the fixing member 320 from the rear case 20300, it is necessary to remove the rotation unit 20700 from the front side of the rear case 20300.
It is possible to prevent the board box 100 (main controller 110) connected to the fixing member 320 from being illegally disengaged from the fixing member 320 and replaced with an illegal board.

Furthermore, as described above, the engaging member 20310 is bent in a crank-like shape when viewed from the front. Feeding to the end of the piece 20312 can be restricted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an illegal object inserted from the first piece 311 side from being accurately sent to the engaging portion between the second piece 20312 and the bent portion 20724a1. As a result, it is possible to prevent the board box 100 (main controller 110) connected to the fixing member 320 from being illegally disengaged from the engaging member 20310 and the fixing member 320 and being replaced with an illegal board. .

Next, referring to FIGS. 170 to 173, rotation unit 21 in the twenty-first embodiment
700 will be described. In the first embodiment, the rear base 72 of the rotation unit 700
Although the case where the movement of the engaging member 310 is restricted by the screw inserted through 0 has been described,
In the twenty-first embodiment, the movement of the engaging member 310 is restricted by inserting the first piece 311 into the insertion portion 21724b formed in the rear base 21720 of the rotating unit 21700. FIG. In addition, the same reference numerals are given to the same parts as those of the above-described embodiments, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 170 and 171, the overall configuration of the engaging member 310 and rotating unit 21700 in the twenty-first embodiment will be described. FIG. 170 is an exploded perspective view of the rear case 300 and rotating unit 21700 in the twenty-first embodiment. Figure 171 (a
) is a rear view of the rotating unit 21700 and the engaging member 310, and FIG.
FIG. 171(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the rotation unit 21700 taken along line CLXXIb-CLXXIb of FIG. 171(a).

Note that the back case 21300 in the twenty-first embodiment has a substantially rectangular bottom wall portion 301 in a front view, and four outer edges of the bottom wall portion 301 toward the front, similarly to the back case 300 in the first embodiment. An outer wall portion 302 is provided upright, and the wall portions 301 and 302 form a box shape with one side (front side) open. A rectangular opening 301a is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 301. Through the opening 301a, a third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 2) arranged on the rear surface of the bottom wall portion 301 is visible. It is possible.

Further, the rear case 21300 in the twenty-first embodiment includes an engaging member 310 arranged on the front side of the bottom wall portion 301 (the box-shaped open side (arrow F direction side)), and the rear case 21
300 on the back side (arrow B direction side), and board box 100 (main controller 110)
and a fixing member 320 for fixing the . Furthermore, a rotating unit 21700 is arranged in front of the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 21300 in the twenty-first embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 170 and 171, a rotating unit 21700 in the twenty-first embodiment
A rear base 21720 having a rectangular shape in front view and arranged on the right side (arrow R direction side) of the lower side (arrow D direction side) of the opening 301a of the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300; A rotating body 800 (see FIG. 93) arranged on the front side of the base 21720 is provided, and an effect of rotationally displacing the rotating body 800 via a light-transmissive center frame 86 arranged on the game board 13 is provided. It can be visually recognized by the player.

The back base 21720 is a plate member that connects the back side of the ball bearing base 710 and the back side of the decoration unit 750 , and is arranged on the back side of the ball bearing base 710 and the decoration unit 750 . In addition, the rear base 21720 has an erecting wall 21724 erected on its rear surface.

The standing wall 21724 extends in a shape surrounding the outer edge of the engaging member 310 in the state of being arranged on the rear case 300 . Also, the standing wall 21724 is configured so that the engagement member 310 is attached to the rear case 30
0 (the engagement member 310 and the fixing member 320
), toward the concave portion 317 of the engaging member 310 (arrow L
direction) is provided.

The insertion portion 21724b extends in the displacement direction (arrows LR
direction) and overlapped with the engaging member 310 in the state of being engaged with the fixing member 320 in the gravitational direction (arrow UB direction). Also, the insertion portion 21
724b has a bent portion 21724b1 that bends toward the rear side (engagement member 310 side), and the bent tip portion of the bent portion 21742b1 extends in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) of the pachinko machine 10. , is set to a length that overlaps with the engaging member 310 .

Further, the width dimension of the insertion portion 21742b in the vertical direction (direction of arrows UD) is set smaller than the width dimension of the concave portion 317 of the engaging member 310 in the vertical direction. Therefore, when the engaging member 310 is engaged with the fixing member 320, the insertion portion 21724b is
The bent portion 21724 b 1 is inserted inside the recess 317 . As a result, it is possible to prevent the first piece 311 of the engaging member 310 from elastically deforming toward the inner side of the recess 317 when the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 are engaged. As a result, the engagement member 20310
and the fixing member 320 is illegally released, and the board box 100 (main controller 110) connected to the fixing member 320 is prevented from being replaced with an illegal board.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 171 to 173, the operation of the insertion portion 21724b when engaging the engaging member 310 with the fixing member 320 will be described. Figures 172(a) and 173 (
a) is a rear view of the rotating unit 21700 and the engaging member 310. FIG. 172(b) and 173(b) are schematic cross-sectional views of the rear case 300 and the rotating unit 21700. FIG. 172(a) and 172(b) show a state in which the engagement between the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 is released, and FIGS. Joining member 3
10 is shown in the process of being engaged with the fixing member 320 .

As shown in FIGS. 172 and 173 , the engaging member 310 is disengaged from the fixing member 320 so that the end of the first piece 311 of the engaging member 310 is pushed to the engaged position of the fixing member 320 . Part 3
32 , the end of the first piece 311 is elastically deformed toward the inside of the recess 317 . As a result, the width dimension in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) of the recess 317 is made smaller than the width dimension in the vertical direction of the insertion portion 21724b.

Further, when the engaging portion 316 is positioned in the internal space of the engaged portion 332 (the position shown in FIG. 173(a)), the end of the first piece 311 touches the projecting tip of the insertion portion 21724b. placed above. In other words, the length dimension of the engaging portion 316 in the left-right direction is the same as that of the insertion portion 21.
724 b to the end of the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320 .

Therefore, when the engaging portion 316 is pushed out from the internal space of the engaged portion 332, the end of the engaging member 310 on the first piece 311 side can be brought into contact with the bent portion 21724b1 of the insertion portion 21724b. . In this case, the distal end of the insertion portion 21724b is pushed forward (in the direction of arrow F) along the inclined surface of the bent portion 21724b1. Thereby, the engaging member 310 can be displaced to a position where it engages with the fixing member 320 .

As shown in FIG. 171, when the engaging portion 316 is pulled out of the internal space of the engaged portion 332, as described above, the width dimension of the recess 317 in the vertical direction of the first piece 311 Also, since the width dimension in the vertical direction of the insertion portion 21724b is increased, the recess 317
The bent portion 21724b1 is inserted inside the .

Therefore, as described above, it is possible to prevent the first piece 311 of the engaging member 310 from being elastically deformed inside the concave portion 317 . As a result, the engagement between the engaging member 20310 and the fixing member 320 is illegally released, and the board box 100 (main controller 1) connected to the fixing member 320 is removed.
10) can be prevented from being replaced with an incorrect board.

The engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 are located inside the rear case 300 (bottom wall portion 301).
) is removed from the rear case 21300 and the engagement between the end of the engaging member 310 and the rear case 20300 is released.
By elastically deforming the end of the piece 311 and pulling out the end of the engaging member 310 from the inner space of the engaged portion 332, the engagement between the two can be released.

Therefore, when removing the fixing member 320 from the rear case 21300, it is necessary to remove the rotating unit 21700 from the front side of the rear case 21300.
10 and the fixing member 320 are illegally released from the rear side of the rear case 21300,
It is possible to prevent the board box 100 (main controller 110) connected to the fixing member 320 from being replaced with an illegal board.

174 to 176, the engagement member 2231 in the twenty-second embodiment
0 and the fixing member 22320 will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the engaging portion 316 of the engaging member 310 is engaged with the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320 has been described.
In the twenty-second embodiment, the fixing member 22 is inserted into the concave portion 22311a formed in the engaging member 22310.
A bend 22332a1 formed in 320 is engaged. In addition, the same reference numerals are given to the same parts as those of the above-described embodiments, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

174 to 176(a), an engaging member 22310 in the twenty-second embodiment
and the configuration of the fixing member 22320 will be described. 174 is a perspective front view of the engaging member 22310 and the securing member 22320. FIG. 175(a) and 175(b) are front views of the rear case 22300. FIG. FIG. 176(a) is CLXXVIa- of FIG. 175(b)
FIG. 11 is a schematic cross-sectional view of rear case 22300 along line CLXXVIa. Note that FIG. 175 (
In a), the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 are shown before being engaged, and FIG.
At 75(b), the engaging member 22310 and the securing member 22320 are shown engaged.

As shown in FIGS. 174 to 176(a), the rear case 223 in the twenty-second embodiment
00 includes a bottom wall portion 301 that is substantially rectangular in front view, and an outer wall portion 302 that is erected from the outer edges of four sides of the bottom wall portion 301 toward the front. It is formed in a box shape with one side open. In addition, the rear case 22300 includes an engaging member 22310 disposed on the front side of the bottom wall portion 301 (the box-shaped open side (arrow F direction side)) and the bottom wall portion 301.
01 and a fixing member 22320 for fixing the board box 100 (main controller 110).

The engaging member 22310 has a crank-shaped outer shape when viewed from the front.
A third piece 313 connects the ends of the first piece 22311 and the second piece 312 in a direction orthogonal to the extending direction of the first piece 22311 and the second piece 312 .

In addition, in the first piece 22311 and the second piece 312, there is a sliding groove 31 that is an elongated hole elongated in the extending direction.
4 are respectively formed so that the engaging member 22310 is slidable in the extending direction of the first piece 22311 and the second piece 312 (arrow LR direction).

The first piece 22311 has a concave portion 22311a recessed toward the rear side (arrow B direction) on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the end opposite to the side to which the third piece 313 is connected. .

The recessed portion 22311a is formed by a bent portion 22332a1 formed in a fixing member 22320, which will be described later.
is inserted to engage the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320. As described later, the end of the first piece 22311 of the engaging member 22310 (arrow R direction side) is fixed. When housed in the internal space of the engaged portion 22332 of the member 22320, the fixing member 223
20 is formed at a position facing 22332a.

The internal shape of the recessed portion 22311a is formed to have a substantially right-angled triangular cross-section, and the right-angled portion is set on the end portion side (arrow R direction side) of the first piece 22311, and the bottom surface of the recessed portion is on the second side. It is formed as an inclined surface that deepens toward the back side (in the direction of arrow B) toward the end portion side of one piece 22311 .

The fixing member 22320 is composed of an intervening member 22330 that engages with the engaging member 22310 described above, and a pivot member 340 that is fastened to the rear side of the intervening member 22330 .

The interposition member 22330 is formed in a box shape with an open front side (arrow F direction side), and has a locking portion 331 protruding on one side (arrow R direction side) and the other side (arrow L direction side). The engaged portion 22332 formed in a frame shape protruding from the side surface of the rear case 22300 to the bottom wall portion 301 side (back side (arrow B direction side)), and the box-shaped bottom surface (arrow B direction side) It mainly includes an insertion hole 333 (see FIG. 39(b)) opening in a circular shape and a projection 334 projecting from the rear surface.

The engaged portion 22332 has the first piece 2231 of the engaging member 22310 in the enclosed internal space.
1 (arrow R direction side) is inserted, and the inner edge shape is the first piece 22
It is set slightly larger than the outline of 311 . In addition, the engaged portion 22332 of the engaging member 22310 extends from one side of the frame-shaped front side (arrow F direction side).
It has a projection 22332a projecting in the insertion direction (arrow R direction side).

The protrusion 22332a has a bent portion 2233 bent to the front side (arrow F direction side) at the end of the tip.
2a1, the bend 22332a1 of which is the recess 223 of the engagement member 22310 described above.
By being inserted into 11a, the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 can be engaged. That is, the bent portion 22332a1 is such that the engaging member 22310 is connected to the engaged portion 22332
It is formed at a position facing the concave portion 22311a in the state of being inserted into.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 176(a), the engaging portion between the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 is formed on the front side of the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 22300 with the engaging member 22310 therebetween. be done. Therefore, since the engaging portion between the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 can be separated from the first opening 301c formed in the bottom wall portion 301, the first
It is possible to suppress illegal release of the engagement between the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 by inserting an illegal member such as a wire or wire from the opening 301c.

Furthermore, since the first piece 22311 of the engaging member 22310 can be arranged between the bottom wall portion 301 and the engaging portions of the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320, the bottom wall portion 301
It is possible to prevent a wire, wire, or the like, which is illegally inserted through an opening such as the first opening 301c formed in the opening, from reaching the engaging portions of the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 in a straight line. As a result, it is possible to suppress illegally releasing the engagement between the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 by inserting an illegal member (wire, wire, etc.) from the opening of the bottom wall portion 301 .

Further, in the present embodiment, the protrusion 22332a protrudes in the insertion direction of the engaging member 22310 into the internal space of the engaged portion 22332 . Therefore, the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 223
20 is set on the front side of the fixing member 22320 . As a result, the bottom wall portion 3
When an illegal member such as a wire or a wire is inserted through the first opening 301c of 01, the insertion direction of the illegal member that reaches the engagement portion between the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 is the bottom wall portion 3.
01 can be tilted obliquely to the front. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the force in the direction to disengage the engaging portion between the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 from the distal end of the illegal member. As a result, it is possible to suppress illegally releasing the engagement between the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 by inserting an illegal member from the first opening 301c of the bottom wall portion 301 .

Next, with reference to FIG. 176(b), the engaging member 23310 and the fixing member 23320 in the twenty-third embodiment will be described. In the twenty-second embodiment, the projection 22332a for engaging the engaging member 22310 is projected in the direction in which the engaging member 22310 is inserted into the engaged portion 22332. However, in the twenty-third embodiment, Engaged portion 23 of engaging member 23310
A protrusion 23332a is provided in a direction opposite to the insertion direction of 332 . In addition, the same reference numerals are given to the same parts as those of the above-described embodiments, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 176(b) is a cross-sectional view of the rear case 23300 in the twenty-third embodiment. Note that the cross-sectional view of FIG. 176(b) corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 176(a). Further, in the twenty-third embodiment, as described above, the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 223 in the twenty-second embodiment are different.
20, only the engagement position is the same as that of the twenty-second embodiment except for the engagement portion between the engagement member 23310 and the fixing member 23320, so the description thereof will be omitted.

In addition, the back case 22300 in the twenty-third embodiment has a bottom wall portion 233 which is substantially rectangular in front view.
01 and outer wall portions 302 erected toward the front from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 23301, and each wall portion 23301, 302 forms a box shape with one side (front side) open. It is formed. The bottom wall portion 301 has an opening 301a (see FIG. 5) which is rectangular in front view. 2) is made visible.

In addition, the rear case 23300 in the twenty-third embodiment is mounted on the front side of the bottom wall portion 23301 (
Engagement member 23310 arranged on the box-shaped opening side (arrow F direction side), rear case 23300 arranged on the back side (arrow B direction side), board box 100 (main controller 110), and a fixing member 23320 for fixing.

As shown in FIG. 176(b), in the twenty-third embodiment, as described above, the engaged portion 2333
2 is the same as the projection 22332a (
176(a)) is set in the opposite direction (arrow L direction), and a bent portion 23332a1 bent toward the rear side (arrow B direction side) is formed at the projecting tip of the projection 23332a.

The engaging member 23310 has a bent portion 23332a1 at a position facing the bent portion 23332a1.
A rectangular opening 23310b larger than the outer shape of is formed. Thereby, the engaging member 23
310 is inserted into the internal space of the engaged portion 23332 of the fixing member 23320, the opening 2
The bent portion 23332a1 is inserted inside the 3310b, and the engaging member 23310 and the fixing member 23320 are engaged.

Further, a third opening 23301e is formed at a position facing the fixing member 23320 in the bottom wall 23301 of the rear case 23300 in the twenty-third embodiment. The third opening 23301e allows the operator to release the engaging portion between the engaging member 23310 and the fixing member 23320 from the rear side of the bottom wall portion 23301. As shown in FIG. As a result, the rear case 23300
The work of removing the fixing member 23320 can be simplified.

Next, referring to FIGS. 177 and 178, the rear case 243 in the twenty-fourth embodiment
00 will be explained. In the eighteenth embodiment, the fixing member 18320 is
In the twenty-fourth embodiment, when removing the fixing member 24320 from the bottom wall portion 24301, the engaging member 24310 is inserted into the fixing member 24320.
In addition, the same reference numerals are given to the same parts as those of the above-described embodiments, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

177(a) is a front view of the rear case 24300 in the twenty-fourth embodiment, and FIG. 177(b) is a cross-sectional view of the rear case 24300 taken along line CLXXVIIb-CLXXVIIb of FIG. 177(a). Figure 178 shows CLXXVIII-C in Figure 177(b)
24300 is a cross-sectional view of rear case 24300 taken along line LXXVIII. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 177 and 178, the back case 24300 in the twenty-fourth embodiment
has a substantially rectangular bottom wall portion 24301 when viewed from the front, and an outer wall portion 302 erected from the outer edges of four sides of the bottom wall portion 24301 toward the front. It is formed in a box shape with an open side (front side). In addition, the rear case 24300 has a bottom wall portion 2
Engagement member 2 disposed on the front side of 4301 (box-shaped open side (arrow F direction side))
4310 and the bottom wall portion 24301 are disposed on the rear side of the substrate box 100 (main controller 1
10), and a fixing member 24320 for fixing.

The bottom wall portion 24301 has an opening 301a which is rectangular in a front view.
) are made visible. In addition, the bottom wall portion 24301 has a first opening 24301c that opens at a position facing the fixing member 24320, and a left side (arrow L direction side) of the first opening portion 24301c. B direction) and an operation element 24 to be described later inside
and an opening (not shown) into which the insertion portion 24362 of 360 is inserted.

The engaging member 24310 includes a second piece 24312 formed in a T shape when viewed from the front, and a second piece 24312 thereof.
and a first piece 24311 bent from the end of 4312 and extending in an arc shape. The second piece 24312 has a through-hole 24 that penetrates in the front-rear direction through the connecting portion of the two orthogonal extending portions.
312d, and the distance from the through hole 24312d to the outside of the extended portion of the second piece 24312 is set to be substantially the same.

The through-hole 24312d is a portion into which an insertion portion 24362 of an operation element 24360, which will be described later, is inserted, and is formed in a circular shape that is approximately the same as the outer shape of the insertion portion 24362 . As a result, the manipulator 24360 is rotationally operated, so that the engaging member 24310 is rotationally displaced about the through hole 24312d.

The first piece 24311 is formed in an arc shape centering on the through hole 24312d, and the second piece 24311
4312 protrude in one direction of rotation (counterclockwise rotation when viewed from the front). Also,
Each of the first pieces 24311 has an engaging portion 24316 protruding on both sides in the radial direction around the axis of the through hole 24312d at the protruding tip, and from the protruding tip surface toward the connecting side of the second piece 24312. and a recess 24317 that is recessed.

The engaging portion 24316 is a portion that engages with a fixing member 24320 described later, and the recess 24
317 elastically deforms the projecting tip of the first piece 24311 (the portion where the engaging portion 24316 is formed) to engage with the engaged portion 24332 formed on the fixing member 24320 . A detailed description of the shapes of the engaging portion 24316 and the concave portion 24317 will be given later.

The manipulator 24360 is an operating member that transmits an operation from the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the bottom wall portion 24301 to the engaging member 24310 disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the bottom wall portion 24301 . It has an operation portion 24361 formed in a cylindrical shape, and an insertion portion 24362 protruding coaxially with the operation portion 24361 . The operation portion 24361 is formed in the bottom wall portion 24301 and has an outer diameter larger than the opening through which the insertion portion 24362 is inserted. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the entire operation element 24360 from being displaced toward the front side of the bottom wall portion 24301 .

The insertion portion 24362 is a portion that is inserted into the through hole 24312d of the engagement member 24310 as described above.
310.

The fixing member 24320 is composed of an intervening member 24330 that engages with the engaging member 24310 described above, and a pivot member 340 arranged on the rear side of the intervening member 24330 .

The interposition member 24330 is formed in a box shape with an open front side (arrow F direction side). Also,
The interposing member 24330 is provided with a housing portion 24335 that protrudes from the front and is formed in a box shape with an open bottom side (arrow D direction side). The accommodating portion 24335 has an engagement member 2 inside.
4310 (the tip portion of the first piece 24311) is inserted, and the open portion on the lower side is arranged on the displacement trajectory of the first piece 24311 of the engaging member 24310 described above. As a result, the engagement member 24310 can be rotated to house the end of the first piece 24311 of the engagement member 24310 in the internal space of the housing portion 24335 .

In addition, the housing portion 24335 is formed such that its internal space is larger than the engaging portion of the engaging member 24310 at one location. Accordingly, when the engaging member 24310 is cut as described later, the cut portion of the engaging member 24310 can be accommodated in the internal space of the accommodating portion 24335 . In addition, in the present embodiment, the size of the internal space of the accommodating portion 24335 is equal to that of the engaging member 243
10 engaging portions (the tip portion of the first piece 24311) is set to be approximately three times larger than that of the accommodating portion 24
At least three or more engaging members 24310 can be accommodated in the internal space of 335 .

As shown in FIG. 178, the accommodating portion 24335 has an opening on the lower side, and a stepped portion 24335a protrudes stepwise from the opening portion. is engaged. As a result, when the engaging member 24310 is rotated, the tip of the first piece 24311 can be inserted inside the accommodating portion 24335 and engaged with the engaging member 24310 and the fixing member 24320 .

Further, in this case, the recess depth SH3 (see FIG. 178) of the recess 24317 is
35 is set to be smaller than the distance dimension SH4 from the end of the first piece 24311 in the state of being accommodated and engaged with 35 to the lower side end of the accommodating portion 24335 . Therefore, the engaged first piece 24311
A recessed portion 24317 formed in the housing portion 24335 is housed inside the housing portion 24335 . As a result, the end of the first piece 24311 is elastically deformed so that the engaging member 24310 and the fixing member 24 are separated from each other.
320 can be prevented from being disengaged.

Therefore, in the twenty-fourth embodiment, the first piece 24311 inserted inside the housing portion 24335
By cutting the first piece 24311 protruding from the housing portion 24335 of the bottom wall portion 24301
The securing member 24320 can be removed from the .

In this case, the distance dimension SH5 (see FIG. 178) from the upper inner edge of the accommodating portion 24335 to the tip of the first piece 24311 is set larger than the distance dimension SH4 described above. As a result, the cut portion of the first piece 24311 can be moved above the housing portion 24335, and the other first piece 24311 is inserted from the opening side (arrow F direction side) of the housing portion 24335 to form the stepped portion 24335a. can be engaged.

Therefore, the number of times the fixing member 24320 is removed from the bottom wall portion 24301 is
The number of remaining first pieces 24311 of 310 or the number of cut first pieces 24311 accommodated in the accommodating portion 24335 can be used for determination. As a result, the fixing member 2432
0 is illegally removed from the bottom wall portion 24301 and the board box 100 (main controller 110) connected to the fixing member 24320 is replaced with an illegal board.
The number of remaining first pieces 24311 of 310 or the number of cut first pieces 24311 accommodated in the accommodating portion 24335 allows the worker to recognize that the fixing member 24320 has been illegally removed.

In addition, as described above, the second piece 24312 of the engaging member 24310 is formed in a T shape when viewed from the front, and the region on the side where the first piece 24311 is not formed (upper side of the T) is used to The engaging member 24310 can be rotated to insert the first piece 24311 into the securing member 24320 . Further, when the first piece 24311 is cut, the cut area of the first piece 24311 is used to make the engaging member 24310 rotatable, and the next (other) first piece 24311 is attached to the fixing member 24320. can be inserted. As a result, the accommodating portion 2433 of the first piece 24311
5 can be determined. Therefore, the operator must
By visually checking where the piece 24311 is located, it is possible to determine whether the fixing member 24320 has been illegally released. It is possible to suppress the operator from overlooking traces of

Next, referring to FIG. 179, the game board 25013 in the twenty-fifth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the decorative member 154 of the general winning opening unit 150 is
51 has been described, but in the twenty-fifth embodiment, the decorative member 154 is adhered to the front side of the base plate 60 . In addition, the same reference numerals are given to the same parts as those of the above-described embodiments, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

179(a) and 179(b) are sectional views of the game board 25013 in the twenty-fifth embodiment. 179(a) and 179(b) correspond to the cross-sectional view of FIG.
In addition, in FIG. 179(b), a state in which the general prize winning port unit 25150 is disassembled from the base plate 60 is illustrated.

The game board 25013 in the twenty-fifth embodiment is the same as the game board 13 in the first embodiment.
Similarly, the game board 25013 includes a base plate 60 formed of a substantially rectangular plate member when viewed from the front, and a center frame 86 provided in an opening formed in the base plate 60 .
In addition, the game board 25013 includes a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, a pinwheel, rails 76 and 77, a general winning opening 63, a first Prize-winning entrance 6
4. A second prize winning port 640, a variable prize winning device 65, a first through gate 66, a variable display device unit 80, etc. (see FIG. 2) are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is the back surface of the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). mounted on the side. Furthermore, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, the second opening 60b of the base 60 (Fig. 1
1), a general prize winning unit 25150 is provided at the opening.

As shown in FIG. 179, a general prize winning port unit 25150 disposed on the front side of the base plate 60 of the game board 25013 in the twenty-fifth embodiment includes a main body portion 151 disposed along the front of the base plate 60. , a first standing portion 152 erected at the end of the body portion 151, and a second standing portion erected from the front of the body portion 141, one end of which is connected to the first standing portion 152. 1
53 , a decorative member 25154 arranged on the back side of the body portion 151 , and a plurality of (three in this embodiment) general winning holes 63 formed in the body portion 151 .

The decorative member 25154 is formed in a plate shape from a light-transmitting material, and is decorated with patterns or characters (pictures) that are continuous with the decorative member 60c arranged on the front side of the base plate 60. FIG. Also,
The decorative member 25154 is formed such that the shape of its outer edge is slightly smaller than the shape of the inner edge of the concave portion 151 b formed in the body portion 151 .

Also, the decorative member 25154 has an adhesive tape 25154a on the rear end of the decorative member 25154 to be adhered to the front surface of the base plate 60 (the decorative member 60c). As a result, the decorative member 25154 can be arranged by being adhered to the base plate 60 . Therefore, when placing the decorative member 25154 on the base plate 60 , the worker can attach the decorative member 25154 to the front surface of the base plate 60 while visually checking the decoration of the decorative member 60 c of the base plate 60 . Therefore,
It is possible to easily align the decoration positions of the decoration member 25154 and the decoration member 60 c of the base plate 60 . As a result, the positional deviation of the decoration between the decoration member 25154 and the decoration member 60c of the base plate 60 is suppressed, and the player can see the decoration member 25154 and the decoration member 60c of the base plate 60 as one decoration. It can be easily visualized.

Furthermore, since the decorative member 25154 is directly attached to the front surface of the base plate 60 (the decorative member 60c), the front-to-rear direction of the decorative member 25154 and the decorative member 60c is greater than in the case where the decoration is applied to the front side of the main body 151. (in the direction of arrows FB) can be brought closer together. As a result, when the player views the decorative member 25154 from an oblique direction, each of the decorative members 25154 and 6
It is possible to suppress the positional deviation of the decoration of 0c from becoming large. As a result, the decorative member 25 is displayed to the player.
154 and the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 can be easily made visible to the player as one decoration.

Further, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, the recess dimension X1 of the recess 151b of the main body 151 is set smaller than the width dimension X2 in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) of the decorative member 25154 and the adhesive tape 25154a combined. be done. As a result, when the body portion 151 is arranged from the front side (arrow F direction side) of the decorative member 25154, the decorative member 25154 is placed in the concave portion 151b.
It is possible to prevent the front surface of the decorative member 25154 from coming into contact with the recessed bottom surface 151b2.

Therefore, the rear surface portion 151d forming the rear surface of the main body portion 151 excluding the concave portion 151b can be brought into contact with the front surface of the base plate 60, and a gap is formed between the rear surface portion 151d and the base plate 60. can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent dust or the like from entering between the back surface portion 151d and the base plate 60 and making the decoration of the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 less visible.

Next, the game board 26013 in the twenty-sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the linear inclined surface 151a is formed at the end of the body portion 151 of the general winning hole unit 150 has been described.
An inclined surface 26151a formed at the end of 151 is formed to have an arcuate cross-section that bulges outward. In addition, the same reference numerals are given to the same parts as those of the above-described embodiments, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

180(a) and 180(b) are sectional views of the game board 26013 in the twenty-sixth embodiment. 180(a) and 180(b) correspond to the cross-sectional view of FIG.
Also, in FIG. 180(a), the player moves the game board 26013 to a position higher than usual (for example,
The line of sight when viewed from the viewpoint of the same height as the upper end in the gravity direction of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) is illustrated by a two-dot chain line, and in FIG. (for example, a viewpoint at the same height as the substantially middle position in the direction of gravity of the game board 26013) is indicated by a chain double-dashed line.

The game board 26013 in the twenty-sixth embodiment is the same as the game board 13 in the first embodiment.
Similarly, the game board 26013 includes a base plate 60 formed of a substantially rectangular plate member when viewed from the front, and a center frame 86 (see FIG. 2) disposed in an opening formed in the base plate 60. Prepare. In addition, the game board 26013 includes a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front.
In addition to a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding the ball and a windmill, rails 76 and 77, a general prize opening 63,
The first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display device unit 80, etc. (see FIG. 2) are assembled together, and the peripheral portion thereof is the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). reference). Furthermore, in the twenty-sixth embodiment, a general prize winning port unit 26150 is arranged in the opening portion of the second opening 60b (see FIG. 11) of the base 60. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 180, a general prize winning port unit 26150 arranged on the front side of the base plate 60 of the game board 26013 in the twenty-sixth embodiment includes a plate-shaped main body portion 26151 along the front of the base plate 60 and its and a decorative member 154 arranged on the back side of the body portion 26151 .

The body portion 26151 is made of a transparent resin material, and is attached to the decorative member 15 arranged on the back side.
4, decorations such as patterns and characters (pictures) can be visually recognized from the player side. Also, the main body part 261
Reference numeral 51 designates an inclined surface 26151a whose end in a front view is inclined toward the rear side and bulges in an arcuate cross section, and a concave portion 1 which is recessed from the rear side of the main body portion 26151 toward the front side.
51b and .

In the inclined surface 26151a, the inclination angle θ1 of the imaginary line IL1 connecting the connection point of the main body portion 26151 with the front side plane and the rear side end portion with respect to the front surface of the base plate 60 is set to be smaller than 45 degrees. be done. As a result, the light traveling in the main body portion 26151 in the horizontal direction is transmitted from the inclined surface 26151a to the main body portion 2615 more than when the inclination angle θ1 is set to be greater than 45 degrees.
The angle of incidence when incident on the outside of 1 is increased. Therefore, when the light is emitted to the outside of the main body portion 26151, the traveling direction of the light can be easily bent upward. Therefore, the player can press the general winning port unit 2615 from a position higher than the normal position with respect to the game board 26013
When 0 is viewed, the connecting portion of the decorative members 154 and 60c can be easily viewed from the front side. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the difference in the front-to-rear position of the connecting portion of the decorative members 154 and 60c.
, and the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 can be combined to make one decoration easily visible.
In addition, in this embodiment, the angle θ1 is set to 40 degrees.

In addition, as described above, the inclined surface 26151a is formed to have an arcuate cross-section that bulges outward.
The incident angle is increased when the light traveling in the horizontal direction 1 is incident on the outside of the main body 26151 from the inclined surface 26151a. Therefore, the light traveling in the main body 26151 in the horizontal direction moves from the inclined surface 26151a toward the main body 26151 toward the center (lower side in FIG. 180(a)) of the main body 26151.
The angle of incidence when incident on the outside of 51 is increased.

Therefore, the player is below the horizontal line HR1 (see FIG. 180(a)) passing through the middle position between the connection point with the plane on the front side of the main body 26151 and the end on the back side via the inclined surface 26151a. When viewing the decoration on the side, the angle of the line of sight of the player passing through the main body 26151 can be easily brought closer to the direction perpendicular to the front of the base plate 60 (horizontal direction).

Furthermore, the decorative member 154 arranged inside the concave portion 151b has its end positioned on a horizontal line H that passes through the intermediate position between the connection point with the plane on the front side of the main body portion 26151 and the end on the back side.
It is set below R1 (see FIG. 180(a)) and is set on the back side of the inclined surface 26151a. As described above, when the player visually recognizes decorations below the horizontal line HR1 (see FIG. 180(a)) through the inclined surface 26151a, the angle of the line of sight of the player passing through the main body 26151 is can be easily brought closer to the direction perpendicular to the front surface of the base plate 60 (horizontal direction).

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 180(a), even when the player visually recognizes the general winning hole unit 26150 and the base plate 60 from a position higher than normal on the game board 26013, the inclined surface 26
Through 151a, the decoration of the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 and the general prize winning opening unit 2615
In combination with the decoration of the decoration member 154 of 0, it can be made easy for the player to visually recognize. As a result, the decorative member 154 of the general prize winning port unit 26150 and the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 can be combined to make it easier to see as one decoration.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 180(b), when the player visually recognizes the general winning unit 26150 and the base plate 60 from the normal height of the game board 26013, the main body Since the angle of incidence of light traveling horizontally through the portion 26151 and entering the outside of the body portion 26151 from the inclined surface 26151a approximates a right angle, the light emitted to the outside of the body portion 26151 is less likely to be refracted. Therefore, the direction of the line of sight of the player is suppressed from being bent when passing through the inclined surface 26151a, and the decorative member 15 of the general winning opening unit 26150
4 and the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 can be made difficult for the player to recognize the positional deviation in the front-rear direction. As a result, the decorative member 154 of the general prize winning port unit 26150 and the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 can be combined to make it easier to see as one decoration.

Next, referring to FIG. 181, the game board 27013 in the twenty-seventh embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the linear inclined surface 151a is formed at the end of the main body 151 of the general winning hole unit 150 has been described.
An inclined surface 27151 a formed at the end of the 6151 is formed to have an arcuate cross-section recessed inside the body portion 27151 . In addition, the same reference numerals are given to the same parts as those of the above-described embodiments, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

181(a) and 181(b) are sectional views of the game board 27013 in the twenty-seventh embodiment. 181(a) and 181(b) correspond to the cross-sectional view of FIG.
Also, in FIG. 181(a), the player moves the game board 27013 to a position higher than usual (for example,
The line of sight when viewed from the viewpoint of the same height as the upper end in the direction of gravity of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) is illustrated by a two-dot chain line, and in FIG. (for example, a viewpoint at the same height as the substantially middle position in the gravity direction of the game board 27013) is shown by a chain double-dashed line.

The game board 27013 in the twenty-seventh embodiment is the same as the game board 13 in the first embodiment.
Similarly, the game board 27013 includes a base plate 60 formed of a substantially rectangular plate member when viewed from the front, and a center frame 86 (see FIG. 2) disposed in an opening formed in the base plate 60. Prepare. In addition, the game board 27013 includes a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front.
In addition to a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding the ball and a windmill, rails 76 and 77, a general prize opening 63,
The first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display device unit 80, etc. (see FIG. 2) are assembled together, and the peripheral portion thereof is the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). reference). Furthermore, in the twenty-seventh embodiment, a general prize winning port unit 27150 is arranged in the opening portion of the second opening 60b (see FIG. 11) of the base 60. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 181, a general prize winning port unit 27150 arranged on the front side of the base plate 60 of the game board 27013 in the twenty-seventh embodiment includes a plate-like body portion 27151 along the front of the base plate 60 and its and a decorative member 154 arranged on the back side of the body portion 27151 .

The body portion 27151 is made of a transparent resin material, and is attached to the decorative member 15 arranged on the back side.
4, decorations such as patterns and characters (pictures) can be visually recognized from the player side. Also, the main body portion 271
Reference numeral 51 denotes an inclined surface 27151a having an arcuate cross-section recessed toward the inside of the main body 27151, and an inclined surface 27151a having an arcuate cross section recessed toward the inside of the main body 27151, and a recessed front from the back of the main body 27151. and a recess 151b provided.

In the inclined surface 27151a, the inclination angle θ2 of the imaginary line IL2 connecting the connecting point of the main body portion 27151 with the plane on the front side and the end portion on the back side with respect to the front surface of the base plate 60 is set to be larger than 45 degrees. be done. As a result, the outward protrusion distance of the inclined surface 2751a can be reduced, and an increase in the outer shape of the main body portion 27151 can be suppressed.

In addition, as described above, the inclined surface 27151a is formed to have an arcuate cross-section that is recessed inside the main body 27151, so that the player can move the decoration member 60c through the inclined surface 27151a.
, 154, the area in which the decorations of the decorative members 60c, 154 can be visually recognized can be expanded due to the recessed shape through the inclined surface 27151a. That is, the body portion 27151
From the decorative members 60c and 154, the inclined surface 2
Light incident on 7151a can be refracted and focused toward the player's viewpoint. As a result, the patterns and characters (pictures) visually recognized through the inclined surface 27151a can be made smaller, making it difficult for the player to understand the connection of the decorative members 60c and 154. FIG. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the positional deviation of the decorative members 60c and 154, and to prevent the player from losing interest.

Furthermore, the decorative member 154 arranged inside the concave portion 151b has its end positioned on a horizontal line H that passes through the intermediate position between the connection point with the plane on the front side of the main body portion 27151 and the end on the back side.
It is set above R2 and on the rear side of the inclined surface 27151a.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 181(a), when the player visually recognizes the general winning opening unit 27150 and the base plate 60 from a position higher than normal on the game board 26013, the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 The angle of incidence is increased when the light traveling in the horizontal direction through the main body portion 26151 on the front side of the connection portion is incident on the outer side of the main body portion 26151 from the inclined surface 26151a. Therefore, the light traveling in the horizontal direction through the main body portion 27151 on the front side of the connecting portion with the decorative member 154 is more likely to be refracted toward the player's viewpoint side, so that the player may be more inclined to the game board 27013 than the normal position. When viewing the general prize winning port unit 27150 from a very high position, the connecting portion of the decorative members 154 and 60c can be easily viewed from the front side. As a result, the decorative member 15
4 and 60c can be made difficult for the player to recognize the difference in the front-to-rear direction position of the connecting portion, so that the decorative member 154 of the general prize winning port unit 27150 and the decorative member 6 of the base plate 60 are used.
Together with 0c, it can be made visible as decoration of 1.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 181(b), when the player views the game board 27013 from a normal height, the general winning unit 27150 and the base plate 60 are decorated by the recessed shape of the inclined surface 27151a. Since the incident angle of the light traveling in the horizontal direction through the body portion 27151 on the front side of the connecting portion with the member 154 is approximately a right angle when incident on the outside of the body portion 27151 from the inclined surface 27151a, the light is emitted to the outside of the body portion 27151. It is possible to make it difficult to refract the light that is emitted. Therefore,
By suppressing the bending of the direction of the player's line of sight when passing through the inclined surface 27151a, the positional deviation in the front-rear direction between the decorative member 154 of the general winning opening unit 27150 and the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 is corrected. It can make it difficult for people to recognize As a result, the decorative member 154 of the general prize winning port unit 27150 and the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 can be combined to make it easier to see as one decoration.

Next, referring to FIG. 182(a), the game board 28013 in the twenty-eighth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the inner surface of the end of the recess 151b recessed in the main body 151 of the general winning hole unit 150 is parallel to the thickness direction of the main body 151 has been described. The inner surface of the end of the recess 28151b in the embodiment is the recess bottom surface 151
It is inclined inward toward the b2 side. In addition, the same reference numerals are given to the same parts as those of the above-described embodiments, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 182(a) is a sectional view of the game board 28013 in the twenty-eighth embodiment. In addition,
FIG. 182(a) corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. Also, in FIG. 182(a), the line of sight when the player views the game board 28013 from a normal position (for example, a viewpoint at the same height as the game board 28013 at approximately the middle position in the direction of gravity of the game board 28013) is indicated by a chain double-dashed line. illustrated.

The game board 28013 in the twenty-eighth embodiment is the same as the game board 13 in the first embodiment.
Similarly, the game board 28013 includes a base plate 60 formed of a substantially rectangular plate member when viewed from the front, and a center frame 86 (see FIG. 2) disposed in an opening formed in the base plate 60. Prepare. In addition, the game board 28013 includes a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front.
In addition to a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding the ball and a windmill, rails 76 and 77, a general prize opening 63,
The first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display device unit 80, etc. (see FIG. 2) are assembled together, and the peripheral portion thereof is the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). reference). Furthermore, in the twenty-eighth embodiment, a general prize winning port unit 28150 is arranged in the opening portion of the second opening 60b (see FIG. 11) of the base 60. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 182(a), the base plate 6 of the game board 28013 in the twenty-eighth embodiment
The general winning slot unit 28150 arranged on the front side of 0 includes a plate-shaped body portion 28151 along the front side of the base plate 60, and a decorative member 154 arranged on the back side of the body portion 28151. .

The body portion 28151 is made of a transparent resin material, and is attached to the decorative member 15 arranged on the back side.
4, decorations such as patterns and characters (pictures) can be visually recognized from the player side. Also, the main body portion 281
51 mainly includes an inclined surface 151a whose end is inclined toward the back side, and a concave portion 28151b that is recessed from the back side of the main body portion 28151 toward the front side.

As described above, the inner side surface 28151b3 of the recessed portion 28151b extends outward from the recessed bottom surface 151b2 toward the recessed opening side (from the arrow F direction toward the arrow B direction).
It is formed so as to be inclined toward the end of 8151 . In this case, the inclination angle θ3 (Fig. 182
(a)) is the inclination angle θ4 (
(see FIG. 182(a))).

As a result, as shown in FIG.
When visually recognizing the decorative member 60c through the main body 28151, the decoration position of the virtual image that is bent and visually recognized by the player by passing through the main body 28151 and the decorative member 60c without the main body 28151 are displayed.
can be brought closer to the decoration position of the real image when visually recognizing. In other words, the decorative member 60 is refracted by the inclined surface 28151a of the main body 28151 and the inner side surface 28151b3 of the recess.
The position c can be positioned on an extension of the player's line of sight. As a result, when the player visually recognizes the decorative member 60c through the main body portion 28151, it is possible to suppress the misalignment of the decoration caused by the refraction of light, thereby suppressing the loss of interest of the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 182(b), the game board 29013 in the twenty-ninth embodiment will be described. In the twenty-eighth embodiment, the inner surface 2915 in the cross section of the recess 29151b
Although the inclination angle θ3 of 1b3 with respect to the front surface of the base plate 60 is set smaller than the inclination angle θ4 of the inclined surface 151a with respect to the base plate 60, in the twenty-ninth embodiment, the inner surface 29151b3 in the cross section of the recess 29151b is set larger than the inclination angle θ6 of the inclined surface 151 a with respect to the base plate 60 . In addition, the same reference numerals are given to the same parts as those of the above-described embodiments, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 182(b) is a sectional view of the game board 29013 in the twenty-ninth embodiment. In addition,
FIG. 182(b) corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. Also, in FIG. 182(b), the line of sight when the player views the game board 29013 from a normal position (for example, from a viewpoint of the same height as the substantially middle position of the game board 29013 in the direction of gravity) is indicated by a chain double-dashed line. illustrated.

The game board 29013 in the twenty-ninth embodiment is the same as the game board 13 in the first embodiment.
Similarly, the game board 29013 includes a base plate 60 formed of a substantially rectangular plate member when viewed from the front, and a center frame 86 (see FIG. 2) arranged in an opening formed in the base plate 60. Prepare. In addition, the game board 29013 includes a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front.
In addition to a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding the ball and a windmill, rails 76 and 77, a general prize opening 63,
The first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display device unit 80, etc. (see FIG. 2) are assembled together, and the peripheral portion thereof is the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). reference). Furthermore, in the twenty-ninth embodiment, a general prize winning port unit 29150 is arranged in the opening portion of the second opening 60b (see FIG. 11) of the base 60. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 182(b), the base plate 6 of the game board 29013 in the twenty-ninth embodiment
0 is equipped with a plate-shaped body portion 29151 along the front side of the base plate 60 and a decorative member 154 disposed on the back side of the body portion 29151. .

The body portion 29151 is made of a transparent resin material, and is attached to the decorative member 15 arranged on the back side.
4, decorations such as patterns and characters (pictures) can be visually recognized from the player side. Also, the main body portion 291
51 mainly includes an inclined surface 151a whose end is inclined toward the back side, and a concave portion 29151b that is recessed from the back side of the body portion 29151 toward the front side.

As described above, the inner side surface 29151b3 of the recessed portion 29151b extends outward from the recessed bottom surface 151b2 toward the recessed opening side (from the arrow F direction toward the arrow B direction).
It is formed so as to be inclined toward the end of 9151 . In this case, the inclination angle θ5 (Fig. 182
(b)) is the inclination angle θ6 (
(See FIG. 182(b)).

As a result, as shown in FIG.
When the decorative member 60c is viewed through the inner surface 2915 of the concave portion 29151b, the light emitted from the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 to the player's viewpoint through the inclined surface 151a.
The light can be emitted in a direction substantially orthogonal to the inclination of 1b3. Therefore, when light enters the inner side surface 29151b3 of the recess 29151b from the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154, it is possible to suppress the light from being refracted. As a result, the inner surface 291 of the recess 29151b
When light is incident on 51b3, the light is refracted so that the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154
can be suppressed from being viewed from above in the direction of gravity, and the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 can be easily viewed by the player as one decoration.

Moreover, since a predetermined gap is provided between the inner side surface 29151b3 of the recess 29151b and the end of the decorative member 154, the gap can absorb dimensional errors that occur when the decorative member 154 is formed.

Next, referring to FIG. 183(a), the general prize winning port unit 30 in the thirtieth embodiment
150 will be explained. In the twenty-eighth embodiment, the inner surface 2815 of the recess 28151b
Although the case where 1b3 is formed at an angle has been described, in the thirtieth embodiment, the concave portion 301
An inner side surface 30151b3 of 51b bulges toward the inside of the recess 28151b and is curved to have an arcuate cross section. In addition, the same reference numerals are given to the same parts as those of the above-described embodiments, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The game board 30013 in the thirtieth embodiment is the same as the game board 13 in the first embodiment.
Similarly, the game board 30013 includes a base plate 60 formed of a substantially rectangular plate member when viewed from the front, and a center frame 86 (see FIG. 2) arranged in an opening formed in the base plate 60. Prepare. In addition, the game board 30013 includes a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front.
In addition to a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding the ball and a windmill, rails 76 and 77, a general prize opening 63,
The first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display device unit 80, etc. (see FIG. 2) are assembled together, and the peripheral portion thereof is the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). reference). Furthermore, in the thirtieth embodiment, a general prize winning port unit 30150 is arranged in the opening portion of the second opening 60b (see FIG. 11) of the base 60. FIG.

FIG. 183(a) is a cross-sectional view of the general winning opening unit 30150 in the thirtieth embodiment. Note that FIG. 183(a) corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. In addition, in FIG. 183(a), the line of sight when the player views the game board 30013 from a normal position (for example, a viewpoint at the same height as the substantially middle position of the game board 30013 in the gravity direction) is indicated by a chain double-dashed line. is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 183(a), the base plate 6 of the game board 30013 in the thirtieth embodiment
The general prize winning slot unit 30150 arranged on the front side of 0 includes a plate-like body portion 30151 along the front side of the base plate 60, and a decorative member 154 arranged on the back side of the body portion 30151. .

The main body portion 30151 is made of a transparent resin material, and is attached to the decorative member 15 arranged on the back side.
4, decorations such as patterns and characters (pictures) can be visually recognized from the player side. Moreover, the main body part 301
51 mainly includes an inclined surface 151a whose end is inclined toward the back side, and a concave portion 30151b that is recessed from the back side of the body portion 30151 toward the front side.

An inner side surface 30151b3 of the recess 30151b is formed so as to be inclined outward from the bottom surface 151b2 of the recess toward the opening of the recess (from the direction of arrow F toward the direction of arrow B) toward the end portion of the main body portion 30151. At the same time, it bulges toward the inside of the concave portion 30151b to have an arcuate cross section.
As a result, the line of sight of the player viewing the decorative member 60c through the recess 30151b can be easily directed in the direction (horizontal direction) perpendicular to the decorative surface of the decorative member 60c. As a result, the recess 30
When the decoration of the game board 30013 is viewed through 151b, the end of the decoration member 154 is suppressed from being visually recognized, and the decoration member 60c and the decoration member 154 can easily be visually recognized by the player as one decoration. .

Next, with reference to FIG. 183(b), the general prize winning port unit 311 in the 31st embodiment
50 will be explained. In the first embodiment, the inclined surface 151a has a linear cross section. However, the inclined surface 31151a in the thirty-first embodiment includes a plurality of concave portions 31151a1. In addition, the same reference numerals are given to the same parts as those of the above-described embodiments, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 183(b) is a cross-sectional view of the general winning opening unit 31150 in the 31st embodiment. Note that FIG. 183(b) corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. Also, the game board 31013 in the thirty-first embodiment is similar to the game board 13 in the first embodiment.
has a base plate 60 formed of a plate member having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and a center frame 86 (see FIG. 2) arranged in an opening formed in the base plate 60 . Also, game board 3
Reference numeral 1013 designates a base plate 60 which has been cut into a substantially square shape in a front view. Second winning port 640, variable winning device 65, first through gate 66, variable display device unit 80, etc. (Fig. 2
), and its peripheral portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). Furthermore, in the thirty-first embodiment, a general prize winning port unit 31150 is arranged in the opening portion of the second opening 60b (see FIG. 11) of the base 60. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 183(b), the base plate 6 of the game board 31013 in the thirty-first embodiment
0 is provided with a plate-shaped body portion 31151 along the front side of the base plate 60 and a decorative member 154 disposed on the back side of the body portion 31151 .

The main body portion 31151 is made of a transparent resin material, and is attached to the decorative member 15 arranged on the back side.
4, decorations such as patterns and characters (pictures) can be visually recognized from the player side. Also, the main body portion 311
51 mainly includes an inclined surface 31151a whose end is inclined toward the back side, and a concave portion 151b recessed from the back side of the body portion 31151 toward the front side.

The inclined surface 31151a includes a plurality of recessed portions 311 recessed in a direction perpendicular to the direction of inclination.
51a1. The plurality of recessed portions 31151a1 are arranged side by side in the direction of inclination of the inclined surface 31151a and extend along the end portion of the main body portion 31151 when viewed from the front. As a result, the light is incident on the inside of the main body portion 31151 and the end portion of the main body portion 31151 (inclined surface 311
The light emitted from 51a) can be diffusely reflected. Therefore, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the decoration visually through the inclined surface 31151a in a blurred state.

Here, the end portion of the decorative member 154 arranged on the main body portion 31151 is arranged on the back side of the inclined surface 31151a as in the first embodiment, so that the decoration of the decorative member 154 and the decorative member 60
The connecting portion of the decoration c can be obscured and viewed by the player. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the connection of the respective decorative members, and to make it easier for the player to recognize the decoration of the decorative member 60c and the decoration of the decorative member 154 as one decoration.

<Adjusting Means for Changing the Flowing Direction by Adjusting the Distance Between the Opposite Parts>
Next, referring to FIGS. 184 to 186, the special winning device 32 in the 32nd embodiment
550 will be explained. In the thirteenth embodiment, the shim member SI is interposed between the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570 to adjust the facing distance between the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570. As explained above, in the thirty-second embodiment,
A case will be described in which the facing distance between the first path member 32560 and the second path member 32570 is adjusted by the fastening position of the screw. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 184 and 185, the special winning device 32 in the thirty-second embodiment
550 will be described. FIG. 184 shows the special winning device 32 in the thirty-second embodiment
550 is an exploded perspective front view of FIG. FIG. 185(a) is a front view of the special winning device 32550, FIG. 185(b) is a top view of the special winning device 32550, and FIG.
It is a cross-sectional view of the special winning device 32550 taken along line CLXXXVc-CLXXXVc in FIG. 185(a).

As shown in FIGS. 184 and 185, a special winning device 32550 in the 32nd embodiment
includes a first path member 32560 arranged on the front side and a second path member 32570 arranged on the rear side of the first path member 32560 .

The first path member 32560 is formed from a non-light transmissive material. Also, the first path member 32
560 includes a front plate 32564 formed in a plate shape and arranged on the front side of the game area, and a first wall portion projecting from the left and right ends of the front plate 32564 to the rear side (base plate 60 side). 3256
5 and .

The front plate 32564 is a plate member that serves as a wall portion on the front side of a game ball flow-down path formed between facing a second path member 32570 described later, and is formed of a non-light-transmitting material. As a result, the game ball flowing down inside the special winning device 33550 can be made invisible to the player. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the flowing direction of the game ball inside the special prize winning device 33550, thereby preventing the player from quitting the game.

The first wall portion 32565 is a portion that is connected (fastened) to the second path member 32570, and includes a through hole 32565c penetrating circularly in the left-right direction (plate thickness direction) and two first wall portions 32565.
A one-side projecting portion 32565d that is arranged in parallel on the opposing surface of the and protruding in a triangular cross-sectional shape,
It is mainly provided with erected portions 32565e erected from both upper and lower ends of the first wall portion 32565 on the opposing surface side of the two second wall portions 32566 .

The through-hole 32565c is a through-hole for inserting a screw for fastening the first path member 32560 to the second path member 32570, and is formed in each first wall portion 32565 one by one.

The one-side protrusion 32565d is inserted into the other-side recess 32573c of the second path member 32570, which will be described later, to position the first path member 32560 with respect to the second path member 32570. -B direction) and in the vertical direction (arrows UD)
direction.

The erected portion 32565e covers the one-side projection 32565d so that the one-side projection 325 can be seen from the player.
65d is made invisible, and is set larger than the projecting distance of the one-side projecting portion 32565d. This suppresses the position where the one-side protrusion 32565d is inserted into the other-side recess 32573c from being visually recognized, and allows the player to recognize the position of the first path member 32560 with respect to the second path member 32570. can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from stopping playing the pachinko machine 10 due to the judgment that it is disadvantageous.

The second path member 32570 includes a plate-like base plate 32571 facing the front plate 32564 of the first path member 32560, and the left and right ends of the base plate 32571 (in the directions of arrows LR) of the first path member 32560. and a fourth wall portion 32573 protruding toward the front plate 32564 side.

The base plate 32571 is a member that forms a ball-throwing path for a game ball in the gap between the front plate 32564 of the first path member 32560 and the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) of the base plate 32571 when viewed from the front. The size is made smaller than the front plate 32564 . As a result, it is possible to prevent the base plate 32571 from being viewed by the player. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from visually recognizing the facing distance between the base plate 32571 and the front plate 32564 and judging that the game is advantageous or disadvantageous.

Further, the base plate 32571 has a fourth convex portion 3257 that protrudes toward the first path member 32560 side.
1b and the fifth convex portion 32571c, and the fourth convex portion 32571b and the fifth convex portion 32571
and a sixth convex portion 32571d located below c and protruding toward the front plate 32564 side.

The fourth convex portion 32571b and the fifth convex portion 32571c are protrusions for guiding the game ball flowing down inside the special winning device 32550, and the base plate 32571 is positioned from the left-right direction outside (arrow LR direction outside) to the base. It is inclined downward toward the center of the plate 32571 .
As a result, the fourth convex portion 3 flows down between the base plate 32571 and the front plate 32564 facing each other.
2571b or the game ball that collides with the fifth convex portion 32571c, the fourth convex portion 32571b
Alternatively, it can be made easier to flow down in the inclination direction of the fifth convex portion 32571c.

The sixth convex portion 32571d is formed below the fourth convex portion 32571b and the fifth convex portion 32571c described above, and is formed substantially at the center position of the base plate 32571 in the left-right direction. Also, the sixth convex portion 32571d extends in the direction of gravity. As a result, the fourth convex portion 32571b or the fifth convex portion 32571 flows down between the opposing base plate 32571 and the front plate 32564.
The game ball guided to c is distributed to either the left or right of the sixth convex portion 32571d.

The two opposing fourth wall portions 32573 include a plurality of other-side recesses 32573c recessed toward the inside in the opposing direction on the side surface on the outer side in the opposing direction, and adjustment holes 32573 penetrating in the opposing direction.
b and the adjustment holes 32573 formed inside the two fourth wall portions 32573 in the opposing direction.
and a housing portion 32573d surrounding b.

A plurality of other-side recessed portions 32573c are arranged side by side in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) of the fourth wall portion 32573 and extend in the direction of gravity. The other-side recessed portion 32573c is recessed to have a substantially triangular cross-section, and its cross-sectional shape is set to be substantially the same as that of the one-side protrusion 32565d. As a result, the one-side protrusion 32565d is inserted into the other-side recess 32573c, and the first path member 3 is
2560 can be positioned.

The adjustment hole 32573b is a portion through which the tip of the screw inserted through the through hole 32565c of the first path member 32560 is inserted into the housing portion 32573d. Also, the adjustment hole 3257
3b is formed as an elongated hole in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction), which allows the movement of the first path member 32560 with respect to the second path member 32570. As shown in FIG.

The accommodating portion 32573 d is formed to have a U-shaped cross section when viewed from the front, and both ends thereof are connected to the fourth wall portion 32573 . The housing portion 32573 d extends from the front surface of the base plate 32571 to the end portion of the front side of the fourth wall portion 32573 . As a result, the storage section 3
In the space surrounded by 2573d, a screw plate 32590 for screwing a screw inserted through the through hole 32565c and the adjustment hole 32573b can be accommodated.

The screwing plate 32590 is set to a dimension that allows it to be inserted into the space formed by the housing portion 32573d, and the width dimension in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) is equal to the front-rear direction dimension of the space formed by the housing portion 32573d ( (dimension of the fourth wall portion 32573 projecting toward the front side). As a result, the screw plate 32590 can be inserted inside the housing portion 32573d and can be moved in the front-rear direction.

The screwing plate 32590 includes a screwing hole 32591 into which a screw inserted through the through hole 32565c and the adjustment hole 32573b is screwed, and the front-rear direction of the screwing hole 32591 (arrow FB direction).
Guide protrusions 3259 protruding from both ends of the guide protrusions 3259 toward the facing surfaces of the fourth wall portions 32573 at two locations
2.

The screwing holes 32591 are formed at two locations and are formed side by side in the vertical direction. Also, 2
The threaded hole 32591 at the part is formed at a position where the distance dimension of one threaded hole 32591 from the upper end and the distance dimension of the other threaded hole 32591 from the lower end are the same. As a result, when the screw groove of one of the screw holes 32591 is crushed, the other screw hole 32591 can be used to fasten the screw by turning the screw plate 32590 upside down.

The guide protrusion 32592 is provided with an inclined surface that is inclined toward the screwing hole 32591 side while projecting from the front and rear end portions to both laterally outer sides by a predetermined amount. Thereby, the through hole 325
65c and the adjustment hole 32573b, the tip of the screw can be guided to the screwing hole 32591. As shown in FIG. Especially in this embodiment, when the threaded hole 32591 is damaged, a new threaded hole 32591 can be used by turning it upside down. In this case, the threaded hole 32 for the tip of the screw
Since the position of 591 is likely to be misaligned, the tip of the screw is inserted into the screw hole 32 as in this embodiment.
591 is particularly effective.

The adjustment method of the first path member 32560 with respect to the second path member 32570 of the special winning device 32550 configured as described above is as follows.
5c and screwed into the screw plate 32590 is loosened. This allows the second
The first path member 32560 is permitted to move with respect to the path member 32570 .

Next, by elastically deforming the first wall portion 32565 outward in the left-right direction with respect to the front plate 32564, the first path member 32 inserted into the other side concave portion 32573c of the second path member 32570
After pulling out the one-side protrusion 32565d of 560 from the other-side recess 32573c, the position in the front-rear direction is adjusted, and at the position after adjustment, the elastic deformation of the first wall portion 32655 is restored, and the one-side protrusion 3 is pulled out again.
2565d is inserted into the recess 32573c on the other side. Thereby, the second path member 32570
The first path member 32560 can be temporarily fixed (positioned) with respect to.

Finally, it is inserted into the through hole 32565c of the first path member 32560 and the screw plate 32
By re-tightening the screw that is screwed to 590, the first
The adjustment of path member 32560 is completed.

According to this, as described above, the one-side protrusion 32565d and the other-side recess 32573c are formed in corresponding shapes, so that the one-side protrusion 3256 can be secured by tightening the screw after temporary fixing.
5d can be pushed into the other side recess 32573c. Therefore, each position where the one-side protrusion 32565d can be inserted into the other-side recess 32573c can be adjusted so that the positions are always the same. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of variation in the flow of game balls depending on the operator who performs the adjustment, and the adjustment can be simplified.

Next, position adjustment of the second path member 32570 of the first path member 32560 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 186(a) is a cross-sectional view of the special winning device 32550,
FIG. 186(b) is a cross-sectional view of the special winning device 32550 along line CLXXXVIb-CLXXXVIb in FIG. 186(a).

As shown in FIG. 186, when the first path member 32560 on the left side (in the direction of arrow L) is pulled out to the front side (in the direction of arrow F) with respect to the second path member 32570, as shown in FIG. In addition, the distance between the front plate 32564 on the left side and the base plate 32571 facing each other is wider than that on the right side. In this case, the game ball flowing down between the front plate 32564 and the base plate 32571 is less likely to collide with the left fourth convex portion 32571b, so the game ball can easily flow down between the left side facing. . As a result, the front plate 32564 and the base plate 32571
The game ball flowing down between the opposing sides can be easily discharged from below on the left side.

Next, a special winning device 33550 in the thirty-third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the thirty-second embodiment, the case where the position of the second path member 32570 with respect to the second path member 32570 is adjusted while the first wall portion 32565 of the first path member 32560 is elastically deformed has been described. In the form, the first wall portion 33565 is attached to the front plate 32
564 is variably connected. In addition, for the same parts as the above embodiments,
The same reference numerals are given and the detailed description thereof is omitted.

187(a) is an exploded perspective front view of the first path member 33560 in the thirty-third embodiment, and FIG. 187(b) is a sectional view of the special winning device 33550. FIG. Note that FIG. 187 (
b) corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 186(c).

As shown in FIG. 187, the special winning device 33550 in the thirty-third embodiment includes a first path member 33560 arranged on the front side and a second path member arranged on the back side of the first path member 33560. 32570;

The first path member 33560 is a front plate 33 formed in a plate shape and arranged on the front side of the game area.
564 and first wall portions 33565 pivotally supported on the left and right ends of the front plate 33564 .

The front plate 32564 is a plate member that serves as a wall portion on the front side of a game ball flow-down path formed between facing a second path member 32570 described later, and is formed of a non-light-transmitting material. As a result, the game ball flowing down inside the special winning device 33550 can be made invisible to the player. As a result, it is possible to suppress the player from grasping the flowing direction of the game ball inside the special prize winning device 33550, thereby suppressing the player from quitting the game.

The holding portion 33564e is a member for holding a rod RD that pivotally supports a first wall portion 33565, which will be described later, and is set to a size that allows the rod RD to be inserted into the annularly formed inner portion. The holding portions 33564e are formed at two locations spaced apart by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction, and the axes of the annular portions of the holding portions 33564e are coaxial in the vertical direction. Further, of the two holding portions 33564e, the holding portion 33564e formed on the lower side
is formed at the lower end of the , and the lower end side is closed. As a result, the rod RD is moved to the holding portion 3
When the rod RD is inserted inside the holding portion 33564e from the upper side of the holding portion 3564e, it is possible to prevent the rod RD from dropping (coming out) from the lower end of the holding portion 33564e.

The first wall portion 33565 is a portion that is connected (fastened) to the second path member 32570, and includes a through hole 32565c penetrating circularly in the left-right direction (plate thickness direction) and two first wall portions 325
A plurality of one-side protrusions 32565d are arranged side by side on the opposing surface of 65 and protrude in a triangular cross section.
, a standing portion 32565e erected on the opposite surface side of the second wall portion 32566 from both ends of the first wall portion 32565 (in the direction of the arrow UD), and an annular cross-sectional shape on the front plate 33564 side. and a shaft-supported portion 33565f that protrudes into.

The pivotally supported portion 33565f is a portion into which the rod RD inserted into the holding portion 33564e of the front plate 33564 described above is inserted, and the inner portion formed in an annular shape is set to a size that allows the rod RD to be inserted. . The supported portions 33565f are formed at two locations spaced apart by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction, and the axes of the annular portions of the supported portions 33565f are coaxial in the vertical direction. In addition, the two shaft-supported portions 33565f have the above-described holding portion 335 therebetween.
A holding portion 33564e formed upward of 64e is provided.

As a result, the connection between the front plate 33564 and the first wall portion 33565 is
e and the supported portion 33565f are coaxially arranged, and a rod RD is inserted from above into the inner side of the holding portion 33564e and the supported portion 33565f.
4, a first wall portion 33565 is rotatably disposed.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 187(b), the base plate 325 of the second path member 32570
71, when the front plate 33564 of the first path member 33560 is arranged non-parallel, the angle of the first wall portion 33565 with respect to the front plate 33564 can be changed.

That is, in the thirty-second embodiment, when the front plate 32564 of the first path member 32560 is arranged non-parallel to the base plate 32571 of the second path member 32570, the front plate 325
It is necessary to hold the first wall portion 33565 in an elastically deformed state with respect to 64 . Further, when adjusting the position of the first path member 32560 with respect to the second path member 32570, the first wall portion 32565 is elastically deformed laterally outward with respect to the front plate 32564, and the second path member 32560
One side protrusion 325 of the first path member 32560 inserted into the other side recess 32573c of 2570
65d must be pulled out from the other side recess 32573c. For that purpose, the front plate 32564
and the first wall portion 32565 may be damaged.

On the other hand, in the thirty-third embodiment, since the first wall portion 33565 can be rotated with respect to the front plate 33564, it is not necessary to elastically deform the first path member 33560, and the front plate 33564 and the first wall are not required to be elastically deformed. It is possible to suppress breakage of the connecting portion with the portion 33565 .

The adjustment method of the first path member 33560 with respect to the second path member 32570 of the special winning device 33550 configured as described above is as follows.
5c and screwed into the screw plate 32590 is loosened. This allows the second
The first path member 33560 is permitted to move with respect to the path member 32570 .

Next, by rotating the first wall portion 33565 laterally outward with respect to the front plate 33564, the first path member 3356 inserted into the other recess 32573c of the second path member 32570
After pulling out the one side projection 32565d of 0 from the other side recess 32573c, the position in the front-rear direction is adjusted, and at the adjusted position, the rotation of the first wall portion 33565 is returned, and the one side projection 32565 is pulled out again.
d is inserted into the recess 32573c on the other side. Thereby, the first path member 32560 can be temporarily fixed to the second path member 32570 .

Finally, it is inserted into the through hole 32565c of the first path member 33560 and the screw plate 32
By re-tightening the screw that is screwed to 590, the first
The adjustment of path member 33560 is completed.

Next, referring to FIGS. 188 to 190, the special winning device 345 in the thirty-fourth embodiment
50 will be explained. In the thirteenth embodiment, the case where the direction in which the game ball flows is adjusted by adjusting the facing interval between the front and rear plates of the special winning device 13550 has been described.
In the thirty-fourth embodiment, the direction in which the game ball flows can be adjusted by changing the position of the projection that protrudes toward the inside of the flow-down path. In addition, for the same parts as the above embodiments,
The same reference numerals are given and the detailed description thereof is omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 188 and 189, the overall configuration of the special winning device 34550 will be described. FIG. 188(a) is a front view of a game board 34013 in the thirty-fourth embodiment, and FIG. 188(b) is CLXXXVIIIb-CLXXXVIIIb of FIG. 188(a).
It is a cross-sectional view of the game board 34013 taken along the line. 189 is an exploded perspective front view of the game board 34013. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 188 and 189, a special winning device 34550 in the thirty-fourth embodiment
is disposed above the first winning port 64 disposed on the game board 34013 . In addition, the special prize winning device 34550 is arranged so that the center line in the horizontal direction of the first path member 34560 arranged on the front side is aligned with the center line in the horizontal direction of the first prize winning port 64 in a front view. .

Furthermore, the special prize winning device 34550 and the first prize winning port 64 are arranged in the gravity direction (arrow UD direction).
It is disposed at a position separated by a diameter of the game ball. Thereby, the game ball discharged from the special winning device 34550 can be visually recognized by the player.

The special winning device 34550 is a first path member 345 arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side).
60, a second path member 34570 disposed on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the first path member 34560, and a fixture 34553 screwed on the back side of the second path member 34570. Prepare.

The first path member 34560 is a plate member that serves as a wall on the front side of a game ball flow-down path formed between opposing second path members 34570 described later, and is made of a non-light-transmitting material.
As a result, the game ball flowing down inside the special winning device 34550 can be made invisible to the player. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the flowing direction of the game ball inside the special prize winning device 34550, thereby preventing the player from quitting the game.

In addition, the first path member 34560 is formed in a plate shape, and includes a front plate 34564 arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the game area and a rear side (arrow F direction side) from the left and right ends of the front plate 34564 and a first wall portion 34565 erected on the B direction side).

The front plate 34564 is a plate member that serves as a wall portion on the front side of the flow-down path of the game ball formed between facing the second path member 32570 described later. Also, the outer shape in the front view is formed large. As a result, the second path member 34570 arranged on the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the first path member 34560 is moved to the front plate 3 .
4564 can be made difficult to visually recognize. Therefore, from the player's side, the second path member 3457
Visibility of 0 can be suppressed. Therefore, when the position of the second path member 34570 is changed, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the change.

The first wall portion 34565 is a portion fastened to the base plate 34060 of the game board 13, and is formed to have a substantially L-shaped cross section. The standing dimension of the first wall portion 34565 to the rear side is the front plate 345
64 and a fourth convex portion 34571b of a base plate 34571 to be described later.
8(b)) is set to a value slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball.

In addition, the first wall portion 34565 has a bent portion 34565g that is bent in a direction parallel to the front surface of the base plate 34060 from the erected tip portion, and a through hole 34565g1 penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed in the bent portion 34565g. be. The through hole 34565g1 is a hole through which a screw is inserted. By screwing the screw inserted through the through hole 34565g1 into the base plate 34060, the first
A path member 34560 can be fastened to the base plate 34060 .

The second path member 34570 includes a plate-like base plate 34571 facing the front plate 34564 of the first path member 34560 , and a columnar support portion 34579 projecting from the back side of the base plate 34571 .

The base plate 34571 is a member that forms a ball-throwing path for game balls in the gap between the front plate 34564 of the first path member 34560 and is formed at a position spaced apart from the front plate 34564 by a predetermined amount. In addition, the base plate 34571 has a fourth convex portion 345 that protrudes toward the front plate 34564 side.
71b. Thereby, it is possible to change the direction in which the game ball flowing down between the opposing base plate 34571 and the front plate 34564 collides with the fourth convex portion 34571b.

The support portion 34579 is a portion that supports the second path member 34570, and the columnar shaft is
It is formed at a position coaxial with the axis of the base plate 34571 (center of the base plate 34571). Also, in the base plate 34060 of the game board 34013, a circular through hole 34060d is opened at a position corresponding to the support portion 34579, and the support portion 34 is opened inside the through hole 34060d.
579 is inserted. Thereby, the second path member 34570 is pivotally supported by the base plate 34060 .

The supporting portion 34579 has a fastening hole 34579a recessed at the projecting tip. fastening hole 345
79a is recessed coaxially with the axis of the support portion 34579, and the inner peripheral surface thereof is internally threaded. As a result, the screw portion 34553b of the fixture 34553 that is inserted through the through hole 34060d from the back side of the base plate 34060 can be screwed into the fastening hole 34579a.

The fixture 34553 is a fastening member for fastening the above-described second path member 34570 to the base plate 34060 of the game board 34013. The operation portion 34553a is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the operation portion 34553a protrudes from the front side thereof. and a screw portion 34553b provided.

The operating portion 34553a is a portion that is gripped by an operator who disposes the second path member 34570 on the base plate 34060, and is formed to have a larger outer shape than the through hole 34060d formed in the base plate 34060. Further, the operation portion 34553a is connected to the through hole 34 of the base plate 34060.
The outer diameter is set to be larger than the inner diameter of 060d.

As a result, when the screw portion 34553b of the fixture 34553 is screwed into the fastening hole 34579a and the second path member 34570 is disposed on the base plate 34060, the fixture 34553
can be suppressed from coming out to the front side of the base plate 34060 through the through hole 34060d.

The screw portion 34553b is formed in a cylindrical shape coaxial with the axis of the operation portion 34553a,
A male screw is processed on the outer peripheral surface. As described above, the threaded portion 34553b is a portion that is screwed into the fastening hole 34579a of the second path member 34570, is set to have an outer diameter smaller than the through hole 34060d of the base plate 34060, and is inserted through the through hole 34060d. is screwed into the fastening hole 34579 a of the second path member 34570 .

According to the special winning device 34550 configured as described above, when changing the discharge position of the game ball discharged from the special winning device 34550, the operator moves the base plate 34 of the game board 13
A hand (arm) is inserted from the front side (arrow F direction side) of the game board 13 to the back side (arrow B direction side) of the base plate 34060 through the first opening 60a (center frame 86) formed in 060. to access the operation portion 34553a of the fixture 34553.

Next, the operation portion 34553a is rotated to open the fastening hole 34579 of the second path member 34570.
Loosen the screw portion 34553b screwed to a. As a result, the second path member 34570 is made rotatably displaceable about the support portion 34579 , and the second path member 34570 is rotated to change the position of the fourth projection 34571 b of the second path member 34570 . Fourth convex portion 345
71b is changed, the position where the game ball flowing down inside the special winning device 34550 collides with the fourth convex portion 34571b is changed, so the discharge position of the game ball discharged from the special winning device 34550 is changed. can be changed.

In this case, as described above, the base plate 34571 of the second path member 34570 is formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front, and the support portion 34579 is formed coaxially with the axis thereof, so that the second path member 34570 can be rotated. In this case, it is possible to suppress a change in the arrangement of the second path member 34570 with respect to the base plate 34060 in front view. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing that the second path member 34570 has been rotated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from deciding that the game is disadvantageous and not playing the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 190, the change of the game ball discharge position when the position of the fourth convex portion 34571b (the second path member 34570) is changed will be described. Figure 190(a) to Figure 1
90(d) is a cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 34010 along line CXC-CXC in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 190, the fourth protrusion 34571b has a substantially V-shaped protruding shape when viewed from the front. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 190(a), when the bent side of the V-shape is arranged on the lower side, the game ball flowing in from above the special winning device 34550 is thrown to the central portion along the slope of the V-shape. can be done easily. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the game ball to flow into the winning opening 64 arranged below the special winning device 34550 .

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 190(b), when the bent side of the V-shape is arranged on the upper side, the game balls flowing in from above the special winning device 34550 are moved to the left and right ends along the slope of the V-shape. Makes it easier to throw the ball. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for game balls to flow into the prize winning port 64 arranged below the special prize winning device 34550 .

Also, as shown in FIGS. 190(c) and 190(b), when the bent side of the V-shape is arranged at either end of the left or right, the game ball flowing in from above the special winning device 34550 To easily throw a ball along the slope of the upper side of the V, and to throw a game ball thrown to the lower side of the V without colliding with the upper side of the V along the slope of the lower side of the V. can be done. Therefore,
The direction in which the game ball is thrown can be changed by the difference in the area where the game ball collides between the upper side of the V and the lower side of the V.

Although detailed description is omitted, it is also possible to dispose the bent portion of the fourth convex portion 34571b at a position other than the positions shown in FIGS. 190(a) to 190(d). For example, FIG.
When the second path member 34570 is rotated 10 degrees in the right direction in front view from the position shown in 0(a), the game balls flowing in from above the special winning device 34550 are caused to flow down along the V-shaped slope. Thus, the game ball can be easily discharged from a position slightly shifted to the left (arrow L direction side) from the upper side of the prize winning port 64 disposed below the special prize winning device 34550 .

Next, referring to FIGS. 191 to 193, the special winning device 355 in the thirty-fifth embodiment
50 will be explained. In the thirty-fourth embodiment, the case where the second path member 34570 is rotated to change the position of the fourth projection 34571b has been described.
The second path member 35570 is slid to change the position of the fourth projection 35571b. In addition, the same reference numerals are given to the same parts as those of the above-described embodiments, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 191 and 192, the special winning device 35 in the thirty-fifth embodiment
550 will be explained. FIG. 191(a) shows a game board 35013 in the thirty-fifth embodiment
191(b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board 35013 taken along line CXCIb-CXCIb of FIG. 191(a). FIG. 192 is an exploded perspective view of the special winning device 35550. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 191 and 192, a special winning device 35550 in the thirty-fifth embodiment
is arranged on the upper side (arrow U direction side) of the first prize winning port 64 arranged on the game board 35013 . Also, in the special prize winning device 35550, the horizontal center line of the first path member 35560 arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) is aligned with the horizontal center line of the first prize winning opening 64 in a front view. arranged in a shape.

Furthermore, the special prize winning device 35550 and the first prize winning port 64 are arranged in the gravity direction (arrow UD direction).
It is disposed at a position separated by a diameter of the game ball. Thereby, the game ball ejected from the special winning device 35550 can be visually recognized by the player.

The special winning device 34550 is a first path member 355 arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side).
60, a second path member 35570 disposed on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the first path member 35560, and a fixture 34553 screwed on the back side of the second path member 35570. Prepare.

The first path member 35560 is a plate member that serves as a wall on the front side of a game ball flow-down path formed between opposing second path members 35570 described later, and is made of a non-light-transmitting material.
As a result, it is possible to make the flowing direction of the game ball inside the special winning device 35550 invisible to the player. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the flowing direction of the game ball inside the special prize winning device 35550, thereby preventing the player from quitting the game.

In addition, the first path member 35560 is formed in a plate shape and includes a front plate 34564 arranged on the front side of the game area, and a front plate 34564 that stands on the rear side (arrow B direction side) from the left and right ends of the front plate 34564. and a first wall portion 35565 provided.

The front plate 35564 is a plate member that serves as a wall on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the flow-down path of the game ball formed between facing the second path member 35570 described later, and the second path member described later. The outer shape of the 35570 is formed to be larger than the base plate 35571 of the 35570 when viewed from the front. As a result, the second path member 35 disposed on the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the first path member 35560
570 can be made difficult to see with the front plate 35564 . Therefore, the second
Visibility of the path member 35570 can be suppressed. Therefore, when the position of the second path member 35570 is changed, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the change.

The first wall portion 35565 is a portion that is fastened to the base plate 60 of the game board 35013, and the standing dimension of the first wall portion 34565 formed in a substantially L-shaped cross section to the rear side is the front plate 3556
4 and a fourth projection 35571b of a base plate 35571, which will be described later.
(b)) is set to a value slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball.

In addition, the first wall portion 35565 has a bent portion 35565g that is bent in a direction parallel to the front surface of the base plate 60 from the standing tip portion, and penetrates the bent portion 35565g in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). and a recessed portion 35565g2 recessed from the rear surface of the bent portion 35565g toward the front side (arrow F direction side).

The through-hole 35565g1 is a hole through which a screw is inserted, and by screwing the screw inserted through the through-hole 35565g1 into the base plate 60, the first path member 35560 can be fastened to the base plate 60.

The recessed portion 35565g2 is a portion that accommodates both the left and right (arrow LR direction side) ends of the base plate 35571 of the second path member 35570, which will be described later. , is recessed in the vertical central portion of the bent portion 35565g. As a result, when the left and right ends of the base plate 35571 are accommodated inside the recessed portion 35565g2, the left and right ends of the base plate 35571 can be hidden by the bent portions 35365g. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the position of the base plate 35571 . As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from deciding that the game is disadvantageous and not playing the game.

Further, the recess dimension of the recessed portion 35565g2 is set to a depth dimension larger than the plate thickness of the base plate 35571, and the separation distance X5 (Fig. 191) between the left and right ends of the bent portion 35565g.
(b)) is set larger than the width dimension X6 (see FIG. 191(b)) of the base plate 35571 in the horizontal direction. Thereby, the base plate 35571 (second path member 35570) can be displaced in the left-right direction. Note that the base plate 35571 (the second path member 3557
0) will be described later.

The second path member 35570 is a plate-like base plate 35571 facing the front plate 35564 of the first path member 35560, and protrudes in a rectangular shape in a rear view from the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the base plate 35571. and a support portion 35579 .

The base plate 35571 is a member that forms a ball-throwing path for game balls in the gap between the front plate 35564 of the first path member 35560 and is formed at a position spaced apart from the front plate 35564 by a predetermined amount. The base plate 35571 also includes a fourth protrusion 35571b that protrudes toward the front plate 35564 (arrow F direction). As a result, the base plate 35571 and the front plate 3556
It is possible to change the direction in which the game ball flowing down between 4 is collided with the fourth convex portion 35571b.

The support portion 35579 is a portion that pivotally supports the second path member 35570, and the base plate 345
A cylindrical shaft is formed at a position coaxial with the shaft of 71 (center of base plate 34571).
In the base plate 60 of the game board 34013, a sliding hole 35060e elongated in the horizontal direction is opened at a position corresponding to the supporting portion 35579, and the supporting portion 35579 is inserted inside the sliding hole 35060e. be. The second path member 35570 is thereby supported by the base plate 60 .

The width of the slide hole 35060e in the lateral direction (direction of arrows UD) is set to be substantially the same as the dimension of the support portion 35579 in the vertical direction (direction of arrows UD). The width dimension in the longitudinal direction (direction of arrows LR) is set larger than the dimension in the direction (direction of arrows LR). This allows the support portion 35579 inserted inside the slide hole 35060e to be slidable in the longitudinal direction of the slide hole 35060e.

In addition, the supporting portion 35579 has a fastening hole 35579a recessed at the projecting tip. The fastening hole 35579a is internally threadable, and the threaded portion 34553b of the fixture 34553 can be screwed into the fastening hole 35579a. In addition, the projecting dimension of the support portion 34579 is
It is set to be smaller than the thickness dimension of the base plate 60, and the fastener 34 is inserted into the fastening hole 35579a.
By screwing the screw portion 34553b of 553, the second path member 35570 is attached to the base plate 6.
Can be fixed to 0.

According to the special winning device 35550 configured as described above, when changing the discharge position of the game ball discharged from the special winning device 35550, the operator can change the position of the game ball formed on the base plate 60 of the game board 35013. 1 Game board 3501 through opening 60a (center frame 86)
A hand (arm) is inserted from the front side (arrow F direction side) of 3 to the back side (arrow B direction side) of the base plate 60 to access the operation portion 34553 a of the fixture 34553 .

Next, the operation portion 34553a is rotated to open the fastening hole 35579 of the second path member 35570.
Loosen the screw portion 34553b screwed to a. As a result, the second path member 35570 is slidably displaced in the left-right direction, and the second path member 35570 is slidably displaced to change the position of the fourth projection 35571b of the second path member 35570 . Fourth convex portion 3557
When the position of 1b is changed, the position where the game ball flowing down inside the special winning device 35550 collides with the fourth convex portion 35571b is changed, so the discharge position of the game ball discharged from the special winning device 35550 can be changed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 193, the change of the game ball discharge position when the position of the fourth convex portion 35571b (the second path member 35570) is changed will be described. Figure 193(a) to Figure 1
93(c) is the game board 3501 on the CXCIII-CXCIII line in FIG. 191(b)
3 is a sectional view of FIG. 193(a) to 193(c), the position of the second path member 35570 in FIG. 193(b) is set as a reference position, and in FIG. 193(c) shows a state in which the second path member 35570 is displaced to the right (arrow R direction) in front view from the reference position.

As shown in FIG. 193, the fourth convex portion 35571b has a substantially V-shaped protruding shape in a front view, and a game ball flowing in from above the special winning device 35550 is positioned at the center along the V-shaped slope. portion (V-shaped bent portion).

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 193(b), when the V-shaped bent portion of the fourth convex portion 35571b is arranged above the first winning opening 64, the special winning device 35550 is ejected from below. It is possible to make it easier to flow the game ball that is in the first prize winning port 64.例文帳に追加

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 193(a) and 193(c), when the second path member 35570 is moved from the reference position (the position shown in FIG. 193(b)), the V of the fourth convex portion 35571b
Since the bent portion of the character is arranged at a position shifted to the left or right from the upper part of the first prize winning port 64, compared to the case where the second path member 35570 is arranged at the reference position, the special prize winning device 3555
It is made difficult for game balls discharged from below 0 to flow into the first winning port 64.例文帳に追加

Next, with reference to FIG. 194, the special winning device 36550 in the thirty-sixth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the first unit 5 arranged on the front side of the base plate 60
51 is fastened to the second unit 552 disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 and held in a state of being biased toward the back side of the base plate 60, but the thirty-sixth embodiment In the form, the first unit 36551 is biased toward the rear side of the base plate 60 by the elastic recovery force of the fastening portion 36551b formed in the first unit 36551 . In addition, the same reference numerals are given to the same parts as those of the above-described embodiments, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 194(a) is an exploded perspective front view schematically showing the game board 36013 in the thirty-sixth embodiment, and FIG. 194(b) is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the game board 36013. FIG. In addition, Fig. 1
94 corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 194, the special prize winning device 36550 in the thirty-sixth embodiment is slid from the inside of the first opening 60a in which the center frame 86 is arranged, and the base plate 6 is displaced.
It is formed from a first unit 36551 arranged at 0.

The first unit 36551 has a space in which a game ball can be thrown, and the space is arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the base plate 60 . As a result, game balls flowing down the front of the base plate 60 can be made to flow into the first unit 36551 . Also, the first
The unit 36551 includes a fastening portion 36551b projecting from the side surface (rear surface) adjacent to the front surface of the base plate 60 toward the rear surface side (arrow B direction side).

The fastening portion 36551b is a portion through which a screw for fastening the first unit 36551 to the base plate 60 is inserted.
The projecting tip is bent in a direction parallel to the back surface of the.

In addition, the fastening portion 36551b has a bulging portion 36551b2 that bulges toward the front side (arrow F direction) on the side surface of the bending side, and a plate thickness direction (arrow FB and a through hole 36551b1 penetrating in the direction).

In addition, the fastening portion 36551b has a distance dimension X7 from the base end (the rear surface of the first unit 36551) to the front surface of the bent portion when the first unit 36551 is not attached to the base plate 60 (see FIG. 194(b)). is set larger than the thickness dimension of the base plate 60 .
In addition, the fastening portion 36551b has a distance dimension X8 (FIG. 194 (b)) is set equal to or slightly smaller than the thickness dimension of the base plate 60 .

When a screw is fastened to the through hole 36551b1, the bulging portion 36551b2 presses (biases) the first unit 36551 against the back side (arrow F direction) of the base plate 60. and is formed between the proximal end of the bent portion of the fastening portion 36551b and the through hole 36551b1.

As a result, when the screw inserted through the fastening portion 36551b is fastened to the rear surface of the base plate 60, the bulging portion 36551b2 abuts the rear surface of the base plate 60, thereby dividing the gap between the bent portion and the base plate 60. , the force of pushing the bent distal end side toward the base plate 60 by the screw can be converted into a force pulling out the proximal end side of the bent portion toward the rear side (arrow B direction side). Thereby, formation of a gap between the rear surface of the first unit 36551 and the front surface of the base plate 60 can be suppressed.

As a result, there is no need to fasten the screw through which the first unit 36551 is inserted from the front side to the base plate 60, and the first unit 36551 can be easily formed large by the fastening margin. In addition, in the thirty-sixth embodiment, the first unit 36551 is attached to the base plate 60 using the first opening 60a to which the center frame 86 is fastened.
6551 can be slidably displaced to facilitate attachment to the first opening 60 a of the base plate 60 .

Next, with reference to FIG. 195, the special winning device 37550 in the thirty-seventh embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the first unit 5 arranged on the front side of the base plate 60
51 is fastened to the second unit 552 disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 and held in a state of being biased toward the back side of the base plate 60, but the thirty-seventh embodiment In the form, the first unit 37551 is fastened by screws inserted from the back side of the base plate 60 and held in a state of being biased toward the back side of the base plate 60 . In addition, the same reference numerals are given to the same parts as those of the above-described embodiments, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 195(a) is an exploded perspective front view schematically showing the game board 37013 in the thirty-seventh embodiment, and FIG. 195(b) is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the game board 37013. FIG. In addition, Fig. 1
95 (b) corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 195, the special prize winning device 37550 in the thirty-seventh embodiment is formed from a first unit 37551 arranged in front of the base plate 60 .

The first unit 37551 has a space in which a game ball can be thrown, and the space is arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the base plate 60 . As a result, game balls flowing down the front of the base plate 60 can be made to flow into the first unit 37551 . Also, the first
The unit 37551 has a plurality of annular projections 3 projecting annularly on the back side (arrow B direction side).
7551b.

The annular convex portion 37551b is a portion into which a screw inserted from the back side of the base plate 60 is screwed, and the inner peripheral surface thereof is internally threaded. In addition, in the present embodiment, four circular convex portions 37551b are formed on the rear surface of the first unit 37551. As shown in FIG.

A circular recess 37060d is formed in the base plate 60 at a position facing the annular protrusion 37551b. The concave portion 37060d is a portion into which the annular convex portion 37551b is inserted, and is formed with an inner diameter substantially equal to the outer diameter of the annular convex portion 37551b. In addition, the recess depth of the recess 37060d is set larger than the projecting dimension of the annular protrusion 37551b.

In addition, a circular through hole 37060d1 penetrating through the recess 37060d is formed on the bottom surface of the recess 37060d. The through-hole 37060d1 is formed by an annular projection 3755
It is a hole through which the tip of a screw to be screwed into 1b is inserted, and is formed in an opening with an inner diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the recess 37060d. As a result, screws can be fastened to the first unit 37551 arranged on the front side (arrow F direction) of the base plate 60 from the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the base plate 60 .

In this case, as described above, the recess depth of the recess 37060d is set to be larger than the projecting dimension of the annular projection 37551b. The first unit 37551 can be arranged on the base plate 60 in a state in which the convex portion 37551b (the first unit 37551) is biased toward the rear side (arrow B direction side). Thereby, formation of a gap between the rear surface of the first unit 37551 and the front surface of the base plate 60 can be suppressed.

As a result, there is no need to fasten the screw through which the first unit 37551 is inserted from the front side to the base plate 60, and the first unit 37551 can be easily formed large by the fastening margin. In addition, in the thirty-seventh embodiment, since the fastening portion of the first unit 37551 can be accommodated inside the concave portion 37060d of the base plate 60, the first unit 37551
It is possible to increase the space for throwing the game ball formed in the space.

<Change the amount of light emitted to the front side by the game ball>
196 and 197, the lower displacement member 384 in the thirty-eighth embodiment
40 will be explained. In the eleventh embodiment, a shadow is formed at the position of the game ball accommodated in the lower displacement member 11440 by light emitted from the control board 491, and the position of the game ball is recognized at the position of the shadow. However, the lower displacement member 11 in the thirty-eighth embodiment
440 reflects the light emitted from the control board 491 on the outer surface of the game ball, and recognizes the position of the game ball at a position where the amount of light is increased. In addition, the same reference numerals are given to the same parts as those of the above-described embodiments, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 196 is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement member 38440 in the thirty-eighth embodiment.
197(a) is a front view of the lower displacement member 38440, and FIG. 197(b) is a front view of FIG.
197(a) is a cross-sectional view of the lower displacement member 38440 along line CXCVIIb-CXCVIIb, and FIG. 197(c) is a cross-sectional view of the lower displacement member 38440 along line CXCVIIc-CXCVIIc of FIG. 197(a). In addition, in FIG. 197(a), the front side decorative member 384
51 and the front case 38481 are removed, and the front case 38
The LED 38483b arranged in 481 is illustrated by a chain double-dashed line. Also, FIG. 197(b)
And in FIG. 197(c), the state in which the front side decorative portion 451 is attached is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 196 and 197, the lower displacement member 38440 in the thirty-eighth embodiment includes a base member 470 connected to the front base 411 (see FIG. 46) and its base member 470.
A case member 38480 covering both sides in the front-back direction (direction of arrows FB) of 70, a transmission mechanism 460 displaceably arranged between the case member 38480 and the base member 470, and covering the front and rear of the case member 38480. and a decorative member 11450 formed in a manner.

The case member 38480 is a member that covers both sides of the base member 470 in the front-rear direction (direction of arrows FB), and is arranged on the front side of the base member 470 (direction of arrow F).
8481 and a rear case 482 arranged on the rear side (arrow B direction side).

The front case 38481 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular plate shape when viewed from the front. Also, the front case 38
481 has an opening 481a extending in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR) approximately in the middle position in the vertical direction (direction of arrows UD), and a bottom wall portion protruding from the lower end surface on the rear side (direction of arrow B). 481b, a shaft hole 481c penetrating in the front-rear direction at the lower end, and the LED board 38 arranged on the back side.
483 and .

The LED board 38483 is a member that causes the inside of the lower displacement member 38440 (front case 38481) to emit light.
and a plurality of LEDs 38483b disposed in and emitting light.

The body portion 38483a is a base on which wiring that conducts electricity to the plurality of LEDs 38483b is laid, and extends in the displacement direction of the ball receiving portion 467 (arrow LR direction). Multiple LEDs 384
83b are arranged at predetermined intervals in the extending direction (direction of arrows LR) of main body 38483a.

Moreover, each LED38483b is set in the direction toward the center of the game ball when the game ball passes through the back side (arrow B direction side) of each LED38483b. Thereby, each LED 38
When the game ball is positioned on the back side of 483b, the light of the LED can be reflected on the outer surface of the game ball to irradiate the front decoration portion 11451. FIG. Therefore, as described above, the front decorative portion 11451 includes the transmission portion 11451b that can transmit light, so that the light reflected on the outer surface of the game ball and irradiated to the front decoration portion 11451 passes through the transmission portion 11451b. It can be emitted to the player side (arrow F direction side) through. Therefore, the amount of light visible from the player's side through the transparent portion 11451b can be increased in the portion reflected by the game ball as compared to other portions. As a result, by increasing (changing) the amount of light, the player can recognize the position of the game ball thrown into the lower displacement member 38440 .

In addition, in this embodiment, the interval at which the plurality of LEDs 38483b are arranged is set smaller than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, even when the game ball received in the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced, at least part of the game ball can be irradiated with the light emitted from the LED 38483b. Therefore, the light emitted from the LED 38483b can be constantly irradiated to the game ball received in the ball receiving portion 467. FIG.

Further, according to the thirty-eighth embodiment, the base member 470, the transmission mechanism 460, and the rear case 482, which are arranged on the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the LED 38483b, are preferably members having a high light absorption rate. For example, the outer surface of each member constitutes a black color scheme. According to this, the LED
The light emitted from 38483b can be prevented from being reflected inside the case member 38480 (lower displacement member 38440) and emitted from the transmitting portion 11451b of the front decorative portion 11451. As a result, the difference in the amount of emitted light can be increased between the front where the game ball is arranged and the other front, and the player recognizes the position of the game ball received inside the lower displacement member 39440. can be made easier.

198 and 199, the lower displacement member 3944 in the thirty-ninth embodiment
0 will be explained. In the thirty-eighth embodiment, the case where the player recognizes the position where the game ball is arranged by reflecting the light from the game ball has been described.
Light is reflected by a reflecting member arranged in 9467 to recognize the position of the game ball. In addition,
The same reference numerals are assigned to the same parts as those of the above-described embodiments, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 198 is an exploded perspective rear view of the lower displacement member 39440 in the thirty-ninth embodiment.
FIG. 199(a) is a front view of the lower displacement member 39440, and FIG. 199(b) and FIG.
(c) is a cross-sectional view of the lower displacement member 39440. FIG. Note that FIGS. 199(b) and 199(
c) corresponds to the cross section of FIG. 198(c).

As shown in FIGS. 198 and 199, the lower displacement member 39440 in the thirty-ninth embodiment includes a base member 470 connected to the front base 411 (see FIG. 46) and its base member 470.
a case member 38480 that covers the front and rear of the case member 38480; a transmission mechanism 39460 that is displaceably arranged between the case member 38480 and the base member 470; , provided.

The transmission mechanism 39460 is a member arranged on the front side of the base member 470, and includes transmission gears 461, 462, and 463, and a driving motor KM2 whose shaft portion is connected to the transmission gear 461.
, a movable rack 464 having a tooth surface that meshes with the transmission gear 463 and slidably displaceable on the front side of the base member 470; , a rack 39466 having a tooth surface that meshes with the transmission gear 465 and slidably displaceable on the front side of the movable rack 464, and the rack 39466 Ball receiving portion 39467 rotatably disposed on one end side
and are formed mainly.

The rack 39466 is formed of a horizontally long rod-shaped body that is rectangular when viewed from the front, and includes a rack gear 466a engraved on the upper end surface, a shaft portion 39466b projecting in a columnar shape from the end on the other end side to the front side, and a shaft portion 39466b projecting to the front side. and a recessed portion 466d recessed from one end to the other end on the back side.

The shaft portion 39466b is a protrusion that is inserted into a shaft hole 467b of a ball receiving portion 39467, which will be described later, and is formed in a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter larger than the inner diameter of the shaft hole 467b. As a result, the ball receiving portion 4
67 can be rotatably held.

The ball receiving portion 39467 includes a first piece 39467c that is bent into a substantially L shape when viewed from the front, a second piece 39467d that is connected to the first piece 39467c, and a second piece 39467d that is connected to the second piece 39467d. and a third piece 39467e disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the first piece 39467c and the second piece 39467d.

The first piece 39467c and the second piece 39467d are portions for holding a game ball thrown to the inside of the lower displacement member 39440 from the opening 451a (see FIG. 57), and the first piece 39467c
and the second piece 39467d when the game ball is thrown between the opposing pieces, the second piece 39467d is displaced in the direction away from the first piece 39467c, part of the first piece 39467c and the second piece 39
467d are arranged in a U shape in a front view, and a game ball can be held in the inner part of the U shape.

The first piece 39467c is composed of a receiving piece 39467c4 forming one extended side that is L-shaped in front view, a leg portion 467a forming the other extending side, and the receiving piece 39467c4 and the leg portion 467a. An annular bent portion 39467c5 in which a shaft hole 467b penetrating in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) is formed in the connecting portion (bent portion), and a connecting portion 39467c1 projecting to the opposite side with the bent portion 39467c5 interposed therebetween. And prepare.

The receiving piece 39467c4 is a portion that forms a side surface on the other side (arrow R direction side) of the U-shape formed by the first piece 39467c and the second piece 39467d. It is formed in a curved shape that is concave in the direction away from the second piece 39467d.

The connecting portions 39467c1 are protruded from two locations at predetermined intervals in the axial direction (arrow FB direction) of the bent portion 39467c5. In addition, the connecting portion 39467c1 is connected to the second piece 3 described later.
9467d and the third piece 39467e are connected, and includes a connecting hole 39467c2 extending along the axial direction of the shaft hole 467b and having a circular cross section.

The connecting hole 39467c2 is a shaft portion 39467e projecting from a third piece 39467e described later.
3 is the opening into which it is inserted. A shaft portion 39467e3 inserted through an insertion hole 39467d3 formed in a second piece 39467d, which will be described later, of the connecting hole 39467c2 faces the front side (arrow F direction side).
inserted from Also, the shaft portion 39467e3 is fastened by a screw inserted from the opposite side (arrow B direction side) to the insertion side of the connecting hole 39467c2. This allows the first piece 39467
A second piece 39467d and a third piece 39467e can be fastened to c.

In addition, the first piece 39467c has a recess 39467c3 recessed downward in the direction of gravity (arrow D direction) on the projecting base end side of the connecting portion 39467c1. The recessed bottom surface of the recessed part 39467c3 is formed at the lowest position (bottom part) of the side surfaces where the game ball is held by the first piece 39467c and the second piece 39467d. Thereby, the first piece 39467c and the second piece 39467d
The game ball held in is rolled inside the recess 39467c3. As a result, the second piece 39467d can be easily displaced with respect to the first piece 39467c by the load of the game ball.

The second piece 39467d includes the receiving portion 39467c4 of the first piece 39467c and the second piece 394
67d forms a side surface on the other side (in the direction of the arrow L) that is formed in a U shape when viewed from the front. It is formed into a curved shape. Also, the second piece 39467d is connected to the first piece 39467c
An insertion hole 39467d3 that opens in a circular shape in the front-rear direction in the connecting portion of the , and a recessed portion 39467d2 that is recessed in a circular shape from the front side (arrow F direction side) to the back side (arrow B direction side). Prepare the Lord.

The second piece 39467d is inserted into the insertion hole 39467d3 and the shaft portion 3946 of the third piece 39467e.
7e3 is inserted, and the connecting shaft 39467e of the third piece 39467e is inserted into the concave portion 39467d2.
4 is inserted. Therefore, when the second piece 39567d is displaced, the third piece 39467e is likewise displaced. Therefore, when the second piece 39567d is rotationally displaced with respect to the first piece 39467c, the third piece 39567e is similarly rotationally displaced with respect to the first piece 39467c.

Furthermore, the second piece 39467d has connecting portions 39 protruding from two locations of the first piece 39467c.
467c1 is disposed between the opposing members and connected to the first piece 39467c. This allows the second
When the piece 39467d is twisted in the axial direction of the insertion hole 39467d3, the connecting portion 39467c
1, the second piece 39467d is brought into contact with the side surface on the opposite side to prevent the shaft portion 39467e3 from breaking.

The recessed portion 39467d2 is a hole into which a connecting shaft 39467e4 of the third piece 39467e, which will be described later, is inserted, and is recessed in substantially the same shape as the connecting shaft 39467e4.

The third piece 39467e includes a reflector 39467e1 formed in a substantially semicircular plate shape when viewed from the front,
A shaft portion 394 projecting from the reflecting plate 39467e1 toward the rear side (arrow B direction side)
67e3 and a connecting shaft 39467e4.

The reflector 39467e1 is made of a resin material and plated on its outer surface. Accordingly, when the light emitted from the LED 38483b is applied to the reflecting plate 39467e1, the light can be reflected on the outer surface thereof. In addition, the reflector 39467e1
The whole is curved in an arc shape toward the front side (arrow F direction side). Thereby, when the light irradiated from the front side is reflected, the light can be focused on a predetermined portion. The shielding of light from the light emitter 11491a by the reflector 39467e1 will be described later.

The shaft portion 39467e3 is a cylindrical body inserted into the connecting hole 39467c2 of the first piece 39467c and the insertion hole 39467d3 of the second piece 39467d as described above. Also, the shaft portion 3
A connecting hole 394 is formed from the side opposite to the insertion side of the shaft portion 39467e3 on the projecting distal end surface of the shaft portion 39467e3.
A hole into which a screw to be inserted into 67c2 can be screwed is formed. Therefore, when the shaft portion 39467e3 is inserted into the connecting hole 39467c2 and the insertion hole 39467d3, the shaft portion 39467e3
The first piece 39467c, the second piece 39467d, and the third piece 39467e can be connected by fastening a screw to the insertion tip surface of the first piece 39467e.
7c can be made rotatable.

As described above, the connecting shaft 39467e4 is connected to the concave portion 39467d of the second piece 39467d.
2 is inserted. As a result, the second piece 39467d is positioned at the shaft portion 3 with respect to the first piece 39467c.
When rotationally displacing about 9467e3, the connecting shaft 39467e4 can be displaced along with the displacement of the second piece 39467d. Therefore, the third piece 39467e is replaced by the second piece 39467
It can be displaced with the displacement of d.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 199, when a game ball is received between the first piece 39467c and the second piece 39467d, the ball receiving portion 39467 moves the received game ball to the first piece 39467d.
It rolls on the receiving surfaces of the 9467c and the second piece 39467d (the inner side surfaces formed in a U shape when viewed from the front) and is guided to the concave portion 39467c3 located at the lowest end of the receiving surfaces. This will
The outer surface of the game ball can rotate the second piece 39467d about the shaft portion 39467e3 in a direction away from the first piece 39467c. As a result, the third piece 39467e, which moves along with the displacement of the second piece 39467d, can be displaced upward and arranged on the irradiation of light from the LED 38483b.

Therefore, the light emitted from the LED 38483b is reflected by the reflector 394 of the third piece 39467e.
Reflected by 67e1 to the front side (arrow F direction side) of the lower displacement member 39440, the transmission part 1
It can be emitted from 1451b. As a result, the amount of light emitted from the transmitting portion 11451b is partially increased, and the player can recognize the position of the game ball thrown into the lower displacement member 39440. FIG.

Also, the connecting shaft 39467e4 is inserted into the concave portion 39467d2 of the second piece 39467d, and the load of the third piece 39467e is always applied. The center of gravity G of the third piece 39467e is set on the opposite side of the connecting portion between the second piece 39567d and the third piece 39567e across the shaft portion 394673e. As a result, when no force other than gravity acts on the second piece 39467d and the third piece 39467de, the load of the third piece 39467e causes the second piece 39
467e can be rotated to the first piece 39467c4 side.

Therefore, when the game ball is ejected (taken out) from the ball receiving portion 39467, the third piece 394
The second piece 39467d can be displaced toward the ball receiving piece 39467c4 of the first piece 39467c by the load of 67e. Therefore, only when a game ball is received by the ball receiving portion 39467, the amount of light reflected by the reflecting plate 39467e1 and emitted from the transmitting portion 11451b can be partially increased. As a result, it is possible to suppress the light from being reflected by the reflecting plate 39467e1 due to the positioning operation of the ball receiving portion 39467 or the like.

Further, similarly to the ball receiving portion 467 in the first embodiment, the ball receiving portion 39467 is rotated around the shaft hole 39467b by the operation of slidingly displacing the inside of the lower displacement member 39440, and the lower displacement member 39440 is emitted. A game ball received from the opening 471 (see FIG. 66) is discharged to the outside.

Here, as a structure for discharging the game ball received in the ball receiving portion 39467, the ball receiving portion 39
In the structure in which the ball receiving portion 39467 rotates about the shaft hole 467b as the ball 467 slides, the sliding speed of the ball receiving portion 39467 causes the ball receiving portion 39 to rotate about the shaft hole 467b.
467 rotation speed is changed. Therefore, since the rotation speed depends only on the sliding speed of the ball receiving portion 39467, there is a problem that the ejection speed of the game ball from the ball receiving portion 39467 is not stable.

On the other hand, in the thirty-ninth embodiment, the load of the third piece 39467e causes the second piece 39467 to
Since the direction in which d rotates and the direction in which the ball receiving portion 39467 rotates around the shaft hole 467b when the game ball is ejected are set to be substantially the same direction, the game ball ejected from the ejection opening 471 A driving force can be applied when the second piece 39467d is displaced. Therefore, the ball receiving portion 394
Even if the force acting on the game ball from the ball receiving portion 39467 when discharging the game ball from the discharge opening 471 by displacing the 67 is reduced, the speed of the game ball to be discharged can be maintained. As a result, the ejection speed of the game ball ejected from the ball receiving portion 39467 can be stabilized.

Next, with reference to FIG. 200, the first unit 40551 in the 40th embodiment will be described. In the above-described first embodiment, the case of informing the user of the problem when game balls are clogged in the curved portion 581a of the main path SK1 has been described. Fraud can be reported when SK1 is passed. In addition, the same reference numerals are given to the same parts as those of the above-described embodiments, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 200(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit 40551 in the fortieth embodiment, and FIG. 200(b) is the first unit 405 along line CCb-CCb in FIG. 200(a).
51 is a schematic cross-sectional view of FIG. Note that the cross-sectional view of FIG. 200(a) corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 200, the first unit 40551 in the fortieth embodiment has a front side (
A first path member 560 disposed on the arrow F direction side), a second path member 570 disposed on the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the first path member 560, and the second path member 570 and a third path member 40580 arranged on the rear surface of the .

The third path member 40580 consists of a first covering member 40581 arranged on the upper side (arrow U direction side) of the second path member 570 and a lower side (arrow D direction side) of the second path member 570. The second covering member 582 (see FIG. 19) disposed on the back surface of the first covering member 40581 and the second
A first drive unit 583 (see FIG. 19) arranged between the covering members 582 and a second drive unit 584 (see FIG. 19) arranged on the back surface of the second covering member 582 are mainly provided. configured for

The first covering member 40581 is a member that forms a ball-throwing path for a game ball that curves in a substantially U shape toward the back side (arrow B direction side), and is the back side of the first opening 571a and the fourth opening 571d. a curved portion 40581a that connects the
0581b and .

The curved portion 40581a includes the first opening 571a and the fourth opening 571d (the second path member 5
70) is curved to have a U-shaped cross section with an open side, and a first rolling part 576 is disposed inside. In addition, the curved portion 40581a is formed so that the width dimension in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR) becomes smaller toward the back side (direction of arrow B), and the width dimension in the left-right direction of the curved portion with a U-shaped cross section is formed. X10 (see FIG. 200(a)) is formed to be 1.1 times or less the diameter of the game ball. Thus, when a game ball having a diameter of 1.1 times or more than the prescribed game ball is thrown, the game ball can be stopped inside the curved portion 40581a (main path SK1).

Further, the curved portion 40581a is arranged inside the recessed portion 86b2 (see FIG. 17) of the center frame 86, similarly to the curved portion 581a in the first embodiment. Therefore, the bending portion 40
A game ball stopped inside the 581a can be detected by the detection device 86b3 (see FIG. 17), and the pachinko machine 10 can be notified of an error (illegal).

Further, the curved portion 40581a includes an opening 40581a1 that opens in the curved portion with a U-shaped cross section, and a housing portion 4 that protrudes in the shape of a box whose upper side is open from the end on the back side of the opening 40481a1.
0581a2.

The opening 40581a1 is an opening for ejecting a ball with a diameter smaller than the prescribed game ball diameter from the main path SK1, and has an opening dimension X15 in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) (Fig. 200 (
a) see) is formed to a dimension greater than 0.9 times the diameter of the playing ball. Note that the opening 40
The 581a1 is formed on the back side of the curved portion 40581, which is the rolling direction of the game ball rolling on the first rolling portion 576, and can throw the game ball passing through the main path SK1 to the opening 40581a1. . Thereby, when a game ball whose diameter is 0.90% or more smaller than the prescribed game ball is thrown, the game ball can be discharged from the opening 40581a1 to the outside of the main path SK1.

The accommodation portion 40581a2 is a box that accommodates the game ball discharged from the opening 40581a1, and the inner space is formed to have a size larger than the diameter of the game ball. This allows opening 40
The game ball discharged from the 581a1 can be stored in the storage portion 40581a2, and the detected game ball can be detected by the detection device 86b3 to notify the pachinko machine 10 of an error (illegal).

In the forty-fifth embodiment, the width dimension X10 and the opening dimension X11 are formed in different sizes of 0.1 times with respect to the game ball with a prescribed diameter (11 mm), but this is not necessarily the case. , and the magnification of the size of the game ball may be changed.

Next, referring to FIGS. 201 and 202, the first unit 415 in the forty-first embodiment
51 will be explained. In the first embodiment, the first recessed portion 571h, the second recessed portion 571i, and the third recessed portion 571j formed in the main route SK2, the curved route WK1, and the main route SK3 are arranged vertically (arrow UD direction), the first recess 41571h and the second recess 41571i in the forty-first embodiment have been described.
and the third concave portion 41571j are each formed in a different shape. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 201(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit 41551 in the forty-first embodiment, and FIG.
1551 is a schematic cross-sectional view. FIG. Figure 202(a) shows CCIIa-CCI in Figure 201(a)
FIG. 202B is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit 41551 taken along line Ia, and FIG.
1(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit 41551 along line CCIIb-CCIIb. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 201 and 202, the first unit 41551 in the forty-first embodiment
are a first path member 41560 arranged on the front side, a second path member 41570 arranged on the back side of the first path member 41560, and a back side of the second path member 41570 A third path member 580 (see FIG. 19) is mainly formed.

The first path member 41560 includes a front plate 41564 formed in a plate shape along the front of the game area of the game board 13 (see FIG. 2), and a substantially U-shaped cross section with an open upper side (arrow U direction side). and a first receiving portion 561, a second receiving portion 562, and a third receiving portion 563 projecting from the upper side (arrow U direction side) end of the front plate 41564 to the rear side (arrow B direction side), and (See FIG. 21),
Below the first receiving portion 561, the second receiving portion 562, and the third receiving portion 563 (arrow D direction side)
and a first wall portion 41565 extending along a part of the edge of the front plate 41564, and a first wall portion 565 formed below the first wall portion 565 and spaced apart by a predetermined distance. It mainly includes two sets of second wall portions 566 and third wall portions 567 (see FIG. 21) protruding from two locations.

The front plate 41564 is a plate member that serves as a wall portion on the front side (arrow F direction side) of a game ball flow-down path formed between opposing second path members 41570 and third path members 580, which will be described later.
It is formed from a light transmissive member. Thereby, the player can visually recognize the game ball flowing down inside the first unit 551 through the front plate 41564 .

The front plate 564 has a first convex portion 41564b and a second convex portion 415 at positions facing a first concave portion 41571h, a second concave portion 41571i, and a third concave portion 41571j, which will be described later.
64c and the third projection 41564d are provided.

The second path member 41570 includes a plate-like base plate 41571 facing the front plate 41564 of the first path member 41560, and a front surface (arrow F direction side) of the base plate 41571 projecting toward the first path member 41560. The fourth wall portion 573 (see FIG. 21) and the fourth wall portion 573
A fifth wall portion 574 (see FIG. 21) protruding downwardly from the fifth wall portion 574 at a predetermined distance from the fifth wall portion 574, and a sixth wall portion 574 protruding downwardly from the fifth wall portion 574 at a predetermined distance. A wall portion 575 (see FIG. 21) is mainly provided.

The base plate 41571 is a game ball throwing path (
a first recess 41571h recessed in the main path SK2, the curved path WK1 and the main path SK3),
It has a second recess 41571i and a third recess 41571j.

The first recessed portion 41571h, the second recessed portion 41571i and the third recessed portion 41571j are recessed in a curved shape toward the back side. Also, the first concave portion 41571h and the first convex portion 4
1564b, the facing dimension of the second recess 41571i and the second protrusion 41564c, and the facing dimension of the third recess 41571j and the third protrusion 41564d are the same facing dimension L19 (Fig. 201 ( b) is set to ).

In addition, the facing dimension L19 is set to a value larger than the diameter of the game ball, and a value smaller than the facing dimension L20 between the back surface of the front plate 41564 and the front surface of the base plate 571 (see FIG. 201(b)). is set to As a result, the first concave portion 41571h and the second concave portion 4157
1i and the third concave portion 41571j, and the first convex portion 41564b, the second convex portion 41564c and the third convex portion 41564d facing each other.
1571i and third concave portion 41571j, first convex portion 41564b and second convex portion 41564c
And the rolling (flowing down) speed of the game ball can be slowed down by contacting the third convex portion 41564d.

Furthermore, the projecting dimensions of the first protrusion 41564b, the second protrusion 41564c and the third protrusion 41564d toward the base plate 41571 are set to be the same. Moreover, the protruding tip surfaces of the first protrusion 41564b, the second protrusion 41564c, and the third protrusion 41564d, the first recess 41571h,
The distance dimension L21 (see FIG. 201(b)) between the front face of the base plate 41571 excluding the second recessed portion 41571i and the third recessed portion 41571j is set smaller than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the first recess 41571h, the second recess 41571i and the third recess 41571j
, the first convex portion 41564b, the second convex portion 41564c and the third convex portion 415
64d can be collided. As a result, the rolling (flowing down) speed of the game ball can be slowed down.

The first recessed portion 41571h is formed in the base plate 41571 of the main path SK2 and is recessed long along the throwing direction of the game ball on the main path SK2. As a result, the first concave portion 41571
When the game ball thrown inside h is thrown inside the first recess 41571h, it is possible to suppress an increase in frictional resistance with the first recess 41571h. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball flowing down the main path SK2 from stopping due to contact with the first recess 41571h.

The first protrusion 41564b projecting from the surface facing the first recess 41571h is
It extends in a direction orthogonal to the extending direction of 571h. As a result, when a game ball thrown on the main path SK2 is brought into contact with the first convex portion 41564b, the game ball is moved to the first concave portion 41571h.
It makes it easier to throw the ball inside.

The second recess 41571i is formed in the base plate 41571 of the curved path WK1, and is recessed long along the direction of gravity (arrow UD direction). The second recessed portion 41571i has an elliptical shape elongated in the vertical direction when viewed from the front. In addition, the center of curvature of the upper side (main path SK2 side) of the ellipse of the second recess 41571i is arranged on the ball throw locus of the center of the game ball thrown on the main path SK2. Therefore, since the second recess 41571i is recessed above the throwing trajectory of the game ball thrown from the main path SK2, even if the game ball is thrown along the main path SK2 at a relatively high speed, the The center of the game ball is the second recess 41571
The front side of i can be passed through. As a result, the game ball passing through the main path SK2 is
The speed of the game ball can be easily slowed down by throwing the ball inside the concave portion 41571i, and the game ball can be suppressed from rampaging on the curved path WK1.

The second convex portion 41564c projecting from the surface facing the second concave portion 41571i is bent in a substantially L shape when viewed from the front. In addition, the bent portion of the second convex portion 41564c is set on the front side of the upper curved center of the ellipse of the second concave portion 41571i in the front view. In addition, the curved portion on one side of the second convex portion 41564c extends in a direction orthogonal to the direction of throwing the game ball on the curved path WK1, and the curved portion on the other side is the curved portion on the main path SK2. It extends in a direction orthogonal to the direction. As a result, the game ball sent from the main path SK2 to the curved path WK1 is brought into contact with the second convex portion 41564c on the other side and sent to the inside of the second concave portion 41571i. The throwing speed of the game ball that is brought into contact and thrown along the curved path WK11 can be easily reduced. As a result, the game ball thrown to the curved path WK1 can be suppressed from rampaging, and the game ball can be thrown smoothly.

The third recess 41571j is formed in the base plate 41571 of the main path SK3, and is recessed in an elliptical shape elongated in the throwing direction of the game ball on the main path SK3. Thereby, the third concave portion 415
When the game ball thrown inside the 71j is thrown inside the third recess 41571j, the third
An increase in frictional resistance with the recess 41571j can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball flowing down the main path SK3 from stopping due to contact with the third recess 41571j.

In the third recess 41571j, the center of curvature of the upstream end of the game ball throwing path is set below the center position in the left-right direction of the second recess 41571i. As a result, curved path WK1
The game ball that has flowed down inside the second recess 41571i can be easily received in the second recess 41571i, and the game ball can be easily thrown from the curved path WK1 to the main path SK3.

The third convex portion 41564d projecting from the surface facing the third concave portion 415671j is bent in a substantially L shape when viewed from the front. In addition, the bent portion of the third convex portion 41564d is set on the front side of the center of curvature of the upstream end portion of the third concave portion 41571j in a front view. The bent portion on one side of the third convex portion 41564d extends in a direction orthogonal to the throwing direction of the game ball on the main path SK3, and the bent portion on the other side is orthogonal to the throwing direction of the game ball on the curved path WK1. direction. As a result, the game ball sent from the curved path WK1 to the main path SK3 is brought into contact with the third convex portion 41564d on the other side to be sent inside the third concave portion 41571j, and at the same time to the third convex portion 41564d on one side. It is possible to reduce the throwing speed of the game ball that is brought into contact and thrown along the main path SK3. As a result, the game ball thrown from the curved path WK1 to the main path SK1 can be suppressed from being violent, and the game ball can be thrown smoothly.

Next, referring to FIGS. 203 to 206, the game board 42013 in the 42nd embodiment
will be explained. In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the other end side of the board box 100 (main controller 110) arranged in the back case 300 is fixed to the back case 300 by screws inserted from the back side of the board box 100 is described. As explained above, in the forty-second embodiment,
A case where the second engaging member 42370 arranged on the rear case 42300 is engaged with the board box 42100 will be described.

First, referring to FIGS. 203 and 204, the rear case 423 in the 42nd embodiment
00 will be described. FIG. 203 shows the rear case 42 in the 42nd embodiment.
300 is an exploded perspective front view of FIG. FIG. 204(a) is a front view of the back case 42300, and FIG. 204(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the back case 42300 along line CCIVb-CCIVb in FIG. 204(a). In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the detailed description is abbreviate|omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 203 and 204, the rear case 42300 in the forty-second embodiment has a substantially rectangular bottom wall portion 42301 in a front view, and the four outer edges of the bottom wall portion 42301 are erected toward the front. An outer wall portion 42302 is provided, and the wall portions 42301 and 42302 form a box shape with one side (front side) open.

In addition, the rear case 42300 includes an engaging member 310 arranged on the front side of the bottom wall portion 42301 (the box-shaped open side (arrow F direction side)) and the rear case 42300 arranged on the rear side. A fixing member 320 for fixing one end side of the board box 42100 and a bottom wall portion 4230
1, and fixes the other end side of the board box 42100.
70 and.

The bottom wall portion 42301 has an opening 301a which is rectangular in front view in the center thereof.
) are made visible. In addition, the bottom wall portion 42301 is provided with a cylindrical shape projecting toward the front side,
A projecting portion 301 b inserted into the sliding groove 314 of the engaging member 310 , a first opening 301 c opening at a position facing the fixing member 320 , and a second opening facing the engaging member 310 .
The opening 301d and a second projecting portion 42301f projecting in a cylindrical shape from the front side (arrow F direction side) of the bottom wall portion 42301 and inserted into a sliding groove 42372 of a second engaging member 42370 to be described later.
and a third opening 42301g penetrating in the plate thickness direction (arrow FB direction) above the second projecting portion 42301f (arrow U direction).

The second protruding portions 42301f are protrusions that define the displacement direction of the second engaging member 42370, and are formed side by side at two locations in the direction of gravity. In addition, the outer diameter of the second projecting portion 42301f is set to be slightly smaller than the lateral groove width of the sliding groove 42372 of the second engaging member 42370, which will be described later. Furthermore, the distance between the centers of the two second projecting portions 42301f is set to be smaller than the width of the sliding groove 42372 in the longitudinal direction. As a result, the sliding groove 4
2372, two second projecting portions 42301f can be inserted and arranged.

The third opening 42301g has a projecting portion 4211 of the board box 42100, which will be described later, inside.
8 is an opening into which the projection 42118 is inserted, and the size of the opening is larger than the external shape of the projecting portion 42118 when viewed from the front. Further, the third opening 42301g allows the engaging member 310 to move toward the fixing member 320 when the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 are engaged with each other (the state shown in FIG. 204(a)).
is formed at a position adjacent to the direction (direction of arrow L) in which the engagement with is released. This makes it impossible to release the engagement of the engaging member 310 with the fixing member 320 in a state where the projecting portion 42118 is inserted into the third opening 42301g. A detailed description of the positional relationship between the projecting portion 42118 and the engaging member 310 will be given later.

The outer wall portion 42302 has a second opening 42302b that opens vertically (in the direction of the arrow UD) in the side surface on the lower side (in the direction of the arrow D) when viewed from the front. The second opening 42302b is
It is an opening through which a lower end (arrow D direction side) of a second engaging member 42370 to be described later is inserted, and is formed in a displacement region of the second engaging member 42370 . Thereby, the second engaging member 4
2370 can be displaced.

The board box 42100 has a horizontally long rectangular outer shape in front view, and the main controller 110 is arranged inside. In addition, the substrate box 42100 has a bearing portion 117 (see FIG. 206(a)) that protrudes from one end (arrow R direction side), and a projecting portion that protrudes from one surface of the front side of the substrate box 42100. 42118;

The protruding portion 42118 is located at the third opening 42301 of the rear case 42300 as described above.
42118a, which will be described later. is set to In addition, the projecting portion 42118 is
It has an opening 42118a that opens in the direction of gravity, and a second engaging member 42370, which will be described later, is inserted through the opening 42118a. As a result, the board box 42100 is prevented from rotating around the fixing member 320, and the board box 4210
0 can be disposed on the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the rear case 42300 in a non-displaceable state.

Further, the third opening 42301g into which the protruding portion 42118 is inserted is engaged when the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 are engaged as described above (the state shown in FIG. 204(a)). Since the member 310 is formed adjacent to the fixing member 320 in the direction of disengagement (arrow L direction), the projecting portion 42118 is disposed adjacent to the engaging member 310 . Further, the insertion dimension Y6 (see FIG. 204(b)) of the projecting portion 42118 into the third opening 42301g corresponds to the separation distance Y7 (see FIG. 204(b)
) is set to be larger than ). As a result, as shown in FIG. 204(b), the engaging member 310 and the projecting portion 42118 are arranged at positions overlapping each other in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction).

Therefore, when the second engaging member 42370 is inserted into the opening 42118a of the projecting portion 42118, the engaging member 310 disengages from the fixing member 320 (projecting portion 42
118) is restricted. As a result, the second opening 42118a
In a state where the engaging member 42370 is inserted, it is possible to prevent the engaging member 310 from being illegally disengaged from the fixing member 320, thereby preventing the board box 42100 (main controller 110) from being replaced with an illegal board. can be suppressed.

The opening 42118a of the projecting portion 42118 is open in the direction of gravity, and the second engaging member 42370 inserted into the opening 42118a is displaced in the direction of gravity and inserted. Therefore, since the displacement direction (gravitational direction) of the second engaging member 42370 and the displacement direction (horizontal direction) of the engaging member 310 are set in a direction perpendicular to each other, the engaging member 310 cannot be moved due to fraud by the player. 2nd engaging member 423 inserted into opening 42118a
70 can be made easier to catch. As a result, when the engaging member 310 is forcibly operated by the player illegally, it is possible to prevent the engagement with the fixing member 320 from being released.

The second engaging member 42370 includes a plate member 42371 formed in a vertically long rectangular plate shape when viewed from the front, and a plate member 42371 extending downward (arrow D direction) from the upper side (arrow U direction side) end of the plate member 42371 . a recessed portion 42374 that is recessed at the bottom of the plate member 42371; setting part 4237
4, and a sliding groove 42372 opened in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction).

As described above, the sliding groove 42372 is an opening for displacing the second engaging member 42370, and is elongated in the direction of gravity (arrow UD direction). Also, the sliding groove 423
72, the width dimension in the lateral direction (direction of arrows LR) is set to be substantially the same as the diameter of the second projecting portion 42301f disposed inside the sliding groove 42372. As shown in FIG. Therefore, as described above, the sliding groove 4
When the second protruding portion 42301f is inserted into 2372, the sliding direction of the second engaging member 42370 is defined in the longitudinal direction of the opening of the sliding groove 42372. As shown in FIG.

The recessed portion 42374 is an opening for facilitating elastic deformation of the upper end portion of the plate member 42371. The recessed portion 42374 is recessed downward and notched in the front-rear direction. As a result, the rigidity of the upper end portion of the plate member 42371 can be lowered to facilitate elastic deformation.

The second engaging portion 42373 is a portion that engages with the end portion of the opening 42118a of the projecting portion 42118 described above. The separation distance X12 (see FIG. 204(a)) between the ends of the projecting points on both sides is the opening 421.
18a is set larger than the horizontal opening dimension X13 (see FIG. 204(b)). As a result, when the second engaging member 42370 is inserted into the opening 42118a, the second engaging portion 42373 engages with the end of the opening 42118a, thereby causing the second engaging portion 42373 to move toward the opening 42118a. can be prevented from escaping from

The second engaging portion 42373 is formed in a shape protruding horizontally outward from the upper side of the plate member 42371 toward the lower side. As a result, the second engaging member 42370 is
2118a, the second engaging portion 42373 can be brought into contact with the inner side of the opening 42118a so that the upper side of the plate member 42371 can be easily elastically deformed.

In addition, the second engaging member 42370 is inserted into the opening 42118a (engaging portion 42
373 is engaged with the projecting portion 42118), the lower end of the outer wall portion 4230
2 inside the second opening 42302b. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the second engaging portion 42370 from being operated from the outside of the rear case 42300 . As a result, the second engaging portion 4
It is possible to prevent the board box 42100 (main controller 110) from being illegally disengaged from the protrusion 42118 and replaced with an illegal board.

Next, referring to FIGS. 204 and 205, the substrate box 4 is attached to the rear case 42300.
2100 will be described. 205(a) is a front view of the rear case 42300, and FIG. 205(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the rear case 42300 along line CCVb-CCVb of FIG. 205(a). 204(a) and 204(b) show the state after the board box 42100 is arranged in the rear case 42300, and FIG.
(a) and FIG. 205(b) show the state before the substrate box 42100 is arranged in the rear case 42300. FIG.

The board box 42100 in the forty-second embodiment is similar to the above-described first embodiment,
First, the fixing member 320 is engaged with the engaging member 310 so that one side is disposed on the rear side of the rear case 42300 .

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 205(a) and 205(b), the engaging member 310 is attached to the fixed member 3.
20, the tip of the second piece 312 of the engaging member 310 is disposed on the front side of the third opening 42301g. As a result, before the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 are engaged with each other, the protruding portion 42118 of the board box 42100 is positioned at the third opening 42301.
It is possible to suppress the insertion inside g. As a result, it is possible to prevent the circuit board box 42100 from being mounted on the rear case 42300 only by engaging the projecting portion 42118 and the second engaging portion 42370 .

Next, the other side of the board box 42100 is rotated about the connecting portion between the fixed member on the one side and the 320 , and the projecting portion 42118 is inserted inside the third opening 42301 g of the rear case 42300 . As a result, the projecting portion 42118 is positioned so as to be engageable with the second engaging member 42370 .

The second engaging member 42370 is inserted through the second opening 42302b at its lower side before being inserted inside the third opening 42301g, and is arranged outside the rear case 42300 (FIG. 205(a)). reference). As a result, the substrate box 42100 is connected to the rear case 42
300 can operate the second engaging member 42370 from the outside of the rear case 42300 to insert the second engaging member 42370 inside the third opening 42301g.

Further, since the direction of displacement of the second engaging member 42370 is set in the direction of gravity, the second engaging member 42370 is arranged at the lower end by the action of gravity before it is inserted inside the third opening 42301g. . As a result, the protruding portion 42118 is positioned at the third opening portion 42301 of the rear case 42300.
It is possible to suppress collision with the second engaging member 42370 when it is inserted inside g. As a result, the work efficiency of the worker can be improved.

In addition, when the second engaging member 42370 forgets to engage with the projecting portion 42118, the second engaging member 42370 can be arranged outside the rear case 42300, so that the operator is not in a normal state. can be easily recognized. As a result, it is possible to prevent forgetting to engage the second engaging member 42370 and the projecting portion 42118 .

Next, referring to FIG. 206, rear case 42300 and base plate 42060 will be described. 206(a) is a rear view of the game board 13, and FIG. 206(b) is a rear view of FIG.
It is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 along the CCVIb-CCVIb line of a).

As shown in FIG. 206, a standing member 42060f is arranged on the back surface of the base plate 42060 in the forty-second embodiment. The erecting member 42060f is erected toward the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the base plate 42060, and its erecting tip position is aligned with the rear case 4230.
0 bottom wall portion 42301 is set in the same plane. In addition, the standing member 42060f is the second
It is arranged below the engaging member 42370 and outside the rear case 42300 . As a result, when the rear case 42300 is arranged on the game board 42013 in a state in which the engagement between the second engaging member 42370 and the protruding portion 42118 is forgotten, the standing portion 42060f of the second engaging member 42370 It can collide downward. As a result, the second engaging member 42
It is possible to prevent rear case 42300 from being arranged on base plate 42060 in a state in which engagement between 370 and projecting portion 42118 is forgotten, or in a state in which circuit board box 42100 is forgotten to be arranged on rear case 42300 .

In this embodiment, a light-emitting substrate for illuminating the inside of the rear case 42300 is arranged on the standing portion 42060f. As a result, the standing portion 42060f can be used both as a portion for emitting light and as a portion for suppressing engagement between the back case 42300 and the base plate 42060 in an abnormal state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the outer shape of the base plate 42060 from becoming large.

Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments, the present invention is by no means limited to the above embodiments, and it will be easily understood that various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In the first embodiment, the drive motor KM2 is driven to retract the ball receiving portion 467 from the third position to the second position or the first position. A biasing spring may be used to drive the retraction to the first position. For example, an urging spring is provided between the rack 466 or the movable rack 464 and the base member 470 so that elastic force is applied as the rack 466 or the movable rack 464 is displaced.

In this case, the drive motor K
By turning off the driving of M3, the ball receiving portion 467 can be displaced toward the second position or the first position by the biasing force of the biasing spring.

Therefore, using the time until the driving force of the driving motor KM2 is switched to the third position,
Since the ball receiving portion 467 can be displaced, it is possible to suppress the wobbling of the lower displacement member 440 due to the reaction of the discharge operation when the game ball is discharged from the inside of the ball receiving portion 467 .

That is, when the game ball is ejected from the inside of the ball receiving portion 467, the load of the lower displacement member 440 is reduced by the amount of the ejected game ball, and the lower displacement member 440 tends to be displaced upward due to the reaction. By immediately displacing the ball receiving portion 467, the reaction due to the rotational displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 acts to displace the base member 470 downward, canceling the reaction when the ball is ejected from the lower displacement member 440. be able to.

In the first embodiment described above, the engaging protrusion 882 for restricting the rotation of the rotating body 800 is
Although a case has been described in which two are formed on the side surface of the . For example, a plurality of them may be continuously provided on the side wall of the rotating body 800 at predetermined intervals. In this case, the rotation of the rotating body 800 can be restricted at any position, and the rotation of the rotating body 800 by an external force can be restricted when the lid member 770 is opened.

In the first embodiment, the opening 831 is formed on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 800, and the game ball is thrown from the opening 831.
It may be formed on the side surface opposite to b. That is, openings may be formed on both axial side surfaces of the rotating body 800, one of which may serve as a ball inlet and the other may serve as a ball outlet. In this case, since the ball-throwing path can be formed inside the rotating body 800, the accessory (rotating body 800) can be used as the ball-throwing path especially when there is no space for arrangement on the back side of the game board 13. , the ball throwing path can be secured without increasing the size of the game board 13. - 特許庁

In the above-described first embodiment, the rotating body 800 has been described as having a cylindrical outer shape, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be polygonal, elliptical, or a combination thereof. In this case, since the shape of the rotating body 800 can be made complicated, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize that the effect has been switched due to the rotational displacement of the rotating body 800 .

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the outer peripheral surface of the rotary operation portion 8654 is formed so as to be operable by the player has been described. In this case, the player can not only apply a rotational force to the rotation operation unit 8654, but also press a push button or perform an operation combining the rotation operation and the pressing operation of the rotation operation unit 8654. . As a result, since it is possible to form a plurality of operation modes of the rotation operation part 8654, it is possible to give interest to the player.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the transmission gear 8651 and the transmission gear 8652 are meshed has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, transmission gear 8651
, and the transmission gear 8652, a torque limiter or the like may be interposed to interrupt the transmission of the driving force when an overload is applied.

In this case, when the player stops the rotation of the rotating operation part 8654, it is possible to block the transmission of the rotational driving force from the drive motor KM6, thereby suppressing the continuation of the rotation of the rotation operation part 8654. . As a result, it is possible to prevent the rotation operation unit 8650 from being broken when the player inputs rotation in the direction opposite to the rotation in the A direction to the rotation operation unit 8654 .

Furthermore, when the player operates the rotation operation part 8654, when the player's finger or clothes are caught between the rotation operation part 8654 and the upper plate 8017 on the side of the rotation direction, the rotation is stopped.
Further pinching of the player's fingers or clothes can be suppressed. Therefore, when the player rotates the rotary operation unit 8
It is possible to suppress injury caused by being caught between 654 and upper plate 8017 .

In the eighth embodiment, the rotation direction of the rotation operation portion 8654 is the A direction, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 8654 may be the horizontal direction with respect to the pachinko machine 10 . In this case, the player can be made to perform an action associated with the performance of the game machine, and the performance effect can be improved. For example, by hitting the rotary operation unit 8654 with the left hand so as to rotate it in the right direction and operating it, it is possible to produce an effect such as hitting (slapping) the character or the like displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In the first embodiment described above, the board box 100 is arranged on the fixing member 320, and by engaging the fixing member 320 with the engaging member 310, the board box 100 is prevented from being replaced with an illegal board. Although the case has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this, and other members (for example, the third symbol It may be a display device 81 or a detection device capable of detecting unauthorized inputs such as unauthorized radio waves or vibrations.

In the first embodiment, the first concave portion 571h, the second concave portion 571i, and the third concave portion 571j formed in the first unit 551, the first convex portion 564b, the second convex portion 564c, and the third convex portion 5
64d are formed at positions facing each other, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this.
d is arranged on the upstream side with respect to the first recessed portion 571h, the second recessed portion 571i and the third recessed portion 571j, and the game balls that flow down to the first projected portion 564b, the second projected portion 564c and the third projected portion 564d It may be formed so as to be received in the first recessed portion 571h, the second recessed portion 571i and the third recessed portion 571j after being brought into contact with each other.

In the first embodiment, the decorative member 154 has a thickness dimension equal to that of the concave portion 151 of the main body portion 151 .
Although the description has been given of the case where the recess depth is smaller than the recess depth b, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the decorative member 154 is made of an elastically deformable material, and the main body 15
It may be formed thicker than the recess depth of one recess 151b. In this case, the body portion 151 can be arranged in contact with the base plate 60 by compressing and elastically deforming the general winning hole unit 150 when arranged on the base plate 60 .

In the first embodiment, when the cam member 422 is arranged at the position of the second displaced state, the forces PW1 and PW2 acting on the cam member 422 from the first link member 431 act in directions that cancel each other out. Although the case has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this.
For example, the direction of the force input to the cam member 422 from the contact point between the end of the cam member 422 and the plate-shaped projection 431b may be set in the direction from the contact point toward the axis of the shaft portion 422a. . According to this, it is possible to suppress the force acting on the cam member 422 in the direction of rotation about the shaft portion 422a.

In the first embodiment, the other end of the board box 100 is attached to the rear case 300 by screws.
Although the case where it is disposed on the back side of the has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the other end of the board box 100 may be fixed by a sealing member that cannot be removed once it is engaged with the rear case 300 . More specifically, cylindrical sealing tools are inserted through openings formed at a plurality of locations on the other end of the back case 300 into insertion portions recessed at a plurality of locations on the back side of the back case 300. By engaging the insertion part and the sealing tool, the board box 100 is arranged on the rear side of the rear case 300 in a non-rotatable (operable) state.

When removing the board box 100, the other end side of the board box 100 can be removed from the rear case 300 by cutting the engaging portion between the insertion portion and the sealing tool.
Also, when the other end of the board box 100 is to be installed in the rear case 300 again, a new sealing tool is inserted into the unused opening of the board box 100, and the unused insertion portion of the rear case 300 is inserted. , the other end side of the board box 100 can be arranged in the rear case 300. As shown in FIG.

In the first embodiment, the outer shape of the decorative member 154 in front view is formed larger than the shape of the opening of the second opening 60b, and the end portion of the decorative member 154 extends from the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60.
Although the case has been described in which they are arranged in a state of being overlapped with each other in the front-rear direction, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the outer shape of the decorative member 154 in a front view may be set substantially the same as the opening shape of the second opening 60b.

In this case, the decorative member 154 of the general prize winning unit 150 and the decorative member 6 of the base plate 60
0c from the same material, the decorative member 154 and the decorative member 60c are formed from a single sheet, and the decorative member 154 is cut from the sheet.
and a decorative member 60c. Therefore, it is not necessary to form the decorative member 154 in a separate process, so that the yield of forming the decorative member 154 can be improved.

When the outer shape of the decorative member 154 in a front view is formed to be substantially the same as the opening shape of the second opening 60b, the decorative member 154 is arranged inside the second opening 60b, and the decorative member 15 is arranged inside the second opening 60b.
4 and the decorative member 60c are preferably arranged on the same plane. In this case, since the decorative surfaces of the decorative member 154 and the decorative member 60c are aligned in the front-rear direction when viewed from the front, the player can recognize the decoration of the decorative member 154 and the decorative member 60c as one decoration.

In the first embodiment, the first convex portion 571h protrudes toward the back side (arrow B side) on the inner surface of the first unit 551 on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the game ball throwing path. , a second convex portion 571i and a third convex portion 571k are formed, and a first concave portion 571h and a second concave portion 571i are recessed toward the back side on the inner surface on the back side of the ball-throwing path of the game ball of the first unit 511. and third
Although the case where the concave portion 571j is provided has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, the first concave portion 571h, the second concave portion 571i and the third concave portion 571j and the first convex portion 571
h, the second convex portion 571i and the third convex portion 571k may be formed on the inner surface on the opposite side in the front-rear direction when viewed from the front.

Further, a concave portion facing the front image may be formed on the inner surface of the front side at a position facing the second concave portion 571i. In this case, the concave portion is provided in the ball throwing space of the curved path WK1.
You can increase the throwing space. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from flowing too slowly on the curved path WK1. As a result, it is possible to suppress the game ball from remaining on the curved path WK1.

In the ninth embodiment, the case where the inclined surface 9431b1 protrudes toward the front side toward the cam member 422 has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. for example,
The inclined surface 9431b1 may be formed as an inclination such that the amount of protrusion toward the front side decreases toward the cam member 422 .

In this case, when the lower displacement unit 400 is in the second displacement state and the end of the cam member 422 abuts on the plate-shaped projection 9531a, the cam member 422 is moved to the curved wall portion 411e of the front base 411.
can be pressed to As a result, it is possible to suppress the cam member 422 from swinging in the front-rear direction, and it is possible to easily maintain the lower displacement member 440 at the position of the second displacement state.

In the eleventh embodiment, the case where the light emitter 11491a is formed at a position higher (in the direction of the arrow U) than the center of the game ball received in the ball receiving portion 467 has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the light emitter 11491a may be arranged at substantially the same height as the center of the game ball received in the ball receiving portion 467 . In this case, the transmission part 11451
It is preferable that the height position of b is formed from the center of the game ball received in the ball receiving portion 467 to the upper side of the center.

According to this, when part of the light emitted from the luminous body 11491a is blocked by the game ball, the shadow of the game ball formed in the transmission part 11451b is formed in a semicircular shape by the upper hemisphere of the game ball. can. As a result, the roundness of the game ball can be formed in the shadow formed in the transmissive portion 11451b, so that the player can easily recognize the position of the game ball received in the ball receiving portion 467. FIG.

In the twelfth and thirty-ninth embodiments, the displacement of the third pieces 12467e and 39467e is performed by the load of the game ball, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a sensor for detecting that a game ball has passed through a ball-throwing path is attached to the ball receiving portion 12467, 39467, and the third piece 12467e, 39467e may be displaced independently. According to this, the second piece 12
467d and 39467d do not need to be displaced by the load of the game ball, so the ball receiving portion 12
467,39467 displacement reliability can be improved. In this case, the third piece 12467e
, 39467e are provided in the ball receivers 12467, 39467.

In the twelfth and thirty-ninth embodiments, the case where the first pieces 12467c and 39467c are formed as the rotation shafts when the third pieces 12467e and 39467e are rotationally displaced has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the shaft portions 12467e3 and 39467e3 of the third pieces 12467e and 39467e are inserted into the openings formed in the rack 466, and the third piece 1
2467e and 39467e may be rotationally displaced with respect to the rack 466. In this case, the distance between the rotating shaft and the connecting portion between the second pieces 12467d and 39467d can be easily increased.
The amount of displacement of 67e can be easily increased. As a result, the shield plate 124 of the third piece 12467e
67e1 can be easily arranged on the front side of the light emitter 11491a. In this case, the opening formed in the rack 466 is formed as an elongated hole through which the shaft portions 12467e3 and 39467e3 can slide.

In the thirteenth embodiment, the case where the second path member 13570 is moved in the front-rear direction with respect to the first path member 13560 has been described.
For example, the first path member 13560 may be moved in the front-rear direction with respect to the second path member 13570 . In this case, the relative positional relationship between the second path member 13570 and the front surface of the base plate 60 (game board 13) prevents the player from grasping the gap between the facing first and second members. can. As a result, the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

In the first, tenth, and twenty-fifth embodiments, the decorative members 154, 10154, 25154 are attached with the adhesive tapes 154a, 10154a, 25154a. A liquid adhesive may also be used.

In the thirteenth, thirty-second, thirty-third, thirty-fourth, and thirty-fifth embodiments, the first
Path members 13560, 32560, 33560, 34560, 35560 are made of a non-light-transmitting material, and first path members 13560, 32560, 33560, 34560, 35
Although a case has been described in which it is difficult for the player to recognize the opposing spaces between 560 and the second path members 13570, 32570, and 34570, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, first path members 13560, 32560, 33560, 34560, 35560
13560, 32560, 33560, 34560, 35560 and the second path member 1357
A player may be made to visually recognize the game ball flowing down between the opposing 0, 32570, and 34570 through the opening. In this case, the plurality of slit-shaped openings are set such that the distance to the adjacent opening is smaller than the diameter of the game ball.

As a result, the first path members 13560, 32560, 33560, 34560, 355
A player can be made to recognize the game ball flowing down between the opposed spaces between 60 and the second path members 13570, 32570, 34570 through the opening.

In addition, the first path members 13560, 32560, 33560, 34560, and 35560 are formed with circular openings smaller than the diameter of the game ball, and the first path members 13560, 35560, 35560,
32560, 33560, 34560, 35560 and second path members 13570, 3257
A player may be allowed to visually recognize a game ball that flows down between facing 0,34570 through an opening. In this case, the adjacent width dimension of the plurality of openings is formed smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, since the opening of the opening can be made smaller than when the opening is formed in a slit shape, the first path members 13560, 32560, 33560, and 34 can pass through the opening.
560, 35560 and the second path members 13570, 32570, 34570 can be suppressed from being recognized by the player.

In the eighteenth embodiment, the portion to which the displacement member 18310 is engaged (engaged portion 18332
) is formed on the fixing member 18320, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the engaged portion 18332 with which the displacement member 18310 is engaged may be formed in the board box 100 that is crimped and fixed to the fixing member 18320 .

In this case, when the board box 100 is not arranged on the rear case 18300,
The displacement member 18310 cannot be placed inside the rear case 18300, and the displacement member 1
8310 can be in a state of protruding outside the rear case 18300 by its own weight.

As a result, if the board box 100 is not attached to the rear case 18300, the displacement member 18310 is hooked to the outer frame 11 when the game board 18013 is arranged on the outer frame 11 (see FIG. 164(b)). As a result, the operator can be reminded that the board box 100 has been left unattached.

In the twenty-first embodiment, the front side (arrow F direction side) of the bottom wall portion 302 of the rear case 300
The insertion portion 21724b of the rotation unit 21700 disposed in the recess 31 of the displacement member 310
7 to prevent unauthorized disengagement between the displacement member 310 and the fixed member 320, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the insertion portion 21724 b that is inserted inside the concave portion 317 of the displacement member 310 may be formed in the board box 100 that is arranged on the fixed member 320 .

In this case, the insertion portion 21724b is arranged on the front side of the bottom wall portion 302 through an opening formed in the fixing member 320. As shown in FIG. Further, the insertion portion 21724b is formed in a portion into which a shaft to be crimped and fixed to the fixing member 320 is inserted. As a result, when the bearing portion 117 of the board box 100 is cut and removed illegally from the rear case 21300, the insertion portion 21
724 b can be left inside the recess 317 of the displacement member 310 . As a result, it can be difficult to remove the fixing member 320 from the rear case 21300 .

Therefore, when replacing the fixing member 320, it is necessary to correctly caulk the board box 100 and the fixing member 320 (to cut the caulked portion). As a result, the fixing member 32
0 from the back member 21300, it is possible to prevent the fixing member 320 from being removed and replaced with an unauthorized board box.

In the forty-second embodiment, the case where the light-emitting substrate for irradiating light is arranged on the standing portion 42060f has been described, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. may be formed as a control board for controlling or a path for throwing game balls.

<First control example>
Next, a first control example of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 207 to 287. FIG. Note that the first control example will be described by partially changing the configuration of each of the above-described embodiments. are omitted. It should be noted that, in some configurations used in this control example, the same configurations as those in the above-described embodiments are given different reference numerals, but this is for the sake of easy-to-understand explanation of the invention of this control example. , and since the specific contents of the configuration are the same as those corresponding to the above-described embodiments, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Conventionally, a jackpot game is executed when a jackpot is won in a special pattern lottery, and a ball is easily won in a prize winning device (for example, a variable prize winning device) during the jackpot game, so that a player wins a jackpot. There is a pachinko machine 10 which makes a game aimed at a game. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the player has worked hard to win the jackpot and the jackpot game is executed, if the ratio of the winning balls to the prize winning device (variable prize winning device) is low, the player's willingness to play is reduced. I had a problem letting it go.

Such a problem is that when the ball flows down the game area formed on the game board 13, it collides with a plurality of obstacles (for example, nails) provided on the game board 13, causing the falling direction of the ball to change. This is an unavoidable problem in the pachinko machine 10 because the number of winning balls to the variable winning device 65 increases or decreases due to the variation.

On the other hand, in the first control example, a pseudo attacker (attacker for performance) 165 (see FIG. 208) is driven in synchronization with the attacker (variable winning device) 65 that is opened during the jackpot game. In addition, in addition to the balls that have won the variable prize winning device 65, the balls that have entered the specific general prize winning port 163 (see FIG. 208) and the specific out port 166 (see FIG. 208) also flow into the pseudo attacker 165. Configure. The pseudo attacker 165 is configured to be more easily visible to the player than the variable winning device 65 .

By configuring in this way, when the jackpot game is started, the player will execute the jackpot game while looking at the winning ball of the pseudo attacker 165 . Therefore, it is possible to make it seem that more balls are winning the variable winning device 65 during the big winning game than the balls actually winning the variable winning device 65 during the big winning game.

In addition, in a right-handed game executed during a jackpot game (a game in which a game ball is shot toward the flow path of the game area provided on the right side of the variable display unit 80 (right side in the viewpoint of FIG. 208)) Among the hit balls, the balls that have not won the variable winning device 65 (the balls that have won (balls) in other winning (ball) openings before reaching the variable winning device 65) are made to win the pseudo attacker 165. Configure. Therefore, when the number of winning balls to the variable winning device 65 decreases, the number of winning (balls) in other winning (ball) openings (hereinafter referred to as winning openings, etc.) tends to increase. A predetermined number of balls can be stably awarded to the pseudo attacker 165 regardless of the increase or decrease in the number of winning balls to the device 65 .

In addition, in the first control example, in accordance with the timing when the ball that has won (entered) each winning hole (specific winning hole 65a, specific general winning hole 163, specific out hole 166) wins the pseudo attacker 165, It is configured to execute a winning effect.

As a result, a prize winning effect based on the winning of the ball to the variable winning device 65 can be executed at the timing when the pseudo attacker 165 wins the ball. 65). The winning effect executed based on the winning of the ball to the variable winning device 65 includes, for example, a winning sound notification effect for notifying the player that the ball has won the variable winning device 65, a third The number of prize balls display effect etc. for displaying information (acquisition information) for indicating the amount of benefits (prize balls) given to the player based on the winning of the ball in the variable winning device 65 on the pattern display device 81. be. Also, when the ball wins a prize in the pseudo attacker 165 after entering a prize winning opening other than the variable prize winning device 65, the prize winning sound notification performance is executed in accordance with the timing when the pseudo attacker 165 wins the prize.

Furthermore, in the present control example, in order to cause the ball that has won a prize such as a plurality of different prize openings to win a prize in the pseudo attacker 165, the ball that has passed through each prize opening or the like is guided above the pseudo attacker 165. 690 (see FIG. 208) is provided, but since the distance from each winning hole to the pseudo attacker 165 is different, the order in which the balls enter the respective winning holes and the order in which the balls enter the pseudo attacker 165 are different. may differ. Therefore, in the first control example, the order in which the pseudo attacker 165 wins can be determined based on the type of winning hole in which the ball has won and the winning timing. Then, when the number exceeds a predetermined number (the number (for example, 10) satisfying the closing condition of the variable winning device 65) during the period in which the pseudo attacker 165 is continuously open, a specific winning effect (overflow effect) is performed. configured to run

In this way, in the configuration in which the winning balls flow down the guide channel 690, the order in which the pseudo-attacker 165 wins is calculated instead of the order in which the winning holes enter. By configuring so as to execute a specific prize winning effect (overflow effect) with the player, the winning effect can be executed without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

In this control example, the above-described winning effect is executed based on the detection results of the detection sensors 65s1, 65s2, 163s, and 166s (see FIG. 208) for detecting that a ball has entered each winning hole. , there is no need to provide the pseudo attacker 165 with a dedicated detection sensor for executing a prize-winning performance using a prize-winning ball. Therefore, since the number of detection means (sensors) attached to the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced, the design cost can be suppressed.

Next, a brief description will be given of the characteristic effects used in the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example. Conventionally, it has a structure capable of holding and storing the lottery right of the special pattern up to a predetermined number (for example, 4) as an upper limit, and the period from when the lottery right is held and stored until the lottery of the special pattern is actually executed. Inside, processing (so-called look-ahead processing) is performed to determine (predict) the jackpot lottery result in advance using the information (winning information) included in the reserved and stored lottery right, and the performance is based on the preliminary determination result. There is a pachinko machine 10 that executes (so-called look-ahead effect).

In a conventional gaming machine using such a configuration, for example, by varying the display mode of identification information (so-called reserved symbols) for indicating the reserved and stored lottery right, the lottery result is displayed to the player. There is a case where a look-ahead effect that notifies in advance is executed. By executing such a look-ahead performance, when the display mode of the reserved pattern is changed, the special pattern lottery corresponding to the reserved pattern is expected to win a big win in the special pattern lottery corresponding to the reserved pattern. is executed (a special symbol lottery period executed before the corresponding reserved symbol), the player can continue to have expectations.

However, in the case of the above-mentioned look-ahead effect, if the special symbol lottery corresponding to the reserved pattern (variable reserved pattern) whose display mode is changed is executed, the display of the variable reserved pattern disappears, so the currently running There is a problem that it is difficult for the player to easily determine whether or not the special symbol lottery (fluctuation) corresponds to the variable reserved symbol. On the other hand, in this control example, it is configured to display the display mode during execution based on the variable display mode of the reserved symbols corresponding to the currently executed special symbol lottery (fluctuation). As a result, the player can easily determine whether or not the special symbol lottery (fluctuation) being executed corresponds to the variable reserved symbol.

In addition, by varying the display mode of the reserved symbols as described above, in the case of configuring to notify the result of a plurality of types of effects in the pre-reading effect that notifies the player of the lottery result of the special symbol in advance. (For example, when a plurality of performance results with different expectations for winning a jackpot are to be notified), it is necessary to make the variable display modes different in an easy-to-understand manner so that each performance result can be easily identified. Therefore, there is a problem that it is difficult to notify a large amount of information in advance.

On the other hand, in this control example, in addition to the above-mentioned look-ahead effect, the effect of varying the display mode of the effect device (treasure chest accessory 750 (see FIG. 210)) provided separately from the third symbol display device 81 is executed. It is configured as follows. Then, among the plurality of information acquired by the look-ahead process, information to be notified in advance to the player by changing the display mode of the reserved pattern (for example, pre-read information for indicating the judgment result of the jackpot), and a treasure box role By varying the display mode of the object 750, the information (for example, advance read-ahead information for indicating the type of the winning jackpot) to be notified in advance to the player is made different.

In this way, a plurality of objects to be performed (reserved symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the treasure box role 750) used for the look-ahead effect are provided, and the type of information notified in advance by each object to be performed is different. By allowing the player to receive a large amount of information in advance, it is possible to easily notify the player. In addition, in this control example, since an effect device other than the third symbol display device 81 is used, it is possible to continuously notify the effect result of the look-ahead effect.

In addition, conventionally, a variable effect is executed in which the identification information (third pattern) for indicating the lottery result of the special pattern is variably displayed (dynamically displayed) on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 and then stopped. There is something that makes According to such a pachinko machine 10, it is possible to predict whether or not the current lottery result of the special symbols will be a big win or not by means of the variable presentation mode of the third symbols, thereby enhancing the amusement of the game. Ta. However, since the variation performance mode of the third symbol is determined only on the basis of the lottery result of the special symbol, the lottery result of the special symbol is determined according to the variation performance mode to be executed for the player who plays the game for a long time. There was a problem of being easily identified.

In addition, in order to execute a specific variation effect mode (stop display mode of the third symbol) indicating that the special symbol lottery result is a lottery result (for example, a big win) that is advantageous to the player, a special symbol lottery Since the condition is that the result is a lottery result (for example, a big win) that is advantageous to the player, there is a problem that the frequency with which the variable presentation mode is executed becomes low.

On the other hand, in the first control example, it is possible to inform the lottery result of symbols other than special symbols (for example, normal symbols) by using the third symbol variation effect mode for indicating the lottery result of special symbols. configured to be possible. By configuring in this way, it is possible to set the variation performance mode of the third symbol based on information other than the lottery result of the special symbol (for example, the lottery result of the normal symbol), so depending on the variation performance mode to be executed It is possible to prevent the lottery result of the special symbol from being easily discriminated.

Furthermore, since the specific variation performance mode can be executed even when the lottery result of the normal symbols is a lottery result (for example, winning) that is advantageous to the player, the execution frequency of the specific variation performance mode can be increased. .

In addition, in the first control example, in order to show the normal symbol lottery result using the variable effect set based on the variable time (special figure variable time) set based on the special symbol lottery result, normal It is configured to temporarily stop the third symbol (actually moving (oscillating), but almost stopped) at the timing when the symbol fluctuation time elapses. As a result, it is possible to make it look as if the third symbol is stop-displayed in accordance with the stop timing of the normal symbol.

In addition, in this control example, during the fluctuation performance corresponding to the fluctuation time (special figure fluctuation time) set based on the lottery result of the special design, when the third design is temporarily stopped at the stop timing of the normal design In addition, the performance mode of the remaining time performance executed during the remaining time is made different based on the remaining time from the temporary stop timing (the time from the temporary stop timing until the special symbol is stopped and displayed). For example, if the remaining time is less than 3 seconds, the remaining time effect in which the temporary stop display of the third symbol continues is executed, and if the remaining time is 3 seconds or more, the temporarily stopped third symbol is displayed. It is configured to be displayed in a variable manner again.

As a result, even though the remaining time is short (for example, 0.5 seconds), it is possible to suppress the execution of an effect that is difficult for the player to understand by causing the third pattern in the temporary stop to fluctuate again. can be done. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game due to continuing the temporary stop display even though the remaining time is long (for example, 10 seconds).

Furthermore, in the first control example, the length of the remaining time is roughly divided (for example, divided into intervals of 3 seconds), and a re-variation effect corresponding to the division is executed. As a result, it is possible to easily execute the re-variation effect corresponding to the length of the remaining time. In addition, the effect mode that can be set as a re-fluctuation effect has its effect period set in advance at intervals of 3 seconds, 6 seconds, 9 seconds, etc., and after setting the effect period corresponding to the remaining time In order to correspond to the detailed remaining time, the first half of the performance mode is deleted for a predetermined time, and a re-variation performance is executed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute the re-variation performance corresponding to the remaining time that is randomly calculated using the performance period set in advance at regular intervals, so that the performance data used for re-variation Capacity can be reduced. Although detailed explanation is omitted, in this control example, the effect in which the third symbol swings is set as the first half (for 1 second) of the effect mode preset corresponding to the remaining time. . As a result, even if part of the first half of the presentation mode is deleted in correspondence with the actual remaining time, it is possible to suppress the execution of the presentation that gives the player a sense of discomfort.

In addition, in this control example, when the lottery result of the special pattern is other than the big win, and the player wins the small win, which is the lottery result that can give the player a smaller amount of benefits (prize balls) than the big win game. Also, it is configured so that the above-described specific variation effect is executed.

Then, as a small winning game executed when winning a small winning, a winning game executed in the initial period (round game period of the first round) of the big winning game executed when winning the above-mentioned big winning It is configured so that the same game contents are executed.

As a result, even if the winning game is executed after the execution of the specific variation performance, at that time, the player is informed whether the current winning game is a winning game based on the big winning or the winning game based on the small winning. Since it can be made difficult to understand, it is possible to make the player have a long-term expectation for winning the jackpot.

In addition, in this first control example, the player determines whether the winning game being executed is a big winning game or a small winning game using the period in which the same game content is executed in the big winning game and the small winning game. It is configured to execute a notification effect for notifying to. By configuring in this way, it is possible to notify information that is difficult to discriminate only by the content of the winning game by production, so that the production effect can be enhanced.

Conventionally, as an effect (announcement effect) for suggesting the result of the lottery of special symbols to the player, an effect (operation effect) for displaying the contents of the notice is executed by having the player operate the operating means (frame button 22). there is something to do When executing such an operation presentation, a period during which the operation of the operation means can be effectively determined (operation valid period) is set, and if the operation means is operated within the operation valid period, the notice content is displayed. It is common to configure Then, in order to inform the player that the operation effective period has been set, for example, a display mode imitating the operation means (button display) and a display mode indicating the operation effective period (for example, time gauge display) ) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 . Further, in one operation effect, there is a display mode in which a time gauge is attached to each of a plurality of button displays so that the player can operate the operation means a plurality of times.

According to the gaming machine having such a configuration, the player can grasp a plurality of notice contents by operating the operation means within the operation valid period corresponding to each button display. It was possible to have them actively participate in the production. However, when a plurality of button displays for which operation valid periods are set are displayed at the same time, if operation of the frame button 22 is temporarily neglected, each of the individually set operation valid periods will be displayed. Since it becomes difficult to appropriately operate the operating means by using the operator's hands, there is a problem that the willingness to participate in the performance decreases while the valid operation period is being set.

On the other hand, in the first control example, a plurality of operation effects with overlapping operation effective periods are configured to be executable, and furthermore, when the operation effective period of each operation effect satisfies a predetermined condition, each operation effect It is configured to execute a fusion operation effect that fuses. Specifically, when the display mode of the time gauge indicating the remaining period of the operation valid period is the same among a plurality of operation effects, the combined operation effect is executed.

By constructing in this way, it is possible to have the possibility of changing a plurality of operation performances into one integrated operation performance, so that it is possible to leave the possibility of completing the operation performance to the end. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in willingness to participate in the operation presentation during the operation presentation.

Further, some conventional pachinko machines 10 are constructed so that specific notice contents are displayed even when the operation means is not operated within the operation effective period set for the operation presentation. In such a pachinko machine 10, since the specific notice content can be displayed even when the player does not operate the operating means, the player's willingness to play is reduced if the operating means cannot be operated within the effective period of operation. You can prevent it from happening. However, in such a configuration, there is a problem that the relevance between operating the operation means within the valid operation period and displaying the content of the notice is lowered, resulting in a decrease in the presentation effect.

On the other hand, in the first control example, when the operation means is not operated at the time when the predetermined period of the operation valid period has passed, the operation means displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is changed to It is configured such that an effect (automatic depression effect) in which a simulated display mode (button display) is automatically operated is executed. As a result, it is possible to strengthen the relationship between the operation of the operation means within the operation valid period and the display of the notice content, thereby enhancing the performance effect.

Furthermore, in the first control example, when the player operates the operating means during the automatic pressing effect, the effect mode of the automatic pressing effect can be varied in accordance with the player's operation. there is Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of operating the operation means until the end of the period in which the operation effective period is set.

Here, the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 used in this first control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 207 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. As shown in FIG. 207, the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example differs from the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 2) in the first embodiment described above in the left area of the game board 13 (the variable display unit 80 The difference is that a through gate 67 is provided in the game area formed on the left side, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 207, the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example is provided with a through gate 67 in the left area, and the player plays a left-handed game (a game for causing balls to flow down to the left area of the game board 13). It is constructed so that all the balls shot when the ball passes through the through gate 67. - 特許庁With this configuration, the player plays a left-handed game (a game for causing the ball to flow down to the left area of the game board 13), and the ball enters the first winning port 64 to draw the first special symbol. It is possible to execute the lottery of normal symbols even while performing. As a result, the lottery of ordinary symbols is performed using the variable performance (special figure 1 variable performance) for dynamically displaying the identification information (third symbol) for indicating the lottery result of the first special symbol on the third symbol display device 81. I can show the results.

The detailed contents of the special figure 1 variable effect will be described later with reference to FIG. In the middle (while the third pattern is fluctuating), the third pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed (the third pattern is oscillated and displayed to the extent that the player thinks that the third pattern is stopped and displayed). Configure. As a result, it is possible to inform the result of the lottery of normal symbols using the third symbol, so that it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect.

In addition, in the first control example, the third symbol is stopped (temporarily stopped) and displayed in the same win display mode in the case of winning the normal symbol and in the case of winning the special symbol (charge effect ( (see FIG. 212))). Thus, it is difficult for the player to discriminate whether the win display mode stopped and displayed is the display mode for showing the lottery result of the special pattern or the display mode for showing the lottery result of the normal pattern. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier to have expectations for the winning game that is executed after the third symbol is stopped and displayed.

Furthermore, since it is constructed so as to execute the above-mentioned charge effect either when winning a win of a normal symbol or when winning a win of a special symbol, the charge effect is performed only when winning a win of a special symbol. The execution frequency of the charging effect can be increased compared to the case where is executed. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to experience various effects, so that it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early.

Returning to FIG. 207, the description continues. A game area (lower right game area) covered with a resin outer edge member 73 (73b) is formed in the right area of the game board 13 . This lower right game area is transparent and covered with the outer edge member 73b that has been subjected to surface processing (for example, texturing) that diffusely reflects light. It becomes a game area that is difficult to see.

Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 208, but in the lower right game area, there is provided a special prize winning device 550 having a flow path for causing balls to flow down and various prize winning openings into which balls can win. Further, a discharge flow path is formed for using balls that have won prizes in various prize-winning ports for a pseudo effect. Balls flowing down the lower right game area are configured to enter an out hole (not shown) and be discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 .

Next, with reference to FIG. 208, the types of ball entrances (winning entrances) provided in the special prize winning device 550 and the flow path of the game balls entering the respective ball entrances will be described. Note that the flow-down path (main paths SK1 to SK6) of the game balls that have flowed into the first unit 551 of the special winning device 550 has already been described in the first embodiment with reference to FIG. The details are omitted here. FIG. 208 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the special winning device 550. FIG. As shown in FIG. 208, the special winning device 550 is provided with a specific out port 166 on the upper right side in front view, and a specific general prize winning port 163 on the left side of the specific out port 166 in front view. The specific general prize winning opening 163 corresponds to the second receiving portion 562 (see FIG. 22) in the description of the first embodiment described above. ) has been renamed. Similarly, the specific out port 166 is obtained by changing the name of the third receiving portion 563 (see FIG. 22) in the description of the first embodiment. As shown in FIG. 208, the specific general prize winning port 163 and the out port 166 are provided with a general winning sensor 163s and an out ball sensor 166s capable of detecting the entry of game balls. The specific general prize winning port 163 is configured as a prize winning port in which three prize balls are given for one game ball winning (entering a ball), and the general winning sensor 163s detects the entering of a game ball. Three prize balls are paid out each time. On the other hand, the specific out port 166 is configured as a ball-entering port in which no prize ball is given even if a game ball enters (it merely discharges the entered game ball to the outside), and an out-ball sensor Even if the entry of game balls is detected by 166s, prize balls are not paid out.

Further, as shown in FIG. 208, a variable winning device 65 having a specific winning hole 65a into which a game ball can enter is provided substantially in the central portion of the special winning device 550. FIG. This variable winning device 65 is composed of the first variable plate 583b, the first receiving recess 574a, and the second receiving recess 574b in the description of the first embodiment described above. To clarify one point, in the description of the first control example, the first variable plate 583b is referred to as the opening/closing door 65f1, and the first receiving recess 574a and the second receiving recess 574b are simply referred to as the specific winning opening 65a. It is called When a jackpot lottery results in a jackpot, the opening/closing door 65f1 is opened a predetermined number of times (6 to 16 rounds) (displaced from a state protruded to the front side to a state retracted to the back side) to enter the specific prize winning opening 65a. And the game ball is in a state where it can be entered.

As shown in FIG. 208, the specific winning opening 65a is provided with specific winning sensors 65s1 and 65s2 (detecting devices SE3 and SE4 in the description of the first embodiment) capable of detecting the entry of game balls. ing. The specific prize winning port 65a is configured as a prize winning port in which 15 prize balls are given for one game ball winning (entering a ball), and the specific winning sensors 65s1 and 65s2 detect the entering of the game ball. 15 prize balls are paid out each time they are detected. In each round of the jackpot, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 game balls have been won) (the opening/closing door 65f1 is retracted to the back side), so that the jackpot is won. A lot of prize balls are paid out by shooting the game balls aiming at the specific winning opening 65a (shooting the game balls toward the flow path on the right side of the variable display unit 80 when viewed from the front). be able to. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game in the jackpot.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 208, at the lower left of the variable prize winning device 65 in the special prize winning device 550, there is a second ball entrance (second prize winning port) 640 (the third receiving recess 575a in the description of the first embodiment, the third 4 receiving recess 575b, see FIG. 22) and a first electric accessory 640a (second variable member 584b in the description of the first embodiment) for opening and closing the second ball entrance (second prize winning opening) 640 are provided. ing. When a game ball enters the second ball entrance 640, a jackpot lottery (lottery of special symbols) is executed, and when the jackpot is won, a jackpot game is executed in which the specific prize winning port 65a is opened and closed multiple times. In addition, as described above, the first electric accessary product 640a is in an operating state for a predetermined period of time when the normal symbol lottery executed based on the passage of the game ball through the through gate 67 wins. Although detailed description is omitted, in this control example, a right through gate (not shown) is provided at a predetermined position through which a ball launched by a right-handed game flows down the right area. This right through gate has the same function as the through gate 67 provided in the left region. As a result, even when a right-handed game is being played, the normal symbol lottery can be executed efficiently. The position of the right through gate may be upstream of the special winning device 550, may be inside the special winning device 550, or may be a position through which balls ejected from the special winning device 550 pass. For example, if a right through gate is provided upstream of the second ball entrance 640 in the special winning device 550, the ball passing through the right through gate can enter the second ball entrance 640. When the right through gate is provided downstream of the second ball entrance 640 in the special prize winning device 550, the ball passing through the right through gate cannot enter the second ball entrance 640. can be done.

The game ball that has entered the specific general winning opening 163 (second receiving portion 562) rolls on the second rolling portion 577 (see FIG. 20) to the back side in front view (back side of base plate 60) guided to. The game ball guided to the back side in the front view flows into the guide channel 690 indicated by the broken line in FIG. Similarly, the game ball entering the specific out port 166 rolls on the third rolling portion 578 (see FIG. 20), is guided to the back side of the base plate 60, and flows into the guide passage 690. do. Also, the game ball entering the specific winning hole 65a rolls on the secondary path HK1 (see FIG. 22), is guided to the back side of the base plate 60, and flows into the guide channel 690. That is, the game ball that entered the specific general winning hole 163, the game ball that entered the specific out hole 166, and the game ball that entered the specific winning hole 65a all pass through the guidance flow path 690. flow down

As shown in FIG. 208, the guide channel 690 includes a general ball throwing section 690a for causing a game ball that has entered the specific general prize winning port 163 to flow into the guide channel 690, and a ball entering the specific out port 166. An out-throwing portion 690b for causing a game ball to flow into the guiding channel 690, a specific ball-throwing portion 690c for causing a game ball entering the specific winning hole 65a to flow into the guiding channel 690, and a specific channel 690. At least a confluence path 690d provided on the most downstream side and for causing game balls to flow down (merge) from the back side of the base plate 60 to the production flow path 691 (secondary path HK3 in the description of the first embodiment). It is A game ball that has flowed into the guide channel 690 via any one of the general ball-throwing portion 690a, the out-ball-throwing portion 690b, and the specific ball-throwing portion 690c is guided to the performance channel 691 via the confluence path 690d. . The game ball guided to the performance channel 691 falls from the discharge part 691a at the lower end of the performance channel 691 toward the pseudo attacker 165 (decoration unit 750 in the description of the first embodiment, see FIG. 91). do. The pseudo attacker 165 has a pseudo winning opening 165a into which a game ball can enter, an open state in which a game ball can enter the pseudo winning opening 165a, and a state in which a ball cannot enter the pseudo winning opening 165a. and a pseudo door 165f1 (opening/closing member 870 in the description of the first embodiment, see FIG. 104(b)) configured to be variable between two closed states. In addition, on the front side of the pseudo attacker 165, there is an out port 167 (winning prize in the description of the first embodiment) for discharging game balls that have reached the pseudo attacker 165 while the pseudo door 165f1 is closed. A port 761a) is provided. As shown in FIG. 207, a cover member is provided so as to make the inside of the special winning device 550 provided in the lower right game area of the pachinko machine 10 of this control example difficult to see. This cover member is configured so that a player can visually recognize a part of the special winning device 550 when a specific game state is set. Specifically, an irradiating means capable of irradiating light toward the back surface of the cover member is provided inside the cover member. It is configured so that the player can visually recognize the interior of the illuminated area. By configuring in this way, the game area that is normally difficult to see can be made easily visible when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when a jackpot game is executed). It is possible to provide a production with unexpectedness. In addition, since the operation of the irradiation means serves the purpose of showing the player the game area to be targeted during the jackpot game, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game. In this control example, during the jackpot game, the ball flowing out from the guide flow path 690 is made to flow down rather than the flow down path (see main paths SK1 to SK6 in FIG. 22) through which the balls flowing into the special winning device 550 flow down. The flow path 691 is configured so that it is easier for the player to visually recognize it. By constructing in this way, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the ball flow that flows down the performance channel 691 as the ball flow during the jackpot game and wins the pseudo attacker 165 .

Although the details will be described later, in the first control example, the specific winning opening 65a is opened and closed and the pseudo door 165f1 of the pseudo attacker 165 is opened and closed in each round of the jackpot game. In this first control example, an effect (pseudo winning effect) suggesting payout of prize balls is executed in accordance with the timing of entry of the game ball into the pseudo winning hole 165a. In other words, instead of executing the effect of notifying the payout of the prize ball based on the detection of the ball entering the specific winning hole 65a, the pseudo winning effect is executed in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the pseudo winning hole 165a. It is configured to run. That is, by using the pseudo attacker 165, which is easier to visually recognize than the specific winning hole 65a covered with the first path member 560, to suggest whether or not the prize balls are to be paid out, the pseudo attacker during the jackpot game. It is possible to make it seem that a prize ball is paid out when the ball wins the prize to the attacker 165.例文帳に追加

After a ball is detected by either of the specific winning sensors 65s1 and 65s2, the detected game ball flows down the guiding channel 690 and the performance channel 691 and enters the pseudo winning hole 165a. A time of about 0.5 second is required until the time. Therefore, in the first control example, the opening timing and the closing timing of the pseudo winning opening 165a are set to 0.0. It is configured to delay for 5 seconds. As a result, all the game balls that have won (entered) the specific winning hole 65a can enter the pseudo winning hole 165a.

In addition, in the first control example, as described above, the game ball entered into the specific general winning hole 163 or the specific out hole 166 can also reach the pseudo attacker 165 . From the player's point of view, it is difficult to distinguish which game ball entered the ball entrance and reached the pseudo attacker 165, so regardless of the type of the ball entrance, the game ball enters the pseudo winning opening 165a. It is configured to execute a pseudo winning effect for all entering balls. As a result, the more game balls enter the specified general prize winning port 163 and the specified out port 166 during the round period of the jackpot, the more times the pseudo winning performance is executed, so that more prizes than actually exist. You can create the illusion that you have won the sphere. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's satisfaction in the jackpot game. In addition, as described above, each round of the jackpot ends when the game ball enters the specific winning hole 65a 10 times. On the other hand, in addition to the game balls that have entered the specific winning opening 65a, the game balls that have entered the specific general winning opening 163 and the specific out opening 166 can also enter the pseudo winning opening 165a. Therefore, 10 or more game balls are likely to enter the pseudo prize winning opening 165a in each round of the jackpot. Therefore, the player can be made to feel as if more game balls than usual enter the specific winning hole 65a in each round of the jackpot, thereby giving the player a greater sense of satisfaction. be able to. Here, in the first control example, the mode of the pseudo winning effect is determined by whether or not the number of times a ball enters the pseudo winning opening 165a during the open period of one pseudo door 165f1 exceeds a prescribed number of times (10 times). (Pseudo winning sound) is configured to be different. As a result, when the pseudo winning sound changes, it is possible for the player to have the illusion that the ball has entered the specific winning hole 65a in excess of the specified number (over winning). It can give you greater satisfaction.

In addition, in the first control example, whether or not the pseudo winning effect is executed and the execution timing are determined by the timing at which the ball entering each ball entrance (the specific general winning opening 163, the specific out opening 166, and the specific winning opening 65a) is detected. It is configured to be determined by That is, at the timing of detecting the entry into each ball entrance, it is predicted whether or not the timing at which the game ball for which the entry is detected reaches the pseudo attacker 165 is during the opening period of the pseudo door 165f1. Then, when it is during the open period (that is, when it is predicted that the game ball whose entrance ball has been detected will enter the simulated prize winning opening 165a during the period when the simulated door 165f1 is open), execution of the simulated winning effect is determined. It is configured to In other words, with respect to the pseudo winning opening 165a, whether or not the pseudo winning effect can be executed only by the winning sensor originally provided in each ball entrance without providing any configuration for detecting the entry of the game ball, and the execution timing. By configuring in this way, the number of sensors for detecting an entering ball can be reduced, so the cost rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced by reducing the number of parts.

In addition, in this first control example, the period of about 1.5 seconds from when the ball entering the specific general winning hole 163 is detected until the game ball with which the ball is detected reaches the pseudo attacker 165 It takes a period of about 1 second from the detection of the entry into the specific out port 166 to the arrival of the game ball in which the entry is detected reaches the pseudo attacker 165, and the specific winning port 65a A period of about 0.5 seconds is required for the game ball whose entry is detected to reach the pseudo attacker 165 after the entry is detected. Therefore, when a ball entering the specific general winning opening 163 is detected, it is determined (estimated) whether or not the artificial door 165f1 is open after 1.5 seconds, and the artificial door 165f1 is opened. When it is predicted that (the game ball whose entry is detected will enter the pseudo winning hole 165a), the pseudo winning effect is set to be executed after 1.5 seconds. Similarly, when a ball entering the specific out port 166 is detected, it is determined (estimated) whether or not the artificial door 165f1 is open after one second, and the artificial door 165f1 is opened ( When it is predicted that the game ball whose entry is detected will enter the pseudo prize winning port 165a), the pseudo prize performance is set to be executed after one second. When a ball entering the specific winning opening 65a is detected, it is determined (predicted) whether or not the pseudo door 165f1 is open after 0.5 seconds, and the pseudo door 165f1 is opened. When it is predicted that the detected game ball will enter the pseudo winning hole 165a, the pseudo winning performance is set to be executed after 0.5 second. As a result, since the pseudo winning effect can be executed in accordance with the timing when the game ball enters the pseudo winning hole 165a, the winning ball can be more reliably entered into the pseudo attacker 165 in the big win. It is possible to make the player feel as if they are granted. Therefore, in the big win, the game can be played while paying attention to whether or not the game ball enters the pseudo attacker 165, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the first control example, not only the game ball entering the specific winning hole 65a, but also the game ball entering the specific general winning hole 163 and the specific out hole 166 can reach the pseudo attacker 165. However, it is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured such that a game ball entering at least one of the specific general winning hole 163 and the specific out hole 166 cannot reach the pseudo attacker 165 . By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress (prevent) the deviation between the number of prize balls estimated from the number of times of the pseudo winning effect and the number of prize balls actually paid out. In addition, in the first control example, the timing for executing the pseudo winning effect is set at the timing when the ball enters each winning hole. If the execution timing of the pseudo winning effect is set to the subsequent timing, it is preferable to prohibit the execution of the pseudo winning effect. As a result, the ball flows down each channel in the special prize winning device 550 in a period greatly deviated from the predetermined period, and the pseudo attacker 165 is closed based on the large difference in closing timing of the variable prize winning device 65. Even if the timing is greatly different, it is possible to suppress the execution of an effect that gives the player a sense of incongruity.

In the first control example, the specific winning hole 65a is provided downstream of the specific general winning hole 163 and the specific out hole 166, but the placement of each ball entry hole may be determined arbitrarily.

Returning to FIG. 207, the description continues. A center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer circumference of the third pattern display device 81 in the variable display device unit 80 provided in the substantially central portion of the game board 13 . The third pattern display device 81 can be visually recognized through an opening formed in the center of the center frame 86 . The center frame 86 protrudes toward the front side of the game board 13 and surrounds the third symbol display device 81 to prevent the third symbol display device 81 from contacting the game ball.

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, the left, middle and right three patterns. A column of symbols is displayed. Each pattern row is composed of a plurality of patterns (third patterns), and these third patterns are vertically scrolled for each pattern row, and the third pattern is variably displayed (variable) on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. display). In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b under the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4). Decorative display according to the display of the pattern display devices 37a and 37b is performed. Incidentally, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be constructed using a reel or the like.

Next, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 209(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in this control example, and FIG. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing display contents; The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a 15-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, three patterns, left, middle and right, are displayed. A row of symbols is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 209(a), the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is roughly divided into two upper and lower parts. The lower 1/3 is a sub-display area Ds for displaying a notice effect, a character, the number of pending balls, and the like.

The third pattern (special pattern 1 or special pattern 2) displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is composed of 10 types of main patterns imitating the numbers "0" to "9". . In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4) is a big hit, the same main symbols (for example, "777") are displayed in a variable display, It is configured such that a big win occurs after the variable display is finished. That is, the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a symbol for showing the lottery result of the special symbol by the main control device 110 .

Specifically, the main display area Dm displays three pattern rows L1, L2, and L3 on the left, middle, and right, respectively. The above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order in each of the symbol rows L1 to L3. In other words, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order in each of the symbol rows L1 to L3, and each symbol row L1 to L3 is periodically scrolled from top to bottom for variable display.

Also, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol of each symbol row is stopped and displayed on the activated line V1. When the third symbols are stopped on the activated line V1 in a combination of big winning symbols (combination of the same main symbols in this first control example), a big winning moving image is displayed as a big winning.

In addition, the mode of the variable display of the third symbols in the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the one described above, and is arbitrary. The number of symbols in the row can be changed as appropriate. Also, the patterns displayed in a variable manner on the third pattern display device 81 are not limited to the above. Further, the area where the third symbol is variably displayed may be configured to be variable. For example, when a specific effect is executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the variable display area of the third symbol or moving the variable display area to a position that is difficult for the player to visually recognize (for example, a corner of the display screen), making it difficult for the player to understand whether the third symbol is changing. You may make it Also, during the period when the special symbol is fluctuating, the fluctuation of the third symbol may be temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) and then changed again.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol and the display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the variation of the second special symbol are the same (to the extent that the player has difficulty distinguishing ), but the display mode and display area of the third symbol may be changed so as to correspond to the type of the special symbol that is fluctuating.

In addition, in this first control example, it is possible to stop and display a specific symbol as the third symbol that is variably displayed in the middle symbol row Z2. Details of this specific symbol will be described later with reference to FIG. By stop-displaying the special symbol lottery result, it can be notified that the lottery result is a specific lottery result.

In this control example, when a predetermined condition is established, for example, when the third symbols indicating the same number are displayed in a stopped state in the left symbol row L1 and the right symbol row L3, the middle symbol row L2 during fluctuation is specified. It is configured such that a specific pattern is displayed by interrupting a portion (for example, a portion between numbers "0" and "9"). As a result, the specific symbol is suddenly displayed after the lapse of the predetermined period of variable display of the third symbol, so that it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected variation effect.

The conditions for displaying the specific symbols may be conditions other than those described above. For example, it is required that the numbers indicated by the third symbols stopped and displayed in the left symbol row L1 and the right symbol row L3 are in a predetermined combination. It may be a condition, or it may be a condition that the player operates the operation means during the variable display of the third symbol. Moreover, it is good also as a condition satisfied based on the lottery result of a special design. In addition, a variable effect in which a specific symbol is displayed after a predetermined period of time has passed since the variable display of the third symbol is started may be set in advance at the time of setting the variable effect (at the time of start of variation).

In addition, when displaying a specific pattern, it is possible to use a method other than the method of interrupting and displaying a predetermined pattern row, for example, replacing it with one third pattern preset in the pattern row. good. In this case, for example, among the third symbols set in the middle symbol row L2, when a specific third symbol is stopped and displayed, the combination of the third symbols indicating a special symbol jackpot winning is stopped and displayed. If it is in a ready-to-win state, it is preferable to display the specific pattern by replacing it with a third pattern set before or after the specific third pattern. As a result, even if any of the plurality of continuous third symbols are stopped and displayed, a lottery result that is advantageous to the player is shown, so that the player can be made to pay attention to the variable presentation while having a sense of expectation. .

In this control example, three types of special symbol lottery results, namely, "big win", "minor win", and "loss" can be set as special symbol lottery results. One jackpot type is set among a plurality of jackpot types in which the content of the jackpot game to be executed and the game state set after the jackpot game is finished are different. The combination of the third symbols stop-displayed on the third symbol display device 81 suggests (informs) the player the lottery result of the special symbols and the jackpot type when the jackpot is won.

For example, if the lottery result of the special symbols is "jackpot D" in which the jackpot type that is most advantageous to the player is set, one of the odd numbered main symbols "3, 7" is a square. A variable display is performed in which the display stops all at once. Further, in the case of "jackpot A", "jackpot B", "jackpot C", and "jackpot E", a variable display is performed in which one of the main symbols "0 to 9" is aligned in a grid pattern. Furthermore, when the lottery result of the special symbols is "small hit", chance numbers composed of combinations of "341" are displayed. It should be noted that this chance combination is configured not to be selected if the lottery result is a loss. In the present embodiment, the chance numbers are configured to be displayed in a combination of specific third symbols. ) may be displayed as one or a combination of a plurality of them, or characters such as "Chance" may be displayed for notification.

As shown in FIG. 209(b), the sub-display area Ds is divided into two small areas. Information for indicating the winning information (executing pattern m0) is displayed, and information for indicating the winning information of the special pattern held and stored in the small area Ds2 (special figure 1 first reserved design m1 to special figure 1 fourth reserved design m4, special figure 2 first reserved design m5 to special figure 2 fourth reserved design m8) are configured to be displayed. Further, the information (contents) displayed in the sub display area Ds is configured to be switched depending on the game state. is displayed, and even during the variable display of the third symbol, when a variable performance in which the expectation of winning the jackpot is set high is being executed, the player is informed of the expectation of the jackpot of the variable performance. A display mode for indicating is displayed. Further, when executing the variation effect using the entire display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the sub display area Ds is erased.

Next, the contents actually displayed on the third pattern display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 209(b). As shown in FIG. 209(b), in the front view upper left in the main display area Dm, the special figure 1 display area Dm1a for variably displaying the 4th design in conjunction with the variability display of the 1st special design, and the 2nd special A special figure 2 display area Dm1b that variably displays the fourth pattern in conjunction with the variable display of the pattern is formed, and the upper right in the front view in the main display area Dm is variably displayed in conjunction with the variable display of the normal pattern. The normal map display area Dm2 is configured to be stopped and displayed.

In addition, in the schematic diagram shown in FIG. 209 (b), the special figure 1 display area Dm1a, the special figure 2 display area Dm1b, and the general figure display area Dm2 are shown in a size that is visible to the player, In reality, it is formed in such a size that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize it. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the variation effect of the third symbol executed in the main display area Dm.

In addition, when an effect using the entire display screen is executed as a variable effect of the third pattern, or a movable accessory for effect provided near the third pattern display device 81 (for example, a lower displacement member 440 (see FIG. 9) )) is movable to cover the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the size of the display areas of the special figure 1 display area Dm1a, the special figure 2 display area Dm1b, and the general figure display area Dm2 is reduced. may be displayed, the display position may be changed, or the display may be temporarily hidden. As a result, it is possible to provide a powerful presentation without a sense of incongruity.

Furthermore, instead of the special figure 1 display area Dm1a, the special figure 2 display area Dm1b, and the normal figure display area Dm2, the third symbol display device 81 is interlocked with the variable display of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the normal symbol. may be configured to display the dynamically displayed fourth pattern. In this case, it is preferable to provide LEDs for the fourth symbol corresponding to each symbol at the same location as the many decorative LEDs provided on the pachinko machine 10 . As a result, the dynamic display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the variable display of each symbol can be performed in a way that is difficult for the player to understand.

<Regarding the production content in the first control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 210 to 218, the contents of various effects executed in this first control example will be described. First, with reference to FIGS. 210 and 211, a look-ahead effect using a reserved symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and a treasure chest accessory 750 which is a director accessory provided outside the third symbol display device explain about

In this first control example, when a ball enters the special symbol starting port (first ball entrance 64, second ball entrance 640) during the variable display of special symbols, the special symbol lottery right (the ball The right to execute a special design lottery using the values of various counters (winning information) acquired when entering a ball) is stored (reserved storage) up to a predetermined number (4 for each special design). It is configured. As a display mode for indicating the number of reserved and stored lottery rights, reserved symbols are displayed in a small area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. FIG.

Furthermore, the content of the winning information retained and stored is discriminated in advance before the lottery of the special symbols is actually executed, and the display mode of the retained symbols and the display mode of the treasure box accessory 750 are determined based on the determination result. It is configured to execute a variable effect (prefetch effect).

When this look-ahead effect is executed, the display mode of the pending symbol displayed in the small area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 is changed. Then, when executing the special symbol lottery corresponding to the reserved symbols whose display mode is changed, as shown in FIG. m0 is displayed in the small area Ds1. That is, the running pattern m0 displayed in the small area Ds1 informs the player of the display mode of the reserved pattern changed by the look-ahead effect even while the special pattern variation based on the reserved pattern is being executed. configured so that it can be In this control example, since both the running symbol m0 and the reserved symbols m1 to m8 are displayed in a circular display mode, the changed suspended symbol display mode is used as it is for the running symbol m0. However, it suffices if the player can grasp the variable state of the display mode of the reserved symbols. By arranging the colors of each form to be variably settable, it is possible to comprehend the variable state of the display mode of the reserved pattern (variable color) from the display mode (color) of the running pattern m0. .

In addition, in this control example, as shown in FIG. 211(b), the display mode of the treasure chest accessory 750 as well as the reserved symbols can be changed by the look-ahead effect. Furthermore, even when executing a look-ahead effect of varying the display mode of the reserved symbols and a look-ahead effect of varying the display mode of the treasure box accessory 750 for the same winning information, the result of the look-ahead effect are configured differently.

According to the example shown in FIG. 210, during the variable display of the special symbols in which the lottery result is a jackpot D (16-round jackpot), the running symbol m0 indicates that the expectation of winning the jackpot is high. By displaying the “green” display mode (in FIG. 210(a), the grid pattern display mode), the player is suggested that the special symbol variation being executed may be a jackpot variation. Then, the treasure box accessory 750 is displayed in a “red” display mode (diagonal line display mode in FIG. 210(b)) indicating that the jackpot type is the jackpot D and the degree of expectation is high.

Further, according to the example shown in FIG. 211, during the variable display of the special symbols in which the lottery result is a jackpot A (jackpot of 6 rounds), the running symbol m0 indicates that the expectation of winning the jackpot is high. By displaying the “green” display mode (in FIG. 211(a), the grid pattern display mode), the player is suggested that the special symbol variation being executed may be a jackpot variation. Then, the treasure box accessory 750 is displayed in a “green” display mode (a checkered display mode in FIG. 211(b)) indicating that the jackpot type is the jackpot A and the degree of expectation is high.

That is, in the first control example, the look-ahead effect that changes the display mode of the reserved symbol sets the look-ahead effect mainly based on the information indicating the result of the judgment result of the big hit among the target winning information. The look-ahead effect for changing the display mode of the treasure box accessory 750 is configured so that the performance mode of the look-ahead effect is mainly set based on the information indicating the type of jackpot to be selected when the jackpot is won among the target winning information. ing.

As a result, the player can comprehensively discriminate the display modes of a plurality of objects to be played, the display modes of which are variable by the look-ahead effect, and predict the lottery results of the special symbols based on the target winning information. Watch the performance carefully. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 210 and 211, the display mode of the treasure chest accessory 750 is at least as slow as a portion of the third symbol variably displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 is stopped and displayed. It is configured so that a look-ahead effect is executed so as to be variable even before. That is, as described above, the number of the third pattern and the jackpot type are related, and when the jackpot is actually hit, each third pattern is stopped in a predetermined combination (for example, a grid). Since the number of the third symbol is displayed, the number of the third symbol more directly suggests the result (jackpot type) of the special symbol lottery of this time to the player. The display mode of the object 750 is made variable.

By constructing in this way, the lottery results of the special symbols can be suggested to the player in order, and the player can be interested in various effects to be executed until the end.

In this control example, when the look-ahead effect is executed, the display mode of the reserved symbols and the treasure box accessory 750 is changed to a display mode showing the result of the look-ahead effect. For example, the display mode may be changed step by step with the effect result of the look-ahead effect as the final stage. In this case, it is preferable that the result of the look-ahead effect can be set in a plurality of stages corresponding to the size of the privilege given to the player. As a result, it is possible to enjoy the performance while expecting that the display mode will change more.

Further, the determination of whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect of varying the display mode of the reserved symbol and the determination of whether or not to perform the look-ahead effect of varying the display mode of the treasure box accessory 750 are configured to be different. Therefore, it is possible to know at what timing during the period from when the winning information is reserved and stored until when the variation of the special symbol corresponding to the winning information is started, the display mode of which object to be performed is changed. Since it is possible to make it difficult, even if the effect result of the look-ahead effect has already been displayed, it is possible to make the user expect that the display mode will be further changed.

As described above, in this control example, as a look-ahead effect, the display mode of a plurality of objects to be performed can be randomly and variably displayed. The order of objects may be determined in advance. As a result, it is possible to tell the player in an easy-to-understand manner which object to be performed whose display mode can be changed next. Therefore, it is possible to easily determine that the display mode has changed.

Also, when the display mode of a plurality of objects to be performed is randomly variably displayed as in this control example, which object to be performed changes its display mode immediately before the timing when the display mode actually changes is determined. A similar effect can be obtained by configuring to notify of.

Furthermore, in this control example, the timing for variably displaying the display mode of the object to be performed is set at random, but the display mode may be changed at a predetermined specific timing. The display mode may be changed based on the operation of the operating means by a person.

Furthermore, in this control example, by varying the display mode of the pending symbols, the winning information to be the target of the current look-ahead effect is notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner, and the target winning information is difficult to understand. It is configured to execute a look-ahead effect that changes the display mode of. As a result, for example, when the display mode of the treasure box accessory 750 is changed prior to the display mode of the reserved symbols, the player can have the pleasure of predicting which winning information the prefetch effect is being executed. can provide.

In this control example, the display mode of the pending symbols corresponding to the winning information to be the target of the look-ahead effect is configured to be variable. It may be configured to allow As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand which reserved pattern (winning prize information) is targeted for the read-ahead performance even when the read-ahead performance using the reserved pattern is executed. In addition, in the look-ahead effect that changes the display mode of the treasure box accessory 750, it may be configured to notify the player of the target pending symbol (winning information). Further, as a look-ahead effect using the reserved symbols m1 to m8, the display mode of a plurality of reserved symbols may be configured to be variable at the same time. By varying the display mode of the treasure box role 750 in this state, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand for which reserved symbol the look-ahead effect of changing the display mode of the treasure box role 750 has been executed. In addition, for example, in a state in which the display mode of a plurality of reserved patterns is changed, among the plurality of reserved patterns whose display modes are changed, the reserved pattern (winning information) for which the special symbol lottery is executed first is made to correspond. When the display mode of the treasure box accessory 750 is changed by changing the display mode, even after the special symbol variation corresponding to the reserved pattern (winning information) is completed, the next reserved pattern (last reserved pattern) whose display mode is changed is displayed. The state in which the display mode of the treasure box accessory 750 is varied may be continued until the special symbol variation corresponding to is completed. By configuring in this way, the game can be played continuously with high expectations for the look-ahead performance in which the display mode of the treasure box accessory 750 is changed, so that the performance effect can be enhanced.

In addition, in this control example, as the look-ahead effect, it is configured to execute a plurality of look-ahead effects by using a plurality of objects to be performed for one piece of prize information. Each of the objects to be performed may execute a prefetch effect for different prize information, or for example, execute a prefetch effect using a plurality of objects to be performed for one prize information. It is determined whether or not to execute the prefetching effect, and as a result of the determination, only the object to be performed that is determined not to execute the prefetching effect is set as the target object of the prefetching effect for the other winning information. can be As a result, when the display mode of a plurality of objects to be performed is changed, the player can determine whether the read-ahead effect executed for one piece of prize information or the plurality of effects executed for a plurality of pieces of prize information. It is possible to make it difficult to understand whether it is a look-ahead performance. Therefore, it is possible to suppress early boredom with the contents of the look-ahead effect.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 212 and 213, the contents of the charge effect for displaying the specific symbol (charge symbol) as the third symbol will be described. FIG. 212(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed during the charge effect, and FIG. 212(b) shows an example of the case where the specific symbol Z4 is temporarily stopped during the charge effect. It is a schematic diagram.

This charging effect means that the medium symbol row L2 (Fig. 210 ( This is an effect in which a specific pattern (charge pattern) Z4 is inserted into (see a)) and displayed. Then, when the specific symbol Z4 is stop-displayed in the middle symbol row L2, it becomes a combination of the third symbol indicating that the special symbol wins the big win or the small win. Further, during this charging performance, when the normal symbol (second symbol) is stop-displayed in a display mode indicating winning, the performance of temporarily stopping the specific symbol Z4 is executed at the stop timing.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 212(a), the left symbol Z1 and the right symbol Z3 are stopped in a display mode indicating "7", and the middle symbol row L2 is being displayed in a variable manner, i.e., "7". , a specific pattern Z4 is displayed in the medium pattern row L2 by interrupting the normal medium pattern row L2. In this state, in the special figure 1 display area Dm1a, the variation display mode of the fourth symbol indicating that the first special symbol is variably displayed is executed, and in the normal symbol display area Dm2, the normal symbol is variably displayed. A variable display mode is displayed to indicate that the

Then, when the normal symbol is stop-displayed from the state shown in FIG. 212(a), the specific symbol Z4 is temporarily stopped-displayed in the medium symbol row L2 as shown in FIG. 212(b). . This temporary stop display is a display state in which the specific symbol Z4 is oscillated to such an extent that the specific symbol Z4 is not actually stopped and displayed, and the player can recognize that the specific symbol Z4 has stopped. In this state, in the special figure 1 display area Dm1a, the variable display mode of the fourth symbol indicating that the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner is executed, and in the normal symbol display area Dm2, the normal symbol is displayed to indicate the win. A variable display mode is displayed to indicate that the display is stopped in the mode. Then, since FIG. 212(b) shows an example in which the normal symbol is won, after the specific symbol Z4 is temporarily stopped (after the fluctuation of the normal symbol is stopped), the first electric accessory 640a opens. be done.

With this configuration, when the specific symbol Z4 stops (temporarily stops) in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, the player wins a special symbol (big win, small win). It is possible to inform incomprehensibly whether the prize was won or whether the prize was won by winning the normal pattern. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the game contents to be executed after the specific symbol Z4 is stopped (temporarily stopped).

Furthermore, since the above-described charging effect (effect of stopping (temporarily stopping) display of the specific symbol Z4) can be executed in the case of winning the special symbol and in the case of winning the normal symbol, charging is performed. The performance effect can be enhanced by increasing the execution frequency of the performance.

Next, since the above-described charging performance is configured to be executed regardless of whether the special symbol lottery result is a big win or a small win, the specific symbol Z4 is stopped and displayed based on the special symbol lottery result. In this case, the player can expect a more advantageous lottery result (big win). and the game content of the small winning game are completely different (for example, the attacker (variable winning device) that is opened is different), the player will not be able to win the lottery result of this special symbol. Since the determination is made immediately, it is difficult to keep the player's sense of anticipation.

On the other hand, in the first control example, the initial game content of the jackpot game executed after the specific symbol Z4 is stopped and displayed (for example, the opening period until the first round game is started, The game content of the round eye) and the game content of the small winning game are configured to be the same. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from easily determining what the winning game being executed is immediately after the big winning game or the small winning game is executed. Furthermore, during a period (common game period) in which the same game content is set, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 performs an effect (roulette effect) for informing the player of the winning result of this time. It consists of

Here, the content of the above-described roulette presentation will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 213(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 displayed during execution of the roulette effect, and FIG. 213(b) shows the effect result of the roulette effect. It is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen.

As shown in FIG. 213(a), when the roulette effect is executed, a character 811b imitating a boy who is the main character of the roulette effect and the lottery result of this special pattern (big win or small win) are displayed in the main display area Dm. ) and a sword 811k for notifying the lottery result of the special symbol using the roulette 811c are displayed.

The example shown in FIG. 213 (a) is a roulette effect that is executed when a small hit of a special symbol is won, so the display mode "triangle , the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed. That is, the roulette effect shown in FIG. 213(a) is executed during the small winning game.

The roulette wheel 811c has a big win area (an area marked with a circle) 811c1 indicating that the current special symbol lottery result was a big win, and a small win area (a "cross") indicating that the special symbol was a small win. ) are formed to have the same size as the area 811c2, and are rotated to the right at a speed at which the player can identify each area. After that, the roulette wheel 811c is rotated at a high speed (at a speed that makes it difficult for the player to identify each area), and an effect is executed in which the sword 811k is thrown toward the roulette wheel 811c.

When the sword 811k sticks into the roulette 811c, the rotational speed of the roulette 811c gradually decreases, and the roulette 811c is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 213(b). In this state, the player is notified that the area where the sword 811k is stuck is the lottery result of this special symbol. Since FIG. 213(b) shows the roulette effect executed after winning the small win (roulette effect executed during the small win game), the effect of the sword 811k sticking into the small win area 811c2 is executed. .

It should be noted that the above-mentioned roulette effect, the game content of the small winning game, and the game content of the big winning game are executed during the same period (common game period), during the roulette effect, the game content of the winning game It is not possible to determine the lottery result of this special pattern from. Therefore, the player who wants to know the lottery result of this special symbol as soon as possible will pay attention to the performance mode of the roulette performance being executed, so that the performance effect can be enhanced.

In the above example, the big winning area 811c1 and the small winning area 811c2 formed in the roulette 811c are formed in the same size. It is preferable to configure so that the size of each area is variable according to the result. Thus, by grasping the display mode (size of each area) of the roulette 811c at the start of the roulette presentation (before the roulette 811c rotates at high speed), the player can predict the lottery result of the current special pattern. can be done. In addition, in the above-described example, the display mode is shown in which one large winning area 811c1 and one small winning area 811c2 are formed. may be alternately formed.

In addition, in the above-described example, an example is shown in which two types of the large winning area 811c1 and the small winning area 811c2 are formed as areas showing the lottery result of the special symbol. , and may be further subdivided for each jackpot type of the winning jackpot.

In addition, the rotation display mode of the roulette 811c, the display mode of the sword 811k, and the display mode of the character 811b may be changed to suggest the lottery result of the special symbol. Depending on the lottery result, the size of the large winning area 811c1 and the small winning area 811c2 may be varied.

In the first control example, the above-described roulette effect is executed when the winning game is started, and the result of the effect is automatically displayed. The roulette performance may be started based on the start of the game, and the performance result of the roulette performance may be displayed based on the winning of the ball in the attacker who is released during the common game period, or the common game. It may be configured to display the effect result of the roulette effect based on the fact that a predetermined operation is performed on the operation means during the period. As a result, the player can be motivated to participate in the production.

In addition, in the first control example, the roulette effect is executed during the winning game, but the present invention is not limited to this. Also good. That is, for example, when the effect period of the roulette effect is set to 10 seconds and the effect period of the charge effect is set to 15 seconds, the charge effect is started 25 seconds before the fluctuation stop timing of the special symbols, and the change stop timing is 10 seconds. It may be configured such that the variable performance corresponding to the special symbol variation is set so as to execute the roulette performance seconds before.

In this way, when the roulette effect can be executed not during the winning game but during the variable display of the special symbols, the above-described roulette effect can be performed even in the charge effect executed based on the winning of the normal symbols. It is possible to execute. In this case, for example, when it is determined that the winning normal symbol will be stopped during the fluctuation period of the special symbol, the stop timing is calculated, and the roulette performance is executed 10 seconds before the calculated stop timing. In this case, the effect mode of the charge effect may be set (so that the specific symbol Z4 is temporarily stopped and displayed in the charge effect). Also, the roulette 811c displayed in the roulette effect may be set to form a normal pattern winning region indicating the winning of the normal pattern in addition to the big winning region 811c1 and the small winning region 811c2. As a result, it is possible to execute the roulette performance even when the winning of the normal symbol is won, so that the execution frequency of the roulette performance can be increased.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 214 and 215, the contents of the first operation effect (button fusion effect), which is one of the operation effects in which the player operates the operation means, will be described. FIG. 214(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effect content at the time when the first operation effect (button fusion effect) is started, and FIG. FIG. 215(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effect content, and FIG. 215(a) shows the effect content when the player operates the operating means (frame button 22) once in the first operation effect (button fusion effect). FIG. 215(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example, and FIG. 215(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the content of the effect after button fusion in the first operation effect (button fusion effect).

Here, the content of the first operation effect (button fusion effect) will be described. In this first operation effect (button fusion effect), the player operates the operation means to display the current special symbol lottery result in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 . Then, the operation means is operated a number of times (three times) corresponding to the number of third symbols (three in this control example) for indicating the lottery result of the special symbols.

An operation valid period is set for each operation of each operation means, and when the operation means is not operated within the operation valid period, the third symbol indicating the lottery result of the special symbol is not displayed. In addition, when the display mode of the time gauge displayed corresponding to the operation valid period set for the operation of each operation means satisfies a predetermined condition (when the display mode becomes the same), each operation means , and a plurality of third symbols are displayed based on one operation of the operating means. As a result, even when the remaining period of the operation effective period is short, all the third symbols can be displayed, so that the player can be motivated to operate the operation means until the end.

As shown in FIG. 214(a), a left display area 81a, a middle display area 81b, and a right display area 81c are formed so as to cover the left symbol row L1, the middle symbol row L2, and the right symbol row L3 during variable display. be. A first button 822a and a time gauge t1 for indicating the operation effective period of the first button 822a are displayed in the left display area 81a, and a second button 822b and the second button are displayed in the middle display area 81b. A time gauge t2 for indicating the effective period of operation of 822b is displayed, and a third button 822c and a time gauge t3 for indicating the effective period of operation of the third button 822c are displayed in the right display area 81c.

In this state, when the player operates the operation means (frame button 22), first the display mode of the first button 822a is changed to the display mode indicating that the operation means has been operated, and the left display area 81a is displayed at the left. 3 symbols Z1 are stopped and displayed (see FIG. 215(a)).

The operation valid periods corresponding to the respective buttons 822a to 822c are all configured to have the same length (5 seconds) and the start timings of the operation valid periods are also the same. On the display screen, the remaining time displays t1a to t3a of the time gauges t1 to t3 are displayed in different display modes indicating the remaining time. Specifically, the remaining time display t1a is displayed in a display mode indicating that the remaining time is 4 seconds, and the remaining time display t2a is displayed in a display mode indicating that the remaining time is 3.5 seconds. The time display t3a is displayed in a display mode indicating that the remaining time is 5 seconds.

Further, in this control example, the moving speeds of the time gauges t1 to t3 (the length of the arrows in FIG. 214(a)) are configured to be the same. In other words, the time gauges t1 to t3 are configured so that movement start timings (subtraction display timings) are different in a state in which the same operation effective period is set.

In this way, when executing a plurality of operation effects for which the same operation effective period is set, the order of the operation effects can be visually displayed to the player by displaying the remaining time so as to be different in appearance. can be discriminated. In addition, the user can be made to think that the operation means must be operated quickly according to the degree of reduction (subtraction) of the remaining time, so that the operation means can be operated willingly.

Here, the same operation effective period is set, and the movement speed of each time gauge t1 to t3 (the length of the arrow in FIG. 214 (a)) is configured to be the same. If the movement start timings (subtraction display timings) of the time gauges t1 to t3 are made different, there is a possibility that the timings when the remaining time reaches 0 will be different. Therefore, in this control example, as shown in FIG. 214(b), the effect of flashing the time gauge is executed, and the remaining time is not decreased while the time gauge is turned off (hidden). are doing. As a result, it is possible to easily unify the timing when the remaining time of each time gauge t1 to t3 becomes 0 without preparing a plurality of timing movement speeds. In this control example, the remaining time display of each time gauge t1 to t3 is set to be the same when the remaining time of the operation effective period set for each operation effect is 1 second.

In FIG. 214(b), the remaining time t1b of the time gauge t1 indicating the operation effective period of the first button 822a is displayed in a flashing display mode (display mode indicated by a broken line) indicating 2.5 seconds, and the second button 822b The remaining time t2b of the time gauge t2 indicating the effective period of operation is displayed in a blinking display mode (indicated by a dashed line) indicating 3.5 seconds, and the remaining time t3b of the time gauge t3 indicating the effective period of operation of the third button 822c. is displayed in a display mode indicating 4.5 seconds. That is, in the state shown in FIG. 214(b), the moving speeds of the time gauges t1 and t2 are displayed so as to be lower than the moving speed of the time gauge t3.

In the state shown in FIG. 214(b), when the player operates the frame button 22 once, the left third pattern Z1 indicates "7" in the left display area 81a, as shown in FIG. 215(a). displayed in the form. Even in this state, the time gauge t2 is displayed in the flashing display mode and the time gauge t3 is displayed in the normal display mode, as in FIG. 214(b).

After a predetermined period of time has elapsed in the state of FIG. 215(a), the moving speed of the time gauge t3 is faster than that of the time gauge t2, so the remaining time displays of the time gauges t2 and t3 are the same. . When the remaining time display modes of the two time gauges t2 and t3 become the same, as shown in FIG. A fusion operation effect is executed in which a fusion time gauge t4 obtained by fusion of t2 and time gauge t3 is displayed.

As described above, in this control example, the remaining time display of each time gauge t1 to t3 is set to be the same when the remaining time of the operation valid period set for each operation effect is 1 second. In the fusion time gauge t4, a remaining time display t4a is displayed in a display mode indicating a remaining time of 1 second. When the player operates the operation means while the fusion button 822d is displayed, the middle pattern Z2 is displayed in the middle display area 81b and the right design Z3 is displayed in the right display area 81c at once.

In the example described above with reference to FIGS. 214 and 215, the fusion button 822d is displayed while the left symbol Z1 is already displayed. is not operated and the remaining time of the valid operation period becomes 1 second, the fusion button 822d is displayed using all of the left display area 81a to the right display area 81c.

Thus, since the display area where the fusion button 822d is displayed indicates the range of the effect (the effect of displaying the third symbol) executed when the operation means is operated, the operation effect that is easy for the player to understand can provide.

In this control example, when the fusion operation effect is set, by displaying the fusion button 822d, it is configured to execute an effect that is easy for the player to understand, but it is not limited to this. For example, even after the fusion operation effect is set, the display screen shown in FIG. can be configured to As a result, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect.

In addition, in this control example, when the display mode indicating the remaining time of the operation effective period set for each operation effect is the same, the fusion operation effect is executed. For example, the fusion operation effect is executed when the operation means is operated within a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds) after the start of a plurality of operation effects. Alternatively, the remaining time of the operation effective period set for a plurality of operation presentations are all set to predetermined timing conditions (for example, the remaining time is an odd number, the value of a specific digit indicating the remaining time is 0, the remaining time is When the added value obtained by adding the values of each digit of the indicated numerical value satisfies 10), the fusion operation presentation may be executed. As a result, it is possible to provide an unexpected operation effect.

In this control example, a case where a plurality of operation effects are executed at the same time has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. may be made different, and the length of each operation valid period may be made different.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 216 to 218, the contents of the second operation effect (automatic pressing effect) in this control example will be described. FIG. 216 is a timing chart showing the flow of effects executed in the second operation effect, and FIG. FIG. 217(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the effect executed in the intermediate period (second period) of the automatic pressing effect, FIG. 218(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of the effect executed in the final period (third period) of the automatic pressing effect.

Here, with reference to FIG. 216, the contents of the automatic pressing effect in this control example will be described. In this control example, an operation effective period (button operation effective period) of 10 seconds is set as an operation effect for executing an automatic pressing effect, and an effect result display period of 2 seconds is set after the operation effective period has elapsed. Of the 10-second operation effective period, the first 8 seconds are set as a button operation immediate response period in which the effect result is immediately displayed based on the operation of the frame button 22 (operation means), and the rest is set. For 2 seconds, it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 (operation means) is operated within the predetermined period at the timing when the predetermined period has passed, and if it is operated, the effect result is displayed. set as a period.

During the button operation immediate response period, the button display Z8 (see FIG. 217) corresponding to the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81 is displayed. An automatic pressing effect is executed. This automatic pressing effect is a effect that is executed during the remaining two seconds of the operation effective period (two seconds from the time when the operation effective period is set until the time when 8 seconds have passed and the time when 10 seconds have passed). will be described later with reference to FIGS. 217 and 218, an effect is executed in which the character appearing in the main display area Dm presses the button display Z8 (see FIG. 217(a)).

In this control example, the automatic press effect is divided into three periods (first period, second period, and third period), and automatic effect 1 (automatic button press effect 1) is executed during the first period. Automatic effect 2 (button automatic pressing effect 2) is executed during the second period, and automatic effect 3 (button automatic pressing effect 3) is executed during the third period.

In the second operation effect configured in this way, for example, when the frame button 22 is operated during the button operation immediate response period (see (example 1) in FIG. 216), the effect result is displayed immediately after the button operation is executed. Until the end of the period, a display mode showing the effect result is displayed in the main display area Dm. Also, if the frame button 22 is operated during the first period (see (example 2) in FIG. 216), the effect result display period ends from the timing of the second period after the waiting period until the first period elapses. Until then, a display mode showing the effect result is displayed in the main display area Dm. Further, when the frame button 22 is operated during the third period (see (example 3) in FIG. 216), the display mode showing the same effect as when the operating means is not operated during the valid operation period is displayed in the main display area. It is configured to be displayed on Dm.

Thus, by setting the period during which the automatic pressing effect is being executed as the button operation regular corresponding period, even if the frame button 22 is operated during the automatic pressing effect, the effect being executed is suddenly interrupted. It is possible to suppress execution of an unnatural performance, and to cancel the automatic pressing performance by operating the frame button 22.例文帳に追加Therefore, the player can be motivated to participate in the operation presentation.

Further, during the waiting period that occurs when the frame button 22 is operated during the execution of the automatic pressing effect, the automatic pressing effect is continuously executed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81, but the voice and the light-emitting means are configured to set a presentation mode indicating that it is in the standby period. As a result, it is possible to reliably inform the player that the frame button 22 has been operated.

217 and 218, the content of the effect during the automatic pressing effect will be described. As shown in FIG. 217(a), when the automatic pressing effect is executed and the button automatic pressing effect 1 is executed, a bird-like character 811a appears in the main display area Dm and lands on the button display Z8. A production is executed. In this state, the remaining time display t5a of the time gauge t5, which indicates the effective period of operation of the button display Z8, is two seconds (first period).

Then, when the remaining time of the operation valid period reaches 1.5 seconds (second period), the button automatic pressing effect 2 shown in FIG. 217(b) is executed. In this button automatic pressing effect 2, an effect is executed in which the character 811a rides on the button display Z8 and looks around. In this state, the remaining time display t5b of the time gauge t5 indicating the operation effective period of the button display Z8 is 1.5 seconds (second period). Next, when the remaining time of the valid operation period reaches 1 second (third period), automatic button pressing effect 3 shown in FIG. 218 is executed. In this button automatic pressing effect 3, an effect is executed in which the character 811a on the button display Z8 presses the button.

As described above, in this control example, the character 811a appears as the automatic pressing effect, the effect of pressing the button is executed, and the operation result display period starts at the timing when the automatic pressing effect is completed (when the operation valid period has passed). Since the effect result of the set operation effect is displayed, the player can be given a relationship between the operation effect and the effect result.

Further, when the frame button 22 is operated during the automatic pressing effect, the effect result display is executed at the timing when the currently set period (first period to third period) has passed. However, in this case, the start mode of the effect result display (the effect mode executed for 0.5 seconds after the start) is varied according to the period during which the frame button 22 is operated. Specifically, when the frame button 22 is operated during the first period, the character 811a flying in the air is set to fall and the button display Z8 is pressed. When 22 is pressed, an effect mode is set in which another character resembling a bird rides on the button display Z8 and the button display Z8 is pressed with weight.

By configuring in this way, the effect result can be displayed without changing the effect mode of the automatic pressing effect based on the operation of the frame button 22 and without giving a sense of discomfort. In this control example, the effect mode of the automatic pressing effect executed in each period is configured not to vary depending on whether or not the frame button 22 is operated. Only easy elements (for example, changing colors and adding comments) may be configured to be variable, and in this case, it is preferable to change the content of the performance only when the performance result is advantageous to the player. . As a result, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of operating the frame button 22 during the automatic pressing effect, thereby enhancing the player's desire to play the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 219, the contents of the effect displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the jackpot effect using the pseudo attacker 165 will be described. FIG. 219(a) is a schematic diagram showing a display screen when a ball wins in the variable prize winning device 65 during the jackpot effect using the pseudo attacker 165, and FIG. 219(b) is a pseudo It is a schematic diagram showing a display screen at the time when the ball is awarded to the attacker 165. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 219(a), the variable winning device 65 provided in the special winning device 550 wins the jackpot (jackpot D) in which the opening operation is performed, and when the jackpot game is executed, the third symbol display device At 81, a screen during jackpot game is displayed. In this jackpot game screen, a jackpot display 830 indicating that the jackpot game is in progress is displayed in the main display area Dm, and winning information 831 for indicating the number of prize balls won during the jackpot game is displayed. In the sub display area Ds, the small area Ds1 and the small area Ds2 are integrated, and the comment "Right shot" indicating the game method during the jackpot game is displayed.

FIG. 219(a) shows that a ball launched by a right-handed game wins a prize in a specific prize-winning opening 65a (a prize-winning opening where the ball can win a prize by opening the variable prize-winning device 65) in the special prize-winning device 550. Although the content of the display at the time is shown, the winning information 831 is displayed in a state in which the number of prize balls awarded based on the winning of the ball in the specific prize winning opening 65a is not added.

Then, as shown in FIG. 219(b), the ball entered the specific winning hole 65a in the timing shown in FIG. It is configured so that the number of prize balls given based on this is added. Specifically, when the specific prize winning sensors 65s1 and 65s2 (see FIG. 208) detect that the ball has entered the specific prize winning port 65a, the timing 0.5 seconds after that point, that is, the specific prize winning port 65a At the timing when the period (0.5 seconds) required for the winning ball to reach the pseudo attacker 165 has elapsed, a display mode indicating that the winning ball has been awarded is displayed.

By configuring in this way, the player can be made to think that a prize ball is awarded based on the fact that the pseudo attacker 165 has won the ball. In addition, since the prize winning sound for notifying by voice that the ball has won a prize in the variable prize winning device 65 is also delayed in accordance with the update timing of the acquisition information 831 described above, FIG. A winning sound is output from the audio output device 226 at the indicated timing.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example>
Next, as described above with reference to FIG. 4, the main controller 110 is equipped with the MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controller by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the operation of the sub-controller such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

The main controller 110 executes major processes of the pachinko machine 10 such as special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting in the first symbol display device 37 and display setting in the second symbol display device 83 . The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes.

Here, with reference to FIG. 220, counters and the like provided in RAM 203 of main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 220 is a schematic diagram schematically showing counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 in the first control example. These counters, etc. are the special symbol lottery, the normal symbol lottery, the setting of the display in the first design display device 37, the setting of the display in the second design display device 83, and the setting of the display in the third design display device 81. etc., it is used in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 .

In order to select the special symbol lottery and the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the special winning random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol jackpot type are selected. A special hit type counter C2 to be used, a stop type selection counter C3 for determining the stop type of the special symbol (reach hit type, out (outside length A, outfall short A), reach out type), variation pattern selection and an initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the special winning random number counter C1. Also, a normal winning random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of normal symbols, and a normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the normal winning random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 238), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see FIG. 253). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 . The RAM 203 stores a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a consisting of four reserved areas (reserved first to fourth areas) for storing the reserved ball of the first special symbol and the reserved ball of the second special symbol. A special pattern 2 holding ball storage area 203b consisting of four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas) for holding is provided respectively, and a special pattern holding common to the first special pattern and the second special pattern is provided. A ball execution area is provided. In each area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special winning random number counter C1, a special winning type counter C2, a stop type selection counter C3, and a variation type counter are provided in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the first ball entrance 64. Each value of CS1 is stored. Similarly, for each area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, similar values are stored in accordance with the ball entry timing to the second ball entrance 640. FIG.

In addition, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c consisting of one execution area and four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas). The value of the normal winning random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through any of the second entrances (through gates) 67. FIG.

Next, each counter will be described in detail. The special hit random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (eg, 0 to 499), and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (eg, 499 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 499). It is configured to return. In particular, when the special winning random number counter C1 makes one cycle, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the special winning random number counter C1.

The initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated within the same range as the special winning random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the special winning random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0-499, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that ranges from 0-499. This initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 238) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 253).

The value of the special winning random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM203. The value of the random number for the special symbol jackpot is set by the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 222(a)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the special symbol jackpot random number counter C1. is equal to the value of the random number set by the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a, it is determined as a special symbol jackpot. In addition, this special symbol jackpot random number table 202a is for when the probability of special symbols is low (a period in which the probability of special symbols is low), and when the probability of winning a special symbol is high (special The number of random numbers that will be the big hits included in each type is set differently.

In this way, by varying the number of random numbers that result in a big win, the probability of a big win is changed between when the probability of special symbols is low and when the probability of special symbols is high. The special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 222(a)) for special symbol high probability and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 222(a)) for special symbol low probability , are provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 .

The special winning type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol jackpot is won, and is incremented one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). , and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). The value of the special winning type counter C2 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and the timing at which the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

Here, the value of the special winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is not a random number that becomes a special symbol jackpot, that is, the special symbol is out. If it is a random number, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 will be the one when the special symbol is out.

On the other hand, if the value of the special winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number for a special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed in , is the one at the time of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the special winning type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. . In this embodiment, five types of jackpot types are set: "jackpot A", "jackpot B", "jackpot C", "jackpot D", and "jackpot E". one is determined. Then, a display mode indicating the jackpot type is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 as a jackpot symbol.

The special winning random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0-499. In this special winning random number counter C1, there are five random numbers that become a special symbol jackpot when the probability of special symbols is low. 202a. In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random number values that become a big hit is 5 among the total number of random number values of 500, so the probability of a big win of the special symbol is "1/100".

On the other hand, when the probability of the special symbol is high, there are 6 random numbers for the special symbol jackpot, and the values "4 to 9" are stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for the high probability. . In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is high, the total number of random numbers that will be a big hit is 6 among the total number of random numbers of 500, so the probability of a big win of the special symbol is "6/500".

In addition, in this control example, the random number to be the jackpot stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for the low probability and the random number to be the jackpot stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for the high probability. In order to avoid duplicate values, random numbers are set for each jackpot. Here, if there is a value that is always used as the jackpot random value regardless of the state of the pachinko machine 10, there is a risk that the random value will be input from the outside and the jackpot will be illegally assigned. On the other hand, as in this control example, depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol high probability state or a special symbol low probability state), the random number value that becomes a big hit is changed. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the random number value that will be the jackpot of the special symbol, so that fraud can be suppressed.

Further, the value of the special winning type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a loop counter within the range of 0-99. Then, using the jackpot type selection table 202d for determining the jackpot type, the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired when selecting the jackpot type is referred to. Here, the contents of the jackpot type selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. 223(a). As shown in FIG. 223(a), the jackpot type selection table 202d for determining the jackpot type includes a special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202d1 and a second special A special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202d2 to be referenced corresponding to the lottery of symbols is set respectively.

The special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202d1 compares the value of the special hit type counter C2 set (acquired and stored) in the special symbol holding ball execution area when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit ( Judgment) is defined in correspondence with the jackpot type.

FIG. 223(b) is a data table schematically showing the contents of this special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202d1. In the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202d1, the jackpot type when the random value in the acquired special hit type counter C2 is "0 to 49" is "jackpot A". In addition, when the value was "50 to 68", the jackpot type was "jackpot B", and when the value was "69 to 98", the jackpot type was "jackpot C" and "99". As for the jackpot type in each case, "jackpot D" is set.

Thus, in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, when a jackpot is won with the first special symbol (special figure 1), four types of winning types are determined by the value of the random number indicated by the special winning type counter C2. configured to be

In addition, the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202d2, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a jackpot, is set (acquired and stored) in the special symbol holding ball execution area and the value of the special winning type counter C2. A judgment value for collation (judgment) is defined corresponding to the jackpot type.

FIG. 223(c) is a data table schematically showing the contents of this special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202d2. In the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202d2, the jackpot type when the random number in the obtained special hit type counter is "0 to 49" is "jackpot D". In addition, "jackpot E" is set as the jackpot type when the value is "50 to 99".

Thus, the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured such that five types of winning types are determined by the value of the random number indicated by the special winning type counter C2. In addition, since the selection ratio of the jackpot type to be selected when the determination result is a jackpot between the first special pattern and the second special pattern, the player can choose between the first special pattern and the second special pattern. can be of interest in which of the lotteries is being run. In addition, since the selection ratio of the probability variation jackpot to which the probability variation is given to both the first special symbol and the second special symbol is the same (100%), the probability variation ratio is different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the gaming machine It is possible to suppress the problem that the probability variation rate is not constant as a whole. In addition, since the selection ratio of the jackpot D in the second special pattern is set high, the probability that the 16R probability variable jackpot is selected is set higher than in the first special pattern, which is advantageous to the player. there is In addition, in this control example, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of each special symbol, the above-described jackpot type can be selected, but the jackpot type to be selected is not limited to the above. A plurality of jackpot types with different numbers of round games (number of rounds) to be executed during the jackpot game may be selectable, and after the jackpot is finished, the variable state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) state) other than the game state (for example, normal state (low probability state of special design, low probability state of normal design), time saving state (low probability state of special design, high probability state of normal design), latent state (special It may be possible to select the jackpot type in which either the high probability state of the symbol or the low probability state of the normal symbol is set. In addition, in the case of winning the jackpot with the first special pattern and the case of winning the jackpot with the second special pattern, the ratio of setting the high probability state of the special pattern and the high probability state of the normal pattern are set. You may let the ratio which is done differ.

The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). Rough display modes such as so-called short time out, long time out, normal reach, and super reach are determined by the stop type selection counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 described above. Determination of the display mode is, specifically, determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the stop type selection counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1, the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 A pattern variation mode is determined. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 253) described later is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process. It should be noted that the variation pattern selection table 202b (see FIG. 224) that stores the random value for determining the variation time of the pattern variation from the values (random values) of the stop type selection counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 is It is provided in the ROM 202 .

As shown in FIG. 224, in the variation pattern selection table 202b, normal/latent variation pattern selection used in the game state (normal state, latent certainty state) when the success/failure determination probability of the normal symbol is low probability A table 202b1 and a variation pattern table 202b2 for probability variation used in a game state (probability variation state) when the success/failure determination probability of normal symbols is high are set respectively.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in this control example has a normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), a variable state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols), Three game states such as latent probability state (high-probability state of special symbols, low-probability state of normal symbols) are configured to be settable, and at the end of the jackpot game, the winning jackpot type or jackpot is won. The game state is set according to the game state set at the time of the game.

The selection of the variation pattern in the voice ramp control device 113 will be described later in more detail. Based on the value of the counter CS1, rough fluctuation pattern contents (reach, super reach, non-reach, etc.) and fluctuation time are determined, and a fluctuation pattern command indicating the determined contents is set.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 225 and 226, the variation pattern selection table 202b used when main controller 110 selects a variation pattern will be described. FIG. 225 is a data table schematically showing the contents of the normal/potential variation pattern selection table 202b1. In the normal/latency variation pattern selection table 202b1, various variation patterns are defined in correspondence with the special symbol lottery results, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the A value with the variation type counter CS1 is allocated. Also, if the result of the determination is a hit, the variation pattern corresponding to the determined jackpot type (jackpot type determined from the jackpot type selection table 202d by the value of the acquired special hit type counter C2) is set. Specifically, the type of special symbol (symbol type) is the first special symbol (special figure 1), the success/failure determination result is a big hit A, B, or D, and the value of the acquired stop type selection counter C3 is " 0 to 50” and the value of the acquired variation type selection counter CS1 is “0 to 198”, a normal reach jackpot A with a variation time of 30 seconds is defined as a variation pattern, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is “ 51 to 250” and the value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is in the range of “0 to 100”, a super reach jackpot A with a variation time of 60 seconds is defined as a variation pattern, and the variation type selection counter CS1 In the range of the value "101 to 159", as a variation pattern, a super reach jackpot B with a variation time of 60 seconds is defined, and the value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is in the range of "160 to 198", the variation pattern As, a super reach jackpot C with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds is defined. In addition, when the type of special symbol (symbol type) is the first special symbol (special symbol 1) and the result of the success/failure determination is a big hit C or a small hit, the value of the acquired stop type selection counter C3 is "0 to 250" and the value of the acquired variation type selection counter CS1 is "0 to 198", that is, the value of the acquired stop type selection counter C3 and the value of the variation type selection counter CS1 are not involved, and the variation pattern A special reach hit with a variable time of 30 seconds is defined. When the variation pattern per special reach is selected, a variation pattern command for indicating the type of the selected variation pattern is output to the audio ramp control device 113, and the "charge effect" described above in FIG. is executed. Similarly, if the symbol type is special figure 1 and the result of the judgment is out, the deviation fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of 8 seconds to 60 seconds is set is defined according to the value of the stop type selection counter C3. there is Also, when the symbol type is special figure 2, the result of the winning or not judgment is hit (jackpot D, jackpot E), and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is "0 to 124", the value of the variation type selection counter CS1 Regardless, long fluctuation A is defined as a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds, and if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is "125 to 198", regardless of the value of the fluctuation type selection counter CS1 , long fluctuation B is defined as a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds, and if the result of the judgment is wrong, 60 seconds regardless of the value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the value of the fluctuation type selection counter CS1 long variation is specified.

Next, referring to FIG. 226, it is a data table schematically showing the contents of the time reduction variation pattern table 202b2. In the time saving variation pattern table 202b2, various variation patterns are set in correspondence with the lottery result of the special symbol, and for each of the variation patterns, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 and values are assigned. Also, if the result of the determination is a hit, the variation pattern corresponding to the determined jackpot type (jackpot type determined from the jackpot type selection table 202d by the value of the acquired special hit type counter C2) is set. Here, in this control example, the probability variation variation pattern selection table 202b2 shown in FIG. 226 is the normal state shown in FIG. Therefore, each variation pattern is defined so that a relatively short variation time can be easily set. By configuring in this way, during the variable probability state, it is possible to execute the lottery of special symbols more efficiently than in other game states.

The normal hit random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). When the normal winning random number counter C4 completes one round, the value of the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the normal winning random number counter C4. In this example of control, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically at each timer interrupt processing, and it is detected that the ball has passed through either the left or right second ball entrance (through gate) 67. It is acquired at the same time and stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c of the RAM203.

Then, the value of the random number that is the normal winning pattern is set by the normal winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 222(c)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 is If the value of the random number set by the normal winning random number table 202c matches, it is determined as a normal symbol winning. In addition, this normal winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 221(c)) is for when the probability of normal symbols is low (a period in which normal symbols are in a normal state), and when the probability of winning normal symbols is higher than when the probability is low. It is divided into two types, one for high probability (a period in which normal symbols are in a time-saving state), and the number of random numbers that will be a big hit included in each is set differently. Further, as for the types of normal symbol wins, normal wins and long-time wins are set, and the values of the normal win random number counter C4 are set respectively.

Here, in this control example, it is configured so that a long win can be won only during a normal symbol low probability state, and when a long win is won, the electric accessary 640a is opened with an opening time of 4 seconds. A long win is executed. Thereby, it becomes possible to temporarily execute the special figure 2 lottery in the normal state. The normal winning (short winning) of normal symbols other than the long winning described above is a winning in which the operation of operating the electric accessory 640a to the open state with the opening time of 0.2 seconds is executed once.

In addition, in this control example, the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a executed during the short hit and the opening operation of the normal pattern hit during the high probability state of the normal symbol are set to be the same. may be opened. Specifically, in the case of the high-probability state of the normal symbol, the open period of the electric accessary 640a is longer than that of the short-circuit. good. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the ball more likely to enter the second ball entrance 640 during the high-probability state of the normal symbol. In addition, in this control example, as described above with reference to FIG. 208, since the electric accessory 640a is arranged in the right side area, during the normal state (during the left-handed game), the long hit of the normal symbol is won. In this case, since it is difficult for the player to win the ball into the second winning hole 640 in the open state, for example, the ball fired by the left-handed game can win the second winning hole 640. , the second prize winning port 640 and the accompanying electric accessory 640a may be provided.

In this control example, as shown in FIG. 222(c), when the probability of the normal symbol is low, if the value of the acquired normal winning random number counter C4 is "5", it is determined that the normal winning of the normal symbol. If it is "6", it is determined to be a long win. On the other hand, when the probability of the normal design is high, if the value of the acquired normal winning random number counter C4 is any one of 5 to 204, it is determined that the normal winning of the normal design.

In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be winning different, the probability of winning is changed between when the probability of normal symbols is low and when the probability of normal symbols is high. Therefore, when the probability is low, the frequency with which the electric accessory 640a is operated can be reduced, and the frequency with which the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to increase the consumption of game balls by the players and increase the profit of the game parlor. On the other hand, during the short time period and the variable probability period where the probability is high, the opportunity for the electric accessory 640a to operate can be given with a probability of “1/1.2”, and the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 It is possible to increase the chance of entering the ball. Therefore, it is possible to suppress consumption of game balls by the player and set a game state advantageous to the player. Therefore, the player can play a game aiming at a game with a high probability, and can spend more time playing the game.

The normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the normal random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once per timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 238). , is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 253).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main controller 110 controls the big winning lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the values of the counters and the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result in the second pattern display device 83 can be executed.

Returning to FIG. 218, the description continues. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 219, the RAM 203 includes a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, I/O, and the like. and a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 255) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (see FIG. 251) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 253) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

As shown in FIG. 221(a), the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 contains the above-described special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 222), variation pattern selection table 202b (see FIG. 224), normal random number In addition to the table 202c (see FIG. 222(c)) and the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 223), a small hit random number table 202e, a jackpot scenario table 202f, and a small hit scenario table 202g are set. Although omitted in this control example, the ROM 202 stores various data necessary for the game, programs, etc., in addition to the above.

The small winning random number table 202e is a table that is referred to when determining whether or not the player wins a small winning that can give the player a smaller benefit than winning a big winning in a special symbol lottery. Here, with reference to FIG.222(b), the content of the small hit random number table 202e is demonstrated. As shown in FIG. 222(b), in this control example, only the lottery of the special figure 1 is configured to win a small hit. Specifically, the type of special symbol (symbol type) is special figure 1, and the value of the acquired special random number counter C1 (0 to 499) is defined as a small hit in the range of "200 to 209" there is

The big winning scenario table 202f and the small winning scenario table 202g are data tables in which game operation contents during the big winning game and game operation contents during the small winning game are respectively stored in association with the determined winning types. , the game action during each win is executed based on the information (scenario) stored in this data table. Although detailed explanation is omitted, this scenario table includes an opening period as a period from when the winning game is started until the corresponding prize winning device (variable prize winning device 65, third electric accessory 82a) is released. , Round game contents (type of winning device, game period, number of round games) of winning device (variable winning device 65, third electric accessory 82a) corresponding to each winning game, and one round game is completed The interval period, which is the period from the start of the next round game, and the ending period, which is the period from the end of the last round game to the end of each winning game, are defined according to the hit type. It is In this control example, a configuration is used in which various scenario information corresponding to the winning type is stored in the big winning scenario table 202f and the small winning scenario table 202g. Even if it is a win type, different scenarios may be set according to the game state set when a win is won. In this case, for example, scenario information is set in which the length of the period (for example, the opening period) during which the winning device (variable winning device 65, third electric accessory 82a) corresponding to each winning game is closed is different. For example, if the game state is set to a probability variable state in which the special symbol lottery (fluctuation) efficiency is better than other game states, the period during which the winning device is closed (for example, It is preferable to configure the scenario information so that the opening period) is shorter than when another game state is set. As a result, in addition to the lottery (fluctuation) of the special symbols, the winning game can also be executed efficiently during the variable probability state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 221(b), the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 has a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, and a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c. , a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, a small hit medium flag 203g, a time reduction medium counter 203j, a variable probability counter 203m, and other memories. It has an area 203z.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a has one execution area for the first special symbol and four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area). Each value of the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (start winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding number Area 1 to reserved area 4) are stored in ascending order of area numbers (first to fourth). That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored, and the first reserved area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main control device 110, when a special symbol lottery is performed, each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is transferred to the execution area. Based on the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 which are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area, determination such as lottery for special symbols is performed.

When data is shifted from the first reservation area to the execution area, the first reservation area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process that packs the winning data stored in the other reservation areas (second reservation area to fourth reservation area) to the reservation area with the area number 1 smaller (first reservation area to third reservation area). done. In this control example, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored. Also, the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b differs from the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a only in that it is a storage area corresponding to the second special symbol.

Like the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area). Each of these areas stores a normal random number counter C4.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball passes through either the left or right through gate 67, the value of the counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the four reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area ) are stored in ascending order of area number (first to fourth). That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main controller 110, when the normal symbol winning lottery is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( (moved), and based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

In addition, when the data is shifted from the first reserved area to the execution area, the first reserved area becomes vacant. is shifted to a reserved area with an area number smaller by one. Also, the data shift is performed only for the reserved areas in which the winning data are stored.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is a variable display (third symbol It is a counter that counts the number of held balls (number of times of waiting) of variable display performed on the display device 81 up to four times. The initial value of this special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, the maximum value is 4. 1 is added. On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a special symbol variable display is newly executed.

The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times N of holding the variable display in the special symbol) is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command. The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is changed.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is a counter that counts the reserved balls based on the winning of the second ball entrance 640, and other configurations are the same as the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d. A detailed description thereof is omitted.

The voice lamp control device 113, every time the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e are changed, the main controller 113 according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110. It is possible to acquire the value of the number of pending balls in the variable display that is held in 110 . As a result, the number of holding balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 is held by the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise and the like. Even if there is a deviation from the actual number of held balls in the displayed variable display, the deviation can be corrected by the next received number of held balls command.

In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command, and every time the number of held balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of held balls. Send a pitch command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number pattern in the small area Ds1 of the third pattern display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The normal design reserved ball number counter 203f counts the number of reserved balls (number of standby times) of the variable display of the normal design (second design) performed by the second design display device 83 based on the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 up to 4 times. A counter that counts up to The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the through gate 67 and the number of reserved balls of variable display increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4. On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed.

When the ball passes through either the left or right through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (the number M of holding variable display in normal symbols) is less than 4, the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c. On the other hand, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 4 when the ball passes through either the left or right through gate 67, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c.

The small hit medium flag 203g is a flag that is set to ON while the small hit game is being executed. The variable probability counter 203m is a counter for measuring the period during which the high probability state of the special symbol continues, and is set to a predetermined value when the high probability state of the special symbol is set. Then, the value of the counter is updated at the timing when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is stopped and displayed, and when the updated value reaches a predetermined value, the process of ending the special symbol high probability state is executed. be done.

The time-saving medium counter 203j is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal pattern high-probability state, and if the value of the time-saving medium counter 203j is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal pattern high-probability state. If the value of the counter 203j during time saving is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state of normal symbols. The initial value of the counter 203j during time saving is set to zero, and a special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, and each time a special symbol jackpot is determined, a value corresponding to the jackpot type is set. be done. That is, when a special symbol jackpot is won, a new value corresponding to the jackpot type is set regardless of the value of the time saving medium counter 203j.

In the other memory area 203z, necessary flags, counters, storage data, etc. in other control processes executed by the MPU of the main control unit 110 are set, but details thereof are omitted.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol reservation lamp 84, and the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving opening and closing to the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected. to send.

The input/output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, which will be described later. , and the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253, various processes are executed.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 253) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues a ball shooting instruction. The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 290 detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and the operating handle 51b is turned off (not operated) to stop the shooting of the ball. A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51, and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and changes production (variation It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and continuous advance notice effect. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main controller 110, the display controller 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like.

The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the background mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or changes the background mode displayed at the time of super reach. The voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled, and the display control device 114 is instructed so as to change the content of the presentation.

The audio lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the audio lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the error type. Send to device 114 . The display control device 114 controls the third pattern display device 81 to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

As shown in FIG. 227(a), the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 stores a variation pattern selection table 222a, a pending rank selection table 222b, a pending mode selection table 222c, and a treasure box mode selection table 222d.

The variation pattern selection table 222a is a selection table for determining variation patterns based on variation pattern commands output from the main controller 110. FIG. A plurality of variation patterns are set corresponding to the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern command and the variation pattern type, and one variation pattern is determined by acquiring a counter value for selection (not shown).

The reserved rank selection table 222b is a data table for selecting a rank (reserved rank) regarding whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect based on the winning information included in the winning command received from the main controller 110. FIG. In this control example, it is configured to set a pending rank for all winning information corresponding to a received winning command, and depending on the set pending rank, whether or not to execute a look-ahead effect, or a look-ahead It is configured to set an effect mode in the case of executing the effect.

Here, with reference to FIG. 228(a), the contents defined in the reserved rank selection table 222b will be described. FIG. 228(a) schematically shows the contents of the reserved rank selection table 222b. As shown in FIG. 228(a), the pending rank selection table 222b is associated with the type of the winning judgment result included in the received winning command and the value of the pending rank counter 223p1 of the effect counter group 223p. A number of reserved ranks (Rank 1 to Rank 4) are defined.

Specifically, when the success/failure determination result is the most advantageous "jackpot D" for the player, the value of the reserved rank counter 223p1 is in the range of "0 to 69", and "rank 2" is in the range of "70 to "89" range is defined as "rank 3", "90 ~ 99" range is defined as "rank 1", and if the result of the judgment is "jackpot A, B, E", for the pending rank The value of the counter 223p1 is defined as "rank 3" in the range of "0 to 69", "rank 2" in the range of "70 to 89", and "rank 3" in the range of "90 to 99". .

Then, if the success/failure determination result is "big win C, small win", the value of the reserved rank counter 223p1 is "rank 3" in the range of "0 to 69", and "rank 3" in the range of "70 to 89". "Rank 4" is defined as "Rank 2" in the range of "90 to 99", and if the result of the success/failure determination is the most disadvantageous "miss" for the player, the value of the reserved rank counter 223p1 "Rank 4" is defined in the range of "0-69", "Rank 4" is defined in the range of "70-89", and "Rank 3" is defined in the range of "90-99".

In other words, in this control example, four types of "rank 1" to "rank 4" can be selected as the types of reserved ranks selected for each piece of winning information, and the result of winning/failing determination is advantageous to the player. Advantageous ranks (ranks with small values) are set to be easily selected.

In this way, when a plurality of prefetch effects are executed, instead of setting the effect mode of each prefetch effect based on the result of judgment of winning information, the pending rank is set based on the result of judgment of winning information. By setting the effect mode of each prefetch effect based on the reserved rank, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the effect mode of the prefetch effect to be executed. .

In other words, when executing the look-ahead effect when the result of the hit/fail determination is wrong, in order to make the player feel a sense of anticipation, it is possible to set the effect mode with a high degree of expectation of winning, but at the same time, the player is given excessive In order to suppress the fact that expectations are raised and the desire to play is reduced, it is common to configure a performance mode with a low degree of expectation for winning to be settable. When the look-ahead performance is executed, a performance mode with a low expectation of winning is set at a rate of about 90%, and a performance mode with a high expectation of winning is set at a rate of about 10%. To execute a look-ahead performance without making a player feel uncomfortable.

In the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above, when the performance mode of each look-ahead performance is set based on the result of winning/failure determination, a performance mode with a low expectation of winning is set as the performance mode of one of the look-ahead performances, On the other hand, there is a problem that an effect mode with a high expectation of winning is set as the effect mode of the look-ahead effect, and the effect of the look-ahead effect cannot be enhanced. Specifically, a plurality of types of prefetch effects (for example, first prefetch effects (effects that change the display mode of reserved symbols) that are executed first based on one prize information, and execution after the first prefetch effects In the case of setting the second look-ahead effect (effect of changing the display mode of the comment display), a performance mode with a high expectation of winning is set as the first look-ahead effect, and a low expectation of win is set as the second look-ahead effect. When the effect mode is set, the player visually recognizes the effect contents of the first prefetch effect, so that the winning information to be the target of the prefetch effect includes information that will lead to a big win (whether it is possible to win a big win). Then, there is a problem that the user has a sense of anticipation and becomes discouraged by visually recognizing the effect content of the second look-ahead effect to be executed next.

On the other hand, by configuring to set a pending rank in advance based on the result of right or wrong determination, and setting the effect mode of each prefetch effect according to the set pending rank, for example, the result of right or wrong determination is out In this case, a low-expectation look-ahead performance in which the performance mode of each look-ahead performance is selected from performance modes with a low degree of winning expectation and a high-expectation look-ahead performance in which a performance mode with a high degree of winning expectation is selected are divided and executed. Therefore, an appropriate effect mode can be set for each look-ahead effect without causing the above-described problem.

Further, for example, by configuring so that more pending ranks can be set than the types of success/failure determination results, it is possible to execute more diverse look-ahead effects without discomfort.

The reserved mode selection table 222c is a data table for selecting the display mode of the reserved pattern displayed in the small area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. FIG. In this control example, it is configured to be able to change the display mode of the pending symbols at the timing of receiving the winning command from the main controller 110 or the timing at which a new special symbol variation (lottery) is started. .

Here, with reference to FIG. 228(b), the contents defined in the holding mode selection table 222c will be described. FIG. 228(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the reservation mode selection table 222c. As shown in FIG. 228(b), the pending mode selection table 222c is associated with the pending rank selected using the pending rank selection table 222b and the value of the pending mode counter 223p2 of the effect counter group 223p. , a plurality of holding modes are defined.

In this control example, it is configured to change the color of the reserved pattern as a reserved mode, and the color of the reserved pattern, which is normally displayed in "white", is changed to "rainbow" and "red" in descending order of expectation. , “green”, “yellow”, and “blue”.

Specifically, when the highest degree of expectation for winning is "holding rank 1" (which is set only when the jackpot D is won), the value of the holding mode counter 223p2 is "0 to 69". "Red" in the range of , "- (no change)" in the range of "70 to 89", "Green" in the range of "90 to 93", "Yellow" in the range of "94 to 96", "Rainbow" is defined in the range of "97 to 99", and in the case of "suspension rank 2", the value of the suspension mode counter 223p2 is in the range of "0 to 69", "green" "Yellow" in the range of "70-79", "- (No change)" in the range of "80-89", "Red" in the range of "90-96", and "97-99" "Blue" is specified.

In the case of the "holding rank 3", the value of the holding mode counter 223p2 is "- (no change)" in the range of "0 to 69", and "yellow" in the range of "70 to 79". , "green" in the range of "80 to 89", "blue" in the range of "90 to 96", and "red" in the range of "97 to 99". In some cases, the value of the pending mode counter 223p2 is "- (no change)" in the range of "0 to 89", "blue" in the range of "90 to 93", and "94 to 96". , "yellow" is defined in the range of "97 to 98", "green" is defined in the range of "97 to 98", and "red" is defined in the range of "99".

In addition, in this control example, it is configured so as to select a mode in which the color of the reserved pattern is changed as the reserved mode. , It may be configured to display a display mode showing the effect result of the look-ahead effect in the vicinity of the reserved pattern (range in which the player can identify the target reserved pattern). In addition, in this control example, the color of the pending symbol is changed as the look-ahead effect, but other display modes may be changed.

The treasure box mode selection table 222d is a data table referred to when selecting the display mode (color) of the treasure box accessory 750, and sets the display mode based on the jackpot type included in the corresponding winning information. be.

Here, the contents defined in the treasure box mode selection table 222d will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 229 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the treasure box mode selection table 222d. As shown in FIG. 229, the treasure box mode selection table 222d includes the jackpot type information (whether or not determination result) included in the winning information and whether or not the display mode of the reserved symbol indicating the corresponding winning information has changed (the pending mode is already variable). A plurality of treasure box modes are defined in correspondence with the value of the treasure box mode counter 223p3 included in the effect counter group 223p.

Specifically, when the result of the winning/failure determination is “jackpot D” and the display mode of the corresponding reserved symbol is not variable, the value of the treasure box mode counter 223p3 is changed to “red” in the range of “0 to 69”. ”, “Rainbow” is defined in the range of “70 to 89”, and “- (no change)” is defined in the range of “90 to 99”, and the display mode of the corresponding reserved pattern is variable. The value of the treasure box mode counter 223p3 is specified to be "red" in the range of "0-89" and "rainbow" in the range of "90-99".

In other words, in this control example, when the display mode of the reserved symbol corresponding to the winning information indicating that the "jackpot D" has been won has already been changed, the treasure box accessory 750 is displayed. The display mode is always variable, and on the other hand, the display mode of the treasure box accessory 750 may not be changed when the display mode of the reserved symbols is not changed. As a result, it is possible to set an effect pattern in which the lottery result of the special symbol is displayed without changing the display mode of the reserved symbols and the display mode of the treasure box accessory 750 .

In addition, when the reservation mode is not changed, the ratio of selecting the "rainbow" display mode with the highest degree of expectation for winning is higher than when the reservation mode is changed. As a result, the display mode (reservation mode) of the reserved symbol is not changed by the look-ahead effect, and the treasure box accessory 750 is easily changed to the display mode "rainbow", which is the highest expectation for winning. While providing the enjoyment of predicting which reserved symbol the display mode of the treasure box accessory 750 has changed, it is possible to execute an unexpected production.

Next, when the result of the win/fail judgment is "jackpot B" and the display mode of the corresponding reserved symbol is not variable, the value of the treasure box mode counter 223p3 is in the range of "0 to 69" and "blue" is displayed. If "- (no change)" is specified in the range of "70 to 89" and "red" is specified in the range of "90 to 99", and the display mode of the corresponding reserved pattern is variable, it is used for the treasure box mode. "Blue" is defined when the value of the counter 223p3 is in the range of "0 to 69", and "red" is defined in the range of "70 to 99".

Then, when the win/fail determination result is "big win A, C, E or small win" and the display mode of the corresponding reserved symbol is not variable, the value of the treasure box mode counter 223p3 is "0 to 69". "- (no change)" is defined in the range of "70 to 89", "blue" is defined in the range of "90 to 99", and "- (no change)" is defined in the range of "90 to 99", and the corresponding reserved symbol display When the aspect is variable, the value of the treasure box aspect counter 223p3 is defined to be “blue” in the range of “0-89” and “red” in the range of “90-99”.

Finally, if the result of the win/fail judgment is “miss” and the display mode of the corresponding reserved symbol is not variable, the value of the treasure chest mode counter 223p3 will be within the range of “0 to 89” and will be “- (no change). )” is defined as “blue” in the range of “90 to 99”, and the display mode of the corresponding reserved symbol is variable, the value of the treasure box mode counter 223p3 is in the range of “0 to 69”. "Blue" is specified with "- (no change)" in the range of "70 to 99". As described above, in this control example, the condition for selecting the display (effect) mode of the treasure box accessory 750 is configured to be different from the condition for selecting the display (effect) mode of the reserved symbols. As a result, the player can predict the result of the win/loss determination this time by compositely discerning a plurality of effect modes to be executed. In addition, in this control example, the display (effect) mode of the pending symbol is set based on the set pending rank level, and the display (effect) mode of the treasure chest accessory 750 is set based on the win/loss determination result (jackpot type). It is configured to By configuring in this way, the player can predict in advance the result of the winning/failure determination by grasping the display mode of the reserved symbols, and by grasping the display mode of the treasure box accessory 750, it is set when a big win is won. It is possible to predict the type of jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the performance effect for the performance for showing the lottery result of the special symbol. In this control example, in the treasure box mode selection table 222d (see FIG. 229), the display mode of the treasure box accessory 750 when the result of the lottery for the special symbols is "no" is either "no change" or "blue." is selected, but it is not limited to this, and may be configured so that the display mode of "red" or "rainbow" is selected at a predetermined ratio. With this configuration, it is possible for the player to predict the type of jackpot that can be set when the jackpot is won, although the player does not know whether or not the jackpot is won. Furthermore, in this control example, only when the game contents (jackpot D win) are most advantageous to the player in the above-described holding mode selection table 222c and treasure box mode selection table 222d, a display mode ( "Rainbow") can be selected, and for other display modes, the selection ratio is configured to vary based on the pending rank, level, and success judgment result, but it is limited to this Instead, it may be configured such that a dedicated display mode can be displayed for each game content (holding rank, success/failure determination result).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 227(b), the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 contains a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b, a normal reserved ball number counter 223c, and a fluctuation start flag. 223d, stop type selection flag 223e, winning information storage area 223f, state setting area 223g, operation effect in progress flag 223h, operation effect type storage area 223i, pressed flag 223k, pending effect information storage area 223m, operation valid timer 223n, effect A counter group 223p, a pending effect flag 223q, a treasure chest effect flag 223r, a pseudo winning order storage area 223s, a normal pattern fluctuation start flag 223t, a normal pattern effect prohibition flag 223u, a normal pattern effect flag 223v, and other memory areas 223z. at least provided.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a counts the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol, and when a reserved ball number command set by the main controller 110 is received, the reserved balls included in the command are received. It is updated to a value based on the information indicating the number. This special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol up to four times. Specifically, the pending ball number command (Fig. 244 S405, S412) is received, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is configured to be added by 1, and in the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 239), a new special symbol variation When a reserved ball number command (see S206, S211 in FIG. 239) set when is started is received, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 233a is decremented by one.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b, like the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a, is a variable display of the second special symbol performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). , A counter that counts the number of pending balls (number of standby times) of the second special symbol variable effect suspended in the main control device 110 up to 4 times for each type of special symbol, and when a winning information command is received, It is updated according to the timing when the number of held balls increases or decreases, such as when a variation pattern command is received.

As described above, the voice ramp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 Cannot get value. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the number of reserved balls command transmitted from the main controller 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b Then, the number of reserved balls is managed for each type of special symbol.

Specifically, in the main controller 110, when the start winning is detected and the number of pending balls of the variable display is added, or the variable display in the special symbol is executed in the main controller 110 and the number of the pending balls is subtracted. If so, it transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction or the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 or the special symbol 2 reserved ball from the reserved ball number command The value of the number counter 203e is acquired and stored in the counter corresponding to the command, out of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b (see S2207 in FIG. 298). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110. While synchronizing with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110, the values can be updated.

The values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223 a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223 b are used to display the reserved ball number symbols on the third symbol display device 81 . That is, the voice lamp control device 113, in response to receiving the reserved ball number command, stores the reserved ball number indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b. , In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a or the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b after storage, a display reserved ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114. .

When the display control device 114 receives this display pending ball number command, the value of the pending ball number indicated by the command, that is, the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 223a of the audio lamp control device 113, or the special symbol 2 pending ball number counter 223a The drawing of the image is controlled so as to display the number of pending ball symbols corresponding to the value of the number of ball counter 223b in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. FIG. As described above, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a changes its value while synchronizing with the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110, and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b is mainly While synchronizing with the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the control device 110, the value is changed. Therefore, the number of reserved ball number symbols displayed in the sub display area Ds of the third pattern display device 81 is also the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110. It can be changed while synchronizing. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variable display is held.

The normal reserved ball number counter 223c has the same content as the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b described above, but differs in that the target is changed from the special symbol to the normal symbol. Since the technical control concept is the same, detailed description is omitted.

The fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on when the fluctuation pattern command of the first special symbol transmitted from the main controller 110 or the fluctuation pattern command of the second special symbol is received (see S2302 in FIG. 259), and the third symbol. It is turned off when the variable display is set on the display device 81 (see S3002 in FIG. 267). When the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on, the display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the MPU 221 in the command output processing (S2102) of the main processing (see FIG. 257), It is transmitted toward the display control device 114 . In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is used to perform the variation display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. Display control of the variable effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when a special symbol stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S2204 in FIG. 258), and the stop type in the third symbol display device 81 is set. is turned off (see S3007 in FIG. 267). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is determined based on the stop type (jackpot type in the case of a jackpot) extracted from the received stop type command.

The winning information storage area 223f includes one execution area, four areas (first area to fourth area) corresponding to the first special symbol, and four areas (first area to fourth area) corresponding to the second special symbol. 4 areas) and four areas (first area to fourth area) corresponding to normal symbols, and winning information is stored in each of these areas. In the pachinko machine 10, when the main controller 110 detects the start winning for the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, a special winning random number counter C1 obtained in response to the start winning, From each value of the special hit type counter C2 and the variation type counter CS1, various information (win or not, jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, fluctuation pattern) obtained when a special symbol lottery corresponding to the start winning is performed. The main controller 110 predicts (estimates), and the predicted various information is notified from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113 by means of winning information commands.

Also, when the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is detected, from the value of the second winning random number counter C4 acquired according to the passage, when the lottery of the normal symbol corresponding to the passage is performed A lottery result is predicted in advance, and the predicted various information is notified from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113 by means of a winning information command.

In the voice lamp control device 113, when the winning information command is received, various information notified by the winning information command (in the case of special symbol winning information, success or failure, jackpot type in case of big hit, fluctuation pattern, normal symbol In the case of the winning information of (2), win or lose) is extracted as winning information, and the winning information is stored in the winning information storage area 223f. More specifically, the extracted winning information is the type of the ball entrance where the ball was detected (first ball entrance 64 or second ball entrance 640), or four areas corresponding to normal symbols ( 1st area to 4th area) are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th area). That is, the smaller the area number is, the data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored, and the first area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning.

In addition, in the first control example, in the main controller 110, based on various information obtained when a lottery of special symbols corresponding to the start winning is performed (win or not, jackpot type in the case of jackpot, variation pattern) Although the winning information command is set and notified to the audio lamp control device 113, other configurations may be used.

For example, when a starting prize is generated, various information already stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b in various information predicted corresponding to the start prize. a setting means for setting a winning information command by adding a winning information command, various information (winning information) already stored in the winning information storage area 223f when the winning information command is received, and information included in the received winning information command A determination means for determining whether or not the various information (winning information) matches may be provided. This makes it possible to determine whether the various information (winning information) stored in the winning information storage area 223f is properly stored.

In addition, in the first control example, when a new start winning occurs, a winning information command is set and notified to the sound lamp control device 113. However, the winning information command is sent to the sound lamp control device 113 The timing of notification is not limited to the timing described above (the timing at which the winning information command is set). (For example, 5-second intervals), when the game conditions are variable (for example, when the game state changes from the time-saving state to the normal state, when the jackpot game starts or ends, etc.), or when the special symbol starts to fluctuate (or A configuration may be used in which the winning information command stored in the storage means is notified to the audio lamp control device 113 when the game is stopped. With this configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute an effect (so-called prefetch effect) using the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223f.

In this control example, based on each piece of winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223f, setting of an effect mode such as a change in the display color of a pending symbol is executed as a prefetch effect. In this way, by executing various effects (read-ahead effects) based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223f, the player can be notified of each reserved ball before the start of the variable display. It can give you a sense of anticipation for a big hit. Also, it is possible to execute a long-term effect using a plurality of variable display periods.

The state setting area 223g displays the current game state set in the pachinko machine 10 and the game state before a predetermined period of time (for example, if the jackpot game is currently in progress, the game state at the time the jackpot was won). This is a storage area to be set (stored).

In the state setting area 223g, when various state commands output from the main controller 110 are received by the command determination processing (see S2114 in FIG. 258), information indicating the gaming state included in the received state command is extracted. Then, the current game state is set. Also, in the command determination process (see S2114 in FIG. 258), when it is determined that the command indicating that the jackpot game is executed is received, the information set (stored) as the current gaming state is It is configured to be set (stored) as the set game state. As a result, it is possible to change the performance mode of the variable performance executed after the end of the big win game according to the game state set at the time of winning the big win. Further, for example, even if the jackpot is the same jackpot type, in the case of having a configuration in which the game state to be executed after the jackpot game ends is varied according to the game state at the time of winning, during the jackpot game A game state to be set after the end of the jackpot game can be predicted on the side of the voice lamp control device 113, and an effect during the jackpot game can be executed to suggest the prediction result.

The operation effect in progress flag 223h is for indicating that the operation effect is being executed, and is a flag that is set to ON when the operation effect is being executed. It is configured such that the processing contents when the operation means is operated are changed according to the conditions. Here, the operation effect is a effect in which the effect mode changes based on the player's operation of the operation means (frame button 22), and the effect described above with reference to FIGS. included. As characteristic operation effects executed in this control example, two operation effects have been described with reference to FIGS. Alternatively, for example, the above-described look-ahead effect may be displayed based on the operation of the operation means (the frame button 22).

This flag 223h during operation effect is executed when it is determined in the variation effect setting process (see S3004 in FIG. 268) that the operation effect is included in the variation pattern to be executed this time (S3105 in FIG. 268: Yes). It is set to ON in the operation effect setting process (S3106 in FIG. 269) (see S3204 in FIG. 269), referred to in the frame button input monitoring and effect process (S2107 in FIG. 271) (S3304 in FIG. 271), and set to ON. If so (S3304 in FIG. 271: Yes), the pressed flag 223k is set to ON (see S3305 in FIG. 271). Then, it is also referred to in the operation effect management process (see S2111 in FIG. 273) (see S3501 in FIG. 273), and the effect mode of the operation effect based on whether or not the frame button 22 is operated is set for the operation effect being executed. . Then, it is set to OFF when the operation rendering period has elapsed.

The operation effect type storage area 223i is a storage area for temporarily storing the type of operation effect to be executed. The information shown is stored (see S3203 and S3207 in FIG. 269). The effect type of the operation effect stored here is referred to when determining what operation effect is currently being executed in the operation effect management process (see S2111 in FIG. 273) (see S3502 and S3509 in FIG. 273). ). Thereby, different processes can be executed according to the type of operation presentation. Further, the information stored in the operation effect type storage area 223i is cleared when the operation effect ends (when the corresponding variation pattern effect ends).

The pressed flag 223k indicates that the player has pressed (operated) the frame button 22 (operation means), and is set to ON when the frame button 22 is pressed during the operation effect. It is.

This pressed flag 223k is set when it is determined that the operation of the frame button 22 is performed while the operation effect flag 223h is set to ON in the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (see S2107 in FIG. 271). 271 S3304: Yes), set to ON (see S3305 in FIG. 271), and referred to in the operation effect management process (see S2111 in FIG. 273) (S3503, S3511, S3518 in FIG. 273). Then, after the effect mode of the operation effect based on the reference result is set, it is set to OFF (S3505, S3513, S3520 in FIG. 273).

In this control example, as the operation effect, there are a case where the effect mode is changed immediately after the player operates the operation means, and a case where the effect mode is changed after a predetermined period has passed. In such a case, by using the pressed flag 223k, that is, by temporarily storing information indicating that the operation means has been operated (setting the pressed flag 223k to ON), the operation means By making it possible to determine the stored information (the setting state of the pressed flag 223k) at the timing of changing the effect mode based on the operation content (operation result) of the operation means, the operation can be reliably performed based on the operation result of the operation means. The production mode of production can be varied. In this control example, only whether or not the operation means is operated can be stored as the operation result for the operation means. or, if a plurality of operation means are provided, it is possible to store which operation means is operated how many times, or to select one option from a plurality of options by operating the operation means. If so, the selection result may be configured to be storable. Then, if it is difficult to store the operation result described above only with the configuration of the pressed flag 223k used in this control example, an operation result storage area is provided instead of the pressed flag 223k, and the player can may be configured so as to temporarily store the contents of the operation executed by . In this way, by allowing the player to perform a plurality of types of operations, the player can actively participate in the game.

The pending effect information storage area 223m is a storage area for storing various information set for executing the look-ahead effect, and includes four storage areas corresponding to the number of pending balls of the first special symbol and the second Four storage areas corresponding to the number of reserved balls of special symbols are formed, and each storage area is configured to store information indicating a reserved rank, a reserved mode, and a treasure box mode. Then, when a new special symbol variation is started, the various information stored in each storage area is shifted in the same manner as the winning information storage area 223f.

In this control example, by using the information stored in the pending effect information storage area 223m, the information set when the winning command is received (for example, the information indicating the pending rank), the special symbol variation is started. Since it can be held until it is done, it is possible to execute the look-ahead effect using that information at any timing. As a result, it is possible to execute an unexpected look-ahead effect for the player, and to enhance the effect of the effect.

In this control example, the prefetch effect is executed at the timing when the effect mode of the prefetch effect is determined. It may be configured such that it is stored in the area 223m, and the read-ahead effect is executed using the stored effect mode when a predetermined condition is satisfied. By configuring in this way, for example, the winning information included in the winning command received during the period in which the execution of the look-ahead effect is prohibited due to the look-ahead effect being executed for another reserved symbol is used. It is possible to determine the performance mode of the look-ahead performance by using the method, and to execute a new look-ahead performance based on the end of the look-ahead performance to be executed for another reserved symbol.

In addition, when the process of setting the effect mode of the prefetch effect is executed once, the process of setting the effect mode of the prefetch effect is executed again for a predetermined period (for example, until the special symbol fluctuation is executed twice) period) When using the prohibiting process, information specifying the prohibition period may be stored in the pending effect information storage area 223m. Inhibition information unique to a specific storage area is set in the storage area so as to prohibit the execution of the read-ahead performance based on the suspension performance information stored in the storage area storing the suspension performance information corresponding to the pattern. You can

The operation valid timer 223n is a timer for measuring an operation valid period (a period for validly determining that the player has operated the operation means (the frame button 22)) during the operation presentation, and the operation presentation is executed. A value is set to time the period corresponding to when The value set in the counter updating process (S2113) executed at intervals of 1 millisecond in the main process (see FIG. 257) of the sound lamp control device 113 is periodically subtracted from the operation valid timer 223n.

The effect counter group 223p is a counter group having a plurality of counters used for selecting various effects. The contents of various counters included in the effect counter group 223p will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 230 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the effect counter group 223p. As shown in FIG. 230, in this control example, the production counter group 223p includes a pending rank counter 223p1, a pending mode counter 223p2, a treasure chest mode counter 223p3, and other counters 223pz, and each counter is "0 to It consists of a loop counter that is repeatedly updated in the range of 99”.

Each counter of the effect counter group 223p is updated by one each time the main process (see FIG. 257) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed. Each counter is configured to update within a predetermined range (eg, 0 to 99) without synchronization. Note that any configuration other than the configuration used in this control example may be used as long as the values of the counters are updated without synchronism. In this case, in order to make it difficult to synchronize when the counter update process is executed a plurality of times, it is preferable to configure the update ranges to be different prime numbers. By configuring in this way, it is possible to facilitate the execution of different combinations of effects, so that it is possible to enhance the effect of the effects. On the other hand, when it is desired to execute (display) a plurality of presentations in a constantly related manner, the same counter value may be used to select the presentation modes of the plurality of presentations.

The pending effect flag 223q indicates that a pending effect (an effect of varying the display mode of the pending pattern displayed in the small area Ds2 of the secondary display area Ds of the third pattern display device 81), which is one of the look-ahead effects, is executed. It is a flag for indicating that the player is on, and is set to ON when the pending effect is being executed. This pending effect flag 223q is set to ON in the pending state selection process (see S2405 in FIG. 261) (see S2506 in FIG. 261), and when set to ON, a new pending state is not set. Reference is made (see S2501 in FIG. 261). Then, in the stop process (see FIG. 266), when it is determined that the special symbol variation targeted for the pending effect has stopped (S2957 in FIG. 266: Yes), it is set to OFF (see S2958 in FIG. 266).

By constructing in this way, it is possible to prevent the simultaneous execution of the pending performance for a plurality of reserved symbols, so that the player is made to pay attention to the look-ahead performance to be executed for the specific suspended symbols. be able to. Further, when a prize command indicating that the result of the win/fail judgment is a hit is received in a state in which a look-ahead effect in which the result of the win/fail judgment is a failure is already being executed, execution of the look-ahead effect for the prize information corresponding to the prize command. can be suppressed, it is possible to provide an unexpected performance in which the variation result of the special symbol variation corresponding to the reserved symbol in which the look-ahead performance is not executed becomes a big win.

In addition, in this control example, by using the pending effect flag 223q, it is configured to suppress execution of the look-ahead effect for a plurality of reserved symbols. It may be constituted so as to execute the look-ahead performance up to one reserved design, and there is winning information indicating a lottery result that is more advantageous to the player than the lottery result of the special design corresponding to the look-ahead performance being executed. When it is determined that, it may be configured to switch the reserved design to be the target of the look-ahead effect.

The treasure box effect in-progress flag 223r is a flag for indicating that the treasure box effect (the effect of changing the display mode of the treasure box accessory 750), which is one of the look-ahead effects, is being executed. It is set to ON when This treasure box effect flag 223r is different only in that the object of the pending effect flag 223q is replaced with a look-ahead effect that changes the display mode of the treasure box accessory 750, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted. do.

The pseudo winning order storage area 223s stores the pseudo attackers 165 calculated for the winning balls in each of the winning openings (the specific general winning opening 163, the specific out opening 166, and the specific winning opening 65a) provided in the special winning device 550. This is a storage area for temporarily storing the order of arrival (pseudo winning order). In the pseudo winning order storage area 223s, in the pseudo attacker effect processing (see S2812 in FIG. 265) executed in the right attacker jackpot related processing (see S2702 in FIG. 264), it is stored that a ball has won in each winning hole. When the command shown is received, the winning order to the pseudo attacker 165 is calculated by adding the ball flow period from each winning hole to the pseudo attacker 165, and the calculation result is stored (S2903 in FIG. 265). . Then, it is referred to when setting a specific effect mode (overflow effect mode) for pseudo winning information whose winning order is 10 or later stored in the winning order storage area 223s. The information stored in the pseudo winning order storage area 223s is cleared each time one round game ends (see S2808 in FIG. 264).

The normal pattern effect possible flag 223t is a flag for indicating whether or not the variation pattern of the normal symbol won per long opening is executed, and the variation pattern of the normal symbol won per long opening is executed. set to on if As a result, it is possible to determine whether or not it is possible to change the performance mode based on the lottery result of the normal symbols while the charge performance is being executed based on the lottery result of the special symbols. . In addition, when it receives a variation pattern command indicating that the variation pattern of the normal symbol won per long opening is executed, if it is determined that it is in a state where it is not possible to replace the effect mode of the charge effect ( S2305 in FIG. 259: No), it is not set to ON.

The normal pattern effect prohibition flag 223u is a flag for indicating that the execution of the normal pattern effect (the effect that changes the effect mode of the charge effect based on the lottery result of the normal symbol) is prohibited, and is a flag for indicating that the general pattern effect is prohibited. is set to ON when it is determined that the execution of This normal pattern effect prohibition flag 223u is, in the winning information related processing (see S2209 in FIG. 260), when it is determined that there is winning information indicating that the special symbol wins (big hit or small hit) (Figure 260), and is set to ON (see S2408 in FIG. 260).

Then, in the variation pattern reception process (see S2202 in FIG. 259), it is referred to when a variation pattern command corresponding to the normal pattern long open (per normal pattern length) is received (S2305 in FIG. 259), and the reference result Based on this, the setting status of the normal pattern effect possible flag 223t is varied. This normal pattern effect prohibition flag 223u is set to OFF when a special pattern indicating a win (big win, small win) is stopped and displayed.

By configuring in this way, when there is winning information indicating a win (big win, small win) of a special symbol that is more advantageous to the player than a long open win of a normal symbol, a special prize is generated based on the lottery result of the normal symbol. It is possible to suppress the variation of the variation performance of the pattern. Therefore, for example, it is suppressed that an effect that is difficult for the player to understand is provided by executing the effect based on the normal game win while the look-ahead effect is being executed based on the winning information indicating the win. be able to.

In addition, in this control example, when it is determined that there is winning information indicating that a special symbol hit (big hit or small hit) is won, the general pattern effect prohibition flag 223u is turned on. Alternatively, the normal pattern effect prohibition flag 223u may be set to ON under other conditions, for example, the normal pattern effect prohibition flag 223u may be set at a timing other than when the variable effect indicating the lottery result of the special symbol is fluctuating at high speed. can be set to on. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable that the variable performance being executed is suddenly switched.

Furthermore, in addition to the timing of receiving the variation pattern corresponding to the long opening of the normal pattern, the general pattern effect prohibition flag 223u is set to ON based on the timing of executing the game for the long opening of the normal pattern. Also good.

The normal pattern effect flag 223v is a flag for indicating that the normal pattern effect is being executed, and is set to ON when the normal pattern effect is being executed. This general pattern effect flag 223v is set to ON when the general pattern effect is executed in the liquid crystal effect execution management process (see S2110 in FIG. 272) (see S3406 in FIG. 272). Then, in order to set the display mode of the third symbol to be displayed at the stop timing of the special symbol, it is referred to in the stop processing (see S2213 in FIG. 266) executed when the stop command of the special symbol is received (Fig. S2952 of H.266). In addition, it is also referred to for setting the variation pattern of the variation effect that is set in accordance with the start of variation of the special symbols (see S3103 in FIG. 268).

The continuation flag 223x is a flag for determining that the normal pattern effect is executed so as to straddle a plurality of special symbol fluctuations, and when the normal pattern effect is executed so as to straddle a plurality of special symbol fluctuations It is set to ON. This continuation flag 223x is, in the charge effect setting process (see S3104 in FIG. 270), when it is determined that the normal figure fluctuation time is longer than the special figure fluctuation time being executed (S3224 in FIG. 270: Yes), ON It is set (see S3231 in FIG. 270). Then, when it is referred to in the stop processing (see S3103 in FIG. 266) (see S2953 in FIG. 266) and is set to ON (S2953 in FIG. 266: Yes), the normal figure effect (charge effect) is performed. A process for displaying a reduced third pattern for reducing and stopping the third pattern is executed in order to continue without discomfort.

In this way, while the charge performance is being executed based on the lottery result of the special symbol, when performing the process of varying the performance mode of the charge performance based on the lottery result of the normal symbol, the variation of the normal symbol is stopped. Even if the timing is later than the special symbol variation stop timing, it is possible to execute the charge performance across the special symbol variation stop timing by using the continuation flag 223x. In addition, when the charge performance is executed across the timing of stopping the fluctuation of the special symbols, the stop display mode of the third symbol indicating the lottery result of the special symbols is made more difficult for the player to distinguish than the normal stop display mode. By variably setting to , the player can be made to execute the charging performance without any sense of incongruity.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third pattern display device 81 performs variable display (variation) of the third pattern. production) is controlled. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. It should be noted that even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a period of time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 251).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

Next, referring to FIG. 231, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 231 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the sound lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238 , and the MPU 231 , work RAM 233 , character ROM 234 and image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240 . . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237 , and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241 . A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239 .

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model with a different lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot or a different number of prize balls paid out for one special symbol jackpot, the symbols displayed by the third symbol display device 81 are different. Since there are models with exactly the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce costs.

The MPU 231, character ROM 234, image controller 237, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described below.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio ramp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110 . The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is designed so that a system reset is applied from the power supply 115 immediately after power is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same shall apply hereinafter). is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231 . Each time an instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. Further, when the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer indicated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional game machines. The data of the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also control programs and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data continuously arranged in a plurality of pages, the data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed. It takes a long time before the data is output. Also, when reading discontinuous data, a long time is required each time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions that make up the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. to store. The MPU 231 then executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233 . The work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and reads and writes data at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third pattern display device 81 , and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240 . The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 to a resident video RAM 235, which is connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236 .

The character ROM 234 is constructed by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

The NAND type flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storage and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Here, the NAND type flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to increase the interest of the player.

In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store control programs and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 while storing a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2. In this way, the control program and fixed value data are provided to store the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since the characters can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data is retrieved from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 .

Here, the NAND type flash memory 234a, due to its nature, generates a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data is written) when writing data, and generates defective data blocks into which data cannot be written. or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b applies known error correction to the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and avoids bad data blocks when reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234a. data address translation.

The ROM controller 234b corrects errors in the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including error bits. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

In addition, since the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and accesses to the defective data block are avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can store different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b reads one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data corresponding to the designated address. is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. Then, the ROM controller 234 b outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 after performing known error correction processing.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and one page of data in the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in each bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b, for example, outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while data is set in one bank, or outputs the data specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The processing of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub-storage unit in the character ROM 234, and is intended to complement the NAND type flash memory 234a. ). Of the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR-type ROM 234d stores programs that are not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND-type flash memory 234a. At least a first program storage area 234d1 is provided for storing a portion of the boot program to be executed.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third pattern display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after releasing the system reset. As a result, the display control device 114 can be put into a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 stores the boot program within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a), which should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word=2 bytes)) are stored. The number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 should be within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and instructs the bus line 240 to specify the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 .

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and transfers the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. to specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d, selects the program previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d. , the instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234 c and output to the MPU 231 .

Here, in this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time to read the data of the first page after the address is specified until the data is output. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code that the MPU 231 should execute first after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read and set the buffer RAM 234c. You spend a lot of time waiting to receive your code. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory from which data can be read at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. Thus, when the address "0000H" is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. , and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. , fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program are stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c that is stored, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is transferred to the program storage area 233a. The transfer process can be performed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, there is no need to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c, so the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the command pointer 231a to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to be set to a first predetermined address. As a result, when the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined number in the program storage area 233a. Set to a street address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processing can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processes. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and execute processing for those instructions.

Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount from the second program storage area 234a1. The instruction pointer 231a is programmed to be included, and the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Execute the rest of the boot program contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control programs are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Also, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, the initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 274) executed after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 274) by the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to .

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, when the boot program is executed by the MPU 231 to the end, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can read the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding the NOR type ROM 234d with a very small capacity. can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third pattern display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 237) sent from the MPU 231 to be described later, and draws one frame of a first frame buffer 236b or a second frame buffer 236c to be described later. The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third pattern display device 81 to display the image on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加. The image controller 237 performs the one-frame image drawing process and the one-frame image display process within the one-frame image display time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) on the third pattern display device 81 . parallel processing in

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 276(b)), and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of causing the third pattern display device 81 to display the image developed by the previous drawing.

In this manner, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 based on transfer instructions from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

Image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 . That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 based on instructions from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND type flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but its read speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image is drawn by the image controller 237 while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. can be processed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed when drawing the image. , the time required for reading the image can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after display is determined by main controller 110 or display controller 114 are permanently resident in resident video RAM 235. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Further, when the display control device 114 draws an image using the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, before the drawing is performed, the display control device 114 stores necessary data for drawing from the character ROM 234 in the normal video RAM 236. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal-use video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of , and the time required for reading the data can be saved, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, there is no need to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so there is no need to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. FIG. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of an SRAM of 132 kilobytes, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given to the image controller 237 by the MPU 231 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the head address (storage source head address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and top of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains an address. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

The image controller 237 reads one block of data from a predetermined address in the character ROM 234 according to various information of this transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and stores it in the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 is not in use. , is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 . Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source start address to the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction are transferred.

As a result, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 in a short time. can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by transferring the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, these video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for image drawing processing. , it is possible to prevent the display on the third pattern display device 81 from being too late.

In addition, image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 by the image controller 237, so that the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 can perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine the period during which the display processing on the device 81 is not used, and to simplify the processing.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 can be retained while the power is turned on without being overwritten. 235e and an error message image area 235f are provided, and at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third pattern area 235d are provided.

The power-on main image area 235a is the power-on main image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 after power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on variation image area 235b, a game is started by a player while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a ball entering the first start hole 64a is detected. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on varying image for displaying the results of the lottery performed by the main controller 110 in a varying effect.

The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is sent to the controller 237 (see FIG. 274).

Here, the power-on variation image will be described. Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on varying image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 displays the power-on main image (see FIG. 35) using the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a. It is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

At this time, when receiving a display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a variation pattern command from the main controller 110, which is an instruction command to start variation, the display control device 114 displays the main image at power-on. On the display screen of , a variation image at the time of power-on with an "○" symbol at the lower right position of the screen, and a variation image at the time of power-on with an "X" symbol at the same position as the "○" symbol are displayed during the variation period. Medium, alternately displayed repeatedly. Then, based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main controller 110, the lottery performed by the main controller 110 is selected from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113. The result is judged, and if it is ``a big hit with a special pattern'', an image showing it is displayed for a certain period after stopping the variable performance, and if it is ``no special pattern'', an image showing it is displayed to stop the variable performance. Display for a certain period of time.

The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to use the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the rest of the image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person involved in the hall can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Also, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the remaining image to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is displayed. To wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. can be done.

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Furthermore, by using the NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check.

Further, when the player starts the game while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the entry of the first entrance ball 64 is detected, the power-on fluctuation image area is displayed. The power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in 235b, and the images showing "O" and "X" are alternately displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 as follows. As a result, a simple variation effect can be performed using the power-on variation image. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. When the entry of the first entrance ball 64 is detected while the main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the corresponding variation effect can be immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加can.

Returning to FIG. 231, the description continues. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The third symbol area 235d is an area for permanently storing the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, in the third pattern area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main patterns (see FIG. 209) with numerals "0" to "9" as the third pattern are resident. As a result, when the third pattern display device 81 performs a variable effect, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. It is possible to quickly start a variable production. Therefore, after the ball enters the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b, the third symbol display device 81 fluctuates even though the first symbol display device 37 starts the variation effect. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the performance is not started immediately.

The character design area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character designs used in various effects displayed on the third design display device 81. FIG. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "Boy" are displayed according to various effects, and data corresponding to these characters are resident in the character design area 235e to control the display. When the device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, instead of newly reading out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, the image data is stored in the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading the image data resident in advance, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the character design can be changed immediately.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the sound ramp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound ramp control device 113 detects the occurrence of a vibration error. Notify the display controller 114 with an error command. Also, when the audio lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the audio lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the error occurrence together with the error type by an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81 when an error command is received.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the standpoint of preventing fraud by the player and protecting the player against errors. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages are pre-resident in the error message image area 235f. By reading the image data pre-resident in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. This eliminates the need to sequentially read image data corresponding to error messages from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND type flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is read after receiving an error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data can be overwritten and updated as needed, and has at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data to be stored in each sub-area is determined in advance.

The MPU 231 extracts image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 in the subarea provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area for storing. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including transfer data information in a later-described drawing list in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image controller 237 writes the one-frame image drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby rendering the one-frame image to the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and sent to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information with the third pattern display device 81, a process for displaying the image for one frame is executed.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 can expand the one-frame image drawn in one of the frame buffers and simultaneously , the image for one frame developed earlier can be read out from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 are used for drawing processing of an image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds of completion, the MPU 231 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately specifying the parameters, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing for the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when various control programs are executed by the MPU 231. Configured. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and a stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing control programs executed by the MPU 231 . When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. After storing all the control programs in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main controller 110, and a display data table. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing.

These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , these data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. After all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily implement diversified and complicated effects.

Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect, a round effect, etc. , an ending effect, and a display data table corresponding to the demo effect are prepared.

The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command from the sound lamp control device 113 is received. In addition, when the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variable performance is started, if the stop type of the variable performance is off, the stop symbol indicating the failure is finally stopped and displayed, and the stop type of the variable performance is the jackpot A or the jackpot B. If it is either, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbols in this variable effect, and can easily determine the game value to be given according to the jackpot type.

In addition, since the first ball entrance 64 is a prize winning opening in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters, the electric accessory is released as a jackpot of the normal symbol, and the ball enters the second ball. If it becomes easier to enter the ball opening 640, the number of prize balls increases. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state in which it is difficult to reduce the number of balls in hand or in a state in which the number of balls in hand does not decrease even if a game is played, so that the player is in a state in which the number of balls in hand is difficult to decrease or the number of balls in hand does not decrease. You can get a sense of the period that you can get a special symbol jackpot without it. Therefore, since the player's desire to participate in the game can be enhanced, the player can continue to have the desire to participate in the game.

In addition, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning does not start even after a predetermined time has passed since one variable effect stopped. The third pattern composed of the main patterns with no numerals '0' to '9' is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player and the persons involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table each corresponding to the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect. In addition, if there are 32 variable performance patterns to be set, the variable display data table, which is a display data table for the variable performance, is prepared with one table for one variable performance pattern and a total of 32 tables.

Details of the display data table will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 235 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at that time in association with an address that represents the time (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) during which one frame of image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as one unit. It defines in detail the content (drawing content) of an image for one frame.

The drawing contents specify the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency according to the type of sprite. Rendering information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to render sprites, such as values, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third pattern display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement ratio. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed larger than the standard size, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be displayed smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying the sprite. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed behind the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for specifying known α-blending coefficients used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. Color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when rendering the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, the drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address are one rear image, nine third patterns (design 1, design 2, . Rendering information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a character, a character used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. One or a plurality of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the magnification ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information are changed over time. Since it is fixed, the variable display data table defines only the back face type, which is information for specifying the back face image type.

The MPU 231 selects one of the backgrounds corresponding to the background mode (sea, beach, preparation period background, time production background) according to the background type. A rear image corresponding to the specified stage is specified as a drawing target, and the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame is specified according to the passage of time.

In the present embodiment, a description will be given of a case in which only the back surface type is defined as the drawing content of the back surface image in the display data table. may be defined as position information indicating whether the should be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 identifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on this display data table (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) is started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started.

Furthermore, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed according to the back surface type, and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third pattern display device 81 display) may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display, or along with the back surface type and position information, the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. (information indicating whether or not the back surface image is drawn) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. Alternatively, the position information may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of information indicating the elapsed time.

The third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, . . . ) describe symbol type offset information as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols. Rather than directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before and the variable effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop pattern, and in the pattern offset information from the start of the variation until the predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop pattern of the previous variation performance is described. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop pattern set according to the stop type command (stop type command for display) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113 Include information. As a result, the variable effect can be stopped with a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. - 特許庁

In addition, since a unique number is attached to each third symbol, the variable symbol in the previous variable effect or the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110 can be selected as the third symbol. , and the offset information is represented by the difference between the numbers attached to each third pattern, the third pattern to be displayed can be easily identified from the offset information.

In addition, in the pattern offset information, the third pattern fluctuates at high speed during the predetermined time when the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third pattern is being variably displayed at high speed, the third pattern is invisible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third pattern is interrupted, the player is not made to recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described at "0000H", which is the top address of the display data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 36) is the data table. "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing contents corresponding to the rendering mode to be defined in the display data table are displayed. is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the selected display data table. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the next A drawing list (see FIG. 237), which will be described later, is created by specifying the image contents to be drawn. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, as the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents are identified in the order defined in the display data table, so the image as defined in the display data table is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. .

Here, as in a conventional pachinko machine, if a program to be executed by the MPU 231 is started each time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, the effect image becomes more diverse. Therefore, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a risk that the diversification of controllable effect images will be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various modes of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81. - 特許庁

In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason why it can be created is that the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance in the pachinko machine 10 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the mode of presentation. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the presentation mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. This configuration can be realized only when the pachinko machine 10 is configured to determine the presentation mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize.

Next, with reference to FIG. 236, details of the transfer data table will be described. FIG. 236 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect. Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and its transfer timing are defined.

If all the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. As a result, an increase in capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

The transfer data table contains transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") to be transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table in correspondence with the address. (corresponding to addresses "0001H" and "0097H" in FIG. 236). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in association with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transferring at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transferring corresponding to that address. (corresponding to address "0002H" in FIG. 236).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). is included.

It should be noted that "0000H", which is the top address of the transfer data table, contains "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, similarly to the display data table, and the end address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 236, "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table exists, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233, which will be described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are identified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 237), which will be described later, is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time is acquired, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 236, when the pointer 233f is "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified at the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added, and the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237 . On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is defined at the address "0002H" of the transfer data table. The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

When transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. process.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the display data. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. The character ROM 234 can be reliably transferred to the normal video RAM 236 at the desired timing.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and is associated with an address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Thus, since the timing of the start of transfer can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND-type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the third pattern display device 81 can easily display various effects images. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIG. This simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and power-on varying image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on varying image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , is set to ON in the main process (see FIG. 274) executed by the MPU 231 (see S6005 in FIG. 274). Then, when all the resident object image data are stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer processing of the image transfer processing, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to OFF (see S7705 in FIG. 285(b)).

The simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 276(b)). If the image display flag 233c is ON, the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 276(b)) and the simple display setting process (see S6308 in FIG. 276(b) S6309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to commands transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 277 to 282) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 283 to 284(b)) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 during the V interrupt process (see S7601 in FIG. 285(a)), and when the simple image display flag 233c is on. Since there is resident target image data not stored in the resident video RAM 235, resident image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 285(b)) is executed to transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 286) is executed to transfer the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to commands and the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on commands and the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and stores the display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It selects and stores the selected display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 237) in which the content of the image drawing instruction for is described is generated. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

While incrementing the pointer 233f by 1, the MPU 231 adds an image to the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 237), which will be described later, is generated in which the content of the drawing instruction is described. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

The transfer data table buffer 233e transfers a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. is a buffer for storing When the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e by writing Null data, which means that there is no transfer target image data.

While incrementing the pointer 233f by one, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to a later-described rendering list (see FIG. 237) describing the content of image rendering instructions to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data necessary for drawing the sprite can be obtained. Image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The pointer 233f is an address at which transfer data information of corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data should be obtained from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. is for specifying The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, display setting processing for V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame of image is completed (see FIG. 276(b)). )), pointer update processing (see S7305 in FIG. 284(b)) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

Every time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and stores the drawing content in the drawing list described later. (see FIG. 237), acquires the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and obtains the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. Therefore, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effects can be displayed.

In addition, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed based on the transfer data table before the corresponding display data table starts drawing a predetermined sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The drawing list area 233g is used by the image controller to draw an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list that instructs H.237.

Here, with reference to FIG. 237, details of the drawing list will be described. FIG. 237 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. Symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., number of reserved balls pattern 1, number of reserved balls pattern 2, ..., error (symbol) describes detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite for each sprite. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 .

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the type of RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and its type. The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucency value. alpha blending information, compositing with other sprites, color tone correction according to color information, and filtering according to filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, the pending number of balls to be displayed). Image, warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error, etc.), generates detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw the image for one frame, and provides the detailed information for each sprite. Create a draw list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the RAM type and address for storing the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type defined in the display data table and the sprite type specified from other image contents. generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can store the image data according to the sprite type. , the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately identified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

In addition, the MPU 231 sets other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite as defined in the display data table. copy the information as is.

Further, in generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged in the front side from the sprites to be arranged in the rearmost side in the image for one frame, and obtains detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, followed by the third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, . . . ), effect (effect 1, effect 2, . . . ). , character (character 1, character 2, . . . , reserved ball pattern 1, reserved ball pattern 2, . . . , error pattern), detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described.

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and develops the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the first-drawn sprite can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the last-drawn sprite can be arranged on the frontmost side.

In the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, if the transfer data information is written at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 stores the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a where the image data to be transferred is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 draws an image from a predetermined area of the character ROM 234 (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 .

The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. When one display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect to be displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the performance time by the image display time for one frame on the third pattern display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment).

Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of one frame of image are completed, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing (FIG. 276(b)). )) is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by one (see S7307 in FIG. 283). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 judges that the presentation displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the presentation at the end of the presentation. perform various operations to

The stored image data determination flag 233i is set to indicate whether image data corresponding to all sprites whose corresponding image data are not resident in the resident video RAM 235 are stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

This stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by initial setting processing (see S6002 in FIG. 274) executed by the MPU 231 in the main processing when the power is turned on. The storage image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "OFF" indicating that the storage status for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when an instruction to transfer image data to be transferred corresponding to one sprite is set during normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 286) executed by the MPU 231. will be In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Also, image data of other sprites to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite will always be in a non-stored state when the image data of one sprite is stored. Therefore, set the containment state corresponding to the other sprites to "off".

Also, when transferring the image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S7809 in FIG. 286). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "OFF" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, an instruction to transfer the image data is set (see S7810 in FIG. 286). , causes the image controller 237 to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of that image data is stopped. As a result, unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233i is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as a "drawing target buffer") that develops an image drawn by the image controller 237 from among the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). ), and when the drawing buffer flag 233j is 0, it designates the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing buffer, and when it is 1, it designates the second frame buffer 236c. Then, the information of the specified drawing target buffer is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S7902 in FIG. 287).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of developing an image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. In parallel with the drawing process, the image controller 237 reads the drawn image information previously developed from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer, and transmits the image to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, display processing for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is done by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". done by As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Also, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of the image for one frame are completed. This is performed each time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 276(b)) is executed (see S7902 in FIG. 287).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating designations, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing for an image for one frame.

<Regarding control processing of main controller 110>
Next, each control process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. 238 to 255. FIG. The processing of the MPU 201 can be broadly classified into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in this embodiment). There are interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing that is activated by input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. and main processing.

238 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. FIG. Timer interrupt processing is periodic processing that is executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, various winning switch reading processes are executed (S101). That is, it reads the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110, determines the states of the switches, and saves detection information (winning detection information).

Next, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203. Similarly, the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is stored in the RAM 203. stored in the corresponding buffer area.

Further, the special winning random number counter C1, the special winning type counter C2, and the normal winning random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, and the normal hit random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and their counter values reach their maximum values (299, 99, and 239, respectively, in this embodiment). Clear to 0 when reached. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C2 and C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203. FIG.

Next, a special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104), and then, A starting winning process associated with winning (starting winning) to the first ball entrance 64 is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process, which is the process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83 (S106), and the through gate passage process associated with the ball passing through the through gate 67 are executed. (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passage processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 37 and 39. FIG. After executing the through gate passing process, the firing control process is executed (S108), and then other winning processes are executed (S109). Furthermore, other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S110), and the timer interrupt process ends. In the shooting control process, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the ball is shot on condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping shooting is not operated. This is a process of determining on/off of the . Main controller 110 gives a ball launch instruction to launch controller 112 when ball launch is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 33 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 238), and the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third pattern performed in 81.

In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is in the midst of a big hit at the moment (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and during the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S201: Yes), this processing is finished as it is.

If the special symbol jackpot is not being won (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (number N2 of suspension of variable display in special symbols) is obtained (S203). Next, it is determined whether the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S204), and if the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 ( S204: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (S205), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e changed by calculation is set. (S206). The pending ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 253), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When receiving the reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. store in

After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reservation first area to the reservation fourth area of the special symbol 2 reservation ball storage area 203b are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After the process of S207 is executed, the special symbol 2 fluctuation start process is executed (S208), and this process is finished. The special symbol 2 fluctuation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the processing of S204, when it is determined that the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S204: No), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is obtained. (S208). It is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d acquired in the process of S208 is 0 (S209). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S209: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S209, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set to 1 Subtract (S210), and set a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation (S211). The pending ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 253), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When receiving the reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223a of the RAM 223. store in

After setting the reserved ball number command by the processing of S211, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S212). In the process of S212, the data stored in the reservation first area to the reservation fourth area of the special symbol 1 reservation ball storage area 203a are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, a special symbol 1 variation start process is executed for starting variation display in the first symbol display device 37 (S213). The special symbol 1 fluctuation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S214). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first pattern display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time has not elapsed (S214: No), the display of the first symbol display device is updated (S215), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S214, if the variation time of the variable display being executed has passed (S214: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S216). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by special symbol 2 variation start processing (S208) and special symbol 1 variation start processing (S213) which will be described later with reference to FIGS. When the special symbol 2 variation start process (S208) or the special symbol 1 variation start process (S213) is executed, the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b are common. A lottery for special symbols is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the provided execution area. More specifically, it is determined whether or not there is a special symbol jackpot according to the value of the special winning random number counter C1, and if it is a special symbol jackpot, the jackpot is determined according to the value of the special winning type counter C2. A type is determined.

In the present embodiment, when the first symbol (special symbol) is stopped, the first symbol display device 37 turns on the blue LED when the jackpot A is reached, and the red LED when the jackpot B is reached. Light the LED. In addition, when it is out, it is set to turn on the red LED and the green LED. The display of each LED is turned off when the next variable display is started, but it may be turned on only for several seconds after the variable display is stopped.

After the processing of S216 is completed, when the variable display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, special symbol 2 variation start processing (S208) or special symbol 1 variation start processing (S213) It is determined whether or not the special symbol lottery result (current lottery result) is a special symbol jackpot (S217). If the result of the lottery this time is a special symbol jackpot (S217: Yes), a jackpot scenario corresponding to the jackpot scenario table 202f is set (S218). After that, the values of the variable probability counter 203m and the time saving medium counter 203j are set to 0 (S219), and the big hit medium flag 203n is set to ON (S220). Then, a stop command is set (S221), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S217, when it is determined that the current lottery result is not a big win (S217: No), a small win setting process (S222) is executed. The small winning setting process (S222) will be described later with reference to FIG. Next, game state update processing (S223) is executed. The game state update process (S223) will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, a stop command is set (S221), and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 240, the special symbol 2 fluctuation start process (S208) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 240 is a flow chart showing the special symbol 2 fluctuation start process (S209). This special symbol 2 variation start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 239) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 238), and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area, a lottery (win/fail judgment) of "special symbol jackpot" or "special symbol loss" is performed, and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 It is a process for determining the effect pattern (variable effect pattern) of the variable effect performed in .

In the special symbol 2 variation start process (S208), first, each value of the special winning random number counter C1, the special winning type counter C2, and the variation type counter CS1 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is acquired. (S251). Next, it is determined whether or not the game state is currently changing probability (high probability state of special symbols) (S252). It should be noted that the determination of whether or not the probability variation is in progress is executed by determining whether the value of the probability variation counter 203m is 1 or more. Here, the variable probability counter 203m is set to a predetermined value based on the end of the jackpot game. On the other hand, the value is set to 0 based on the start of the jackpot game.

In the processing of S252, when it is determined that the probability is changing (S252: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability changing (high probability state of special symbols), so the special winning random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of S251 and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 222(a)), the lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol jackpot is obtained (S253). Specifically, the value of the special winning random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the 500 random numbers stored in the special symbol big winning random number table 202a. As described above, six random numbers of "5 to 10" are set as the random numbers that become the special symbol jackpot during the probability variation (high probability state of special symbols), and the value of the special winning random number counter C1, If these random numbers match, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. When the special symbol lottery result is obtained in the process of S253, the process proceeds to S255.

On the other hand, in the processing of S252, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the variable probability state (high probability state of special symbols), that is, it is in the low probability state of special symbols (S252: No), in the processing of S251 Based on the value of the special winning random number counter C1 and the special symbol big winning random number table 202a, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol big winning is obtained (S254). Specifically, the value of the special winning random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the 500 random numbers stored in the special symbol big winning random number table 202a. Five random numbers of "0 to 4" are set as the random numbers that become the special symbol jackpot in the special symbol low probability state, and the value of the special winning random number counter C1 and the random numbers that become these winnings are set. If they match, it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S255.

In the process of S255, whether the special symbol lottery result obtained by the process of S253 or S254 is a special symbol jackpot (that is, the value of the special winning random number counter C1 that has been acquired and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a match the set determination value) is determined (S255), and when it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is determined (S255: Yes), the value of the special winning type counter C2 acquired in the process of S251 , the display mode at the time of the big win is set (S256). More specifically, the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S251 is compared with the random number value stored in the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202d2, and the second special symbol (special figure 2) As a lottery result, it is determined which one of the two types of special symbol jackpot types ((jackpot D, jackpot E)) is the jackpot type this time. As described above, if the value of the special hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49", it is determined to be a jackpot D (16R probability variable jackpot), and if it is in the range of "50 to 99", the jackpot E (3R probability variation) is determined (see FIG. 223(c)).

In the process of S256, the display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot D, jackpot E). In addition, the jackpot types (jackpot D, jackpot E) are set as the stop types so that the stop symbols corresponding to the jackpot types are stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 . The display mode of the stop symbol set in the process of S256 is stopped and displayed by the process of S216 of the above-described special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 239).

Next, with reference to the variation pattern selection table 202e, the variation pattern at the time of winning the jackpot is selected. Here, in this control example, as described above with reference to FIG. It is configured so that the fluctuation time of the special symbol is set with reference to. Specifically, when the game state is a normal state or a latent state (that is, a low probability state of normal symbols), and when the game state is a variable probability state (that is, a high probability state of special symbols) , the variation pattern at the time of the big hit is determined based on the variation pattern selection table 202b1 (S257). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S257, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 until it stops with the jackpot symbol. A pattern variation time is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of the pattern variation such as normal reach, super reach is determined based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3. The relationship between the numerical value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the type of symbol variation is defined in the normal variation pattern selection table 202b1. Specifically, when the jackpot types determined this time are jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot D, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 50", normal reach, "51 to 250 ” determines the variation pattern of super reach.

In addition, in the variation pattern, the variation time of the third symbol for announcing the success/failure determination result is determined and notified to the sound lamp control device 113 . The sound ramp control device 113 determines the content (variation pattern) of the variable display mode to be actually displayed on the third pattern display device 81 according to the variation time and the success/failure determination result. Even if the main controller 110 is in the out-of-reach display mode, the sound lamp control device 113 is configured to be able to switch between the out-of-reach display mode and the non-out-of-reach display mode if the fluctuation time is the same. As a result, various display modes can be displayed, and effects can be diversified.

For example, as fluctuation patterns for failure, "short failure", "long failure", various types of "missing normal reach", and various types of "missing super reach" are defined. As variation patterns shared by jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot D, various types of "normal reach" and various types of "super reach" are defined.

On the other hand, in the process of S255, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S255: No), the display mode at the time of being out is set (S258). In the process of S258, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is set. Based on, the variation time (variation pattern) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set.

Next, the variation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S259). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the lost symbol is determined. At this time, as in the processing of S258, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is checked, and based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3, normal reach, super Determine the variation time of symbol variation such as reach.

When the process of S257 or the process of S259 is completed, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S257 or S259 is set (S260). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the processing of S257 or S259 is set (S261). When the processing of S261 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation processing (S104).

Next, with reference to FIG. 241, the special symbol 1 fluctuation start process (S213) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 241 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 1 fluctuation start process (S213). This special symbol 1 variation start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 239) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 238). Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area, lottery (win/fail judgment) of "special symbol jackpot" or "special symbol loss" is performed, and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 It is a process for determining the effect pattern (variable effect pattern) of the variable effect performed in .

In this special symbol 1 fluctuation start process (S214), similarly to the special symbol 1 fluctuation start process (S209), first, the special symbol stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a acquired by the process of S271. Each value of the hit random number counter C1 and the special hit type counter C2 is acquired (S271).

Next, it is determined whether or not the game state is currently changing probability (high probability state of special symbols) (S272). If it is determined that the odds are changing (S272: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol high probability state, so the process proceeds to S273. In the process of S273, based on the value of the special winning random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S271 and the special symbol big winning random number table 202a, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol big winning is obtained (S273). Specifically, the value of the special winning random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the 500 random numbers stored in the special symbol big winning random number table 202a. As described above, 11 random numbers from "5 to 10" are set as the random numbers for the special symbol jackpot, and the value of the special winning random number counter C1 and the random numbers for these hits match. In that case, it is determined that it is a special symbol jackpot. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S275.

On the other hand, in the process of S272, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the variable probability state (high probability state of special symbols), that is, it is in the low probability state of special symbols (S272: No), the process of S274 is performed. Execute. In the process of S274, based on the value of the special winning random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S271 and the special symbol big winning random number table 202a, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol big winning is obtained (S254). Specifically, the value of the special winning random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the 500 random numbers stored in the special symbol big winning random number table 202a. Five random numbers of "0 to 4" are set as the random numbers for the jackpot of special symbols, and when the value of the special winning random number counter C1 and the random numbers for these winnings match, the special symbol is selected. It is determined that it is a jackpot. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S275.

In the process of S275, it is determined whether or not the special symbol lottery result obtained by the process of S273 or S274 is a special symbol jackpot (S275). Yes), based on the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S271, the display mode at the time of the big hit is set (S276). More specifically, the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S271 is compared with the random number value stored in the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202d1, and the four types of special symbol jackpots (jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, jackpot D), the type of jackpot is discriminated. As described above, if the value of the special hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49", it is determined to be a jackpot A (6R probability variable jackpot), and if it is in the range of "50 to 68", the jackpot B (16R probability variable jackpot), if it is in the range of "69 to 98", it is judged to be jackpot C (8R probability variable jackpot), and if it is in the range of "99", it is judged to be jackpot C (See FIG. 223(c)).

In the process of S276, the display mode (lighting state of LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, jackpot D). In order to stop and display the stop symbols corresponding to the jackpot types on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot types (jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, jackpot D) are set as stop types.

Next, the variation pattern for the big hit is determined based on the variation pattern selection table 202b (S277). In the process of S277, a variation pattern is selected (set) with reference to the variation pattern selection table 202b (see FIG. 224) corresponding to the currently set gaming state. When the variation pattern is set in the process of S277, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 until it stops with the jackpot symbol. A pattern variation time is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of the pattern variation such as normal reach, super reach is determined based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3. The relationship between the numerical value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the type of symbol variation is defined in the normal variation pattern selection table 202b1. Specifically, when the jackpot type determined this time is jackpot A, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 50", it is normal reach, and if it is in the range of "51 to 250" Determining the fluctuation pattern of super reach.

In addition, in the variation pattern, the main controller 110 determines the variation time of the third symbol for informing the success/failure determination result, and notifies the sound lamp control device 113 of the variation time. The sound ramp control device 113 determines the content (variation pattern) of the variable display mode to be actually displayed on the third pattern display device 81 according to the variation time and the success/failure determination result. Even if the main controller 110 is in the out-of-reach display mode, the sound lamp control device 113 is configured to be able to switch between the out-of-reach display mode and the non-out-of-reach display mode as long as the fluctuation time is the same. As a result, various display modes can be displayed, and effects can be diversified.

For example, as the fluctuation pattern for failure, "miss (for long time)", "miss (for short time)", various types of "missing normal reach", various "missing super reach", and various "missing special reach" are defined. ing. As variation patterns shared by jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot D, various types of "normal reach" and various types of "super reach" are defined.

In the processing of S275, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S275: No), the display mode at the time of being out is set (S278). In the process of S278, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is set. Based on, the fluctuation time (variation pattern) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set.

Next, the variation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S279). Here, with reference to the variation pattern selection table 202e, the variation time of the first symbol to the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the lost symbol. A variation time is determined. At this time, as in the processing of S278, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is checked, and based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3, normal reach, super Determine the variation time of symbol variation such as reach.

When the process of S277 or the process of S279 is completed, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S277 or S279 is set (S280). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the processing of S277 or S279 is set (S281). When the processing of S281 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation processing (S104).

Next, with reference to FIG. 242, the small hit setting process (S222) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. The pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured with lottery contents of special symbols so that a player can win a small win (a part of a loss) that can give the player a privilege less than a big win. FIG. 242 is a flow chart showing the small winning setting process (S222). This small hit setting process (S222) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 239) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 238), and is the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of various counters stored in , a process for determining whether or not there is a small hit is performed, and a scenario for a small win performed by the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81 is determined. processing.

In the small hit setting process (S222), first, it is determined whether or not the current lottery result is a small win (S301). When it is determined that the current lottery result is a small win (S301: Yes), a small win scenario is set based on the small win scenario table 202g (S302). Next, the small hit middle flag 203g is set to ON (S303), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S301, if it is determined that the lottery result of this time is not a small winning (S301: No), this processing is terminated as it is. In this control example, when a small winning is won, a small winning game is executed. This small winning game is a winning game in which the third electric accessory 82a opened during the big winning game (during the big winning game corresponding to the big winning C) is opened for one round. Specifically, the same release action as the round game executed in the first round of the big win game corresponding to the big win C is set in the small win scenario. Thus, immediately after the winning game is executed, it is possible to make it difficult to understand whether the winning game being executed this time is a big winning game or a small winning game. In addition, in this control example, when it is determined that the lottery result is not a big hit in the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 239) (S217 in FIG. 239: No), in the small hit setting process (see FIG. 242) Whether or not a small hit is won is determined by referring to the small hit random number table 202e (see S301 in FIG. 242). It may be configured to use a special symbol winning random number table that can determine at a time whether it is hit or miss.

Next, referring to FIG. 243, the game state update process (S223) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 243 is a flow chart showing the game state update process (S223). This game state update process (S223) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see Figure 239) of the timer interrupt process (see Figure 238), the value of the probability variation counter 203m and the time saving medium counter 203j This is a process for executing a subtraction process and updating the gaming state based on the subtracted value.

In the game state update process (S223), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation counter 203m is greater than 1 (S351). If it is determined that the value of the variable probability counter 203m is smaller than 1 (that is, 0) (S351: No), this process is terminated. As described above with reference to FIGS. 223 (b) and (c), in this control example, since the value set to the time saving counter 203j is smaller than the value set to the probability variation counter 203m, in the process of S351, When it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203m is not greater than 1 (is 0), the value of the time saving counter 203j is also naturally 0, so this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the variable probability counter 203m is greater than 1 (S351: Yes), the value of the variable probability counter 203m is subtracted by 1 (S352). Next, in the processing of S352, it is determined whether or not the subtracted value of the variable probability counter 203m is 0 (S353). If it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203m is 0 (S353: Yes), it is time to end the probability variation, so a state command indicating the normal state is set (S354), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S353, when it is determined that the value of the variable probability counter 203m is not 0 (S353: No), it is determined whether the value of the counter 203j during time saving is greater than 1 (S355). If it is determined that it is smaller than 1 (that is, 0) (S355: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S355, when it is determined that the value of the counter 203j during time saving is greater than 1 (S355: Yes), the value of the counter 203j during time saving is subtracted by 1 (S356). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving counter 203j subtracted in the process of S356 is 0 (S357). When it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203j is 0 (S357: Yes), a state command indicating transition to the latent state is set (S358), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S357, when it is determined that the value of the counter 203j during time saving is not 0 (S357: No), this processing is terminated as it is. Although omitted in the game state update process shown in FIG. 243, when the value of the probability variation counter 203m or the value of the time saving counter 203j is updated (subtracted), the state command indicating the updated value is set. Then, the set state command is output to the sound lamp controller 113 by the external output process (see S1301 in FIG. 253) of the main process (see FIG. 253) of the main controller 110. FIG. As a result, the current game state can be determined on the sound lamp control device 113 side.

Next, with reference to FIG. 244, the starting winning process (S105) executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 244 is a flow chart showing this starting winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 238), determines whether or not there is a win to the first winning opening 64 (start winning), and if there is a starting win, It is processing for holding the value indicated by various random number counters and processing for executing prefetching of the lottery result in the special design from the value indicated by the reserved various random number counters.

When the starting winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first winning hole 64 (starting winning) (S401). Here, the ball entering the first winning hole 64 is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first winning hole 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times N1 of holding variable display in the special symbol) is obtained (S402). . Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (S403).

Then, if there is no winning to the first winning port 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a winning to the first winning port 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 If not (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, if there is a prize to the first winning hole 64 (S401: Yes) and if the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol 1 reserved ball The value (N) of the number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a first special symbol reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S405).

The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S1301) of the main process (see FIG. 253), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the pending ball number command by the process of S405, each value of the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is stored in the first area of the vacant reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area) of the special symbol 1 reservation ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first reserved area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the second reserved area is the first area, if the value is 2, the third reserved area is the first area, and if the value is 3, the fourth reserved area is the first area. After completing the process of S406, next, prefetching is executed (S407), and the process proceeds to S408. Details of this prefetch processing (S407) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, regarding S408 to S414, the processing for winning the first winning opening 64 is changed to the processing for winning the second starting opening 64b in each of the processes of S401 to S407 described above. Since similar processing is executed, detailed description thereof will be omitted. When a game ball wins in the second winning hole 640 and is stored as a reserved ball, each value of the special winning random number counter C1 and the special winning type counter C2 is obtained, and the corresponding special symbol 2 is obtained. It is stored in the empty reservation area of the reservation ball storage area 203b.

In this way, the values of the special winning random number counter C1 and the special winning type counter C2 similar to those of the first special symbol are acquired for the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second winning hole 640. A lottery can be executed using a common random number for the first special pattern and the second special pattern, so that the winning probability can be made constant even for the first special pattern and the second special pattern.

After executing the process of S413, a prefetch process is executed (S414). Details of the look-ahead processing (S414) will be described with reference to FIG. Then, a process of determining in advance each lottery result to be executed at the start of fluctuation is executed.

In the present embodiment, the value of each counter is obtained based on the incoming ball, but may be obtained at the start of fluctuation. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the use of the storage area of the RAM 203 without requiring a storage area for storing the values of each counter until the start of fluctuation. Further, among the counters, some counters (for example, only the fluctuation type counter CS1) may be configured to be acquired at the start of fluctuation. By configuring in this way, a counter related to winning/failure determination can be acquired when a ball is entered, and a counter not related to winning/failure determination can be acquired later, and the amount of data to be stored can be reduced while maintaining the fairness of the game. can be suppressed.

Next, referring to FIG. 245, the look-ahead process (S407), which is one process in the starting winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 245 is a flow chart showing this prefetching process (S407).

In the look-ahead process (S407 in FIG. 245), it is determined whether or not there is a new winning (S501). In the process of S501, when the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter (N1) or the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter (N2) is added, it is determined that a new prize has been won. In the process of S501, if it is determined that there is no new winning (S501: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a new winning prize (S501: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the current winning prize is a special symbol 1 (special figure 1) (S502), and it is determined that it is a special figure 1. If so (S502: Yes), the lottery result for each counter value acquired this time is acquired in advance based on the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a, the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202d1, and the small hit random number table 202e (S503 ), as the lottery result obtained in advance, sets a winning information command including the big win determination result, the big win type, the small win determination result, and the small win type (S504), and ends this process.

On the other hand, in the processing of S502, if it is determined that the winning this time is not the special symbol 1 (special figure 1), that is, the special symbol 2 (special figure 2) (S502: No), each counter acquired this time The lottery result for the value is acquired in advance based on the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a and the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202d2 (S505), and the prize information including the jackpot determination result and the jackpot type as the lottery result obtained in advance. A command is set (S504), and the process ends.

In this way, before the start of the variation, the result of the winning/failure determination in advance is output to the audio ramp control device 113 as a prize winning information command each time the ball is held, so the audio ramp control device 113 , it is possible to recognize in advance the result of the judgment of success or failure and the type of success. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113, based on the prize winning information command, foreseeing the effect of notifying the player in advance of the winning judgment result of the reserved ball (for example, changing the color of the reserved symbol to the color of notifying the winning judgment result) Or, an effect such as outputting a notification sound for notifying the success/failure determination result in the held ball) can be executed. As for the winning information command, one winning information command is output for each pending ball, so that the sound lamp control device 113 can also recognize the establishment of the pending ball. can. It should be noted that in the prefetching process (see S407 in FIG. 245) in this control example, when it is determined that there is no new winning in the process of S501 (S501: No), this process is terminated as it is. However, without being limited to this, for example, the winning information command is set again for each counter value already stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Also good. By configuring in this way, even if it is determined not to execute the notice effect in response to the prize winning information command received by the audio lamp control device 113 side, the notice effect is executed again for the same reserved pattern. It is possible to determine whether or not to Further, in this control example, the lottery result based on each counter value acquired by the main controller 110 side is determined in advance, and the information for indicating the result of the preliminary determination is set as the winning information command. However, without being limited to this, information for indicating each acquired counter value is set as a winning information command, and the result of the lottery is determined in advance based on the winning information command received by the sound lamp control device 113 side. may be configured. In addition, when information for indicating each acquired counter value is set as a winning information command, it may be encrypted so that the counter value acquired this time cannot be specified by a player who illegally acquires the winning information command. It is preferable to configure such that the winning information command is output at a plurality of timings.

Next, with reference to FIG. 245, the look-ahead process (S407), which is one process in the starting winning process (see S105 in FIG. 244) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 245 is a flow chart showing this prefetching process (S407).

In this look-ahead process (S407), first, it is determined whether or not there is a new winning in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (S501). As a result of the determination, if there is no new winning in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (S501: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if there is a new winning in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (S501: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the new winning is the first special symbol winning (S502).

In the processing of S502, if it is determined that the winning is the winning of the first special symbol (S502: Yes), based on the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a1, special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202d1 and small hit random number table 202e Then, the lottery result, the jackpot type and the small hit type are acquired (S503), and the process proceeds to S504. In the process of S504, the winning information command including the big hit determination result, the big hit type, the small hit determination result, and the small hit type acquired in S503 (or S505) is set (S504), and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S502, if it is determined that the winning is the winning of the second special symbol (S502: No), based on the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a and special figure 2 jackpot selection table 202d2, the lottery result, The jackpot type is acquired (S505), the process of S504 is executed, and the process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 246, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 246 is a flow chart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 238), and includes the variation display of the second symbol performed in the second symbol display device 83 and the second symbol associated with the second winning opening 640. 1 This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory 640 and the like.

In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently hitting (S601). During the winning of the normal symbol (second symbol), the second symbol display device 83 is displaying the winning, and the opening and closing control of the first electric accessory 640 associated with the second winning opening 640 is performed. Including while being done. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is in the process of hitting (S601: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is fluctuating (S602), and the second symbol display device is determined. If the display mode of 83 is not fluctuating (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times of suspension M of variable display in normal symbols) is obtained (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is greater than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S604: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S605).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, the data stored in the first reservation area to the fourth reservation area of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203c are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is obtained (S607).

Next, normal design fluctuation start processing is executed (S608), and this processing ends. Incidentally, the normal symbol variation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the processing of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602: Yes), whether or not the variation time of the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed is determined (S609). Incidentally, the variable time here is the time set in advance by the processing of S716 or S717 in FIG.

In the process of S609, if the variable time has not elapsed (S609: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S609, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has passed (S609: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S610). In the process of S610, the normal symbol lottery is won, and if the display mode is set by the process of S707 or the process of S710 in FIG. The device 83 is set to stop display (light display). On the other hand, if the lottery for the normal symbol is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S713 in FIG. displayed). When the stop display is set by the process of S610, when the second symbol display update process (see S1308) of the main process (see FIG. 253) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is changed. 247, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stop-displayed (lighted-up) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S707, S710 or S713 of FIG.

Next, when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started, whether the normal symbol lottery result (current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is a normal symbol hit. is determined (S611). If the result of the lottery this time is a normal pattern win (S611: Yes), the start of opening/closing control of the first electric accessory 640 associated with the second winning opening 640 is set (S612), and a normal pattern winning operation command is set. (S613), and this process is terminated. When the start of opening and closing control of the first electric accessory 640 is set by the process of S612, next when the electric accessory opening and closing process (see S1306) of the main process (see FIG. 253) is executed, the first electric accessory The opening/closing control of the accessory 640 is started, and the opening/closing control of the first electric accessory 640 is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S709 or S712 of FIG. 247 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S611, if the lottery result of this time is out of the normal symbol (S611: No), the process of S612 and S613 is skipped and this process is finished.

Next, referring to the flowchart of FIG. 247, the normal symbol variation start process (S608) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 247 is a flow chart showing this normal symbol variation start process (S608). This normal design fluctuation start processing (S608) is the setting at the time of normal design fluctuation start executed in the normal design fluctuation processing (see FIG. 246) executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 238). It is a process for execution.

At present, it is determined whether or not a special symbol jackpot is in progress (S701). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and during the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S701: Yes), the process proceeds to S704.

In the process of S701, if it is not during the special symbol jackpot (S701: No), it is determined whether or not it is during probability variation (normal symbol high probability state) (S702). If it is not during probability change (high probability state of normal symbol) (S702: No), the process proceeds to S704.

On the other hand, in the process of S702, if it is during probability variation (high probability state of normal symbols) (S702: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is not in a special symbol jackpot, but the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state of normal symbols. , Based on the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 obtained in the processing of S607 in FIG. A lottery result is acquired (S703). Specifically, the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 is compared with the random value stored in the normal winning random number table 202c for high probability (see FIG. 222(c)). As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a hit of the normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4,205 to 239", It is determined that it is out of the normal pattern (see FIG. 222(c)).

In the process of S704, the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot, or the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal symbol low probability state (normal state, latent probability state), so acquired in the process of S607 in FIG. Based on the normal winning random number counter C4 value and the normal winning random number table 202c for low probability (see FIG. 222(c)), the lottery result as to whether or not the normal symbol wins is obtained (S704). Specifically, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is compared with the random value stored in the normal hit random number table 202c for low probability (see FIG. 222(c)). As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5", it is determined that it is a short hit of the normal design, and if it is in the range of "6", the long time of the normal design (long ), and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 205 to 239", it is determined to be out of the normal pattern (see FIG. 222(c)).

In this control example, during the special symbol jackpot, the normal symbol lottery is less likely to win. This is because during the special symbol jackpot (that is, during the special game state), the player hits the ball to win the specific winning hole 65a. This is to prevent the balls that have been opened and are intended to enter the specific winning hole 65a from entering the second winning hole 640 as much as possible. In addition, since the specific winning hole 65a is provided immediately below the second winning hole 640, even if the balls are prevented from entering the second winning hole 640 during the special symbol jackpot, the second winning hole 65a A lot of balls enter the 640. As a result, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is shifting to the special game state, the number of reserved balls for the second winning hole 640 becomes maximum (4 times).

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the normal symbol obtained by the process of S703 or S704 is the normal symbol win (S705), and when it is determined that the normal symbol win is determined (S705: Yes) , It is determined whether the winning type of the normal symbol is a long time (S706). When it is determined that the winning type of the normal symbol is long-time (S706: Yes), the display mode for long-time winning is set (S707). In the process of S707, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "O" is set to light up as the stop symbol (second symbol). Next, set the variation pattern command per normal pattern length (S708), set the opening time and the number of times of the first electric accessory 640 to 2 seconds × 2 times (S709), and proceed to the process of S715.

On the other hand, in the process of S706, when it is determined that the winning type of the normal symbol is the normal (short) winning (S706: No), the display mode for the normal (short) winning is set (S710). Next, a variation pattern command per normal figure is set (S711), the opening period of the first electric accessory 640 associated with the second winning opening 640 is set to 0.2 seconds, and the number of openings is set to 1 set (S712) and proceed to the processing of S715.

In the process of S705, when it is determined that the symbol is out of the normal pattern (S705: No), the display mode at the time of out is set (S713). In the process of S713, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "x" is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of deviation is completed, the normal pattern deviation variation pattern command is set (S714), and the process proceeds to S715.

In the process of S715, it is determined whether or not the current is in the probability variation (whether or not it is a high probability state of normal symbols) (S715), and if it is during probability variation (high probability state of normal symbols) (S715: Yes) , the variation time of the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is set to 3 seconds (S716), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S715, if it is not during probability variation (high probability state of normal symbol), that is, if it is a low probability state of normal symbol (S715: No), the variation time of the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 The time is set to 30 seconds (S717), and the process ends. In this way, except during the special symbol jackpot, in the normal symbol high-probability state, compared to the normal symbol low-probability state, the variable display time is very short from "30 seconds to 3 seconds", and furthermore. , the release period of the second prize winning port 640 becomes very long as “0.2 seconds×1 time→2 seconds×2 times”, so that the ball can easily enter the second prize winning port 640.例文帳に追加

In this control example, the opening time and the number of times of opening per long time are the same operation in the normal state and the latent state, but it is not limited to this, and it is configured to set different opening time and number of times of opening. good too. In addition, in this control example, it is configured to set the contents of the opening operation of the first electric accessory 640a based on the game state set at the start of fluctuation of the normal symbols (at the time of lottery). Without limitation, for example, at the time of start of variation of normal symbols (at the time of lottery), the determination of whether or not the normal symbols are set is executed based on the game state, and the game at the time when the variation time of the normal symbols that have been elected has passed. The content of the opening operation of the first electric accessory 640a may be set based on the state. That is, in this control example, since the game state is configured to be variably set based on the lottery of the special symbols, the game state may be variably set while the normal symbols are fluctuating. In such a case, if the contents of the opening operation of the first electric accessory 640a are set based on the game state set at the start of the variation of the symbols (at the time of the lottery), for example, during the jackpot game or normal There is a problem that the first electric accessory 640a is open for a long time during the high probability state of the pattern. On the other hand, by configuring so as to set the contents of the opening operation of the first electric role product 640a based on the game state at the time when the fluctuation time of the winning normal symbol has passed, the first electric role product 640a is set. can be executed with contents suitable for the set game state.

Next, the through gate passing process (S107) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 248 is a flow chart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through gate passage processing (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 238), and the first through gate 66 (the through gate arranged in the right area of the game board 13) or the through gate 67 (Refer to FIG. 207) is a process for determining whether or not the ball has passed, and if the ball has passed, the value indicated by the normal winning random number counter C4 is acquired and retained. In the following description, both the first through gate 66 and the through gate 67 are simply referred to as the through gate 67. FIG.

In the through gate passage processing, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (S801). Here, passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the first through gate 66 (S801: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times of suspension of variable display in normal symbols M) is obtained (S802). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (S803).

The ball has not passed through the through gate 67 (S801: No), or even if the ball has passed through the through gate 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S803 : No), the process proceeds to S806. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the through gate 67 (S801: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S803: Yes), the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f 1 is added to the value (M) (S804). Then, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is set to the first of the free reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area) of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. It stores it in the area (S805), and shifts to the processing of S806. In the process of S805, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first reserved area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area. Next, normal map prefetching processing (S806) is executed, and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 249, general map prefetching processing will be described (S806). FIG. 249 is a flow chart showing the contents of this normal map prefetching process (S806). In normal figure prefetching processing (S806), first, preliminary determination is performed based on the value of normal per random number counter C4 newly stored in normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203c (S901). Specifically, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 newly stored in the process of S805 is compared with the random value stored in the normal hit random number table 202c.

Next, based on the result of the preliminary determination, the result of prior determination of winning and the result of prior determination of variation time are acquired (S902). Here, the processing contents of S902 will be described in detail. In this control example, in the general pattern pre-reading process, in addition to the determination of whether the normal pattern is correct, it is configured to determine the fluctuation time (3 seconds or 30 seconds) of the normal pattern in advance. Specifically, the game state set at the time when the corresponding normal symbol starts to change is predicted, and the normal symbol change time based on the prediction result is determined in advance. After that, set a normal pattern winning information command containing information for indicating the pre-determination result of the normal symbol and the result of the fluctuation time pre-determination (S903), and finish this process. It should be noted that, in this control example, by the normal pattern prefetching process (see S806 in FIG. 249) executed by the main controller 110, it is configured to determine (determine) in advance whether or not the normal pattern is appropriate or not, and the fluctuation time. , Without being limited to this, the information for indicating the value of the normal per random number counter C4 newly stored in the processing of S805 is configured to be set as a normal figure winning information command, and based on the command Sound lamp control device 113 side may be configured so as to determine (determine) in advance whether or not the normal symbol is appropriate or not, and the variation time.

Next, the other winning process (S109) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 250 is a flow chart showing the details of the other winning process (S109). This other prize winning process (S109) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 238) to determine whether or not a ball enters the specific winning hole 65a and the specific out hole. , is the process for setting the command.

In the other winning process (S109), first, it is determined whether or not there is a winning in the specific winning opening 65a (S1001). When it is determined that there is a winning in the specific winning opening 65a (S1001: Yes), a specific winning command is set, and the process proceeds to S1003. On the other hand, in the process of S1001, when it is determined that there is a winning in the specific winning slot (S1001: No), the process of S1002 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1003.

After executing the process of S1001 or S1002, it is determined whether or not there is a ball entering the specific out hole (S1003). If it is determined that the ball has entered the specific out hole (S1003: Yes), a specific out ball entry command is set (S1004), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1003, when it is determined that the ball has not entered the specific out hole (S1003: No), the process of S1004 is skipped and the process ends. In this way, by setting a command for indicating that a ball has won a prize (entered a ball) in the specific general winning hole 163 or the specific out hole 166, and outputting the command to the sound lamp control device 113. , an effect matching the inflow of the ball to the pseudo attacker 165 (see FIG. 208) (pseudo winning) can be executed.

Next, NMI interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 251 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. FIG. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 . That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 . Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power interruption occurrence information (S1101), and ends the NMI interruption processing. do.

The above NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout launch control device 111 in the same manner, and information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 213 by such NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, referring to FIG. 252, startup processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 when main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 252 is a flow chart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S1201). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a wait process (one second in this embodiment) is executed. (S1202). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1203).

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1204), and if it is turned on (S1204: Yes), the process proceeds to S1213. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1204: No), it is further determined whether or not power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1205), and if not stored (S1205: No). , there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown did not end normally.

If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1205: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1206). If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved at the time of power shutdown, the backed-up data is destroyed. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S1315 in FIG. Instead of the RAM judgment value, the effectiveness of the backup may be judged based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the processing of S1213, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111, which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1213). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and becomes ready to start the game ball payout control. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing of RAM 203 (S1214, S1215).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts operating. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S1214, S1215) is executed. Similarly, when power failure occurrence information is not set, or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S1214, S1215) is executed. . In the RAM initialization process (S1214, S1215), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1214), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1215). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S1211.

On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S1204: No), power failure occurrence information is stored (S1205: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S1207: Yes), a state command is transmitted based on the long time open flag 203i (S1208). Next, while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203, the power failure occurrence information is cleared (S1209). Next, the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) transmits a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning to the game state at the time of drive power interruption (S1210), and shifts to the processing of S1211. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the game ball payout control can be started while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213 .

In the processing of S1211, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the execution of various effects is permitted to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. FIG. Next, the interrupt is permitted (S1212), and the process proceeds to main processing, which will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 253, main processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 after the start-up processing described above will be described. FIG. 253 is a flow chart showing this main process. Main processing of the game is executed in this main processing. As an overview, each process of S1301 to S1308 is executed as a periodical process with a period of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S1311 and S1312 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 238), output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is transferred to each sub-side control device (peripheral (S1301). Specifically, it determines whether or not there is winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 238). Send a prize ball command to In addition, it transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 239) and the start winning process (see FIG. 244). In addition, it transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 the winning command set in the starting winning process (see FIG. 244) and the look-ahead process (see FIG. 245). Furthermore, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, etc. necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 .

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1302). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is finished, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1303), and then, in the case of the special symbol jackpot state, the execution of the jackpot production and the variable A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1304). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning port 65a or the third third winning port 82 is opened according to the contents of the jackpot game (jackpot type) to be executed, and the maximum opening time of the specific winning port 65a and the third winning port 82 has passed, or a specified number of balls have entered the specific winning hole 65a and the third winning hole 82.例文帳に追加Then, when any one of these conditions is established, the specific winning opening 65a and the third winning opening 82 are closed. The specific winning port 65a and the third winning port 82 are repeatedly opened and closed for a predetermined number of rounds. In this control example, the jackpot control process (S1304) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process. In addition, in this control example, the jackpot game contents corresponding to the jackpot type (type of winning opening to be opened, opening time, number of openings (number of rounds), opening period, interval period, ending period) are set in advance as a jackpot scenario. A stored jackpot scenario corresponding to the jackpot type set when the jackpot is won is read, and a jackpot game based on the read jackpot scenario is executed.

Next, in the case of a special symbol small winning state, a small winning effect is executed, and a small winning control process for opening or closing the third winning opening 82 of the third electric role is executed (S1305). In the jackpot control process, the third prize winning port 82 is opened for each round in the small winning state, and whether the maximum opening time of the third prize winning port 82 has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have entered the third prize winning port 82 is determined. judge. Then, when any one of these conditions is established, the third winning opening 82 is closed. In addition, in this embodiment, although the small hit control process (S1305) is performed in the main process, it may be performed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, an electric role product opening/closing process for controlling the opening/closing of the first electric role product 640a associated with the second winning hole 640 is executed (S1306). In the electric accessary product opening/closing process, when the opening/closing control start of the first electric accessary product 640a is set by the processing of S612 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 246), the opening/closing control of the first electric accessary product 640a is started. . The opening/closing control of the first electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S709 or S712 of FIG. 247 in the normal symbol variation start processing are completed.

Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1307). In the first symbol display update process, the process of S257 or S259 of the special symbol 2 fluctuation start process (see FIG. 240) or the process of S277 or S279 of the special symbol 1 fluctuation start process (see FIG. 241) When the variation pattern is set, the first symbol display device 37 starts the variation display according to the variation pattern. In this embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first pattern display device 37, from the start of the variation until the variation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is extinguished. At the same time, the green LED is lit, and if the green LED is lit, the green LED is extinguished and the blue LED is lit, and if the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is extinguished. At the same time, the red LED is lit.

Note that the main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED change the lighting color of That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process, the process of S257 or S259 of the special symbol 2 fluctuation start process (see FIG. 240), or the process of S277 or S279 of the special symbol 1 fluctuation start process (see FIG. 241) When the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern set by the process ends, the fluctuation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is terminated, and the special symbol 2 fluctuation start process (see FIG. 208) S256 processing or In the display mode set by the process of S258 or the process of S276 or the process of S278 of the special symbol 1 fluctuation start process (see FIG. 241), the stop symbol (first symbol) is stopped and displayed on the first symbol display device 37. (lit display).

Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1308). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S716 or the process of S717 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 247), the variation display is performed on the second symbol display device 83. Start. As a result, the second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which the second symbol "O" symbol and the "X" symbol are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S610 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 246), it is executed in the second symbol display device 83. 247), and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of S707 or the process of S710 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 247). (lit display).

After that, it is determined whether power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1309). SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not it is time to execute the next main process, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the main process (S1310). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1310: Yes), the process proceeds to S1301, and the above-described processes after S1301 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not passed since the start of the main process this time (S1310: No), the initial The value random number counter CINI1, normal initial value random number counter CINI2, and fluctuation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1311, S1312).

First, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1311). Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum values (299 and 239 in this embodiment). Then, the updated values of the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the change type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S1302 (S1312).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1301 to S1308 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, the special winning random number counter C1 , the initial value of the normal winning random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

In addition, in the process of S1309, if the RAM 203 stores power failure occurrence information (S1309: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 40 has been executed, so the power-off process after S1313 is executed. First, to prohibit the occurrence of each interrupt processing (S1313), to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as payout control device 111 and sound lamp control device 113) power off command indicating that the power has been cut off and transmit (S1314). Then, a RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1315), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1316), and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area backed up in the RAM 203 .

It should be noted that the process of S1309 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the game state change performed in S1301 to S1308, or at the time of the end of one cycle of the processes of S1311 and S1312 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, information on the occurrence of power failure is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. It can start from the processing of S1301. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1301, as in the case of initialization in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the process at power-off, the stack pointer is By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), the processing can be started from S1301. Therefore, the control load on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S1304) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 254 is a flow chart showing this jackpot control process (S1304). This jackpot control process (S1304) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 253), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot state with special symbols, execution of various effects according to the jackpot, specific winning opening ( Large opening) 65a, or processing for opening or closing the third winning opening 82. Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, the winning openings (specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a or third winning opening 82) that are opened or closed in the jackpot control process (S1304 in FIG. 254) are generally referred to as specific winning openings (large open port) 65a.

In the jackpot control process (S1304), first, it is determined whether or not a jackpot scenario is set (S1401). If it is determined that the jackpot scenario is not set (S1401: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S1401, if it is determined that the jackpot scenario is set (S1401: Yes), the jackpot scenario is updated (S1402), and it is determined whether it is time to start the opening of the jackpot scenario (S1403). ). More specifically, in the process of S1402, 1 is added to the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter (not shown), and in the process of S1403, the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter (not shown) is the opening start of the jackpot scenario. Determine whether the value corresponds to

In the processing of S1403, if it is determined that it is time to start the opening of the jackpot scenario (S1403: Yes), the jackpot opening command is set (S1404), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no timing to start the opening of the jackpot scenario (S1403: No), then it is determined whether it is time to start a new round of the jackpot scenario (S1405).

In the processing of S1405, if it is determined that it is time to start a new round of the jackpot scenario (S1405: Yes), the opening of the specific winning opening 65a during the jackpot is set (S1406), and the number of rounds to newly start is set. A command for the number of rounds to indicate is set (S1407), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1405, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round of the jackpot scenario (S1405: No), then the round end condition of the round currently being executed (closure condition of the large opening) is established (S1408). Here, in this control example, when a predetermined number of balls (for example, 5) are won in total during one round game (while the specific winning opening 65a is open), or the specific winning opening 65a is determined to have met the round end condition when a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed. When it is determined that the round end condition of the specific winning opening 65a is satisfied (S1408: Yes), the processing of S1409 sets the specific winning opening 65a to be closed (the opening/closing plate 65f1 of the specific winning opening 65a The solenoid is turned off so as to be in a closed state), and the process ends. Incidentally, the determination process from S1405 to S1409 described above is repeatedly executed for the number of rounds of the big win set in the big win scenario.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1408 that the round end condition of the round currently being executed is not met (S1408: No), then it is determined whether it is time to start the ending effect (S1410). , If it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1410: Yes), the ending command for big win is set (S1411), and this process is finished. The ending command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output processing (S1301) of the main processing (see FIG. 253). It is sent towards device 113 . Upon receiving the ending command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the third symbol display device 81 starts an ending effect indicating the end of the big win.

On the other hand, in the process of S1410, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1410: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the jackpot (S1412). Here, the end timing of the jackpot indicates a case where the execution period of the ending effect has passed. In the processing of S1412, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the jackpot (S1412: Yes), based on the jackpot type of this time, set the value of the counter 203j during the time saving (S1413), based on the jackpot type, probability variable The value of the counter 203m is set (S1414), the jackpot middle flag 203n is set to OFF (S1415), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S1412, when it is determined that it is not the time to end the jackpot (S1412: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 255, the small hit control process (S1305), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 253) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 255 is a flow chart showing the contents of this small winning control process (S1305).

In the small winning control process (S1305), first, it is determined whether or not a small winning scenario is set (S1501). Specifically, it is determined whether or not a small winning scenario has been set by the process of S302 of the small winning setting process (see FIG. 242). In the process of S1501, if the small winning scenario is not set (S1501: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1501, if a small winning scenario is set (S1501: Yes), the small winning scenario is updated (S1502), and it is determined whether it is the opening start timing of the small winning scenario (S1503). More specifically, in the processing of S1502, 1 is added to the counter value of the small winning scenario counter (not shown), and in the processing of S1503, the counter value of the small winning scenario counter (not shown) is a small winning scenario It is determined whether the value corresponds to the opening start of .

In the processing of S1503, if it is determined that it is time to start the opening of the small winning scenario (S1503: Yes), the small winning opening command is set (S1504), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the timing for starting the opening of the small winning scenario (S1503: No), then it is determined whether it is the timing for starting the round of the small winning scenario (S1505).

In the processing of S1505, when it is determined that it is time to start the round of the small winning scenario (S1505: Yes), the opening of the third winning opening 82 is set (S1506), and then the round start command is set (S1507). ), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the time to start the round of the small winning scenario (S1505: No), then it is determined whether the round end condition of the currently executed round is met (S1508). Here, in this control example, when a predetermined number of balls (for example, 5) are won in total while the third prize winning port 82 is open, or the opening period of the third prize winning port 82 is a predetermined time. If the time has elapsed, it is determined that the round end condition has been met.

In the processing of S1508, when it is determined that the round end condition of the round currently being executed is satisfied (S1508: Yes), the processing of S1509 is set so that the third winning port 82 is closed. End the process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the round end condition of the third winning hole 82 is not satisfied (S1508: No), it is determined whether it is time to start the ending effect (S1510).

In the process of S1510, when it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect (S1510: Yes), the small winning ending command is set (S1511), and the process ends. The ending command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output processing (S1301) of the main processing (see FIG. 253). It is sent towards device 113 . Upon receiving the ending command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the third symbol display device 81 starts an ending effect indicating the end of the small win.

On the other hand, in the process of S1510, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1510: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the small hit (S1512). Here, the end timing of the small hit indicates the case where the execution period of the ending effect has passed.

In the process of S1512, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the small hit (S1512: Yes), the flag 203g during the small hit is set to OFF (S1513), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is not the end timing of the small hit (S1513: No), this process is terminated.

<Control Processing Executed by Audio Ramp Control Device 113>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 256 to 273, each control process executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into startup processing that is activated upon power-on and main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

First, referring to FIG. 256, start-up processing executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 256 is a flow chart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S2001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is ON, the power-off processing of S2119 (see FIG. ) is started during execution (S2002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 257, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main controller 110 (see S2116 in FIG. 257), it executes power-off processing in S2119. Before the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing in S2119 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing in-progress flag.

If the power-off processing flag is off (S2002: No), the startup process this time was started after the power was completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurred and the power was shut off in S2119. Either it was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started when only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise (without receiving a power off command from the main controller 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2003).

Destruction of data in the RAM 223 is confirmed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S2006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed. If data destruction of RAM223 is confirmed (S2003: Yes), it will transfer to S2004 and will start initialization of RAM223. On the other hand, if destruction of data in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S2003: No), the process proceeds to S2008.

It should be noted that if the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power cut). ), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S2004. On the other hand, whether the current start-up processing was started after a momentary power failure occurred and after the execution of the power-off processing in S2118 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like. If the operation is started after the above, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S2003: No), and the process proceeds to S2208.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S2002: Yes), the startup process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during execution of the power-off process in S2119, the sound lamp control device 113 It is started by resetting the MPU 221 of . In such a case, the memory state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct because the power-off process is in progress. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process moves to S2004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the processing of S2004, the storage area of the entire range of RAM 223 is checked (S2004). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, read for each byte to confirm whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined that the data is normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". All storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0 by this read/write check of the RAM 223 .

If the read/write check is normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S2005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S2006). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S2005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S2007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. Abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34 . In addition, it is possible to output a sound by the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or to transmit an error command to the display control device 114 and display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. can be

In the process of S2008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S2008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S2119 is executed (see S2118 in FIG. 257). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off processing of S2119 is executed, the reason why the process of S2008 is reached with the power-off flag turned on is that the startup processing this time is instantaneous. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S2119 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S2008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S2009), and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S2010), an interrupt Permission is set (S2011), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110 .

On the other hand, the process of S2008 is reached with the power-off flag turned off because the current start-up process was started after the power supply was completely shut off, for example. This is the case where the processing has been reached, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S2008: No), S2009, which is the clearing process of the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S2010, and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S2010), interrupt permission is set (S2011), and the process proceeds to the main process. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not a status command has been received from main controller 110 (S2012). This status command is a command set in the process of S1208 of the start-up process (see FIG. 252) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. FIG. In the process of S2012, if it is determined that a status command has been received (S2012: Yes), information indicating the received status command is set in the status setting area 223g, and this process ends (S2013).

In this way, when the power is turned on, the main control unit 110 outputs a command that can determine whether or not the normal symbol is in the long-term hit state, so that the sound lamp control unit 113 side can also determine the state. can be done.

The reason why the clearing process of S2009 is skipped is that when the process of S2008 is reached from S2004 via the process of S2006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S2004, When only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and start-up processing is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the audio lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, referring to FIG. 257, main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after startup processing of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 257 is a flow chart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 ms or more has passed since the main process was started or after the current process of S2101 was executed (S2101). If not (S2101: No), the process proceeds to S2114 without performing the processes of S2102 to S2113. In the process of S2101, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has elapsed because S2102 to S2113 are mainly processes related to display (effect), and there is no need to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). , the command determination processing in S2114, the variable display setting processing in S2115, and the processing for updating various counter values (not shown) are preferably executed in short cycles. That is, by executing the process of S2114 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the command transmitted from the main controller 110 from being missed in reception, and by executing the process of S2115 in a short cycle, the command is received by the command determination process. Based on the command, it is possible to make settings related to variable effects without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S2101 (S2101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S2103 to S2115 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2102 ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S2108 described later (S2103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S2104). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, it is notified that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). will be Also, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S2105 without notifying by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S2105, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the pending number display update process is executed (S2106). In the customer waiting effect process, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player for a predetermined period of time, a setting such as switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to a title screen is performed, and the setting is used as a command for display control. It is sent to device 114 . In the pending number display update process, a process of lighting a pending lamp (not shown) according to the values of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 223a, the special symbol 2 pending ball number counter 223b, and the value of the normal pending ball number counter 223c. is done.

After that, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S2107). In this frame button input monitoring and effect processing, input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed is monitored in order to enhance the effect of the effect, and the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed is dealt with. This is a process of setting to perform production. Details of the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S2107) will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the frame button input monitoring/effect processing is completed, the lamp editing processing is executed (S2108), and then the sound editing/output processing is executed (S2109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81 . In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S2109, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S2110), and the process proceeds to S2111. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110, the time required for the variation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 and the time synchronized therewith are set. The lamp editing process of S2108 is executed based on the time set in this liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing/output processing of S2109 is also executed at the time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The liquid crystal effect execution management process (S2110) described above will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

After the process of S2110 is completed, an operation effect management process is executed (S2111). This operation effect management processing (S2111) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. A process for changing is executed.

After executing the operation effect management process (S2111), the action control process (S2112) is executed. In this operation control process (S2112), the operation control of various performance movable accessories provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example is executed. The operation control of the various performance movable accessories is a performance that is set based on the results of the lottery of special symbols, the results of the lottery of normal symbols, the operation results of the operation means (frame button 22), the game results during the jackpot game, and the like. This is executed in accordance with the content of the action scenario of the movable accessory for use, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

After the process of S2112 is finished, the counter update process is executed (S2113). In this counter update process (S2113), a process for updating the value of a counter (timer) for timing information, for example, the operation effective timer 223n, which is necessary when executing various effects is executed.

After the processing of S2113 is completed, next command determination processing is executed (S2114). Details of this command determination process (S2114) will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the command determination process (S2114), the variable display setting process is executed (S2115). In the variable display setting process, a variable pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variable pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to execute the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81 . As a result, the command is sent to display controller 114 . The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the process of S2115 is finished, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S2116). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110 . If power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S2116 (S2116: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S2118), and the power-off processing is executed (S2119). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned off (S2120), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, interrupt processing is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. Also, the memory of information on occurrence of power failure is erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S2116 (S2116: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S2117), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S2117: No), the process returns to S2101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2117: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes. Here, since the main processing is not executed when it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinitely looped, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change after that. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, the player can call the hall clerk or the like and ask them to repair the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the RAM destruction may be notified by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 .

Next, the command determination processing (S2114) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 258 is a flow chart showing this command determination process (S2114). This command determination process (S2114) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 257) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp controller 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main controller 110. .

In the command determination process (S2114: FIG. 258), first, out of the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read out from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and It is determined whether or not a variation pattern command has been received (S2201). When a variation pattern command is received (S2201: Yes), variation pattern reception processing is executed (S2202), and this processing ends. Details of the variation pattern reception process (S2202) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S2201, when the variation pattern command is not received (S2201: No), it is determined whether or not the stop type command is received (S2203). When the stop type command is received (S2203: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S2204), the stop type is extracted from the received command (S2205), and this process is finished. .

In the processing of S2203, if the stop type command is not received (S2203: No), it is determined whether or not the pending ball count command is received (S2206). When the reserved ball number command is received (S2206: Yes), the reserved ball number is extracted from the received command, and the corresponding special symbol reserved ball number counter (special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a, special symbol 2 reserved ball The number is stored in the number counter 223b) (S2207), and this processing is terminated. Here, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a, and the number of reserved balls corresponding to the second special symbol is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b. Stored. Further, when receiving a reserved ball number command indicating the number of reserved balls of normal symbols, information for indicating the number of reserved balls is stored in the normal reserved ball number counter 223c. In this control example, since information indicating the current number of reserved balls is included in the number of reserved balls command sent from the main controller 110, for example, due to power failure, etc. Even if the value is erased, the value of each pending ball number counter can be restored to an appropriate value by receiving the pending ball number command to be transmitted next. In this case, in the process of transmitting the state command (see S1208 in FIG. 252) in the start-up process of main controller 110 (see FIG. 252), it is preferable to transmit each pending pitch command.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2206, if the command for the number of pending balls has not been received (S2206: No), it is determined whether or not the winning-related command has been received (S2208). If a winning-related command has been received (S2208: Yes), a winning-information related process is started (S2209), and this process ends. Details of the winning information related processing (S2209) will be described later with reference to FIG. Based on the information command), the winning information included in the winning information command is pre-determined, the process of executing the effect (prefetch effect) based on the result of the pre-determination, and the process of temporarily storing the result of the pre-determination processing is executed.

In the process of S2208, if no winning-related command has been received (S2208: No), then it is determined whether or not a winning-related command has been received (S2210), and if it is determined that it has been received (S2210: Yes) , hit-related processing is executed (S2211), and this processing ends. This hit-related processing (S2211) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the processing of S2210, if it is determined that the hit-related command has not been received (S2210: No), it is determined whether or not the stop command has been received (S2212). If it is determined that a stop command has been received (S2212: Yes), stop processing is executed (S2213), and this processing ends. This stop processing (S2213) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2212 that the stop command has not been received (S2212: No), this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 259, the details of the variation pattern reception process (S2202), which is one process in the command determination process (S2114: FIG. 258), will be described. FIG. 259 is a flow chart showing this variation pattern reception process. In this variation pattern reception process (S2202), based on the received variation pattern command, the variation pattern (variation effect) of the special symbol is set using the variation pattern selection table 222a. Further, when a variation pattern command indicating the result of the normal symbol lottery is received, it is determined whether or not the variation performance of the large 3 symbols can be executed based on the lottery result of the normal symbol.

In the variation pattern reception process (S2202: Figure 259), first, the variation pattern command received this time is for special figures (variation pattern command for special symbols) is determined (S2301), variation pattern command for special figures, That is, when it is determined that the command indicates a special pattern variation pattern (S2301: Yes), the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2302), and the variation pattern selection table is based on the received command. 222a is used to extract a variation pattern (S2303), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2301, if it is determined that the variation pattern command received this time is not for special figures, that is, if it is determined that the variation pattern command for normal figure is received (S2301: No), Next, It is determined whether the variation pattern command for the general pattern received this time is a variation pattern command indicating that the per general pattern length (per long open) was won (S2304). In the processing of S2304, when it is determined that the variation pattern command indicating that the winning per normal pattern length (per long open) is received (S2304: Yes), then the normal pattern effect prohibition flag 223u is set to ON. (S2305), and if it is determined that it is not set to ON (S2305: No), the normal pattern effect possible flag 223t is set to ON, and this processing ends.

In the processing of S2304, when it is determined that a command other than the variation pattern command indicating that the winning per normal pattern length (per long open) is received (S2304: No), or in the processing of S2305, the normal pattern production is prohibited When it is determined that the flag 223u is set to ON (S2305: Yes), this process is terminated without setting the normal pattern effect possible flag 223t to ON. By setting the normal pattern effect possible flag 223t to ON in this process, the third pattern variation effect corresponding to the lottery result of the special pattern being executed is changed to the third pattern corresponding to the lottery result of the normal pattern (normal pattern). It becomes possible to determine that one condition for switching to a symbol variation effect (charge effect) is established. Although omitted in FIG. 259, when the variation pattern command for the general pattern is received, the variation for the general pattern for displaying in the general pattern display area Dm2 of the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81 A pattern is extracted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 260, winning information related processing (S2209), which is part of the command determination processing (S2114: see FIG. 258) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 260 is a flow chart showing this winning information related process (S2209). This winning information related process (S2209) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 258) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the winning information related process (S2209), it is determined whether the received winning information command is a command (winning information command for special figures) indicating winning information for special symbols (S2401), and the winning information command for special figures (S2401: Yes), the winning information included in the received winning information command is read out (S2402), and the win/loss determination result included in the read winning information and the acquired value of the pending rank counter 223p1 are obtained. is used to select a pending rank based on the pending rank selection table 222b (S2403). Although detailed description is omitted, in this control example, when the process of S2402 is executed, the counter update process (see S2113 in FIG. 257) executed in the main process (see FIG. 257) of the sound lamp control device 113 ) is configured to acquire the value of the pending rank counter 223p1 that is updated. By configuring in this way, various pending ranks can be selected according to the value of the pending rank counter 223p1 at the timing when it is determined that the winning information command has been received, so that various effects are provided to the player. be able to.

Then, the pending rank selected in the process of S2403 is stored in the location corresponding to the winning information command received this time in the pending effect information storage area 223m (S2404). After that, a reservation mode selection process (S2405) and a treasure box mode selection process (S2406) are executed. Here, the pending mode selection process (S2405) executes a process for setting a look-ahead effect (suspended effect) that changes the display mode of the corresponding pending symbol based on the winning information read this time. A detailed description will be given later with reference to FIG. In addition, the treasure box mode selection process (S2406) executes processing for setting a look-ahead effect (treasure box effect) that changes the display mode of the treasure box accessory 750 based on the winning information read this time. A detailed description will be given later with reference to FIG.

After the processing of S2406 is completed, next, it is determined whether or not winning information (information indicating a big win or information indicating a small win) is included in the winning information read this time (S2407), and it is determined that winning information is included. If so (S2407: Yes), the normal pattern effect prohibition flag 223u is set to ON (S2408), the received prize information is stored in the corresponding position in the prize information storage area 223f (S2409), and this processing ends. That is, in this control example, if there is information indicating a win (big win, small win) in the reserved special symbols stored, that is, if a winning game will be executed soon, based on the lottery result of the special symbols The variable performance is configured so as not to be switched to the variable performance based on the lottery result of normal symbols. Thereby, for example, it is possible to suppress (prohibit) the execution of the variable performance based on the lottery result of the normal symbols in the state where the advance notice performance (forecast performance) suggesting the jackpot winning of the special symbols is being executed. . Therefore, it is possible to suppress the execution of an effect that is difficult for the player to understand (the effect in which the effects executed based on different lottery results are mixed), so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced. It should be noted that it is sufficient if it is possible to suppress the execution of an effect that is difficult for the player to understand. , It may be configured to set the general pattern effect prohibition flag 223u to ON.

On the other hand, in the process of S2401, if it is determined that the winning information command received this time is for normal design (general design) (S2401: No), the process of S2402 to S2408 is skipped and the process ends. Although detailed description is omitted, in the winning information related process (S2209), when the winning information command for the general figure is received, whether the information is included in the received winning information command, And, if the winning information is included, whether or not the winning information for executing the long open winning game is included, and furthermore, it is configured to determine the normal pattern fluctuation time, and the determination It is configured to store the result in the normal drawing area of the prize winning information storage area 223f.

As a result, it is possible to determine in advance how many seconds the long open per game will be executed due to the normal pattern, so the lottery result of the normal pattern as well as the special pattern is straddled over a plurality of normal pattern fluctuations. It is possible to execute an effect that suggests (normal figure look-ahead effect). In addition, since it is also possible to determine whether or not a long open winning game is executed during the special symbol fluctuation period being executed, for example, during the deviation fluctuation of the special symbol, the production based on the normal pattern fluctuation is interrupted. is also possible.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 in which a plurality of different symbol lotteries (a special symbol lottery and a normal symbol lottery) are executed in parallel, the variation is based on the symbol variation on the side of the lottery result that is advantageous to the player. Since the production (variation production executed by the third symbol display device 81) can be executed, the interest in the game can be improved. In addition, since it is possible to suppress the execution of variable effects based on the lottery result (loss), which is disadvantageous to the player, it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play.

Next, with reference to FIG. 261, the content of the pending mode selection process (S2405) executed in the winning information related process (see FIG. 260) will be described. FIG. 261 is a flow chart showing the contents of the holding mode selection process (S2405). In this pending mode selection process (S2405), a process for setting a pending effect, which is an effect for varying the display mode of the pending symbol based on the special symbol winning information received this time, is executed.

When the suspension mode selection process (S2405) is executed, first, it is determined whether the suspension effect flag 223q is set to ON (S2501), and when it is determined that the suspension effect flag 223q is not set to ON (S2501: No), that is, when it is determined that the pending effect is not currently set (executed), since it is possible to set a new pending effect, S2502 to set the pending effect The processing of S2506 is executed. On the other hand, in the process of S2501, if it is determined that the pending effect flag 223q is set to ON (S2501: Yes), since it is in a state in which it is not possible to set (execute) a new pending effect, This processing ends by skipping the processing of S2502 to S2506.

When the process of S2502 is executed, the pending rank stored in the pending effect information storage area 223m is read out (S2502), and the pending rank read out in the process of S2502 and the acquired value of the pending mode counter 223p2 are stored. is used to select a holding mode based on the holding mode selection table 222c (S2503).

Then, a display pending command corresponding to the selected pending mode is set (S2504), the selected pending mode is stored in the pending effect information storage area 223m (S2505), and a pending mode that changes the display mode of the pending pattern is selected. When it is set, the flag 223q during pending effect is set to ON (S2506), and this process is terminated.

As described above, in this control example, it is configured to be able to execute a pending effect for changing the display mode of the pending symbol when winning information is acquired. Further, by using the pending effect flag 223q, it is possible to suppress setting of the pending effect redundantly.

In addition, in this control example, while the pending effect is being executed (set), a new pending effect is not executed (set) based on the newly received winning command. ) are executed in duplicate, and an effect that is difficult for the player to understand is executed. 2) may be configured to overlap and execute the pending effect.

In addition, in this control example, when the pending effect flag 223q is not set to ON, the process of selecting the pending effect is always executed. A predetermined lottery is executed in the winning information related processing (see S2209 in FIG. 260) executed when the can be configured to By configuring the processing for setting the pending performance to be executed at random in this way, the pending performance is not executed for the pending symbols in which the pending performance is not executed, even though the pending mode selection processing is executed. It is possible to make it difficult to understand whether the holding mode selection process was not executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the variable performance of the special symbols corresponding to the pending symbols for which the pending performance was not executed.

Also, once the pending effect is executed, then a predetermined condition (for example, a condition that is established when the number of times of variation of the special symbol reaches 10 times, or a condition that is established when the time has passed 10 minutes) A determination means may be provided for determining whether or not the condition is satisfied, and the new holding mode selection process may not be executed until the determination means determines that the predetermined condition is satisfied. Thereby, it is possible to intentionally set a period during which the holding effect is not executed.

In addition, in this control example, in the case where the holding effect for changing the display mode of the holding pattern is selected in the holding mode selection process (when other than "-" is selected by the holding mode selection table 222c (see FIG. 228)) However, for example, even when the display mode of the pending pattern is not changed in the pending mode selection process, the pending effect flag 223q is set to ON. You can In this case, it is preferable to intentionally provide a period during which the suspension effect is not executed as described above. By configuring in this way, it is possible to more randomly set the period in which the display mode of the reserved pattern is not changed, and the production effect can be enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 262, the content of the pending mode selection process (S2405) executed in the winning information related process (see FIG. 260) will be described. FIG. 262 is a flow chart showing the contents of the treasure box mode selection process (S2406). In this treasure box mode selection process (S2406), processing for setting (executing) a treasure box effect (see FIG. 210(b)), which is an effect for changing the display mode of the treasure box accessory 750 based on the winning information received this time. is executed.

When the treasure box state selection process (S2406) is executed, first, it is determined whether the treasure box effecting flag 223r is set to ON (S2601). (S2601: No), that is, when it is determined that the treasure box effect has not been set (executed), it is possible to set a new treasure box effect. process. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2601 that the treasure box effect in progress flag 223r is set to ON (S2601: Yes), it is in a state in which a new treasure box effect cannot be set (executed). This processing ends by skipping the processing of S2602 to S2606.

When the process of S2602 is executed, the winning judgment result is read from the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223f (S2602), and then the pending mode change is read from the information stored in the pending effect information storing area 223m. Information indicating the presence or absence (information indicating whether or not it is a reserved design for executing a reserved effect) is read out (S2603). Then, based on the treasure chest mode selection table 222d using the result of the winning/failure determination read out in the process of S2602, the information indicating whether or not the reservation mode has been changed read out in the process of S2603, and the value of the treasure box mode counter 223p3 that has been acquired. The treasure box mode is selected (S2604).

Then, a lamp treasure box command corresponding to the selected treasure box mode is set (S2605), the selected treasure box mode is stored in the corresponding location in the pending effect information storage area 223m (S2606), and the display mode of the treasure box accessory 750 is changed. When the variable treasure box mode is selected, the treasure box effecting flag 223r is set to ON (S2607), and this process is terminated.

The display mode of the treasure box accessory 750 is variably controlled based on the lamp treasure box command set by the process of S2605. Note that the sound lamp control device 113 may have means for variably controlling the display mode of the treasure box accessory 750, or a control device different from the sound lamp control device 113 may be used. In addition, in this control example, in the treasure box mode selection process (see S2406 in FIG. 262), the display mode of the treasure box accessory 750 is selected, and the display mode of the treasure box accessory 750 is changed to the selected display mode. However, it is not limited to this, and in the treasure box mode selection process (see S2406 in FIG. 262), only the display mode of the changed treasure box accessory 750 is selected, and a specific variable display condition is established. In this case, a process of changing the display mode of the treasure box accessory 750 to the selected display mode may be executed. This makes it difficult for the player to understand which reserved pattern the display mode of the treasure box accessory 750 after the change corresponds to, and makes the player have expectations for all the reserved patterns. can be done.

As described above, in this control example, the treasure box mode selection process (S2406 in FIG. 262) is performed in the winning information related process (S2209 in FIG. ) is configured to run. In this treasure box mode selection process, when selecting a treasure box mode in which the display mode of the treasure box accessory 750 is changed, it is determined based on the determination result of whether or not the display mode of the target reserved symbol is variably displayed. It is configured to select the treasure box mode, and furthermore, in one winning information related process (S2209 in FIG. 260), after execution of the reservation mode selection process (S2405 in FIG. 261), the treasure box mode setting process (FIG. 261) S2406) of H.262 is configured to be executed. This makes it possible to reliably set an appropriate effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 263, the contents of the win-related processing (S2211 in FIG. 263) will be described. FIG. 263 is a flow chart showing the contents of the win-related process (S2211). This winning-related processing (S2211) is executed in the command determination processing (see S2114 in FIG. 258) of the sound lamp control device 113, and is related to winning (big win, small win) from the main controller 110. It is executed when a command is received.

In this control example, when a big win C is won by lottery of special symbols and when a small win is won, the third electric accessory 82a (see FIG. 207) provided in the left area of the game board 13 is opened. A winning game (left winning game) is executed, and when big wins A, B, D and E are won by lottery of special symbols, a variable winning device 65 provided in the right area of the game board 13 is opened. It is configured to execute a winning game (right winning game), and in the winning related process (S2211 in FIG. 263), a display command for displaying information on the winning game on the third symbol display device 81 is set. A process and a process for setting different winning effects according to the type of winning game are executed.

When the winning-related process (S2211 in FIG. 263) is executed, first, it is determined whether the command received this time is a command related to a big win C or a small win, that is, a command related to a left winning game (S2701 ). Here, when it is determined that the command is related to the big hit C or the small hit (S2701: Yes), the processing of S2703 to S2709 is executed to set various display contents regarding the left hitting game. On the other hand, if the command received this time is not a command related to the big win C or the small win, that is, if it is determined that it is a command related to the right winning game (S2701: No), various display contents related to the right winning game are displayed. In order to set, the right attacker jackpot related processing is executed (S2702), and this processing ends. The contents of the right attacker big hit related process (S2702) will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the process of S2703 is executed, it is determined whether the command received this time is a winning start command indicating the start of winning (S2703), and if it is determined to be a winning start command (S2703: Yes), the winning type A roulette effect (see FIG. 213) corresponding to is determined (S2704), a display command corresponding to the determined roulette effect is set (S2705), and this processing ends.

Here, the roulette effect described above with reference to FIG. That is, it is executed using the opening period (2 seconds) of the small winning game, the round game period (1.5 seconds), and the ending period (1.5 seconds). Also, when a jackpot (jackpot C) game is executed, 5 seconds after the jackpot game is started, that is, the opening period (2 seconds), a part of the first round round game period (from the start of the round game 3 seconds).

In this control example, the same winning operation is executed during the period in which the roulette effect is executed regardless of the lottery result of the special symbols. That is, the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot C has an opening period of 2 seconds, and as the first round game, the third electric accessory 82a is opened for 1.5 seconds after the start of the round game. A round game is set in which the third electric accessory 82a is opened for 28.5 seconds after a closing period of 3 seconds (a period of closing the third electric accessory 82a).

By configuring in this way, while the roulette effect is being executed (while the first half period of the small winning game or the big winning game corresponding to the big winning C is being executed), the content of the winning game being executed Based on, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether the currently executed winning game is a big winning game or a small winning game. Furthermore, as described above, as the first round game in the jackpot game, a closing period of 1.5 seconds is set after the execution period (5 seconds) of the roulette effect has passed. As a result, since the third electric accessory 82a is not released from the display of the performance result of the roulette performance until the player recognizes the performance result, the performance effect can be enhanced.

In this control example, as shown in FIG. 213, the player is notified of the type of winning game being executed by the roulette effect. It may be configured to execute a roulette effect (gasser roulette effect) in which the player is notified of a win type different from the game type. , It is preferable to display the effect result indicating the small winning game as the effect result of the gasser roulette effect. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect, thereby improving the interest in the game. In addition, in this control example, the same win operation is executed during the period (5 seconds) during which the roulette effect is executed regardless of the special symbol lottery result. Regardless, the period during which the roulette effect is executed may be shorter than the period during which the same winning action is executed. By configuring in this way, a player who does not know the effect result of the roulette effect is more likely than a player who understands the effect result of the roulette effect to determine whether the current winning action is a big winning game or a small winning game. Judgment time is delayed. Therefore, it is possible to make a player who wants to quickly determine the lottery result of the special symbols pay attention to the roulette performance. In addition, the lottery result notification effect (roulette effect (see FIG. 213)) for notifying the lottery result of the special symbol executed in this control example predicts the lottery result of this special symbol until the effect result is displayed. However, without being limited to this, as the lottery result notification performance progresses, the lottery result notification performance is configured to be changed to a suggestion mode in which the current lottery result can be easily discriminated. can be As a result, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the effect that is executed, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Returning to FIG. 263, the description continues. In the process of S2703, if it is determined that the command received this time is not a win start command (S2703: No), then it is determined whether the command received this time is a round number command (S2706), and the number of rounds is determined. If it is determined to be a command (S2706: Yes), the display round number command is set based on the round number indicated by the round number information included in the received round number command (S2707), and this process ends.

In the process of S2706, if it is determined that the command received this time is not the round number command (S2706: No), it is determined whether the command received this time is the ending command (S2708), and it is determined that it is the ending command. If so (S2708: Yes), a display ending command is set (S2709), and this process ends. Also. If it is determined in the process of S2708 that the ending command has not been received (S2708: No), this process ends.

Next, in the hit-related process (see S2701 in FIG. 263), it is executed when it is determined that the hit-related command received this time is a command related to the big hits A, B, D, E (S2701 in FIG. 263: No) The contents of the right attacker jackpot related processing (S2702) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 264 is a flow chart showing the contents of the right attacker jackpot related processing (S2702).

In this control example, when a jackpot game is executed in which the variable prize winning device 65 provided in the special prize winning device 550 in the right area of the game board 13 is opened, a pseudo jackpot effect using the pseudo attacker 165 is executed. (See FIG. 219). Then, in the right attacker jackpot related processing (S2702), the processing necessary for making the performance content of the pseudo jackpot presentation using the pseudo attacker 165 correspond to the actually executed jackpot game (right hit game) is executed.

When the right attacker jackpot related processing (S2702) is executed, first, it is determined whether the command received this time is a jackpot start command (S2801), and if it is determined to be a jackpot start command (S2801: Yes) , sets a jackpot start command for display (S2802), and terminates this process.

In the process of S2801, if it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received (S2801: No), then it is determined whether the command received this time is the number of rounds command (S2803). (S2803: Yes), a display round number command is set based on the number of rounds (S2804), and as a releasing operation for releasing the pseudo attacker 165, after receiving the round number command, 0. After 5 seconds, an opening operation for opening the pseudo attacker 165 is set (S2805), and this process is terminated. When the opening operation is set in the process of S2805, in the operation control process (see S2112) executed in the main process (see FIG. 257) of the sound lamp control device 113, a solenoid (not shown) for operating the pseudo attacker 165 is activated. ) is set to ON, and the pseudo attacker 165 is variably operated from a closed state in which it is difficult to enter a ball to an open state in which it is easy to enter a ball.

In this way, by configuring so that the opening operation of the pseudo attacker 165 is executed at the timing of receiving the round number command for indicating the start of a new round game from the main control device 110, the actual jackpot is realized. Since the game content can be made similar to the pseudo-jackpot presentation using the pseudo-attacker 165, the pseudo-jackpot presentation can be executed without making the player feel uncomfortable. In addition, the timing of opening the quasi-attacker 165 is set to 0.5 seconds (when the sphere that wins the sphere that wins the quasi-attacker 165 hits the quasi-attacker 165) with respect to the timing of opening the specific winning port 65a (timing of receiving the number-of-rounds command). By delaying the time required to reach the ball, the winning (ball winning) to the pseudo attacker 165 can be executed without making the player feel uncomfortable. In addition, the period for delaying the opening timing of the pseudo attacker 165 with respect to the opening timing of the actual attacker (specific winning hole 65a) is not limited to the period (0.5 seconds) set in this control example, and is 0.5 It may be delayed for a period longer than seconds, or the delay period may be set to 0 second (opening operation is performed at the same timing).

In the processing of S2803, if it is determined that the round number command has not been received (S2803: No), then it is determined whether or not the close command has been received (S2806), and if it is determined that the close command has been received (S2806: Yes), as the closing action of the pseudo attacker 165, the closing action of closing the pseudo attacker 165 at a timing delayed by 0.5 seconds with respect to the closing timing of the specific winning opening 65a, as in the case of setting the opening action. It sets (S2807), clears the information stored in the pseudo winning order storage area 223s (S2808), and terminates this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S2806, if it is determined that the close command has not been received (S2806: No), it is determined whether the ending command has been received (S2809), and if it is determined that the ending command has been received (S2809 : Yes), the ending command for display is set (S2810), and this processing ends. If it is determined in the process of S2809 that the ending command has not been received (S2809: No), then it is determined whether or not a winning-related command has been received (S2811).

Here, the winning-related commands are various commands output when a ball enters a winning hole in which a ball can win a prize (enter a ball) when the player plays a right-handed game during a jackpot game. Specifically, a specific prize winning command for indicating that a ball has entered the specific prize winning port 65a, a specific general prize winning command for indicating that a ball has won a prize in the specific general prize winning port 163, and a specific out port 166 Shows a specific out ball entry command to indicate that the ball has entered the ball.

Note that in this control example, whether or not a ball wins a prize (entering a prize) is determined for both a winning hole that gives a prize ball based on the entry of a ball and a ball entering hole (out hole) that does not give a prize ball. Although the determination is configured to be performed by the main controller 110, it is not limited to this. Also good.

In other words, in the case of a winning hole where a prize ball must be given when a ball wins (enters a prize), main controller 110 determines whether the ball wins the prize in order to execute the process for giving the prize ball. Since it has the structure which discriminate|determines, the structure can be diverted. On the other hand, since there is no particular processing to be executed by main controller 110 when a ball enters the specific out port 166, the configuration for determining that the ball has entered the specific out port 166 is the sound lamp control device. It may be provided on the 113 side. By configuring in this way, the load of the control processing of main controller 110 can be reduced.

In the process of S2811, if it is determined that the winning-related command has been received (S2811: Yes), a pseudo attacker effect process is executed (S2812), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2811, if it is determined that the winning-related command has not been received (S2811: No), this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 265, the contents of the pseudo attacker effect processing (S2812) will be described. FIG. 265 is a flow chart showing the details of the pseudo-attacker rendering process (S2812). In this pseudo-attacker effect processing (S2812), processing for setting various effects to be executed during the pseudo-jackpot effect for opening the pseudo-attacker 165 is performed.

When the pseudo attacker effect processing (S2812) is executed, first, whether the command received this time is a specific winning command, that is, whether the ball has entered the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 208) of the variable winning device 65. is received (S2901). Then, when it is determined that the specific winning command has been received (S2901: Yes), after 0.5 seconds, a pseudo winning effect is set (S2902).

When the pseudo winning effect is set in this process, the winning sound is output from the audio output device 226 based on the setting information, and the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 displays the ball to the specific winning opening 65a. Acquisition information 831 for indicating the number of prize balls given based on the winning is displayed. In addition, the variable prize winning device 65 is caused to execute a performance for indicating that the ball has won a prize for various performance devices provided in the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加That is, it takes from the timing when the ball enters the specific winning port 65a (see FIG. 208) until the ball that has won the specific winning port 65a flows down the specific ball throwing portion 690c and enters (reaches) the pseudo attacker 165. By executing the pseudo winning effect at the timing delayed by 0.5 seconds, which is the period, the variable winning device 65a is notified (effect) for indicating that the ball has won the prize, as if the ball had entered the pseudo attacker 165. It is possible to make the player think that the notification (effect) is executed based on what has been done. Therefore, it is possible to execute a jackpot game in which the pseudo attacker 165 is a real attacker (a prize-winning device that is opened as a jackpot game) without causing the player to feel uncomfortable. Furthermore, since the variable winning device 65 is configured so that the winning ball flows down a specific flow path (specific ball throwing portion 690c) and reaches the pseudo attacker 165, the delay set when executing the pseudo winning effect The time can be predefined. Therefore, there is no need to provide detection means (proximity switch, etc.) for detecting the entry of a ball on the pseudo attacker 165 side, and the cost of parts can be reduced.

When the processing of S2902 is finished, next, the timing for executing the pseudo winning effect set this time is stored in the pseudo winning order storage area 223s (S2903). Here, the processing of S2903 will be described in detail. This is a storage area for storing. The pseudo winning order storage area 223s is provided with an area capable of storing 20 pieces of timing information corresponding to the order of execution of the pseudo winning performance, and the timing of performing the pseudo winning performance is set. Each time, the timing information is stored in each area in the execution order of the pseudo winning effect (pseudo winning order).

In this control example, since the distances from the respective winning openings (entering ball openings) provided in the special winning device 550 to the pseudo attacker 165 (ball flowing distance) are different, each winning opening ( There are cases where the order in which the ball enters the (ball entrance) and the order in which the ball reaches (wins) the pseudo-attacker 165 may be different. When a ball enters the specific winning hole 65a later, the winning ball of the specific winning hole 65a that wins later reaches the pseudo attacker 165 first.

Therefore, the pseudo winning order storage area 223s stores the information stored in each area so that the timing information set later can be stored so as to interrupt the order of the plurality of timing information already stored. It is configured to be easily shiftable. Further, the upper limit number (20 pieces) of timing information stored in the pseudo winning order storage area 223s is configured to be larger than the number of winning prizes (10 pieces) which is a closing condition of the round game executed during the jackpot game. Then, the timing information (normal timing information) stored in the winning number (10) that is the condition for closing the round game and the timing stored outside the winning number (10) that is the condition for closing the round game. information (over-timing information).

As a result, in addition to the timing information set corresponding to the ball that has won the specific prize-winning opening 65a of the variable prize-winning device 65 during the jackpot game, Correspondingly set timing information can also be reliably stored.

After the processing of S2903 is completed, next, based on the information stored in the pseudo winning order storage area 223s, the winning order of the pseudo attacker 165 is stored in the area after 10, that is, the timing information, that is, the over An over-pseudo winning effect is set for the timing information (S2904), and this processing is terminated.

As the over-pseudo winning effect set in the process of S2904, for example, the sound mode of the winning sound output from the audio output device 226 is changed, or the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 shows that the over-winning or to cause various production devices provided in the pachinko machine 10 to execute an effect to indicate that an over-win has been made.

In the processing of S2901, if it is determined that the command received this time is not a specific winning command (S2901: No), then it is determined whether the received command is a specific general winning command (S2905), and a specific general winning command is determined. If it is determined to be a command (S2905: Yes), after 1.5 seconds a pseudo winning effect is set (S2906), the above-described S2903 and S2904 processes are executed, and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2905, if it is determined that the received command is not a specific general winning command (S2905: No), then it is determined whether the received command is a specific out-entering command (S2907), If it is determined that it is an out ball command (S2907: Yes), after one second a pseudo winning effect is set (S2908), the above-described S2903 and S2904 processes are executed, and this process ends. In the process of S2907, if it is determined that the specific out-entering command has not been received (S2907: No), this process ends.

In this control example, when a ball wins in the specific winning hole 65a and when a ball wins in the specific general winning hole 163, a prize ball is awarded. When a ball wins at 166, it is configured such that no prize ball is awarded. Therefore, in the pseudo winning effect (S2902, S2906 in FIG. 265) that is set based on the winning of balls in the specific winning opening 65a and the specific general winning opening 163, the acquisition information 831 for indicating the number of winning balls is In the pseudo winning effect (S2908 in FIG. 265) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 219) and set based on the ball entering the specific out port 166, It is configured so that the acquired information 831 is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

By configuring in this way, the display mode of the acquisition information 831 displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the pseudo jackpot production using the pseudo attacker 165 and the number of prize balls actually paid out to the player It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a large error in In addition, since many balls win the pseudo attacker 165 during the pseudo jackpot production, the game can be played without executing the process of updating the display mode of the acquired information 831 for each ball that wins the pseudo attacker 165. The display mode of the acquired information 831 can be updated without making the user feel uncomfortable.

Further, in this control example, when the display mode of the acquired information 831 is updated, the minimum unit (for example, if it is a numerical value “1”). By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult to understand which ball wins in the display mode of the acquisition information 831, so that the player can be provided with an effect with less sense of incongruity. .

As described above, in this control example, as a pseudo jackpot effect, the display mode of the acquisition information 831 is updated based on the fact that the ball has entered the winning hole where the prize ball is generated. For example, storage means for storing the number of prize balls won during the jackpot game, and acquisition information displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of prize balls stored in the storage means. updating means for executing the updating process of 831; discriminating means for discriminating the number of prize balls that have not been processed by the updating means (the number of unreported prize balls) among the number of prize balls stored in the storage means; , and when the number of unreported prize balls is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls), update processing may be periodically performed by the updating means.

Further, the pseudo attacker 165 is provided with detection means for detecting that the ball has won a prize, and when the detection means detects the ball, the update means is executed based on the number of winning balls stored in the storage means described above. Alternatively, the updating process may be executed based on detection that a ball has entered each winning hole of the special winning device 550 .

Next, the contents of the stop processing (S2213) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 266 is a flow chart showing the contents of the stop processing (S2213). In this stop process (S2213), a process for setting the display mode of the third symbol to be stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the timing of stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol is executed.

When this stop processing (S2213) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special symbol variation (special figure variation in execution) corresponding to this stop command is per special figure variation (big hit variation, small per variation) Then (S2951), if it is determined that it is not a special figure per variation (S2951: No), then it is determined whether the general pattern production flag 223v is set to ON (S2952), and the general pattern production medium flag 223v is set to ON (S2952: Yes), then it is determined whether the continuation flag 223x is set to ON (S2953).

That is, in the above-described processing of S2951 to S2953, whether the general pattern production (variation production (charge production) executed in accordance with the normal pattern stop timing) is executed across the special pattern stop timing this time A process for determining is executed. In the process of S2953, if it is determined that the continuation flag 223x is set to ON (S2953: Yes), that is, if the normal figure effect is executed continuously even after the special figure fluctuation stop, the reduction third symbol is set (S2954), the stop display of the corresponding third symbol is set (S2955), and the process proceeds to S2957.

In this way, when the regular pattern effect is continuously executed even after the special pattern fluctuation is stopped, the reduced third pattern is displayed, making it difficult for the player to understand the special pattern fluctuation stop timing. Therefore, the charge effect being executed for the player (see FIG. 212) is executed based on the special symbol lottery, or is executed based on the normal symbol lottery. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to discriminate whether or not it is, so that the performance effect can be enhanced.

On the other hand, in the process of S2951, if it is determined that it is a variation per special figure (S2951: Yes), or in the process of S2952, the normal figure production flag 223v is not set to ON (it is set to OFF ) (S2952: No), since the charge effect was not executed during the special symbol variation being executed, the process proceeds to S2955 without setting the reduced third symbol.

Also, when it is determined that the continuation flag 223x is not set to ON in the processing of S2953 (S2953: No), that is, when the general pattern effect is completed during the current special pattern fluctuation, the normal third pattern is displayed. Since it is sufficient to stop display, the normal pattern rendering flag 223v is set to OFF (S2956), and the process proceeds to S2955.

In the process of S2957, it is determined whether the current special symbol variation is a change to be the subject of a pending effect (see FIG. 210(a)) or a treasure box effect (see FIG. 210(b)). Here, determination is made based on information stored in the pending effect information storage area 223m. Then, when it is determined that it is a target change (S2957: Yes), the pending effect flag 223q and the treasure box effect flag 223r are set to OFF (S2958), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2957 that it is not the target change (S2957: No), this process ends. In addition, in this control example, when the special symbol variation targeted for the stop processing (see S2213 in FIG. 266) is a pending effect or a target variation of a look-ahead effect (notice effect) such as a treasure chest effect (S2957: Yes), The flag 223q during pending effect and the flag 223r during treasure box effect are set to OFF, and a new prefetch effect (notice effect) can be set. Even after the end (the target special symbol variation is stopped), a predetermined period (for example, the period until the special symbol variation is performed 5 times, or a specific variation pattern (super reach variation pattern) is executed The pending effect flag 223q and the treasure box effect flag 223r may be configured not to be set to OFF until the period until) elapses. In this way, after one look-ahead effect (notice effect) ends, by intentionally setting a period in which the next look-ahead effect (notice effect) is not set, the look-ahead effect (notice effect) is frequently executed. It is possible to suppress this, and to make the player have a feeling of expectation for a big win even for the special symbol variation in which the look-ahead performance (notice performance) is not executed. Also, after one look-ahead effect (notice effect) is finished, a period that is difficult to set may be set instead of a period during which the next look-ahead effect (notice effect) is not set. In this case, during the period when it is difficult to set the look-ahead performance (notice performance), it is configured to facilitate the setting of the look-ahead performance (notice performance) when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a big hit in the other period. good to do As a result, the player can be made to pay attention not only to the effect mode of the look-ahead effect (notice effect) but also to the execution timing, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Next, the variable display setting process (S2115) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 267 is a flow chart showing this variable display setting process (S2115). This variable display setting process (S2115) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 257) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and in order to execute the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, Based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set.

In the variable display setting process (S2115: FIG. 267), first, it is determined whether or not the variable start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S3001). Then, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S3001: No), the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, so S3006 Go to processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S3001: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned off (S3002), and the fluctuation pattern type in the fluctuation effect extracted from the display fluctuation pattern command is Acquired from the RAM 223 (S3003).

Next, a variation effect setting process is executed (S3004), and based on the acquired variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notification to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. (S3005). The contents of the variable effect setting process executed in the process of S3004 will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the third pattern display device 81 performs the variation display of the third pattern in the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command, Display control of the variable effect is started.

Next, although not shown, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223f is shifted. In this process, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223f are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of 1st area→execution area, 2nd area→1st area, 3rd area→2nd area, 4th area→3rd area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S3006.

In the processing of S3006, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S3006). Then, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S3006: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S3006: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (S3007), and the stop type in the variable effect extracted from the stop type command is changed to Acquired from the RAM 223 (S3008). Next, the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S3009), and the process proceeds to S3010.

In the processing of S3010, based on the set stop type, a display stop type command for notification to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S3010). . In the display control device 114, by receiving this stop type command for display, the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type indicated by this stop type command for display is stopped and displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The stop display of the variable production is controlled. After the process of S3010 is executed, the process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 268, the contents of the variable effect setting process (S3004), which is one process in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 267) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, will be described. . FIG. 268 is a flow chart showing the contents of the variable effect setting process (S3004). In this variable effect setting process (S3004), a process for setting a detailed effect mode (announcement contents) of the variable effect of the third symbol corresponding to the variation of the special symbol is executed.

When the variable effect setting process (S3004) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the current game state is the probability variable state (S3101). Here, based on the information set in the state setting area 223g, it is determined whether or not the current game state is the variable probability state. In the processing of S3101, if it is determined that the current state is the variable probability state (S3101: Yes), the pattern command for display during the variable probability is set based on the extracted variation pattern (S3102), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the current state is not a variable probability state in the process of S3101 (S3101: No), then it is determined whether the flag 223v during normal figure production is set to ON (S3103), and is set to ON. If it is determined that it is, that is, the normal pattern effect (charge effect based on the result of the normal pattern lottery) is executed in the variable effect corresponding to the previous special symbol change, and the normal pattern effect straddles this special symbol change. Therefore, when it is executed (S3103: Yes), the charge effect setting process is executed (S3104), and the process ends.

The detailed contents of this charge effect setting process (S3104) will be described later with reference to FIG. A charge performance to be continuously executed and a performance mode of a variable performance after the end of the charge performance are set.

On the other hand, in the process of S3103, if it is determined that the normal pattern effect flag 223v is not set to ON (S3103: No), it is determined whether the variation pattern acquired this time has an operation effect (S3105), and the operation If it is determined that there is an effect (S3105: Yes), an operation effect setting process is executed (S3106), and this process ends. Details of the operation effect setting process (S3106) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S3105, if it is determined that the variation pattern acquired this time does not include an operation effect (S3105: No), then the variation pattern acquired this time is charged with a charge effect (charge performed based on a special symbol lottery effect) is included (S3107), and if it is determined that the charge effect is included (S3107: Yes), the charge effect in-progress flag 223y is set to ON (S3108), and this process ends. do. By setting the charging effect in progress flag 223y to ON, it is possible to determine that it is the timing at which the normal pattern effect can be executed.

Then, in the process of S3107, if it is determined that the change pattern acquired this time does not include the charge effect (S3107: No), the reserve mode selection process is executed (S3109), and the treasure box mode selection process is executed ( S3110), this process is terminated. Note that the same processing as the above-described reservation mode selection process (S2405) is executed in the reservation mode selection process (S3109), and the same process as the treasure box mode selection process (S2406) is performed in the treasure box mode selection process (S3110). is executed, so a detailed description thereof is omitted.

Thus, in this control example, the timing of receiving the winning command of the special symbol and the timing of starting the variation of the special symbol, that is, the timing at which the number of reserved symbols corresponding to the special symbol is changed. production, treasure box production) are executed. By configuring in this way, the look-ahead effect can be executed at various timings, so that the player can be provided with a game that never gets bored.

Next, with reference to FIG. 269, the contents of the operation effect setting process (S3106) executed in the variable effect setting process (see S3004 in FIG. 268) will be described. FIG. 269 is a flow chart showing the contents of the operation effect setting process (S3106). In this operation effect setting process (S3106), a preparatory process corresponding to the operation effect type included in the current variation pattern is executed.

When the operation effect setting process (S3106) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the current operation effect is the first operation effect ((button fusion effect: see FIG. 214) (S3201). (S3201: Yes), the operation command corresponding to the first operation effect is set (S3202), the first operation effect type is stored in the operation effect type storage area (S3203), and the operation effect flag is turned on. (S3204), and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S3201, if it is determined that it is not the first operation effect (S3201: No), it is determined whether it is the second operation effect (automatic pressing effect: see FIG. 217) (S3205), and the second operation If it is determined to be an effect (S3205: Yes), the effect command corresponding to the second operation effect is set (S3206), the second operation effect means is stored in the operation effect type storage area (S3207), and the Go to processing. Also, if it is determined in the process of S3205 that the second operation effect is not provided (S3205: No), the effect command corresponding to the other operation effect is set (S3208), the process of S3204 described above is executed, and this process is executed. exit.

In this control example, the first operation effect ((button fusion effect: see FIG. 214) is configured to be set more frequently than the second operation effect (automatic depression effect: see FIG. 217). Then, it is configured to determine in order of setting frequency, thereby increasing the processing speed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 270, the contents of the charge effect setting process (S3104) executed in the variable effect setting process (see FIG. 268) will be described. FIG. 270 is a flow chart showing the contents of the charge effect setting process (S3104). When the charge effect setting process (S3104) is executed, first, it is determined whether the lottery result of the corresponding special symbol is a hit (big hit, small hit) (S3221), and if it is determined to be a hit (S3221 : No), the normal pattern effect possible flag 223t is set to OFF (S3222), and this process is terminated.

By configuring in this way, the charge performance (normal pattern performance) indicating that the lottery result of the normal pattern is winning (normal pattern winning) is a special pattern lottery that can be more advantageous to the player than the normal pattern winning. It will be set with a lower priority than the variable effect for showing the result. As a result, it is possible to prevent the execution of the effect that the player is most interested in (for example, the effect for indicating that the jackpot has been won) from being hindered by other effects. In addition, in the process of S3222, by setting the normal pattern effect possible flag 223t to OFF, the effect mode of the charge effect that is executed across from the previous special symbol variation can be changed regardless of the normal symbol variation stop timing this time. 1 second after the execution of the special symbol variation, a gase charge presentation is performed to shift and stop the charge symbols. After that, it is configured to execute a variation performance (variation performance based on the special symbol lottery result) set corresponding to the special symbol variation of this time. Thereby, in the next special symbol variation in which the charging performance executed based on the lottery result of the normal symbol is executed straddling from the previous special symbol variation, the next special symbol variation is the special symbol variation corresponding to the jackpot winning. In the case of , the pre-executed charge effect (charge effect executed based on the lottery result of the normal symbol) ends immediately after switching to the gase charge effect, so the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit. It is possible to provide a player with a variable performance indicating that in an easy-to-understand manner. In addition, by switching to the Gase charge effect, during the fluctuation of the special symbol jackpot, a notification effect is executed to notify the winning of the normal symbol with a smaller privilege (for example, prize ball) given to the player than the special symbol jackpot winning. Therefore, it is possible to execute an effect that is easy for the player to understand.

If it is determined that the lottery result is not hit in the process of S3221 (is lost) (S3221: No), the special figure fluctuation time extracted from the special figure fluctuation pattern of this time, and the remaining period of the normal figure fluctuation at the present time (S3223), and based on the determination result of S3223, it is determined whether the normal pattern fluctuation time is longer (S3224). In the process of S3224, the normal pattern fluctuation time is shorter, that is, if it is determined that the normal pattern fluctuation that is the target of the normal pattern production ends during this special pattern fluctuation period (S3224: No), Next, It is determined whether the difference is 3 seconds or more (S3225), and if it is determined that there is 3 seconds or more (S3225: Yes), the change to temporarily stop the charge design (specific design) Z4 in accordance with the normal pattern fluctuation end timing A pattern (fluctuation effect) is determined (S3226).

Then, the variation pattern using the remaining period after the specific symbol Z4 is temporarily stopped is determined (S3227), the normal pattern rendering flag 223v is set to ON (S3228), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S3225, if it is determined that the difference between the stop timing of the normal symbol and the stop timing of the special symbol is not more than 3 seconds (S3225: No), from the normal pattern fluctuation end timing to the special pattern fluctuation end timing A variation pattern for temporarily stopping the charge symbol (specific symbol) Z4 is determined, and the process proceeds to S3228. Here, as the variation pattern determined in the process of S3227, the length of the remaining period (the period from the end of the normal figure variation to the end of the special figure variation), or variable based on the lottery result of the special symbol Specifically, it is determined whether the remaining period is a specific period longer than 3 seconds (for example, 10 seconds), and if the remaining period is longer than or equal to the specific period, the remaining period is determined. As a variation pattern corresponding to the period, a variation pattern for re-fluctuation of the temporarily stopped third symbol is set, and if it is longer than 3 seconds and shorter than the specific period, the roulette presentation (Fig. 213) is executed after the charge presentation is completed, and the It is preferable to set a variation pattern for notifying the lottery result of the special symbol in the roulette performance. In addition, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, the above-mentioned variation pattern is configured to be difficult to set compared to the case where the lottery result of the special symbol is a win, and the third symbol is temporarily continued even during the remaining period. It is preferable to configure so that the change pattern to be stopped can be easily set. In addition, in this control example, it is configured not to inform the player of the length of the remaining period (the period from the end of the normal figure fluctuation to the end of the special figure fluctuation), but this remaining period It is also possible to display on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 a suggestion mode that allows the player to predict the length of the .

That is, in this control example, when setting the variation effect corresponding to the new special symbol variation, it is determined whether the effect (normal pattern effect) for showing the lottery result of the normal symbol variation being executed is being executed. , When the general pattern production is continuously executed, the variable production corresponding to the general pattern production is executed. As a result, it is possible to easily set a variation performance (normal pattern performance) corresponding to the normal pattern variation executed across a plurality of special symbol variations.

In addition, the display mode (charge design) of the identification information for indicating the lottery result of the general pattern production and the identification information (charge design) for indicating the lottery result of the special design are the same (including some errors) display. Since it is configured to be a mode, and furthermore, it is configured to execute a normal figure effect using a part of the special symbol variation effect (for example, charge effect), the effect result of the charge effect (charge It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether the symbol display) is displaying the lottery result of the special symbol or the lottery result of the normal symbol.

Furthermore, in this control example, if the time from the normal pattern fluctuation stop timing to the special pattern fluctuation stop timing is longer than a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds), after the end of the general pattern production, the lottery of this special pattern It is configured to execute a special figure variation production for showing the result. As a result, it is possible to reliably inform the player of the lottery result.

On the other hand, in this control example, when the time from the normal symbol variation stop timing to the special symbol variation stop timing is shorter than a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds), it is assumed that the special symbol variation effect is executed for a short period of time. In this case, since only an incomprehensible variable performance is executed, the pattern indicating the lottery result of the normal pattern is stopped for a long time (temporary stop display) without executing the variable performance for the special symbol. there is Returning to the processing in FIG. 270, the description continues. In the process of S3224, when it is determined that the normal pattern fluctuation time is longer (S3224: Yes), the fluctuation pattern for continuing the charge effect of the special symbol this time is determined (S3230), and the continuation flag 223x is set to ON. (S3231), this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 271, the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S2107), which is one of the main processing (see FIG. 257) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 271 is a flow chart showing this frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S2107). In the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S2107), it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 has been pressed, and based on the pressing, the execution of the notice effect or the like is set.

In the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S2107: see FIG. 271), first, it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 has been operated (S3301), and if it is determined that the frame button 22 has not been operated (S3301: No). , the process ends. If it is determined that the frame button 22 has been operated (S3301: Yes), it is determined whether the operation is currently valid (S3302). In the process of S3302, when the type of operation effect is set in the operation effect setting process (S3106 in FIG. 269), the operation effective period corresponding to the type is set in the operation effective timer 223n. indicates the operation validity period.

In the process of S3302, if it is determined that the operation is valid (S3302: Yes), then it is determined whether the pressed flag 223k is set to ON (S3303), and the pressed flag 223k is set to ON. When it is determined that it is not (S3303: No), it is determined whether the flag 223h during operation presentation is ON (S3304), and when it is determined that the flag 223h during operation presentation is set ON (S3304 : Yes), the depressed flag 223k is set to ON, and this process is terminated.

That is, in this control example, when the first operation effect and the second operation effect are set among the operation effects, if the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the operation effective period, The flag 223k is set to ON, and an effect mode is set in accordance with the progress of the first operation effect and the second operation effect according to the setting state of the depressed flag 223k. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect based on the operation immediately after the frame button 22 is operated, or to execute an effect based on the operation after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the frame button 22 was operated, thereby providing variations in the operation effect. can be increased.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3304, if it is determined that the operation rendering flag 223h is not set to ON (S3304: No), the operation mode corresponding to the set operation effective period is determined (S3306), and determined. A display command corresponding to the selected operation mode is set (S3307), and this processing ends. Further, when it is determined in the process of S3302 that the operation valid period is not in effect (S3302: No), or when it is determined in the process of S3303 that the pressed flag 223k is ON (S3303: Yes), This process is terminated as it is.

In this control example, an example is shown in which a variable condition for varying the presentation mode of the operation presentation is established based on one operation (pressing) of the frame button 22, but the present invention is not limited to this. , the variable condition may be established when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) a predetermined number of times (for example, 20 times) within the operation valid period, or an operation means having a plurality of operation methods may be provided, The variable condition may be established when the operation means is operated in a specific operation method.

Furthermore, in this control example, one flag (pressed flag 223k) is set to ON to indicate that the operation means has been operated. Alternatively, it may be configured to indicate different operation results, and to vary the presentation mode of the operation presentation in accordance with the type of the operation result.

Further, in this control example, the display effect displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is used as an example of the operation effect in which the effect mode is changed based on the operation of the operation means. However, without being limited to this, it may be configured to execute an effect of moving the decorative movable device provided in the pachinko machine 10 based on the operation of the frame button 22 (operating means).

In this control example, when the frame button 22 is operated when an operation effect other than the first operation effect or the second operation effect is being executed, an operation mode corresponding to the set operation effective period is determined. (see S3306 in FIG. 271), but other configurations may be used.

Specifically, within the effect period of the display effect executed by the third pattern display device 81, an operation effective period is set in which the operation of the frame button 22 (operation means) can be effectively determined, and the set operation is performed. The value of the operation valid timer 223n is set to determine the valid period. Then, storage means for storing the length of the set operation effective period and calculation means for calculating the remaining period of the operation effective period based on the value of the operation effective timer 223n at the time when the operation means is operated are provided. Further, it is preferable to provide an operation mode selection table that defines different operation modes according to the length of the remaining period calculated by the calculating means.

By configuring in this way, different operation modes are selected according to the timing at which the player operates the operation means (according to the remaining time at the time of operating the operation means), so that a variety of effects can be provided to the player. can provide.

In addition, an operation valid period setting means that can determine one operation valid period from among a plurality of operation valid periods and can be set within the effect period of the display effect, and an operation valid timer 223n at the time when the operation means is operated. and calculating means for calculating the progress rate (%) of the valid operation period based on the value of . By configuring in this way, it is possible to set different operation valid periods for display effects of the same display mode, and furthermore, based on the length of the set operation valid period and the timing of operating the operation means. The progress rate of the operation effective period to be calculated, that is, the length of the entire operation effective period is assumed to be 100, and the ratio of the period that has already passed (or the period that has not yet passed) is calculated as a percentage. The manner in which the operations are performed can be different.

As a result, even if the operation means are operated at the same timing based on the display performance executed by the third pattern display device 81, different operation modes can be set, thereby providing more diverse performances to the player. be able to.

Further, the operation mode is set according to the percentage value calculated by the calculating means instead of setting the operation mode according to the length of the remaining period (elapsed period) of the operation effective period. The range defined in the data table for selection can be limited to "1-100". In other words, when setting the operation mode according to the length of the remaining period (elapsed period) of the operation valid period, for example, when the length of the operation valid period can be set from 2 to 15 seconds, 6 seconds When the operation means is operated in the 3rd second when is set (remaining time 3 seconds), and when the operation means is operated in the 7th second when 14 seconds is set (remaining time 7 seconds) Since the remaining time differs between , and , different operation modes are set.

Further, in the above-described examples, the operation means is operated at the midpoint of the operation effective period in any case, and the operation difficulty level is the same. It is necessary to define a data table so as to select an operation mode based on not only the remaining time of the effective period but also the length of the set operation effective period and the remaining time of the operation effective period at the time when the operation means is operated. There is

In this case, if the length of the valid period of operation is set to be variable, the capacity of the above-mentioned data table will increase significantly, resulting in a situation where the data capacity is compressed. . On the other hand, by configuring the operation mode to be selected using a percentage value as described above, the same value can be used regardless of the length of the operation valid period, so that the operation mode can be selected. It is possible to reduce the data capacity of the data table for

In addition, as a dividing means for dividing the percentage value calculated by the calculating means into a plurality of ranges, for example, a first dividing means for dividing into "1% to 50%" and "51% to 99%", "1% to 10%", "11% to 20%", "21% to 30%", "41% to 50%", "51% to 60%", "61% to 70%" and "71 % to 80%", "81% to 90%" and "91% to 99%", and further, based on the presence or absence of establishment of a predetermined condition such as the result of a special symbol lottery. The percentage value calculated by the calculating means is divided by the dividing means determined by the determining means, and the operation mode is selected based on the divided information. It may be configured to

Further, in this way, in the case of using the configuration in which the operation mode to be executed thereafter is varied according to the operation timing of the operation means, for example, the pachinko machine as the operation effect to be executed by operating the operation means It is preferable to use the effect of moving the movable accessory for effect provided in 10 . Thereby, it is possible to execute the operation performance without paying attention to the period of the operation performance executed based on the set operation mode and the display performance period displayed on the display means. Further, a display mode for indicating that an operation valid period has been set, a display mode for indicating the elapsed time of the operation valid period, a display mode for indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period, and a display mode for indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period. The third pattern display device 81 may be configured to be able to suggest or notify a display mode for indicating the ratio (the ratio of the remaining period to the entire length of the operation valid period). In this case, for example, a special effect may be executed by operating the operation means at the timing when the display mode indicating the remaining ratio of the operation effective period becomes a predetermined display mode. In addition, without informing the player of the remaining ratio of the operation valid period (the ratio of the remaining period to the entire length of the operation valid period), the display mode for indicating the elapsed time of the operation valid period, and the operation valid period In the case of displaying a display mode for indicating the remaining time, when the remaining ratio of the operation valid period at the timing when the operation means is operated is a specific ratio (for example, 50%), the special effect is executed. Also good. In this case, since the timing when the remaining ratio of the operation valid period reaches a specific ratio (for example, 50%) can be changed according to the length of the operation valid period set, a special effect is executed for the player. It is possible to make it difficult to predict the timing to let

Next, with reference to FIG. 272, the contents of the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S2110) will be described. FIG. 272 is a flow chart showing the contents of the liquid crystal presentation execution management process (S2110). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S2110), the process of updating the effect mode of the special figure variation effect being executed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a predetermined variation pattern, and the effect mode of the special figure variation effect A process for replacing with an effect (normal pattern effect) based on the normal symbol lottery is executed.

When the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S2110) is executed, first, it is determined whether the charging effect flag 223y is set to ON (S3401), and if it is determined to be ON (S3401: Yes ), it is determined whether or not the special figure variation currently being executed is in the process of hitting variation (S3402). In the process of S3402, if it is determined that it is not in the middle of the hit fluctuation (S3402: No), then it is determined whether the normal pattern effect possible flag 223t is set to ON (S3403), and is set to ON When it is determined that (S3403: Yes), it is determined whether the present is within the effect replacement possible period (S3404).

In this control example, only the period during which the special symbol fluctuation is changing at high speed (the period during which none of the third symbols Z1 to Z3 are stop-displayed), and only the third symbol Z1 that is first stop-displayed is stop-displayed. Only during the period, the performance mode of the variable performance set based on the lottery result of the special symbol can be replaced with the performance mode based on the result of the normal symbol lottery. By configuring in this way, the variable performance of the special symbols progresses, and after the player becomes in a state (for example, a ready-to-win state) where the player can predict the lottery result of the special symbols, the performance mode of the variable performance is replaced. It is possible to suppress execution of an effect that is difficult for the player to understand.

In the process of S3404, if it is determined that it is within the effect replacement possible period (S3404: Yes), the normal pattern effect possible flag 223t is set to OFF (S3405), and the normal pattern effect flag 223v is set to ON. (S3406), a display command for replacement is set (S3407), other liquid crystal presentation execution management processing is executed (S3408), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S3401, if it is determined that the charging effect in-progress flag 223y is not set to ON (S3401: No), in the process of S3402, if it is determined that the hit is fluctuating (S3402: Yes), S3403 In the process of , if it is determined that the normal pattern effect possible flag 223t is not set to ON (S3403: No), in the process of S3404, if it is determined that it is not within the effect replacement possible period (S3404: No) , Since it is in a state in which it is not possible to execute the general pattern effect, the process proceeds to S3408 as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 273, the contents of the operation effect management process (S2111) will be described. FIG. 273 is a flow chart showing the contents of the operation effect management process (S2111). In this operation effect management process (S2111), a process for setting an effect mode based on the operation of the frame button 22 is executed while the operation effect is being executed.

When the operation effect management process (S2111) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the operation effect in progress flag 223h is set to ON (S3501). Then, if it is determined that the operation rendering flag 223h is not set to ON, that is, if it is determined that the operation rendering is not currently being performed (S3501: No), this processing ends. If it is determined that the operation effect in progress flag 223h is set to ON (S3501: Yes), then the first operation effect is executed based on the information stored in the operation effect type storage area 223i. (S3502), and if it is determined that the first operation effect is being performed (S3502), then it is determined whether the depressed flag 223k is set to ON (S3503).

If it is determined in the process of S3503 that the pressed flag 223k is set to ON (S3503: Yes), the corresponding button effect is set (S3504), the pressed flag 223k is set to OFF (S3505), After completing the processing relating to the first operation effect, the process proceeds to S3509. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3503 that the depressed flag 223k is not set to ON (S3503: No), then the display mode showing the remaining period of the operation effective period set for each operation effect is displayed. match (in this control example, the timing when the remaining period of the transition period with operation becomes 1 second) (S3506).

Here, when it is determined that it is coincidence timing (S3506: Yes), a fusion effect display mode is set for changing the currently unoperated button display to the fusion button display. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3506 that it is not the coincidence timing, the process proceeds directly to S3509. As a result, when a predetermined condition is met without operating the frame button 22 for a plurality of operation effects while the first operation effect is being executed, a fusion operation effect in which the plurality of operation effects are merged is executed. will be As a result, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected performance, and to enhance the performance effect.

Next, in the processing of S3509, it is determined whether or not it is the second operation effect (see FIG. 216). Then, when it is determined that the second operation effect is being performed (S3509: Yes), it is determined whether the present is in the first operation period (button operation immediate response period) (S3510). As described above with reference to FIG. 216, in the second operation effect of this control example, an operation valid period of 10 seconds is set, of which the first 8 seconds are the effect immediately corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22. is set as a period during which is displayed (immediate button operation response period), and during the remaining 2 seconds, whether or not the frame button 22 has been operated is determined periodically (at 0.5 second intervals, 1 second intervals). It is set as a period (button operation regular corresponding period) during which the effect result is displayed based on the determination result.

In the processing of S3510, if it is determined that it is during the first operation period (S3510: Yes), it is determined whether the pressed flag 223k is ON (S3511), and the pressed flag 223k is not set to ON. If so (S3511: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3511 that the pressed flag 223k is set to ON (S3511: Yes), the corresponding button effect is set (S3512), and the pressed flag 223k is set to OFF (S3513). ), the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S3510, if it is determined that the present time is not during the first operation period (S3510: No), then it is determined whether the first operation period has elapsed (S3514). If it is determined that the first operation period has passed (S3516: Yes), the automatic press effect mode is set (S3515), and then it is determined whether the second operation period is currently in progress. (S3516). If it is determined in S3516 that it is in the second operation period (S3516: Yes), it is determined whether it is time to determine the operation status of the frame button 22 (whether a predetermined period of time has elapsed) (S3517), If it is determined that it is not the timing for determination (S3517: No), this processing ends.

If it is determined in the process of S3517 that the predetermined period has elapsed (S3517: Yes), then it is determined whether the depressed flag 223k is set to ON (S3518), and the depressed flag 223k is turned ON. If it is determined that it is set (S3518: Yes), the corresponding button effect is set (S3519), the depressed flag 223k is set to OFF (S3520), and the process proceeds to S3522. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3518 that the pressed flag 223k is not set to ON (S3518: No), the automatic pressing effect is set (S3521), and the process proceeds to S3522. In the process of S3522, a display effect command corresponding to each set effect mode is set, and this process ends. As described above, among the plurality of effects described in the first control example, the look-ahead effect (holding effect, treasure box effect) is performed when a winning information command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received, or when a new special effect is received. When the symbol variation is started, that is, it is executed at the timing when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is changed, and is a different effect from the variable effect showing the special symbol variation. On the other hand, the charge effect, the roulette effect, and the operation effect executed based on the player's operation of the frame button 22 are effects executed based on the reception of the variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. is. Each effect executed based on this variation pattern command may be set using all of the variation time (dynamic display period) corresponding to the information indicating the variation time of the special symbol possessed by the variation pattern command, A part of the fluctuation time may be used for setting.

<Regarding control processing in the display control device 114>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 274 to 287. FIG. The processing of the MPU 231 can be broadly classified into main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and processing for one frame from the image controller 237. There is V interrupt processing that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal that is transmitted every 20 milliseconds when image drawing processing is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113 and execute the V interrupt process.

First, with reference to FIG. 274, main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 274 is a flow chart showing this main process. The main processing is to execute initialization processing when the power is turned on.

Activation of this main process is specifically performed according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" and , the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. FIG. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 . Then, the MPU 231 fetches the received instruction code from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

Here, if all the boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND type flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read out and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the NOR ROM 234d stores a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is canceled, thereby speeding up the NOR ROM. Since it is a memory from which data can be read, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 is set so that various controls on the third pattern display device 81 can be executed. to start.

Here, referring to FIG. 275, the boot processing (S6001) will be described. FIG. 275 is a flowchart showing boot processing (S6001) executed in the main processing in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. FIG.

As described above, in this embodiment, the control program and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of being stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional game machines. The character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed is stored. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND-type flash memory 234a that can be increased in capacity with a small area. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, especially when performing random access. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a provided in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM and in the data table. A process of transferring and storing in the storage area 233b is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c after the system reset is canceled is executed. Of the control programs stored in the 2-program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S6101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the head address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the rest of the boot program included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101.

By setting the command pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6102, the MPU 231 can execute various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processing. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the process for the instruction.

After the command pointer 231a is set by the process of S6102, the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set command pointer 231a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. Of the control programs stored, the remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b (S6103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) of the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

After executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 274) is completed. By setting the top address of the program corresponding to the initializing process (see S6002 in FIG. 274) (S6105), the execution of the boot program is finished, and the boot process ends.

By executing the boot process (S6001) in this way, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the work RAM 233, which is composed entirely of DRAM. It is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processing is executed using

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control program and fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the fixed value data after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect part.

On the other hand, without storing the entire boot program in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the rest of the boot program is stored in the NAND type flash memory 234a. , the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding the NOR type ROM 234d with a very small capacity. can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 275, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 includes all remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. may be part of As for the boot program transferred here, a predetermined amount of the control program including all remaining boot programs is transferred to the program storage area 233a. 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

In addition, the boot program transferred by the process of S6101 transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and then the beginning of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting an address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this process is further transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount of part of the remaining boot program, and then transferred to the program storage area 233a. A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a, and then the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set in the command pointer 231a in step S6101. and the processing of S6102 may be repeated a plurality of times, and then the processing of S6103 to S6105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the rest of the boot program not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at once, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. Using the boot program, a predetermined amount can be transferred to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first program storage area 234d1 has been described as having a part of the boot program that is first executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released. It may be stored in the 1-program storage area 234d1. In this case, the MPU 231 may perform the processes of S6103 to S6105 without performing the processes of S6101 and S6102 after starting the boot process. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231, which becomes possible after the boot process, more quickly.

Now, return to the description of FIG. After the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings are made for the registers in the MPU 231 and the I/O device. In addition, processing for clearing the memory of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and an initial value is set for each flag. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after initializing the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to draw an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81. and instructs execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be a different color depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after the power is turned on, it is inspected whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the pachinko machine 10 It is possible to easily and immediately judge whether or not the activation can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S6003). This transfer instruction contains the leading and trailing addresses of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The image controller 237 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating transfer end to the MPU 231 . By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has ended. When the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or in a partial area of the built-in memory. It may be written. The MPU 231 reads information from this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby ascertaining that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has ended. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing in S6003, the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to . This transfer instruction contains the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, the data size of the image data, and information on the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235). , and the head address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination. It is transferred to the change image area 235b when the power is turned on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S6004, then the simple image display flag 233c is set. is turned on (S6005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 285(a)), which will be described later. Resident image transfer setting processing for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer is executed (see S7602 in FIG. 285(a)).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. Remains on until terminated. As a result, during this period, the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 276(b)) executes the simple command determination processing so that the power-on image shown in (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) is drawn. (see S6308 in FIG. 276(b)) and simple display setting processing (see S6309 in FIG. 276(b)) are executed.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234. Due to its slow read speed, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a long time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Therefore, as in this main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on varying image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image at power-on is transferred to the third image. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the rest of the image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person involved in the hall can see the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player or the like can recognize that some kind of initialization processing is being performed. It is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped while the image data to be processed is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 .

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacture, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Therefore, it is possible to prevent deterioration of the operation check efficiency by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234. FIG.

In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the power-on main image is the third symbol. When the player starts the game while the display is displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball entry (start winning) to the first start port 64, and an instruction to start the variable effect is issued from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device. 113, that is, when a display variation pattern command is received, a power-on variation image (not shown) is immediately displayed during the variation presentation period, and a simple variation presentation can be performed. can. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the third symbol display device 81 continues to display the main image when the power is turned on. is composed of the NAND-type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, it takes a long time to transfer the data. However, in this pachinko machine 10, since it is possible to perform a simple variation effect using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after power failure recovery. Immediately after the power is turned on, even while the main image is displayed, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the processing of S6005, interrupt permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Accordingly, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S6006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 276(a). FIG. 276(a) is a flow chart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes command interrupt processing.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read out by command determination processing or simple command determination processing of V interrupt processing to be described later, and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 276(b). FIG. 276(b) is a flow chart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 237) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

As described above, this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the image controller 237 and sent to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

Here, first, the outline of the flow of V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 276(b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301). If it is off (S6301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. In order to display on the display device 81, command determination processing (S6302) is executed, and then display setting processing (S6303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S6302), the content of the command from the sound lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demonstration display data table or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and processed. This is because command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when V interrupt processing is executed, and there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during those 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when main controller 110 decides to start a variable effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are stored in the command buffer area at the same time. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands all at once, it is possible to quickly comprehend the mode and stop type of the variable performance selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113, and generate a performance image corresponding to the mode. Drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

In the display setting process (S6303), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302), etc., the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81 is displayed. specifically identify the content of In addition, depending on the status of processing, etc., the effect mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

After the display setting process is executed, task processing is executed (S6304). In this task processing, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 specified by the display setting processing (S6303) or the simple display setting processing (S6309). The type of sprite (display object) to be displayed is specified, and various parameters required for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 is caused to transfer image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. While the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. When a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set, and a continuous notice command (not shown) is received from the sound lamp control device 113, the continuous notice is sent to the image controller 237. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview images used in the effect and the image data of the back image after change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. FIG. Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 285 and 286. FIG.

Next, drawing processing is executed (S6306). In this drawing process, based on the types of sprites that make up one frame determined in the task process (S6304) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S6305), 237, and transmits the drawing list to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Details of the rendering process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S6307). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S6307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and is updated each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when reception of the display stop type command is detected, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type (jackpot A, jackpot B1, jackpot B2, jackpot C) indicated by the display stop type command; The stop type counter is compared, and the stop symbol after the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, in the process of S6301, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S6301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image (not shown) on the third pattern display device 81, the simple command determination process (S6308) is executed, then the simple display setting process (S6309) is executed, and the process of S6304 is executed. to

Next, with reference to FIGS. 277 to 282, the details of the command determination process (S6302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 277 is a flow chart showing this command determination processing.

In this command determination process (FIG. 277, S6302), as shown in FIG. 277, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401). (S6401: No), the command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S6303) that the new command has been processed is set to ON (S6402). The command types are analyzed for all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area (S6403).

Then, among the unprocessed commands, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command (S6404), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S6404: Yes), the variation pattern command process is executed. (S6405) and returns to the processing of S6401.

Here, with reference to FIG. 278(a), the details of the variation pattern command process (S6405) will be described. FIG. 278(a) is a flow chart showing variation pattern command processing. This variation pattern command process is for executing a process corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 114 .

In the variation pattern command process, first, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set in the buffer 233d (S6501).

Here, since the main controller 110 always determines the start of variation at a time interval of several seconds or more, it does not receive two or more display variation pattern commands within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly used for display. It could be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S6501, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern with a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the main control device will actually produce a variation effect with a shorter variation time than the set display data table. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation performance according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may make the player feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present embodiment, the variation display data table actually has a longer variation than the set display data table. Even if the variable effect with time is instructed by main controller 110, after the variable effect according to display data table buffer 233d is completed, main controller 110 will send the next display for the next display, as will be described later. Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the third symbol display on the third symbol display device 81 without any discomfort. 3 You can continue to see the variation of the pattern.

Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the variation display data table set by the processing of S6501 is turned on, and other variations The data table determination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S6503). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S6503, it is possible to easily determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. can judge.

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6504), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6505). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S6506), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S6505, the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6501 , extracts the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and specifies the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81. At the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e The transfer data information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set to 1, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is stored in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. image storage area 236a.

Also, in the display setting process, the time counter 233h to which the time data is set by the process of S6504 is used to measure the time for the variable presentation specified in the variable display data table, and when the variable presentation in the variable display data table ends. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type command for display from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the process of S6404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command in the unprocessed commands (S6406), If there is a stop type command for display (S6406: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S6407), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the stop type command process (S6407) will now be described with reference to FIG. 278(b). FIG. 278(b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command processing is for executing processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 114 .

In the stop type command process, first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (jackpot A, jackpot B1, jackpot B2, jackpot C) indicated by the stop type command for display is determined (S6601), and the stop type table and , V interrupt processing (see FIG. 276(b)) is compared with the value of the stop type counter which is updated each time it is executed, and the stop design after the fluctuation effect displayed on the third design display device 81 is determined. Finally set (S6602).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each of the stop symbols, the stop symbol discrimination flags corresponding to the stop symbols set by the processing of S6602 are turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flags corresponding to the other stop symbols are turned on. It is set to off (S6603). After that, the processing returns to S6401 in FIG.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, after a predetermined time has passed since the variation based on the data table is started, the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified as the type information. , offset information (design offset information) from the stop design set by the processing of S6602. In the above-described task processing (S6304), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, the stop design set by the process of S6602 is specified from the stop design determination flag set by S6603, and the specified stop By adding the design offset information acquired by the display setting process to the design, the third design to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address where the image data corresponding to the specified third pattern is stored is specified. Image data corresponding to the third design is stored in the third design area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

Returning to FIG. 277, the description continues. If it is determined in the process of S6406 that there is no stop type command for display (S6406: No), then it is determined whether there is an advance notice display command for display among the unprocessed commands (S6408). If it is determined that the preview display command for display has been received (S6408: Yes), the preview effect display process is executed (S6409). Details of the advance notice effect display processing (S6409) will be described with reference to FIG. Also, setting of a notice display mode for notifying the player of a big win or the like is executed.

Here, the advance notice effect display processing (S6409) will be described with reference to FIG. 279(a). FIG. 279(a) is a flow chart showing the advance notice effect display process (S6409).

In the advance notice effect display process (FIG. 279(a), S6409), first, the display data table corresponding to the received advance notice display command for display is determined and set in the display data table buffer (S6701). Determines a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table for advance notice set for display at a display timing based on the display timing of the advance notice display indicated by the received advance notice display command for display, and sets it in the transfer data table buffer 233e. (S6702).

Next, the data table discrimination flag is set to ON (S6703), and based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the setting display data table buffer 233d, time data representing the fluctuation time is counted. A counter 233h is set (S6704), and a pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6705).

In this manner, the advance notice display is set based on the display advance notice display command output from the sound lamp control device 113, and is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 at the designated timing. Therefore, various display modes can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and even the same variation pattern can be shown to the player as if they were different display modes.

In the present embodiment, the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 selects the contents of the notice display and the display timing, but not limited to this, the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 is configured to execute the selection of the notice display. You may

In addition, in the present embodiment, the display data table for advance notice is set. good.

Returning to FIG. 277, the description continues. In the process of S6408, if it is determined that there is no advance notice display command for display (S6408: No), it is determined whether there is a variable replacement command for display among unprocessed commands (S6410). If it is determined that there is a variable replacement command for display (S6410: Yes), a variable replacement display process is executed (S6411). This variable replacement display process (S6411) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 279(b).

Here, the variable replacement display processing (S6411) will be described with reference to FIG. 279(b). FIG. 279(b) is a flow chart showing this variable replacement display process (S6411).

In the variable replacement display process (FIG. 279(b), S6411), first, the display data table corresponding to the received display variable replacement command is determined and set in the display data table buffer (S6801). Determining a transfer data table corresponding to the set display data table for variable replacement for display at the display timing based on the display timing of the variable replacement display indicated by the received variable replacement command for display, and determining the transfer data table It is set in the buffer 233e (S6802).

Next, the data table discrimination flag is set to ON (S6803), and based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the setting display data table buffer 233d, time data representing the fluctuation time is counted. A counter 233h is set (S6804), and a pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6805).

Thus, based on the variable replacement command for display output from the sound lamp control device 113, the variable replacement display is set and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the designated timing. Therefore, various display modes can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and even the same variation pattern can be shown to the player as if they were different display modes.

In this embodiment, the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 selects the contents of the variable replacement display and the display timing, but the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 selects the variable replacement display. It may be configured to

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table for variable replacement is configured to be set. may be configured.

Returning to FIG. 277, the description continues. In the process of S6410, if it is determined that there is no display variation replacement command (S6410: No), it is determined whether there is a display operation effect command in the unprocessed commands (S6412). If it is determined that there is an operation effect command for display (S6412: Yes), an operation effect display process is executed (S6413). This operation effect display process (S6413) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 280(a).

Here, the operation effect display processing (S6413) will be described with reference to FIG. 280(a). FIG. 280(a) is a flow chart showing this operation effect display process (S6413).

In the operation effect display process (FIG. 280(a), S6413), first, the display data table corresponding to the received display operation effect command is determined and set in the display data table buffer (S6901). A transfer data table corresponding to the set display data table for operation effects to be displayed at the display timing based on the display timing of the operation effect display indicated by the received operation effect command for display is determined and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Set (S6902).

Next, the data table discrimination flag is set to ON (S6903), and based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the setting display data table buffer 233d, time data representing the fluctuation time is counted. A counter 233h is set (S6904), and a pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6905).

Thus, based on the display operation effect command output from the sound lamp control device 113, the operation effect display is set and displayed on the third pattern display device 81 at the designated timing. Therefore, various display modes can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and even the same variation pattern can be shown to the player as if they were different display modes.

In the present embodiment, the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 selects the content of the operation effect display and the display timing, but the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 may select the operation effect display. can be configured to

In addition, in the present embodiment, the display data table for the operation effect is set, but it is not limited to this. may

Returning to FIG. 277, the description continues. In the process of S6412, if it is determined that there is no display operation effect command (S6412: No), it is determined whether there is a display button fusion command among unprocessed commands (S6414). If it is determined that there is a display button fusion command (S6414: Yes), button fusion display processing is executed (S6415). This button fusion display process (S6415) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 280(b).

Here, the button fusion display processing (S6415) will be described with reference to FIG. 280(b). FIG. 280(b) is a flow chart showing this button fusion display processing (S6415).

In the button fusion display process (FIG. 280(b), S6415), first, the display data table corresponding to the received display button fusion command is determined and set in the display data table buffer (S7001). A transfer data table corresponding to the set button fusion display data table for display at a display timing based on the display timing of the button fusion display indicated by the received display button fusion command is determined and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Set (S7002).

Next, the data table discrimination flag is set to ON (S7003), and based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the setting display data table buffer 233d, time data representing the fluctuation time is counted. A counter 233h is set (S7004), and a pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7005).

In this manner, button fusion display is set based on the display button fusion command output from the sound lamp control device 113, and is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the designated timing. Therefore, various display modes can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and even the same variation pattern can be shown to the player as if they were different display modes.

In this embodiment, the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 selects the content of the button fusion display and the display timing. can be configured to

In addition, in this embodiment, the display data table for button fusion is set. may

Returning to FIG. 277, the description continues. In the process of S6414, if it is determined that there is no display button fusion command (S6414: No), it is determined whether there is a display pseudo-win command among unprocessed commands (S6416). If it is determined that there is a pseudo winning command for display (S6416: Yes), pseudo winning display processing is executed (S6417). Details of the pseudo winning display processing (S6417) will be described with reference to FIG.

Here, the pseudo winning display processing (S6417) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 281 is a flow chart showing the pseudo winning display process (S6417).

In the pseudo winning display process (FIG. 281, S6417), first, the display data table corresponding to the received pseudo winning command for display is determined and set in the display data table buffer (S7101). A transfer data table corresponding to the set display data table for pseudo winning to be displayed at the display timing based on the display timing of the pseudo winning display indicated by the received pseudo winning command for display is determined and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Set (S7102).

Next, the data table determination flag is set to ON (S7103), and based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the setting display data table buffer 233d, time data representing the fluctuation time is counted. The counter 233h is set (S7104), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7105).

Thus, based on the pseudo winning command for display output from the sound lamp control device 113, the pseudo winning display is set and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the designated timing. Therefore, various display modes can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and even the same variation pattern can be shown to the player as if they were different display modes.

In this embodiment, the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 selects the contents of the pseudo winning display and the display timing. can be configured to

In addition, in the present embodiment, the display data table for pseudo winning is set, but not limited to this, it is configured to set the display data table for pseudo winning and overwrite it in the already set display data table. may

Returning to FIG. 277, the description continues. In the processing of S6416, if it is determined that there is no pseudo winning command for display (S6416: No), it is determined whether or not there is an error command in the unprocessed commands (S6418), and if there is an error command Otherwise (S6418: Yes), the error command process is executed (S6419), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the error command processing (S6419) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 282 is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the audio lamp controller 114 .

In the error command process, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S7201). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S7202). End the process and return to the command determination process.

In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S7201, the type of error that has occurred is determined from the error determination flag set by the process of S7202, and the error type is handled. A process is executed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image to be displayed.

If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in the process of S7202, error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the people involved in the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence of the error.

Now, return to the description of FIG. If it is determined in the process of S6418 that there is no error command (S6418: No), then the process corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S6420), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

In the process of S6401, which is executed again after each command has been processed, it is again determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes ), and the processing of S6402 to S6420 is executed again. Then, the processing of S6401 to S6420 is repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. End the process.

The simple command determination process (S6308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 276(b)) is also performed in the same manner as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, commands necessary for displaying the power-on image shown in FIG. Extract only the type command, and execute the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 278 (a)) and the stop type command process (see FIG. 278 (b)), which are the processes corresponding to each command, and other A command is discarded without executing the process corresponding to the command.

Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 278(a)) executed in this case, in the processing of S6501, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on varying image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main moving image area 235a and the power-on varying moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S6502, the process of writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 283 and 284, the details of the display setting process (S6303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 283 is a flow chart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 283, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S7301). It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination processing to be executed first, the processing of S7302 to S7304 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S7305. On the other hand, if the new flag is ON (S7301: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination processing, and after setting the new command flag to OFF (S7302), S7303-S7304 , the process corresponding to the new command is executed.

In the processing of S7303, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is ON (S7303). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S7303: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S7304).

Details of the warning image setting process will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 284(a) is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to an error that has occurred on the third pattern display device 81. First, the error determination flag is referred to, and all error determination flags set to ON are displayed. Warning image data for displaying an error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third pattern display device 81 is developed (S7401).

In task processing, based on this expanded warning image data, along with specifying the type of sprite (display object) that makes up the warning image, for each sprite, the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined. Determine the various parameters required.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S7401, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S7402), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Now, return to the description of FIG. After the warning image setting process (S7304), or when it is determined in the process of S7303 that the error occurrence flag is not ON, that is, it is OFF (S7303: No), the process proceeds to S7305.

In S7305, pointer update processing is executed (S7305). Here, the details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. 284(b). FIG. 284(b) is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. This pointer updating process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the respective buffers of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is the process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the address to which it should be applied.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7501). That is, the pointer 233f is basically updated so that it is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is defined after the address "0001H". When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the storage in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the processing of S7501, it is then checked whether the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is End information. is determined (S7502). As a result, if it is End information (S7502: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the substance data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S7503). The time data corresponding to the performance time of the display data table for demonstration set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S7504), the pointer 233f is initialized by setting it to 1 (S7505), and this processing ends. and return to the display setting process. Thus, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed sequentially from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S7503, if it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S7503: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 ( S7506), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is displayed. is always expanded, the third pattern display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S7502, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the End information (S7502: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, return to FIG. 283 to continue the description. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are developed from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7306). In the task processing, based on the drawing contents developed in the processing of S7306 together with the previously developed warning image, etc., the types of sprites (display objects) that make up the image are specified, and the display coordinates are determined for each sprite. Determine various parameters necessary for drawing such as position, magnification, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S7307), and it is determined whether or not the value of the clock counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S7308). Then, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S7308: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S7308: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is time to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the fixed display flag is on. (S7309).

As a result, if the confirmed display flag is off (S7309: No), the confirmed display effect has not yet been performed, and it is time to perform the confirmed display effect. setting (S7310), and then, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the content is cleared (S7311). Then, the time data corresponding to the performance time of the fixed display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S7312), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7313). Then, after the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S7314), the content of the stop symbol discrimination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol discrimination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S7315), returns to V interrupt processing.

Thereby, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, etc., the fixed display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. You can set the drawing contents like this. Further, the effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be easily changed to the fixed display effect only by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the fixed display data table. In addition, compared to the conventional case of changing the display contents by activating another program, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore the MPU 231 is not overloaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various modes of effect images can be displayed on the third pattern display 81. - 特許庁

Incidentally, the last stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S7315 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variable effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before. Until a predetermined time elapses after the start, the pattern offset information from the stop pattern of the fluctuation performance performed one before is described. In the task processing (S6304), until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, from the last stop design determination flag set by S7315, the stop design of the fluctuation production performed one before is specified, and the The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, in the process of S7309, if the fixed display flag is ON instead of OFF (S7309: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is ON (S7316). If the demonstration display flag is off (S7316: No), it means that the value of the clock counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the finalized display effect, so the demonstration display data table is changed to the display data table. The transfer data table buffer 233d is set in the buffer 233d (S7317), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7318). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S7319). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7320), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S7321), this processing is terminated, and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing.

In the process of S7316, if the demonstration display flag is ON (S7316: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the finalized display effect is finished, and that demonstration effect is finished, so the display setting process is finished as it is. and return to V interrupt processing. In this case, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

Note that the simple display setting process (S6309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 276(b)) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, one of the power-on variable images according to the stop pattern set based on the display stop type command is displayed for a predetermined time after the effect time of the power-on variable image ends. 35) is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 285 and 286, the details of the transfer setting process (S6305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 285(a) is a flow chart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S7601). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7601: Yes), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is made. Processing is executed (S7602), the transfer setting processing is terminated, and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing. As a result, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 285(b).

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not turned on as a result of the processing of S7601, that is, if it is turned off (S7601: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video data. It has been transferred to the RAM 235 . In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7603), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 . Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, resident image transfer setting processing (S7602), which is part of the transfer setting processing (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 285(b). FIG. 285(b) is a flow chart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S7602).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not a transfer instruction for untransferred image data has been issued to the image controller 237 (S7701). ), and further determines whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S7702). In the processing of S7702, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer processing is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer processing has ended. . If it is determined by the processing in S7702 that the transfer processing has not ended (S7702: No), the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so this resident image transfer setting processing is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S7702: Yes), the process proceeds to S7703. Also, as a result of the processing of S7701, even if a transfer instruction for the image data that has not been transferred has not been transmitted to the image controller 237 (S7701: No), the process proceeds to S7703.

In the process of S7703, it is determined whether or not all resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S7703). A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so as to transfer the resident image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S7704), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information about the resident target image data that has not been transferred, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident target image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (where the data is transferred). The first address of the area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores it in the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 236 is not in use. , it is transferred to the specified address of the resident video RAM 236 . Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

As a result of the process of S7703, if all the resident target image data have been transferred (S7703: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S7705), and the resident image transfer setting process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 276(b)), the command is executed instead of the simple command determination processing (see S6308 in FIG. Since determination processing (see FIGS. 277 to 282) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 283 to 284(b)) are executed, normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device A normal image is displayed in 81 . Further, subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 286) (see S7601: No in FIG. 285(a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 transfers all resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235, excluding the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be held without overwriting while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in this resident video RAM 235 while the image controller 237 can perform image drawing processing. As a result, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, when drawing the image. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as rear images, third designs, character designs, and error messages, as well as main controller 110, sound lamp controller 113, and display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is immediately resident after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at any timing can be prevented. , high responsiveness can be maintained until the third pattern display device 81 displays some kind of image.

Next, referring to FIG. 286, normal image transfer setting processing (S7603), which is one process of the transfer setting processing (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 286 is a flow chart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S7603).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S7305) of the previously executed display setting process (S6303) is used. Information described in the indicated address is acquired (S7801). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S7802). , and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S7803), furthermore, a transfer start flag, which is provided in the work RAM 233 and indicates that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state, is set to ON (S7804), and the process proceeds to S7805.

Also, in the processing of S7802, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but Null data (S7802: No), the processing of S7803 and S7804 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S7805. In the process of S7805, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S7805), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S7805: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S7806).

In the process of S7806, after setting an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined by the process of S7806 that the transfer process has not ended (S7806: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process, so the normal image transfer setting process is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S7806: Yes), the process proceeds to S7807. Also, as a result of the process of S7805, even if no image data transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer process is completed (S7805: No), the process proceeds to S7807.

In the processing of S7807, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S7807). is turned off (S7808), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the processing of S7803 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the processing proceeds to S7809. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not ON, but OFF (S7807: No), this process ends.

In the processing of S7809, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred has already been stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7809). The determination in the process of S7809 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is read from the stored image data determination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite to be transferred is normal video If it is determined that the image data is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is "OFF", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

As a result of the processing in S7809, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7809: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , the normal image transfer setting process ends. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. can be planned.

On the other hand, if the image data to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S7809 (S7809: No), a transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set (S7810). As a result, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 receives the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (in this case, the transfer destination). The start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is to be stored. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). forward to the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

After the processing of S7810, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S7811), and this normal transfer setting processing ends. The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated by, as described above, setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the image data to be transferred to "on", and by substituting the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are to be stored in the area to "off".

By executing the normal image transfer processing in this way, the processing corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination processing. When the displayed stop type information is determined to be a jackpot stop type, the image data used in the fanfare effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the previously executed command determination processing, the image data used for the back image is stored in the back image of the resident video RAM 235 . Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. , a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. By executing the normal image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 sends data to the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. can be done.

Here, in the transfer data table, the image data to be transferred is stored in the image storage area 236a so that the image data corresponding to the given sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the given sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, thereby obtaining the predetermined address according to the display data table. When the sprite is drawn, the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 287, details of the drawing process (S6306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 287 is a flow chart showing this rendering process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites that make up one frame determined in the task process (S6304) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information , color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the drawing list shown in FIG. 237 is generated (S7901). That is, in the process of S7901, from the types of various sprites forming one frame determined in task processing (S6304), for each sprite, the storage RAM type and address where the image data of the sprite is stored are specified. Then, parameters necessary for the sprite determined by task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, each sprite is rearranged in order from the sprite that should be placed on the backmost side to the sprite that should be placed on the front side in the image for one frame. As drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address in which sprite image data is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the top address (storage source top address) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored as the transfer data information is displayed at the end of the drawing list. , the final address (storage source final address), and the top address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

As described above, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite. , according to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S7902). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. includes information instructing to develop the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws the image in order from the sprite described at the head of the drawing list, and develops it by overwriting in the frame buffer indicated by the drawing object buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the transfer data information is used to determine the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. ) and the head address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and the image data stored from the head address of the storage source to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a are sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination head address of the normal video RAM 236 when the normal video RAM 236 is not in use. The image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 after that, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing object buffer information, and sends the image information along with the drive signal to the third pattern display device 81. Send to As a result, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . In addition, while developing the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display 81, and the drawing process and the display process can be processed simultaneously in parallel. can be done.

In the rendering process, after the process of S7902, the rendering target buffer flag 233j is updated (S7903). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The rendering target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of the image for one frame are completed. This is performed each time the drawing process of the load process (see FIG. 276(b)) is performed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. is executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing processing for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information for the first half is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By specifying these alternately, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing for the image for one frame.

Also, in the above embodiment, the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are provided separately, but instead, the respective devices 113 and 114 may be integrated and provided as one device.

Further, in the above embodiment, first, a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113, and when the command is received by the audio lamp controller 113, the audio lamp controller 113 transmits the command to the display controller 114. A command to be issued is determined and then sent from the audio lamp controller 113 to the display controller 114 . On the other hand, first, a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114, and when the command is received by the display control device 114, the command to be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 is determined in the display control device 114. After that, a command may be transmitted from the display control device 114 to the audio lamp control device 113 .

In the above embodiment, the image controller 237 transfers image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the MPU 231 may directly access the character ROM 234 , read image data from the character ROM 234 , and transfer it to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 . In this case, the MPU 231 temporarily stores the image data read from the character ROM 234 in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the MPU 231 determines whether or not the transfer destination resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 is unused. If unused, the image data may be transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 as the transfer destination.

In this case, whether or not the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 of the transfer destination is unused is determined by the image controller 237 accessing the resident video RAM 235 (that is, being in use). and a normal video RAM access flag (not shown) indicating that the image controller 237 is accessing the normal video RAM 236 (that is, that it is in use). ) is provided in the image controller 237, and the MPU 231 may check the access flag corresponding to the transfer destination buffer RAM.

Alternatively, the signals transmitted and received between the image controller 237 and the resident video RAM 235 or the signals transmitted and received between the image controller 237 and the normal video RAM 236 are monitored by the MPU 231, and the resident It may be confirmed whether or not the video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are unused. Alternatively, when the image controller 237 starts accessing the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, or terminates the access, the image controller 237 notifies the MPU 231 of the information at any time so that the MPU 231 can Based on the notification, it may be determined whether or not the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are unused.

Alternatively, when the image controller 237 scans the third pattern display device 81, the MPU 231 confirms the driving state of the image controller 237 or notifies from the image controller 237 whether or not the scanning is during the blank period. and when the scanning state is in the blank period, it may be determined that each of the video RAMs 235 and 236 is unused. As a result, the image controller 237 checks only the scanning state of the third pattern display device 81 and judges whether or not it is unused, so that judgment can be easily made.

In this case, the MPU 231 stores transfer data that is not null data at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e or the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. If the information exists, image data may be read out from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 according to the transfer data information. Here, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table or the like. Since it is defined for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data according to the transfer data information defined in this transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, etc., the sprite can be drawn. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for normal operation can be stored in the normal video RAM 236 without fail. Using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

The process of reading out the image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring it to the normal video RAM 236 may be performed in the display main process executed by the MPU 231 or in the loop of the main process. As a result, the MPU 231 can execute image data transfer processing using the time during which important processing such as command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in the display control device 114 is not being performed. Further, since the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing are executed with priority over the display main processing and the like, the MPU 231 can process the image data without affecting the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing. transfer processing can be executed.

In the above-described embodiment, the MPU 231 does not manage each video RAM by using the addresses of each of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. Each video RAM may be managed by assigning a different address area to each video RAM in the address system provided. In this way, the MPU 231 does not directly specify the video RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) to be accessed from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, but simply specifies an address. Image controller 237 can determine whether the designated area is for resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 . That is, when the MPU 231 designates the video RAM to be accessed and the address of the area of the video RAM to the image controller 237, it suffices to designate the address set in the common address system. It is possible to simplify the structure of the instruction that makes the specification. For example, in the drawing list sent from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, the address set in the common address system is simply used as the information indicating the storage destination of the sprite data without including the storage RAM type. Since it is only necessary to specify the storage destination address, the configuration of the drawing list can be simplified.

In the above embodiment, the case where the character ROM 234 is directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) that connects the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 has been described. 237 may be provided. A bridge circuit is provided to convert the input/output specifications of the character ROM 234 to the input/output specifications of the mask ROM, and the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit. good too.

By providing this bridge circuit, the existing image controller 237 or internal bus (bus line 240) designed on the assumption that a general mask ROM is used as the character ROM can be used as it is, and the NAND type flash memory 234a can be used. A configured character ROM 234 can be connected. Even when the character ROM 234 is connected via the image controller 237 or a bridge circuit, the MPU 231 may be configured to directly access the character ROM 234 .

In the above embodiment, the case where the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this, and is composed of a large-capacity and inexpensive non-volatile storage means such as a hard disk. may be Such a large-capacity and inexpensive storage means generally has a slow read speed, but by configuring the display control device 114 as described in the above embodiment, the image can be displayed at the desired time without problems. be able to.

In the above embodiment, the character ROM 234 is provided with the NOR type ROM 234d, and the first program storage area 234d1 stores a part of the boot program that is executed first in the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. The first program storage area is provided in a memory constituted by a non-volatile storage medium capable of read operation at a higher speed than the NAND flash memory 234a, and the first program storage area is stored in the area after the system reset is released in the MPU 231. part of the boot program to be executed in the . For example, in place of the NOR type ROM 234d, the character ROM 234 may be provided with FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), MRAM (Magnetoresistive RAM), or PRAM (Phase change RAM), and a first program storage area may be provided in the character ROM 234. A part of the boot program that is executed first may be stored.

In the above embodiment, the NOR type ROM 234d connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) is provided with the first program storage area 234d1. However, the memory is not necessarily limited to this, and the internal bus (bus line 240) is a memory configured by a non-volatile storage medium capable of read operation at a higher speed than the NAND flash memory 234a. , the memory may be provided with a first program storage area, and a part of the boot program that is first executed in the MPU 231 after the system reset is released may be stored in the area. For example, in place of the NOR type ROM 234d, FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), MRAM (Magnetoresistive RAM), PRAM (Phase change RAM), or the like is provided on the internal bus (bus line 240), and a first program storage area is provided on the internal bus (bus line 240). may store part of the boot program that is executed first after the system reset is released.

In the above embodiment, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is designated as "0000H", the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c. After that, the case where the data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240) has been described. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b detects that power is turned on from the power supply device 115, the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c, and then When the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is designated as "0000H", the data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address is read out from the buffer RAM 234c and transferred to the internal bus (bus line 240). 240) to the MPU 231. In this case, when the MPU 231 designates the address "0000H" to the internal bus (bus line 240) after releasing the system reset, is the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 already set in the buffer RAM 234c? Since it is in the process of being set, the character ROM 234 can output the corresponding data (instruction code) with less delay after the MPU 231 designates the address "0000H". Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the display main processing can be started in the MPU 231 in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the display control device 114 or the third pattern display device 81 can be immediately started. can be done.

In addition, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address specified in the internal bus (bus line 240) specifies the control program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program storage area 234d1 The data (instruction code) corresponding to the specified address may be directly read out from the MPU 231 and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240). As a result, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", so that the display main processing can be started in the MPU 231 in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the display control device 114 or the third pattern display device 81 can be immediately started. can be done. In this case, the process of setting the control program (boot program) stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c may not be performed. Thereby, power consumption in the character ROM 234 can be suppressed.

In the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 is connected to the image controller 237 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. A direct connection to line 240) may also be provided. When the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, the resident video RAM 235 may be connected to the bridge circuit. If the resident video RAM 235 is connected to the bridge circuit, even if the existing image controller 237 or the internal bus (bus line 240) is not configured to directly connect the resident video RAM 235, the resident video RAM 235 can be connected directly. RAM 235 can be easily provided in display controller 114 .

In the above embodiment, the display control device 114 is provided with one resident video RAM 235 and one normal video RAM 236. However, the number of video RAMs is not limited to this, and may be increased. A video RAM may be provided. Alternatively, a plurality of resident video RAMs may be provided, image data corresponding to images corresponding to various modes may be resident in each of them, and the resident video RAM to be used may be selected according to the mode.

In the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are composed of a 1-port type (one input/output port) DRAM has been described. type of RAM may be used. As a result, writing to and reading from the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 can be performed at the same time. It is possible to parallelize the process of writing the image data to the normal video RAM 236 . Therefore, it is possible to suppress the possibility that the drawing process is delayed due to the writing of the image data.

In the above embodiment, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by different memories. It may be divided so that the same contents as those of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are stored in each area. In addition, when the resident area and the normal area are configured in one RAM, the input/output port of the memory is prevented from being occupied by either the resident area or the normal area during read or write processing. , it is desirable to use a multi-port type RAM.

The type of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 in the above embodiment is an example, and the type may be appropriately set according to the content of the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. . In this case, in response to a command received from main controller 110 or sound lamp controller 113 or other input from the outside, image data corresponding to an image to be immediately displayed on third pattern display device 81 is at least stored for resident use. It is preferably resident in video RAM 235 .

In the above embodiment, a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 and made resident. You may In this case, the image data stored in the temporary character ROM 234 does not exist in the resident video RAM 235, so the normal video RAM 236 is used as a dedicated memory for storing drawn image data obtained by drawing by the image controller 237. may

In the above embodiment, the resident video RAM 235 has been described as a case where its contents are kept without being overwritten while the power is turned on. The image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 may be overwritten and updated on a predetermined occasion, such as when the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is greatly changed based on the command received from the good. In this case, while the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, a predetermined transition image may be displayed as a transition period. Further, the image data corresponding to the transition image is stored in the resident video RAM 235 when the power is turned on, and is kept held in the resident video RAM 235 without being updated even when other resident images are updated. You can leave it. While the transition image is being displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read image data to be newly resident, and transfers the read image data to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a. The data may be transferred while not in use (that is, while the image data corresponding to the transitional image is not read). Alternatively, while the transition image is being displayed, the MPU 231 transmits to the image controller 237 a transfer instruction (transfer data information) for image data to be newly resident, and the image controller 237 sends the transfer instruction (transfer data). image data to be resident is read from the character ROM 234 according to data information) and transferred via the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is not in use (that is, while the image data corresponding to the transition image is not being read). You may make it

When the resident video RAM 235 is updated, the image data corresponding to the transition image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in advance, and the transition image is generated using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236. It may be displayed on the 3-symbol display device 81 . While the transition image is being displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234, reads image data to be newly resident, and transfers the read image data via the buffer RAM 237a. good too. Alternatively, the image controller 237, which receives an instruction to transfer the image data to be resident from the MPU 231, accesses the character ROM 234, reads the image data to be newly resident, and transfers the read image data via the buffer RAM 237a. You may do so. By updating the contents of the resident video RAM 235 while the transition image is being displayed, the resident video RAM 235 can be updated without making the player feel uncomfortable.

In the above-described embodiment, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are resident, a RAM judgment value for judging whether the data in the resident video RAM 235 is normal or not is stored when the power failure is resolved. In the display main processing or main processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 after power-on, the RAM determination value is checked before starting to transfer main image data at power-on from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, If the RAM determination value is a normal value, it means that image data to be resident in resident video RAM 235 continues to be stored normally. It may be configured to In this case, the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 may be disabled by turning off the simple image display flag. As a result, even if a system reset is input to the display control device 114 due to the occurrence of an instantaneous power failure, and the MPU 231 starts executing the main display process or the main process, the data in the resident video RAM 235 can be stored normally. In this case, image data can be prevented from being wastefully transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the time required for recovery from power failure can be shortened. In particular, since the character ROM 234 is composed of the character ROM 234a with a slow read speed, it takes a long time to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. FIG. On the other hand, by storing the RAM determination value in the resident video RAM 235 as in the present modification, if the data in the resident video RAM 235 remains normal due to a momentary power failure or the like, it is possible to transfer the image data. Since the time can be shortened, the normal effect image can be immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加Therefore, the player can immediately start the game. The RAM determination value may be a checksum value of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235, for example. Further, instead of the RAM determination value, whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235 is correctly stored may be used to determine the validity of the data.

In the above embodiment, the case where the buffer RAM 237a is provided inside the image controller 237 has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this, and may be provided outside the image controller 237. FIG. For example, the buffer RAM may be configured independently and configured to be directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240). Further, when the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, a buffer RAM may be provided in the bridge circuit. Furthermore, the resident video RAM 235 may be directly connected to the bridge circuit with the buffer RAM. In this case, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 connected to the bridge circuit to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM provided in the bridge circuit. transfer can be performed efficiently without being affected by

In the above embodiment, the storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a is set to one block of the NAND flash memory 234a. For example, among the scanning periods of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, the buffer The storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a may be such that the image data transfer from the RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 can be completed. As a result, transfer of image data from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 can be reliably performed by utilizing the unused periods of the video RAMs 235 and 236 that occur during this blank period. .

In the above embodiment, the case where one buffer RAM 237a is provided has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and two or more buffer RAMs may be provided. In this case, while image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one buffer RAM, image data stored in another buffer RAM is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236. may be configured. Also, one buffer RAM is divided into two or more areas, and while image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one area, another area in which image data is stored is stored. The image data may be transferred from the area to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 . In either case, the writing of the image data read from the character ROM 234 into the buffer RAM and the transfer of the image data written into the buffer RAM to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 are performed in parallel. The time required for the processing can be shortened.

In the above embodiment, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. The corresponding image data may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. As a result, image data corresponding to the power-on main image stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used to display the power-on main image while transferring the image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . can do. Since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 during this period, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the use state of the resident video RAM 235. Transfer can be completed quickly, and processing can be simplified.

Similarly, in the above embodiment, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on varying image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. 235b, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. As a result, by using the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image stored in the normal video RAM 236, the third symbol display device 81 is caused to display the power-on image, while the character ROM 234 Image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred. Since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 during this period, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the use state of the resident video RAM 235. Transfer can be completed quickly, and processing can be simplified.

In the above embodiment, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a. Since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while the image data corresponding to . may be directly transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on. After the power is turned on, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used to turn on the power. If the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by displaying the main image, The image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. As a result, the transfer of image data can be completed more quickly without going through the buffer RAM 237a.

Similarly, in the above embodiment, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation of the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a. Although the case of transferring to the image area 235b has been described, while the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is being transferred, image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235. The image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image are directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and power-on varying image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. good too. Further, image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on, and the power-on main image and the power-on main image stored in the normal video RAM 236 are stored in the normal video RAM 236 . By causing the third pattern display device 81 to display the image at power-on using the image data corresponding to the variable image, the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. If the image data is not read out from the character ROM 234, the image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. As a result, the transfer of image data can be completed more quickly without going through the buffer RAM 237a.

In the above-described embodiment, when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the sound lamp control device 113 generates the back image change command and the frame button operation command, and the display control device 114 generates the back image change command and the frame button. Although the case of changing the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the effect mode of Super Reach based on the operation command has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the sound lamp control device 113 grasps the game state of the gaming machine 10 based on the content of the command received from the main control device 110, and according to the game state, for example, according to the change of the game state, A back image change command or a game state command may be generated. As a result, the display control device 114 can change the back image and the effect mode of super ready-to-win according to the game state based on the back image change command and the game state command. Further, the display control device 114 may directly grasp the game state of the gaming machine 10 and change the back image and the effect mode of super ready-to-win according to the game state. Then, the rear image after the change or image data corresponding to at least a partial range of the rear image corresponding to the super reach of the effect mode after the change is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. , the rear image can be immediately displayed from the resident range using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c.

Further, the display control device 114 may change the rear image according to the specifications of the display data table, the transfer data table, the additional data table, and the composite data table. In this case, the image data corresponding to the changed rear image is transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, composite data table, and display data table. You may Here, when the image data of the rear image is transferred according to the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the synthesized data table, or the display data table, the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original rear image is stored is stored. The transfer data information of the transfer data table may be defined so that the new rear image is stored in the sub-area. The transfer data information in the transfer data table may be defined such that a new rear image is stored in another area. In the latter case, when returning the back image to the original back image that was selected and displayed by the player, there is no need to transfer the image data corresponding to the original back image. An increase in load can be suppressed.

Further, in the above embodiment, the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the sound lamp control device 113, and when a vibration error is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, an error command is sent to the display control device 114. Although the case where the warning image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 by the display control device 114 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Control device 110 may detect a vibration error, and main control device 110 may transmit an error command notifying the error to either audio lamp control device 113 or display control device 114 . When an error command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113, the audio lamp control device 113 receives the error command and further transmits an error command notifying the error to the display control device 114. may

On the other hand, the output signal of the vibration sensor may be input to the display control device 114 so that the display control device 114 detects the presence or absence of a vibration error. Then, when a vibration error is detected, the error generation flag is turned on, and the error determination flag corresponding to the vibration error is turned on, so that the error generation flag is turned on in the display setting process (see FIG. 283). A warning image may be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by executing the warning image setting process (see FIG. 284(a)) when is determined. In this case, since it becomes unnecessary to transmit and receive an error command from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114, the warning image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 more quickly.

Further, in the above embodiment, the vibration sensor is attached to the back surface of the game board 13, but instead of the vibration sensor or together with the vibration sensor, a magnet sensor is attached to the back surface of the game board 13. good too. This magnet sensor is a sensor for detecting the magnetic field applied to the game board in order to prevent the flow of balls from being changed by a magnetic field such as a magnet and intentionally entering the ball entrance. , and the output signal of the magnet sensor may be input to any one of the main controller 110 , the sound lamp controller 113 and the display controller 114 . When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the main controller 110, when the main controller 110 determines that the magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field error is corrected. A signaling error command may be sent from the main controller 110 via the audio lamp controller 113 or directly to the display controller 114 . Further, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the sound ramp control device 113, when the sound ramp control device 113 determines that the magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field An error command may be sent from the audio lamp controller 113 to the display controller 114 to communicate the error. In the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 of the display control device 113, image data corresponding to the error message image for notifying the magnetic field error by the display of the third pattern display device 81 is resident. , and when receiving an error command that conveys a magnetic field error from the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 113 may display the warning image on the third pattern display device 81. Further, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the display control device 110, when the display control device 114 determines that the magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the display control device 113 , the warning image may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by turning on the error occurrence flag and setting the error type flag corresponding to the magnetic field error to on. As a result, when the display control device 114 receives an error command from the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113, or grasps the occurrence of a magnetic field error based on the output signal from the magnet sensor, the character ROM 234 Even in the case of the NAND flash memory 234a, the error message image resident in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 is used to display the error message image informing the magnetic field error without delay as the third pattern. It can be displayed on the display device 81 . Therefore, when a magnetic field is applied to the game board by the player, the magnetic field error is immediately notified by displaying an error message image by the third symbol display device 81, thereby preventing the player from making illegal actions. can be deterred.

In the case where the additional data table or the display data table defines the drawing contents necessary to change the color tone of part or all of one effect, the additional data table or the display data table can be used in the third pattern display device 81 to The type of sprite whose color tone is to be changed and the type of sprite whose color tone is to be changed at that time are associated with addresses that are expressed in units of the time (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) during which an image for a frame is displayed. It may define color information that designates color tone. Then, the MPU 231 designates the type of sprite whose color tone is to be changed to the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the additional drawing contents specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d, and the color tone after the change in the sprite. If the color information to be used is specified, the color information of the corresponding sprite type specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the drawing contents specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed. A drawing list may be created by replacing with color information defined by the additional drawing contents of the data table. As a result, the image controller 237 can draw an image while changing the color tone of the sprite based on the color information defined by the additional data table.

In addition, when the display data table defines the drawing contents necessary for changing and displaying the image displayed in one effect, the display data table allows the third symbol display device 81 to display the image for one frame. is displayed as one unit (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). It may define the drawing information of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the MPU 231 stores the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, and If the drawing information of the sprite to be newly displayed is defined, various sprites defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the drawing contents defined in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Instead of the sprite to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed and the drawing information of the sprite may be included in the drawing list. As a result, the image controller 237 can draw an image including a sprite to be newly displayed.

In the above embodiment, the display data table includes the transfer data information of the image data that is required when drawing an image according to the drawing content defined in the display data table. Transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of image data required when drawing an image according to the additional drawing content defined in the display data table may be included. In this case, the additional transfer data information is associated with identification information ("additional effect 1", "additional effect 2", etc.) for identifying effects that can be additionally displayed for each address, and is added. It may be defined together with the drawing content or separately from the additional drawing content. Then, when the effect to be additionally displayed is determined, the MPU 231 creates a drawing list including the additional drawing content and the additional transfer data information associated with the identification information corresponding to the determined effect. can be configured to

As a result, the image controller 237 can transfer the sprite image data to be used for drawing according to the additional drawing content to the normal video RAM 236 in advance according to the drawing list before the image data is used. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the effect to be additionally displayed can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 easily and reliably. Further, by using the additional transfer data information specified in the display data table, necessary image data can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while instructing the drawing of an image based on the additional drawing content. The drawing of many sprites can be specified by additional drawing contents. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND-type flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the third pattern display device 81 can display various effects.

In the above-described embodiment, in the display table corresponding to the variation pattern that allows the player to select super reach, the drawing contents corresponding to all super reach that can be selected by the player are defined in the display data table, Although the case of specifying only the drawing content corresponding to the super reach selected by is described, it is not necessarily limited to this, and the drawing content corresponding to the selected super reach is added to the display data table. may As a result, it is possible to easily specify the drawing contents of the super reach selected by the player. In addition, since it is not necessary to prescribe drawing contents corresponding to all super reach in the display data table, it is possible to suppress the data size of the display data table from increasing.

In the above embodiment, the case where the display data table includes the drawing content and the transfer data information has been described, but the display data table is not necessarily limited to this. However, the additional drawing content of the effect to be additionally displayed may be defined in the additional data table. In this case, an additional data table buffer may be provided in the work RAM 233, and when a performance to be additionally displayed is determined, an additional data table corresponding to the performance may be set in the additional data table buffer. . Further, even if the additional data table defines not only the additional drawing content but also the transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of the image data necessary for drawing the image according to the additional drawing content. good. As a result, it is possible to specify the drawing content of the effect to be additionally displayed using the additional data table and the transfer data information of the image necessary for the drawing, so that the additional data table and the transfer data table for addition can be used to specify The processing load required for the specification can be reduced compared to the case of specifying the drawing content and the transfer data information respectively.

In the above embodiment, the case where the display data table is prepared for each variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command in the display control device 114 has been described. Prepare a display data table for each element such as "variation startup", "high-speed variation", "notice effect", "normal reach", "super reach", and according to the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command After specifying the elements necessary for the variable performance, the display data tables corresponding to the paper required for the specified variable performance are combined into one to generate the final periodic display data table corresponding to the variation pattern. You may do so. "Variable start-up", "High-speed fluctuation", "Normal reach", etc. are often displayed in common with each fluctuation pattern. Therefore, the data table can be provided efficiently by dividing the variable effect into elements and preparing the display data table corresponding to each element.

In the above embodiment, a common pointer 233f is used in the display data table and the transfer data table, and the drawing content and transfer data information are specified from the address indicated by the pointer 233f. A pointer may be provided.

In the above embodiment, the image controller 237 transmits the V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 at each display interval (every 20 milliseconds in the above embodiment) of the image for one frame at which drawing processing ends. However, the image controller 237 may transmit this V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 each time the third pattern display device 81 is driven to display an image for one frame. The third pattern display device 81 is driven so that one frame of image is always displayed at equal time intervals (20 millisecond intervals). By sending a , the time interval can be kept accurate without timing.

In the above-described embodiment, the image controller 237 identifies the frame buffer to which the rendered image should be developed based on the rendering target buffer information transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image information rendered earlier from the other frame buffer. is read out and sent to the third pattern display device 81, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. are alternately selected, and the previously developed image information is read out from a frame buffer different from the selected frame buffer and transmitted to the third pattern display device 81 . Also, every time the image controller 237 transmits image information for one frame to the third pattern display device 81, it outputs the image information to the frame buffer in which the drawn image should be developed and to the third pattern display device 81. You may make it replace with the frame buffer which carries out.

In the above-described embodiment, after the fixed display data table corresponding to the fixed display effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d, by the time the fixed display effect ends, the main controller 110 through the sound lamp control device 113 When neither the variation pattern command (variation pattern command for display) nor the demonstration command (demonstration command for display) is received, the demonstration display data table corresponding to the demonstration effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d As explained above, the fixed display data table corresponding to the fixed display effect may be set in the display data table buffer 233d again. Also, in this case, until either the variation pattern command (variation pattern command for display) or the demo command (demonstration command for display) is received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113, the finalized display effect is not performed. Each time it ends, the confirmed display data table corresponding to the confirmed display effect may be reset in the display data table buffer 233d. This allows the third symbol display device 81 to continue displaying the fixed display effect until the variation pattern command or the demonstration command is received from the main control device 110 .

In the above embodiment, the explanation has been given for the case where the demonstration effect is to change the back image and to stop display the third pattern composed of the main patterns to which the numbers "0" to "9" are not attached. The present invention is not limited to this, and a third pattern consisting of main patterns with numbers or main patterns without numbers may be stopped and displayed in a translucent state. Alternatively, only the rear image may be changed without displaying the third pattern. Also, a character or a back image that is completely different from the third pattern or the back image used in the variable display may be displayed.

In the above-described embodiment, after the power is turned on, the display control means 114 first transfers image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 and the power-on main image area 235a. When transferring to the time-varying image area 235b, displaying the main image at the time of power-on on the third pattern display device 81 after the transfer is completed, and then transferring the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, after the power is turned on, the display control means 114 first transfers only the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235. After the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the image data to be resident including the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. As a result, the main image when the power is turned on can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 sooner after the power is turned on. It can be immediately confirmed that the operation has started without any problems when the power is turned on.

In this case, the MPU 231 may monitor completion of transfer of image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b. As a result, if a display variation pattern command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 after the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is stored in the power-on variation image area 235b, the display variation pattern command is received. Based on this, it is possible to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display a simple variable display using the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image stored in the power-on variable image area 235b. It is desirable to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on varying image to the power-on varying image area 235b immediately after the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. As a result, it is possible to quickly perform the variable display using the power-on variable image.

In the above embodiment, the display data table and the transfer data table correspond to the time expressed in units of 20 milliseconds, and the content of the image to be drawn at that time (drawing content) and the content of the image to be transferred at that time. Although a case has been described in which image data information (transfer data information) is specified, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, as long as the display content is specified for each predetermined time interval. This predetermined time interval may be set according to the frame rate of the third pattern display device 81 . For example, when the frame rate of the third pattern display device 81 is 30 fps, that is, when the third pattern display device 81 displays an image of 30 frames per second, the third pattern display device 81 is 1/30 Since one frame image is displayed every second, the display data table may define the display contents for every 1/30 second interval.

Also, in the display data table, as the sprite type to be drawn defined at each predetermined time interval, the sprite type itself is not indicated, but the address of the character ROM 234 where the image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored. may be specified. In the display control device 114, the image data corresponding to the sprite type to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is read from the character ROM 234. Therefore, the character ROM 234 stores the image data of the sprite type in association with each sprite type. manages the addresses of Therefore, in the display data table, if the address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the sprite type is defined as the display content defined for each predetermined time interval, the sprite can be associated with each sprite type. Since there is no need to manage both the information specifying the character and the address of the character ROM 234, the processing load can be reduced.

In the above embodiment, the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114 is provided with the stored image data determination flag 233i, and whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is stored for each sprite. Although the case has been described, instead of this, the work RAM 233 may store information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a. In this case, when instructing transfer of image data of a predetermined sprite type, the MPU 231 refers to the information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a stored in the work RAM 233, and transfers the predetermined image data. is already stored in the image storage area 236a, and if not stored, an instruction to transfer the image data of the predetermined sprite type may be set. Further, when the MPU 231 sets an instruction to transfer image data of a predetermined sprite type, the MPU 231 stores information indicating the sprite type for which the transfer instruction is set in the work RAM 233, and the image data of the sprite type is stored. The information indicating the sprite type stored in the sub-area of the image storage area 236a may be deleted.

In the above embodiment, when image data of a predetermined sprite type is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the image data of the sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236 based on the storage image data determination flag 233i. The MPU 231 determines whether or not the image data of the predetermined sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236, and if the image data of the predetermined sprite type is stored, the MPU 231 performs the processing of not executing the transfer processing. The processing may be performed by the image controller 237 . In this case, a flag equivalent to the stored image data determination flag 233i is prepared in the work RAM provided in the image controller 237, and whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite is determined. may be stored. Also, the work RAM provided in the image controller 237 may store the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 . In this case, if image data of a predetermined sprite type needs to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal-use video RAM 236, the MPU 231 sends the image controller 237 regardless of the image data storage state in the normal-use video RAM 236. On the other hand, transfer data information of the image data may be transmitted.

In the above-described embodiment, only the image data corresponding to the "back side A" among the plurality of back side images is resident in the back side image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Image data corresponding to two or more back images may be resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. FIG. For example, the image data of the rear image used in part of super reach may be resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. FIG. In particular, by making the back image of Super Reach, which appears frequently or is expected to be high, resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, image data transfer processing from the character ROM 737 to the normal video RAM 536 is executed. It is possible to suppress the number of times

In the above embodiment, the transfer data table or the display data table defines the image data transfer command in association with the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and the MPU 231 outputs the transfer command at a predetermined time defined by the display pointer. Although the image controller 237 is controlled so as to transfer the image data instructed by the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the display data table is not necessarily limited to this. Information about the sprite type required in the table is described, and the MPU 231 transfers the necessary image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 based on the information described at the top of the display data table. 237 may be controlled. Alternatively, based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 determines the sprite type to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in response to the command, and the image data of the image type is normally displayed from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 may be controlled to transfer to the video RAM 236 for use.

In the above embodiment, the case where the color tone of a part of the image on the back surface C, which is the back image of the “island stage”, changes with time has been described. good. In addition, the back image is not limited to one that scrolls or changes color tone with the passage of time. It may be something that moves or changes.

In the above embodiment, the main control device 110, the information of various counters (special hit random number counter C1, special hit type counter C2) acquired at the time of start winning notified to the sound lamp control device 113, to the pending ball number command Although the case of inclusion has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this, and information on various counters (special winning random number counter C1, special winning type counter C2) acquired at the time of starting winning by another command is sent to the sound lamp control device 113 may notify you.

In the above-described embodiment, when the variable effect is executed, the case of displaying the high-speed variation in which all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are scrolled at such a high speed that the player cannot visually recognize them has been described. , all the patterns Z1 to Z3 may be reduced to an unrecognizable degree and displayed, or all the patterns Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as snow noise-like images in which a large number of white dots are randomly displayed.

In the above embodiment, the case where the game board 13 is provided with one first starting port 64a for starting the lottery for the special symbol jackpot when a ball is entered has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Instead, the game board 13 may be provided with a plurality of (for example, two) first ball entrances, each of which is independently detected to start a jackpot lottery. In this case, when there is a hold at each of the first ball entrances, the number of held ball commands sent by the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 indicate which of the first ball entrances is being held. May contain information. In addition, the variation pattern command that the main controller 110 transmits to the sound ramp control device 113 when starting the variation also includes information indicating which of the first entrances is the suspended variation effect. good. As a result, in the voice lamp control device 113, a holding ball counter is prepared for each first ball entrance, and when a holding ball number command is received, the first ball entering indicated by the holding ball number command is received. When the number of held balls is set in the number of held balls counter for the mouth and a variation pattern command is received, if the number of held balls counter for the first entrance indicated by the variation pattern command is decremented by 1, the first entrance The number of held balls can be counted every time.

In the above embodiment, each time the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d in the main controller 110 is updated (that is, each time it increases or decreases), the main controller 110 issues a reserved ball number command. Although the case of transmitting from the control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, only when the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203 d in the main controller 110 increases, the main controller 110 transmits the reserved number command to the sound lamp controller 113 . Further, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to decrease the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b by 1 when receiving the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 . As a result, the number of times master controller 110 transmits a hold number command to audible lamp controller 113 and the number of times audible lamp controller 113 receives a hold number command can be reduced. The control load of the audio ramp control device 113 can be reduced.

In the above embodiment, winning to the first starting port 64a and passage through the through gate 67 are each suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of suspended balls is not limited to four. , 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of pending balls for variable display based on the winning to the first starting port 64a is changed in part of the third pattern display device 81 by numbers or by the number of held balls in the areas divided into four. It may be displayed in a form (for example, color or lighting pattern), and a light-emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first pattern display device 37, and the number of reserved balls is notified by the light-emitting member. may be configured.

Further, as shown in the above embodiment, the variable display, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to vertically scrolling the pattern as identification information on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. It may be performed by moving and displaying a pattern along a predetermined path such as a direction or an L shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the pattern. It also includes the production display etc. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

<Second control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 288 to 306. FIG. In addition to the content described for the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment described above, in the second control example, an effect is executed to give points to the player, and the points are used to determine whether the special symbols are appropriate or not. , a control example in a configuration in which the content of the reach can be selected by consuming the points owned by the player himself/herself will be mainly described. Note that the description of the same contents as in the first control example will be omitted. In addition, in the second control example, there are portions that are explained by control processing in which the effects and the like explained in the first control example are deleted, but they are omitted for convenience of explanation, and of course the first control example In addition to all the contents described in 1. above, the contents of the second control example may be added. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the first control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

An example of the point acquisition effect and the point consumption effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 288 to 291. FIG. FIG. 288 is an example of a point acquisition effect. In this control example, in addition to the prize balls paid out to the player when a game ball enters a jackpot game or a general winning slot, points (number bonuses) are given as a bonus for performance. is given, and a point effect is executed in which the given points are accumulated.

FIGS. 288(a) and 288(b) are one of the variation patterns determined by the sound lamp control device 113, and show part of the display mode of the point acquisition effect variation pattern in which execution of the point acquisition effect is set. It is a diagram. This point acquisition effect variation pattern is a variation pattern determined by lottery based on a variation pattern command obtained from the main controller 110 when the result of the win/loss determination is hit or miss. In the case of winning, it is composed of a variation pattern (dynamic display mode) that is displayed with a pattern (combination of the same squares in the third pattern) that finally informs that it is a win, and in the case of losing is composed of a variation pattern displayed by a pattern (the third pattern is a combination of loose stitches other than square stitches) that finally informs that it is out.

FIG. 288(a) is a diagram showing a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when execution of the point acquisition effect is started in the point acquisition effect variation pattern. This point acquisition effect is set to start in the middle of the variation pattern execution period (dynamic display period) regardless of whether the player wins or loses, and the displayed third symbol is hidden or A semi-transparent point acquisition performance is displayed in an easily visible state, and together with the display of a tornado, information values (numeric patterns) indicating a plurality of point values are displayed rotating like a tornado. In the same display area, a hero character 811b facing a tornado is displayed, and a plurality of (for example, four) swords are displayed above the hero's head. In the example of FIG. 288(a), four swords (a1 to a4) are displayed. It is notified that the effect is such that the player can acquire the point value by stabbing the point value with the sword against the numerous point values displayed rotating together with the tornado. In addition, in the lower part of the display area, the characters "Get points!" It is reported in an easy-to-understand manner that it is an effect in which it is reported that one of the rotating point values will be given to the player. In addition, the total point value currently acquired by the player is displayed in a total point display area Dm20 formed in the lower left corner of the display area (upper part of the display area Ds for the pending symbols being executed) (see FIG. 288(a) example, the current point is 500 points).

FIG. 288(b) shows that in the point acquisition effect, the swords displayed above the hero's head are thrown toward the point value (flying effect), and the effect is executed in which each sword pierces the point value. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when

In the example of FIG. 288(b), sword a1 pierces a point value of 100 points, sword a2 a point value of 20 points, sword a3 a point value of 50 points, and sword a4 a point value of 70 points. is indicated. The total point value acquired by the four swords is displayed in the lower part of the display area with the characters "240 points GET!!". Then, as the total value displayed in the total point display area Dm20, "740" obtained by adding the point value "240" acquired this time to the point value "500" shown in FIG. 288(a) is displayed. there is

Although the details will be described later, in this control example, the timing at which points are given to the player is mainly during the special symbol fluctuation period, and the timing at which the special symbol lottery result is displayed (variation display period period from just before the end of the lottery to the time of confirmation), it is displayed according to the period in which the advance notice display suggesting the lottery result is executed. The lottery result of the special pattern that has started to fluctuate and the result of the lottery result of the special pattern that has been reserved (pre-discrimination result) before the start of fluctuation (pre-reading result) as one of the selection information, the point value is The advance notice effect that is selected and given to the player is executed.

It is configured such that a higher point value is more likely to be determined in the case of variable display or in the case that the stored result of determination of whether or not the game is a hit is a win than in the case of a loss. As a result, by displaying a notice mode of a high point value, it is possible to expect that the lottery result of the changing special pattern or the reserved and stored special pattern is a win, and the fluctuation of the special pattern. In addition, the game can be played with the expectation of winning against the already stored reserved balls. That is, the advance notice display effect that gives the player the point value displayed as the notice display is not only the special symbols of the displayed variation, but also the lottery results of the special symbols that are displayed variably across a plurality of variations. It is a notice display effect for the game, and it is possible to make the player expect to respond to the notice effect for a longer period.

In addition, although the point value is awarded, even if there is no winning in the change or the lottery result of the reserved and stored special symbols, the awarded point value is accumulated and the awarded point value is executed later. It can be used for effects using the point value (such as the effect of selecting the reach mode using the point value), and the larger the total accumulated point value, the higher the expectation of the jackpot. It is configured so that the player can select a high reach display mode using the point value.

As a result, in a state in which the total value of the accumulated point values is large, when the reach selection variation pattern that allows the player to select the type of reach display mode using the point value is executed, the player can It is possible to give a high expectation to the jackpot game. Therefore, the effect in which the point value is given is not only for notifying the player of the variation of the special symbol and the lottery result of the reserved special symbol. Alternatively, it is also used to inform the future lottery result when a game ball enters the second winning hole 640 and a lottery is executed, so that the player can expect to win for a long period of time.

Although details will be described later, the display data of the point values displayed together with the tornado of the point acquisition effect displayed in FIG. 114, and when the display timing of the point acquisition effect comes by the sound lamp control device 113, a sword (a1 to A point value to be stuck in a4) is determined respectively.

Specifically, the point values that are the basis for the variation start timing of the point acquisition effect variation pattern (variation pattern of the point consumption effect) are the first basic point value, the second basic point value (low), and the second basic point value (high). ) is determined. At the start of the fluctuation, the point value is determined based on the total of the current accumulated point value, the lottery result of the fluctuating special design (winner judgment result), and the lottery result of the special design held in memory (winning information). be done.

However, in the configuration of this control example, after the start of the variation of the special symbol, the advance notice effect of giving the point value is executed at random timing. The total value of the point value is increased, or the prefetch result of the newly winning reserved ball (the new reserved ball memorized by winning the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640) Changes such as being a hit have occurred. At the timing when the advance notice effect for giving the point value is executed, it is necessary to determine the point value to be given by determining the current point value and the state of the lottery result again.

Here, in this control example, the point value determined when the point acquisition effect variation pattern is executed includes the first basic point (part of the point value to be granted is distributed to either or both of the two swords). , the second basic point (low), which is a point value less than the value obtained by subtracting the first basic point from the point value to be granted, and the second basic point, which is a point value obtained by subtracting the first basic point from the point value to be granted By determining two point values, the point (high), at the execution timing of the point acquisition effect, if the accumulated points have increased by a reference value or more (for example, 500 points or more) than at the time of determination , the first cardinal point and the second cardinal point (low) are output to the display controller 114 .

In addition, even when the cumulative point value has increased by a reference value or more from the time of determination, the first basic point and the second basic point (high) are indicated when the winning ball is stored. A display command is output to the display controller 114 .

In this way, since two patterns of point values are determined in advance at the time of determination, it is possible to reduce the control load during execution of the point acquisition effect. In addition, in this second control example, by determining the point value of the two patterns described above, at the timing when the point acquisition effect is executed, it can be given to the player who has acquired the point value after the timing when the point acquisition effect variation pattern starts to fluctuate. point value (undisplayed point value) added can be displayed smoothly. In order to cope with the case where the point value (undisplayed point value) that can be given to the player after the timing decreases, the point value displayed in the total point display area Dm20 is subtracted. ) may be settable. As a result, even if there is a function of subtracting the point value that can be given to the player, it is possible to provide the player with an effect that does not make the player feel uncomfortable. In addition, in this control example, the number of points to be given to the player in the point acquisition effect is determined by summing the two basic points of the first basic points and the second basic points. The present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured to sum three or more basic point types. Also, in the point acquisition effect described with reference to FIG. 288, all the point values to be given to the player based on the result of one effect are displayed at once. The point value may be given to the player at a timing, or the point value may be given when the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation means (the frame button 22). can be In this case, if the player does not operate the operation means, the point value to be given is not given to the player. When the variation lottery result is a lottery result (for example, a big win) that is advantageous to the player, a point value is automatically given, and the lottery result of the special symbol variation being executed is used by the player. If the result of the lottery is disadvantageous (for example, lost), it is preferable to provide the points that have not yet been provided in the next point acquisition effect.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 289 to 291, the point effects in this control example will be described. First, FIG. 289(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when execution of a point acquisition effect with a held ball is started in the point acquisition effect variation pattern. In FIG. 289(a), the special symbols are varied, and the point display area Dm3 of the main display area Dm displays the currently acquired total points (900 points in the example of FIG. 289(a)). , the currently acquired points are reported to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. In the secondary display area, the running symbol m0, the first reserved symbol m1 and the second reserved symbol m2 are displayed, and the second reserved symbol m2 is displayed with a reserved ball written as 500p. there is In this way, in this control example, as a result of determining the lottery result of the reserved and stored special symbol before the start of the fluctuation (prefetching result), the holding ball is used to determine that the point value is given to the second fluctuation from the fluctuation. can be notified to the player. By constructing in this way, the player can expect to obtain a point value not only as a result of the variation but also as a result of the variation of the reserved and stored special symbols. Also, the point giving effect using the reserved ball may be displayed for the currently executed symbol m0 without being limited to the reserved ball stored in the reserved memory. By configuring in this way, the player can play the game while expecting an unexpected point acquisition. In FIG. 289(a), the variable display of the special design is being executed in the main display area Dm of the third design display device 81, and the special design 1 display area Dm1a corresponds to the first special design (special design 1). The fourth pattern (decorative pattern) to be displayed is variably displayed (in the figure, a display mode showing a blinking state). On the other hand, since the normal symbol is not variably displayed, the fourth symbol (decorative symbol) corresponding to the normal symbol is displayed in the variable stop display mode in the normal symbol display area Dm2.

FIG. 289(b) is a diagram showing an example of the presentation mode in which the player can select the desired reach in the next change by consuming the point value acquired up to now.

In the example of FIG. 289(b), the point value currently acquired is displayed in the point display area Dm3 (1800 points in the example of FIG. 289(b)), and using this, the player selects the reach of the next variation. can do. The reach patterns that can be selected this time are displayed in the main display area Dm, and a left option 822e, a middle option 822f, and a right option 822g are displayed. In the upper part of the main display area Dm, the characters "Buy the reach!" be. A cursor ka is displayed in the center of the main display area Dm. Details will be described later, but when the player presses the frame button 22, the displayed cursor ka moves under the options 822e to 822g, and the player selects the desired option by moving the cursor ka. be able to.

The options 822e to 822g display reach contents and required point values respectively, and in the example of FIG. 289(b), the left option 822e is "A reach 500 points" and the middle option 822f is "B reach 800 points". , and the right option 822g displays "SP reach 10000 points", respectively. The player can select the reach based on the display contents of each option and the current acquired point value displayed in the point display area Dm3. In the example of FIG. 289(b), the current point value is 1800 points, so the player can select "A reach" and "B reach" from the left options 822e.

In this way, by allowing the player to select the variation pattern of the next variation according to the current acquired point value, the player can have a sense of expectation for the point acquisition game and enjoy the game. can be increased. In addition, in this control example, like the right option 822g, it is configured to display the reach that cannot be selected with the current point value, but it is configured to display only the reach that can be selected with the current point value. good too. By configuring in this manner, the player can play the game without feeling disappointed that he or she cannot select the desired reach. In the production example described with reference to FIG. 289(b), a reach that cannot be selected with the current point value is displayed. For example, when the player selects a reach that cannot be selected with the current point value, , since it is not possible to buy reach, it is configured so that the default normal reach is executed without using the acquired point value. Also, unlike the production example described with reference to FIG. 289(b), it is possible to set a reach that does not use acquired points (for example, a normal reach of 0 points) as an option that the player can select. . As a result, it becomes possible to use a large number of points for a desired performance mode while accumulating the acquired points. Furthermore, while the display screen shown in FIG. It may be configured such that the number of points displayed for each reach is reduced when a variable condition is established by winning a ball at the end of the game. As a result, the player can actively play the game. In addition, the player can grasp at least two values out of the total value of points acquired in one point acquisition performance, the total value of already consumed point values, and the current point value. , for example, it may be configured to be displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 .

FIG. 290 is a diagram showing an example of the effect content that when the third symbol display device 81 executes the pseudo variation of the special symbol, it can be varied again using the points.

In the example of FIG. 290(a), the main display area Dm temporarily stops and displays the result of the removal of the special symbol. A 7 is displayed on the left symbol Z1 and a 7 is displayed on the right symbol Z3, indicating a ready-to-win state. In the lower right corner of the main display area Dm, the characters "Use 500 points to change again!" Players are notified that they can do this. It should be noted that the effect mode described with reference to FIG. Executed after normal reach, which is executed if you do not buy. That is, on the reach selection screen shown in FIG. 289(b), it is possible to select a reach (for example, SP reach 822g) for which a point value that cannot be purchased with the acquired point value is set, and buy any reach. When the normal reach is executed because of failure, the reach performance (normal reach performance) shorter than the other reach time is executed. Then, the effect screen shown in FIG. 289(b) is set according to the remaining period after the execution of the normal ready-to-win effect. In this way, in the variable effect for showing the lottery result of one special symbol, if the point value is not used on one selection screen (reach purchase screen), the point can be used on the next selection screen (pseudo By displaying the variable purchase screen), the player can be motivated to use the point value.

FIG. 290(b) is a diagram showing an example of display contents when the special symbols are changed again from FIG. 290(a) using points. In the main display area Dm, 7 is stopped and displayed in the left pattern Z1 and the right pattern Z3, and the middle pattern Z2 is again changed and displayed.

In this way, by setting the point consumption effect even when the pseudo variation is set as the variation pattern of the special symbols, it is possible to provide the player with a thrilling feeling even after the variation of the symbols is stopped.

FIG. 291 is a diagram showing an example of display contents that do not change (fix) a part of the pattern displayed on the third pattern display device 81 using the acquired point value. In FIG. 291(a), symbols Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed. In the upper part of the main display area Dm, characters are displayed as "HOLD the left symbol with 3 variations and 7 symbols at 2000 points!". In other words, if 2000 points are used, the player is notified in an easy-to-understand manner that the left pattern Z1 is fixed to 7 patterns that are likely to win a big win with a higher degree of expectation during the 3 changes from the current change.

FIG. 291(b) is a diagram showing an example of display contents when the left symbol Z1 is fixed at 7. In FIG. In the main display area Dm, a left pattern Z1 in which the pattern is fixed at 7, and a middle pattern Z2 and a right pattern Z3 that are changing are displayed. "Remaining 2 variations HOLD" is displayed in the upper part of the main display area Dm, and the number of remaining variations to which the left symbol Z1 is fixed is notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

By configuring in this way, the chances of executing the point effect increase, and the player can have a greater sense of expectation for the point effect.

<Electrical Configuration in Second Control Example>
The electrical configuration in this second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 292 to 296. FIG. The second control example differs from the first control example in that a point selection table 222ad, a variation point selection table 222ae, and a consumption point selection table 222af are added to the ROM 222 of the sound ramp control device 113. . Since other configurations are the same as those of the first control example, description thereof will be omitted.

The point selection table 222ad is a selection table for selecting a point value to be given to the player by notice or the like. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 293 and 294, the selection table is configured to be switched between a state where there is a held ball and a state where there is no held ball, and a state where there is a held ball (see FIG. 293). , a pending effect (a effect in which points are awarded by varying the pending pattern (the point value is displayed in the pending pattern)), a PUSH effect (an effect in which the point value is displayed and awarded by pressing the frame button 22). ) or character production (a production in which a character for notice is displayed during a special pattern change and the character earns points) is determined by the production counter acquired, and the point value set in the table is set. be done. For example, if the obtained effect counter value is 100, 200pt is determined in the character effect.

In addition, when the special symbol is not variably displayed (fixed timing, etc.), the pending effect is compulsorily selected. For example, if the value of the effect counter is 100, the pending effect of 200pt is selected.

Next, when there is no held ball, it is selected from the point selection table 222ae shown in FIG. It should be noted that, when there is no reserved ball, the difference is that the reserved effect is not selected.

The variable point selection table 222ae is a selection table for setting point values set in the point acquisition effect shown in FIG. The fluctuation point selection table is a table for selecting a first basic point (first) and a second basic point (second (low), second (high)). At the start of fluctuation, a first basic point, a second basic point (low), and a second basic point (high) are selected. The first basic point is a point value that is displayed in the performance in any state, and the second basic point value is a high point value due to the point value held by the player at the actual performance execution timing. A second base point (high) is selected or a lower point value, the second base point (low) is selected. The second base point (high) is selected when the accumulated points are not higher than 1000pt or more compared to the time of selection, while the second base point (low) is displayed when it is higher than 1000pt or more. is configured to The contents defined in this fluctuation point selection table 222ae will be explained with reference to FIG. 295(a). value) and the value of the effect counter 223ad obtained, the values of the first basic point, the second basic point (low), and the second basic point (high) are defined. is "0 to 300", and the value of the obtained effect counter 223ad is "0 to 10", "20" as the value of the first basic point and "20" as the value of the second basic point (low) A value of "30" and a value of the second basic point (high) of "100" are specified. ”, “20” as the value of the second basic point (low), and “90” as the value of the second basic point (high), and the value of the acquired effect counter 223ad is within the range of “21 to 100”. , "60" as the value of the first basic point, "20" as the value of the second basic point (low), and "100" as the value of the second basic point (high). In the range of "101 to 150", there are "20" as the value of the first basic point, "30" as the value of the second basic point (low), and "100" as the value of the second basic point (high). stipulated. Hereinafter, it is defined that different values are set according to the value of the effect counter 223ad and the current point value.

In this way, the processing load during execution of the effect can be reduced by making a selection that can cope with even if there is a change in the point value at the start of the change. That is, based on the point value (the point value selected with reference to the point selection table 222ad) at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol, the first basic point and the second basic point (low) are obtained by referring to the variation point selection table 222ae. , the second basic point (high) is selected, and the difference amount between the point value at the start timing of the point acquisition performance executed at a predetermined timing during the special symbol variation period and the point value at the start of this special symbol variation. , the value to be added to the first basic points as the point value to be given in the point acquisition effect this time is configured to be selected from the second basic points (low) or the second basic points (high). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load when executing the point acquisition effect.

Also, as shown in FIG. 288(a), how many point values are given to which sword (a1 to a4) is sorted based on the display position table shown in FIG. 295(b). It is determined. When the obtained effect counter is 100, the first basic point value is distributed to the sword a4 and the sword a3. This allocation is performed so that the point values displayed in FIG. 288(a) are within the first basic point values selected from possible combinations. For example, if the performance counter is 100 and the reserved point value is 300, 60 points are selected as the first basic point value, 60 points as the second basic point (low), and 120 points as the second basic point (high). be done. Also, in the display position table, the first basic point value of 60 points is set to, for example, 40 points for the sword a4 and 20 points for the sword a3. Here, the display control device 114 sets, as display data, display data of each sword and each point value shown in FIG. By setting the data in correspondence with each other, the point value selected in the variable point selection table is distributed to each sword, and an effect that the player obtains can be executed.

By configuring in this way, even if the same first basic point is selected, the point value corresponding to each sword can be randomized, and various effects can be performed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute various point acquisition effects with fewer variation patterns than setting a plurality of effects of the point values that can be acquired for each variation pattern.

The consumption point selection table 222af is a data table for setting the point consumption amount set when selecting the point effect (effect to be executed using the acquired point value). A win consumption point selection table 222af referred to when the lottery result of the drawing is a win (small win, big win), and a loss consumption point selection table 222af referred to when the lottery result of the special pattern is a loss. be done. The hit consumption point selection table 222g is a selection table for determining the consumption points of each reach in the consumption effect shown in FIG. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 296(a), selection is made based on the current possessed points and the value of the obtained effect counter. Specifically, when the value of the acquired points currently held is "0 to 300" and the value of the effect counter 223ad is in the range of "0 to 40", the consumption point "100" , consumption point "150" for selection mode B, consumption point "200" for selection mode C, and the value of the effect counter 223ad is in the range of "41 to 150", for selection mode A , consumption points are defined as "130", consumption points are defined as "200" for selection mode B, and consumption points are defined as "300" for selection mode C. Consumption points "150" are defined for selection mode A, consumption points "250" for selection mode B, and consumption points "350" for selection mode C. Hereinafter, as shown in FIG. 296(a), consumption points set for each selection mode are stipulated according to the acquired points currently held and the acquired value of the effect counter 223ad. The hit consumption point selection table 222af is configured such that the larger the value of the pending acquired points, the more consumption points are set. By configuring in this way, the point value acquired by the player can be fully used for the production, so that the production effect can be enhanced. Further, in this embodiment, consumption points are set for each of the three selection modes A to C as consumption points. As a result, various consumption points can be set for each selection mode displayed on the reach selection screen (see FIG. 289(b)). In the effect described with reference to FIG. 289(b), three selection modes are displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and from the left, selection mode A, selection mode B, and selection mode C correspond. Therefore, the three consumption points selected in the winning consumption point selection table 222af can be used without waste. It may be configured so as to notify the lottery result of the special symbol without using it.

The loss consumption point selection table 222f is a table for determining the point value to be selected when the loss variable display is executed (see FIG. 296(b)). Since the specific configuration is the same as that of the winning consumption point selection table, the description thereof will be omitted. Next, with reference to FIG. 292(b), the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. The fluctuation pattern selection counter 223aa is a counter whose value is updated by the counter update process (see S2113 in FIG. 297) of the main process (see FIG. 297) of the sound ramp control device 113, and is in the range of "0 to 198". A loop counter that is updated. When the variation pattern selection table 222a is referred to based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 and the current variation pattern effect (variation effect) is selected, the current value of the variation pattern selection counter 223aa is acquired. . As a result, even if the same variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110, it is possible to execute different variation effects on the sound lamp control device 113 side, so that the control load of the main controller 110 can be reduced. Various effects can be executed without increasing the size. In addition, even in the first control example described above, it is configured to select the variable effect with the same contents. The point storage area 223ab is a storage area for temporarily storing a point value variable according to a point acquisition effect (see FIG. 289(a)) or a point effect (see FIGS. 289(b) and 290). In the point storage area 223ab, the point values selected by the point selection table 222ad are stored, and the point values actually acquired in the point acquisition effect are stored among the point values selected by the variable point selection table 222ae. be done. In addition, the point value consumed by the point effect is also stored. Note that, in this control example, the value of the point storage area 222ab is accumulated unless cleared. Therefore, when a point value is selected multiple times by the point selection table 222ad without clearing the value of the point storage area 222ab, many points are stored. In this way, the point value that can be given in the point acquisition effect, the point value that the player has acquired by executing the point acquisition effect, and the point value that has already been consumed can be stored. , the remaining point value that can be given and the point value that can be consumed can be easily calculated. The cursor position storage area 223ac stores any of a plurality of selection objects (for example, selection modes 822e to 822g (see FIG. 289(b))) by operating the operating means (frame button 22) by the player. This is a storage area for storing whether a mode has been selected. Although detailed description is omitted, in this control example, a plurality (for example, 10) of selection results made by the player are configured to be able to be stored. It is configured to set the mode of selection. For example, if the rate of selecting high-value (high consumption point value) selection modes out of a plurality of selection modes exceeds a predetermined percentage (for example, 50%), the consumption point value is selected as the plurality of selection modes. is configured to facilitate setting of a selection mode with a large value. As a result, the selection mode desired by the player can be easily displayed, so that the player can be motivated to participate in the game. The production counter 223ad is composed of a loop counter that is repeatedly updated in the range of "0 to 198", and the counter update processing (see FIG. 297) of the main processing (see FIG. S2113) is updated each time. In this counter update process (S2113 in FIG. 297), a plurality of counters used for presentation are configured to be updated within a predetermined range without synchronization. As a result, various combinations of effects can be easily executed.

<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device in the second control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 297 to 304. FIG. The control processing of the audio ramp control device 113 in the second control example is different from the control processing of the audio ramp control device 113 in the above-described first control example, in that the advance notice setting processing (S2131), the special point selection processing (S2132), It differs in that consumption reach selection processing (S2133) is added and command determination processing 2 (S2134) is executed instead of command determination processing (S2114 in FIG. 258). As for other processes, the same reference numerals are given to the same parts as in the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, the main processing in this second control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 297 is a flow chart showing the contents of the main processing in this second control example. In the main processing in the second control example, liquid crystal effect execution management processing (S2110) is executed with respect to the main processing in the first control example (see FIG. 257), then notice setting processing (S2131), special point selection processing (S2132), consumption reach selection processing (S2133) is added, frame button input monitoring/effect processing 2 (S2130) instead of frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S2107), command determination processing (S2114) The difference is in command determination processing 2 (S2134). Since the other processes are the same processes, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 298, command determination processing 2 (S2134) in the second control example will be described. FIG. 298 is a flow chart showing the contents of the command determination process 2 (S2134) in this second control example. In the command determination process 2 (S2134) in the second control example, when it is determined that the variation pattern command has been received (S2201: Yes) for the command determination process (S2114) in the first control example, variation pattern reception The difference is that process 2 (S2220) is executed. Since the other processes are the same processes, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, variation pattern reception processing 2 (S2220) in this second control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 299 is a flow chart showing the contents of the variation pattern reception process 2 (S2220) in this second control example. Variation pattern reception processing 2 (S2220) in the second control example determines whether or not the variation pattern command received this time is a point acquisition effect in contrast to the variation pattern reception processing (S2202) in the first control example, and points The difference is that selection processing is executed. Since the other processes are the same processes, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the variation pattern reception process 2 (S2220), first, the variation start flag 223d is set to ON (S2221), and the variation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern command received this time and the value of the variation pattern selection counter 223aa ( S2222). Next, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern determined in the process of S2222 is a point acquisition effect (S2223). When it is determined that the determined variation pattern is the point acquisition effect (S2223: Yes), point selection processing is executed (S2224), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the determined variation pattern is not the point acquisition effect (S2223: No), this process is terminated.

Next, the point selection process (S2224), which is one process of the variation pattern reception process 2 (S2220) in the second control example, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 300 is a flow chart showing the contents of the point selection process (S2224). In this point selection process (S2224), the process for setting the reference amount of the point value to be acquired in the executed point acquisition effect, and whether or not to execute the point acquisition effect according to the lottery result of the special symbol. A process for making a determination is executed.

In the point selection process (S2224), first, the value of the point storage area 223ab is obtained (S2321), and it is determined whether or not the variation pattern determined this time is a hit (S2322). When it is determined that the variation pattern determined this time is a win (S2322: Yes), it is determined whether or not the winning prize information received is a win (S2323). When it is determined that there is a hit in the winning information (S2323: Yes), no point effect (0 point effect) is set (S2324), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S2322, if it is determined that the current variation pattern is not a hit (that is, it is a loss) (S2322: No), or if it is determined that there is no win in the winning information received ( S2323: No), based on the current point from the variation point selection table 222ae, a basic point is selected and set in the first basic point setting area (S2325). Then, based on the current point value, the point value is selected from the second basic point selection table 222ae2, and the current point value and the selected point value are set in the second basic point setting area (S2326). exit. Thus, by setting the reference value of the point value to be acquired in the point acquisition performance executed during this special symbol variation at the timing of starting the variation of the special symbols in which the point acquisition performance is executed, the points are actually obtained. It is possible to reduce the processing that is executed at the timing of executing the acquisition performance. In addition, in this control example, if the current special symbol variation is a win (jackpot) and the stored winning information contains information indicating a win (jackpot), that is, multiple times in a short period of time. It is configured to execute a special performance (no point performance) when a jackpot can be won. This no-points effect is a effect in which a effect in which points cannot be obtained in the point acquisition effect described with reference to FIG. Therefore, when the above-described special effect is executed, the player can expect a plurality of big wins. In addition, when this special effect is executed, the swords a1 to a4 are not designed to represent a point value, but to be thrust into a big win pattern (for example, "V") suggesting a big win. The number of swords a1 to a4 sticking into the jackpot pattern suggests to the player the number of special patterns during execution and the number of hits (the number of jackpots) included in the winning information retained and stored. You can Further, when the non-points effect is set, the execution of the point acquisition effect may be prohibited and the normal effect may be executed. As a result, when a big win is won by the normal effect (without executing the point acquisition effect), there is a sense of anticipation that information indicating the big win is included in the prize information retained and stored. can let

Next, with reference to FIG. 301, frame button input monitoring/effect processing 2 (S2130) in the second control example will be described. FIG. 301 is a flow chart showing the contents of frame button input monitoring/effect processing 2 (S2130) in the second control example. In the frame button input monitoring/effect processing 2 (S2130) in the second control example, when it is determined that the variation pattern command is received in the command determination processing (S2114) in the first control example (S2201: Yes) , in that operation processing relating to selection and determination of points is executed.

In the frame button input monitoring/effect processing 2 (S2130), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the operation valid timer 223n is greater than 0, that is, whether or not the valid period of the button operation has expired (S2421). If it is determined that the value of the operation valid timer 223n is not greater than 0 (that is, it is 0) (S2421: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2421, if it is determined that the value of the operation valid timer 223n is greater than 0 (S2421: No), the value of the operation valid timer 223n is subtracted (S2422), and then subtracted in the process of S2422. It is determined whether or not the value of the operation valid timer 223n is larger than 0 (S2423). If it is determined that the subtracted value of the operation valid timer 223n is greater than 0 (S2423: Yes), a display command indicating reach contents corresponding to the cursor position is set (S2424), and the process proceeds to S2425. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S2423 that the value of the operation valid timer 223n is 0 (S2423: No), the process of S2424 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S2425.

After executing the processing of S2423 or S2425, it is determined whether or not a selection operation has been executed (S2425). If it is determined that a selection operation has been performed (S2425: Yes), information corresponding to the operation is stored in the cursor position storage area 223ac (S2426), a display command corresponding to the cursor position is set (S2427), End this process. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2425 that the selection operation has not been performed (S2425: No), it is determined whether or not the determination operation has been performed (S2428). When it is determined that the determination operation has been performed (S2428: Yes), the reach command for displaying the reach content determined in the processing of S2428 is set (S2429), and the points corresponding to the determined reach content are subtracted. (S2430), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2428 that the decision operation has been performed (S2428: No), this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 302, the details of the advance notice setting process (S2131) will be described. FIG. 302 is a flowchart showing details of the advance notice setting process (S2131). The notice setting process (S2131) is one process in the main process (FIG. 297) in the second control example, and when the special symbol is fluctuating, the process of selecting the point value of the point effect from the point selection table 222ad is performed. executed.

In the advance notice setting process (S2131), first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is fluctuating (S2511). If it is determined that the special symbol is not fluctuating (S2511: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol is fluctuating in the processing of S2511 (S2511: Yes), it is determined whether or not it is within the execution period of the advance notice effect (S2512). Here, the period during which the notice effect is executed corresponds to, for example, a period in which the special symbol fluctuation is changed at high speed or the effect corresponding to the super ready-to-win state is not executed in the ready-to-win state. If it is determined that it is within the execution period of the notice effect (S2512: Yes), the value of the effect counter 223ad is acquired (S2513), and based on the value of the effect counter 223ad acquired in the process of S2513, the point selection table A point value is selected from 222ad (S2514), and the process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2512 that it is not within the period in which the notice can be executed (S2512: No), it is determined whether or not the number of pending balls is greater than 0 (S2515). When it is determined that the number of pending balls is greater than 0 (S2515: Yes), since it is a period in which the pending effect can be executed, the value of the effect counter 223ad is acquired (S2516), and the effect counter 223ad acquired in the process of S2516 is obtained. is selected from the point selection table 222ad (S2517), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of pending balls is 0 in the processing of S2515 (S2515: No), it is determined that the advance notice cannot be set, and this processing ends as it is. As described above, in the second control example, the point acquisition effect executed as a variable effect executed in response to the special symbol variation and the special symbol variable effect are performed as effects for the player to acquire points. The advance notice effect and the pending effect which are executed independently are set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to obtain point values at various timings, so it is possible to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game. Also, even outside the notice execution period (during the period when the notice effect cannot be executed), if the number of reserved balls is 1 or more, reserved patterns m1 to m8 (Fig. 289(a)) for indicating the number of reserved balls ) can be used to execute an effect to acquire a point value, so that the player can be motivated to play the game to secure the number of reserved balls. In addition, the timing of executing the effect to acquire the point value is not limited to the content of the second control example, for example, even in a state where the special symbol variation is not executed (for example, during the jackpot game), the pending effect can be configured to execute Further, when no point effect is set as the variable effect of the special symbol change, it is preferable to configure so that the player cannot obtain the point value even by the advance notice setting process (S2131 in FIG. 302).

Next, the contents of the special point selection process (S2132) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 303 is a flow chart showing the contents of the special point selection process (S2132).

In the special point selection process (S2132), first, it is determined whether or not the point effect is being changed (S2611). If it is determined that the point effect is not executed (S2611: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S2611, it is determined whether or not it is time to set points (S2612). If it is determined that it is not the point setting timing (S2612: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is time to set points (S2612: Yes), it is determined whether or not the current point effect is to set 0 points (S2613). If it is determined that the current point is an effect of setting 0 points (S2613: Yes), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S2613 that the current effect is not the effect of setting 0 points (S2613: No), the process proceeds to S2614.

After executing the processing of S2613, next, it is determined whether or not there is winning information in the winning information storage area 223f (S2614). If it is determined that there is a hit in the winning information storage area 223f (S2614: Yes), a display command indicating the high points of the first basic point setting area and the second basic point setting area is set (S2615), and this End the process. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2614 that there is no win in the winning information storage area 223f (S2614: No), it is determined whether or not the difference between the points acquired this time and the current points is 1000 points or more (S2616). If it is determined that the difference between the points acquired this time and the current points is 1000 points or more (S2616: Yes), the processing of S2615 described above is executed, and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S2616, if it is determined that the difference between the points acquired this time and the current points is not 1000 points or more (S2616: No), the first basic point setting area and the second basic point setting area A display command indicating the low point is set (S2617), and the process ends. In addition, according to the above-described special point selection process (S2132 in FIG. 303), in the process of S2616, if the difference between the point value at the start of this special symbol variation and the current point value is 1000 points or more, That is, when an effect for obtaining a large number of points is executed by a notice effect or a suspension effect during the special pattern variation, an effect capable of acquiring a large number of points is also executed in the point acquisition effect. However, on the contrary, if the effect to acquire a large number of point values is executed by the notice effect or the pending effect during the special pattern fluctuation, the effect that only a small point value can be obtained even in the point acquisition effect may be configured to execute By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the point value acquired by the player from becoming excessively large.

Next, with reference to FIG. 304, the contents of the consumed reach selection process (S2133) will be described. FIG. 304 is a flow chart showing the contents of the consumption reach selection process (S2133). In this control example, the consumption reach is executed at a predetermined timing (for example, 30 seconds after the start of the fluctuation) during the special symbol fluctuation period, not at the timing when the special symbol fluctuation is started. It is configured to set the mode of presentation. In other words, not the point value acquired by the player at the timing when the special symbol fluctuation is started, but the production mode of the consumption reach based on the point value acquired by the player at the timing when the consumption reach is executed. (Point value corresponding to each selection mode selectable in consumption reach) is configured to be set. As a result, since the consumption reach corresponding to the point value can be executed more in real time, the production effect can be enhanced.

In the consumption reach selection process (S2133), first, it is determined whether the consumption reach is executable (S2711). Here, the determination of whether or not the consumption reach is executable is whether the fluctuation pattern determined in the process of S2222 of the fluctuation pattern reception process 2 (see S2220 in FIG. 299) is a fluctuation pattern including the consumption reach Also, it is determined based on the determination result of whether or not the acquired point value stored in the point storage area 222ab at the present time is a predetermined amount (for example, 200 points) or more, and the current variation pattern is the consumption reach. When it is determined that the variation pattern includes and the acquired point value is 200 or more, it is determined that consumption reach is executable. In the process of S2711, when it is determined that consumption reach is not executable (S2711: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that consumption reach is executable (S2711: Yes), it is determined whether it is time to select reach data (S2712). In this control example, the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 has a measuring means (not shown) for measuring the elapsed time since the variable effect is executed, and based on the measurement result of the measuring means, the current determines whether or not it is time to execute consumption reach. If it is determined that it is not the reach data selection timing (consumed reach execution timing) (S2712: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is time to select reach data (timing to execute consumed reach) (S2712: Yes), the process proceeds to S2713.

In the process of S2713, it is determined whether or not the current variation is a winning variation pattern (S2713). If it is determined that the current change is a win (S2713: Yes), the consumption points are set based on the current number of points from the consumption point selection table 222af for winning (S2714), and the process proceeds to S2717. do. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2713 that the current variation is not a win variation pattern (that is, it is a loss), it is determined whether or not the current point is equal to or greater than the set value (S2715). If it is determined that the current point is not equal to or greater than the set value (S2715: No), this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2715 that the current points are equal to or greater than the set value (S2715: Yes), consumption points are set based on the current number of points from the consumption point selection table 222af for failure (S2716). ), the process proceeds to S2717. In the processing of S2717, a display reach selection command corresponding to the selection reach effect in which the selected consumption point is set is set (S2717), and this processing ends.

<Regarding the control processing of the display control device in the second control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 305 and 306. FIG. In the processing in the display control device 114 in the second control example, the V interrupt processing is replaced with the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 276(b)) in contrast to the processing in the display control device 114 in the first control example. 2 (see FIG. 305), and command determination processing 2 (S6311 in FIG. 306) instead of command determination processing (S6302 in FIG. 277). As for other processes, the same reference numerals are given to the same parts as in the first control example, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, V interrupt processing 2 executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in this second control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 305 is a flow chart showing the contents of the V-interrupt process 2. FIG. The V interrupt process 2 in the second control example is different in that the command determination process 2 (S6311) is executed instead of the command determination process (S6302). Since other processing is the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, command determination processing 2 (S6311) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in this second control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 306 is a flow chart showing the contents of command determination processing 2 (S6311).

In command determination processing 2 (S6311) in the second control example, if it is determined in the processing of S6408 that there is no advance notice display command for display this time (S6408: No), it is determined whether or not there is a point command for display. (S6421). If it is determined that there is a display point command (S6421: Yes), the point command received this time is set in the display point storage area (S6422), and the process returns to S6401. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no display point command in the process of S6421 (S6421: No), it is determined whether or not there is a display effect point command (S6423). If it is determined that there is a display effect point command (S6423: Yes), point display processing (S6424) is executed, and the processing returns to S6401.

On the other hand, in the processing of S6423, when it is determined that there is no display effect point command (S6423: No), it is determined whether or not there is a display reach command (S6425). If it is determined that there is a display reach command (S6425: Yes), the reach display data table corresponding to the command received this time is set (S6426), and the process returns to S6401. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no display reach command in the process of S6425 (S6425: No), it is determined whether or not there is a display reach selection command (S6427). (S6427: Yes), the display data table of the corresponding selection reach is set (S6428), and the process returns to S6401. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no display reach selection command (S6427: No), the process proceeds to S6418.

<Regarding the third control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 307 to 319. FIG. In the third control example, control in the lower displacement unit 400 described above will be described. The first control example and the second control example described above may naturally be combined with the present third control example, but for the sake of convenience, illustration of part of the first control example and the second control example will be omitted. .

In the third control example, operation control of the lower displacement unit 400 and control in a configuration in which a game ball is shot from the ejection opening 471 will be described. Note that the description of the same contents as in the first control example will be omitted. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the first control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

<Regarding the configuration of the lower displacement unit 400 in the third control example>
FIG. 307 is a front view of the lower displacement unit 400 in the third control example, which is substantially the same as FIG. 66 described above, but with an additional storage sensor SP5. The storage sensor SP5 is configured to detect that a game ball has entered from the opening 451a (see FIG. 58), and to detect whether a game ball has entered the ball receiving portion 467 or not. Furthermore, since both ends of the ball receiving portion 467 are arranged at positions that can be detected, the position of the ball receiving portion 467 can also be detected. Specifically, the time during which the storage sensor SP5 continuously detects the object to be detected is measured. If the measurement result is equal to or higher than the lower limit value and equal to or lower than a predetermined value, it is determined that the game ball has entered the game ball. It is determined that a game ball has entered the ball receiving portion 467. - 特許庁Furthermore, since the storage sensor SP5 is configured to be capable of outputting an ON signal capable of determining the approaching direction of the object to be detected, the position of the ball receiving portion 467 can also be determined.

As a method for detecting the position of the ball receiving portion, when the movable rack 464 is moved from the origin position toward the exit opening 471, the tip of the ball receiving portion 467 is detected by the storage sensor SP5, and then the ball on the rear side is detected. The tip of the receiving portion 467 is detected. In this case, after the slide motor is driven for 10 steps from the state where the storage sensor SP5 on the front side is turned on, it is stopped and controlled to reach the ball receiving position (the position shown in FIG. 307(b)). It can be moved so that the ball receiving portion 467 is positioned.

Also, after the storage sensor detects the front end of the ball receiving portion 467, if the storage sensor is turned on before the slide motor KM2 is driven 20 steps, the game ball is held in the ball receiving portion 467 ( It can be determined that the game ball is entering the ball receiving portion 467). Also, when the movable rack 464 is moved from the launch position (the position shown in FIG. 307(c)) to the origin position (the position shown in FIG. 307(a)), the rear tip (Ball receiving portion 467) is detected first by the storage sensor SP5, but the method of detecting the position of the ball receiving portion 467 is the same.

The storage sensor SP5 is composed of a reflective laser output sensor, and the laser light output from the storage sensor SP5 to the front is blocked and the laser light reflected by the detection unit of the storage sensor SP5 is detected ( ON state) sensor.

Therefore, the storage sensor SP5 not only detects that the game ball has entered the opening 451a, but also detects the state in which the game ball enters the ball receiving portion 467, detects the position of the ball receiving portion 467, and moves the ball. The position of rack 464 can also be detected. Although illustration is omitted, an origin position sensor is attached at a position that can detect that the movable rack 464 is positioned at the origin position (see FIG. 307(a)), and the movable rack 464 is at the firing position A firing position sensor is attached at a position where it can be detected as shown in FIG. 307(c)).

In the initial state (at the end of the initial operation after power-on), the movable rack 464 is moved to the origin position shown in FIG. 307(a). As already described with reference to FIG. 81, at the origin position, the abutment plate 464c rotates the bulging portion 543a backward to restrict the distribution of game balls to the opening 451a. By moving the movable rack 464 from the origin position to the ball receiving position (see FIG. 307(b)), the bulging portion 543a rotates forward, and game balls are distributed to the opening portion 451a. Here, the time required for the movable rack 363 to move to the ball receiving position is the time until the game balls distributed in the direction of the opening 451a by the rotation of the distribution member 540 reach the opening 451a. It is configured to be movable in a time shorter than the time of As a result, it is possible to suppress the problem that the game ball enters the ball before the ball receiving portion 467 moves to the ball receiving position and the game ball cannot be received by the ball receiving portion 467 .

When the game ball is received by the ball receiving portion 467, the movable rack 464 is moved to the origin position in the received state, and then the tilting motor KM1 of the lower displacement unit 400 is driven to move the lower displacement unit 400 to the first position. It is rotationally driven so as to rise to the 1 projecting state (see FIG. 48). As a result, the lower displacement unit 400 is driven upward while the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged on the rotating shaft side of the lower displacement unit 400, so that the driving force required for the upward movement can be reduced. load can be reduced.

When the lower displacement unit 400 is in the first extended state, the player operates the frame button 22 to drive the lower displacement unit 400 upward. This drive is stopped when the slide motor KM2 is driven 30 steps, and when the frame button 22 is operated next, the 30-step slide motor KM2 is driven to drive the displacement unit 400 downward. At this time, it is determined whether the upward position sensor for detecting that the lower displacement unit 400 is in the position of the first overhanging state is detected (detected as ON) while driving 30 steps. It is configured to be controlled to stop with timing. In addition, in a state in which the rising position sensor is not turned on even after 30 step driving, the slide motor KM2 is driven until the rising position sensor is turned on. If the raised position sensor is not turned on even after the 15-step drive, the lower displacement unit 400 is stopped at the 15-step raised position. In this way, it is possible to determine that there is a problem that the raised position sensor is not turned on, and to switch to the control of only the number of steps to play the game. In this case, the error may be notified by a lamp, a display, an external terminal, or the like.

When the ending at the time of the big hit is set, the lower displacement unit is moved to the raised position, and then the movable rack 464 is moved toward the shooting position, and the game ball held in the ball receiving portion 467 is ejected from the ejection opening 471. To shoot more game balls. The timing of firing is the timing when the player operates the frame button 22, and if the frame button 22 is not operated even after the valid time of the frame button 22 has passed, the shooting operation is automatically executed. .

When the power is turned on, an initial operation, which will be described later, is also executed in the lower displacement unit 400 . If a small win or a big win C is being executed in a state where the power is turned off, when the power is turned on, the small win or the big win C that was being executed will be restored in the state at the time of the power outage. 3 The electric accessory 82a is opened. In that case, the game ball enters the third electric accessory in a state where the initial operation of the lower displacement unit 400 executed by the sound ramp control device 113 is not completed, and the game ball enters the lower displacement unit 400. There is a risk of it flowing down.

In that case, the game ball enters from the opening 451a of the lower displacement unit 400 and enters the ball receiving portion 467, or the game ball enters from the opening 451a and the lower displacement unit 400 There is a problem that a game ball enters the inside (see FIG. 67(c)). However, in the third control example, a command (payout command or winning effect (payout In order to execute the command) for displaying the value corresponding to the number of prize balls on the third symbol display device 81, when the command) is received, the monitoring of the storage sensor SP5 is started, and after the initial operation is completed, the ending command , Variation pattern command, customer waiting command (a command output from the main controller 110 when no variation is executed for a certain period of time or no variation or firing handle is operated for a certain period of time) After receiving either Monitoring whether the storage sensor SP5 is turned on until 2 seconds elapses (identifies whether it is turned on or not at intervals (for example, 4 ms) through which a game ball can pass) is executed.

By configuring in this way, even during the period when the third electric accessory is opened by the timing when the initial action is performed, the storage sensor SP5 can be monitored, and it is possible to monitor whether the game ball has entered the lower displacement unit 400 or not. When the storage sensor SP5 is monitored and the passage of the game ball is detected, one of an ending command (a command output at the end of the jackpot game), a variation pattern command, and a customer waiting command is output. In the operation of ejecting the game ball from the lower displacement unit 400 at the timing when seconds have passed, the ejection operation (the rotation of the lower displacement unit 400 is at the origin position, the movable rack 464 is moved to the launch position, and then the origin position ) is executed, and the game ball ejected from the exit opening 471 of the lower displacement unit 400 is recovered from the recovery port 411f (see FIG. 43).

Thereby, even when the game ball is guided into the lower displacement unit 400 during the initial operation, the discharge operation is executed after the game ball does not enter the lower displacement unit 400 .

The discharge operation is executed after 2 seconds have passed since each of the above commands because the movable rack 464 is moved from the firing position to the origin position, and the distribution member 540 moves the game ball to the lower displacement unit 400. 2 seconds is set in consideration of the period until the game ball reaches the opening 451a (the last game ball distributed) after the game ball is not distributed.

It should be noted that when the command output based on the fact that the third electric accessory is hit by the main controller 110 is received during the period in which the initial action is being executed, the storage sensor monitoring flag 223bi is turned on. It is configured such that the selection of the effect (variation pattern) of tilting the lower displacement unit 400 is prohibited until the discharge operation is completed, and the execution thereof is prohibited. That is, the effect using the lower displacement unit 400 is prohibited until the discharge operation ends.

On the other hand, although the command is received, if the storage sensor monitoring flag 223bi is not turned on (that is, OFF), an ending command (a command output at the end of the jackpot game), a variation pattern command, or a customer waiting command is received until the monitoring period of 2 seconds elapses, the monitoring of the storage sensor SP5 is executed, and the effect using the lower displacement unit 400 is performed for the fluctuation that starts until the execution is completed. configured to prohibit

With this configuration, the lower displacement unit 400 is configured not to tilt when a game ball accidentally enters the lower displacement unit 400 due to the initial operation, so that the game ball does not enter the lower displacement unit 400. It is possible to suppress the problem that the tilting motor KM1 is subjected to an excessive load and damaged due to the tilting operation while the ball is hit. In addition, in this control example, regardless of the state of the pachinko machine 10, an initial operation of a predetermined specific pattern is executed as an initial operation executed when the power is turned on, but this is not limitative. For example, when the power is turned off during a winning game (during a big winning game of jackpot C or during a small winning game) and the power is turned on in that state, the initial operation for the lower displacement unit 400 is given priority. It may be configured to execute In other words, the initial operation mode may be variably set according to the game state when the power is turned on. In this case, for example, after the power is turned on, it is preferable to set the initial operation mode in which the initial operation of the downward displacement unit 400 is completed before the third electric accessory 82a is opened. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the lower displacement unit 400 during the initial operation.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the third control example>
In the third control example, the ROM 222 of the sound ramp control device 113 stores initial operation data 222ba, firing operation data 222bb, origin operation data 222bc, discharge operation data 222bd, first operation data 222be, and the like in the ROM 222 of the first control example. A second motion data 222bf has been added. Other points are the same as those of the first control example, and thus description thereof is omitted.

The initial motion data 222ba is movable data set to perform the initial motion of the lower displacement unit 400 which is performed when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 309, the type of motor to be driven, driving direction, and motor stop condition are set for each operation status. The operation status is set in the initial operation setting process (S2021, see FIG. 312) executed in the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 executed when the power is turned on. It is started, incremented by 1, and the driving corresponding to the operation status is executed, and each time the execution is completed, the operation status is incremented and the necessary initial operations are executed in order. Regarding the driving direction set in the initial operation data 222ba, the positive direction of the slide motor is the direction in which the motor is driven in the direction to move the movable rack 464 from the origin position toward the shooting position, and the positive direction of the tilting motor is , in which the lower displacement unit 400 is rotated from the origin position (the retracted position sensor is on) to the first extended state direction.

The shooting motion data 222bb is motion data for driving the movable rack 464 from the origin position to the shooting position to shoot the game ball from the ejection opening 471 . Specifically, as shown in FIG. 310(a), the slide motor is configured to be driven in the + direction until the firing position sensor is turned on.

The origin movement data 222bc is origin return movement data for moving the movable rack 464 and the lower displacement unit 400 to the origin position. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 310(b), after the game ball is shot from the ejection opening 471, the slide motor is driven in the - direction (toward the origin position) and the origin position sensor is turned on. and the tilting motor is driven in the - direction (to drive in the direction of the retraction position (original position)) until the retraction position sensor is turned on.

Further, when the ejection operation is performed by the operation of the movable rack 464 while the lower displacement unit 400 is at the retracted position (original position), setting of the movable data in the tilting motor is not performed.

The ejection operation data 222bd is operation data for ejecting the game ball entered into the lower displacement unit 400, and data similar to the shooting operation data 222bb is set.

The first motion data 222be is motion data for receiving a game ball in the ball receiving portion 467 while the lower displacement unit 400 is at the retracted position. This is drive data for moving to the origin position (see FIG. 311(a)). This first action data 222be is set when a big winning game (big winning C) or a small winning game, that is, a winning game for opening the third electric accessory 82a is executed (see S4002 in FIG. 315), The driving data is stipulated that the ball that has won the third prize winning port 82 during the winning game is stored in the ball receiving portion 467, and then the movable rack 464 is positioned at the origin position. When a command (hit-related command) indicating that a big hit game or a small hit game is executed from the main control device 110 is received, the corresponding flag out of the big hit medium flag 223ba and the small hit medium flag 223bb is turned on. Is set to, in the operation control process (see S2141 in FIG. 313) executed in the main process (see FIG. 313) of the audio lamp control device 113, either the flag 223ba during the big hit or the flag 223bb during the small hit is set to ON The first operation data 222be is set when it is determined that any one of them is set to ON. Here, the contents defined in the first motion data 222be will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 311(a). A plurality of operation statuses (operation status 1, operation status 3) are defined in the first operation data 222be. The drive data for driving is defined, and after the storage sensor SP5 is turned on, that is, after the tip side of the ball receiving portion 647 (tip on the firing position side) is detected by the storage sensor SP5, the movable rack is started. The end condition is defined so that the driving of the operation status 1 ends when the 464 is further driven in the positive direction (direction toward the firing position) by 10 steps. The position where the end condition of the operation status 1 is satisfied becomes the ball receiving position of the movable rack 464 (see FIG. 307(b)). When the operation status 1 ends, the operation status 1 is changed to the operation status 2 . In this operation status 2, drive data is not defined, and the movable rack 464 is maintained in a state in which the end condition of operation status 1 is satisfied. The end condition of the operation status 2 is configured to be satisfied when the storage sensor SP5 detects that the ball is stored in the ball receiving portion 467, and in the state where the operation status 2 is set, the storage sensor When the SP 5 determines that the ball has been stored, the end condition for the operation status 2 is established, and the operation status 2 is changed to the operation status 3. The operation status 3 defines drive data for driving the movable rack 464 in the negative direction (origin position direction) until the origin sensor (not shown) detects the movable rack 464 . Then, when it is determined that the origin sensor (not shown) has detected the movable rack 464, the end condition of the operation status 3 is established, and the driving of the movable rack 464 based on the first operation data 222be is ended. And when the drive of the movable rack 464 based on the 1st operation data 222be is complete|finished, the flag set to ON among the flag 223ba during a big hit, and the flag 223bb during a small hit is set to OFF. By configuring in this way, the ball can be reliably stored in the ball receiving portion 467 of the movable rack 464 during the winning game, and the movable rack 464 based on the first operation data 222be during one winning game. It is possible to prevent an action from being executed multiple times. Furthermore, in this control example, the first operation data 222be for causing the movable rack 464 to perform a series of driving operations defines an operation status (operation status 2) in which the movable rack 464 is not driven. It is configured so that the movable rack 464 is not driven until a condition other than driving (ball storage by the ball receiving portion 467) is established. By setting a period in which the movable rack 464 is not driven in the operation data 222be in this manner, a series of driving operations can be executed smoothly. In the explanation of the operation of the movable rack 464 using the first operation data 222be described above, an example in which the movable rack 464 was normally driven according to the contents specified in the first operation data 222be was explained. A time limit is set for each operation status defined in the first operation data 222be in order to inform the outside that an abnormality has occurred early when the slide motor for driving the is broken down. The time limit is set so that the end condition (stop condition) can be satisfactorily provided that the movable rack 464 operates normally. In addition, an abnormality notification is output to the outside. Further, the drive processing for the movable rack 464 is repeatedly executed within the time limit.

The second motion data 222bf is drive data that defines the motion content of the lower displacement unit 400 to be executed during a specific period (round game period of the eighth round) in the jackpot game. This is for executing a fanning effect in which the lower displacement unit 400 is swung accordingly. Here, when the second operation data 222bf is specifically described with reference to FIG. In the motion control process (see S2141 in FIG. 313) executed in the main process (see FIG. 313), the second motion data 222bf is set. In the second operation data 222bf, drive data for driving the tilting motor for driving the downward displacement unit 400 in the vertical direction are defined by dividing them into three operation statuses. Specifically, when the second motion data 222bf is set, first, the motion status 1 for driving the downward displacement unit 400 in the positive direction (upward direction) is executed. A termination condition (stop condition) is defined so that the driving of the lower displacement unit 400 based on this operation status 1 is terminated (stopped) when an elevation sensor (not shown) detects the lowered lower displacement unit 400. there is Then, when the operation status 1 ends, the operation status 2 is entered next, and the driving contents opposite to the driving contents of the operation status 1 are executed. That is, the operation status 2 defines the drive content for driving the tilting motor in the negative direction (downward direction). An end condition (stop condition) is defined such that the operation status 2 ends (stops) when the retraction sensor (lift sensor) detects that the lower displacement unit 400 has descended to the lowered position. Then, when the player operates the frame button 22 in the state where the action status 2 is completed, the action status transition condition is established, and the action status is shifted to the action status 3 . This operation status 3 defines the driving contents for driving the lower displacement unit 400 in the positive direction (upward direction) for 30 steps of the tilting motor. 3 is terminated and the operation status 2 is entered. After that, operation status 2 and operation status 3 are repeatedly executed until a specific period during the jackpot game (round game period of the 8th round) ends. In this way, even when the configuration for driving (swinging motion) the lower displacement unit 400 based on the operation of the frame button 22 is used, motion data (second motion data 222bf) indicating a series of motion contents is used. This allows the movable object to be driven smoothly. Note that the second motion data 222bf may be configured as follows. Specifically, after moving the lower displacement unit 400 to the raised position (first extended state) and raising it by 30 steps based on the operation of the frame button 22, when the frame button 22 is next operated, the rise sensor It may be constructed such that a fanning motion (swinging motion) is performed to descend until is turned on. In addition, a display mode imitating the lower displacement unit 400 can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and in the effect of shooting a game ball from the emission opening 471 of the lower displacement unit 400, the lower displacement unit 400 is operated. Instead, the display mode simulating the downward displacement unit can be changed to the first projecting state, and the effect of shooting the game ball can be displayed in place of the display mode. Further, when the lower displacement unit 400 is to be swung, the lower displacement unit 400 is varied to the first extended state. , and the third pattern display device 81 on the back side of the lower displacement unit 400 swings the pattern imitating the lower displacement unit 400 from the stopped lower displacement unit 400 within a predetermined movable range. A simulated display mode can be displayed, and the display mode and the lower displacement unit 400 can be fused to produce a swing performance. Here, the audio lamp control device 113 is equipped with an RTC capable of clocking the date and time, and after a certain period of time (for example, one year later), without executing the swing effect of the lower displacement unit 400, By switching to the swing performance combined with the display mode, it is possible to prevent the lower displacement unit 400 from malfunctioning due to movement exceeding the durability of the lower displacement unit 400 . Further, when a failure is detected in which the lower displacement unit 400 does not operate even if the operation data of the lower displacement unit 400 is set, a display mode simulating the lower displacement unit 400 is variably displayed instead of the effect that the lower displacement unit 400 operates. You may make it Next, referring to FIG. 308(b), the contents defined in the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described. FIG. 308(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. In the third control example, in contrast to the above-described second control example, the flag 223ba during the big hit, the flag 223bb during the small hit, the ending flag 223bc for the big hit, the ending flag 223bd for the small hit, the operation status storage area 223bf, the launch effect flag 223be, The difference is that an in-firing operation flag 223bg, an origin operation flag 223bh, a storage sensor monitoring flag 223bi, a ball discharge flag 223bj, an operation prohibition counter 223bk, and a standby counter 223bl are added, and the others are the same. For convenience of explanation, some of the elements described in the first control example and the second control example are omitted. The mid-jackpot flag 223ba is a flag for indicating that a jackpot game whose jackpot type is jackpot C is executed, and is set to ON when a jackpot game whose jackpot type is jackpot C is executed. Then, when it is determined that it is set to ON, a driving operation for storing balls in the ball receiving portion 467 of the movable rack 464 is executed, and when the driving operation is completed, it is set to OFF. The small winning middle flag 223bb is a flag for indicating that the small winning game is executed, and is set to ON when the small winning game is executed. When this small hitting medium flag 223bb is set to ON, the driving operation same as that of the big hitting medium flag 223ba described above is executed, and when the driving operation ends, it is set to OFF. That is, in this control example, when a winning game that allows a ball to enter the third winning port 82 is executed, a drive operation for storing the ball in the ball receiving portion 467 of the movable rack 464 is executed. It is configured to execute the process for only once, and the above-described big hit medium flag 223ba and small hit medium flag 223bb serve as a trigger for executing the driving operation. The jackpot ending flag 223bc is a flag for indicating that it is the ending period of the jackpot C jackpot game, and is set to ON when it is the jackpot C jackpot game ending period. The setting status of the jackpot ending flag 223bc is referenced in the operation control process (see S2141 in FIG. 315) (see S4007 in FIG. 315), and when it is determined that it is set to ON (S4007 in FIG. 315: Yes) , the shooting operation setting process (see S4008 in FIG. 315) for shooting the ball stored in the ball receiving portion 467 of the movable rack 464 toward the treasure box accessory 750 (see FIG. 207) is executed. Then, when the firing operation setting process (see S4008 in FIG. 319) is all completed, it is set to OFF. The small winning ending flag 223bd is a flag for indicating that it is the ending period of the small winning game, and is set to ON when it is the ending period of the small winning game. The setting status of the ending flag 223bc of the small hit game is referenced in the operation control process (see S2141 in FIG. 315) (see S4003 in FIG. 315), and when it is determined that it is set to ON (S4003 in FIG. 315 : Yes), the ejection operation setting process (see S4004 in FIG. 315) for ejecting the ball stored in the ball receiving portion 467 of the movable rack 464 is executed. Then, it is set to OFF when the discharge operation setting process (see S4004 in FIG. 317) is all completed. The operation status storage area 223bf stores operation data (initial operation data 222ba, firing operation data 222bb, origin operation data 222bc, ejection operation data 222bd, first operation data 222be, third 2 operation data 222bf) and the status of the operation currently being executed in an identifiable manner. The shooting effect flag 223be is a flag for indicating that the shooting effect to be executed during the ending period of the jackpot game is executable, and is turned on when it is determined that the shooting effect is executable. (see S4404 in FIG. 319). When the frame button 22 is operated in a state where the shooting effect flag 223be is set to ON, a shooting operation (a ball stored in the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement unit 400 is released into a treasure box accessory 750 (see FIG. 207). ) is executed. Then, it is set to OFF when the shooting operation is executed (see S4408 in FIG. 319). The during-firing operation flag 223bg is a flag that is set to ON when the frame button 22 is operated in a state in which the firing effect flag 223be is set to be ON. This indicates that the current firing operation is in progress. This during-firing operation flag 223bg is set to OFF when the ending period of the jackpot ends. The origin operation flag 223bh is a flag for indicating that the origin operation data 222bc is set, and is set to ON when the origin operation data 222bc is set. By determining the setting status of the origin operation flag 223bh, the processing for setting the origin operation data (processing of S4202 to S4205 in FIG. 317) can be skipped. The storage sensor monitoring flag 223bi is set when a ball enters the third winning hole 82 in the initial operation setting process (S2021 in FIG. 312) executed when the power is turned on. It is a flag for indicating that it is a period for monitoring whether the ball that has won the third prize hole 82 is stored in the ball receiving portion 467 when it is transmitted. When it is detected that a ball is stored in the ball receiving portion 467 while the storage sensor monitoring flag 223bi is set to ON, the ball discharge flag 223bj is set to ON. The ball discharge flag 223bj is a flag for indicating that the conditions for setting the discharge operation data 222bd are satisfied, and is set to ON when the conditions for setting the discharge operation data 222bd are satisfied. The setting state of the ball ejection flag 223bj is referred to in the initial ejection operation setting process (see S2140 in FIG. 314), and the ejection operation data 222bd is set when the ball ejection flag 223bj is set to ON. The operation prohibition counter 223bk is a counter for which a predetermined period (2) is set in the initial operation setting process (see S2021 in FIG. 312). During the period until the value of the operation prohibition counter 223bk changes to the initial value (eg, 0), a specific operation (eg, ball ejection operation) is prohibited. The waiting counter 223bl is a counter for measuring a waiting period of a predetermined period after receiving a command (ending command, variation pattern command, customer waiting command) indicating that the initial operation process has ended. If a command indicating that the process has ended is received (S3906 in FIG. 314: Yes), a value indicating a predetermined period (a value indicating two seconds) is set (see S3907 in FIG. 314). The value of the standby counter 223bl is decremented by 1 each time the initial discharge operation setting process (see S2140 in FIG. 314) is executed every 1 millisecond in the main process (see FIG. 313) of the sound lamp control device 113. When the value of the standby counter 223bl becomes 0 and the ball discharge flag 223bj is set to ON (S3913 in FIG. 314: Yes), the discharge operation data 222bd is set. With this configuration, even if a ball enters the third winning hole 82 during the initial operation process, it waits for a period (within two seconds) required for the winning ball to reach the ball receiving portion 467. Since the discharge operation process can be executed from the beginning, it is possible to suppress execution of an abnormal effect based on the winning of the ball into the third winning hole 82 during the initial operation process.

<Regarding control processing of the audio ramp control device in the third control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 312 to 319. FIG. The control processing of the audio ramp control device 113 in the third control example is different from the control processing of the audio ramp control device 113 in the above-described first control example. ), and an operation control process (S2112) is added. Specifically, a process for controlling the operation of the lower displacement unit 400 and a process for confirming the initial operation of the lower displacement unit 400 during the start-up process are added.

Next, the initial operation setting process (S2071), which is one process of the start-up process in the third control example, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 312 is a flow chart showing the contents of the initial operation setting process (S2071). The initial operation setting process (S2071) is a process for confirming the details of the operation of the lower displacement unit 400 during the start-up process.

In the initial operation setting process (S2071), first, it is determined whether or not the storage sensor monitoring flag 223bi is on (S2031). When it is determined that the storage sensor monitoring flag 223bi is not ON (S2031: No), it is determined whether or not the upper left prize ball command has been received (S2032). When it is determined that the upper left prize ball command is received (S2032: Yes), the operation prohibition counter 223bk is set to 2 (S2033), the storage sensor monitoring flag 223bi is set to ON (S2034), and the process of S2038 is performed. Transition. On the other hand, in the processing of S2032, when it is determined that the upper left prize ball command has not been received (S2032), the processing of S2033 to S2034 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S2038.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S2031 that the storage sensor monitoring flag 223bi is on (S2031: Yes), it is determined whether or not the ball discharge flag 223bj is on (S2035). If it is determined that the ball discharge flag 223bj is not ON (S2035: No), the ball discharge flag 223bj is set to ON (S2036), the storage sensor monitoring flag 223bi is set to OFF (S2037), and S2038 Go to processing. On the other hand, in the processing of S2035, when it is determined that the ball discharge flag 223bj is ON (S2035: Yes), the processing of S2036-S2037 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S2038.

In the process of S2038, it is determined whether the ball ejection operation is completed or whether the value of the operation status stored in the operation status storage area 223bf is 0. If it is determined that the initial operation has not been completed (S2038: No), the processing of S2031 to S2037 is repeatedly executed until the operation is completed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the operation is completed (S2038: Yes), it is determined whether or not the operation status is set to 5 (S2039). If it is determined that 5 is not set in the operation status (S2039: No), +1 is set in the operation status (S2040), corresponding operation data is set (S2041), and based on the fixed display data table Time data is set in the clock counter (S2042), and the process returns to S2031. On the other hand, when it is determined that the operation status is 5 in the process of S2039 (S2039: Yes), the operation status is reset (S2043), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 313, main processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described. In the main process in the third control example, after executing the same processes as S2101 to S2111 of the main process in the first control example (see FIG. 257), initial discharge operation setting process (S2140) and operation control process (S2141). It is different in that it adds Since the other processes are the same processes, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the initial discharge operation setting process (S2140), which is one process of the main process (see FIG. 313) in the third control example, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 314 is a flow chart showing the contents of the initial ejection operation setting process (S2140).

In the initial discharge operation setting process (S2140), first, it is determined whether or not the storage sensor monitoring flag 223bi is on (S3901). If it is determined that the storage sensor monitoring flag 223bi is not ON (S3901: No), the ball is not stored in the ball receiving unit 455, so this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the storage sensor monitoring flag 223bi is ON (S3901: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the standby counter 223bl is greater than 0 (S3902). When it is determined that the value of the standby counter 223bl is not greater than 0 (that is, it is 0) (S3902: No), it is determined whether the ball discharge flag 223bj is on (S3903). When it is determined that the ball ejection flag 223bj is not on (S3903: No), it is determined whether the storage sensor is on (S3904). When it is determined that the storage sensor is ON (S3904: Yes), the ball ejection flag 223bj is set to ON (S3905), and the process proceeds to S3906. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ball discharge flag 223bj is on in the process of S3903 (S3903: Yes), or when it is determined in the process of S3904 that the storage sensor is not on (S3904: No), The process of S3905 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3906.

In the processing of S3906, it is determined whether or not any one of the jackpot ending command, variation pattern command, and customer waiting command has been received (S3906). If it is determined that any one of the jackpot ending command, variation pattern command, and customer waiting command has been received (S3906: Yes), the value of the standby counter corresponding to 2 seconds is set (S3907), and this process ends. do. On the other hand, if it is determined that none of the jackpot ending command, variation pattern command, and customer waiting command has been received (S3906: No), this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3902 that the value of the standby counter 223bl is greater than 0 (S3902: Yes), it is determined whether or not the ball discharge flag 223bj is on (S3908). When it is determined that the ball discharge flag 223bj is not on (S3908: No), it is determined whether the storage sensor is on (S3909). When it is determined that the storage sensor is ON (S3909: Yes), the ball discharge flag 223bj is set to ON (S3910), and the process proceeds to S3911. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3908 that the ball discharge flag 223bj is ON (S3908: Yes), or if it is determined in the process of S3904 that the storage sensor is not ON (S3909: No), The process of S3910 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3911.

In the process of S3911, 1 is subtracted from the value of the standby counter 223bl (S3911). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the standby counter 223bl subtracted in the process of S3911 is 0 (S3912). When it is determined that the value of the standby counter 223bl is 0 (S3912: Yes), it is determined whether or not the ball ejection flag 223bj is on (S3913). If it is determined that the ball ejection flag 223bj is on (S3913: Yes), ejection operation data is set (S3914), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3912 that the value of the standby counter 223bl is not 0 (that is, is greater than or equal to 1) (S3912: No), or in the process of S3913 it is determined that the ball discharge flag 223bj is not ON. If it is determined (S3913: No), this processing is terminated.

Next, the operation control process (S2141), which is one process of the main process (see FIG. 313) in the third control example, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 315 is a flow chart showing the contents of the operation control process (S2141). In this action control process (S2141), a process for controlling the action of the lower displacement unit 400 is executed according to the game state.

In the operation control process (S2141), first, it is determined whether the small winning flag 223ac or the big winning flag 223ab is ON, that is, whether the current game state is a small winning or a big winning (S4001). When it is determined that the flag 223ab during the small hit or the flag 223ab during the big hit is ON, the first operation setting process is executed (S4002), and this process is terminated.

Here, the first operation setting process (S4002), which is one process in the operation control process (S2141), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 316 is a flow chart showing the contents of the first operation setting process (S4002). In this first action setting process (S4002), a process for controlling the action of the ball receiving unit 445 is executed when the game state is a small win or a big win.

In the first operation setting process (S4002), first, it is determined whether or not the operation status is 0 (S4101). Specifically, it determines whether the value stored in the operation status storage area 223bf is 0 or not. When it is determined that the operation status is 0 (S4101: Yes), the operation status is set to 1 (S4102), and the operation data is set in the ball receiving unit 445 (S4103). The operation status 1 is specified in the first operation data 222be (see FIG. 310(a)). When the operation status is set to 1, the slide motor KM is driven to drive in the plus direction from the origin position. Then, it stops when the first sensor is set to ON. By driving in this way, it is possible to drive to a position where the ball that has flowed in from the third winning port 82 can be received by the ball receiving portion 467 .

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4101 that the operation status is not 0, it is determined whether the operation status is 1 (S4104). If it is determined that the operation status is 1 (S4104: Yes), it is determined whether the second position sensor is on (S4105). If it is determined that the second position sensor is not on (S4105: No), the ball receiving unit 445 is not driven to the second position, so the processing of S4106-S4107 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4108. . On the other hand, if it is determined that the second position sensor is on, the operation status is set to 2 (S4106), and the operation data is set (S4107). In operation status 2, waiting is set until the ball is stored in the ball receiving portion 467 from the third winning hole 82 .

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4104 that the operation status is not 1, it is determined whether the operation status is 2 (S4108). If it is determined that the operation status is 2 (S4108: Yes), it is determined whether or not the storage sensor is ON (S4109). If it is determined that the storage sensor is not on (S4109), the ball entered from the third winning hole 82 is not stored, so the processing of S4110 to S4111 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4112. Transition. On the other hand, in the process of S4109, if it is determined that the storage sensor is ON (S4109: Yes), the operation status is set to 3 (S4110), the operation data is set (S4111), and the process proceeds to S4112. do. In the operation status 3, when the ball is stored in the ball receiving portion 467 from the third winning hole 82, the slide motor is driven in the negative direction. Then, it stops when the origin sensor is set to ON. In other words, the ball receiving unit 445 is controlled to once return to the origin position once the ball is stored from the third winning hole 82 . Then, the pooled ball is discharged in the discharging operation setting process (S4004) and the shooting operation setting process (S4008), which will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4108 that the operation status is not 2 (S4108: No), it is determined whether the operation status is 3 (S4112). If it is determined that the operation status is 3 (S4112: Yes), it is determined whether or not the origin sensor is on (S4113). If it is determined that the origin sensor is on (S4113: Yes), the operation status is reset (S4114), and this processing ends.

Returning to FIG. 315, the description continues. In the processing of S4001, when it is determined that the small hitting medium flag 223bb or the big hitting medium flag 223ba is not ON (S4001: No), it is determined whether the small hitting ending flag 223bd is set to ON (S4003). . When it is determined that the small hit ending flag 223bd is ON (S4003: Yes), the discharge operation setting process (S4004) is executed, and this process ends.

Here, referring to FIG. 317, the ejection operation setting process (S4004), which is one process in the operation control process (S2141), will be described. FIG. 317 is a flow chart showing the contents of the ejection operation setting process (S4004). In this ejection operation setting process (S4004), the process for controlling the operation of ejecting the ball from the ball receiving unit 445 at the timing of the ending of the small hit is executed.

In the discharge operation setting process (S4004), first, it is determined whether or not the origin operation flag 223bh is on. If it is determined that the origin operation flag 223bh is not ON (S4201: No), the ejection operation data is set (S4202). Then, it is determined whether or not the firing position sensor is turned on (S4203). If it is determined that the firing position sensor is off (S4203: Yes), the origin operation data is set (S4204), the origin operation flag 223bh is set on (S4205), and the process proceeds to S4206. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4201 that the origin operation flag 223bh is off (S4201: No), the processes of S4201 to S4205 are skipped and the process proceeds to S4206.

Next, it is determined whether or not the origin sensor is on (S4206). When it is determined that the origin sensor is on (S4206: Yes), the origin operation flag is set to off (S4207), the small winning ending flag 223bd is set to off (S4208), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4206 that the origin sensor is not on (S4206: No), this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 315, the description continues. In the processing of S4003, when it is determined that the small winning ending flag 223bd is off (S4003: No), it is determined whether or not the big winning round is the eighth round (S4005). When it is determined that the jackpot round is the eighth round (S4005: Yes), the second operation setting process (S4006) is executed, and this process ends.

Here, the second operation setting process (S4006), which is one process in the operation control process (S2141), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 318 is a flow chart showing the contents of the second operation setting process (S4006). This second operation setting process (S4006) is performed to raise the lower displacement unit 400 to the firing position in the 8th round of the big win, and to execute the vertical fan effect when the player presses the frame button 22. control processing.

In the second operation setting process (S4006), first, it is determined whether or not the operation status is 0 (S4301). Specifically, it determines whether the value stored in the operation status storage area 223bf is 0 or not. If it is determined that the motion status is 0 (S4301: Yes), the motion status is set to 1 (S4302), and motion data is set in the lower displacement unit 400 (S4303). The motion status 1 is specified in the second motion data 222bf (see FIG. 310(b)), and when 1 is set in the motion status, the tilting motor is driven and drives in the plus direction from the origin position. Then, it stops when the rise sensor is set to ON.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4301 that the operation status is not 0 (S4301: No), it is determined whether the operation status is 1 (S4304). If it is determined that the operation status is 1 (S4304: Yes), it is determined whether the rise sensor is on (S4305). If it is determined that the rise sensor is not on (S4305: No), the downward displacement unit 400 has not been driven to the first position, so the processes of S4306 and S4307 are skipped and the process proceeds to S4308. On the other hand, if it is determined that the rise sensor is on, the operation status is set to 2 (S4306), and the operation data is set (S4307).

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4304 that the operation status is not 1 (S4304: No), it is determined whether the operation status is 2 (S4308). If it is determined that the operation status is 2 (S4308: Yes), it is determined whether or not the rise sensor is ON (S4309). If it is determined that the rise sensor is not ON (S4309), the lower displacement unit 400 is in the standby state at the origin position, so the processes of S4310 to S4312 are skipped and the process proceeds to S4313. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4308 that the rise sensor is on (S4309: Yes), it is determined whether the frame button 22 has been pressed (S4310). If it is determined that the frame button 22 has not been pressed (S4310: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S4310: Yes), the operation status is set to 3 (S4311), the operation data is set (S4312), and the process proceeds to S4313. In the operation status 3, when the ball is stored in the ball receiving portion 467 from the third winning hole 82, the tilting motor is driven in the positive direction. Then, the lower displacement unit 400 stops when the 30-step rise is set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4308 that the operation status is not 2 (S4308: No), it is determined whether the operation status is 3 (S4313). When it is determined that the operation status is 3 (S4313: Yes), the downward displacement unit 400 determines whether or not it has risen by 30 steps (S4314). If it is determined that the lower displacement unit 400 has risen by 30 steps (S4314: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the lower displacement unit 400 has moved up by 30 steps (S4314: Yes), it is determined whether the frame button 22 has been pressed (S4315). If it is determined that the frame button 22 has not been pressed (S4315: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4315 that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S4315: Yes), the operation status is set to 2 (S4316), the operation data is set (S4317), and this processing ends.

Returning to FIG. 315, the description continues. In the processing of S4005, when it is determined that there is no jackpot in the eighth round (S4005: No), it is determined whether or not the jackpot ending flag 223bc (S4007). When it is determined that the jackpot ending flag 223bc is ON (S4007: Yes), the shooting operation setting process (S4008) is executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot ending flag 223bc is not ON (S4007: No), this process is terminated.

Here, the shooting operation setting process (S4008), which is one process in the operation control process (S2141), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 318 is a flow chart showing the contents of the shooting operation setting process (S4008). This shooting operation setting process (S4008) executes a process for shooting the balls stored in the first operation setting process (S4002) from the lower displacement unit 400 at the ending of the big win.

In the firing operation setting process (S4008), first, it is determined whether or not the rise sensor is on (S4401). If it is determined that the rise sensor is not on (S4401: No), 30 step data for descent is set (S4402), and the process proceeds to S4411. On the other hand, when it is determined that the rise sensor is on (S4401: Yes), it is determined whether or not the shooting effect flag 223be is on, that is, whether or not the shooting effect is set (S4403). When it is determined that the shooting effect flag 223be is not ON (S4403: No), since the shooting effect is not set, the shooting effect flag 223be is set to ON (S4404), and the shooting effect is set (S4405). , S4411.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S4403 that the shooting effect flag 223be is on (S4403: Yes), it is determined whether the frame button 22 is on (S4406). When it is determined that the frame button 22 is on (S4406: Yes), the processing of S4407 to S4410 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4411. When it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S4406: No), the shooting effect is set (S4407), and the shooting effect flag 223be is set to OFF (S4408). Next, the shooting motion data is set (S4409), the shooting effect in progress motion flag 223bg is set to ON (S4410), and the process proceeds to S4411.

In the process of S4411, it is determined whether or not the firing position sensor is ON (S4411). When it is determined that the firing position sensor is on (S4411: Yes), in order to return the lower displacement unit 400 to the origin position, origin movement data is set (S4412), and the origin movement flag 223bh is set to on. (S4413), the process proceeds to S4414. On the other hand, in the process of S4411, if it is determined that the firing position sensor is off (S4411: No), the lower displacement unit 400 is not in the firing position, so the processes of S4412 and S4413 are skipped, and the process of S4414 is performed. Transition.

After executing the processing of S4411 or S4413, it is determined whether the origin sensor is on, that is, whether the lower displacement unit 400 is at the origin position (S4414). When it is determined that the origin sensor is on (S4414: Yes), the jackpot ending flag 223bc is set to off (S4415), the origin operation flag 223bh is set to off (S4416), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4414, if it is determined that the origin sensor is not on (S4414: No), this process ends.

<Fourth control example>
Next, a fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 320 to 351. FIG. This fourth control example differs from the above-described first control example in that the configuration of the game board 13 is changed, the control content of the main control device 110 is changed, and the control content of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed. It is different from the changed point. The same elements as those in the first control example described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

A brief description will be given of major differences between the fourth control example and the above-described first control example. In the first control example described above, the control processing of the main controller 110 is executed so that the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not dynamically displayed at the same time (in parallel). The fourth control example is greatly different in that control processing is executed so that the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed dynamically (in parallel) at the same time.

Further, in the above-described first control example, while the jackpot game is being executed, the pseudo-jackpot effect using the pseudo-attacker 165 is executed. , is significantly different in that a pseudo jackpot effect using a pseudo attacker 165 is executed when a latent state is set as a game state. Furthermore, it is also greatly different in that the contents of the pseudo-jackpot production are different.

First, the configuration of the game board 13 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 320 and 321. FIG. The game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example has a lower first ball entrance 64D in the lower area of the game board 13 in contrast to the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. , a lower electric accessory 64Da attached to the lower first ball entrance 64D is provided, and a second variable prize winning device 650 (second specific prize winning port 650a) is provided below the first lower prize winning port 64D. , and that a special winning device 1550 is provided in the right area of the game board 13 instead of the special winning device 550 .

The lower first ball entrance 64D is variably controlled from a closed position to an open position where a ball is difficult to enter in the case of winning by lottery of normal symbols. and a state in which the ball is likely to enter. When the ball enters the lower first ball entrance 64Da, the same processing as when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 is executed.

The lower first ball entrance 64D is arranged at a location that is more difficult for the player to see than the first ball entrance 64, and has a shape that is more difficult for the player to see than the first ball entrance 64. It is constructed so as not to inform the player that the ball is likely to enter the first ball entrance 64D. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp at what timing the lottery right of the special figure 1 was acquired. In this control example, the lower first ball entrance 64D is provided directly below the first ball entrance 64, and among the balls shot aiming at the first ball entrance 64, By constructing so that the ball that did not enter can enter the lower first ball entry hole 64D, the ball can be entered into the lower first prize entry hole 64D without giving a sense of incongruity to the player. However, the arrangement position of the lower first ball entrance 64D is not limited to this. .

The second variable prize winning device 650 is a prize winning device that is opened when a specific jackpot is won in the lottery of special figure 1, and by opening the opening/closing door 650f1, it becomes an open state in which the ball can easily win a prize. By closing 650f1, the operation is controlled so that the ball is in a closed state in which it is difficult to win a prize. In this control example, when the second variable prize winning device 650 is opened and the jackpot win is won, a jackpot game is executed in which only a small number of prize balls (about 40) are awarded. Therefore, the winning of the jackpot in which the second variable prize winning device 650 is opened is not a jackpot aimed at winning a prize ball, but is shifted to a game state advantageous to the player (in this control example, a latent state). It will be a big hit to aim for. In this way, even if the number of prize balls given to the player is small for one big win, if a game state advantageous to the player is set after the end of the big win, the big win game can be played. (Winning a jackpot) provides a privilege advantageous to the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 321, the details of the special winning device 1550 provided in the fourth control example in place of the special winning device 550 in the first control example described above will be described. FIG. 208 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the special winning device 1550. FIG. As shown in FIG. 208, in the special winning device 1550 in the fourth control example, the position where the specific general winning prize port 163 was disposed (the front of the specific out port 166) is different from the special winning device 550 in the first control example. The point that the second ball entrance 640 is provided on the left side of the view), the point that the pseudo through gate 1167 is provided above the second ball entrance 640, and the pseudo second entrance is provided above the production flow path 691. In that the ball port 1640 is provided, the upstream side of the guide channel 690 (around the general ball throwing portion 690a) is a channel different from the guide channel 690 (pseudo second ball entrance 1640). The point that a branch portion 694a is provided that branches to the second guide flow path 694) for causing the game ball that reaches the branch portion 694a to flow down to the guide flow path 690 or to the second guide flow path 694 The difference is that a flow path switching member 695 is provided for switching between flowing down and flowing down. In addition, the second ball entrance 640 was provided in the first control example as the second ball entrance 640 was relocated to the position where the specific general winning hole 163 was provided in the first control example. The difference is that the position is hollow. Furthermore, the difference is that the number of prize balls to be paid out when detecting a ball entering the specific winning hole 65a is changed to ten.

As shown in FIG. 321, the second ball entrance 640 in this fourth control example is only provided with a pseudo-through gate 1167 above it, and is not provided with any structure that prevents ball entry. When the player hits to the right, the ball can be entered at all times. More specifically, about ⅓ of the game balls hit to the right enter the second ball entrance 640, and about ⅔ flow into the main path SK1. A branching portion 694a provided at a position where a game ball entering the second ball entrance 640 can reach is branched toward the rear side of the general ball-throwing portion 690a in a front view, and a flow path switching member 695 is retracted to the retracted position (back side in front view), the game ball flows down along the slope of the guide channel 690, so it flows down to the second guide channel 694 via the branch part 694a. no. On the other hand, in the state where the channel switching member 694a projects to the projecting position shown in FIG. In addition, since the flow path switching member 695 is inclined in the direction of guiding the game ball to the back side in the front view at the overhang position, the game ball is guided to the branch portion 694a by the inclination of the flow path switching member 695. is distributed to the guide flow path 694. In addition, the flow path switching member 695 is temporarily set when the lottery for the second special symbol is executed based on the fact that the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 during the execution of the latent probability effect B, which will be described later. After being moved to the protruding position and distributing the game ball that triggered the lottery of the second special symbol to the second guide flow path 694, it is retracted to the retracted position.

As shown in FIG. 321, the second guide channel 694 is provided with a guide channel sensor 694s capable of detecting passage of a game ball. When the passage of the game ball is detected by this guide flow path sensor 694s, the pseudo electric accessory 1640a attached to the pseudo second ball entrance 1640 is opened for 2 seconds, and the pseudo second ball entrance 1640 is opened. It becomes possible to enter the ball. At the most downstream side of the second guide channel 694, the game ball that has flowed down the second guide channel 694 rolls from the back side in the front view to the front side in the front view and falls into the pseudo second ball entrance 1640. A ball ejector 694b is provided that allows the The game ball dropped from the ball discharge part 694b enters the pseudo second ball entrance 1640, or enters the out port 1640b provided on the left side of the pseudo second ball entrance 1640. and discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, since the period required for the flow down of the second guide channel 694 is about 1 second, basically the game ball that has flowed down the second guide channel 694 is held for 2 seconds, which is the open period of the pseudo electric accessory 1640a. The ball enters the pseudo second ball entrance 1640 in between. The out port 1640b is for the purpose of normally discharging game balls that have reached the pseudo second ball inlet 1640 after the elapse of the opening period of the pseudo electric accessory 1640a due to irregularities such as ball clogging. is provided.

As shown in FIG. 321, the pseudo second entrance 1640 is provided with a pseudo electric accessory 1640a. This pseudo-electric accessory 1640a is opened and closed as part of the entertainment effect (latent probability effect B) in the latent probability mode (high probability state of special symbols and low probability state of normal symbols) which is most advantageous to the player. Details will be described later, but once it shifts to the latent mode, when it is lost in the lottery of the second special symbol, with a high probability, a special loss (small hit) in which the specific winning opening 65a is opened for 1 second. becomes. Thus, in the latent certainty mode, just by continuing to hit to the right, the ball can be entered into the second ball entrance 640 and the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed, and the second special symbol can be executed. When the lottery results in a small hit, the main paths SK1 to SK3 are allowed to flow down, and the game ball can be entered into the open specific winning hole 65a. That is, it becomes an advantageous state in which the lottery for the second special symbol can be executed without reducing the number of balls held. Furthermore, when the second special symbol lottery results in a big win in the latent probability mode, the game state after the big win is set to the latent probability mode again unless the probability variable limit number of times is reached. In other words, the latent probability mode and the big hit are repeated until the probability variable limit number of times is reached. In addition, in the fourth control example, since the probability variable limit number of times is set to 36 times, the advantageous probability mode and the big win are repeated until the maximum 36 times the big win (loop the probability mode).

However, relatively few models are equipped with the variable probability limit number of times and small wins, and the specifications are unfamiliar to many players. There is a risk that the player will shy away from this. Therefore, in the fourth control example, an effect (latent probability effect B) is executed to make the player recognize the behavior in the advantageous latent probability mode as if it were a variable probability state of a general model. It is configured. More specifically, when the second special symbol lottery is executed in the latent probability mode (and when the pseudo jackpot effect described later is not executed), the game that triggered the lottery of the second special symbol The ball (game ball that entered the second ball entrance 640) is caused to flow down to the second guide channel 694 (that is, the channel switching member 695 is moved to the overhanging position), and the guide channel sensor 694s The pseudo electric accessory 1640a is opened at the timing when the passage is detected, and the game ball that has flowed down the second guide flow path 694 is entered into the pseudo second ball entrance 1640 in the open state. Then, in the third symbol display device 81, after the game ball enters the pseudo second ball entrance 1640, the variation display effect of the big win is executed. In addition, the board configuration is such that the ball cannot enter the second ball entrance 640 unless it passes through the pseudo through gate 1167 . As a result, the player can be made to feel as if the pseudo electric accessory 1640a has been opened based on the passage of the game ball through the pseudo through gate 1167.例文帳に追加In addition, it is possible to execute an effect as if the lottery for the second special symbol was executed based on the fact that the ball entered the pseudo second ball entrance 1640.例文帳に追加That is, a behavior similar to the behavior of a variable probability state (a game state in which the electric role is easy to open and the probability of a big hit is high) in a general gaming machine (in an advantageous variable state, there is a high probability By opening the electric accessory of the second starting port and entering the game ball into the second starting port, it is possible to realize a behavior of winning a big hit with a high probability.

In addition, in all game states (modes) other than the latent mode, the behavior is similar to the behavior of the normal state (electric accessories are difficult to open and the jackpot probability is low) in general game machines. , the production mode and the like are set. As a result, it is possible to realize a well-balanced game that is easy for a wide range of players to understand.

In addition, in the fourth control example, in the variable probability mode, an effect (pseudo-jackpot effect) is executed in which a plurality of (for example, 5) big wins are shown as one big win. More specifically, a plurality of rounds (for example, 5 rounds) in the jackpot are configured to appear as if they were one round, so that the number of prize balls in one jackpot is the actual number of prize balls. can create the illusion of more than Therefore, when a big win is achieved, the player can feel a greater sense of satisfaction. Also, as described above, in the fourth control example, once the latent probability mode is entered, the jackpot and the latent probability mode are repeated until a maximum of 36 times the big win is achieved. Otherwise, the player will likely feel annoyed by frequent switching between the big win mode and the latent probability mode. On the other hand, in the fourth control example, since it is configured to perform an effect (pseudo-jackpot effect) that shows a plurality of jackpots (and the latent mode between the jackpots) as if it were one jackpot, a small jackpot It can be made to feel as if more prize balls could be won. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling annoyed. In addition, in this fourth control example, once it shifts to the latent certainty mode, it is configured to loop the latent certainty mode until the probability variable limit number of times is reached, so the remaining number of jackpots can be easily counted at the time of shifting to the latent certainty mode. It is possible to comprehend. As a result, it is possible to easily determine how many times of jackpots are set as one pseudo-jackpot performance, and whether or not the pseudo-jackpot performance can be ended neatly at the end of the latent probability mode (that is, when the probability variable limit number of times is reached). . Therefore, the pseudo-jackpot effect can be executed in a more natural manner.

It should be noted that, in the present fourth control example, when the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 in the latent certainty mode and when the pseudo-jackpot effect is not being executed, The ball is entered into the pseudo second ball entrance 1640, and it is configured to make it appear as if the second special pattern variable display performance is executed with the ball entering the pseudo second ball entrance 1640 as a trigger. , but not limited to these. For example, only when the second special symbol lottery results in a big win, the game ball that triggered the big win lottery may flow down to the pseudo second ball entrance 1640 . By configuring in this way, in the latent certainty mode, when a ball enters the second pseudo ball entrance 1640, it is possible to realize a behavior as if a big win is guaranteed, so the second pseudo ball entrance 1640 A game can be played by paying attention to whether or not a game ball enters the ball. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 322, the game flow in the fourth control example will be described. FIG. 322 is a transition diagram schematically showing the flow of game states. As shown in FIG. 322, the pachinko machine 10 in the present fourth control example is configured to be able to set four game states (normal state, variable probability state, latent probability state, time saving state). Then, when a special symbol jackpot is won, the special symbol high probability state is always set after the jackpot game ends. In addition, the upper limit is set to the number of times the high probability state of the special pattern is set continuously, and the number of times the high probability state of the special pattern is set continuously reaches the upper limit (variable limit state) Only when a jackpot is won in , a special pattern low probability state (time saving state) is set after the jackpot ends.

Further, in the fourth control example, among the game states in which the high probability state of the special symbol is set, the latent probability state is more advantageous to the player than the variable probability state. Furthermore, once it shifts to the latent certainty state, it is configured to facilitate setting the latent certainty state continuously until reaching the probability variable limit state. By configuring in this way, the player can play an advantageous game by shifting to the latent definite state while the number of times that the high probability state of the special symbol is continuously set is small.

When the normal state is set as the game state, the game state in which the lottery of the special figure 1 is mainly performed (the special figure 2 lottery in the normal state is set for a long period of time (eg, 10 minutes) as a variable time) ), 99.5% when winning the special figure 1 jackpot shifts to the probability variable state, and 0.5% shifts to the latent state.

While the probability variable state is set, the high probability state of the normal pattern is set, so the ball is easier to win the lower first ball entrance 64D than the normal state, so the lottery of special figure 1 is performed. easier. Furthermore, the special figure 1 jackpot winning probability is also set higher than the normal state, and the shift rate to the latent probability state when the special figure 1 jackpot is won is 10 times (5%) of the normal state. It should be noted that, even in the state that the probability variation state is set, a long time (for example, 10 minutes) is set as the variation time of the special figure 2 lottery, so the game state where the lottery of the special figure 1 is mainly performed even during this probability variation state becomes.

And, in the latent state, the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 lottery is set to a long time (for example, 10 minutes), and the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 lottery is set to a short period, so the lottery of the special figure 2 The game state is mainly played, and it is configured to make the player play the right-handed game. When a big hit is won in the special figure 2 lottery, the latent probability state is set again until the variable probability limit state is reached. In addition, in the special figure 2 lottery, it is set so that a small hit is won in most cases when the big hit is not won. Therefore, the special figure 2 lottery during the latent certainty state becomes the most advantageous lottery for the player, and the latent certainty state becomes the most advantageous game state for the player.

If you win a jackpot in the probability limit state, a time saving state will be set. In this time-saving state, the special figure 1 lottery is mainly performed, and the special figure 1 jackpot lottery is executed with the same jackpot probability as in the normal state. Since the high probability state of the normal design is set, it becomes easier to execute the special figure 1 lottery than the normal state. In addition, the time-saving state continues until a predetermined condition other than the jackpot win (e.g., the condition that the number of times the special symbol changes reaches a predetermined number (50 times), the condition that the small hit wins a predetermined number of times (1 time), etc.) is met. When a jackpot is won during this time-saving state, the state is shifted to the latent state most advantageous to the player with a high probability (95%). By moving (pulling back) from the time-saving state to the latent state, the game can be executed in the latent state from the first time that the high probability state of the special symbol is continuously set. A playful game can be provided to a player.

In this control example, a small win is won even in the special figure 1 lottery, and when the small win is won, a small win game is executed to open the second variable winning device 650 in the same way as the special figure 1 jackpot win. are doing. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the current probability variable number of times (remaining number of times up to the probability variable limit state) based on the number of times the second variable winning device 65 has been opened.

In addition, unlike the configuration of this control example, even if it is configured to execute a suggestion effect that suggests to the player the current probability variation number (remaining number of probability variation limit state) based on winning a small hit good.

Next, with reference to FIG. 323, among the effects executed in the fourth control example, the effects (production modes) executed according to the set game state will be described. FIG. 323 is a transition diagram showing transition contents of effects executed corresponding to game states. As shown in FIG. 323, in the state where the normal state and the probability variable state are set, the same production mode (normal production mode) is set, and whether the player is currently in the normal state or the probability variable state is configured to make it difficult to understand. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to easily grasp the number of remaining probability variations up to the probability variation limit state.

In this control example, since it is configured so that the time saving state is set only when the jackpot is won in the state of reaching the probability variable limit state, the normal production mode is executed without winning the jackpot during the time saving state. Only in this case, it is possible for the player to understand that the current state is the normal state. Therefore, advantageous game information can be provided only to players who have been playing games for a long time.

In addition, in this control example, it is configured so that the variation time set based on the special figure 1 lottery is the same in the normal state and the variable probability state (it is configured to use the same variation pattern selection table there). Thereby, it is possible to suppress the current game state from being determined by the variation time of the special figure 1 lottery to be executed. In addition, without being limited to this, it is configured to be able to set a variable time that can be set only in either the probability variable state or the normal state, and when the variable time is set, the current game state can be suggested. You can Furthermore, it is configured to set the variation time by referring to a different variation pattern selection table according to the current probability variation number (remaining number of times until the probability variation limit state), and according to the variation time of the special figure 1 lottery to be executed It may be configured so that the player can determine the current probability variable number of times.

Then, in the state in which the normal production is executed (the normal state, the probability variable state is set), when moving to the latent probability state, two production modes are set according to the current probability variable number of times. be. Specifically, when the remaining number of times to the probability variable limit state is 30 or more in the state where the latent probability state is set, the odd number of eyes (for example, 777) is stopped and displayed as the third symbol indicating the jackpot Then, a latent probability performance A mode is set for executing a pseudo big winning game performance during a period from the start of the big winning game to the end of the big winning game executed in the state of reaching the variable probability limit state.

Then, when the probability state is set and the remaining number of times to the probability variable limit state is less than 30, an even number of squares (for example, 666) is stopped and displayed as a third symbol indicating a big hit. During the period from the end of the jackpot game to the end of the jackpot game executed in the state of reaching the variable probability limit state, and the period until the jackpot is won a predetermined number of times (1 to 5 times), the game performance in the latent state is executed. After that, a latent certainty effect B mode for executing a pseudo-big win game effect is set until a predetermined number of times (1 to 5 times) of the big wins are won.

That is, in this control example, it is configured to award many prize balls to the player in two states of a big winning game state and a continuous small winning game state (so-called small winning RUSH) in the latent state. However, during the latent certainty state, not only is the small win frequently won, but also the big win is won with a high probability. If the winning game effect is executed, there is a problem that the effect becomes complicated and the effect is difficult for the player to understand.

On the other hand, in this control example, as described above, in the period in which the latent state is set, regardless of the jackpot game or the small hit game, the period in which the jackpot game effect is executed in a pseudo manner, and the It is configured to set a period for executing a certain state game effect (small winning RUSH effect). As a result, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 10 that is easy for the player to understand by suppressing the effect to be executed from becoming complicated.

In addition, when the probability variable limit state is reached and the time saving state is set after that, the pullback mode is set, and a fanning effect is provided to indicate to the player that it is a game state that easily shifts to the latent probability state. executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 324, the characteristic effect content in the fourth control example will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 324(a), the contents of the pseudo-jackpot effect (super-jackpot effect) executed during the latent probability effect A mode will be described. FIG. 324(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a pseudo-jackpot effect (super-jackpot effect) executed during the latent probability effect A mode. The same elements as those on the display screen in the first control example described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 324(a), in the pseudo-jackpot effect (super-jackpot effect) executed during the latent probability effect A mode, a comment indicating that a super-jackpot is in progress is displayed in the main display area Dm, and a super-jackpot effect is displayed. Acquisition information 803 indicating the number of prize balls awarded during the presentation is displayed. Then, a stored image is displayed in the center to show the player that the acquired information 803 is increasing with a dynamic image. Then, a guidance display Dm9 for guiding the player to the right-handed game is displayed.

Here, during the latent certainty effect A mode, the prize balls given during the latent certainty state, that is, the balls that are hit right during the latent certainty state and are awarded by entering each winning hole ( All of the prize balls given based on the balls that entered the second ball entrance 640 and the balls that won the variable prize winning device 65 by the small winning game) are treated as the prize balls won during the big winning game. During the latent probability effect A mode, the flow path switching member 695 (see FIG. 321) is positioned at the embedded position, and the ball enters the second ball entrance 640. It is constructed so that the ball will flow to the pseudo-attacker 165 winning a prize.

As a result, a pseudo-big-hit performance is executed in which all the winning balls in the latent definite state win a prize in the pseudo-attacker 165, and a pseudo-big-hit performance indicating that the big-hit game is continuously executed on the third symbol display device 81.例文帳に追加can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to execute a pseudo-big win presentation during the latent state without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Next, with reference to FIG. 324(b), among the effects executed during the latent certainty effect B mode, the contents of the pseudo-latent certainty state game effect will be described. FIG. 324(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a pseudo-latency state game effect. As shown in FIG. 324(b), in the pseudo definite state game effect, the characters "RUSH" are displayed to indicate that the current state is the definite state, and whether or not the small winning game is executed. (a game indicating that if the character 811 opens the treasure box 812 and the content of the treasure box 812 is "V", a small win is won) is executed. This quasi-certainty state game performance is executed during the period in which the jackpot game is performed until the quasi-certainty state and a predetermined number of times are reached. When the game is executed, the winning information 803 is notified that the number of prize balls given during the big win game and the prize balls given during the small win game.

Here, during the period in which the pseudo-latency state game presentation is executed in the latent certainty performance B mode, when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, the special figure 2 lottery is executed. Since it is necessary to indicate this to the player, the flow path switching member 695 (see FIG. 321) is positioned at the projecting position, and the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 flows down toward the pseudo electric accessory 1640a. It is configured to be a ball flow.

It should be noted that the update timing of the obtained information 803 and the update timing of the presentation mode displayed in each of the effects described above are simulated based on the timing at which the ball actually wins, as in the first control example described above. The timing at which the ball reaches the winning hole is predicted, and the timing is set according to the predicted result. Since the detailed content is the same as that of the first control example described above, it will be omitted.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the main controller in the fourth control example>
The ROM 202 of the main controller 110 of the fourth control example replaces the special symbol random number table 202a with the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 of the first control example, and changes the special symbol random number 4 table 202ca. Variation pattern selection 4 table 202cb instead of pattern selection table 202b, normal winning random number 4 table 202cc instead of normal random number table 202c, special figure 1 jackpot type selection 4 table instead of special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202d1 202cd1 is replaced with a special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202d2, a special figure 2 jackpot type selection 4 table 202cd2, and a small hit random number table 202ce is provided instead of a small hit random number table 202e.

Then, the RAM of the main control device 110 of the fourth control example is the probability variation flag 203ca, the game state storage area 203cb, the jackpot medium flag 203cc, the special figure, and the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 of the first control example. 1 fluctuation stop flag 203cd, special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203ce, small hit flag 203cf, special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203cg, special figure 1 variation time counter 203ch, special figure 2 variation time counter 203ci, probability variation upper limit counter 203cj were added They are different in that respect. Other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 325(a), the contents of the special symbol per random number 4 table 202ca will be described. This special symbol random number 4 table 202ca differs from the special symbol random number table 202a described above in that the value range of the first winning random number counter C1, which is the special symbol jackpot, is different. Specifically, in the low probability state of special symbols, the range of "0 to 4" and in the high probability state of special symbols, the range of "0 to 39" are defined as ranges corresponding to the jackpot. .

Next, with reference to FIG. 325(b), the contents of the small winning random number 4 table 202ce will be described. Unlike the above-described small winning random number table 202e, this small winning random number 4 table 202ce is configured so that each of the special figures 1 and 2 wins a small winning. Specifically, in the case of special figure 1, the value of the first per random number counter C1 is in the range of "50 to 59", and in the case of special figure 2, the range of "50 to 479" is determined as a jackpot. stipulated in That is, in the fourth control example, in the lottery of the special figure 1, a small hit is won with a probability of about 1/50, and in the lottery of the special figure 2, a small hit is won with a probability of about 1/1.1. Configure.

Next, with reference to FIG. 325(c), the contents of the normal winning random number 4 table 202cc will be described. This normal winning random number 4 table 202cc is different from the above normal winning random number table 202c in that the element of long open winning is deleted, the probability of winning in the low probability state of the normal symbol is reduced, and the normal winning random number table 202cc The difference is that the probability of winning a hit is increased in the high-probability state of the pattern, and the rest is the same.

Next, the contents of the special figure 1 jackpot type selection 4 table 202cd1 will be described with reference to FIG. 326(a). FIG. 326(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 1 jackpot type selection 4 table 202cd1. As shown in FIG. 326 (a), when the special figure 1 jackpot is won in the normal state, the first attacker (second variable winning device 650) is opened, and the probability variable state is set jackpot (jackpot A, jackpot B) and a jackpot (jackpot C) in which the second attacker (variable prize winning device 65) is opened and a latent state is set are defined in association with the value of the special hit type counter C2.

Next, the contents of the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 4 table 202cd2 will be described with reference to FIG. 326(b). FIG. 326(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 4 table 202cd2. As shown in FIG. 326(b), when the special figure 2 jackpot is won, the second attacker (variable winning device 65) is opened, and the jackpot (jackpot C) in which the latent state is set is a special It is defined in association with the value of the winning type counter C2.

Next, the contents of the variation pattern selection 4 table 202cb will be described with reference to FIGS. 327 to 329. FIG. As shown in FIG. 327, in this control example, the normal state, the probability variation 4 table 202cb1 used when the probability variation state is set, and the probability variation 4 table 202cb1 and the latency probability state used when the probability variation state is set It has 4 tables 202cb2 and 4 table 202cb3 for time saving used when the time saving state is set, and the table corresponding to the set game state is referred.

FIG. 328 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the normal probability variation 4 table 202cb1. As shown in FIG. 328, in this control example, a long-time variation pattern is set as the variation pattern of special figure 2 in a state where the normal state and probability variation state are set. Therefore, the lottery game of the real special figure 1 is performed.

FIG. 329(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the 4-table for confirmation 202cb2. As shown in FIG. 329 (a), in this control example, in a state in which the latent state is set, a long-time variation pattern is set as the variation pattern of special figure 1. Therefore, the lottery game of the real special figure 2 is performed.

FIG.329(b) is the schematic diagram which showed the content of 4 tables for time reduction 202cb3. As shown in Figure 329 (b), in this control example, in the state in which the time saving state is set, a long-time variation pattern is set as the variation pattern of the special figure 2. Therefore, the lottery game of the real special figure 1 is performed. And, usually, it is defined so that the length of the variation time selected as the variation pattern of the special figure 1 is shorter than the probability variation 4 table 202cb1. Therefore, usually, it is possible to execute Toku-zu 1 variation more efficiently than the probability variation state.

Next, referring to FIG. 330, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 of this fourth control example will be described. FIG. 330 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 203. As shown in FIG. This control example differs from the above-described first control example in that the following configuration is added. Since other elements are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The probability variation flag 203ca is a flag indicating whether or not a high probability state of special symbols is set, and indicates that the special symbols are in a high probability state when set to ON. That is, when the probability variation flag 203ca is set to ON, as the gaming state, probability variation state (special symbol: high probability state, normal symbol: high probability state), or latent probability state (special symbol: high probability state, Normal pattern: low probability state) is set.

This variable probability flag 203ca is set to ON at the end of the jackpot when the winning jackpot type is a jackpot that sets a variable probability state or a latent probability state after the jackpot ends. Then, when the symbol indicating that the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot is stopped and displayed, it is set to OFF.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, the high probability state of the special design is set based on the special design jackpot winning, and the special design high probability state is continued until the next jackpot is won. However, without being limited to this, for example, as a special symbol high probability end condition for ending the special symbol high probability state, special symbols from the special symbol high probability state (special symbol high probability state) are set When the number of fluctuations (the number of special figure fluctuations) reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times), it may be configured to set the probability variation flag 203ca to OFF. In this case, in order to plan the timing to set the probability variation flag 203ca to OFF, storage means for pre-storing the number of special figure fluctuations as the special figure high probability end condition, and after the special figure high probability state is set Measuring means for measuring the number of special figure fluctuations, and end discrimination for determining whether the number of special figure fluctuations measured by the measuring means satisfies the number of special figure fluctuations (special figure high probability end condition) stored in the storage means It is sufficient to provide means and .

In addition, a plurality of special figure high probability end conditions are prepared, for example, special figure 1 high probability end condition that can be established only based on the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol in the special figure high probability state, fluctuation of the second special symbol Special figure 2 high probability end condition that can be established only based on the number of times, lottery end condition that can be established when the lottery result of the special pattern is a predetermined lottery result (for example, lottery result that wins a small hit). It may be configured to facilitate a special figure high probability end condition and set the probability variation flag 203ca to off when any special figure high probability end condition is satisfied.

The special figure 1 jackpot flag is turned on when it is determined that the value of the first hit random number counter C1 obtained based on entering the first ball opening 64 matches the jackpot determination value at the start of fluctuation. Flags to be set. This special figure 1 jackpot flag is set to OFF when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot.

When the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol ends while the special figure 1 jackpot flag is on, a process of forcibly stopping the second special symbol in the off symbol is executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the problem that one of the first special symbols and the second special symbol becomes a big win or a small win while one of the big wins is being executed.

The special figure 2 jackpot flag is turned on when it is determined that the value of the first hit random number counter C1 obtained based on entering the second ball opening 640 matches the jackpot determination value at the start of fluctuation. Flags to be set. This special figure 2 big hit flag is set to off when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the big hit.

When the variation time of the variation display of the second special symbol ends while the special figure 2 big hit flag is on, a process of forcibly stopping the first special symbol in the design is executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the problem that one of the first special symbols and the second special symbol becomes a big win or a small win while one of the big wins is being executed.

The game state storage area 203cb is a storage area for storing information indicating the currently set game state and the game state at the time of winning the jackpot. Specifically, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is a normal state (the value of the time saving medium counter 203j is 0 and the probability variation flag 203ca is off), the winning state of this gaming state storage area 203cb "00H" is stored in the area as information indicating the normal state. On the other hand, if the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is a probability variable state (if the value of the time saving counter 203j is 1 or more and the probability variable flag 203ca is on), the winning state area of this gaming state storage area 203cb , "01H" is stored as information indicating the probability variation state. Also, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is a latent state (if the value of the time saving counter 203j is 0 and the variable probability flag 203ca is on), the winning state area of this gaming state storage area 203cb , "02H" is stored as information indicating the latent state.

The information stored in the game state storage area 203cb is retained until the end of the big win, and is referred to when setting the game state after the end of the big win.

The small hit flag 203cf is turned on when it is determined that the value of the first hit random number counter C1 acquired based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 matches the small hit determination value at the start of fluctuation. Flags to be set. This small hit flag 203cf is set to OFF when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the small win. With this small hit flag 203cf turned on, when the variation time of the variation display of the second special symbol ends, the variation of the other special symbol is temporarily stopped (subtraction of the counter that measures the variation time of the special symbol (stop) is executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the occurrence of a problem that a big win is made in the lottery of the first special symbol while the small winning of the second special symbol is being executed, and the big winning is started during the small winning. can.

The special figure 1 variation time counter 203ch and the special figure 2 variation time counter 203ci are counters for timing the variation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively, and the first special symbol and the second special When a symbol variation pattern is selected, a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set. Whether or not the fluctuation time of each special symbol has ended is determined according to the timing results of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203ch and the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203ci.

The jackpot middle flag 203cc is a flag indicating whether or not the jackpot is in progress. When this jackpot middle flag 203cc is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot, and when it is off, it indicates that the jackpot is not in progress. The mid-jackpot flag 203cc is set to ON when the start of the jackpot is set. On the other hand, it is set to OFF during the jackpot ending process executed at the end of the jackpot.

The flag during the small hit is a flag indicating whether or not it is during the small hit. If this flag during a small hit is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a small hit, and if it is off, it indicates that it is not in a small hit. This flag during the small hit is set to ON when the start of the small hit is set. On the other hand, it is set to OFF at the end of the small hit.

The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to win a small hit with the second special symbol, and when a small win is won (when the small win medium flag is set to ON), the first It is configured to interrupt the variable display of special symbols. In other words, among multiple types of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol), one special symbol (second special symbol) is selected by lottery for a small hit, and the flag during the small hit is set to ON. Since the variable display of the other special symbol (first special symbol) will not end in the state of being there, the player can be made to pay attention to the small winning game and play the game. In addition, during the small winning game, it is possible to prevent the end of the variable display of the other special symbol and the start of the big winning game.

In addition, in this control example, the first special symbol is configured to win a small hit in the same manner as the above-described second special symbol. Since the processing when winning the small prize in the first special symbol lottery is the same as the processing when winning the small prize in the second special symbol lottery, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203ce is a flag indicating that it is a period between when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) by the stop symbol of the big hit and when the big win is started. When this special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203ce is set to ON, even if there is a new entry to the second entrance 640, the execution of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is avoided. be done. This special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203ce is set to ON when the second special symbol is forcibly stopped in the off design, and is set to OFF when the process for executing the variation display of the second special symbol is avoided. be.

In addition, in this control example, the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203cd that changes the target from the special figure 2 to the special figure 1 is provided for the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203ce described above. The only difference is that the target of the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203ce is changed from the special figure 2 to the special figure 1, so the detailed description is omitted.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the period for opening the first specific prize winning port 65a is set to 1.5 seconds as the game contents of the small winning game, and the end condition of the round established by the number of winning prizes is set to 10. are doing. That is, until 10 balls are won in the first specific winning hole 65a during the small winning game (until the round end condition for the winning number is satisfied), the effective period of the round game (1.5 seconds) elapses. It will be. Therefore, since the period of the small winning game can be made constant, the production that spans the small winning game (the period from the start of the fluctuation of one special symbol to the end of the fluctuation of the other special symbol via the small winning game It is possible to predetermine the performance period of a series of performances to be executed. Therefore, the variation timing of the special symbols and the performance execution timing can be easily synchronized, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

Special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203cg is a flag indicating a period to stop updating (subtracting) the fluctuation time of special figure 1, and stops updating (subtraction) of the fluctuation time when it is set to ON, When the ON state is changed to OFF, the stopped update (subtraction) of the variable time is restarted.

This special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203cg is set to ON when stopping the variation of the second special symbol (special figure 2) in which the lottery result is a small hit, and is referred to in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 32) be. As a result of referencing, if it is set to ON, a process of updating the display of the first symbol display device corresponding to the special figure 1 in the same manner as during variation is executed. That is, while the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203cg is set to ON, the update (subtraction) of the variable time is stopped, but the first symbol display device is in a state where the variable display is continuously executed. Become. Thereby, it is possible to notify that the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is not forcibly stopped by the fact that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203cg is set to ON. And, when it is determined that it is set to ON in the first special symbol variation in-execution process, it is set to OFF.

In addition, in the present embodiment, only the lottery of the second special symbol is configured so that the small winning can be won, so the special symbol whose variable display is temporarily stopped based on the winning of the small winning is the first special symbol. Although it is only the pattern, if it is configured so that the lottery of the first special pattern can also win a small hit, a special figure 2 temporary stop flag may be provided to temporarily stop the variable display of the second special pattern. good.

The variable probability upper limit counter 203cj is a counter for setting the upper limit value to which the variable probability state is continuously set. In this control example, the upper limit number of times that the variable probability state is continuously set after the end of the jackpot is defined (36 times). Then, the value of the variable probability upper limit counter 203cj is referred to when determining whether or not the number of times the variable probability state is set continuously reaches the upper limit number of times. The value of the probability variable upper limit counter 203cj is incremented by 1 each time the probability variable state is set at the end of the jackpot game. Then, when the normal state or the time saving state is set, the value of the counter is cleared.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of one of the special symbols is a jackpot, based on the fact that one of the special symbols has stopped in a combination indicating a jackpot (based on the execution of the jackpot game ), the process of forcibly stopping the fluctuation display of the other special symbol by being out, and when the lottery result of one special symbol is a small hit, the combination indicating the small hit stops the one special symbol. Based on this, the variable display of the other special symbol is temporarily stopped (stopped until the small winning game ends).

That is, according to the lottery result of one special symbol, the variable display of the other special symbol can be processed in various modes. By configuring in this way, the lottery result of one of the special symbols becomes the most advantageous game result (for example, a big win) for the player, and while the variable display for showing the game result is being executed, the other (lottery result is a small win) is stop-displayed and the big win is erased by the small win.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the sound ramp control device in the fourth control example>
Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIG. The RAM 223 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example differs from the RAM 223 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example in that an effect mode storage area 223ca and a probability variable upper limit number counter 223cb are added. ing. Other than that, they are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The effect mode storage area 223ca is an area for storing the currently set effect mode. In the fourth control example, as the production mode set when the latent state is set as the game state, a pseudo-jackpot production (Fig. 324 ( (See a)), and the latent probability state that is set continuously is divided into a predetermined period (for example, the period until the jackpot is won three times), and a pseudo is performed for each division. A latent probability game effect (see FIG. 324(b)) can be set in a latent probability effect B mode.

In the production mode storage area 223ca, a variable probability upper limit counter 223cb is provided when a jackpot is won in a game state other than the latent probability state (normal state, variable probability state, time saving state) and the latent probability state is set after the jackpot game ends. The effect mode selected based on the value of is stored. Then, while the potential state is continuously set, the same production mode is stored, and the stored information (production mode) is cleared when a game state other than the potential state is set. be.

The variable probability upper limit number counter 223cb is a counter for measuring the number of times the high probability state (variable probability state, latent probability state) of the special symbol is continuously set, and the high probability of the continuously set special symbol. It is referred to when determining whether the number of states (probability variable state, latent probability state) has reached the upper limit number of times (for example, 36 times). This variable probability upper limit number counter 223cb is incremented by 1 when the high probability state of the special symbol is set after the end of the big win game, and is cleared when the high probability state of the special symbol is not set after the end of the big win game. be.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the fourth control example>
Next, each control process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. The processing of the MPU 201 can be broadly classified into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in this control example). There are interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing that is activated by input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. and main processing.

First, with reference to FIG. 332, the contents of special symbol variation processing 4 (S104) executed by MPU 201 in main control device 110 in this control example will be described. FIG. 332 is a flow chart showing the contents of the special symbol variation process 4 (S104). When the special symbol variation process 4 (S104) is executed, first, it is determined whether the present is a big hit or a small hit (S4501), and if it is determined that it is a big hit or a small hit (S4501: ), next, it is determined whether the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203cg is set to ON (S4502). In the processing of this S4502, it is determined whether the subtraction of the other special figure fluctuation time during fluctuation is interrupted by one special figure being stopped and displayed in the pattern indicating the hit. In the process of S4502, if it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203cg is set to ON (S4502: Yes), update the display of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the special figure that is temporarily stopped Then (S4503), that is, the process of continuing the variable display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed for the special figure for which the subtraction of the variable time is interrupted, and this process is finished. Thereby, it is possible to inform the player that the special figure fluctuation is not forcibly stopped.

On the other hand, in the process of S4501, if it is determined that the current is a big hit or a small hit (S4501: No), the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203ch is greater than 0 (that is, the special figure 1 fluctuates If it is determined (S4504) and the value of the special figure 1 variation time counter 203ch is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S4504: No), the first special symbol variation start process (S4508) is executed, after that, it moves to S4509 which executes variation processing regarding special figure 2. Details of the first special symbol variation start process (S4508) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S4504, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 variation time counter 203ch is greater than 0 (S4504: Yes), the first special symbol variation executing process 4 (S4505) is executed. This first special symbol variation executing process 4 (S4505) executes the process during special figure 1 variation, and its detailed description will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the first special symbol variation executing process 4 (S4505) is finished, then it is determined whether it is the end timing of the variation time (whether the special figure 1 variation time counter 203ch is 0) (S4506), variation time (S4506: Yes), the first special symbol variation stop processing (S4507) is executed, and then the process proceeds to S4509. On the other hand, in the process of S4506, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the variable time (S4506: No), the process of S4507 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4509.

In the processing of S4509-S4513, the same processing as S4504-S4507 executed for special figure 1 is executed. When the process of S4509 is executed, first, the value of the special figure 2 variation time counter 203ci is larger than 0 (ie, whether the special figure 2 is fluctuating) is determined (S4509), special figure 2 variation When it is determined that the value of the time counter 203ci is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S4509: No), the second special symbol variation start process 4 (S4510) is executed, and then this process is terminated. The details of this second special symbol variation start process 4 (S4510) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4509, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 variation time counter 203ci is greater than 0 (S4509: Yes), the second special symbol variation executing process 4 (S4511) is executed. This second special symbol variation in-execution process 4 (S4511) executes the process during special figure 2 variation, and will be described later with reference to FIG.

After completing the second special symbol variation executing process 4 (S4511), next, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the variation time (special figure 2 variation time counter 203ci is 0) (S4512), variation time When it is determined that it is the end timing of (S4512: Yes), the second special symbol variation stop processing 4 (S4513) is executed, and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4512, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the variable time (S4512: No), the process of S4513 is skipped and the present process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 333, the first special symbol variation start process (S4508), which is one process of special symbol variation process 4 (S104 in FIG. 332) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110, will be described. . FIG. 333 is a flow chart showing this first special symbol variation start process (S4508).

In the first special symbol variation start process (S4508), first, the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is acquired (S4601), and the acquired value (N1 ) is greater than 0 (S4602). In the processing of S4602, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S4602: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is Subtract 1 (S4603), and set a pending ball number command for notifying the audio lamp control device 113 of the pending ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol pending ball number counter 203d after the subtraction (S4604). .

The pending ball number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S2201) of the main process executed by the MPU 201 (see FIG. It is sent to the lamp control device 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter of the RAM 223. 223c. Thus, in the voice lamp control device 113, according to the reservation ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, since the value of the first special symbol reservation ball number counter 223c is updated, the first special symbol of the main control device 110 The value can be updated while synchronizing with the value of the reserved ball number counter 203d.

When the processing of S4604 is finished, next, the data of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted to the previous data (S4605). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of reservation area 1→execution area, reservation area 2→reservation area 1, reservation area 3→reservation area 2, reservation area 4→reservation area 3, and so on.

When the processing of S4605 is completed, then, the first special symbol jackpot determination processing is executed (S4606). This first special symbol jackpot determination process (S4606) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. Based on, based on the game state that is set, it is a process for executing the jackpot determination whether or not the jackpot.

When the processing of S4606 is completed, next, the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing 4 is executed (see FIG. 335). Although the details will be described later, this first special symbol variation pattern selection process 4 (S4607) includes the determination result of the first special symbol and the variation type stored in the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. This is a process for selecting a variation pattern based on the value of the counter CS1.

When the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 4 (S4607) ends, it is then determined whether the value of the counter 203j during time saving is greater than 0 (S4608). When it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203j is greater than 0 (S4608: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the time saving counter 203j (S4609), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4608, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203j is not greater than 0 (S4608: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4602, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S4602: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

Next, referring to FIG. 334, regarding the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S4606) which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (S4504 in FIG. 333) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 explain. FIG. 334 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S4606). In the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, during the period during which the variation display (jackpot variation) indicating that one of the special symbols has won a big win is being executed, whether or not a big win has been won in the other special symbol lottery is displayed. It is configured not to judge.

In other words, in a state in which it is confirmed that the jackpot game will be executed after a predetermined period of time (after the fluctuation time has passed) by one special symbol lottery, the other special symbol lottery wins the jackpot, and multiple times in a short period of time. It is constructed so as to suppress giving a privilege excessively due to winning a jackpot.

In this way, by performing the process of acquiring various counter values in the same manner as in the normal special symbol lottery, skipping the determination based on the various counter values acquired in the process, and setting the outlier symbol, the other It is possible to quickly respond to the lottery result of the special pattern lottery.

In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S4606), first, each counter value stored in the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is obtained (S4701). Next, it is determined whether the variable probability flag 203ca is set to ON (S4702). That is, it is determined whether or not the special symbols are in a high probability state (variable probability state, latent probability state). When it is determined that the probability variation flag 203ca is ON (that is, the probability variation state of the special symbol) (S4702: Yes), the random value that becomes the jackpot defined in the first per random number table 202a for high probability time and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 obtained from the counter buffer match, and the determination result (lottery result) is obtained (S4703). On the other hand, in the process of S4702, when it is determined that the probability variation flag 203ca is off (that is, the special symbol is in a low probability state) (S4702: No), the first per random number table 202a for low probability It is determined whether or not the specified random value for the big win matches the value of the first winning random number counter C1 obtained from the counter buffer, and the lottery result is obtained (S4704).

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result obtained in S4703 or S4704 is a jackpot (S4705), and if the lottery result is a jackpot (S4705: Yes), the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203ck is set for the first special symbol. It is set to ON (S4706), and the lottery result of the first special symbol is set to a big hit (S4707). Then, based on the value of the acquired hit type counter, the jackpot design of the first special design to be displayed on the first design display device 37 is set (S4709), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S4705, when it is determined that the lottery result is out (S4705: No), the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set to be out (S4709), and then , the process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 335, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 4 (S4607), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (S4508 in FIG. 333), will be described. FIG. 335 is a flow chart showing this first special symbol variation pattern selection process 4 (S4607).

In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 4 (S4607 in FIG. 335), first, in the first special symbol big hit determination process (S4606 in FIG. 334), whether the lottery result of the first special symbol is determined to be a big hit, that is, It is determined whether or not the jackpot of the first special symbol is set (S4801). Here, whether or not the big hit is determined is determined by whether or not the special figure 1 big hit flag 203ck is on. This special figure 1 jackpot flag 203ck is set to ON in the processing of S4707 in the above-described first special symbol jackpot determination processing (see FIG. 334).

In the process of S4801, when it is determined that the first special symbol jackpot is set (S4801: Yes), the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 334) described above S4701 obtained in the Based on the value of the per type counter C2, the jackpot type is determined from the special figure 1 jackpot type selection 4 table 202d1 (see FIG. 326(a)) (S4802), and the process proceeds to S4803.

On the other hand, in the process of S4801, when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is out (that is, the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203ck is off) (S4801: No), the process of S4802 is skipped. Then, the process proceeds to S4803.

In the process of S4803, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired from the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a (S4803). Next, the variation pattern selection table (see FIGS. 327 to 329) corresponding to the game state is read out (S4804), and the process proceeds to S4805. The game state is determined based on the state of the variable probability flag 203ca and the value of the time saving counter 203f. In the process of S4805, the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected from the read variation pattern selection table (S4805), and then based on the selected variation pattern, the special figure 1 variation pattern command is set ( S4806).

When the processing of S4806 is finished, the special figure 1 stop type command indicating the stop symbol is set (S4807), then the first symbol display device 37 sets the start of variation of the first special symbol (S4808), and the process of S4805 A value indicating the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected in , is set to the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203ch, and this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 336, first special symbol variation in-execution process 4 (S4505) performed in special symbol variation process 4 (see S154 in FIG. 332) performed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 Explain the content. FIG. 336 is a flow chart showing the contents of the first special symbol variation in-execution process 4 (S4505). In this first special symbol variation executing process 4 (S4505), when the subtraction of the variation time of the special figure 1 is interrupted, the process of restarting the subtraction and the process of subtracting the variation time are executed.

When the first special symbol variation executing process 4 (S4505) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203cg is set to ON (S4901). Here, the case where this processing is executed in a state where the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203cg is set to ON will be briefly described. As described above, the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203cg is set to ON when the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed in a pattern indicating a hit (small hit) while the special figure 1 is fluctuating. Then, when the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203cg is set to ON, since the big hit flag 203o is set to ON in the process, the timer interrupt executed every 2 milliseconds by the main controller 110 When the process loops and the next (2 milliseconds after the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203cg is set to ON) special symbol variation process 4 (see FIG. 332) is executed, during the jackpot in the process of S4501 Therefore, the first special symbol variation in-execution process 4 (S4505) is not executed. Then, the jackpot game (or small hit game) is completed, and it is determined that it is not during the jackpot (or during the small hit) in the processing of S4501, so that the first special symbol variation executing process 4 (S4505) is executed. will be By configuring in this way, the state in which the first special symbol variation executing process 4 (S4505) is executed in the state where the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203cg is set to ON is the jackpot (or small hit) game Is configured to be the timing to restart the subtraction of the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation that had been interrupted by the subtraction of the fluctuation time.

Returning to FIG. 336, the description continues. In the process of S4901, if it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203cg is set to ON (S4901: Yes), then set the special figure 1 fluctuation resume command (S4902), special figure 1 provisional The stop flag 203cg is set to OFF (S4903), and the process proceeds to S4904. On the other hand, in the process of S4901, if it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203cg is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S4901: No), S4902 and S4903 are skipped and S4904 to process.

In the processing of S4904, the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203ch is updated by subtracting 1 (S4904), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S4905), and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 337, the first special symbol variation stop process (S4507), which is one process of the special symbol variation process 4 (S154 in FIG. 332), will be described. FIG. 337 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation stop processing (S4507).

In the first special symbol variation stop processing (S4507), first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203ck is set to ON for the first special symbol (special figure 1) (S5001). When it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203ck is set to ON for the first special symbol (S5001: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203ce is set to ON (S5002), and the special figure Set a special figure 2 fluctuation stop command indicating that 2 fluctuation stop flag 203ce is turned on (S5003). Next, the second special symbol on the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed as a deviated symbol (S5004).

When the processing of S5004 is finished, the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203ci is set to 0 (S5005), and it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 big hit flag 203cl is set to ON (S5006). The storage information for the special figure 2 jackpot is deleted (S5008), and the process proceeds to S5009. On the other hand, in the process of S5006, if it is determined that the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203cl is set to OFF (S5006: No), the process of S5007-S5008 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S5009.

After executing the process of S5006 or S5008, a jackpot scenario is set (S5009). Next, reset the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203ck, probability variation flag 203ca, and time saving counter 203j (S5010), set the jackpot flag 203cc to ON (S5011), and proceed to the process of S5012. On the other hand, in the process of S5001, also when it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203ck is not ON (S5001: No), the process proceeds to S5012.

In the process of S5012, a special figure 1 confirmation command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of fixing and stopping the first special symbol is set (S5012). After that, a process of stopping the variable display of the first special symbol that is being variably displayed by the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S5013), and this process is terminated.

Thus, in the first special symbol stop process (S4507), the process (S5002 to S5009) of stopping the variable display in the symbol indicating the determination result of the first lottery game is executed. Also, when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit (S5001: Yes), a process (S5003, S5004) of forcibly stopping the second special symbol during variable display is executed.

In this fourth control example, when the stop symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol, the second special symbol during variable display is forcibly stopped and displayed as a deviated symbol. is not limited to For example, it may be configured such that the variable display of the second special symbol is interrupted (temporarily stopped) when the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed. Then, after the jackpot of the first special symbol is finished, the variable display of the second special symbol may be restarted. As a result, it is possible to produce a more natural presentation than when the game is forcibly stopped due to a failure.

Next, with reference to FIG. 338, the contents of the second special symbol variation start processing 4 (S4510) executed in the special symbol variation processing 4 (FIG. 332) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. do. FIG. 338 is a flow chart showing the contents of the second special symbol variation start process 4 (S4510). In this second special symbol variation start process 4 (S4510), the process for starting the variation of the special figure 2 is executed. In addition, with respect to the processing related to the variation of the first special symbol described above with reference to FIGS. Detailed descriptions of the elements are omitted.

In the second special symbol variation start process 4 (S4510), first, it is determined whether the special figure 2 variation stop flag 203ce is set to ON (S5101). If it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203ce is set to ON (S5101: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203ce is set to OFF (S5102), and this process is terminated. Special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203ce, as described above, when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol ends, is a flag that is set to ON while causing the stop symbol corresponding to the second special symbol to be stopped and displayed. . That is, if the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203ce is ON, it means that the big hit is started, so the fluctuation start of the second special symbol should not be set. Therefore, when the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203ce is ON in the process of S5101, without executing each process of S5102 to S5107 to set the start of fluctuation, it is configured to end this process as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S5101, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203ce is set to off (that is, not set to on) (S5101: No), the second special symbol execution area Data (various counter values) are acquired (S5103). Next, based on the data acquired in the process of S5103, it is determined whether there is acquired data (S5104). That is, when it is determined that there is no data in the second special symbol execution area (S5104: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S5103, when it is determined that there is data (S5104: Yes), the second special symbol jackpot determination processing 4 for executing the second special symbol jackpot determination based on each counter value stored (S5105). The details of this second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the process of S5105 is completed, then, based on the lottery result of the second special symbol and the data acquired in the process of S5103, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 4 for selecting a variation pattern is executed (S5106 ). The details of this second special symbol variation pattern selection process 4 (S5106) will be described later with reference to FIG. After the processing of S5106 is completed, it is determined whether or not the value of the counter 203j during time saving is greater than 0 (S5107). When it is determined that the value of the counter 203j during time saving is greater than 0 (S5107: Yes), the value of the counter 203j during time saving is subtracted by 1 (S5108), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5107, when the value of the time saving counter 203j is 0, that is, when it is determined that it is not in the time saving (S5107: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, referring to FIG. 339, second special symbol big hit determination process 4 (S5105) which is one process of second special symbol variation start process 4 (S4510 in FIG. 338) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 ) will be explained. FIG. 339 is a flow chart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S5105).

In this second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S5105), the same process as the above-described first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 334) is executed, so the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 334) The explanation will focus on the differences from.

When the second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S5105) is executed, each counter value stored in the second special symbol execution area is acquired (S5201). Then, the processing of S5202 to S5204 for acquiring the lottery result as to whether or not it is a big hit is executed based on each acquired counter value and the state of the variable probability flag 203ca. In each of these processes, the only difference is that the counter value used for the lottery (judgment) is acquired from the second special symbol execution area. is executed.

When the processing of S5203 or S5204 ends, it is determined whether or not the obtained lottery result is a big hit (S5205), and if it is determined to be a big hit (S5205: Yes), the lottery result of the second special symbol is obtained. The processing of S5206 to S5208 for setting the jackpot is executed, and this processing ends. In each process of these S5206-S5208, the same process as each process of S4706-S4708 for setting the lottery result of the first special symbol to the big hit in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 334) is executed. be done.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5205, if it is determined that the obtained lottery result of the second special symbol is not a big hit (S5205: No), the small hit of the second special symbol or the stop symbol corresponding to the loss is set. Special figure 2 deviation processing 4 is executed (S5209), and this processing ends. The details of this special figure 2 deviation variation processing 4 (S5209) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41 is a flow chart showing this special figure 2 deviation process 4 (S5209).

In the special figure 2 deviation variation process 4 (S5209), first, the lottery result obtained in the process of S5203 or S5204 in FIG. If it is determined to be a hit (S5301: Yes), the small hit flag 203cf is set to ON (S5302), and the lottery result of the second special symbol is set to a small hit (S5303). Then, the small winning symbol indicating the small winning type corresponding to the acquired value of the small winning type counter C5 is set as the stop symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 (S5304), and the process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result is out in the process of S5301 (S5301: No), the second special design to be displayed on the first design display device 37 is set (S5305), and then, End this process.

Next, referring to FIG. 341, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 4 (which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process 4 (S4510 in FIG. 338) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 ( S5106) will be described. FIG. 341 is a flow chart showing this second special symbol variation pattern selection process 4 (S5106).

In the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 4 (S5106 in FIG. 341), first, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired from the second special symbol execution area (S5401). Next, in the second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S5105 in FIG. 339), it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the second special symbol is a jackpot, that is, whether or not the second special symbol jackpot is set. (S5402). Here, whether or not the big hit is determined is determined by whether or not the special figure 2 big hit flag 203cl is turned on for the second special symbol. This special figure 2 jackpot flag 203cl is set to ON in the process of S5207 in the above-described second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (see FIG. 339).

In the process of S5402, when it is determined that the second special symbol jackpot is set (S5402: Yes), the variation pattern selection table (see FIGS. 328 and 329) corresponding to the current gaming state is read. (S5403). Then, based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S5201 in the above-described second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (see FIG. 339), the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 4 table 202cd2 (FIG. 326 (b ) See) determines the jackpot type (S5404).

When the process of S5404 is completed, the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected from the read variation pattern selection table (S5405), and then based on the selected variation pattern, the special figure 2 variation pattern command is set. (S5406). Then, the process proceeds to S5408.

On the other hand, in the process of S5402, when it is determined that the second special symbol jackpot is not set (S5402: No), the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process 4 (S5407) is executed, and the process of S5408 Move to

In the processing of S5408, the special figure 2 stop type command indicating the stop design is set (S5408). Then, the first symbol display device 37 sets the start of variation of the second special symbol (S5409), and the value indicating the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the process of S5405 is set to the special figure 2 variation time counter 203ci ( S5410), the process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 342, this special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process 4 (S5407) will be described. Figure 342 is the flowchart which shows the contents of special figure 2 deviation fluctuation pattern selection processing 4 (S5407).

In the special figure 2 deviation pattern selection process 4 (S5407 in FIG. 342), first, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit (S5501). Here, it is determined whether the small hit flag 203cf is set to ON (S5501). When it is determined that the small hit flag 203cf is ON (S5501: Yes), the value of the small hit type counter C5 is acquired from the second special symbol execution area (S5502). Then, based on the obtained value of the small hit type counter C5 and the small hit type selection table 202ce (not shown), the small hit type is selected (S5503).

Next, the variation pattern selection table (see FIGS. 327 to 389) corresponding to the current gaming state is read (S5504), and from the read variation pattern selection table, the small per variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected (S5505). After that, set the special figure 2 variation pattern command indicating the selected small hit variation pattern (S5506), and terminate this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S5501, if it is determined that the lottery result of the second special symbol is not a small hit (that is, it is out) (S5501: No), the variation pattern selection table corresponding to the current game state (Figure 327 to FIG. 389) is read (S5507), and from the read variation pattern selection table, an outlier variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected (S5508). Then, based on the variation pattern of the selected deviation, to set the special figure 2 variation pattern command (S5509), to end this process.

Next, referring to FIG. 343, the second special symbol variation executing process 4 (S4511) which is one process in the special symbol variation process (see S154 in FIG. 332) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 explain the contents of FIG. 343 is a flow chart showing the contents of second special symbol variation in-execution process 4 (S4511). In this second special symbol variation executing process 4 (S4511), when the subtraction of the variation time of the special figure 2 is interrupted, the process of restarting the subtraction and the process of subtracting the variation time are executed.

When the second special symbol variation executing process 4 (S4511) is executed, first, the special figure 2 variation time counter 203ci is updated by subtracting 1 (S5601), and the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 The display is updated (S5602), and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 344, the contents of the second special symbol variation stop processing 4 (S4513) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 344 is a flow chart showing the contents of the second special symbol variation stop processing 4 (S4513). This second special symbol variation stop processing 4 (S4513) is to execute the processing when stopping the variation of the special figure 2.

When the second special symbol variation stop processing 4 (S4513) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203cl is set to ON (S5701), and the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203cl is set to ON. When it is determined that there is (S5701: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation stop command indicating the stop of the special figure 1 fluctuation is set (S5703). Next, when the processing of S5703 is completed, the first special symbol on the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed as a deviating symbol (S5704). Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203ck is on (S5706). When it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203ck is ON (S5706: Yes), the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203ck is set to OFF (S5707), and the stored information for the special figure 1 jackpot is deleted (S5708) , S5709. On the other hand, in the processing of S5706, if it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203ck is off (S5706: No), the processing of S5707-S5708 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S5709.

In the process of S5709, a jackpot scenario corresponding to the selected jackpot type is set (S5709), and the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203cl, probability variation flag 203ca and counter 203j during time saving are reset (S5710). Next, the jackpot middle flag 203cc is set to ON (S5711), and the process proceeds to S5712.

In the processing of S5712, to set the special figure 2 decision command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 that the second special symbol is decided and stopped (S5712). After that, a process of stopping the variable display of the second special symbol that is being variably displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S5713), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S5701, if it is determined that the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203cl is not set to ON (S5701: No), the special figure 2 off stop processing 4 is executed (S5702), S5712 described above, The process of S5713 is executed, and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 345, special figure 2 deviation stop processing 4 (S5702), which is one processing of the second special symbol variation stop processing 4 (S4513 in FIG. 344), will be described. FIG. 345 is a flowchart showing special figure 2 deviating stop processing 4 (S5702). In this special figure 2 out stop processing 4 (S5702), when the lottery result of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is other than the big hit (small hit, off), the special figure 2 indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If the lottery result of the special figure 2 is a small hit, the process for temporarily stopping the special figure 1 fluctuation under execution is executed.

In the special figure 2 deviating stop processing 4 (S5702), first, it is determined whether the small hit flag 203cf is set to ON (S5801). When it is determined that the small hit flag 203cf is set to ON (S5801: Yes), the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203cg is set to ON (S5802). Next, a special figure 1 temporary stop command indicating ON of the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203cg is set (S5803).

After completing the processing of S5803, a small winning scenario based on the selected small winning type is set (S5804). After that, the small hit flag 203cf is set to OFF (S5805), and the small hit medium flag 203g is set to ON (S5806).

When the processing of S5806 ends, the special figure 2 decision command for instructing the sound lamp control device 113 to decide and stop the second special symbol is set (S5807). After that, the second special symbol, which is being variably displayed on the first symbol display device 37, stops variably in the small hit symbol (S5808), and the process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5801, when it is determined that the small hit flag 203cf is off (that is, the lottery result of the second special symbol is out) (S5801: No), the second special symbol is confirmed and stopped. Set special figure 2 confirmation command for instructing that to the audio lamp control device 113 (S5809). After that, the second special symbol that is being variably displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is removed and the variation is stopped with the symbol (S5810), and this process is terminated.

As described above, since the control of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is configured to be independently executable in parallel, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are simultaneously varied. can be displayed. Therefore, lottery games with more special symbols can be executed within a predetermined period of time, and the probability that a player will receive a big win within the predetermined period of time can be increased. Therefore, the player can play the game efficiently.

In this example of control, when one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed as a special symbol indicating a big hit, the other special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed. However, it is not limited to this, and the other special symbol may be temporarily stopped or variably displayed while the measurement of the variability time is interrupted. In such a case, the temporarily stopped special symbols are stopped in a display mode or a notification mode in which the player can understand that the temporary stop is being performed, so that the player can see that the lottery game that was in the middle of the variable display disappears. It is possible to grasp that the player is not in the game, and the player can play the jackpot game with peace of mind.

Next, referring to FIG. 346, the normal symbol variation process (S156) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 346 is a flow chart showing this normal symbol variation process (S156). This normal symbol variation process (S156) is executed in the timer interrupt process, the variation display and variation time of the second symbol performed in the second symbol display device 83, the lower electric motor associated with the lower first entrance 64D This is a process for controlling the opening operation and opening time of the accessory 64Da.

In this normal symbol variation process (S156 in FIG. 346), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently hitting (S5901). The normal symbol (second symbol) win is during the second symbol display device 83 displaying the win, and the opening/closing control of the lower electric accessory 64Da associated with the lower first entrance 64D. is being done. As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit (S5901: Yes), it is not possible to start (execute) a new normal symbol variation (lottery). End this process.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S5901: No), then it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is fluctuating (normal symbol fluctuating). When it is determined (S5902) that the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is not fluctuating (normal symbol fluctuating) (S5902: No), that is, even if the normal symbol hits at present, the normal symbol fluctuates. Among them, if it is determined that there is no state, that is, it is possible to start (execute) a new normal symbol variation (lottery), the value of the normal symbol retention ball number counter 203e (suspension of variation display in normal symbols number of times M) is acquired (S5903).

Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S5904), and when it is determined that the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S5904: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S5904: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S5905), and the normal The data stored in the symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S5906).

In the process of S5906, the data stored in the normal design reservation first to fourth areas of the normal design reservation ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area side in order. More specifically, normal design reservation 1st area → execution area, normal design reservation 2nd area → normal design reservation 1st area, normal design reservation 3rd area → normal design reservation 2nd area, normal design reservation 4th area → Shift the data in each area such as the third area for normal design reservation. After shifting the data, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is obtained (S5907).

Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving counter 203j is greater than 0 (S5908). If it is determined that the value of the counter 203j during time saving is greater than 0 (S5908: Yes), since it is in the time saving state, the lottery result is acquired based on the normal per random number 4 table 202cc for high probability time (S5909 ). Specifically, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 204", it is determined that it is a hit of the normal design, and if it is in the range of "205 to 232", it is normal design out. It is determined that On the other hand, in the process of S5908, when it is determined that the value of the counter 203j during time saving is not greater than 0 (that is, 0) (S5908: No), based on the normal random number 4 table 202cc for low probability time to acquire the lottery result (S5910). Concretely, the lottery result is acquired based on the winning random number 4 table 202cc of normal symbols for low probability. If the value of the second winning type counter C4 is in the range of '5', it is determined that it is a win of the normal pattern, and if it is in the range of '0 to 4, 6 to 232', it is determined that it is out of the normal pattern. do.

Next, the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the process of S5909 or S5910 determines whether it is a normal symbol hit (S5911), and when it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit (S5911: Yes ), set the display mode at the time of winning (S5912), and shift to the processing of S5914. In the process of S5911, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol "o" is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

On the other hand, in the process of S5911, when it is determined that the symbol is out of the normal pattern (S5911: No), the display mode when out is set (S5913), and the process proceeds to S5914. In the process of S5913, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol "x" is lit as the stop symbol (second symbol). After the setting of the display mode at the time of detachment is completed, the process proceeds to S5914. When the process of S5912 or the process of S5913 ends, the normal design fluctuation time is determined based on the value of the normal design fluctuation type counter (S5914), and this process ends.

When the processing of S5912 or S5914 is completed, in the processing of S591, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal pattern high probability state (time saving state) (S5911), and the pachinko machine 10 is normally in a pattern high probability state (time saving state) (S5911: Yes), the normal pattern fluctuation time in the second pattern display device is set to 3 seconds (S5913), then the normal pattern short fluctuation flag 203t is set to ON (S5914), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in a normal symbol high probability state (time saving state) (normal symbol low probability state) (S5911: No), the normal symbol fluctuation time in the second symbol display device is set to 10 seconds (S5915), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S5902, if it is determined that the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S5902: Yes), the variation time of the variation display executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed It is determined whether or not (S5915). Incidentally, the variable time here is the time set in advance by the process of S5910 or the process of S5912 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83 .

In the processing of S5915, if it is determined that the variable time has not elapsed (S5915: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S5915, if it is determined that the variation time of the variation display being executed has passed (S5915: Yes), then stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S5916). In the process of S5916, if the normal symbol lottery is won and the display mode is set by the process of S5912, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is displayed stopped (lighted display) on the second symbol display device. ). On the other hand, if the lottery for the normal symbol is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S5913, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped (lighted up) on the second symbol display device. is set to The period during which the second symbol is statically displayed is longer than the period during which one portion of the blinking display (alternating display of "○" and "X") indicating that the second symbol is being changed is illuminated. It is configured to be (determined display). As a result, the player can easily grasp that the second symbol has been stop-displayed.

When the process of S5916 is finished, next, when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device is started, the normal symbol lottery result (this lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process (S156) However, it is determined whether or not it is a normal symbol win (S5917). If it is determined that the lottery result of this time is out of the normal symbol (S5917: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result of this time is a hit of the normal symbol (S5917: Yes), next, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving medium counter 203j is greater than 0 (S5918).

In the process of S5918, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203j is 0, that is, if it is determined that the game state at the timing when the lottery (fluctuation) of this normal symbol is started is the normal state (S5919 : No), the opening time of the lower electric accessory 64Da is set to 0.9 seconds, and the number of opening times is set to 2 (S5920), and the process proceeds to S5921.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5918, if it is determined that the value of the counter 203j during time saving is greater than 0, that is, if it is determined that the game state at the timing when the lottery (fluctuation) of this normal symbol is started is the time saving state (S5918: Yes), the opening period of the lower electric accessory 64Da associated with the lower first entrance 64D is set to 1 second, and the number of opening times is set to 2 (S5924), and the process proceeds to S5923. do.

As described above, in this control example, the timing of executing the lottery (variation) of the normal symbols and the timing of setting the opening operation of the lower electric accessory 64Da executed based on the winning of the normal symbols. Only when both are in the time saving state, the opening operation (long opening) advantageous to the player is set as the opening operation of the lower electric accessory 64Da.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to strictly set the conditions for setting the opening action that is advantageous to the player. Variation) is executed and winning is won, and even if the time saving state is set until the variation time (10 seconds) of the normal symbol ends, long opening is set as the operation of the lower electric accessory 64Da. there is nothing to do. In addition, similarly, in the variation (lottery) of the normal pattern executed in the state where the time saving state is set, the winning is won, and the normal state is set as the game state until the variation of the normal pattern stops. Even in this case, the long opening of the lower electric accessory 64Da is not set. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being provided with an excessively advantageous benefit (long release of the lower electric accessory 64Da).

Furthermore, since it is possible to suppress the lower electric accessory 64Da from being long-released in a state where the normal state is set as the game state, a lottery for a special symbol (second special symbol) advantageous to the player is executed. The easy period can be limited during the time saving state. In this control example, the game state is determined at the timing when the lottery (fluctuation) of normal symbols is started and the timing at which the opening operation of the lower electric accessory 64Da is set, and the game state is set at each timing. Although the configuration described above is used as the configuration for setting the contents of the opening operation of the lower electric accessory 64Da based on, other configurations may be used.

For example, only when the timing at which the normal pattern lottery (fluctuation) is started and the timing at which the opening action of the lower electric accessory 64Da is set are in the normal state, the opening action is disadvantageous to the player (Fig. 346 The opening operation set in S5924) may be set (short opening may be set), and long opening (opening operation set in S5922 of FIG. 346) may be set in other states. By configuring in this way, a privilege (long open) advantageous to the player is provided even for the normal symbol fluctuation executed in the period before and after the time saving state which is the game state advantageous to the player is set. Therefore, the time-saving state can be made more advantageous to the player.

Thus, while the time-saving state is set as the game state, compared with the case where the normal state is set, the fluctuation time of the normal symbols is very short from "10 seconds to 3 seconds", and further. , the opening period of the lower first ball entrance 64D becomes very long as "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 2 seconds x 2 times", so that the ball can easily enter the lower first ball entrance 64D. Become. In addition, in this control example, when the jackpot game is executed, the time saving state is terminated, so that the normal state is set during the jackpot game. On the other hand, when the small winning game is executed, it is configured so that the time saving state is set continuously unless the time saving end condition is satisfied. During the winning game, the first variable winning device 65 is opened in the small winning game, and the lower electric accessory 64Da is opened for a long period, and a plurality of winning openings (first specific winning opening 65a, lower first ball This is a specific period during which the ball can easily enter the opening 64D).

By using such a configuration, for example, instead of the configuration of the game board 13 shown in FIG. It is preferable that the balls enter two winning holes (V winning device 65a, lower first ball entering hole 64D) during the small winning game. The number can be increased, and it becomes possible to provide more advantageous benefits to the player.

Returning to FIG. 346, the description continues. In the process of S5920, the opening/closing control start of the lower electric accessory 64Da associated with the lower first ball entrance 64D is set (S5921), and this process ends. When the opening/closing control start of the lower electric accessory 64Da is set by the processing of S5923, when the electric accessory opening/closing processing of the main processing is executed next, the opening/closing control of the electric accessory is started, and the processing of S5924 is performed. Alternatively, the opening/closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S5922 are completed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 347, the jackpot ending process (S1451) will be described. FIG. 347 is a flow chart showing the jackpot ending process (S1451). In the jackpot end process (S1451), when the jackpot game ends, a process for setting the game state after the jackpot is executed.

In the jackpot end process (S1451), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation upper limit counter 203cj is 35 or less (S5951). When it is determined that the value of the probability variable upper limit counter 203cj is 35 or less (S5951: Yes), the probability variable flag 203ca is set to ON (S5952), and the value of the probability variable upper limit counter 203cj is incremented by 1 (S5953). Next, a number command indicating the value of the variable probability upper limit counter 203cj is set (S5954), and the process proceeds to S5955.

In the process of S5955, it is determined whether the value of the probability variable upper limit counter 203cj added in the process of S5953 is 35 (S5955). When it is determined that the value of the probability variable upper limit counter 203cj is 35 (S5955: Yes), the state command before reaching the upper limit is set (S5956), and the process proceeds to S5957. On the other hand, in the process of S5955, when it is determined that the value of the variable probability upper limit counter 203cj is not 35 (S5955: No), the process of S5956 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5957.

In the process of S5957, the readout of the jackpot type executed this time is executed (S5957). Next, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type read in the process of S5957 is jackpot C (S5958). When it is determined that the read-out jackpot type is jackpot C (S5958: Yes), the value of counter 203j during time saving is set to 0 (S5960), and this process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot type is not the jackpot C in the process of S5958 (S5958: No), it is determined whether or not the read jackpot type is the jackpot B (S5959). When it is determined that the read jackpot type is jackpot B (S5959: Yes), the game state at the time of winning is read from the game state storage area 203cb (S5961). Next, it is determined whether or not the gaming state at the time of winning read out in the process of S5962 is latent or variable probability (S5962). When it is determined that the game state at the time of winning is not a latent probability state or a probability variable state (that is, normal state or time saving state) (S5962: No), 10000 is set to the value of the time saving counter 203j. (S5964), and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5962, if it is determined that the game state at the time of winning is the latent probability state or the probability variable state (S5962: Yes), 0 is set to the value of the time saving counter 203j (S5963), End this process. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5959 that the jackpot B is not reached (S5959: No), the game state at the time of winning is read out from the game state storage area 203cb (S5965). Next, it is determined whether or not the gaming state at the time of winning is the time saving state (S5966). When it is determined that the gaming state at the time of winning is the time saving state (S5966: Yes), the time saving counter 203j is set to 0 (S5960), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S5966, if it is determined that the gaming state at the time of winning is not the time saving state (S5966: No), the time saving medium counter 203j is set to 10000 (S5964), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S5951, if it is determined that the value of the probability variation upper limit counter 203cj is not less than 35 (S5951: No), the value of the time saving medium counter 203j is set to 50 (S5967), and the probability variation upper limit counter 203cj The value is set to clear (S5968), and this processing ends.

<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device in the fourth control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the sound lamp control device 110 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 348 to 351. FIG. First, main processing 4 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIG. This main process 4 is a process executed in place of the main process (see FIG. 257) in the first control example.

S2101 to S2113 and S2115 to S2120 of the main process 4 (see FIG. 348) in the fourth control example correspond to S2101 to S2113 and S2115 of the main process (see FIG. 257) in the first control example. The same processing as each processing of S2120 is executed. Further, in the main process 4 (see FIG. 348) in the fourth control example, the command determination process 4 is performed instead of the command determination process (S2114, see FIG. 258) of the main process (see FIG. 257) in the first control example. is executed (S2171), and the process proceeds to S2115. This command determination process 4 (S2171) is a process for executing control according to the type of command received from main controller 110, like the command determination process (see FIG. 258) in the first control example. Details of this command determination process 4 (S2171) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 349 is a flow chart showing the command determination process 4 (S2171) described above. This command determination process 4 (S2171) is, as described above, a process executed in place of the command determination process (see FIG. 258) in the first control example. Of the command determination process 4 (S2171) in the fourth control example, the processes of S2201 to S2213 are the same as the processes of S2201 to S2213 of the command determination process (see FIG. 258) in the first control example. executed.

Further, in the command determination process 4 (see FIG. 349) in the fourth control example, if it is determined in the process of S2212 that the stop command is not included in the unprocessed commands received from the main controller 110, (S2212: No), then it is determined whether or not a status command is included in the unprocessed commands (S2251), and if it is determined that a status command is included (S2251: Yes), A state command for executing control corresponding to the game state notified by the command is executed (S2252). Details of this state command processing (S2252) will be described later with reference to FIG. In addition, when the state command processing (S2252) ends, the pseudo performance (pseudo jackpot performance using the pseudo attacker 165, pseudo variation performance using the pseudo second ball entrance 1640, etc.) presentation type and presentation A pseudo effect setting process for setting a period is executed (S2253), and this process ends. The details of this pseudo effect setting process (S2253) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Further, in the command determination process 4 (see FIG. 349) in the fourth control example, if it is determined in the process of S2251 that the status command is not included in the unprocessed command received from the main controller 110, (S2251: No), next, it is determined whether or not the probability variable number command is included in the unprocessed commands (S2254), and it is determined that the probability variable number command is included in the unprocessed commands If so (S2254: Yes), the number of consecutive times of the probability variable state notified by the probability variable number command (the value of the probability variable upper limit counter 203cj provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110) is set as the value of the probability variable upper limit number counter 223cb After setting (S2255), this processing ends. By the processing of this S2255, each time the value of the probability variation upper limit counter 203cj is changed on the main control device 110 side (every time the special symbol probability variation state or the special symbol low probability state is set after the jackpot ends) , The value of the probability variable upper limit counter 223cb can be updated in synchronization with the value of the probability variable upper limit counter 203cj. Therefore, on the audio lamp control device 113 side, it is possible to accurately grasp the number of remaining jackpots until reaching the upper limit of the variable probability state. In addition, in the processing of S2251, if it is determined that the variable probability command is not included in the unprocessed commands (S2251: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

Next, referring to FIG. 350, the details of state command processing 4 (S2252) will be described. This state command process 4 (S2252) is, as described above, a process for executing control according to the type of game state notified by the state command received from the main controller 110. FIG.

In this state command process 4 (see FIG. 350), first, it is determined whether or not a change in the game state has been notified (S3601), and the game state has not been changed (that is, the number of time reductions has been decremented by 1). was notified) (S2601: No), the process proceeds to S3609. On the other hand, if it is determined that the change in the gaming state is notified by the state command (S3601: Yes), the gaming state after the change is either the normal state (normal mode) or the variable probability state (variable probability mode) is determined (S3602), and if it is determined that it is either the normal state or the variable probability state (S3602: Yes), a command for display indicating the normal effect mode is set, and the process proceeds to S3609. Incidentally, the normal effect mode is, as described above, a effect mode in which an effect is executed to make the game appear as if it were in a normal state in a general gaming machine.

As described above, in the fourth control example, both the normal state and the variable probability state are game states in which the game progresses by performing a left-handed game aiming at the first ball entrance 64 . In addition, even if the jackpot is won, if the game state after the jackpot ends does not enter the latent state, the fact that the jackpot is won is concealed, and the game ball enters the general winning hole in the normal state. It is configured to look as if a prize ball was given. With this configuration, the player can play the game without being conscious of the relatively complicated state transitions until the transition to the most advantageous latent certainty state (latent certainty mode). In other words, even though the jackpot is won, only a few prize balls (40 pieces) can be obtained, which disappoints the player, or the lower electric accessory 64Da is easily opened and closed due to the transition to the variable probability state. In spite of this, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the fact that the game is disadvantageous to the player. This allows the player to feel as if the disadvantageous game state is merely continuing during the type of jackpot state that does not shift to the normal state, the probability variable state, and the latent probability state, which are relatively disadvantageous for the player. Since it can be disguised, it is possible to provide the player with an easier-to-understand presentation. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming difficult for the player to understand, thereby preventing the player from avoiding the game with the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

In addition, in the state command processing 4 (see FIG. 350) in the fourth control example, if it is determined in the processing of S3602 that the state notified by the current state command is neither the normal state nor the variable probability state (S3602: No ), which means that the game state notified by the state command is either the latent state (latent certainty mode) or the time-saving state. It is determined whether or not there is (S3604). In the processing of S3604, if it is determined that the transition to the latent certainty state (latent certainty mode) has been notified by the state command (S3604: Yes), then whether the value of the probability variable upper limit number counter 223cb is 5 or less (S3605), the value of the probability variable upper limit number counter 223b is 5 or less (that is, the number of times to loop the latent probability mode until the probability variable limit number of times is reached is 30 or more times). If so (S3605: Yes), a display command indicating the latent certainty effect A mode is set (S3606), and the process proceeds to S3609. As a result, until the latent probability mode ends, it is possible to continue executing the effect (see FIG. 324 (a)) as if the jackpot state continues, so the number of rounds is extremely large, 60 rounds or more. It is possible to make the player feel as if a big win of . Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel a greater sense of satisfaction.

On the other hand, in the process of S3605, the value of the probability variable upper limit number counter 223b is 6 or more (that is, the number of times the latent probability mode is looped until the probability variable limit number of times is reached is less than 30). If so (S3605: No), a display command indicating the latent certainty effect B mode is set (S3607), and the process proceeds to S3609. In this latent certainty effect B mode, it is roughly divided, by the pseudo special 2 fluctuation effect, every time the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, the pseudo electric accessory 1640a is opened and the game ball is sent to the pseudo second ball entrance 1640. enters the ball and the period during which the variable display effect is executed and the period during which the pseudo jackpot effect using the pseudo attacker 165 is executed are set. In the pseudo-jackpot presentation, a presentation is executed in which a maximum of five jackpots (and a latent probability mode between the jackpots) appear as one jackpot. As a result, a lottery for a special symbol is executed based on the entry of the ball into the pseudo second ball entrance 1640, and the pseudo attacker 165 can be opened and closed as if it were a big winning state, so the game can be performed. It is possible to realize an operation that is easier for a person to understand. Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3604, if it is determined that the gaming state notified by the state command is not a latent state (S3604: No), it is notified that the transition to the time saving state (time saving mode) is notified by the state command Therefore, a display command indicating the time saving mode is set (S3608), and this process is terminated.

In the process of S3609, the information indicated by the received status command is stored (stored) in the status setting area 223g (S3609), and the information corresponding to the presentation mode set by any of the processes of S3603, S3606, S3607, and S3608. is stored in the effect mode storage area 223ca (S3610), and the process ends. By executing this state command process 4 (see FIG. 350), it is possible to set an effect mode according to the game state notified from the main controller 110. FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 351, details of the pseudo effect setting process (S2253) described above will be described. This pseudo effect setting process (S2253) is a process for setting an effect operation corresponding to the type of pseudo effect set in the state command process 4 (see FIG. 350).

In this pseudo effect setting process (see FIG. 351), first, the information stored in the effect mode storage area 223ca is read (S3701), and whether or not the read information is the information indicating the latent probability effect A mode is checked. It is determined (S3702). In the processing of S3702, when it is determined that the information indicating the latent probability effect A mode is stored in the effect mode storage area 223ca (S3702: Yes), discharge for controlling the closing and opening of the flow path switching member 695 By setting the path switching solenoid to OFF, the flow path switching member 695 is set to an open state (S3703). Next, the number of rounds corresponding to the value of the variable probability upper limit number counter 223cb is set as the number of rounds for super jackpot production (S3704), and the process proceeds to S3705. In addition, in the super-jackpot effect, an effect is executed to make the five rounds of the actual jackpot look like one round. Since all the second special symbol jackpots are 10 rounds, the number of rounds for super jackpot production is the value of the remaining number of jackpots up to the probability limit number (36 minus the value of the probability upper limit number counter 223cb). A value multiplied by 2 is set. On the other hand, in the process of S3702, when it is determined that the information stored in the effect mode storage area 223ca is not the information indicating the latent probability effect A mode (S3702), the processes of S3703 and S3704 are skipped, The process moves to S3705.

In the processing of S3705, it is determined whether or not the information stored in the effect mode storage area 223ca is the information indicating the latent probability effect B mode (S3705), and it is determined that the information is the information indicating the latent probability effect B mode. In the case (S3705: Yes), the value of the variable probability upper limit number counter 223cb is read (S3706), and the production period of the pseudo-jackpot production is set based on the read counter value (S3707), and the production period of the set jackpot production The period outside (outside the execution period of the pseudo jackpot production) is set as the production period of the pseudo special figure 2 fluctuation production (S3708), and the process proceeds to S3709.

In the processing of S3707 and S3708, for example, each pseudo-jackpot is set to be five actual jackpots as much as possible, and the remaining number of jackpots (remaining number of jackpots up to the probability variation limit number) is a value not divisible by 5 2, the number of jackpots corresponding to the remainder of division by 5 is set in the continuation period of the first pseudo-jackpot presentation. More specifically, for example, in the process of S3705, if it is determined that the value of the probability variable upper limit counter 223cb is 8, the number of remaining jackpots up to the probability variable limit number (the number of jackpots to be won in this probability mode ) is 28 times, the first to third times (3 times, which is the remainder of dividing 28 times by 5), the jackpot (and the period of the latent probability mode between the jackpots) is 1 pseudo-jackpot production. set as the performance period of In addition, after that, the pseudo-special 2 fluctuation production period linked with the latent probability mode period between the jackpots and the pseudo-jackpot production period that continues over the five jackpots (and the latent probability mode period between the jackpots) are repeated. set to

On the other hand, in the process of S3705, if it is determined that the information stored in the effect mode storage area 223ca is not the information indicating the latent probability effect B mode (S3705: No), each process of S3706 to S3708 is skipped. , the process proceeds to S3709. In the process of S3709, a display effect command corresponding to each set effect is set, and this process ends.

By executing this pseudo production setting process (see FIG. 351), the production mode of the pseudo production executed in the latent probability mode is changed to the remaining number of jackpots (the number of jackpots to be won before reaching the probability limit number of times) can be set according to the Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game during the latent probability mode.

In addition, in the fourth control example, in the latent probability effect B mode, the period of 5 times of jackpots is set to be the effect period of 1 pseudo-jackpot effect as much as possible, but it is not limited to this. . For example, it may be configured such that the performance period of each pseudo-jackpot effect is as close as possible (the number of times of the big win). Specifically, for example, when it is determined that the value of the probability variable upper limit counter 223cb is 8, a pseudo jackpot composed of four jackpot execution periods (and a probability mode period between jackpots) as a pseudo effect The effect may be set twice, and the pseudo-jackpot effect composed of the execution period of five big wins (and the latency mode period between the big wins) may be set four times. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the difference between the duration of each pseudo-jackpot effect and the number of won prize balls, so that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

<Regarding Modified Example of First Control Example>
Next, a modification of the first control example described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 352 is a front view schematically showing the game board 13 in this modified example. In the configuration of the game board 13 of the first control example described above, the second ball entrance 640 and the electric accessory 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 are provided in the right area (see FIG. 208). On the other hand, this modified example is different in that the second ball entrance 640 and the electric accessory 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 are provided in the right region.

By constructing in this way, when a normal game is won during a left-handed game, a ball can be entered into the second ball entrance without changing the game method. Therefore, when the performance mode of the charging performance is varied based on the normal drawing lottery result, it is possible to inform the player of the advantageous lottery result, so that the player can be made to pay attention to the performance contents to be executed. There is

<Detailed additional explanation of the third control example>
Next, additional explanation will be given for the above-described third control example. In the above-described third control example, the first drive control raises or lowers the lower displacement unit 400 by the tilting motor, and the movable rack 464 provided in the lower displacement unit 400 is moved in the horizontal direction (the origin position, the ball receiver, etc.) by the slide motor. (position, firing position), and the operation contents of the initial operation executed when the power is turned on and the presentation operation executed during the winning game have been explained. In this additional explanation, the detailed operation contents of the lower displacement unit 400 and the movable rack 464 operated by the above-described first drive control and the second drive control will be described more specifically with reference to the structure of each embodiment described above. give an explanation.

First, the operations of the lower displacement unit 400 and the movable rack 464 used in the third control example described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 49 and 307. FIG. As shown in FIG. 47, the lower displacement unit 400 of the third control example is rotatably fixed to the base member 410 at one end in the left-right direction. The lower displacement unit 400 is configured to rotate so that the other end opposite to the fixed end is separated from the base member 410 (see FIG. 49). In such a movable member that is pivotally supported at one end and pivotally operated, a slight clearance (tolerance) is provided in the pivotal support portion in order to perform the pivotal movement smoothly. It was something that caused some blurring. In such movable control of the movable member, if the drive control, that is, the operating position of the movable member is set according to the number of driving steps (number of steps) of the tilting motor, the operating position of the movable member may differ due to the above-mentioned slight shake. There was a fear that I would die.

On the other hand, in the third control example, the operating position of the movable member is not determined by the number of driving steps (number of steps) of the tilting motor, but by detecting means (for example, firing Since the physical position can be detected using a position sensor, the movable member can be reliably positioned at a predetermined specific position.

Further, in the above-described third control example, while being rotatable around one end of the lower displacement unit 400 as an axis, the lower displacement unit 400 can be slidably moved from the one end side direction to the other end side direction. The movable rack 464 is configured to be drive controllable. With the movable member configured in this way, the position of the center of gravity of the lower displacement unit 400 varies depending on the operating position of the movable rack 464 . There was a fear that it would slip. In addition, if the lower displacement unit 400 is rotated while the movable rack 464 is positioned on the other end side (positioned away from the shaft support side), the weight of the movable rack 464 increases. It is necessary to increase the driving force required for the rotating motion because it is separated from the axis of the rotating motion (rotating position). In addition, in order to rotate the lower displacement unit 400 at a constant speed regardless of the operating position of the movable rack 464, it is necessary to mount an inverter that varies the output of the motor. There was a possibility that the problem of a cost increase might arise.

On the other hand, in the third control example, the operation data is defined such that the lower displacement unit 400 is rotated while the movable rack 464 is positioned at the origin position (position on the one end side). As a result, the load on the tilting motor when rotating the lower displacement unit 400 can be reduced. Further, since the position of the movable rack 464 can be kept constant when the lower displacement unit 400 is rotated, the rotation speed can be kept constant only by using a constant motor output.

In addition, in the initial operation processing (processing for checking whether each movable member operates normally) executed when the power is turned on, the movable rack is moved while the lower displacement unit 400 is positioned at the origin position (see FIG. 47). 464 is driven to check whether the movable rack 464 operates normally. It is possible to reduce the load applied to the shaft support portion of the lower displacement unit 400 rather than checking whether it operates.

Furthermore, in the third control example, the tilting motor is driven by operating the frame button 22, and the downward displacement unit 400 is in the state shown in FIG. state), and a swing performance that swings between them. With this configuration, the number of times the swing effect is executed varies based on the number of times the frame button 22 is operated. I was afraid it might happen. On the other hand, in the third control example, when the lower displacement unit 400 is positioned in the firing position state, the number of steps until the lower displacement unit 400 is detected by the firing position sensor instead of the number of driving steps (number of steps) of the tilting motor is detected. Since the lower displacement unit 400 is driven, the lower displacement unit 400 can be positioned at the proper position (firing position). In addition, when using the configuration as in the third control example, for example, an auxiliary member may be provided for fixing the position of the lower displacement unit 400 after positioning the lower displacement unit 400 at an appropriate position. .

By configuring in this way, even if the movable rack 464 is driven with the lower displacement unit 400 positioned at the firing position, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a large load is applied to the pivot portion of the lower displacement unit 400 . Therefore, the period in which the movable rack 464 can be operated can be lengthened without applying a load to the shaft support portion of the lower displacement unit 400. It is possible to relax the restriction imposed, and it is possible to accurately execute a variety of driving performances.

In each control example described above, the display effects displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 were used as examples of the various effects to be executed, but in the effect mode that achieves the same purpose and effect, It is sufficient if there is, display effects displayed on a display device other than the third symbol display device 81, voice effects notified to the player by sound, and various light emitting means (LED) attached to the pachinko machine 10. You may use the light emission production which notifies to.

In addition, as the various effects executed in each of the above-described control examples, a notification effect that allows the player to grasp the content with certainty, and a suggestive effect that the player indirectly informs the player of the content are used. A suggestive effect may be executed instead, or a notification effect may be executed instead of the suggestive effect.

Furthermore, in each of the control examples described above, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with two types of high and low probability (jackpot probability) of winning a jackpot in a special symbol lottery (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of special symbols). However, without being limited to this, for example, setting means (for example, a setting switch) capable of setting one setting value from among a plurality of types of setting values is provided, and each setting value set by the setting means It may be configured such that main controller 110 executes control in which different jackpot probabilities are set.

In this case, for example, six levels of setting values from 1 to 6 are prepared, and when the setting value "1" is set, the probability of the big win is the highest, and the setting value "6" is set. It is preferable to set the jackpot probability for each set value in order so that the jackpot probability becomes the lowest.

In addition, as the jackpot probability set for each setting value, only the jackpot probability corresponding to the low probability state of special symbols may be configured to be different according to the set value, or the high probability of special symbols. Only the jackpot probability corresponding to the state may be configured to vary according to the set value.

In addition, depending on the set value described above, not only the jackpot probability but also, for example, the selection ratio of each jackpot type is changed, the probability of winning a small hit is changed, the selection ratio of the variation pattern of the special symbol, The variable time may be varied. In this case, for example, a variation pattern and a jackpot type that are likely to be selected only when a specific set value is set are provided, and whether or not a special symbol variation based on the variation pattern and a jackpot game based on the jackpot type have been executed. The currently set setting value may be determined by the player's attention.

Further, a setting command for indicating the set value is set, and based on the setting command received by the audio lamp control device 113 side, a setting suggestion effect is executed to suggest the currently set value. Alternatively, a command indicating the jackpot type output from the main control device 110 (command for indicating the lottery result) or a command for indicating the variation pattern of the special symbol (command for indicating variation time) It may be configured such that, when received, the currently set setting value is determined from the contents of the received command, and the setting suggestion effect is executed based on the determination result. With this configuration, the number of commands output from main controller 110 can be reduced.

Also, unlike the control examples described above, the pachinko machine 10 capable of simultaneously executing the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol may be used. In this case, when using a configuration that can set the above-described set value, for each set value so that the easiness of variation (lottery) of each special symbol is variable according to the set set value Various parameters may be specified, and if a specific game state in which one special symbol lottery is advantageous to the player at a specific set value is a predetermined set value different from the specific set value, one special Various parameters may be defined for each set value so that the player can be favored in the drawing of the other special symbol different from the symbol. In this case, the fact that the special symbol lottery is advantageous to the player means that the special symbol lottery is easier to execute, or the privilege given when the special symbol lottery result is a specific lottery result (jackpot game content) , content of the small winning game, game state set after the end of the big winning game) are advantageous to the player.

Also, regardless of the game state, the game state transition destination and distribution rate are unified according to the type of special figure, but not limited to this, the game state transition destination and transition distribution rate according to the game state may be changed. As a result, it is possible to provide a more complicated game, and there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early.

Furthermore, the variable probability state is a specification that continues until the variable display of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), or a lottery that shifts to the normal game state each time the special symbol fluctuates is executed, and the lottery is performed. It may be configured to shift from the variable probability state to the normal game state by winning . In this case, as the probability variable state advantageous to the player and the probability variable state disadvantageous to the player, for example, a difference is provided in the number of fluctuations of the special symbol at which the probability variable state ends, or the lottery probability of shifting from the probability variable state to the normal game state is different. You may make it so.

In addition, a plurality of time-saving end conditions, which are conditions for ending the high probability state of normal symbols, are set, and among the plurality of time-saving end conditions, when the number of times of fluctuation of special symbols becomes a specific number of times of time-saving When the end condition is satisfied, that is, when the fluctuation number end condition is satisfied, and when the time saving end condition is satisfied when a small hit is won by special symbol lottery, that is, when the winning number end condition is satisfied Then, the high probability state of the normal symbol may be changed to the low probability state at different timings.

Using this configuration, for example, when the fluctuation frequency end condition is satisfied, the game state is shifted from the time saving state to the normal state based on the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol, and the winning frequency end condition is satisfied. In that case, it is preferable to provide a game machine that is controlled to shift the game state from the time saving state to the normal state based on the end of the small winning game.

As a result, even if the time saving state ends based on the fluctuation of the same special symbol, the range obtained by adding up the special symbol variation time and the time during which the small winning game is executed according to the established time saving end condition. You can change the timing at which the time saving state ends. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the type of time-saving end condition that has been established. Furthermore, depending on the time-saving end condition that is established, even during a small winning game that gives a small amount of benefits to the player, the electric accessory 640a is operated to make it easier to enter the ball into the ball entrance. It is possible to make the small winning game a more advantageous game state for the player.

In addition, a plurality of small winning types are provided in which the period during which the small winning game is executed is different, and even if the winning number ending condition is satisfied, the game is played according to the small winning type for which the winning number ending condition is satisfied. It is preferable to make the privilege given to the person different. As a result, the player can be interested not only in the type of time saving end condition that has been established, but also in more detailed content of the time saving end condition.

Also, in this case, even if the condition for ending the number of times of winning is satisfied, there are cases where the time saving state is ended at the timing when the small winning game is started, and when the time saving state is ended at the timing when the small winning game is ended. should be configured so that This makes it difficult for the player to understand at what timing the time saving state ends. Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the process of determining whether or not the time-saving end condition is established based on the number of fluctuations in the special symbol, and whether or not the time-saving end condition is established based on the winning of the small hit It uses a configuration that separately executes the processing to determine, but is not limited to this, centrally manages the time saving information updated according to the lottery (fluctuation) of the special pattern, and the established time saving end condition You may use the structure which sets the timing which terminates a time saving state based on.

In each of the above control examples, each time the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d in the main controller 110 is updated (that is, each time it increases or decreases), the reserved ball number command is issued. Although the case of transmitting from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, only when the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d in the main controller 110 increases, the main controller 110 transmits the reserved number command to the sound lamp controller 113 . Further, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to decrease the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b by one when receiving the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 . As a result, the number of times master controller 110 transmits a hold number command to audible lamp controller 113 and the number of times audible lamp controller 113 receives a hold number command can be reduced. The control load of the audio ramp control device 113 can be reduced.

In each of the above control examples, winning into the first ball entrance 64 and passing through the through gate 67 are each suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of suspended balls is limited to four. Instead, it may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of pending balls in the variable display based on the winning to the first ball entrance 64 is displayed numerically in a part of the third pattern display device 81, or the area divided into four is displayed by the number of pending balls. It may be displayed in a different manner (for example, color or lighting pattern), and a light-emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first pattern display device 37, and the number of reserved balls is notified by the light-emitting member. can be configured to

Further, as shown in each of the above control examples, the variable display, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to vertically scrolling the pattern as identification information on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. The pattern may be moved and displayed in the vertical direction or along a predetermined path such as an L-shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the pattern. It also includes the production display etc. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

In each control example described above, the third symbol display for showing the lottery result of each symbol to the player is executed by one display means (third symbol display device 81), but other configurations may be used. For example, among the third symbols, different display means may be provided for displaying the main symbol to be displayed in an emphasized manner to the player and for displaying the sub-symbols. Also, as the configuration of the display means, a configuration other than the liquid crystal display may be used.

In each control example described above, a right-handed game aiming at the right side area of the game board 13 is executed in the case of the game state (time saving state) that is advantageous to the player, and in the case of the normal game state, the left side area of the game board 13 However, it suffices if the target area of the game board 13 is changed according to the game state, and the left-handed game is executed during the time-saving state, and during the normal state. may be caused to execute a right-handed game. Also, it may be possible to execute games in different game states while aiming at the same area.

In each of the control examples described above, the frame button 22 is used as the operating means that can be operated by the player. may be used, and an operation means configured in a lever shape that can determine whether the player has operated it by tilting it left or right or front and back, or can determine whether it has been operated by the player touching or approaching it. A touch sensor type operating means, or a wireless operating means that can determine that an operation has been performed by transmitting a predetermined radio wave, or the like may be used. In addition, each of the movable valve 750, storage device (first storage device 770, second storage device 771), second frame button (release button) 22b (1022b, 1122b), and third frame button (release button) 22c A part or all of the operation control may be performed by the sound lamp control device 113 instead of the main control device 110 .

In each control example described above, the sound lamp control device 113 performs processing for setting the display mode in the effect executed using the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the game (lottery) itself is the sound lamp Although it is configured to be executed by the main control device 110 different from the control device 113, the processing for executing the game (lottery) and the result of the game (lottery) are displayed as effects without being limited to this. It may be configured such that the processing for and the processing are executed by the same control device. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to execute a plurality of different processes with one control device.

The present invention may be applied to a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, once the jackpot hits, the expected value of the jackpot is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 times, 3 times) including the pachinko machine (commonly known as 2 times rights product, 3 times rights product) may be implemented as Further, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the ball enters a predetermined area after the big winning pattern is displayed. Also, a pachinko machine having a prize winning device having a special area such as a V-zone and entering a special game state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area may be implemented. In addition, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine in which a plurality of combinations of probabilities (commonly referred to as settings) relating to the jackpot lottery are provided, and the settings can be changed on the gaming parlor side. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various game machines such as arepachi, mammoth, slot machines, and so-called game machines in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined may be implemented.

In addition, as a pachinko machine with multiple stages of settings, the combination of jackpot probability (a combination of the jackpot probability in the low probability state and the jackpot probability in the variable probability state) can be set in multiple stages (for example, 6 stages) can be set as a representative example, but is not limited to this. In place of or in addition to combinations of jackpot probabilities, for example, a pachinko machine capable of varying the ratio of each jackpot pattern (each jackpot type) determined in the event of a jackpot according to settings. may That is, depending on the setting, the rate at which a jackpot type advantageous to the player is determined may be varied, or the rate at which a jackpot type disadvantageous to the player is determined may be varied. More specifically, for example, the ratio of determining the jackpot with a large number of rounds (eg, 16 rounds) is varied according to the setting, or the jackpot with a small number of rounds (eg, 2 rounds) is determined. A configuration may be adopted in which the degree of advantage for each setting can be varied by varying the ratio of each setting according to the setting. In addition, for example, the ratio of determining the jackpot with a large number of times of time reduction (for example, 100 times) after the end of the jackpot is varied according to the setting, or the jackpot with a small number of times of time reduction (for example, 0 times) may be varied according to the setting. Furthermore, after the end of the jackpot, the rate at which the jackpot that transitions to (or easily transitions to) an advantageous game state (eg, variable probability state) is determined can be changed according to settings, or a disadvantageous game state (eg, normal state) can be set. ) (or easily shifted) may be changed according to the setting. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which provides a big-hit classification in which the ratio determined only by specific setting increases significantly (almost never determined by other settings). Specifically, for example, six settings from 1 to 6 can be set, and setting 6 is the most advantageous setting. In setting 6, when a jackpot is won, a jackpot of 6 rounds is determined at a rate of 2%, while in other settings, a jackpot of 6 rounds is determined only at a rate of 0.01%. may be configured. By constructing in this way, when the big win ends in 6 rounds, the possibility that the setting is the most advantageous setting 6 is extremely high, so that the player is made to play the game paying attention to the number of rounds of the big win. be able to. Alternatively or in addition, for example, in setting 6, the ratio of the jackpot type in which 66 times of time saving is given after the jackpot ends may be higher than other settings. By configuring in this way, it is possible to play a game while paying attention to the number of times the time saving state ends. Alternatively, or in addition to these, for example, a jackpot type in which the jackpot (or accessories inside the jackpot, etc.) operates in an operation pattern different from other jackpot types during the execution of the jackpot game. It may be configured such that the jackpot type is easily determined by a specific setting (the rate of determination is increased). In addition, in the case of varying the combination of the probability of a big win according to the setting, in the low probability state, the higher the probability of the big win, the more advantageous the setting is for the player, while in the variable probability state, the setting is disadvantageous to the player. It is good also as a structure which makes a jackpot probability high as it is. This configuration is particularly of the type in which, in the variable probability state, it is easier to increase the number of balls held as the number of special symbol lotteries increases (the number of prize balls paid out tends to be greater than the number of game balls fired). Effective in game machines. More specifically, for example, it is a configuration that continues until the next big hit is won in the variable probability state, and by applying it to a game machine of a type that becomes a small hit with a high probability in the variable probability state, the high setting advantage You can increase your sexuality. That is, if the probability of winning a big win in the variable probability state is low, the number of lottery times until the next big win tends to increase, so the chances of getting a small win and winning balls also increase. Therefore, when the probability variable state occurs, it becomes easier for the player to win more prize balls until the next big win, which is advantageous for the player.

Furthermore, in each of the above embodiments, two types of special symbols, the first special symbol and the second special symbol, are used as a plurality of special symbol types. may be used, or only one special symbol type may be used. Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, a game property in which a lottery (fluctuation) is performed according to a rule in which a plurality of special symbols are determined in advance, and a game property in which a lottery (fluctuation) is performed independently of each other are explained. However, each of the game features described in each embodiment may be replaced or combined.

In the slot machine, for example, the pattern is changed by operating the control lever in a state where the pattern effective line is determined by inserting a coin, and the pattern is stopped and fixed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "provided with a display device that confirms and displays identification information after variably displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed, and the stop is displayed. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value under the condition that the combination of time identification information is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a game machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device for displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then confirming and displaying the symbols, and is equipped with a ball launching handle. There are things that are not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the pattern starts to change due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the determined symbols at the time of the stop are so-called jackpot symbols, and the player is given a special game. A lot of balls are paid out to the tray at the bottom. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

In the following, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the game machine of the present invention are shown.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking the Lower Displacement Unit 400 as an Example>
a displacement member formed to be displaceable in a first direction from a reference position and capable of moving a game ball along with the displacement in the first direction; In a game machine comprising a restricting means for restricting the throwing of a ball, the displacement member:
The gaming machine A1 is characterized by being displaceable from the reference position in a second direction opposite to the first direction.

Here, a displacement member formed to be displaceable from the reference position in the first direction and capable of moving the game ball along with the displacement in the first direction, and a trajectory area of the displacement member from outside the trajectory area of the displacement member A gaming machine is known that includes a regulation means that regulates the throwing of a game ball to a game ball (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-166997). According to this gaming machine, it is possible to prevent game balls exceeding the specified number from being thrown to the track area of the displacement member by the regulation of the regulation means. However, in the above-described conventional game machine, if the restricting means malfunctions due to sticking or wear, for example, there is a risk that more than a specified number of game balls will be thrown toward the track area of the displacement member. However, in this case, there is a problem that the number of game balls exceeding the prescribed number may cause a problem. That is, for example, there is a risk that game balls in excess of the specified number may enter the drive mechanism of the displacement member and be caught in the movable portion, resulting in damage. Alternatively, there is a risk that game balls exceeding the prescribed number may flow out of the game area (for example, the back side of the game board).

On the other hand, according to the game machine A1, the displacement member is formed so as to be displaceable from the reference position in the second direction opposite to the first direction, so that the track area of the displacement member can be expanded accordingly. Therefore, for example, even if the regulation means malfunctions and more than the specified number of game balls are thrown,
Since the track area of the displacement member is expanded, the game balls exceeding the specified number can be received in the track area. As a result, the number of game balls exceeding the prescribed number can be moved along with the displacement of the displacement member in the first direction. Therefore, game balls in excess of the specified number can be prevented from entering the driving mechanism of the displacement member or flowing out of the game area. It can be difficult.

In the gaming machine A1, a passage member is formed as a passage through which a game ball can pass, and a downstream portion of the passage member communicates with a track area of the displacement member. Characterized game machine A2.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effects of the game machine A1, the passage member is formed as a passage through which the game ball can pass, and the downstream portion communicates with the track area of the displacement member. Since the passage of the balls is restricted, for example, even if the restricting means malfunctions and more game balls than the specified number are thrown, the game balls exceeding the specified number are transferred to the displacement member via the passage member. It is possible to reliably throw the ball to the trajectory area. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to cause problems due to game balls exceeding the specified number.

In the gaming machine A2, the displacement member is formed so as to be capable of receiving and holding a prescribed number of game balls thrown from the passage member at the reference position, and at least the diameter of the game ball from the reference position in the second direction. A gaming machine A3 characterized in that it is formed to be displaceable by a distance exceeding .

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effects of the game machine A2, the displacement member is formed so as to be able to receive and hold the specified number of game balls thrown from the passage member at the reference position, and to move the second position from the reference position. Since it is formed to be displaceable in the direction at least by a distance exceeding the diameter of the game ball, after receiving the specified number of game balls at the reference position, by displacing the displacement member in the second direction from the reference position, the specified number can be obtained. It is possible to throw the game balls exceeding the trajectory area of the displacement member (the area on the first direction side of the displacement member). Therefore, the number of game balls exceeding the prescribed number can be moved along with the displacement of the displacement member in the first direction.

In this case, the displacement member holds the specified number of game balls, and the game balls exceeding the specified number can be thrown to the track area, so that the specified number of game balls are separated from the game balls exceeding the specified number. can do. Therefore, for example, by displacing the displacement member in the first direction, it is possible to discharge only the game balls exceeding the prescribed number from the track area while maintaining the state in which the displacement member holds the prescribed number of game balls. It becomes possible.

The gaming machine A4 is characterized in that in the gaming machine A3, the displacement member is formed so as to change its posture when it is displaced in the first direction and reaches a predetermined position.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effects of the game machine A3, the displacement member is formed so that its posture can be changed when it is displaced in the first direction and reaches the predetermined position. While making it easy to maintain the state in which the ball is held by the displacement member, it is possible to prevent the game ball from falling out of the displacement member, and when reaching a predetermined position, the game ball can be controlled by utilizing the change in the attitude of the displacement member. can be easily discharged from the displacement member.

In the gaming machine A4, a concave portion is provided in a track region when the displacement member is displaced in the first direction from the reference position, and the displacement member is positioned in the concave portion when the displacement member is displaced in the first direction. A game machine A5, characterized in that it has a protrusion to be engaged and is formed such that its attitude can be changed by engaging said protrusion with said recess.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A4, the displacement member is provided with a concave portion recessed in the track area when the displacement member is displaced in the first direction from the reference position, and the displacement member is displaced in the first direction. Since the protrusion is engaged with the recess when the displacement member is engaged with the recess, and the protrusion is engaged with the recess, the attitude of the displacement member can be changed. Therefore, the structure for changing the attitude of the displacement member can be simplified.

In the gaming machine A5, the projection projects from the displacement member in the first direction, and the tip of the projection hits the lower half of the game ball sent to the trajectory region of the displacement member. A gaming machine A6 characterized by being touched.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A5, the protrusion is provided to project from the displacement member in the first direction, and the tip of the projection is a game ball thrown to the track area of the displacement member. (That is, the game balls exceeding the specified number) are formed so as to be able to abut on the lower half of the surface. You can push and move. As a result, game balls exceeding the specified number can be easily discharged from the track area.

In addition, the protrusion is interposed between the specified number of game balls held by the displacement member and the game balls sent to the track area of the displacement member (the game balls exceeding the specified number). The distance between the specified number of game balls and the game balls exceeding the specified number can be secured by the length of the projection of the part. Therefore, it is possible to easily discharge only the game balls exceeding the prescribed number from the track area while maintaining the state in which the prescribed number of game balls are held by the displacement member.

Furthermore, since the projecting part has the role of changing the posture of the displacement member by engaging with the recessed part and the role of moving the game ball while pushing the lower half of the game ball, the number of parts can be reduced accordingly. Cost can be reduced.

A gaming machine A7 in the gaming machine A5 or A6, wherein the size of the recess in the first direction is smaller than the diameter of the game ball.

According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effects of the game machine A5 or A6, the size of the concave portion in the first direction is smaller than the diameter of the game ball, so that the game ball thrown to the track area of the displacement member (That is, game balls exceeding the specified number) can easily pass through the concave portion when moved in accordance with the displacement of the displacement member in the first direction. As a result, game balls exceeding the specified number can be easily discharged from the track area.

In any one of the game machines A5 to A7, the displacement member is erected at a height lower than the radius of the game ball in the trajectory area when the displacement member is displaced from the reference position in the first direction, and is higher than the recess. A wall portion located on the first direction side is provided, and when a game ball sent to the track area of the displacement member is moved along with the displacement of the displacement member in the first direction, the game ball is moved to the wall portion. A game machine A8 characterized in that a position change of the displacement member is regulated by being brought into contact with the portion and the displacement member.

According to the game machine A8, in any one of the game machines A5 to A7, the displacement member is erected at a height lower than the radius of the game ball in the trajectory area when the displacement member is displaced in the first direction from the reference position, and the concave portion When a game ball sent to the track area of the displacement member is moved in accordance with the displacement of the displacement member in the first direction, the game ball is positioned on the first direction side of the wall portion. Since the position change of the displacement member can be regulated by contacting the displacement member, only the game balls exceeding the prescribed number are retained while the displacement member holds the prescribed number of game balls. It can be easily ejected from the orbital area.

That is, since the wall portion is erected at a height lower than the radius of the game ball, when the game ball is moved by being pushed by the projecting portion as the displacement member is displaced in the first direction, the game ball is moved. A game ball can easily run over the wall part by bringing the lower half surface of the ball into contact with the wall part. In this case, the game ball is brought into contact with the displacement member (that is, the game ball is interposed between the displacement member and the wall portion), and a reaction force can be applied from the game ball to the displacement member. Posture change can be regulated, and the specified number of game balls held by the displacement member can be suppressed from dropping out. As a result, it is possible to easily discharge only the game balls exceeding the prescribed number from the track area while maintaining the state in which the prescribed number of game balls are held by the displacement member.

On the other hand, when game balls (that is, game balls exceeding the specified number) are not thrown into the track area of the displacement member, no game balls are interposed between the wall and the displacement member, so that the protrusion becomes the recess. By being engaged, the posture of the displacement member can be changed. As a result, it is possible to easily discharge a prescribed number of game balls (that is, game balls held by the displacement member) from the displacement member by using the change in posture of the displacement member.

A gaming machine A9 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A8, the restricting means is operable in conjunction with the displacement of the displacement member.

According to the game machine A9, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A1 to A8, the restricting means is formed to be operable in conjunction with the displacement of the displacement member. It is possible to restrict or allow the throwing of a game ball into the track area of the member. That is, since it is possible to mechanically synchronize the restriction or permission of the throwing of the game ball with the displacement of the displacement member and switch over, for example, a sensor device for detecting the position of the restricting means and the detection result of the sensor device can be used. It is possible to eliminate the need for driving means for driving the regulating means or control of each of these means, thereby reducing the product cost and improving the reliability of the operation.

In the game machine A9, the restricting means allows the game ball to be thrown to the track area of the displacement member in conjunction with the displacement of the displacement member in the second direction from the reference position. Characterized game machine A10.

According to the game machine A10, in addition to the effects of the game machine A9, the restricting means moves the game ball to the track area of the displacement member in conjunction with the displacement of the displacement member from the reference position in the second direction. Since the ball is allowed to be thrown, the game ball can be reliably thrown to the area on the first direction side of the displacement member, which is the track area of the displacement member.

In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A10, a base member on which the displacement member is displaceably disposed, and a base member disposed vertically downward and vertically upward from an end portion of the base member on the first direction side A gaming machine A11 characterized by comprising a collection member having an opening in the bottom.

According to the game machine A11, in addition to the effects of the game machine A10, the displacement member is disposed vertically below the base member displaceably disposed and the end portion of the base member on the first direction side. and a recovery member having an opening vertically upward, so that the game balls are moved as the displacement member moves in the first direction and discharged from the track area of the displacement member (i.e., the number exceeding the prescribed number). A game ball) can be received and recovered from the opening of the recovery member.

In the gaming machine A11, the base member is formed so as to be displaceable between a retracted position and a displaced position, and the opening of the recovery member is located at least at the first position in the base member displaced to the retracted position or the displaced position. A gaming machine A12 characterized in that it is formed in a size positioned vertically below the end on the direction side.

According to the game machine A12, in addition to the effects of the game machine A11, the base member is displaceable between the retracted position and the displaced position, and the opening of the recovery member is displaced to at least the retracted position or the displaced position. Since the base member has a size positioned vertically below the first direction end of the base member, the displacement member is ejected from the track area of the displacement member regardless of whether the base member is displaced to the retracted position or the displaced position. It is possible to receive and collect the game balls (that is, the game balls exceeding the specified number) from the opening of the collecting member.

By being inserted into the recessed space of the recess in any of the game machines A5 to A8,
The game machine A13 is characterized by comprising an insertion member for restricting the engagement of the protrusion with the recess.

According to the game machine A13, any one of the game machines A5 to A8 is provided with an insertion member that restricts engagement of the projection with the recess by being inserted into the recessed space of the recess. With the displacement in the first direction, it is possible to suppress the change in the posture of the displacement member when ejecting game balls exceeding the specified number from the track area of the displacement member. Therefore, it is possible to easily discharge only the game balls exceeding the prescribed number from the track area while maintaining the state in which the prescribed number of game balls are held by the displacement member.

In the gaming machine A13, a base member is formed to be displaceable between a retracted position and a displaced position, and the displacement member is arranged to be displaceable, and the insertion member is adapted to displace the base member to the retracted position When the base member is displaced to the displaced position, it is separated from the recessed space of the recessed portion.
4.

According to the game machine A14, in addition to the effects of the game machine A13, when the base member is displaced to the retracted position, the insertion member is inserted into the recessed space of the recess, so that the displacement member is displaced in the first direction. Accordingly, when game balls in excess of the specified number are discharged from the track area of the displacement member, the state in which the displacement member holds the specified number of game balls by suppressing the change in the posture of the displacement member. On the other hand, when the base member is displaced to the displaced position, the insertion member is separated from the recessed space of the recess. By combining them, the attitude of the displacement member can be changed, and the prescribed number of game balls can be easily discharged from the displacement member.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking the Distribution Unit 500 as an Example>
A downflow passage for a game ball to flow down, a first branch passage and a second branch passage branched from the downflow passage, and a game ball flowing down the downflow passage to either the first branch passage or the second branch passage. A game machine having a sorting means for sorting comprises a displaceable member formed to be displaceable and receiving game balls from the first branch passage, wherein the displacement member contacts the sorting means and is displaced. , the game machine B1 is characterized in that the distribution means is displaced and the distribution destination is switched.

Here, a downflow passage through which game balls flow down, a first branch passage and a second branch passage branched from the downflow passage, and a game ball flowing down the downflow passage to either the first branch passage or the second branch passage There is known a gaming machine equipped with a sorting means for sorting (for example, JP-A-2014-223
176). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the game ball that has flowed down the flow passage is
Because of the structure in which one ball is alternately distributed to the first branch passage and the second branch passage, the game balls flowing down the flow-down passage are evenly distributed to the first branch passage and the second branch passage (that is, half each). distributed. That is, there is a problem that the number of game balls distributed to the first branch passage cannot be changed.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, the displacement member is formed to be displaceable and receives the game ball from the first branch passage. Since the means is displaced and the distribution destination is switched, the number of game balls distributed to the first branch passage or the second branch passage can be changed according to the displacement of the displacement member. That is, the number of game balls distributed to the first branch path can be changed.

In addition, according to the game machine B1, the distributing means can be displaced using the displacement of the displacing member, so there is no need to separately provide a driving means or a transmission mechanism for displacing the distributing means. can. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced accordingly, and the product cost can be reduced.

In addition, for example, in a structure that controls the displacement of the sorting means using position detection by a sensor device and driving by a drive means, malfunction due to detection failure or control failure lowers the reliability of the sorting operation of the sorting means. However, according to the game machine B1, the allocation destination by the allocation means can be switched in mechanical synchronization with the displacement of the displacement member, so that the reliability of the allocation operation can be improved.

In particular, since the displacement member is a member that receives game balls from the first branch passage, it is possible to switch the distribution destination of the distribution means to the first branch passage in synchronization with the displacement of the displacement member. The game balls distributed to the passage can be surely received by the displacement member.

In the game machine B1, a biasing means is provided for applying a biasing force to the distribution means to maintain a distribution destination of the distribution means at one of the first branch passage and the second branch passage, and the displacement member displaces the distributing means in a direction against the direction of the urging force, thereby switching the destination of distribution by the distributing means to the other of the first branch passage and the second branch passage, and the urging force A gaming machine B2 characterized in that the destination of distribution by the distribution means is returned to one of the first branch passage and the second branch passage by the biasing force of the means.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1, a biasing force is applied to the sorting means,
Since the urging means is provided to maintain the destination of distribution by the distribution means at either the first branch passage or the second branch passage, it is possible to prevent the destination of distribution by the distribution device from being carelessly switched. In this case, the distribution means is displaced with the displacement of the displacement member, and after the distribution destination is switched, the return to the distribution destination before switching can be performed by the biasing force of the biasing means. It is possible to eliminate the need for the member to be in contact with the distribution means. That is, the displacement member can be separated from the sorting means. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in designing the movable range of the displacement member.

In the game machine B2, the urging means imparts an urging force to the allocating means to keep the second branch path as the destination of allocation by the allocating means.

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effects of the game machine B2, the biasing means applies a biasing force to the distribution means to maintain the distribution destination of the distribution means in the second branch passage. is incapable of receiving game balls, it is possible to suppress the switching of the sorting destination by the sorting means to the first branch passage.

The game machine B3 includes a base member that is displaceable between a first position and a second position and on which the displacement member is disposed. , the displacement member is capable of receiving a game ball from the first branch passage and is capable of abutting against the distribution means, and in a state in which the base member is arranged at the second position, the displacement A gaming machine B4 characterized in that the member is not capable of receiving game balls from the first branch passage and is not capable of coming into contact with the sorting means.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effects of the game machine B3, the base member is formed so as to be displaceable between the first position and the second position, and the displacement member is disposed on the base member. , a mode in which the displacement member is displaced with the base member arranged at the first position, and a mode in which the displacement member is displaced with the base member arranged at the second position can be formed. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect accordingly.

In this case, when the base member is arranged at the second position, the displacement member cannot receive the game ball from the first branch passage, but in such a state, the displacement member cannot contact the distribution means. Therefore, in a state in which the displacement member cannot receive the game ball (a state in which the base member is arranged at the second position), it is possible to prevent the distribution destination from being switched to the first branch passage by the distribution means.

A gaming machine B5 characterized in that the gaming machine B4 comprises a second base member formed as a separate member from the base member, and the distribution means is disposed on the second base member.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effects of the game machine B4, the second base member is formed as a separate member from the base member, and the distribution means is disposed on the second base member. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress an increase in the size of the base member.

In any one of game machines B1 to B5, the displacement member is formed to be displaceable at least between a switching position and a receiving position set to a position different from the switching position, and the displacement member is displaced to the switching position. In this state, the distribution destination by the distribution means is switched to the first branch passage, and in the state in which the displacement member is displaced to the receiving position, the displacement member can receive the game ball from the first branch passage. and a game machine B6 characterized in that the distribution destination by the distribution means is switched to the second branch passage
.

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines B1 to B5, the displacement member is formed to be displaceable at least between the switching position and the receiving position set at a position different from the switching position, In a state in which the displacement member is displaced to the switching position, the distribution destination by the distribution means is switched to the first branch passage, and in a state in which the displacement member is displaced to the receiving position, the displacement member receives the game ball from the first branch passage. Since the ball can be received and the distribution destination by the distribution means is switched to the second branch passage, it is possible to suppress the game balls exceeding the specified number that the displacement member can receive from being distributed to the first branch passage.

That is, when the switching position and the receiving position are set to the same position, the displacement member receives the game ball while the distribution destination by the distribution means is switched to the first branch passage. There is a possibility that game balls exceeding the prescribed number that can be received are distributed to the first branch passage. If a separate means for restricting the inflow of game balls into the first branch passage is provided, the structure becomes complicated, the reliability is lowered, and the product cost is increased.

On the other hand, according to the game machine B6, the displacement member is displaced to the switching position, and after the specified number (or less than the specified number) of game balls are distributed to the first branch passage, the displacement member is displaced to the receiving position. Then, since the distribution destination is switched to the second branch passage, it is possible to prevent game balls in excess of the specified number from flowing down to the first branch passage. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the game balls exceeding the specified number that the displacement member can receive from being distributed to the first branch passage. Also,
Since there is no need to separately provide the means described above, reliability can be improved and product costs can be reduced.

In the game machine B6, the first branch passage is formed as one or more protrusions or recesses protruding or recessed on the inner wall surface thereof, and provides resistance to game balls passing through the first branch passage. A gaming machine B7 characterized by comprising means.

According to the game machine B7, in addition to the effects of the game machine B6, the first branch passage is formed as one or a plurality of projections or recesses protruded or recessed on the inner wall surface, and the first branch passage is passed through. Since the game ball is equipped with resistance means for applying resistance to the game ball passing through the first branch passage, the speed of the game ball passing through the first branch passage can be slowed down. Therefore, the time required for the displacement member to be displaced from the switching position to the receiving position can be lengthened accordingly, so that the displacement member can reliably receive the game ball. In addition, the output of the drive means can be reduced to the extent that the displacement speed required for the displacement member can be reduced, and the product cost can be reduced.

In game machine B6 or B7, the sorting means moves the first
A first retractable portion and a second retractable portion are provided so as to be retractable with respect to the branch passage, and the first retractable portion protrudes into the first branch passage to catch a game ball flowing down the flow passage. the second
It is formed so as to be able to be distributed to branch passages, and the second retractable portion is greater than the first retractable portion than the first retractable portion.
Positioned on the downstream side of the branch passage and projecting into the first branch passage, the game balls distributed to the first branch passage are formed to be capable of regulating the flow down, and the first haunting portion and the second
A gaming machine B8 characterized in that one of the retractable parts projects into the passage of the first branch passage while the other retracts out of the passage of the first branch passage.

According to the game machine B8, in addition to the effects of the game machine B6 or B7, the sorting means includes the first retractable portion formed so as to be retractable with respect to the first branch passage as the sorting means is displaced; A second haunting part is provided, and the first haunting part protrudes into the first branch passage so that the game balls flowing down the flow-down passage can be distributed to the second branch passage, and the second haunting part is the first branch passage. Positioned on the downstream side of the first branch passage from the haunting portion and projecting into the first branch passage, the game balls distributed to the first branch passage are formed so as to be capable of regulating the flow down, and the first haunting portion is formed. and the second projecting/retracting part, when one protrudes into the passage of the first branch passage, the other retracts out of the first branch passage. , only the prescribed number of game balls can be distributed to the first branch passage and received by the displacement member.

That is, a first state in which the game balls flowing down the flow path are distributed to the second branch path by the protrusion of the first haunting part, and a game ball flowing down the flow path by retreating the first haunting part. A second state in which the game balls are distributed to the first branch passage; By retracting the 2 haunting part, the game ball stored in the first branch passage is made to flow down and received by the displacement member.
By combining these states, only a specified number of game balls can be distributed to the first branch passage and received by the displacement member.

Further, according to the game machine B8, the sorting means comprises a first haunting part and a second haunting part, that is,
Since it is formed as a single part, the structure of the sorting means (the structure for operating the first retractable part and the second retractable part and exhibiting their functions) can be simplified. Furthermore, since one of the first projecting and retracting portion and the second projecting and retracting portion projects into the passage of the first branch passage, the other retracts out of the passage of the first branch passage. and receiving position), it is sufficient that the distributing means is formed so as to be displaceable to two positions. That is, by displacing the distributing means at two positions, the first to fourth states described above can be formed. Therefore, the structure of the distributing means and the structure of displacing the distributing means according to the displacement of the displacement member can be simplified, and the reliability of the game ball distributing operation can be improved accordingly.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking the Distribution Unit 500 as an Example>
A downflow passage for a game ball to flow down, a first branch passage and a second branch passage branched from the downflow passage, and a game ball flowing down the downflow passage to either the first branch passage or the second branch passage. A gaming machine comprising a sorting means for sorting, characterized by comprising a flow state changing means positioned downstream of the sorting means for restricting or allowing the game balls to flow down in the first branch passage. Game machine C1.

Here, a downflow passage through which game balls flow down, a first branch passage and a second branch passage branched from the downflow passage, and a game ball flowing down the downflow passage to either the first branch passage or the second branch passage. There is known a gaming machine equipped with a sorting means for sorting (for example, JP-A-2014-223
176). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the game ball flowing down the flow passage is
There is a problem that it is not enough to interest the player because the game is only distributed to either the first branch passage or the second branch passage.

On the other hand, according to the game machine C1, since it is provided with the flow-down state changing means which is positioned downstream of the distribution means and regulates or permits the flow of the game balls in the first branch passage, it is interesting to the player. can give

That is, by the operation of the flow state changing means, the game balls distributed to the first branch passage are restricted from flowing down, the game balls are stored in the first branch passage, and the game balls are allowed to flow down in the first branch passage. , the game balls stored in the first branch passage can flow down (released).
As a result, in addition to the operation of distributing the game balls flowing down the flow-down passage to either the first branch passage or the second branch passage, the operation of temporarily stopping (accumulating) the flow of the game balls distributed to the first branch passage. , and the action of causing the stopped (stored) game ball to flow down (release). As a result, it is possible to give interest to the player.

In the gaming machine C1, an integral member is provided in which the distribution means and the flow state change means are integrally formed, and in a state where the destination of distribution by the distribution means is the first branch passage, the first branch passage is restricted by the flow state changing means, and the distribution destination of the distribution means is the second branch passage, the flow of the game balls in the first branch passage is controlled by the flow state change means. Gaming machine C2 characterized by being allowed.

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effects of the game machine C1, since an integrated member in which the distribution means and the flow state change means are integrally formed is provided, the distribution means and the flow state change means are operated. It is possible to simplify the structure and improve the reliability of operation. That is, when the distribution means and the flowing-down state changing means are formed separately, they are two parts, so the structure for operating these two parts is complicated and the reliability of the operation is lowered. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C2, since the distribution means and the flow state changing means can be formed as a single part, the structure can be simplified accordingly, and the product cost can be reduced and the reliability of the operation can be improved. can be planned.

Further, in this case, when the distribution destination by the distribution means is set to the first branch passage by the operation of the integrated member, the flow down of the game balls distributed to the first branch passage is regulated by the flow-down state changing means to control the first branch passage. When the game balls are stored in the branch passage and the allocation destination of the distribution means is set to the second branch passage, the flow down of the game balls in the first branch passage is permitted by the flow state changing means, and the game balls are stored in the first branch passage. It is possible to let down (release) the game ball that has been held. That is, in addition to the action of distributing the game balls flowing down the flow-down passage to either the first branch passage or the second branch passage, the action of temporarily stopping (accumulating) the flow of the game balls distributed to the first branch passage; Not only can the stopped (stored) game ball flow down (release) operation, but also these storage and release operations can be alternately formed in conjunction with the sorting operation.

In the game machine C2, the integrated member is formed to be displaceable between a first state position and a second state position, and in a state in which the integrated member is displaced to the first state position, the distribution means is shifted to the first state position. 1 branch passage is arranged at a position where the distribution destination is, and the flowing state changing means is arranged at a position for regulating the flow of game balls in the first branch passage, and the integrated member is displaced to the second state position. In the state, the distribution means is arranged at a position where the second branch passage is the distribution destination, and the flow state changing means is arranged at a position allowing the game balls to flow down in the first branch passage. Gaming machine C3.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effects of the game machine C2, the integrated member is formed to be displaceable between the first state position and the second state position, and when the integrated member is displaced to the first state position, , the distributing means is arranged at a position where the first branch passage is the distribution destination, and the flow state changing means is arranged at a position for restricting the flow of game balls in the first branch passage, and the integrated member is displaced to the second state position. In this state, the distribution means is arranged at the position where the second branch passage is the distribution destination, and the flow state changing means is arranged at the position where the game balls are allowed to flow down in the first branch passage,
By displacing the integral member in two positions (first state position and second state position), in addition to the operation of distributing the game balls flowing down the downflow passage to either the first branch passage or the second branch passage, the first
It is possible to form an operation to temporarily stop (store) the flow of the game balls distributed to the branch passage and an operation to make the stopped (stored) game balls flow down (release), and these storage and release. can be formed alternately in conjunction with the sorting operation. That is, it is possible to simplify the structure, reduce the product cost, and improve the operational reliability.

In the game machine C3, the integrated member is formed rotatably, and at least the flowing-down state changing means is formed so as to be able to appear and disappear with respect to the first branch passage, and by protruding into the first branch passage, the game ball A game machine C4 characterized in that it is formed in an arc-shaped curved shape centering on the rotation axis of the integrated member, while restricting the flow of the integrated member.

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effects of the game machine C3, the integral member is formed rotatably, and at least the flow state changing means is formed so as to be able to appear and disappear with respect to the first branch passage. Since it is formed in an arc-shaped curved shape centered on the rotation axis of the integrated member, the inner wall of the first branch passage for the appearance and disappearance of the flow state changing means It is possible to reduce the area of the hole opened to the

The gaming machine C5 in the gaming machine C4 is characterized in that the flowing-down state changing means is arranged in a posture in which the upstream side of the first branch passage is concave.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effects of the game machine C4, the flow state changing means is arranged in a posture in which the upstream side of the first branch passage is concave, so that the flow state change to the first branch passage. In the initial state when the means begins to protrude (that is, in a state in which only the tip side of the flow state changing means protrudes into the passage), the shape of the tip side of the flow state changing means is such that it is easy to regulate the flow of the game ball. It can be arranged in the direction, and the flow down of game balls distributed to the first branch passage can be easily regulated.

Further, in a state in which the flowing-down state changing means protrudes to the first branch passage to the maximum and restricts the flowing down of the game ball, the game ball can be stably held by the concave portion of the flowing-down state changing means, so that the rampage of the game ball can be suppressed. .

In game machine C4 or C5, biasing means for applying a biasing force to the integrated member to bias the flowing state changing means in a direction in which the flowing state changing means protrudes into the first branch passage is provided. A game machine C6 characterized in that the distance to the rotation axis of the integrated member is set larger than the distance from the sorting means to the rotation axis of the integrated member.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C4 or C5, it is provided with an urging means for imparting an urging force to the integral member and urging the flowing-down state changing means in the direction of protruding into the first branch passage. Therefore, by utilizing this urging force, the integrated member can be easily maintained in a posture (that is, the first state position) in which the flow-down state changing means protrudes into the first branch passage.

In this case, in the game machine C6, since the distance from the flowing state changing means to the rotation axis of the integrated member is made larger than the distance from the sorting means to the rotation axis of the integrated member, the falling game balls collide. Since the distance from the rotation axis is large, even if the same impact force acts, the flow state changing means is likely to be retracted. By setting it in the direction to do so, it is possible to suppress the sinking of the flowing-down state changing means by the amount of the urging force.

In the game machine C6, the integrated member is rotated by its own weight in a direction in which the flowing state changing means protrudes into the first branch passage.

According to the game machine C7, in addition to the effects of the game machine C6, the integrated member rotates in the direction in which the flowing-down state changing means protrudes into the first branch passage by its own weight. The member is placed in a posture in which the flow-down state changing means protrudes into the first branch passage (that is, the first state position)
can be easily maintained. Therefore, when the game ball collides, it is possible to further suppress the sinking of the flowing-down state changing means by its own weight.

Further, even if the urging means falls off, the flowing-down state changing means maintains the posture of protruding into the first branch passage by the weight of the integral part, thereby preventing the game ball from flowing down to the first branch passage. can be suppressed.

In any one of the game machines C2 to C7, the distribution destination by the distribution means is the first branch passage, and the flow down of the game ball in the first branch passage is regulated by the flow state changing means, and the first A gaming machine C characterized in that, in a state in which a prescribed number of game balls are stored in the branch passage, the game balls flowing down the flow passage are formed so as to flow down to the second branch passage.
8.

According to the game machine C8, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines C2 to C7, the distribution destination by the distribution means is the first branch passage, and the flow of game balls in the first branch passage is controlled by the flow state changing means. When a specified number of game balls are stored in the first branch path, the game balls flowing down the flow-down path are formed to be able to flow down to the second branch path, so that the specified number or more of game balls flow down. When flowing down the passage, it is possible to suppress the game balls exceeding a prescribed number from remaining in the flow-down passage. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the displacement of the distribution means (the operation of setting the distribution destination to the second branch passage) from being hindered by the game balls stuck in the flow-down passage.

In the game machine C8, the inner wall of the flow path facing the second branch path is configured to store the game balls flowing down the flow path at the end of the specified number of game balls stored in the first branch path. A gaming machine C9 characterized in that it is formed so as to be able to guide a game ball to the side surface of the second branch passage side.

According to the game machine C9, in addition to the effects of the game machine C8, the inner wall of the flow-down passage on the side facing the second branch passage allows the game balls flowing down the flow-down passage to reach the prescribed number stored in the first branch passage. Since it is formed so that it can be guided to the side surface of the second branch passage side of the last game ball among the game balls,
A game ball flowing down a flow-down passage can be easily made to flow down to a second branch passage after colliding with the last game ball among a prescribed number of game balls.

The game ball at the end of the specified number of game balls means a game ball located on the upstream side (on the side opposite to the flow state changing means). Further, when the prescribed number is 1, the last game ball means the game ball itself stored in the first branch passage.

In the game machine C8 or C9, the game machine C10 is characterized in that the flow direction of the downstream end of the flow passage is formed in a direction different from the flow direction of the upstream end of the first branch passage.

According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C8 or C9, the downstream end of the flow path is formed in a direction different from the flow direction of the upstream end of the first branch path. When the falling game ball collides with the last game ball of the specified number of game balls stored in the first branch passage, the direction of the repulsive force acting on the last game ball is changed to the direction of the first branch passage. It can be different from the downstream direction of the upstream end. As a result, it is possible to prevent the trailing game ball from jumping out of the upstream end of the first branch passage and flowing into the second branch passage due to the repulsive force at the time of collision.

In any one of game machines C2 to C10, the sorting means is formed so as to be able to appear in and out of the flow path or the first branch path, and its haunt position is in the flow direction at the downstream end of the flow path. A game machine C11 characterized in that it is an inner wall on an extension line of.

According to the game machine C11, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines C2 to C10, the sorting means is formed to be able to appear and disappear with respect to the downstream passage or the first branch passage, Since it is the inner wall on the extension line of the downstream end of the passage in the flow direction, the distribution means can be protruded at a position close to the game balls flowing down from the downstream end of the flow passage. Therefore,
It is possible to shorten the time required from when the distributing means is started to protrude into the downstream passage or the first branch passage to when the game balls can be distributed. As a result, switching of distribution destinations by the distribution means can be performed more reliably.

In the gaming machine C11, the distribution means projects into the flow passage or the first branch passage to distribute game balls flowing down the flow passage to the second branch passage. A gaming machine C12 characterized in that the projecting direction of the means is set to the upstream end of the second branch passage.

According to the gaming machine C12, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C11, the sorting means protrudes into the downstream passage or the first branch passage, thereby sorting the game balls flowing down the downstream passage to the second branch passage. Since the projecting direction of the distribution means is set in the direction pointing to the upstream end of the second branch passage, when the game ball flowing down the flow-down passage comes into contact with the distribution means in the middle of the projecting operation, can push such a game ball into the second branch passage along with the projecting action of the sorting means. As a result, the distribution to the second branch passage can be performed more reliably.

In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C12, the first branch passage is formed downwardly inclined toward the downstream, and the inner wall on the lower side in the gravitational direction is formed so that the game ball can roll thereon. The game machine C13 is characterized in that the changing means is formed so as to be able to protrude into the first branch passage from the inner wall on the lower side in the direction of gravity.

According to the game machine C13, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines C1 to C12, the first branch passage is formed downwardly inclined toward the downstream, and the inner wall on the lower side in the direction of gravity allows the game ball to pass through. Since it is formed to be rollable and the flowing state changing means is formed so as to be able to protrude into and out of the first branch passage from the inner wall on the lower side in the direction of gravity, the game is played after the flowing state changing means starts to protrude into the first branch passage. It is possible to shorten the time required to reach a state in which the downflow of the ball can be regulated. As a result, the distribution destination of the distribution means is switched from the second branch passage to the first branch passage, and when the game ball is distributed to the first branch passage, the flow state changing means is used to regulate the flow of the game ball. Protrusion can be easily made in time.

In any one of the game machines C1 to C13, the flowing-down state changing means is formed so as to be able to appear and withdraw with respect to the first branch passage, and at least in a state in which it protrudes to the first branch passage to the maximum, it moves in the projecting direction. A game machine C14 characterized in that a force component is applied from a game ball to said flowing state changing means.

According to the game machine C14, in any one of the game machines C1 to C13, the flowing-down state changing means is formed so as to be able to appear and withdraw with respect to the first branch passage, and at least when it protrudes to the first branch passage to the maximum, it protrudes. Since the force component in the direction of movement is applied from the game ball to the flowing-down state changing means, when the game ball distributed to the first branch passage is restricted from flowing down, the impact caused by the collision of the game ball causes the game ball to flow down. It is possible to suppress the immersion of the state changing means. Therefore, it is possible to easily regulate the flow of the game ball.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking the Lower Displacement Unit 400 as an Example>
A game machine comprising a base member, a base member displaceably arranged on one side of the base member, and a displacement member arranged displaceably on the base member, wherein the base member accompanies displacement of the displacement member. The game machine D1 is characterized by comprising suppressing means for suppressing reaction of members.

Here, a game machine is known that includes a base member, a base member displaceably arranged on one side of the base member, and a displacement member displaceably arranged on the base member (for example, , JP 2015-029849). According to this gaming machine, in addition to the effect of displacing the base member between a protruding position where the base member protrudes into the game area and is visible to the player, and a retracted position where it retreats from the game area, the base member is displaced. In the state of being arranged at the extended position, an effect of displacing the displacement member can be performed.

However, in the above-described conventional game machine, one side of the base member is displaceably disposed on the base member, so when the displacement member is displaced, the base member rattles with respect to the base member with the one side as the fulcrum. There is a problem that it is easy to generate

On the other hand, according to the game machine D1, since the suppressing means for suppressing the reaction of the base member due to the displacement of the displacement member is provided, the occurrence of looseness of the base member with respect to the base member when the displacement member is displaced is suppressed. can do.

The reaction force associated with the displacement of the displacement member may be, for example, the force generated by the change in the center of gravity associated with the displacement of the displacement member, or the action of the inertial force associated with the increase or decrease in displacement speed (change in acceleration) of the displacement member. , and those generated with the reaction force when the displacement member is displaced and the game ball is ejected are exemplified.

In the game machine D1, the suppressing means includes an arrangement member displaceably arranged on the base member, the displacement member is formed so as to be capable of holding and ejecting a game ball, and the arrangement member is A game machine D characterized by being formed so as to be displaceable when a game ball is ejected from the displacement member.
2.

According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effects of the game machine D1, the suppressing means includes an arrangement member displaceably arranged on the base member, and the displacement member is formed so as to be capable of holding and ejecting game balls. is,
Since the disposing member is formed to be displaceable when the game ball is ejected from the displacing member, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of rattling of the base member with respect to the base member. That is, when a game ball is shot from the displacement member, the position of the center of gravity of the base member is changed by the weight of the game ball. When a configuration in which the mounting member is displaced is adopted, it is possible to suppress rattling of the base member due to a change in the position of the center of gravity. Also, when a game ball is shot from the displacement member, the base member receives a reaction accompanying the shooting of the game ball. When employed, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of rattling of the base member due to the reaction.

The game machine D3 is characterized in that, in the game machine D1 or D2, when the displacement member is displaced, a reverse member is displaced having at least a displacement component in a direction opposite to the displacement direction of the displacement member.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effects of the game machine D1 or D2, when the displacement member is displaced, a reverse member is displaced having at least a displacement component in the direction opposite to the displacement direction of the displacement member. Since it is provided, it is possible to reduce the change in the position of the center of gravity of the base member due to the displacement of the displacement member by the displacement of the reverse member. As a result, rattling of the base member due to changes in the position of the center of gravity can be suppressed.

If the displacement of the opposite member is started when the displacement of the displacement member is started, at least a part of the inertial forces of both can be canceled out. As a result, rattling of the base member when the displacement member is displaced from the stopped state can be easily suppressed.

The game machine D2 or D3 is characterized by comprising a transmission mechanism for transmitting the displacement of the displacement member to the arrangement member or (and) the reverse member to displace the arrangement member or (and) the reverse member. game machine D4.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effects of the game machine D2 or D3, a transmission mechanism for transmitting the displacement of the displacement member to the arrangement member or (and) the reverse member to displace the arrangement member or (and) the reverse member , there is no need to provide separate drive means for displacing the disposing member and/or the reverse member. That is, the driving means for displacing the displacement member is provided on the disposing member or (and)
It can also be used as driving means for displacing the reverse member. Therefore, the weight of the base member can be reduced accordingly, and rattling can be easily suppressed.

In addition, since the arrangement or (and) the inverse member can be displaced in mechanical synchronization with the displacement of the displacement member, for example, the position of the displacement member can be detected by a sensor device, and the position of the displacement member can be arranged according to the detection result. It is possible to eliminate the need for control to drive the member and/or the reverse member by the driving means, thereby reducing the product cost and increasing the reliability of the displacement operation of the displacement member and/or the reverse member with respect to the displacement member. can be ensured.

In any one of the game machines D1 to D4, the displacement member has a mode in which displacement starts from a second position, and a mode in which displacement starts from a first position closer to one side of the base member than the second position. , and at least in a state where the base member is arranged at a predetermined position with respect to the base member, the game machine D5 starts to be displaced from the first position.

Here, when the displacement member is displaced from the stopped state, the change in acceleration becomes maximum, so
The base member is likely to rattle due to the influence of inertial force.

On the other hand, according to the game machine D5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines D1 to D4, the displacement member has a mode in which the displacement starts from the second position, and a state in which at least the base member is arranged at a predetermined position with respect to the base member (for example, the base member protrudes into the game area and is displaced from the player In the visible overhang position), the displacement starts from the first position, so rattling of the base member can be suppressed. That is, the first position is closer to one side of the base member than the second position. The member can be brought closer to the fulcrum at which the member rattles with respect to the base member, so that the base member is less likely to be affected by the inertial force when the displacement member is displaced from the stopped state. As a result, rattling of the base member can be easily suppressed.

A gaming machine D5 comprising a pinion gear arranged on the base member and a rack member having a rack gear meshed with the pinion gear, wherein the displacement member is arranged on the rack member. Machine D6.

According to the game machine D6, in addition to the effects of the game machine D5, the pinion gear arranged on the base member and the rack member formed with the rack gear meshing with the pinion gear are provided, and the rack member is provided with the displacement member. is disposed, when starting the displacement of the displacement member from the first position, not only the weight of the rack member but also the weight of the rack member is applied to one side of the base member (the base member It can be kept close to the fulcrum when rattling). As a result, rattling of the base member when the displacement member is displaced from the stopped state can be easily suppressed.

In the gaming machine D6, a gaming machine D7 is characterized in that a displacement direction when the displacement member starts to be displaced from the first position is a direction away from one side of the base member.

According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D6, the displacement direction when the displacement member starts to be displaced from the first position is the direction away from one side of the base member. , the rack member can be brought closer to one side of the base member. That is, in order for the displacement member (rack member) to be displaced in a direction away from one side of the base member, the rack member should be based on the portion on the rack gear side with which the pinion gear meshes after the displacement of the displacement member is started. It will be directed to one side of the member. Therefore, the weight of the rack member can be kept closer to one side of the base member (the fulcrum when the base member rattles with respect to the base member). It is possible to easily suppress rattling of the base member.

In any one of game machines D1 to D7, a support structure that supports one side of the base member on the base member so as to be displaceable, and a drive mechanism that drives the base member supported by the support structure, The displacement member is formed so as to be capable of holding and ejecting a game ball, and the drive mechanism is restricting means for restricting the displacement of the base member in the direction of reaction when the game ball is ejected from the displacement member. A gaming machine D8 characterized by comprising:

According to the game machine D8, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines D1 to D7, the support structure that displaceably supports one side of the base member on the base member and the base member supported by the support structure are driven. The displacement member is formed so as to be capable of holding and ejecting the game ball, and the drive mechanism is configured to displace the base member in the direction of reaction when the game ball is ejected from the displacement member. Since the regulating means for regulating is provided, displacement of the base member with respect to the base member due to the reaction can be suppressed. As a result, rattling of the base member can be suppressed.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Using the Rotation Unit 700 as an Example>
In a game machine having a rotary member which is rotatably formed and whose outer peripheral surface is arranged so as to be visible to a player, a displacement member is provided which is displaceably arranged on the outer peripheral surface of the rotary member. Characteristic game machine E1.

Here, there is known a game machine provided with a spinning drum member which is rotatably formed and whose outer peripheral surface is arranged so as to be visible to the player (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-119140). In this game machine, the spinning drum member is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the display (pattern) on the outer peripheral surface is made visible to the player while rotating the spinning drum member or stopping the spinning drum member. However, in the above-described conventional game machine, it is only possible to create an effect mode in which the display on the outer peripheral surface is visually recognized by the player as the reel member rotates or stops. was insufficient.

On the other hand, according to the game machine E1, since the displacement member is provided displaceably on the outer peripheral surface of the spinning drum member, the display of the outer peripheral surface is displayed to the player as the spinning drum member rotates or stops. In addition to the visually recognizable presentation mode, the presentation mode in which the displacement member is displaced can be formed, so that the presentation mode can be changed accordingly, and the presentation effect can be enhanced.

It should be noted that the rotary drum member does not need to have a circular cross-sectional shape taken along a plane perpendicular to its axis of rotation, and may have a polygonal shape, an elliptical shape, or a combination thereof. Therefore, the outer peripheral surface of the drum member may not be a peripheral surface, but may be a flat surface, a curved surface, or a combination thereof.

In the gaming machine E1, the displacement member is formed to be displaceable between at least a first position and a second position, and at the first position, a part of the outer peripheral surface of the reel member is formed by the displacement member. A game machine E2, wherein at least a portion of the displacement member protrudes radially outward of the rotary member at the second position.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1, when the displacement member is displaced to the first position, a part of the outer peripheral surface of the rotation drum member is formed by the displacement member. The outer shape can be made smaller, and the space required for rotating the drum member can be made smaller accordingly. On the other hand, when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, at least a part of the displacement member protrudes radially outward of the reel member, so that the displacement of the displacement member can be easily visually recognized by the player, resulting in a presentation effect. can increase Further, for example, by rotating the rotary member while the displacement member is arranged at the first position, and by arranging (displacing) the displacement member at the second position when the rotation of the rotary member is stopped, A portion (displacement member) visually recognized as the outer peripheral surface of the drum member can be formed to protrude outward in the radial direction of the drum member, thereby increasing interest.

In the game machine E2, light emitting means for emitting light is provided, the spinning drum member is formed with an internal space, the light emitting means is arranged in the internal space, and the displacement member is the second light emitting means.
A gaming machine E3 characterized in that when displaced to the position, the outer peripheral surface of the spinning drum member is opened, and the internal space communicates with the outside.

According to the game machine E3, in addition to the effects of the game machine E2, it has a light emitting means for emitting light,
The drum member is formed with an internal space, and a light emitting means is disposed in the internal space,
When the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the outer peripheral surface of the rotating drum member is opened and the internal space is communicated with the outside. By being displaced to one position, the emission to the outside can be blocked. As a result, the performance effect can be enhanced.

A gaming machine E4 comprising any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, comprising driving means for generating a driving force, and transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the reel member and the displacement member. .

Here, in order to form the rotary member rotatably and displaceably displace the displacement member on the rotary member, driving means is required for each of the rotary member and the displacement member, which increases the product cost. increase. Further, if the drive means for displacing the displacement member is mounted on the rotary member, the weight of the rotary member increases, making it difficult to smoothly start or stop the rotation of the rotary member.

On the other hand, according to the game machine E4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines E1 to E3, a driving means for generating a driving force and the driving force of the driving means are applied to the reel member and the displacement member. Since the transmission means for transmitting is provided, it is possible to perform both the rotation of the rotary member and the displacement of the displacement member by using one driving means. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the product cost. Further, since it is not necessary to mount a driving means for displacing the displacement member on the rotating drum member, the weight of the rotating drum member can be reduced, and the rotation of the rotating drum member can be smoothly started or stopped.

In the gaming machine E4, the drive means is formed to be capable of generating a rotational driving force, and the transmission means includes rotation-side transmission means for transmitting the rotational driving force of the drive means to the rotating drum member; displacement-side transmission means for transmitting the rotational driving force to the displacement member; and transmission of the rotational driving force to either the rotation-side transmission means or the displacement-side transmission means in accordance with the direction of rotation of the rotational driving force of the driving means. A game machine E5 characterized by comprising a one-way clutch mechanism for interrupting transmission to the other side.

According to the game machine E5, in addition to the effects of the game machine E4, the driving means is formed to be capable of generating a rotational driving force, and the transmission means is a rotation side transmission for transmitting the rotational driving force of the driving means to the reel member. means, displacement-side transmission means for transmitting the rotational driving force of the driving means to the displacement member, and transmission of the rotational driving force to either the rotation-side transmission means or the displacement-side transmission means in accordance with the direction of rotation of the rotational driving force of the driving means. In addition, since the one-way clutch mechanism is provided to block transmission to the other side, it is possible to switch the driven object (rotary member or displacement member) to be driven by the rotational driving force simply by switching the rotational direction of the driving means. That is, depending on the direction of rotation of the driving means, the rotation of the drum member and the stoppage of the rotation thereof and the displacement of the displacement member and the stoppage of the displacement thereof can be switched. It can be simplified.

In the gaming machine E5, the rotation-side transmission means includes a gear train forming part or all of a transmission path for transmitting the rotational driving force of the driving means to the rotary drum member, and one gear in the gear train. A gaming machine E6 characterized by comprising a meshing load gear.

Here, in a structure that uses a one-way clutch mechanism to switch the driven object (rotary member or displacement member) according to the rotation direction of the driving means, when the transmission of the driving force from the driving means is interrupted, It becomes free to rotate or displace in the direction it was driven by the driving force. Therefore, for example, when the driven object of the driving means is switched from the rotating drum member to the displacement member, and the transmission of the driving force is cut off, the rotating drum member becomes rotatable and continues to rotate (rotate) due to the inertial force. There is a risk that it will be

On the other hand, according to the game machine E6, in addition to the effects of the game machine E5, the rotation-side transmission means has a gear train forming part or all of the transmission path for transmitting the rotational driving force of the drive means to the rotary member. and a load gear that meshes with one of the gear trains. Therefore, even if the transmission of the rotational driving force from the driving means is interrupted, the load (resistance ) can be used to suppress the continuation of the rotation of the drum member.

The gaming machine E7, wherein the game machine E5 or E6 comprises a reverse rotation restricting means for restricting rotation of the rotary member in a direction opposite to a direction in which the rotary member is rotated by the rotational driving force of the driving means. .

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E5 or E6, reverse rotation restricting means for restricting rotation of the rotary member in the direction opposite to the direction in which it is rotated by the rotational driving force of the driving means is provided. Since it is provided, for example, it is possible to suppress reverse rotation of the reel member due to deviation of the position of the center of gravity of the reel member, collision of a game ball, or the like.

In the game machine E2 or E3, the rotating drum member is formed to have an internal space, and when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the outer peripheral surface of the rotating drum member is opened to open the internal space. is connected to the game area.

According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E2 or E3, the rotary member is formed to have an internal space, and when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the outer peripheral surface of the rotary member is released,
Since the internal space communicates with the game area, the game balls flowing down the game area can flow into the internal space of the spinning drum member, or the game balls in the internal space of the spinning drum member can flow out to the game area. . Further, when the displacement member is displaced to the first position, the outer peripheral surface of the drum member is closed, thereby blocking the inflow and outflow of game balls between the internal space and the game area. As a result, the performance effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine E8, one side of the displacement member is rotatably supported by the rotary drum member, and when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the other side opposite to the one side is the game machine. A game machine E9 characterized by being projected to an area.

According to the game machine E9, in addition to the effects of the game machine E8, one side of the displacement member is rotatably pivotally supported by the rotary drum member, and when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the one side and the opposite side Since the other side is projected to the game area, the game ball flowing down the game area can be received by the upper surface of the displacement member. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the game area can be easily made to flow into the internal space of the reel member by using the displacement member.

In the game machine E9, the game machine E10 is characterized in that when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the upper surface thereof is inclined downward from the other side toward the one side.

According to the game machine E10, in addition to the effects of the game machine E9, the upper surface of the displacement member is inclined downward from the other side to the one side when displaced to the second position, so that the game area is expanded. After receiving the dropped game ball on the upper surface of the displacement member, the received game ball can be guided (rolled) along the downward slope of the upper surface of the displacement member to the internal space of the rotating drum member. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the game area can be easily made to flow into the internal space of the reel member by using the displacement member.

A game machine E11 in the game machine E9 or E10, further comprising displacement setting means for restricting or permitting the displacement of the displacement member in accordance with the rotational position of the reel member.

According to the gaming machine E11, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E9 or E10, the displacement setting means for restricting or permitting the displacement of the displacement member according to the rotational position of the reel member is provided. Interference with other members around the drum member can be suppressed.

In any one of the game machines E9 to E11, a rotation restricting means for restricting rotation of the reel member is provided, and the rotation restricting member is such that the displacement member is displaced to the second position, and the other side of the displacement member is displaced to the second position. A gaming machine E12 characterized in that the rotation of the spinning drum member is regulated when the game machine extends into the game area.

According to the game machine E12, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines E9 to E11, it is provided with rotation restricting means for restricting the rotation of the reel member, and the rotation restricting member is displaced to the second position. When the other side of the displacement member protrudes into the game area, the rotation of the rotating drum member is regulated, so that the rotating drum member is rotated in a state in which the displacing member is projected, and is positioned on the rotation trajectory. Interference of the displacement member with other members can be suppressed. In addition, it is possible to suppress rotation of the rotating drum member due to the load acting when the displacement member catches the game ball flowing down the game area and the weight of the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the displacement member.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Using the Rotation Unit 700 as an Example>
In a game machine provided with a spinning drum member which is rotatably formed and whose outer peripheral surface is arranged so as to be visible to a player, the spinning drum member has an internal space formed therein and an internal space which is visible to the outside. and a communication port through which a game ball can pass.

Here, there is known a game machine provided with a spinning drum member which is rotatably formed and whose outer peripheral surface is arranged so as to be visible to the player (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-119140). According to this game machine, the spinning drum member is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the display (pattern) on the outer peripheral surface is made visible to the player while rotating the spinning drum member or stopping the spinning drum member. be able to. however,
In the above-described conventional game machine, there is a problem that the spinning drum member is used only as a member for holding a display on its outer peripheral surface for the player to see, and the use of the spinning drum member is insufficient.
That is, the reel member is formed relatively large because it is necessary to maintain a display that can be visually recognized by the player. Therefore, while the space occupied by the drum member increases, the portion other than the outer peripheral surface is not utilized.

On the other hand, according to the game machine F1, the spinning drum member has an internal space formed therein and a communication port that communicates the internal space with the outside and is formed so that a game ball can pass therethrough. , the game ball flowing down the game area can flow into or out of the internal space through the communication port. Therefore, the internal space of the spinning drum member, which is a dead space, can be made to function as a storage space for game balls or a ball-throwing passage, and the spinning drum member can be utilized accordingly.

In addition, the communication port may be formed only at one place of the rotating drum member, or may be formed at two or more places. When the communication port is formed only in one place, the communication port is formed in the outer peripheral surface of the rotary member. As a result, the position of the communication port can be moved up and down according to the rotational position of the drum member, and the game ball is caused to flow into or out of the internal space through the communication port (the communication port faces upward). At the same time, the game balls can flow into the internal space, and the game balls in the internal space can flow out when the communication port faces downward.

Also, the rotary drum member does not need to have a circular cross-sectional shape taken along a plane perpendicular to its axis of rotation, and may have a polygonal shape, an elliptical shape, or a combination thereof. Therefore, the outer peripheral surface of the drum member may not be a peripheral surface, but may be a flat surface, a curved surface, or a combination thereof.

A gaming machine F2 characterized in that, in the gaming machine F1, the communication port comprises a first communication port and a second communication port formed at a position different from the first communication port.

According to the game machine F2, in addition to the effects of the game machine F1, the communication port includes the first communication port and the second communication port formed at a position different from the first communication port. One of the communication port and the second communication port is used as an inflow port for inflowing game balls from the outside into the internal space, and the other of the first communication port and the second communication port is used as an outflow port for outflowing game balls from the internal space to the outside. can be In other words, the spinning drum member can be used as a ball-throwing path for game balls without rotating the spinning drum member (maintaining it in a stopped state). It should be noted that, while the drum member is being rotated, the drum member may be utilized as a ball feeding passage.

In the gaming machine F2, the first communication port is formed in the outer peripheral surface of the spinning drum member and is formed as an inflow port for allowing game balls flowing down the game area to flow into the internal space, and the second communication port is A game machine F3, characterized in that it is formed in an end face of the rotary drum member in the rotation axis direction, and is formed as an outflow port through which game balls flow out from the internal space to a game area.

According to the game machine F3, in addition to the effects of the game machine F2, the first communication port is formed on the outer peripheral surface of the reel member and is formed as an inlet for allowing the game balls flowing down the game area to flow into the internal space. The second communication port is formed in the end face of the rotating drum member in the direction of the rotating shaft and is formed as an outflow port through which the game balls flow out from the internal space to the game area. The inflow can be easily visually recognized by the player, and the game ball can be discharged while the spinning drum member is maintained in a stopped state.

That is, the drum member has an outer peripheral surface arranged so that it can be visually recognized by the player, and the outer peripheral surface is provided with
Since the first communication port (inflow port) is formed, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the inflow of the game ball. On the other hand, when the second communication port is formed on the outer peripheral surface of the drum member, when the drum member is displaced to a rotational position in which the communication port is upward, the game ball cannot flow out from the internal space. Since the second communication port (outflow port) is formed in the end face of the rotating drum member in the direction of the rotating shaft, it is possible to form a state in which the game ball can flow out from the internal space regardless of the rotating position of the rotating drum member.

In any one of the game machines F1 to F3, a displacement member is provided displaceably on the outer peripheral surface of the reel member, and when the displacement member is displaced to a first position, the communication port is displaced. A gaming machine F4 characterized in that the communication port is shielded by a member, and the communication port is opened when the displacement member is displaced to the second position.

According to the game machine F4, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines F1 to F3, a displacement member is provided displaceably on the outer peripheral surface of the reel member, and the displacement member is displaced to the first position. Then, the communication port is blocked by the displacement member, and when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the communication port is opened. You can switch.

In the game machine F4, the communication port is formed in the outer peripheral surface of the drum member, one side of the displacement member is rotatably supported by the drum member, and the displacement member is at the second position. The game machine F5 is characterized in that, when displaced, the other side opposite to the one side projects into the game area.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E4, one side of the displacement member is rotatably pivotally supported by the drum member, and when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the displacement member moves to the opposite side to the one side. Since the other side is projected to the game area, the game ball flowing down the game area can be received by the upper surface of the displacement member. Therefore, for example, when the communication port is formed as an inflow port, it is possible to make it easier for the game ball flowing down the game area to flow into the internal space of the reel member using the displacement member.

In the gaming machine F5, the gaming machine F6 is characterized in that one side of the displacement member is positioned forward of the other side in the rotational direction of the rotary member.

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F5, one side of the displacement member is positioned forward of the other side in the rotation direction of the rotary member, so that when the rotary member is rotated, Even if the displacement member interferes with the members arranged around the rotating drum member, the force generated by such interference can act in the direction of closing the displacement member (displacing it to the first position). That is, when the rotating drum member rotates, the displacement member interferes with other members and protrudes (displaced to the second position).
can be suppressed. In addition, it is possible to prevent the displacement member from engaging with another member and hindering the rotation of the rotary member.

In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F6, a base member on which the spinning drum member is rotatably disposed; A gaming machine F7 characterized by comprising a fixed member which is non-rotatable with respect to the game machine F7.

According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F6, the base member on which the spinning drum member is rotatably disposed, and the inner space of the spinning drum member supported by the base member Since it is provided with a fixed member that is arranged in and is non-rotatable with respect to the rotating drum member, the game ball that has flowed into the internal space is held by the fixed member or rolled on the fixed member toward the outflow port. ,
With the rotation of the rotary drum member, it is possible to suppress the game ball from rampaging in the internal space or from staying in the internal space due to hindrance of rolling of the game ball.

A game machine F8 is characterized in that, in any one of the game machines F4 to F6, it comprises displacement setting means for restricting or permitting the displacement of the displacement member in accordance with the rotational position of the rotary member.

According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines F4 to F6, the displacement setting means for restricting or permitting the displacement of the displacement member according to the rotational position of the rotary member is provided.
It is possible to suppress the displacement member displaced to the position from interfering with other members around the drum member.

In the gaming machine F5 or F6, a rotation restricting means for restricting rotation of the reel member is provided, and the rotation restricting member is such that the displacement member is displaced to the second position and the other side of the displacement member is moved to the game area. A game machine F9 is characterized in that the rotation of the reel member is restricted when it is extended.

According to the gaming machine F9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F5 or F6, it is provided with rotation restricting means for restricting the rotation of the reel member. When the other side protrudes into the game area, the rotation of the rotating drum member is regulated, so that the rotating drum member is rotated in a state in which the displacement member protrudes, and other members positioned on the rotation trajectory are rotated. interference of the displacement member with the In addition, it is possible to suppress rotation of the rotating drum member due to the load acting when the displacement member catches the game ball flowing down the game area and the weight of the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the displacement member.

In the gaming machine F3, a light emitting means that is capable of emitting light and is arranged in the internal space of the spinning drum member, and the second communication port that is an end face of the spinning drum member in the rotation axis direction are formed. A gaming machine F10 comprising an end face formed on the opposite side and an opening formed on the opposite end face, and an electrical connection line of the light emitting means is wired through the opening.

According to the game machine F10, in addition to the effects of the game machine F3, an opening is formed in the end surface of the rotary member in the direction of the rotation axis, which is opposite to the end surface where the second communication port is formed. Since the electrical connection line of the light emitting means is wired through the opening, it is possible to easily secure the space that can be used for each of the second communication port and the opening. As a result, the game ball can be smoothly discharged through the second communication port, and the wiring work to the opening of the electrical connection line can be easily performed. In addition, since the second communication port and the opening can be spaced as far as possible, the internal space can be
Interference between the game ball rolling to the communication port and the electrical connection line can be easily suppressed.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Using the Rotation Unit 700 as an Example>
A first member and a second member that are formed to be displaceable, wherein the first member covers at least a portion of the second member in an invisible manner; In a game machine formed to be displaceable between a retracted position that reduces an area that covers the second member invisibly, the first member is displaced to the retracted position, and the second member A game machine G1 characterized in that it is formed so as to be able to regulate the displacement of.

Here, a displaceable first member and a second member are provided, the first member covering at least a portion of the second member invisibly, and a state arranged at the covering position. A game machine is known that is formed to be displaceable between a retracted position that reduces the area that covers the second member invisibly than the second member (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-029849). According to this gaming machine, the first
By displacing the first member to the retracted position from a state in which the member is arranged at the covering position and the second member is invisible to the player, the second member is exposed and visually recognized by the player. be able to.

However, in the conventional game machine described above, since the second member is formed to be displaceable, when the first member is displaced to the retracted position and the second member is exposed, the second member is displaced. There is a risk that Therefore, there is a problem that the player cannot visually recognize the second member in a proper state, and the presentation effect is lowered.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, the first member is displaced to the retracted position,
Since the displacement of the second member can be regulated, the second member can be visually recognized by the player in an appropriate state, and the performance effect can be ensured. That is, when performing an effect of displacing the first member to the retracted position and exposing the second member, the displacement of the first member to the retracted position, which is unavoidable for the effect, is performed by moving the second member to the retracted position. Used as a means of regulating displacement. Therefore, it is not necessary to separately provide a mechanism for restricting the displacement of the second member or perform control, and the structure can be simplified accordingly.

In the game machine G1, the game machine G2 is characterized in that the second member is formed to be rotatable and the center of gravity of the second member is eccentric from the center of rotation.

According to the game machine G2, in addition to the effects of the game machine G1, the second member is formed rotatably and the center of gravity is eccentric from the center of rotation, so the degree of freedom in designing the second member is increased. can increase That is, the second member does not need to have a shape in which the center of gravity is located at the center of rotation, and for example, a shape asymmetrical with respect to the rotation axis can be adopted, so that the presentation effect of the second member can be enhanced. . On the other hand, if the center of gravity of the second member is eccentric in this way, the second member may be rotated (rotated) around the center of rotation by its own weight. Therefore, the configuration in which the first member displaced to the retracted position is formed so as to be capable of regulating the displacement of the second member is particularly effective, thereby allowing the player to visually recognize the second member in an appropriate state. It is possible to ensure the performance effect.

The game machine G1 or G2 includes a displacement member displaceably disposed on the second member,
The game machine G3 is characterized in that the displacement member is formed so as to be displaceable in a state in which at least the first member is displaced to the retracted position.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G1 or G2, a displacement member disposed displaceably on the second member is provided, and at least the first member of the displacement member is displaced to the retracted position. Therefore, when the first member is displaced to the retracted position and the second member is exposed, the presentation effect can be enhanced by further displacing the displacement member. can be done. On the other hand, if the displacement member is displaced when the second member is exposed, the position of the center of gravity may move along with the displacement, causing the second member to rotate (rotate). Therefore, the configuration in which the first member displaced to the retracted position is formed so as to be capable of regulating the displacement of the second member is particularly effective, thereby allowing the player to visually recognize the second member in an appropriate state. It is possible to ensure the performance effect.

In the gaming machine G3, the second member has an outer peripheral surface thereof arranged so as to be visible to the player, and the displacement member has one side rotatably supported by the outer peripheral surface of the second member, and the one side A gaming machine G4 characterized in that the other side opposite to is formed so as to be able to protrude into the game area.

According to the game machine G4, in addition to the effects of the game machine G3, the outer peripheral surface of the second member is arranged so that the player can see it, and one side of the displacement member is rotatable on the outer peripheral surface of the second member. pivoted on
Since the other side opposite to the one side is formed so as to be able to protrude into the game area, the game ball flowing down the game area can be received by the upper surface of the displacement member. Therefore, for example, when the inflow port of the game ball is formed in the second member, it is possible to facilitate the flow of the game ball flowing down the game area into the inflow port by using the displacement member. . In this case, if the game ball flowing down the game area is received by the displacement member, the second member may be rotated by the load acting at that time or the weight of the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the displacement member. Therefore, the configuration in which the first member displaced to the retracted position is formed so as to be able to regulate the displacement of the second member is particularly effective, thereby causing the displacement member to protrude at a predetermined position in the game area. can be easily maintained.

In the gaming machine G4, the first member is arranged in the game area facing the outer peripheral surface of the second member at the covering position, and outside the game area at the retracted position. A gaming machine G5 characterized by being arranged.

According to the game machine G5, in addition to the effects of the game machine G4, the first member is arranged in the game area while facing the outer peripheral surface of the second member in the covering position, so that the game flows down the game area. It is possible to prevent the ball from colliding with the second member and rotating the second member. In particular, when the rotation position of the second member is a rotation position that directs the displacement member toward the game area, the game ball flowing down the game area collides with the displacement member, and the displacement member is released (tension issued) can be suppressed.

In addition, since the first member is arranged outside the area of the game area at the retracted position, the displacement of the first member to the retracted position ensures a space for the displacement member to protrude into the game area. . Therefore, the outer peripheral surface of the second member can be brought closer to the game area side (player side) by that amount, making it easier for the player to visually recognize the displacement member.

In the game machine G5, the first member is rotatable about a rotation axis substantially parallel to the rotation axis of the second member, and is shaped like a plate curved along the outer peripheral surface of the second member. A game machine G6 characterized by:

According to the game machine G6, in addition to the effects of the game machine G5, the first member is formed rotatably around the rotation axis substantially parallel to the rotation axis of the second member, and the outer peripheral surface of the second member Since it is formed in a plate-like shape that curves along the .theta. Therefore, the space for arranging other members can be secured accordingly.
In addition, by forming the first member in such a curved manner, the game ball flowing down the game area is
It is possible to prevent the liquid from being retained on the first member arranged at the covering position, and allow the liquid to smoothly flow down.

A gaming machine G7 in any one of the gaming machines G3 to G6, characterized by comprising driving means for generating a driving force and transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the second member and the displacement member. .

Here, in order to form the second member rotatably and displaceably displace the displacement member on the second member, driving means is required for each of the second member and the displacement member, which increases the product cost. increase. Further, when the driving means for displacing the displacement member is mounted on the second member, the second
Since the weight of the member increases, it becomes difficult to smoothly start or stop the rotation of the second member.

On the other hand, according to the game machine G7, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines G3 to G6, a driving means for generating a driving force and the driving force of the driving means are applied to the second member and the displacement member. Since the transmission means for transmitting is provided, it is possible to perform both the rotation of the second member and the displacement of the displacement member by using one driving means. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the product cost. Moreover, since it is not necessary to mount the driving means for displacing the displacement member on the second member, the weight of the second member can be reduced, and the rotation of the second member can be smoothly started or stopped.

A gaming machine G8 in the gaming machine G7, further comprising coupling means for coupling the first member and the displacement member to link the displacement of the displacement member with the displacement of the first member.

According to the game machine G8, in addition to the effects of the game machine G7, the connection means for connecting the first member and the displacement member and interlocking the displacement of the displacement member with the displacement of the first member is provided. The driving means for displacing the first displacement member can also be used as the driving means for displacing the first displacement member.
In this case, when the displacement member and the first member are displaced by driving forces of separate driving means,
If a control failure occurs, the displacement member and the first member may interfere with each other. Interference with one member can be reliably suppressed.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Using the Rotation Unit 700 as an Example>
A game machine comprising driving means for generating a driving force, a displacement member displaced by the driving force of the driving means, and transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the displacement member, wherein the transmission means is , a first member, a second member located closer to the displacement member than the first member in the transmission path of the driving force, and an engaging member disposed between the first member and the second member; and when the first member is displaced in one direction with respect to the second member, the engaging member engages with the first member and the second member to transmit the driving force. and the second member is displaced in the one direction prior to the first member in a predetermined section of the displacement section of the displacement member.

A game machine is known which includes a driving means for generating a driving force, a displacement member displaced by the driving force of the driving means, and a transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the displacement member. (for example, JP-A-2015-029849). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the state of transmission of the driving force from the driving means to the displacement member by the transmission means is always constant. It is displaced at the displacement speed, and the displacement mode of such a displacement member cannot be changed. Therefore, there is a problem that the performance effect of the performance accompanying the displacement of the displacement member is insufficient.

The displacement speed of the displacement member can be changed by increasing or decreasing the driving speed of the driving means. In order to obtain the speed, it is necessary to arrange a sensor device for detecting the position of the displacement member, and to control the output of the driving means according to the detection result of the sensor device, which leads to an increase in product cost and control cost. . In addition, the structure and control become complicated, resulting in a decrease in reliability.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H1, the transmission means includes a first member, a second member positioned closer to the displacement member than the first member in the transmission path of the driving force, and the first member and the second member. and an engaging member disposed between the members, the engaging member engaging the first member and the second member when the first member is displaced in one direction with respect to the second member. As a result, the driving force is transmitted and the transmission of the driving force is cut off, and the second member is displaced in one direction ahead of the first member in a predetermined section of the displacement section of the displacement member. Therefore, regardless of the driving state of the driving means, the displacement speed of the displacement member in the predetermined section can be made faster than the displacement speed of the displacement member in other sections. Therefore, it is possible to change the displacement mode of the displacement member and enhance the effect of the presentation associated with the displacement of the displacement member.

Further, according to the game machine H1, regardless of the driving state of the driving means, the second member can be caused to precede the first member in one direction. The driving means can be driven at a constant driving speed, and in the middle of the displacement section of the displacement member (i.e.
There is no need to increase or decrease the drive speed of the drive means depending on the interval (predetermined or otherwise). As a result, the control can be simplified, the control cost can be reduced, and the operational reliability can be improved. Alternatively, the driving of the driving means can be stopped in a predetermined section, in which case energy consumption can be suppressed.

Further, according to the game machine H1, in the driving state in which the first member is displaced in the other direction with respect to the two members, the engagement of the engaging member is released and the transmission of the driving force is interrupted. The displacement member can be in a stopped state (non-driving state), and the driving force of the driving means in such a driving state is
It can be used as a driving force for driving other members. That is, by switching the driving direction of the driving means, the displacement member and the other member can be displaced.

The transmission means is formed so that when the first member is displaced in the other direction with respect to the two members, the engagement of the engaging member is released and the transmission of the driving force is interrupted. It may be something that is done.

In the gaming machine H1, the displacement member is rotatably formed, and its center of gravity position is eccentric from the center of rotation. A gaming machine H2 characterized in that it is formed to be operable in a displacing direction.

According to the game machine H2, in addition to the effects of the game machine H1, the displacement member is rotatably formed, the center of gravity of the displacement member is eccentric from the center of rotation, and the weight of the displacement member increases in a predetermined section. Since it is formed so as to be capable of displacing the two members in one direction, the weight of the displacement member can be used to displace the second member in one direction ahead of the first member. . That is, the displacement speed of the displacement member in a predetermined section can be made faster than the displacement speed of the displacement member in other sections. As a result, the displacement mode of the displacement member can be varied, and the effect of the presentation associated with the displacement of the displacement member can be enhanced.

For example, when the displacement member is formed so as to be capable of repeating 360-degree rotation about its rotation axis, the displacement speed (rotational speed) of the displacement member in a predetermined section is the same as that of the displacement member in other sections. A mode in which the displacement speed (rotational speed) is faster, that is, a rotation mode in which the rotational speed is increased or decreased during one rotation, can be repeatedly performed.

In the gaming machine H2, the transmission means includes a main body portion that is rotationally driven by the second member and a crank member that has a pin portion projecting from the main body portion and positioned eccentrically from the center of rotation of the main body portion; an arm member formed at one end thereof with a sliding groove through which the pin portion of the crank member is slidably inserted and having an intermediate portion rotatably supported thereon; A gaming machine H3 characterized by being connected to a member.

According to the game machine H3, in addition to the effects of the game machine H2, the transmission means includes the main body portion that is rotationally driven by the second member, and the transmission means that protrudes from the main body portion and is positioned eccentrically from the rotation center of the main body portion. Since it comprises a crank member having a pin portion, and an arm member having a slide groove formed on one end side through which the pin portion of the crank member is slidably inserted and an intermediate portion rotatably supported, By rotating the crank member by the second member and sliding the pin member along the slide groove, the other end side of the arm member can be reciprocated. In this case, since the other end of the arm member is connected to the displacement member, the displacement member can reciprocate between the first position and the second position in accordance with the reciprocating motion of the other end of the arm member. . Namely
The displacement direction of the displacement member can be switched without switching the driving direction of the driving means.

In the gaming machine H3, the displacement member, along with the reciprocating motion of the other end side of the arm member,
Reciprocated between a first position and a second position, and during the displacement from the first position to the second position and during the displacement from the second position to the first position. and the direction in which the weight of the displacement member acts on the second member is changed from the direction of displacing the second member in the other direction to the direction of displacing the second member in the one direction. Characterized game machine H4.

According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H3, the displacement member is reciprocated between the first position and the second position in accordance with the reciprocating motion of the other end of the arm member. second to
The direction in which the weight of the displacement member acts on the second member during the displacement to the second position and during the displacement from the second position to the first position causes the second member to move in the other direction. Since the direction of displacement is changed to the direction of displacing the second member in one direction, when the displacement member is reciprocated, regardless of which direction it is displaced, the displacement member is displaced from the middle of the displacement. Displacement speed can be increased. As a result, the displacement mode of the displacement member can be varied, and the effect of the presentation associated with the displacement of the displacement member can be enhanced.

For example, the displacement member is reciprocated between an overhanging position (first position) where the displacement member can be visually recognized by the player, and a retracted position (second position) where the overhanging position is retracted. In operation, when the displacement member is extended from the retracted position to the overhang position, the displacement member is moved at a constant displacement speed halfway, and the displacement speed of the displacement member is increased from the middle to vigorously move the displacement member. When retracting the displacement member from the overhanging position to the overhanging position, the displacement member is displaced at a constant displacement speed until the middle, and the displacement speed of the displacement member is increased from the middle. By doing so, the displacement member can be immediately retracted to the retracted position.

In the gaming machine H1, the displacement member is slidably displaceable, and is inclined downward in the direction of the slide displacement in the predetermined section, so that the weight of the displacement member moves the second member. A game machine H5 characterized by being formed to be operable in the direction of displacement in the one direction.

According to the game machine H5, in addition to the effects of the game machine H1, the displacement member is formed to be slidably displaceable, and is inclined downward in the direction of the slide displacement in a predetermined section, thereby increasing the weight of the displacement member. Since the second member is formed to act in the direction of displacing the second member in one direction, the weight of the displacement member is used to displace the second member in one direction ahead of the first member. be able to. That is, the displacement speed of the displacement member in a predetermined section can be made faster than the displacement speed of the displacement member in other sections. As a result, the displacement mode of the displacement member can be varied, and the effect of the presentation associated with the displacement of the displacement member can be enhanced.

A game machine H6 characterized in that, in any one of the game machines H2 to H5, the displacement member is formed so as to be capable of holding a game ball at least in the predetermined section.

According to the game machine H6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines H2 to H5, the displacement member is formed to be able to hold the game ball at least in a predetermined section, so that the displacement member holds the game ball. In this state, the weight of the displacement member as a whole can be increased by the weight of the game ball, and the displacement speed of the displacement member in a predetermined section can be increased. In addition, the weight of the displacement member as a whole is made different depending on whether the displacement member holds a game ball or not, or according to the number of game balls held. be able to. Thereby, the displacement speed of the displacement member can be varied in each case. As a result, the displacement mode of the displacement member can be varied, and the effect of the presentation associated with the displacement of the displacement member can be enhanced.

In any one of the game machines H2 to H6, the displacement member includes a receiving portion for receiving a game ball flowing down the game area, and at least in the predetermined section, when the receiving portion receives the game ball, the game ball is received by the receiving portion. A game machine H7 characterized in that a force acting on the displacement member from the second member can act in a direction of displacing the second member in the one direction.

According to the game machine H7, in any one of the game machines H2 to H6, the displacement member includes a receiving portion that receives the game ball flowing down the game area, and at least in a predetermined section, when the receiving portion receives the game ball Since the force acting on the displacement member from the game ball is formed to act in the direction of displacing the second member in one direction, when the receiving part receives the game ball, the kinetic energy of the game ball can be used to increase the displacement speed of the displacement member in a predetermined section. In addition, the force acting on the displacement member is made different depending on whether the receiving part is receiving the game ball, when it is not receiving the game ball, or according to the falling speed (magnitude of kinetic energy) of the game ball when receiving it. be able to. Thereby, the displacement speed of the displacement member can be varied in each case. As a result, the displacement mode of the displacement member can be varied, and the effect of the presentation associated with the displacement of the displacement member can be enhanced.

The game ball that flows down the game area is not limited to the game ball that moves along the direction of gravity on the front surface of the game board, but also includes the game ball that moves in a direction different from the direction of gravity. Game balls that move in a direction different from the direction of gravity include, for example, game balls that collide with nails, tulips, accessories, etc. and move in a direction different from the direction of gravity. A game ball that moves in a direction different from the direction of gravity is exemplified.

In the gaming machine H6 or H7, the transmission means comprises a gear train forming part or all of the transmission path of the driving force, and a load gear meshed with one gear of the gear train. A game machine H8 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine H8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H6 or H7, the transmission means includes a gear train forming part or all of the driving force transmission path and one gear in the gear train. Since the load gear is provided, when the game ball is held by the displacement member or received by the receiving part in a predetermined section, the weight or kinetic energy of the game ball is used. to displace the second member in one direction ahead of the first member (that is, the displacement speed of the displacement member in a predetermined section is made faster than the displacement speed of the displacement member in other sections), If the game ball is not held by the displacement member or the game ball is not received by the receiving portion, the load (resistance) when rotating the load gear is used to force the second member against the first member. Precise displacement in one direction (that is, increasing the displacement speed of the displacement member in a predetermined section) can be suppressed.

That is, when the game ball is not held by the displacement member or the receiving portion does not receive the game ball, the displacement speed of the displacement member in a predetermined section becomes faster than the displacement speed of the displacement member in other sections. Only when the game ball is held by the displacement member or the receiving part receives the game ball, the displacement speed of the displacement member in a predetermined section is set higher than the displacement speed of the displacement member in other sections It is possible to easily form a mode of speeding up.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking the Rear Case 300 as an Example>
A game machine comprising a game board, a back member arranged on the back side of the game board, and a fixed member arranged on the back member, wherein the game board is arranged between the back member and the game board. provided on the back side of the game board, a displacement member that can be operated from the outside of the opposing space from the game board to the back member, and the fixed member has a protrusion that engages with the displacement member A gaming machine I1, wherein the fixed member is arranged on the back member by engaging the projecting portion with the displacement member.

Conventionally, a game machine is known which includes a game board, a back member arranged on the back side of the game board, and a fixed member arranged on the back side of the back member (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2004). -3360
3). According to this gaming machine, the fixing member is fastened to the back member by the screw inserted from the front side of the back member. This prevents the fixing member from being removed from the back side of the game board.

However, in the conventional game machine, the step of arranging the fixing member on the back member and the step of fastening the fixing member to the back member are performed from the back side of the back member. and work from the front side of the back member. for that,
There is a problem that the number of work steps for arranging the fixing member on the back member is increased.

On the other hand, according to the game machine I1, the displacement member is disposed between the game board and the back member, and can be operated from the back side of the game board and the outside of the gap between the game board and the back member. (displacement member 310), the fixing member has a protrusion (engaged portion 322) that engages with the displacement member, the protrusion and the displacement member are engaged, and the fixing member is arranged on the back member. Since the fixing member is provided, the fixing member can be arranged in the rear case by a one-way operation from the rear side. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the step of turning around to the front side or reversing the back member after working from the back side. As a result, it is possible to reduce the number of work processes for arranging the fixing member on the back member.

A gaming machine I1 comprising a first member arranged between the game board and the back member facing each other, and wherein the displacement member is arranged on the back side of the first member. I2
.

Here, in recent gaming machines, the first member (
accessory devices, etc.) tend to be upsized. Therefore, in the above-described conventional game machine, when the enlarged first member is arranged in front of the fixing member or in a position close to the fixing member, the fixing member is fastened from the front side of the back member. In this case, the first member becomes an obstacle. Therefore, it has been difficult to fasten the fixing member with a screw that is inserted from the front side of the back member and dispose the fixing member on the back member.

On the other hand, according to the game machine I1, the first
A member is provided, and the displacement member is disposed on the back side of the first member, so that the first member is disposed between the game board and the back member. The displacement member can be manipulated from the outside of the to engage the displacement member and the fixed member. Therefore, the fixed member can be arranged on the back member without the displacement member being obstructed by the first member arranged between the game board and the back member.

In addition, since the displacement member is arranged between the rear member and the first member, the engaging portion between the displacement member and the fixed member can be arranged between the rear member and the first member. Therefore, access to the engagement portion between the displacement member and the fixed member can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the fixing member from being illegally disengaged from the displacement member and the fixing member (for example, replaced with an illegal fixing member).

A game machine I3 in the game machine I1 or I2, characterized in that the displacement member is slidably displaced on a plane parallel to the facing surface of the back member and the game board.

According to the game machine I3, in addition to the effects of the game machine I1 or I2, the displacement member is slidably displaced on a plane parallel to the facing surface of the back member and the game board. , the amount of displacement in the facing direction between the back member and the game board can be set to zero. Thereby, it is possible to secure a space for disposing the first member between the displacement member and the game board. the result,
The outer shape of the first member in the direction in which the back member and the game board face each other can be enlarged, and the degree of freedom in designing the first member can be improved.

In any one of the game machines I1 to I3, the back member is a box comprising a bottom wall portion facing the game board and a side wall portion erected from an edge of the bottom wall portion toward the game board. An opening is formed in either the bottom wall portion or the side wall portion, and the displacement member has an operating element inserted through the opening and protruding from the inside of the back member to the outside. A gaming machine I4 characterized by comprising:

According to the game machine I4, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines I1 to I3, the back member includes a bottom wall portion facing the game board and an edge portion of the bottom wall portion erected on the game board side. and an opening formed in either the bottom wall or the side wall. Since it has a protruding operator, operating the operator from the outside of the back member (the outside of the facing space from the game board to the back member),
The displacement member can be displaced. Therefore, even when the first member is arranged inside the back member (between the game board and the back member), the displacement member can be displaced without being hindered by the first member. .

The game machine I4 is characterized by comprising biasing means for biasing the displacement member in a direction to release the engagement with the fixed member when the engagement between the displacement member and the fixed member is released. A game machine I5.

According to the game machine I5, in addition to the effects of the game machine I4, in a state in which the engagement between the displacement member and the fixed member is released, the displacement member is biased in the direction of releasing the engagement with the fixed member. Since the biasing means is provided, the engagement of the displacement member with the fixing member can be prevented when the engagement between the displacement member and the fixing member is forgotten or when the engagement between the displacement member and the fixing member is incomplete. It can be displaced in the releasing direction. Therefore, the operator can determine whether or not the displacement member and the fixed member are properly engaged from the position at which the manipulator protruding to the outside of the back member is arranged. As a result, it is possible to prevent forgetting to engage the displacement member and the fixed member.

The urging means may have a form in which a spring, rubber, or the like is arranged between the displacement member and the back member to urge the displacement member in a direction to release the engagement with the fixed member, or the self-weight of the displacement member may be used. is applied to the displacement member in the direction of releasing the engagement with the fixed member.

The gaming machine I4 or I5 includes an outer frame formed in a frame shape capable of accommodating the game board and the back member, wherein the inner shape of the outer frame matches the outer shape of the game board and the back member when viewed from the front. A game machine characterized in that they are formed substantially identically, and in a state in which the displacement member and the fixed member are disengaged, the operator is arranged outside the opposing space between the game board and the back member. I6.

According to the game machine I6, in addition to the effects of the game machine I4 or I5, the outer frame is formed in a frame shape capable of accommodating the game board and the back member, and the inner shape of the outer frame is the same as the game board and the back member. When the displacement member and the fixed member are disengaged,
Since the manipulator is arranged on the outer side of the opposing space between the game board and the back member, when the displacement member and the fixed member are disengaged and the game board and the back member are accommodated in the outer frame, the outer frame can be brought into contact with the operator. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the game board and the back member from being housed in the outer frame. Therefore, if the operator forgets to dispose the fixing member on the back member or forgets to engage the displacement member and the fixing member, the operator can be reminded of the forgetting (abnormality). As a result, it is possible to prevent the game board from being housed in the outer frame in a state where the fixed member is forgotten to be arranged on the back member or the engagement between the displacement member and the fixed member is forgotten.

A gaming machine I7 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines I4 to I6, a suppressing means is provided for suppressing operation of the manipulator in a direction to release the engagement between the displacement member and the fixed member. .

According to the game machine I7, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines I4 to I6, it is provided with a suppressing means for suppressing the operation of the manipulator in the direction of releasing the engagement between the displacement member and the fixed member. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the displacement member from being displaced in the direction of releasing the engagement with the fixed member due to the operation of the operator. As a result, it is possible to suppress disengagement between the displacement member and the fixed member by using the manipulator.

As the suppressing means for suppressing the manipulator from being operated in the direction of releasing the engagement between the displacement member and the fixed member, the manipulator is pivotally supported so as to be idly rotatable in the direction of releasing the engagement. , a form in which the protruding tip of the manipulator protrudes toward the disengagement direction between the displacement member and the fixed member, and a form in which the manipulator is disposed between the displacement member and the fixed member. etc. are exemplified.

In any one of game machines I1 to I7, the displacement member includes an elastic piece that can be elastically deformed;
a first protrusion protruding from the elastic piece, the fixing member having an opening in the displacement region of the displacement member and provided with a recess recessed in the displacement direction of the displacement member; The accommodating portion includes a second protrusion projecting from a displacement region of the first protrusion, and the second protrusion is displaced in one direction to displace the first protrusion and the second protrusion. The elastic piece can be displaced by contact, and the displacement member is displaced in the other direction to contact the first member to enable the displacement member and the fixed member to be engaged with each other. A game machine I8.

According to the game machine I8, in addition to the effects of the game machines I1 to I7, the displacement member includes an elastic piece that can be elastically deformed and a first protrusion projecting from the elastic piece, and the fixed member is a receiving portion that opens to the displacement region of the displacement member and is recessed in the displacement direction of the displacement member; the receiving portion includes a second protrusion that protrudes from the displacement region of the first protrusion; When the displacement member is displaced in one direction, the two projections contact the first projection to displace the elastic piece. Since the displacement member and the fixed member are brought into contact with each other and can be engaged with each other, the second protrusion can allow the displacement of the displacement member in one direction and restrict the displacement of the displacement member in the other direction. Thereby, the displacement of the displacement member in both the direction of engagement with the fixed member and the direction of disengagement can be restricted.

In the gaming machine I8, the accommodating portion is set to have a size capable of accommodating the elastic piece, and when the first protrusion and the second protrusion are engaged, the elastic piece is accommodated in the accommodating portion. A gaming machine I9 characterized in that is accommodated.

According to the game machine I9, in addition to the effects of the game machine I8, the accommodating portion is set to a size capable of accommodating the elastic piece, and when the first protrusion and the second protrusion are engaged, Since the elastic piece is accommodated in the accommodation portion, it is possible to make it difficult to operate the elastic piece from the outside of the accommodation portion when the displacement member and the fixed member are engaged. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the elastic piece from being elastically deformed by being operated from the outside of the accommodating portion. As a result, it is possible to prevent unauthorized disengagement of the displacement member and the fixed member. In this case, the fixing member can be removed from the rear member by cutting the displacement member (the base end portion of the accommodated portion) located outside the accommodating portion.

In the gaming machine I9, the displacement member includes a plurality of the elastic pieces that can be accommodated in the accommodation portion, and the accommodation portion is set to a size that can accommodate the plurality of the elastic pieces. Machine I10.

According to the gaming machine I10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I9, the displacement member has a plurality of elastic pieces that can be accommodated in the accommodating portion, and the accommodating portion is set to a space large enough to accommodate the plurality of elastic pieces. Therefore, when the fixed member is removed from the back member by cutting the displacement member (base end portion of the elastic piece) located outside the housing portion, the cut displacement member (elastic piece) can be placed inside the housing portion. In this state, the uncut displacement member (elastic piece) can be accommodated inside the accommodating portion. Therefore, since the cut displacement members (elastic pieces) can be accommodated and left inside the accommodation portion, the number of displacement members accommodated in the accommodation portion can be compared with the number of cut elastic pieces of the displacement members. When the fixed members are illegally removed and changed to illegal fixed members, the difference in the number of fixed members makes it possible for the operator to perceive that the game machine is illegal.

In any one of the game machines I1 to I10, the first member regulates the displacement of the displacement member in the direction of releasing the engagement with the fixed member when the displacement member engages with the fixed member. A gaming machine I11 characterized in that it comprises means for regulating.

According to the game machine I11, in addition to the effects of the game machines I1 to I10, when the displacement member engages with the fixed member, the displacement of the displacement member in the direction of releasing the engagement with the fixed member is regulated. Since the means is provided, it is possible to restrict the displacement of the displacement member when a force acts in a direction to release the engagement between the displacement member and the fixed member due to fraud. Therefore, when a force acts in a direction to disengage the displacement member from the fixed member due to fraud, it is possible to suppress concentration of the force on the engaging portion between the displacement member and the fixed member. It is possible to suppress damage to the displacement member or the fixed member due to the force input by .

Further, since the first member has the restricting means, when the fixing member is removed from the back member,
By removing the first member from the back member, the restriction of displacement of the displacement member by the restriction means can be released. In this case, by removing the first member, the engaging portion between the displacement member and the fixing member can be accessed, so that the working efficiency when removing the fixing member from the back member can be improved.

The restricting means for restricting the displacement of the displacement member may be exemplified by arranging a protrusion inside the engaging recess to restrict elastic deformation of the displacement member, or by engaging the protrusion with the displacement member.

<Regarding the concept of the invention with the general winning port unit 150 as an example>
A base member having a play area on the front side and a first decoration formed on the front side of the base member
A gaming machine comprising decoration means and second decoration means forming decorations that are continuous with the decoration of the first decoration means in a front view, wherein the first decoration means and the second decoration means extend in the front-rear direction in the front view. A gaming machine J1 characterized in that it is disposed at a position adjacent to the .

Conventionally, a base member having a game area on the front side, a first decoration means arranged in front of the base member and having a decoration formed in the front, and a first decoration means arranged in front of the first decoration means. 2. Description of the Related Art A game machine is known that includes one member and a second decoration means that is disposed in front of the first member and that forms a decoration that is continuous with the decoration of the first decoration means when viewed from the front (for example, JP 2007
-000195). According to this gaming machine, the design of the base member can be ensured by letting the player visually recognize the decorations of the first decoration means and the second decoration means as one decoration.

However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the second decoration means is arranged in front of the first member, so the second decoration means is separated from the first decoration means by the thickness of the first member. placed at a distance. Therefore, depending on the position (direction of line of sight) at which the player views the base member, the decoration of the first decoration means and the decoration of the second decoration means are visually displaced by the thickness of the first member. There was a problem that the designability of the member deteriorated.

On the other hand, according to the game machine J1, the first decoration means and the second decoration means are arranged at positions adjacent to each other in the front-rear direction. The distance between the front and rear can be reduced. Thus, when the first decorating means and the second decorating means are viewed from an angle inclined with respect to the front view of the first decorating means and the second decorating means, the decoration of the first decorating means and the decoration of the second decorating means can be restrained from being misaligned and visually recognized. Therefore, the player can easily see the decoration of the first decoration means and the decoration of the second decoration means as one decoration, and the design of the base member can be improved.

Moreover, the first decoration means may be any means as long as the decoration is formed. For example, a seal member printed with decoration on a plate-like member is attached to the front surface of the base member, or a decoration is attached to the front surface of the base member. is printed.

When the second decorating means is attached (adhered) to the front of the first decorating means, the operator can attach (adhere) the second decorating means while viewing the decoration of the first decorating means. can. Therefore, the operator can easily attach the second decorating means to the first decorating means at a position where the decoration of the first decorating means and the decoration of the second decorating means are continuous. Therefore, it is possible to improve the workability of the operator who attaches the second decoration means to the first decoration means.

In the gaming machine J1, the gaming machine J1 comprises a front member formed of a light-transmissive material, having an outer shape larger than the outer shape of the second decorating means when viewed from the front, and disposed in front of the second decorating means, The member has a recess formed in a shape larger than the outer shape of the second decoration means on the surface facing the second decoration means, and the dimension of the recess is larger than the thickness dimension of the second decoration means. is set to a large value.

According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J1, it is made of a light-transmitting material, is formed in an outer shape larger than the outer shape of the second decorating means when viewed from the front, and is arranged in front of the second decorating means. The front member has a concave portion formed in a shape larger than the outer shape of the second decorative means on the surface facing the second decorative means, and the concave dimension of the concave portion is equal to that of the second decorative means. , the front member can be disposed on the base member with the second decoration means accommodated in the recess. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the second decoration means from coming off from between the base member and the front member.

In addition, since the recess dimension of the recess is set to a value larger than the thickness dimension of the second decoration means,
It is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the front member and the first decoration means. As a result, it is possible to prevent the decoration of the first decorating means from becoming difficult to see due to dust or dirt being caught between the front member and the first decorating means.

In the gaming machine J2, the recess is characterized in that the inner surface of the recess is formed along the outer shape of the second decoration means, and the second decoration means is arranged by being adhered to the bottom surface of the recess. Game machine J3 to play.

According to the game machine J3, in addition to the effects of the game machine J2, the inner surface of the recess is formed along the outer shape of the second decoration means, and the second decoration means is arranged by being adhered to the bottom surface of the recess. is set,
By arranging the second decoration means along the concave portion of the front member, the second decoration means can be positioned and arranged with respect to the front member. Thereby, when the front member is arranged in front of the first decoration means, it is possible to prevent the second decoration means from being caught between the facing edge of the front member and the first decoration means. As a result, the formation of a gap between the first decorating means and the front member can be suppressed, and the decoration of the first decorating means can be visually recognized due to dust and dirt caught between the front member and the first decorating means. It can be suppressed that it becomes difficult.

In the gaming machine J3, the front member includes a projection projecting from a surface facing the base member toward the base member, the base member includes an opening that opens at a position corresponding to the projection, and the projection is inserted into the opening so that the front member is positioned with respect to the base member.

According to the game machine J4, in addition to the effects of the game machine J3, the front member has a projection projecting from the surface facing the base member toward the base member, and the base member has an opening that opens at a position corresponding to the projection. The front member is positioned with respect to the base member by inserting the protrusion into the opening, thereby suppressing displacement of the front member with respect to the first decoration means. Also, the second decoration means is positioned with respect to the front member by the recess of the front member. Therefore,
By positioning the front member with respect to the first decorating means, it is possible to suppress misalignment between the first decorating means and the second decorating means. As a result, the decoration of the first decoration means and the decoration of the second decoration means can be easily recognized as one decoration by the player.

In the gaming machine J4, the projection is formed on the recessed bottom surface of the recess, the second decoration means is formed with a through hole penetrating at a position corresponding to the projection, and the projection is inserted into the through hole. A gaming machine J5 characterized by:

According to the game machine J5, in addition to the effects of the game machine J4, the projection is formed on the recessed bottom surface of the recess, and the second decoration means is formed with a through hole penetrating at a position corresponding to the projection. Since the projection is inserted into the hole, it is possible to simplify the arrangement of the second decorative means with respect to the front member.
That is, when the second decoration means is arranged only inside the concave portion of the front member, it is necessary to arrange the edge portion of the second decoration means along the concave portion. By forming the through-hole to be inserted, the arrangement of the second decoration means with respect to the front member can be determined only by inserting the protrusion into the through-hole. As a result, it is possible to simplify the arrangement of the second decoration means with respect to the front member.

Further, since the projection for positioning the front member with respect to the first decoration means is inserted through the through hole of the second decoration means, the second decoration means and the first decoration means are positioned by the same portion (projection). Therefore, the positioning accuracy between the decorative member and the first decorative means can be improved. As a result, the decoration of the first decoration means and the decoration of the second decoration means can be easily recognized as one decoration by the player.

In any one of game machines J2 to J5, the front member includes a sloped portion that slopes toward the first decoration means toward the outer edge in a front view, and the second decoration means is provided on the back side of the sloped portion.
A gaming machine J6 characterized in that the edges of the decoration means are arranged.

Here, in order to make it easier for the player to visually recognize both the decoration of the first decoration means and the decoration of the second decoration means as one decoration, it is necessary to suppress positional deviation of both decorations. However, when the first decoration means and the second decoration means are superimposed on each other in the front-rear direction, the positions of both decorations are shifted in the front-rear direction by the thickness of the second decoration means. There is a problem that when the first decorating means and the second decorating means are visually recognized from an angle inclined with respect to the front view of the two decorating means, there is a possibility that the positional deviation in the front and back direction may be recognized.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine J6, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines J2 to J5, the front member has an inclined portion inclined toward the first decoration means toward the outer edge in the front view. Since the edge portion of the second decoration means is arranged on the back side of the part, the misalignment of the decoration due to the difference in the arrangement of the second decoration means and the first decoration means in the front-rear direction can be prevented by the inclined portion of the front member. Refraction of light can make it difficult for a player to recognize.

More specifically, the light reflected by the decoration of the first decoration means or the second decoration means, passing through the interior of the front member and emitted from the inclined portion is inclined in the direction of light passage with respect to the front surface of the base member. When the angle is made smaller than the inclination angle in the direction orthogonal to the inclined surface of the inclined portion with respect to the front surface of the base member, the inclination angle of the emission direction of the light from the inclined portion with respect to the front surface of the base member is the base. It is made smaller than the angle of inclination of the direction of passage of light with respect to the front surface of the member. Therefore, the connecting portion between the first decoration means and the second decoration means is viewed from the direction of the intersection angle with respect to the front surface of the base member which is smaller than the inclination angle of the direction orthogonal to the inclined surface of the inclined portion with respect to the front surface of the base member. The passing direction of the light visually recognized by the player who visually recognizes can be brought close to the overlapping direction of the first decorating means and the second decorating means. As a result, when the player visually recognizes the first decorating means and the second decorating means, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the front-rear positional deviation.

In the gaming machine J6, the second decoration means includes an adhesive surface that is adhered to the front member and a non-adhesive surface that is not adhered to the front member, and the inclined portion and the second decoration means are at least A gaming machine J7 characterized by comprising the non-adhesive surfaces at opposing positions.

Here, when the player visually recognizes the connecting portion of the decorations of the first decoration means and the second decoration means from the direction perpendicular to the inclination of the inclined portion, the front and back of the first decoration means and the second decoration means Misalignment of directional decorations may be perceived by the player.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine J7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J6, the second decorating means
an adhesive surface that is adhered to the front member and a non-adhesive surface that is not adhered to the front member;
Since a non-adhesive surface is provided at least at a position facing the decoration means, a gap is formed between the second decoration means and the front member (inclined portion) on the non-adhesive surface, and the non-adhesive surface of the front member is passed. light can be totally reflected. As a result, when the player visually recognizes the second decorating means through the inclined part from a direction perpendicular to the inclination of the inclined part, the player can be prevented from seeing the decoration at the end of the second decorating means. . As a result, when a player visually recognizes the first decoration means and the second decoration means through the inclined part from a direction orthogonal to the inclination of the inclined part, the decoration of the second decoration means is made difficult to see. , it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the misalignment of decorations in the front-rear direction of the first decoration means and the second decoration means.

In game machine J6 or J7, the inclined portion is formed in an arc shape in which the outer edge of a cross section in a direction orthogonal to the extending direction of the outer edge of the front member in front view curves convexly toward the outer edge of the front member. and the end portion of the second decoration means is arranged on the center side of the front member as viewed from the front rather than the substantially intermediate position of the straight line connecting the ends of the inclined portions. J8.

According to the game machine J8, in addition to the effects of the game machine J6 or J7, the inclined portion has the outer edge of the cross section in the direction perpendicular to the extending direction of the outer edge of the front member when viewed from the front, which projects toward the outer edge of the front member. Since the end of the second decorative means is arranged on the center side of the front member when viewed from the front, rather than the substantially intermediate position of the straight line connecting the ends of the inclined portions, , when the first decorating means and the second decorating means are viewed from an angle inclined with respect to the front view of the first decorating means or the second decorating means, the center of the front member may be bent due to the bending of the inclined portion. The direction of light passing through the side can be made closer to the direction in which the first decoration means and the second decoration means overlap. Further, the second slanted portion is located on the center side of the front member from a substantially intermediate position of a straight line that connects the ends of the inclined portions.
Since the end portion of the decorating means is provided, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the positional deviation in the front-rear direction between the first decorating means and the second decorating means. As a result, the decoration of the first decoration means and the second decoration means
It is possible to make it easy for the player to visually recognize the decoration of the decoration means as one decoration.

In any one of the gaming machines J2 to J8, the inner side surface of the concave portion is formed with a second inclined portion that is inclined outward in a front view toward the first decoration means side, and the second inclined portion is formed on the base. The gaming machine J9 is characterized in that the angle of inclination of the member with respect to the front is set smaller than the angle of inclination of the inclined portion with respect to the front of the base member.

According to the gaming machine J9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines J2 to J8, the inner surface of the recess is the first
A second inclined portion is formed toward the decoration means side and inclined outward in a front view, and the second inclined portion has an inclination angle with respect to the front surface of the base member set smaller than the inclination angle of the inclined portion with respect to the front surface of the base member. Therefore, the position of the decoration (virtual image) of the first decoration means visually recognized through the inclined portion and the second inclined portion is changed to the decoration of the first decoration means visually recognized without the inclined portion and the second inclined portion. (real image) can be approximated. As a result, when the first decorating means is viewed through the front member, it is possible to prevent the decoration of the first decorating means from becoming difficult to see due to refraction of light through the front member.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking the Special Winning Device 550 as an Example>
A game machine comprising: a game board having a game area on the front side thereof; and a path unit disposed on the game board and having a path for guiding the throwing of game balls flowing down the game area, wherein the path unit is: A first path for throwing a game ball to one side in the horizontal direction with respect to the game board in a front view, and a horizontal direction opposite to the guide direction of the first path for the game ball thrown from the first path. A second path that throws the ball to the other side, and a third path that connects one side of the first path and the second path, and the third path is on the front side or the back side of the game board. A game machine K1 characterized in that guide means for throwing a game ball to at least one of said game board is provided on at least one inner wall on the front side or the back side of said game board.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a game machine has been known which includes a game board having a game area on the front side thereof and a path unit disposed on the game board and having a path for guiding the thrown game balls flowing down the game area. (For example, JP-A-2015-131046). According to this gaming machine, by guiding (rolling) the game ball flowing into the guide path formed in the path unit along the guide path, the rolling (flowing down) of the game ball is interesting. can have

However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, in order to ensure a predetermined ball throwing distance inside the path unit, the first path for throwing the game ball to one side of the game board and the first path for throwing the game ball to one side of the game board When a second path for throwing a game ball thrown from one path to the other side of the game board and a third path for connecting one side of the first path and the second path are formed, the first path Since the speed of the game ball rolling is maximized at the portion communicating with the third path (the downstream end of the first path), the game ball is placed on the inner wall of the third path where the direction of the ball is changed It collides and bounces easily. Therefore,
A game ball that collides with the inner wall of the third path may return to the first path, or may swing (shake) in the throwing direction of the first path (horizontal direction in front view) inside the third path. Therefore, the first
Since the game ball thrown from the path to the third path swings on the third path, the player's line of sight cannot follow the game ball thrown to the third path in a certain direction, and the ball is thrown to the third path. There is a problem that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the game ball.

In this case, by lengthening the path of the third path, the throwing direction of the game ball thrown from the first path is smoothly switched to the rolling direction of the second path, and the game ball passing through the third path. However, since the third path is formed to be long, the size of the entire path unit is increased accordingly, and a space for arranging the path unit on the game board cannot be secured.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine K1, the path unit includes a first path for throwing a game ball to one side in the horizontal direction with respect to the game board in a front view, and a game ball thrown from the first path. first
A second path for throwing the ball in the other side of the horizontal direction opposite to the guide direction of the path;
and a third path connecting one sides of the paths to each other, wherein the third path includes guide means for throwing a game ball to at least one of the front side and the back side of the game board on the front side of the game board. Alternatively, since it is provided on at least one of the inner walls on the back side, the game ball passing through the third path can be moved to the front side or the back side (forward and backward direction of the game board when viewed from the front). By moving the game ball on the front side or the back side, the game ball that rolls and accelerates on the first path can be slowed down on the third path, and the game ball that collides with the inner wall of the third path can be moved to the third path. It is possible to suppress swinging (shake) in the throwing direction of the first route (horizontal direction in front view) on the third route or returning to the first route. As a result, the player's line of sight can follow the game ball thrown from the third path in a certain direction. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball thrown to the third path.

In addition, since it is possible to suppress the game ball from swinging (shaking) in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction when viewed from the front) with respect to the game board when viewed from the front, the third path connecting the first path and the second path can be suppressed. It is no longer necessary to lengthen the path to suppress the swinging of the game ball, and the path of the third path can be shortened. As a result, the path unit can be accommodated within a predetermined area with respect to the game board, and a space for arranging the path unit with respect to the game board can be secured.

As a guide means for guiding the game ball, the rolling direction of the game ball is switched by means of unevenness, or a displacement member is provided at the path switching portion to guide the game ball to the second path by displacing the displacement member. A method is exemplified.

In the gaming machine K1, the guide means is composed of a recess formed in one of the inner walls on either the front side or the back side, and a convex portion protruding from the other inner wall on the front side or the back side. and wherein the concave portion and the convex portion are formed at positions facing each other.

According to the game machine K2, in addition to the effects of the game machine K1, the guide means includes a concave portion formed in either one of the inner wall on the front side or the back side and the inner wall on the other side of the front side or the back side. Since the concave portion and the convex portion are formed at positions facing each other, the game ball is partially displaced in the middle of the third path, and the game ball can slow down the throwing speed of Therefore, the route of the third route can be shortened. As a result, the path unit can be easily accommodated within a predetermined area with respect to the game board, and a space for arranging the path unit with respect to the game board can be secured.

In the game machine K2, the game machine K3 is characterized in that the horizontal distance from the projecting tip of the projection to one inner wall of the third path is set smaller than the diameter of the game ball.

According to the game machine K3, in addition to the effects of the game machine K2, the horizontal distance from the projecting tip of the projection to one inner wall of the third path is set smaller than the diameter of the game ball. , the game ball that flows down the third path and is thrown to the guide means can be easily brought into contact with the convex portion of the guide means. As a result, the game ball that flows down the first path and is thrown to the third path is brought into contact with the convex portion, so that the rolling speed can be easily reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a game ball that has collided with the inner wall of the third path from returning to the first path or swinging on the third path in a direction different from the throwing direction of the third path. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball passing through the third path.

In the game machine K2 or K3, the convex portion is formed on the inner wall on the front side with respect to the game board, and the concave portion is formed on the inner wall on the back side with respect to the game board. Machine K4.

According to the game machine K4, in addition to the effects of the game machine K2 or K3, the convex portion is formed on the inner wall on the front side with respect to the game board, and the concave portion is formed on the inner wall on the back side with respect to the game board. Therefore, the thickness of the front side of the path unit can be reduced. Therefore, the player can easily see the inside of the path unit through the front of the path unit, and can easily see the game ball thrown inside the path unit. In addition, since the recess is formed in the inner wall on the front side of the path unit, it is possible to suppress the protrusion of the guide means to the front of the path unit. It is possible to make it easier for a player to visually recognize a game ball passing through a path unit.

More specifically, when the recess is formed on the inner surface on the front side, the thickness of the front side of the path unit must be greater than the depth of the recess. Therefore, as the thickness of the front side of the path unit increases, the game ball thrown on the back side becomes less visible to the player. Further, when the concave portion is formed on the inner surface of the front side, it is conceivable to curve the plate on the front side of the path unit along the shape of the concave portion. A space is required from the glass plate that forms the front surface of the area, and the entire game board must be placed on the back side. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the game ball thrown through the path unit by the distance from the player to the rear side.

Furthermore, when the recess is formed on the inner surface on the front side, it is conceivable to open the portion where the recess is formed.
Route units are easily damaged. In addition, if an opening is formed in the front of the path unit, there is a risk of unauthorized persons passing through the opening.

On the other hand, in the game machine K4, the concave portion is formed on the back side of the path unit, and the convex portion is formed on the front side of the path unit, so that the thickening of the entire front side of the path unit is suppressed. A game ball passing through the inside of the path unit can be easily visually recognized, and the inside of the path unit is arranged on the front side of the game machine by suppressing partial projection to the front side of the path unit. A game ball passing through can be easily visually recognized.

A gaming machine K5 in the gaming machine K3 or K4, wherein the protrusions and recesses are arcuate in cross section in the direction of gravity when viewed from the front, and the axes of the arcs are set coaxially.

According to the gaming machine K5, in the gaming machine K3 or K4, the convex portion and the concave portion have arcuate cross sections in the direction of gravity, and the axes of the arcs are set coaxially. The separation distance can be constant. As a result, it is possible to prevent the distance between the convex portion and the concave portion from being partially smaller than the diameter of the game ball, and to prevent the game ball passing through the inside of the path unit from being caught between the convex portion and the inner wall. can.

In the game machine K5, the upper end of the concave portion is formed at a position along an extension line of a rolling trajectory centered on the game ball rolling on the first path when viewed from the front.

According to the gaming machine K6, since the upper end of the recess is formed at a position along the extension of the rolling trajectory of the center of the game ball rolling on the first path in front view, the game rolling on the first path Even when the rolling speed of the ball is high, it is possible to prevent the center of the game ball thrown from the first path to the third path from being thrown above the upper end of the recess. As a result, the game ball thrown from the first path to the third path can be thrown inside the recess.

A gaming machine K7 according to any one of the gaming machines K2 to K6, wherein the concave portion is formed at a position spaced apart from both horizontal side surfaces of the third path in a front view by a radius dimension of a game ball. .

According to the game machine K7, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines K2 to K6, the concave portion is formed at a position spaced apart from both horizontal side surfaces of the third path in a front view by a distance larger than the radius of the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball flowing down along the inner wall of the recess from colliding with both side surfaces of the path unit in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front and swinging inside the recess. As a result, the game ball thrown along the inner side of the recess can be smoothly thrown to the second path.

In any one of the game machines K3 to K7, the recess has an arcuate cross-section centered on the center of the third path in the horizontal direction in the cross section in the throwing direction of the first path in a front view, The game K8, wherein the projection has a rectangular cross-section in the throwing direction of the first path when viewed from the front.

According to the game machine K8, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines K3 to K7, the recess has an arcuate cross-section in the throwing direction of the first path in a front view, and the protrusion has a front surface. Since the cross-section of the first path in the throwing direction is projected in a rectangular shape, the guiding means is
The distance between the concave portion and the convex portion facing each other becomes narrower toward both ends of the first path in the throwing direction. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball thrown to the inside of the concave portion to swing in the ball-throwing direction of the first path. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball thrown to the third path.

The gaming machine K9 of the gaming machine K8 is characterized in that the convex portion is inclined downward and extends toward one side in a direction opposite to the throwing direction of the game ball on the second path when viewed from the front.

According to the gaming machine K9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K8, the convex portion is inclined downward and extended to one side in the direction opposite to the throwing direction of the game ball on the second path when viewed from the front. It is possible to guide the game ball, which comes into contact with the convex part when flowing down the three paths, in the direction of inclination of the convex part. As a result, the game ball in contact with the protrusion can be guided along the inner wall of the recess on the side away from the second path.
As a result, the game ball flowing from the third path to the second path can be rolled in the throwing direction of the game ball on the second path, and the game ball can smoothly flow from the third path to the second path. can.

In any one of the game machines K1 to K9, the first path has a second guide means at a connecting portion with the third path, and the game ball thrown from the first path is guided by the second guide means. A gaming machine K10 characterized in that it can be guided by the guiding means.

According to the game machine K10, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines K1 to K9, the first route is provided with the second guide means at the connecting portion with the third route, and the second guide means Since the game ball thrown from the path can be guided to the guide means, the game ball thrown from the first path to the third path can be easily thrown to the guide means of the third path. Thereby, the game ball can be smoothly thrown from the first path to the third path. Therefore, the game ball thrown from the first path can be easily thrown to the guide means, and the inflow of the game ball from the third path to the second path can be made smoother. As a result, it is possible to stabilize the throwing of game balls in the entire path unit.

In the game machine K10, the second guide means includes a second protrusion projecting from either the front side or the back side of the first path, and a second protrusion recessed at a position facing the second protrusion. A game machine characterized in that the width dimension of the second recess in a direction perpendicular to the flowing direction of the game ball is set to be large toward the upstream side of the first path in a front view. K11.

According to the game machine K11, in addition to the effects of the game machine K10, the second guide means includes a second convex portion protruding from either the front side or the back side of the first path, and the second convex portion. The second recess is provided at a position facing each other, and the width of the second recess is set to be large in the direction orthogonal to the flowing direction of the game ball toward the upstream side of the first path when viewed from the front. Therefore, the game ball thrown through the first path can be easily received in the second recess. Thereby, the game ball can be smoothly thrown from the first path to the third path. Therefore, the game ball thrown from the first path can be easily thrown to the guide means, and the inflow of the game ball from the third path to the second path can be made smoother. As a result, it is possible to stabilize the throwing of game balls in the entire path unit.

In the game machine K10 or K11, the game machine K12 is characterized in that an end of the second recess in the downstream direction of the first path is located downstream of a rolling surface of a game ball on the first path. .

According to the gaming machine K12, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K10 or K11, the second recess is
Since the downstream end of the first path is located downstream of the rolling surface of the game ball on the first path, the game ball flowing from the first path to the third path along the inner wall of the second recess is , can flow into a third path on the far side from the first path. As a result, the game ball flowing into the third path from the first path can be easily thrown to the inside of the recess, and the game ball can easily flow smoothly from the third path to the second path.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking the Special Winning Device 550 as an Example>
A game machine comprising a game board having a game area on the front side thereof and a flow direction changing means arranged in front of the game board for changing the flow direction of game balls flowing down the game area, wherein the flow direction changing means comprises a first member arranged in front of the game board, a second member arranged in front of the first member at a predetermined interval, and at least one of the first member or the second member and an adjustment means for displacing one of the game balls, wherein the adjustment means changes the interval between the opposing first and second members to flow down between the opposing first and second members. A gaming machine L1 characterized in that the flowing direction of the liquid can be adjusted.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a game machine provided with a game board having a game area on the front side and a nail to be nailed in front of the game board (for example, Japanese Laid-Open Patent Publication No. 11-197311). According to this game machine, it is possible to adjust the falling direction of the game ball flowing down the game area by adjusting the angle of the nail driven into the game board (by bending the nail). However, in the case of changing the angle of the nail to change the flow direction of the game ball, the angle of the nail is visually recognized by the player, and it is difficult for the game ball to flow down the flow path that is disadvantageous (advantageous) to the player. When the angle of the nail is recognized as being the angle of the nail, the player stops playing with the game machine judged to be disadvantageous, and there is a problem that the operation rate of the game machine is lowered.

On the other hand, according to the game machine L1, the flow direction changing means includes a first member arranged in front of the game board and a second member arranged in front of the first member at a predetermined interval. and adjusting means for displacing at least one of the first member and the second member. Since it is possible to adjust the flowing direction of the game ball flowing down between the two members facing each other, the flowing direction of the game ball can be changed (adjusted) by the distance in the front-rear direction with respect to the front view of the game board. Therefore, it is suppressed that the player visually recognizes the flow-down direction changing means and judges that it is disadvantageous or advantageous rather than the nail that changes the flow-down direction of the game ball at the horizontal separation distance with respect to the front view of the game board. can. As a result, the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

In the game machine L1, the second member is fixed to the game board, and is adjusted by the adjusting means to
A gaming machine L2 characterized in that the position of the first member is displaced.

According to the game machine L2, in addition to the effects of the game machine L1, the second member is fixed to the game board and the position of the first member is displaced by the adjusting means. At least part of the first member arranged on the back side can be hidden by the two members, making it difficult for the player to visually recognize the position of the first member. Therefore, when the position of the first member is displaced, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the displacement of the position. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the gap between the opposing first member and the second member. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from not playing games in the gaming machine because the distance between the first member and the second member facing each other is disadvantageous, so that the operation rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

In the game machine L2, the game board has a first opening that opens at a position corresponding to the first member, and a fastening member inserted through the first opening from the back side of the game board is attached to the first member. A game machine L3 characterized in that the first member is disposed on the game board by fastening to.

According to the game machine L3, in addition to the effects of the game machine L2, the game board has a first opening that opens at a position corresponding to the first member, and the first opening is inserted from the back side of the game board. By fastening the fastening member to the first member, the first member is disposed on the game board, so the fastening portion for fastening the first member does not need to be formed on the front side of the game board, and the front side is accordingly eliminated. The outer shape of the first member can be reduced when viewed. Therefore, it is possible to easily secure a space for arranging other members in front of the game board.

In addition, since the fastening member is fastened from the back side of the game board, it is possible to make it difficult to access the fastening member from the front side of the game board when the flow direction changing means and the game board are assembled. As a result, unauthorized manipulation of the fastening member and unauthorized change of the position of the first member can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine L3, the first member has a protrusion that protrudes toward the game board and is inserted into the first opening. first
A game machine L4 characterized in that members are arranged on the game board.

According to the gaming machine L4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine L3, the first member protrudes toward the game board and includes a projecting portion inserted into the first opening, and the fastening member is fastened to the tip of the projecting portion. By doing so, the first member is disposed on the game board, so that the fastening portion of the fastening member can be accommodated inside the first opening. Therefore, since it is possible to suppress the fastening portion of the fastening member from projecting to the front side of the first member, it is possible to secure a space between the first member and the second member facing each other.

In the game machine L4, the first member can be slidably displaced on a plane parallel to the front surface of the game board by the adjusting means, and the first opening has the same size as the displacement area of the protrusion. A game machine L5 characterized by being wide open.

According to the gaming machine L5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine L4, the first opening has the same size as the displacement area of the protrusion. can be displaced along the first opening. Therefore, when displacing the position of the first member, the first
Displacement of the member in a direction other than the displacement direction (the direction displaced by the adjusting means) can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible for the operator to easily perform the work for adjusting the position of the first member.

A game machine L6 characterized in that, in any one of the game machines L3 to L5, the game board has a second opening that opens at a position different from that of the first opening.

According to the game machine L6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines L3 to L5, the game board
Since the second opening is provided at a position different from the first opening, the fastening member fastened to the back side of the game board through the second opening can be operated. As a result, it is possible to simplify the work process when the operator operates the adjusting means.

That is, since the accessory device and the case member for housing the accessory device are arranged on the back side of the game board, when the fastening member is operated from the back side of the game board, the accessory device and its case member are arranged. When it is necessary to remove the case member housing the accessory device from the game board, the second opening allows the operator to operate the fastening member from the front side of the game board, so that the operator can operate the fastening member from the back side of the game board. Since there is no need to remove the provided accessory device or the case member that houses the accessory device, the work process for the operator can be simplified.

A game machine L7 characterized in that, in the game machine L1, the position of the second member with respect to the first member is changed in the front-rear direction in a front view by the adjusting means.

According to the game machine L7, in addition to the effects of the game machine L1, the position of the second member with respect to the first member is changed in the front-rear direction in front view, so that the position of the second member with respect to the first member is changed. A change in the position of the second member when viewed from the front can be suppressed as compared with the case where the position is changed in the horizontal or vertical direction when viewed from the front. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from judging that the change in the position of the second member in the front view is advantageous or disadvantageous. As a result, the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

In any one of game machines L2 to L7, the second member is made of a non-light-transmitting material, and has a larger external shape in front view than the first member, and the first member has a shape larger than that in front view. A gaming machine L8 characterized by being covered by the second member.

According to the game machine L8, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines L2 to L7, the second member is made of a non-light-transmitting material and has a larger external shape in front view than the first member,
Since the first member is covered with the second member when viewed from the front, the first member can be positioned as the second member when viewed from the front.
It can be hidden by the member, making it difficult for the player to recognize the first member. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the gap between the opposing first member and the second member, thereby improving the operation rate of the gaming machine.

In any one of game machines L1 to L8, the second member is made of a non-light-transmitting material, and at least one of the first member and the second member protrudes toward the other of the first member and the second member. A gaming machine L9 characterized by comprising a protruding portion that projects.

According to the game machine L9, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines L1 to L8, the second member is formed of a non-light-transmitting material, and at least one of the first member and the second member is the first member. Alternatively, since the projecting portion projecting to the other side of the second member is provided, the game ball thrown between the opposed members of the first member and the second member is brought into contact with the projecting portion to change the ball throwing direction. can. Therefore, by recognizing the interval between the opposing first member and the second member, it is possible to prevent the player from judging that it is advantageous or disadvantageous. As a result, the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

In any one of game machines L1 to L9, the adjusting means is a step adjustment capable of stepwise adjusting the position of the other of the first member and the second member with respect to the other one of the first member and the second member. A gaming machine L10 characterized by comprising means.

According to the game machine L10, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines L1 to L9, the adjustment means adjusts the position of the other of the first member and the second member with respect to one of the first member and the second member. Since the stepwise adjusting means is provided, the operator who changes the position of the first member or the second member can adjust the positional change step by step. As a result, it is possible to suppress errors in the adjusted position of the first member or the second member. Therefore, position adjustment of the first member or the second member can be simplified.

As means for stepwise adjusting the positions of the first member and the second member, the first member or the second member is provided with a plurality of grooves recessed in one of the first member or the second member. By changing the insertion position of the protruding protrusion, the first member or the second member can be changed in position. A mode is exemplified in which the position of the first member is changed by changing the insertion position of the protrusion projecting from the other of the member or the game board.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking the Special Winning Device 550 as an Example>
A gaming machine comprising a game area in which game balls flow down, and a route unit disposed in the game area having a plurality of guide paths for guiding throwing of the game balls flowing down the game area,
The route unit comprises a first guide route formed of a light-permeable material and arranged on the front side of the game area, and a second guide route arranged on the back side of the first guide route. a guide path, wherein the first guide path includes a first winning opening into which a game ball can enter, and the second guiding path comprises a second winning opening into which a game ball can enter. wherein a game ball entering the first winning hole is given a higher game value than a game ball entering the second winning hole.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is a gaming machine in which a path unit having a plurality of guide paths for flowing down game balls is arranged in a game area, and the game balls flowing down inside the unit are visually recognized by the player to enhance the interest of the player. There is (for example, JP-A-2015-131046).

However, in conventional gaming machines, in order to enhance the interest of the player by allowing the player to visually recognize the game balls flowing down the guide route, there has been a tendency for each guide route to be handled in a complicated manner. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to judge which of the guidance routes the game ball is flowing down. Therefore, if the game balls flowing down the guide route have different game values,
It becomes difficult for players to judge whether they are passing through an advantageous (high game value is awarded) or unfavorable (low game value is awarded) route, and game balls flowing down the route unit increase the interest of the player. However, there was a problem in that it was not possible to sufficiently improve the

On the other hand, according to the game machine M1, the route unit includes a first guide route formed of a light-permeable material and arranged on the front side of the game area, and a back surface of the first guide route. a second guide path disposed on the side, the first guide path includes a first prize winning opening into which a game ball can be entered, and the second guide path is provided with a game ball. A possible second winning hole is provided, and a game ball entering the first winning hole is given a higher game value than a game ball entering the second winning hole,
It is possible to make it easier for the player to gaze at the game ball flowing down the first guide route. Further, when the game balls flow down the first and second guide routes at the same timing, the second guide route having the second winning opening with the low game value is placed on the back side of the first guide route. Since it is formed, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball flowing down the first guide path having the first winning hole with high game value. As a result, it is possible for the player to visually recognize a game ball to which a high game value is imparted, so that the player's interest can be easily improved.

The predetermined game value means, for example, a game ball paid out to the player as a privilege when the game ball enters the first or second winning hole.

In the gaming machine M1, the first guide path includes a first path for throwing a game ball to one side in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front, and a game ball thrown from the first path. a second path for throwing a game ball to the other side in the horizontal direction opposite to the guiding direction of the connecting path; The game machine M2 is characterized in that the path is curved in a semicircular shape toward the back side of the game area.

According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine M1, the first guide path includes the first path for throwing the game ball to one side in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front, and the first path for throwing the game ball from the first path. a second path for throwing the game ball to the other side of the horizontal direction opposite to the direction in which the game ball is guided on the first path; and a connecting path that connects, and the connecting path is curved in a semicircular arc toward the back side of the game area, so that the first path and the second path are directly connected at the shortest distance. Allows for more bends in the throwing path than in the case of As a result, the falling speed of the game ball can be slowed down step by step at the curved portion, and it is possible to prevent the game ball from colliding with the inner wall of the connecting path and swinging (shaking) in the connecting path. As a result, the game ball can flow smoothly from the first path to the second path, so that the player can easily see the throwing of the game ball from the first path to the second path.

In addition, in order to prevent the game ball from colliding with the inner wall of the connecting path and shaking (shaking),
It is conceivable that the internal space of the connecting path is enlarged in the throwing direction of the first path to suppress repeated collision of the game ball with the inner wall of the connecting path, but in this case, the internal space of the connecting path is the second. The connection path protrudes in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front by the amount that one path is enlarged in the throwing direction. Therefore, since the path unit is enlarged in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front, it is difficult to keep the path unit within a predetermined range when viewed from the front.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine M2, the connecting path is curved in a semicircular shape toward the rear side, so that the outer shape of the path unit in the front view can be kept within a predetermined range. Therefore,
When the player visually recognizes the game ball flowing down the first guide route, the visual recognition range of the player can be kept within a predetermined range (outer shape of the route unit). As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball flowing down the path unit.

In the gaming machine M2, the path unit is arranged on the other side of the game area in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front, and the connecting path is formed on one side of the path unit in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front. Characterized game machine M3.

According to the game machine M3, in addition to the effects of the game machine M2, the path unit is arranged on the other side of the game area in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front, and the connection path is located at one side of the path unit in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front. Since it is formed on the side, the connecting path can be formed at a position close to the player positioned in front of the game board. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball passing through the connection path. As a result, even if the game ball is thrown to the back side through the connection path, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball passing through the connection path.

A gaming machine M4, wherein in the gaming machine M2 or M3, the first prize winning opening is arranged between the first path and the second path when viewed from the front.

According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine M2 or M3, the first winning port is
Since it is disposed between the first path and the second path when viewed from the front, the dead space in which the first path and the second path are formed is used to form the first winning hole in the first guide path. can. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the outer shape of the route unit when viewed from the front. the result,
It is possible to reduce the range in which the player visually recognizes the path unit. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball flowing down the path unit.

In any one of the game machines M2 to M4, the connection path includes a third prize winning opening into which a game ball can be entered at two points of connection with the first path and the second path, and a displacement member that can be displaced to a position that closes or opens the winning opening, and the game ball entering the third winning opening is the same as the game ball entering the first winning opening. A game machine M5 characterized in that a game value is given.

According to the game machine M5, in addition to the effects of the game machines M2 to M4, the connection path includes a third prize-winning opening into which game balls can be entered at two points, namely, connection portions with the first path and the second path. , those third
and a displacement member that can be displaced to a position for closing or opening the winning opening, and the game ball entering the third winning opening has the same game value as the game ball entering the first winning opening. is given, so
A game ball sent from a first path to a connecting path can be easily entered into either of two third winning holes, and the game ball flowing down the connecting path can give interest to a player. It can be done easily.

That is, between the upstream third prize winning opening formed at the connecting portion of the connecting path and the first path and the downstream third winning opening formed at the connecting portion of the connecting path and the second path. Therefore, when the displacement member is repeatedly moved to a position for closing or releasing the third winning opening at a predetermined timing, the third winning opening is closed by the displacement member. A game ball thrown from the first path to the connecting path is allowed to flow down the connecting path curved to the back side to secure the time until the third prize winning opening is released, and the third winning opening on the downstream side is made to flow down. It can be made to flow into the winning opening of. As a result, the game balls thrown to the connecting path can be easily made to flow into the third prize winning opening, so that the game balls flowing down the connecting path can easily give interest to the player.

In addition, the two third prize-winning ports are formed at the upstream and downstream ends of the connecting route (the connecting portion between the first route and the second route), respectively. It is possible to lengthen the ball possible time. Therefore, it is possible to lengthen the time during which the player is entertained, and it is possible to easily increase the interest of the player.

A gaming machine M6 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines M2 to M5, detection means for detecting passage of a game ball is disposed outside the connecting path.

According to the game machine M6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines M2 to M5, the connection path is provided with a detection means for detecting the passage of the game ball, so that the game ball is not jammed in the connection path. In this case, the error can be detected by the gaming machine by continuing the detection by the detection means. Further, since the detecting means is arranged outside the connecting path, it is possible to suppress the game ball from being caught in the detecting means, compared with the case where the detecting means is arranged inside the connecting path. It is possible to suppress the ball from being clogged in the connecting path.

Furthermore, since the detecting means is arranged outside the connecting path where the rolling of the game ball is slowed down, the number of game balls passing through the connecting path can be easily detected accurately. Therefore, when the number of balls detected by the detecting means is larger than the number of balls winning in the first winning hole or the third winning hole, the game machine can recognize that cheating is being done. As a result, it is possible to suppress continuation of fraudulent activity by notifying that fraudulent activity has been committed by means of a warning sound, abnormal lighting, or the like.

In the game machine M6, the connecting path has a dimension between opposing inner walls in a front view set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball, and the opposing inner walls of the first path in a direction perpendicular to the throwing direction of the game ball. A gaming machine M7 characterized in that it is set smaller than the inter-space dimension.

According to the gaming machine M7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine M6, the connecting path is set such that the dimension between the inner walls facing each other in a front view is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball, and is perpendicular to the throwing direction of the game ball. Since it is set to be smaller than the facing dimension of the inner wall of the first path in the direction, when a game ball with a diameter of a predetermined dimension or more (diameter larger than the regulation) is thrown, the game ball will not stay in the connecting path. can be clogged. As a result, it is possible to prevent game balls having a diameter larger than the regulation from flowing down the path unit.

In addition, since the connecting path is provided with a detecting means for detecting the passage of the game ball, when a game ball with a diameter larger than the regulation stays (clogs) in the connecting path, the detecting means detects the game machine. can detect errors.

In the gaming machine M6 or M7, the connecting path has an opening opening at a predetermined value smaller than the diameter of the game ball in the radially outer side wall of the path curved in a semicircular arc toward the back side. A gaming machine M7 characterized by:

According to the game machine M8, in addition to the effects of the game machine M6 or M7, the connecting path has a predetermined diameter smaller than the diameter of the game ball on the radially outer side wall of the path curved in a semicircular shape toward the back side. Since the opening is formed with the value can be discharged. As a result, it is possible to prevent game balls having a diameter smaller than the regulation from flowing down the path unit.

The opening is formed in the radially outer side wall of the connection path, which serves as a rolling surface for the game ball flowing down the connection path. A game ball can be easily discharged.

In the gaming machine M8, a box-shaped storage section is provided that protrudes from the radially outer side of the connection path and communicates with the opening, and the storage section is set to a size that can store a game ball. ,
A game machine M9 formed in a detection range of the detection means.

According to the gaming machine M9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine M8, the storage section is formed in a box shape and protrudes from the radially outer side of the connection path and communicates with the opening. Since it is formed in a size that can accommodate a ball and is formed in the detection range of the detection means, a game with a diameter smaller than a predetermined size (diameter smaller than the regulation) discharged from the opening of the opening to the outside of the connecting path A ball can be stored inside the container. In addition, since the storage portion is formed within the detection range of the detection means, the game balls stored inside the storage portion can be detected by the detection means. As a result, when the game balls are stored inside the housing portion, the detecting means can cause the gaming machine to detect an error.

In any one of the game machines M1 to M9, the position where the game ball inlet of the first guide path and the game ball inlet of the second guide path are horizontally adjacent to each other in a front view. A game machine M10 characterized in that it is formed in

According to the game machine M10, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines M1 to M9, the game ball inlet of the first guide path and the game ball inlet of the second guide path are Since the game balls are formed at positions adjacent to each other in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front, the game balls flowing down the game area of the game board are the first game balls.
It is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp which of the guide route and the second guide route until just before the flow. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to watch the game ball that flows down the game area and is thrown to the path unit. As a result, it is possible to easily give interest to the player.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking the Lower Displacement Unit 400 as an Example>
A base member having a game area on the front side, and a first member provided on the front side of the base member and having a ball-throwing path formed as a space in which game balls flowing down the game area can be thrown. In the game machine, the first member is arranged on the base member while being biased toward the back side of the base member by a fixing means fastened from the back side of the base member. Game machine N1 to play.

Conventionally, a base member having a game area on the front side, and a first ball throwing path disposed on the front side of the base member and formed as a space in which game balls flowing down the game area can be thrown.
There is a game machine that includes a member (for example, JP-A-2015-131046). According to this game machine, the first member has an extension portion extending on a plane parallel to the front surface of the base member on the side surface of the base member (the contact portion with the base member), and the extension portion By screwing a screw inserted through an opening formed in the base member into the base member, the base member is disposed in close contact with the front surface of the base member.

However, in the conventional game machine, in order to dispose the first member in close contact with the front surface of the base member, it is essential to fasten the screw inserted from the front side of the first member to the base member. An opening must be formed in the first member for the passage of the . Here, in order to form the opening at a position that does not interfere with the throwing of the game ball, it is necessary to form the opening outside the ball-throwing space. need to form. Therefore, since the extended portion is formed on the outer edge of the first member, the area that can be used as the ball-throwing path becomes smaller than the outer shape of the first member, and the ball-throwing path of the first member cannot be made sufficiently large. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine N1, the first member is arranged on the base member while being biased toward the back side of the base member by the fixing means fastened from the back side of the base member. The first member and the base member can be arranged in close contact with each other due to the urging force acting on the first member toward the rear side. In addition, since the first member is disposed on the base member by the fixing means inserted from the back side of the base member, there is a fastening margin (opening through which the fixing means is inserted) on the front side of the first member with the base member. formed extensions). Therefore, the entire area of the outer shape of the first member in a front view can be used as a throwing path. As a result, the throwing path of the first member can be enlarged.

Further, since the fastening portion between the base member and the first member is not exposed to the front side, it is possible to prevent the fastening portion between the base member and the first member from being detached by fraud, and the fastening portion is visually recognized by the player. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest of the player.

In the game machine N1, the second member disposed on the back side of the first member via the base member
a member, wherein the second member is fixed to the first member by the fixing means inserted from the back side of the second member to the side of the first member and fixed to the first member; The gaming machine N2 is arranged on the base member with a predetermined gap from the member.

According to the game machine N2, in addition to the effects of the game machine N1, the second member is provided on the back side of the first member via the base member, and the second member is located on the back side of the second member. It is fixed to the first member by a fixing means that is inserted through the first member side from the first member side and fixed to the first member, and is disposed on the base member with a predetermined gap from the first member. and the second member, a force biasing the first member toward the rear side can be applied to the predetermined gap.
In addition, since a force that biases the second member toward the front side can be applied, the base member can be sandwiched between the first member and the second member. Therefore, the clamping force between the first member and the second member makes it difficult for the first member and the second member to be displaced from the base member.
This eliminates the need to fasten the member or the second member to the base member, thereby simplifying the fastening of the second member.

The predetermined gap between the first member and the second member is set to a value larger than 0 and smaller than the width dimension of the base member in the front-rear direction when viewed from the front. Accordingly, when the first member and the second member are fastened together, the gap between the first member and the second member can exert a mutually attracting force on both the first member and the second member.

In the game machine N1 or N2, the base member has a first opening formed at a position facing the first member, and the first member is a protrusion projecting inward of the first opening. , wherein the first member is disposed on the base member by fastening the fixing means to the tip of the projecting portion.

According to the game machine N3, in addition to the effects of the game machine N1 or N2, the base member is the first
A first opening is provided at a position facing the member, the first member has a projection projecting inward of the first opening, and a fixing means is fastened to the tip of the projection. , since the first member is arranged on the base member, the fastening portion of the fixing means can be arranged inside the first opening. This can prevent the fastening portion of the fixing means from being arranged on the front side of the base member, and can suppress the fastening portion of the fixing means from being formed in the ball-throwing space of the first member. As a result, the first
The size of the throwing space of the member can be secured.

In addition, since the fastening margin (insertion depth) of the fixing means can be ensured by the projecting portion, it is possible to suppress the fastening of the fixing means from coming off the first member. As a result, the urging force acting on the first member toward the back side can be easily increased.

In the game machine N1, the second member disposed on the back side of the first member via the base member
and a third member disposed between the first member and the second member, wherein the base member has a first opening formed at a position facing the first member. The third member has a front-rear dimension when viewed from the front that is smaller than a front-rear dimension of the base member when viewed from the front, is disposed inside the first opening, and is arranged inside the first opening. The member is arranged in close contact with the front side of the third member, and the second member has a predetermined gap from the third member by the fixing means inserted from the back side of the base member. A game machine N4, characterized in that it is fastened to the back side of the third member in a state.

According to the game machine N4, in addition to the effects of the game machine N1, the second member arranged on the back side of the first member via the base member and the second member arranged between the opposing first member and the second member a third member provided, wherein the base member includes a first opening formed at a position facing the first member,
The third member has a front-rear dimension when viewed from the front that is smaller than the front-rear dimension of the base member when viewed from the front, and is disposed inside the first opening. The second member is fastened to the back side of the third member with a predetermined gap from the third member by the fixing means inserted from the back side of the base member. , a biasing force toward the rear side can be applied to the first member via the third member. Therefore, the urging force toward the back side that acts when the second member and the third member are fastened together by the fixing means can also act on the third member. As a result, the biasing force acting on the contact portion of the first member with the base member can be reduced, and damage to the first member can be suppressed.

Further, the rigidity of the entire first member can be increased by the third member being in close contact with the rear side of the first member. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the entire first member from being elastically deformed due to the biasing force acting on the first member toward the back side, thereby suppressing deformation of the throwing path of the game ball formed in the first member. As a result, the game ball of the first member can be stably thrown.

In the gaming machine N4, the third member is a part of a frame-shaped member arranged on the front side of the base member along the second opening formed in the base member. Gaming machine N5.

According to the game machine N5, in addition to the effects of the game machine N4, the third member is a part of the frame-shaped member arranged on the front side of the base member along the second opening opened in the base member. Since
The urging force acting on the third member can be used as a force for urging the frame member toward the rear side. Therefore,
The frame-shaped member can be easily arranged in a state of being in close contact with the base member.

In addition, the biasing force to the back side that acts when fastening the second member and the third member by the fixing means is
Since the force can be applied to the contact surface between the frame-shaped member and the base member, the force acting on the contact portion of the first member with the base member can be reduced, thereby suppressing damage to the first member. can.

In the game machine N4 or N5, the first member includes a displacement member capable of displacing a ball-throwing space of the first member, and a driving device disposed on the back side of the first member for driving the displacement member. means, wherein the third member has a third opening having a size allowing insertion of the driving means, and the driving means is inserted into the third opening and the third opening is inserted into the third opening. A gaming machine characterized by being arranged on the back side of one member.

According to the game machine N6, in addition to the effects of the game machine N4 or N5, the first member includes a displacement member capable of displacing the ball-throwing space of the first member, and a displacement member disposed on the back side of the first member. and driving means for driving the displacement member, the third member having a third opening having a size allowing insertion of the driving means, and the driving means being inserted inside the third opening. Since it is arranged on the back side of the first member in this state, the driving means can be covered with the third member. As a result, it is possible to prevent unauthorized objects such as wires and piano wires inserted from the outside of the game machine from accessing the driving means. As a result, tampering with the driving means can be suppressed.

In the game machine N6, the second member protrudes toward the first member, communicates with the ball-throwing space of the first member, and feeds the game ball thrown into the ball-throwing space of the first member to the second member. A gaming machine N7, comprising a communicating portion capable of throwing a ball, wherein the communicating portion is disposed outside the third opening.

According to the game machine N7, in addition to the effects of the game machine N6, the second member protrudes toward the first member, communicates with the ball-throwing space of the first member, and plays a game in which a ball is thrown to the ball-throwing space of the first member. Since the communication part is provided so that the ball can be sent to the second member, and the communication part is arranged outside the third opening, the third member can be arranged between the communication part and the driving means. can. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the magnetic force generated by the drive means to act on the communicating portion. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball sent to the communicating portion from slowing down or stopping at the communicating portion under the influence of the magnetic force of the driving means. It is possible to stabilize throwing of a game ball to a member.

In the gaming machine N1, the base member has a first opening formed at a position facing the first member, and the first member protrudes from at least two locations on the back side of the first member. A protrusion is provided, and the protrusion includes a first piece that protrudes from the back surface of the first member and is inserted through the first opening, and an end of the first piece that is bent to the outside of the first opening. and a protruding portion that protrudes toward the front side of the second piece that overlaps the base member in front view, and the first piece is the base member in front view. The protruding dimension is set to a value larger than the width dimension in the front-rear direction, and the dimension of the protrusion facing the back surface of the first member is the same as or the width dimension in the front-rear direction of the base member when viewed from the front. By setting a small size and fastening the bent tip of the second piece to the base member by the fixing means,
The gaming machine N8 is characterized in that the first member is disposed in a state of being biased toward the back side with respect to the base member.

According to the game machine N8, in addition to the effects of the game machine N1, the base member has a first opening formed at a position facing the first member, and the first member has a rear surface of the first member. a first piece protruding from the rear surface of the first member and passing through the first opening; a second piece that extends outward from the opening; and a protuberant portion that protrudes toward the front side of the second piece that overlaps the base member when viewed from the front; The protruding dimension is set to a value larger than the width dimension in the front-rear direction, and the dimension of the protrusion facing the rear surface of the first member is set to be equal to or smaller than the width dimension in the front-rear direction of the base member when viewed from the front. , the bent end of the second piece is fastened to the base member by the fixing means, so that the first member is arranged in a state of being biased toward the back side with respect to the base member, so that the back side of the first member There is no need to provide a portion for fastening fixing means (for example, a screw) on the side, and a space for throwing a game ball formed in the first member can be secured. As a result, since the ball throwing space can be enlarged, the throwing direction of the game ball thrown to the first member can be changed to make the throwing more interesting.

In addition, since the threaded portion of the fixing means can be used as the base member, elastic deformation of the ball feeding space of the first member due to the application of biasing force to the threaded portion of the fixing means can be suppressed. the result,
It is possible to prevent the first member from elastically deforming and reducing the speed of the game ball thrown from the ball-throwing path of the first member.

In the gaming machine N8, the base member includes a second opening formed to open in the front-rear direction when viewed from the front, and a frame-shaped member disposed on the front side of the base member along the second opening. A game machine N9, wherein the first opening and the second opening communicate with each other.

According to the gaming machine N9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N8, the base member has a second opening formed in the front-rear direction when viewed from the front, and a front side of the base member along the second opening. and a frame-shaped member disposed thereon, and the first opening and the second opening communicate with each other, so that the projecting portion is disposed inside the first opening using the opening of the second opening. can be set. Therefore, the work of arranging the first unit on the base member can be simplified, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking the Lower Displacement Unit 400 as an Example>
A game machine comprising a base member, a displacement member disposed displaceably on the base member, and a driven member connected to the displacement member and following the displacement of the displacement member, wherein the driven member is driven in a direction of displacement. The displacement member is displaced between a first position and a second position, and is moved from the first position to an intermediate position between the first position and the second position. and a second displacement region for displacing the second position from the third position, wherein the driven member is configured such that the displacement member moves from the first position to the By being displaced to the second position, it is driven from the first driven position to the second driven position, and is displaced from the first driven position to a third driven position intermediate between the first driven position and the second driven position. and a second driven region that displaces the second driven position from the third driven position, wherein at least part of the second displacement region and the first driven region are the same A game machine O1 characterized in that when the displacement member is displaced in the second displacement area, the regulating means regulates swinging of the displacement member in a direction other than the displacement direction.

Conventionally, there is provided a base member, a displacement member displaceably disposed on the base member, and a driven member connected to the displacement member and following the displacement of the displacement member, and is driven by the displacement of the displacement member. A game machine that displaces members is known (for example, JP 2015-02984
9). However, in the conventional game machine, in order to regulate the displacement of the displacement member and the driven member and the oscillation in directions other than the driven direction, if a regulation means is formed for regulating the oscillation of both the displacement member and the driven member, the regulation means is not provided. Since it is necessary to form them in two places, the shape becomes complicated accordingly, and there is a problem that the manufacturing cost increases.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine O1, the displacement member has a restricting means for restricting the swinging of the driven member in a direction other than the driven direction, the displacement member is displaced between the first position and the second position, a first displacement region displacing a third position intermediate between the first position and the second position from the first position; and a second displacement region displacing the second position from the third position; , the displacement member is moved from the first driven position to the second driven position by displacing the displacement member from the first position to the second position. a first driven region that displaces the third driven position; and a second driven region that displaces the second driven position from the third driven position, wherein at least part of the second displacement region and the first driven region When the displacement member is displaced through the second displacement region, the restriction means restricts the movement of the displacement member in directions other than the displacement direction.
The same portion of the restricting means can be used to restrict the swinging motion of the driven member and the displacement member. Therefore, since it is sufficient to form the restricting means in one place, the shape can be simplified accordingly, and the manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

In addition, since the swinging motion of the driven member and the displacement member can be regulated using the same portion of the regulating means, there is no need to form the driven member, the displacement member, and the regulating portion of one regulating means. Accordingly, the restricting means can be made smaller.

In the gaming machine O1, the regulating means is configured as a wall portion protruding from the base member toward the driven member, and the driven member overlaps at least a portion of the base member when viewed from the front. It is capable of being slidably displaced on a plane parallel to the member, and a region overlapping with the base member in a front view is gradually reduced as it moves from the first driven position to the second driven position. Game machine O2.

According to the game machine O2, in addition to the effects of the game machine O1, the regulating means is configured as a wall portion protruding from the base member toward the driven member, and the driven member is at least one of the base members when viewed from the front. slidably displaceable on a plane parallel to the base member at a position overlapping the part,
As the driven position moves from the first driven position to the second driven position, the region overlapping the base member in the front view is gradually reduced, so that the driven member protrudes outside the base member in the front view at the second driven position. The area is enlarged compared to the first driven position. Therefore, since the driven member protrudes outside the base member, it is difficult to restrict swinging of the driven member by restricting means provided on the base member. Therefore, the driven member tends to swing toward the base member as it is driven from the first driven position to the second driven position. By increasing the number of regulated points, it is possible to make it difficult for the driven member to swing. As a result, it is possible to suppress rocking of the driven member when it is arranged in the second driven region.

In the gaming machine O2, the driven member is formed in a rectangular shape having a long side when viewed from the front,
The driven member has a rotatable rotation shaft on one side in the longitudinal direction and is rotatably disposed on the base member. When driven from the first driven position to the second driven position, the driven member rotates around the rotation shaft,
A gaming machine O3, wherein the other side of the driven member is arranged above the rotating shaft in the direction of gravity.

According to the game machine O3, in addition to the effects of the game machine O2, the driven member is formed in a rectangular shape with one long side when viewed from the front, has a rotatable rotation shaft on one side in the longitudinal direction, and is attached to the base member. The driven member is rotatably disposed, and in the first driven position, the longitudinal direction of the driven member is substantially parallel to the horizontal direction,
When driven from the first driven position to the second driven position, the driven member rotates around the rotation shaft, and the other side of the driven member is arranged above the rotation shaft in the direction of gravity. When driven from the first driven position to the second driven position, it rotates and the longitudinal side stands up. Therefore, since the driven member stands up, the load of the driven member tends to act toward the rotation shaft, and the load acts on the driven member in the swinging direction of the driven member, so that the driven member swings easily.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, by restricting the swinging of the displacement member connected to the driven member, it is possible to increase the number of restriction points by the restricting means and make it difficult for the driven member to swing. As a result, it is possible to suppress rocking of the driven member when it is arranged in the second driven region.

Further, when the driven member follows the first driven region where a force to lift the other end side of the driven member is required, the displacement member is released from the first position to the third position (first displacement region). In the first displacement region, the restriction of the displacement member is released by the restriction means. Therefore,
When the displacement force of the driven member is required, the displacement force of the driven member can be secured.

In the gaming machine O2 or O3, the driven member has a projecting portion projecting at a position facing the wall portion, and the distal end of the projecting portion is brought into contact with the wall portion to displace the driven member. is regulated, the displacement member is set to be displaceable in the space between the driven member and the wall in the second displacement region, and the displacement member is set in the direction in which the driven member and the wall face each other at least part of overlaps with the driven member.

According to the gaming machine O3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine O2, the driven member has a projecting portion projecting at a position facing the wall, and the tip of the projecting portion abuts the wall. The displacement of the driven member is restricted by the displacement of the driven member, the displacement member is set to be displaceable in the space between the driven member and the wall in the displacement region at the terminal end, and at least the displacement of the displacement member in the facing direction of the driven member and the wall is Since a part overlaps with the driven member, it is possible to suppress the tilting of the displacement member to the side opposite to the wall portion. As a result, the displacement of the displacement member in both axial directions can be restricted by the driven member and the wall portion, and rocking can be suppressed when the displacement member is displaced.

In the game machine O4, the side surface of the displacement member abuts against the projecting portion of the driven member at the second driven position.

According to the gaming machine O5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine O4, the side surface of the displacement member is brought into contact with the projecting portion of the driven member at the second driven position, so that the displacement member can be moved from the first driven position to the second driven position. When displaced to the position, the outer edge can be brought into contact with the projecting portion of the displacement member and stopped. Therefore, it is possible to make the projecting portion play a role of restricting displacement of the driven member by coming into contact with the wall portion and a role of assisting the stopping operation of the displacement member. Therefore, it is possible to secure a space in which the displacement member and the driven member can be displaced.

In the game machine O5, the driven member has one end pivotally supported by the base member, and when the displacement member is arranged at the second driven position, the displacement direction of the connection portion of the driven member with the displacement member is is set in a direction toward the axis of the displacement member.
.

According to the gaming machine O6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine O5, one end of the driven member is pivotally supported by the base member, and when the displacement member is arranged at the second driven position, the driven member is connected to the displacement member. Since the displacement direction of the portion is set toward the axial center of the displacement member, when the load of the driven member acts on the displacement member, the displacement of the displacement member due to the load of the driven member can be suppressed. That is, when the displacement member is arranged at the second driven position, the relationship between the driven member and the displacement member can be set to the dead center relationship, so displacement of the displacement member can be suppressed. As a result, the second
It is possible to prevent the displacement member from being displaced by an external force other than the driving means at the driven position.

In the gaming machine O5, the driven member has one end pivotally supported by the base portion, and when the displacement member is arranged at the second driven position, the displacement direction of the connection portion of the driven member with the displacement member , and a direction in which the reaction force due to contact between the projecting portion and the displacement member acts, is set in a direction toward the axial center of the displacement member.

According to the game machine O7, in addition to the effects of the game machine O5, the driven member has one end pivotally supported by the base member, and when the displacement member is arranged at the second driven position, the displacement member and the driven member Since the combined direction of the displacement direction of the connecting portion and the direction in which the reaction force due to the contact between the projecting portion and the displacement member acts is set in the direction toward the axis of the displacement member, the load on the driven member is reduced. When acting on the displacement member, the displacement of the displacement member due to the load of the driven member can be suppressed. That is, when the displacement member is arranged at the second driven position, by directing the direction of the force acting on the displacement member from the driven member to the axial center of the displacement member, the direction in which the displacement member rotates about the shaft support portion is adjusted. It is possible to suppress the generation of the force of As a result, it is possible to prevent the displacement member from being displaced by an external force other than the driving means at the second driven position.

In game machines O1 to O7, the projecting portion is disposed with a predetermined gap from the wall portion, and is brought into contact with the wall portion by the contact of the displacement member. Machine O8.

Here, if the projecting portion of the driven member and the wall portion are in constant contact with each other, there is a risk that resistance will occur when the displacement member is displaced by the driving means, making it difficult to displace the displacement member stably.

According to the gaming machine O8, the protruding portion is arranged with a predetermined gap from the wall portion, and the displacement member abuts against the wall portion, so that the displacement member is moved to the second driven position. When displaced, it is possible to prevent the displacement member from swinging, and it is possible to prevent the protrusion and the bulging portion from acting as resistance during the displacement.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Using the Lower Displacement Member 440 as an Example>
a decorative member at least partially formed of a light-transmitting material capable of transmitting light from the rear side when viewed from the front;
a receiving portion capable of receiving and holding a game ball, wherein the light emitting means is disposed on the back side of the decorative member and capable of emitting light toward the displacement area of the receiving portion; The means is disposed on the back side of the receiving portion or between the decorative member and the receiving portion, and emits light emitted from the light emitting means by a game ball received in the receiving portion or the receiving portion. A game machine P1 characterized by partially varying the amount of light emitted from the decorative member by blocking or reflecting it.

Conventionally, a decorative member, at least a portion of which is formed of a light-transmitting material that can transmit light from the rear side when viewed from the front, is arranged on the rear side of the decorative member so as to be displaceable on a plane parallel to the front. A game machine is known that includes a receiving portion that is provided and can receive and hold a game ball (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-166997). According to this gaming machine, by moving the receiving section after receiving and holding the game ball in the receiving section, an effect of moving the game ball along with the movement of the receiving section can be performed.

However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the receiving portion is arranged on the back side of the decorative member, so that it becomes difficult for the player to recognize the receiving portion and the position of the game ball received in the receiving portion. Therefore, when the receiving portion moves after the game ball is received (held) in the receiving portion,
It is said that it is difficult for the player to grasp the direction in which the receiving part and the game ball received (held) in the receiving part has moved, and it is difficult for the player to grasp the position of the game ball received by the receiving part. There was a problem.

On the other hand, the game machine P1 is provided with light emitting means arranged on the back side of the decorative member and capable of emitting light toward the displacement area of the receiving portion. The light emitted from the light emitting means is blocked or reflected by a game ball disposed between the member and the receiving portion and received by the receiving portion or the receiving portion, thereby partially reducing the amount of light emitted from the decorative member. The amount of light emitted from the receiving portion or the decorative member positioned in front of the game ball received in the receiving portion and the amount of light emitted from the decorative members at other positions are different. By making them different, it is possible for the player to recognize that the receiving portion or the game ball received in the receiving portion is located on the back side of the portion with the different amount of light.

More specifically, when the light emitting means is arranged on the back side of the receiving part, the light emitted from the light emitting means is blocked by the receiving part or the receiving part by the game balls received therein. The amount of light emitted from the decoration member on the front side of the game ball received in the space can be made darker than other parts of the decoration member. As a result, the amount of light emitted from the decorative member is small (
The player can be made to recognize that the receiving part or the game ball received in the receiving part is located on the back side of the dark part.

On the other hand, when the light-emitting means is disposed between the decorative member and the receiving portion, the light emitted from the light-emitting means is reflected by the receiving portion or the game ball received in the receiving portion. The amount of light emitted from the decoration member on the front side of the game ball received in the receiving part can be made brighter than other parts of the decoration member. As a result, a large amount of light emitted from the decorative member (
The player can be made to recognize that the receiving part or the game ball received in the receiving part is positioned on the back side of the bright part.

In the gaming machine P1, the receiving portion is formed below the center of the game ball held in the receiving portion in the direction of gravity, and the light emitting means is substantially aligned with the center of the game ball held in the receiving portion. and the light transmitting portion of the decorative member is formed at a position higher than the light emitting portion of the light emitting means.

Here, in a structure in which the light emitted from the light emitting means is transmitted through the decorative member and the light is reflected or blocked by the receiving portion or the game ball received in the receiving portion, the light emitted from the light emitting means is reflected by the game ball. In addition, since the receiving part is also irradiated with the light, the light is likely to be reflected or blocked by the receiving part. Therefore, the brightness and darkness of the light formed by the difference in the amount of light emitted from the decorative member is affected by the receiving portion, and the shape of the brightness and darkness becomes a shape different from the outer shape of the game ball. There was a possibility that it would be difficult for the player to recognize that the game balls are arranged on the back side of different parts of the player.

On the other hand, in the game machine P2, in addition to the effects of the game machine P1, the receiving portion is formed below the center of the game ball held in the receiving portion in the direction of gravity, and the light emitting means is provided in the receiving portion. A light emitting part is arranged at substantially the same height as the center of the game ball to be held, and the light transmitting part of the decorative member is
Since it is formed at a position higher than the light emitting portion of the light emitting means, the contrast of the light emitted from the light emitting means and blocked or reflected by the light receiving portion is transmitted through the light transmitting portion of the decorative member. can be suppressed from being formed on the front side of the decorative member. As a result, the shape of the brightness and darkness of the light formed through the light-transmitting portion of the decorative member can be brought closer to the outer shape (circular shape) of the game ball. As a result, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the game ball is placed in a portion with a different amount of light.

A gaming machine P3 characterized in that, in the gaming machine P1 or P2, the receiving section is made of a light transmissive material.

According to the gaming machine P3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P1 or P2, since the receiving section is made of a light-transmissive material, it is possible to prevent the light emitted from the light emitting means from being reflected or blocked by the receiving section. can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the formation of a portion with a different amount of light in the light transmitting portion of the decorative member when no game ball is received in the receiving portion. Therefore, when the game ball is not received by the receiving part, the receiving part can be positioned and returned without being noticed by the player. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from gazing at the decorative member during the positioning operation and the return operation of the receiving part, and allow the player to gaze only at the displacing motion of the receiving part when the player wishes to have the player gaze at it.

In the game machine P2 or P3, a connecting member formed of a non-light-transmitting material and connected to one side of the receiving portion in the displacement direction is provided, and the light emitting means is provided on the back side of the displacement area of the receiving portion. The connecting member has a dimension in the direction of displacement of the receiving portion set larger than the displacement distance of the receiving portion, is arranged on the back side of the light transmitting portion of the decorative member, and is arranged to correspond to the displacement of the receiving portion. Accordingly, the game machine P4 is characterized by projecting or retracting between the light emitting means and the decorative member facing each other.

According to the gaming machine P4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P2 or P3, the coupling member is formed of a non-light-transmitting material and coupled to one side of the receiving portion in the displacement direction, and the light emitting means The connecting member has a dimension in the direction of displacement of the receiving portion set larger than the displacement distance of the receiving portion, and is disposed on the back side of the light-transmitting portion of the decorative member. As the receiving portion is displaced, the area of light emitted from the decorative member can be changed. In other words, the light emitted from the light emitting means to the decorative member can be blocked by the connecting member, and the area where the light is blocked can be changed according to the displacement of the receiving portion. As a result, the receiving portion and the connecting member are projected and displaced between the light emitting means and the decorative member facing each other, so that the emission area of the light emitted from the decorative member can be reduced. As a result, the light emitting surface of the decorative member is made small, so that the player can easily recognize the portion where the amount of light emitted from the decorative member by the receiving portion or the game ball received by the receiving portion is small.

A game machine P5 in the game machine P4, wherein the connecting member is a part of driving means for driving the receiving portion.

According to the gaming machine P5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P4, the connecting member is a part of the driving means for driving the receiving portion, so that it has the role of transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the receiving portion and the light emitting means. The connecting member can also serve to block light emitted from the . As a result, it is possible to secure the installation space for the driving means for driving the receiving portion.

In game machines P1 to P5, the light-emitting means is disposed on the back side of the displacement area of the receiving portion, the receiving portion includes a displacement member capable of being displaced by a game ball received in the receiving portion, and The member is made of a non-light-transmitting material and is displaceable at a position where it protrudes or retreats between the opposing light emitting means and the decorative member. A gaming machine P6 characterized in that it protrudes between the light emitting means and the decoration member.

According to the game machine P6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines P1 to P5, the light emitting means is arranged on the back side of the displacement area of the receiving part, and the receiving part receives the game balls received in the receiving part. A displaceable displacement member is provided, and the displacement member is made of a non-light-transmitting material and is displaceable at a position where it protrudes or retreats between the opposing light emitting means and the decorative member, and the game ball is inserted into the receiving portion. is received, the light emitted from the light-emitting means is blocked by the displacement member and the game ball only when the game ball is held in the receiving portion. Thus, the player can recognize the position of the game ball from the shadow (dark portion) formed on the decorative member. Therefore, when the game ball is not received by the receiving part, the positioning operation and return operation of the receiving part can be performed without being noticed by the player. As a result, the player is prevented from gazing at the decorative member at the wrong timing, and the player can concentrate on playing the game.

In the gaming machines P1 to P5, the light emitting means is arranged on the front side of the displacement area of the receiving portion, the receiving portion is provided with a displacement member capable of being displaced by the game ball received in the receiving portion, The member is made of a non-light-transmitting material and is displaceable at a position where it protrudes or retreats between the opposing light emitting means and the decorative member. A game machine P7 characterized by projecting between a light emitting means and a game ball facing each other
.

According to the game machine P7, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines P1 to P5, the light emitting means is arranged on the front side of the displacement area of the receiving part, and the receiving part receives the game balls received in the receiving part. A displaceable displacement member is provided, and the displacement member is made of a non-light-transmitting material and is displaceable at a position where it protrudes or retreats between the opposing light emitting means and the decorative member, and the game ball is inserted into the receiving portion. is received, the light emitted from the light emitting means is reflected by the displacement member and the game ball only when the light emitting means and the game ball are held in the receiving portion. Thus, the player can be made to recognize the position of the game ball in a bright portion (a portion with a larger amount of light than others) formed on the decorative member. Therefore, when the game ball is not received by the receiving part, the positioning operation and return operation of the receiving part can be performed without being noticed by the player. As a result, the player is prevented from gazing at the decorative member at the wrong timing, and the player can concentrate on playing the game.

In this case, it is preferable that the displacement member is generally made of a metal material that has a higher light reflectance than a resin material, or that the outer surface of the displacement member is coated with a metal. As a result, the light irradiated onto the displacement member can be easily reflected, and the difference in the amount of light emitted from the decorative member can be made clear.
To make a player easily recognize the position of a game ball.

A game machine P8 in the game machine P7, wherein the displacement member is formed in a concave curved shape recessed toward the back side.

According to the game machine P8, in addition to the effects of the game machine P7, the displacement member is formed in a concave curved shape that is recessed toward the back side, so that the light emitted from the light emitting means to the displacement member is reflected to the decoration member side. In this case, the reflected light can be made difficult to diffuse (light can be easily condensed). Therefore, by collecting the light reflected by the displacement member and emitted from the decorative member, the difference in the amount of light can be made clear, making it easier for the player to recognize the position of the game ball.

A gaming machine P9 is characterized in that, in the gaming machines P1 to P8, the decorative member is formed to protrude in the irradiation direction of the light emitting means.

According to the game machine P9, in addition to the effects of the game machines P1 to P8, the decorative member is formed to swell in a convex shape in the irradiation direction of the light emitting means, so that the light of the light emitting means transmitted through the decorative member is emitted. It can spread easily. As a result, it is possible for the player to perceive the position of the game ball received by the receiving part by enlarging the portion where the light amount of the light formed by the game ball received by the receiving part is different. It can be done easily.

A gaming machine P10 characterized in that, among the gaming machines 01 to P9, the light emitting means is capable of emitting light of at least two colors.

According to the game machine P10, in addition to the effects of the game machines P1 to P9, the light emitting means can emit light of at least two colors. can be changed.

For example, if light emission is divided into a first region with a first emission color and a second region with a second emission color, and a receiving portion is arranged in the first region, the expectation of a big win is increased. Raise. the result,
To make it easier for a player to watch the position of a game ball held in a receiving part.

In this case, the range of the first area and the range of the second area can be changed only by changing the color of the emitted light. Therefore, by changing the range of emitted light, a plurality of forms of presentation can be formed. It is possible to easily give interest to the player.

<Feature Q group> (Always take a launch sensor when descending with vertical tilt)
movable means configured to be movable between a first position and a second position different from the first position; movable control means capable of controlling the movement of the movable means; and moving the movable means to the first position. and a first position detecting means capable of detecting a position, wherein the movable control means, when moving from the first position to the second position, moves the position from the first position to the second position. After moving the movable means based on predetermined movement data for moving to the second position, the movable means is stopped, and when moving from the second position to the first position, the movable means is stopped. moves the moving means based on the moving data for moving from the second position toward the first position, and controls the moving means to stop when the moving means is detected by the first position detecting means. A gaming machine Q1 characterized in that it

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not. An advantageous privilege game was executed. In addition, an effect is executed in which the lottery result is notified to the player after the symbols and the like are variably displayed for a certain period of time. Accordingly, a gaming machine has been proposed that notifies the player of various effects modes (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-130802). By the way, the game machine described above executes stop control to stop the movable object at a predetermined stop position when moving the movable object. Therefore, there is a problem that the stop position varies. It is an object of the game machine described above to provide a game machine capable of stably controlling the movement of a movable object.

According to the game machine Q1, when moving from the first position to the second position, by moving based on the movable data, the control load is reduced compared to the case of moving while detecting the movable position at any time. Although the movable means can be controlled, when it is moved from the second position to the first position, the movable means is controlled to stop based on the result detected by the detecting means. Actually, even if there are variations in the position of , it can be controlled by stopping at a more accurate first position. can be prevented, and the movable object can be stably controlled.

In the game machine Q1, the movable means has a shooting means capable of shooting a game ball, and the shooting means shoots the game ball while being moved to the first position. game machine Q2.

According to the gaming machine Q2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Q1, since the game ball is shot while being moved to the first position, the accuracy of shooting the game ball varies due to the accurate movement to the first position. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that occurs.

The game machine Q1 or Q2 has a base member for movably fixing the movable means, and the movable means includes a shaft portion rotatably supported by the base member at one end side, and a shaft portion from the one end side. It has at least moving means for moving the game ball to the other end side, and an opening for shooting the game ball by the shooting means at the other end side, and the movable means moves the first rotation from the origin position. It is movable to the first position set at a position rotated in the first direction about the shaft portion by a movement amount, and the shaft portion is rotated by the second rotation amount from the first position. and the game machine Q3 is configured to be movable from the origin position to the second position set to the position rotated in the first direction.

According to the gaming machine Q3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, the movement of the game ball by the moving means causes the center of gravity of the movable means to change, making stop control difficult. Since it is the structure which can be stopped correctly by a 1st position, there exists an effect that the trouble by stop control of a movable means can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine Q3, the moving means starts moving the game ball from the shaft portion to the other end side after the movable means starts moving control from the origin position to the first position. A gaming machine Q4 characterized by:

According to the game machine Q4, in addition to the effects of the game machine Q3, the game ball moves to the other end before rotating to the first position, so that the weight of the other end increases and the movable load increases. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that occurs. Further, by moving the game ball to the first position after the movement control is started, there is an effect that the game ball can be moved to the other end side in accordance with the timing when the movable means is moved to the first position. be.

<Characteristics R group> (sensor detection of power return)
A ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, a movable means capable of moving between a first position and a second position different from the first position, and a game ball entering the ball entering means to the movable means. said movable means holds an opening means into which a game ball guided by said guiding means can enter; and a game ball entered from said opening means. and a moving means capable of moving the game ball held by the holding means. A game machine R1, characterized in that it has discharge control means capable of causing the moving means to execute a discharge operation capable of discharging to the outside of the game machine R1.

Conventionally, a game machine such as a pachinko machine moves a movable object to a position visible to the player as one of the effects for informing the result of winning or failing judgment, etc., to give a novel impression to the player. A gaming machine has been proposed that can prevent a player from quickly getting bored with the game by providing a By the way, the game machine described above has a problem that a malfunction occurs due to the movement. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing defects in the gaming machine described above.

According to the game machine R1, even if the movable means is configured to allow a game ball to enter and move the entered game ball, the game ball that has entered the movable means is ejected to the outside by the ejection operation. Therefore, even if an excessive number of game balls enter the movable means, the game balls can be ejected to operate normally, and there is an effect that troubles can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine R1, main control means capable of executing game control, slave control means capable of executing game control based on a control signal output from the main control means, and the ball entry means and a ball entry detection means capable of detecting that a game ball has entered the game ball, and the main control means detects that the game ball has entered the game ball by the ball entry detection means. output means for outputting a ball entry signal to said slave control means, said slave control means comprising opening detection means capable of detecting that a game ball has entered said opening means; and initial operation control means for causing the movable control means to perform a predetermined initial operation of the movable means when the game machine is powered on. and when the ball-entering signal is received during the period during which the initial action is being executed, the entry of the game ball is detected by the opening detection means at least until the initial action is completed. and initial discharge operation control means for causing the discharge control means to execute the discharge operation based on the above.

According to the game machine R2, in addition to the effects of the game machine R1, when there is a possibility that a game ball may enter the movable means during the execution of the initial action, the opening detection means performs monitoring. By entering the ball, the discharging operation is performed after the initial operation is completed, so there is an effect that it is possible to suppress troubles in the execution of the initial operation.

In the gaming machine R2, the holding means is configured to be able to hold a game ball entered through the opening means when the moving means is moved to a predetermined position. R3.

According to the game machine R3, in addition to the effects of the game machine R2, the holding means is configured to be able to hold the game ball entered from the opening means by being moved to a predetermined position by the moving means. There is an effect that the reception of game balls can be controlled by limiting the timing at which the holding means can hold them.

In gaming machine R2 or R3, when the ball-entering signal is received during the period in which the initial action is being executed, the opening detection means detects the The game machine R3 is characterized by having a determination control executing means for executing determination control for determining whether a game ball is detected.

According to the game machine R3, in addition to the effects of the game machine R2 or R3, when the ball entry signal is received during the period in which the initial action is being executed, it is determined whether the game ball is detected by the opening detection means. Therefore, in a state in which the game ball cannot enter the movable means, the detection process can be omitted, and there is an effect that the control load can be reduced.

In the game machine R3, the predetermined period is a period from when a specific control signal is received from the main control means until a predetermined number of seconds elapses.

According to the game machine R4, in addition to the effects of the game machine R3, the timing of executing the discharge operation can be made constant by executing after the specific control signal is output, and the discharge operation can be performed at an appropriate timing. It has the effect of being able to perform an action.

In any one of the gaming machines R1 to R4, the main control means includes determination means capable of executing determination, and dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means on the display means. dynamic display mode determination means for determining a dynamic display mode of the identification information executed by the dynamic display means; and static display of the identification information for indicating the specific determination result on the display means a special state setting means capable of changing the ball-entering means to a special state in which a game ball can easily enter the game ball.

According to the gaming machine R5, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines R1 to R4, when the determination result becomes a specific determination result, the game ball is more likely to enter the ball entering means, so that the game ball is moved to the movable means. There is an effect that the player can be given an opportunity to enter the ball, and a novel performance can be provided to the player.

A game machine R6 characterized in that, in the game machine R5, the specific sub-control signal is a signal output based on the end of the special state.

According to the game machine R6, in addition to the effects of the game machine R5, the discharge operation can be performed after the special state is ended, so the discharge operation is performed after the game ball becomes difficult to enter the movable means. Therefore, there is an effect that defects can be further suppressed.

<Feature S group> (Sound effect when winning a special electric accessory)
A first ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, a first detection means capable of detecting that a game ball has entered the first ball entry means, and a game ball entered by the first detection means. a first signal output means for outputting a first signal when this is detected; a game machine having a visual recognition part for visually recognizing a game ball passing through the part; A second detecting means capable of detecting that a game ball has entered the second ball entering means, and outputting a second signal when the second detecting means detects that the game ball has entered. a second signal output means; a first channel guiding means for guiding a game ball entered by the second ball entering means to the first channel; and a first period after receiving the first signal. A first effect executing means for executing a first effect based on the lapse of time, and a second effect executing means for executing a second effect based on the lapse of a second period after receiving the second signal. A game machine S1 characterized by comprising means.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not. An advantageous privilege game was executed. (For example, JP-A-2012-217766). By the way, the above-described gaming machine has a problem that during the privilege game, the game becomes monotonous and the player becomes bored with the game. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of suppressing the problem that a player gets bored with the game early.

According to the gaming machine S1, the second effect is executed at the timing when the game ball that enters the second ball entering means without entering the first ball entering means also passes through the visual recognition portion. It is possible to diversify the effects together with the first effect caused by entering the ball, and it is possible to prevent the player from quickly getting bored with the game.

In the game machine S1, display means for displaying information corresponding to the entry of a game ball into the first ball entry means; 1 updating means for updating corresponding to the game ball entered into the ball entering means, wherein the updating means updates the information in accordance with at least the timing when the second performance is executed. A gaming machine S2 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine S2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine S1, it is possible to make it seem as if the information for the game ball that did not enter the first ball entering means is updated, and the second entering means can be used. There is an effect that the player can be made to think that the game ball that has entered the ball means is also entering the ball entering means.

In the gaming machine S1 or 2, a third guiding means for guiding a game ball that has not entered the first ball entering means and the second ball entering means to the first guide path, and the third guiding means and a third effect execution means capable of executing a third effect at the timing when the game ball guided by reaches the visual recognition portion.

According to the gaming machine S3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine S1 or S2, the game ball guided by the third guiding means is also guided to the visual recognition part and the third effect is executed. can make the player think that the game ball that has entered passes through the visual recognition part, and the player can think that many game balls have entered the ball entering means. be.

In the game machine S3, the game machine S4 is characterized in that the updating means updates the information at least at the timing when the third effect is executed.

According to the gaming machine S4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine S3, by updating the information in accordance with the timing when the third effect is executed, the game that has not entered the first and second ball entering means It is possible to make the player feel as if the ball is entering the first ball entering means, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

In any one of the gaming machines S1 to S4, the first period is set to be longer than or equal to the first flowing period required for the game ball entering the first ball entering means to reach the visual recognition portion. wherein the second period is set to be longer than or equal to the second flowing period required for the game ball entering the second ball entering means to reach the visual recognition portion. S5.

According to the game machine S5, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines S1 to S4, an effect is produced in accordance with the timing of reaching the visual recognition part, so that the visual recognition part seems to be a ball-entering means. It has the effect of being able to

In any one of gaming machines S1 to S5, an opening into which a game ball can enter is formed as a part of the first flow path in the first flow path in the visual recognition portion. The game machine S6 is characterized in that it is configured so that a game ball entering the game can be visually recognized.

According to the game machine S6, in addition to the effects of the game machines S1 to S5, the opening formed in the visual recognition part can be made to look like a ball entry means, and more game balls enter the ball entry means. There is an effect that it can be made to think as if it is balling.

<Feature T group> (Pseudo jackpot production during latent state)
discrimination means for executing a predetermined discrimination when a discrimination condition is satisfied; display means for displaying identification information for indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means; and said identification information indicating the first discrimination result on the display means. is displayed, a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player, and after the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means is finished, a first game state, and the first A game state setting means capable of setting a second game state more advantageous to the player than the game state, and a privilege game effect capable of executing a privilege game effect when the privilege game is being executed by the privilege game execution means. and a pseudo privilege game effect execution means capable of pseudo-executing the privilege game effect when the second game state is set by the game state setting means. game machine T1.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. In some cases, a privilege game capable of awarding a large number of prize balls is executed. Further, as the game state in which the lottery is executed, a first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state can be set, and the second game state is set. A gaming machine has been proposed in which a special game capable of awarding prize balls to a player is likely to be executed when the player is in the game (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2013-226399). By the way, the above-described gaming machine is capable of giving prize balls to the player by the privilege game and the special game, so that it can improve the interest of the game, but it is aimed at the privilege game. Since it is necessary to execute a game and a game aiming at a special game, the game is complicated, and there is a problem that the player's desire to play is reduced. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that suppresses a decline in motivation to play and improves the amusement of the game in the gaming machine described above.

According to the game machine T1, when a game state advantageous to the player is set, the pseudo privilege game performance is executed, so that the contents of the performance executed in the state advantageous to the player are unified. be able to. Therefore, by executing an effect that is easy for the player to understand, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's desire to play, and to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, since the privilege game effect can be simulated even when the privilege game is not being executed, the player can be made to think that the privilege game is being executed a lot. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine T1, a variable ball entering means capable of changing between a first state in which a ball can enter and a second state in which a ball is less likely to enter than the first state, and at least the variable ball entering means. pseudo ball entry means for allowing a game ball to enter; and variable control means for changing the variable ball entry means to the first state when the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means. The gaming machine T2 is characterized in that the pseudo ball entry means is such that a game ball is entered when the pseudo privilege game presentation is executed by the pseudo privilege game presentation execution means.

According to the gaming machine T2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine T1, when the pseudo privilege game presentation is executed, the presentation of entering the game ball into the pseudo ball entry means is executed, so that a realistic pseudo presentation can be realized. There is an effect that it can be executed.

In the game machine T1 or T2, when the second game state is set by the game state setting means, the pseudo-privilege game effect has effect condition determination means for determining whether a predetermined effect condition is established. The game machine T3 is characterized in that the executing means executes the pseudo privilege game effect when the effect condition determining means determines that the predetermined effect condition is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine T3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine T1 or T2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the predetermined effect condition is not established, the pseudo privilege game effect is not executed even during the second game state. By configuring in this way, for example, when the period in which the second game state is set is short (when it is shorter than the execution period of one privilege game), execution of the pseudo privilege game effect is suppressed. be able to. Therefore, since it is possible to suppress the execution of an effect that gives the player a sense of discomfort, there is an effect that the effect of the effect that is executed can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine T3, upper limit value setting means for setting an upper limit value of the number of times the second game state is continuously set after the end of the jackpot game; and a set number of times measuring means for measuring the number of times set by the setting number of times measuring means, and the effect condition determining means determines that the number of times measured by the set number of times measuring means is less than a predetermined number of times, the effect condition A game machine T4 characterized in that it is determined that is established.

According to the game machine T4, in addition to the effects of the game machine T3, the following effects are produced. That is, the upper limit number of times that the second game state can be continuously set is set, and it is determined how many times the second game effect is set continuously at present. Then, when the number of consecutive times set in the second game state is smaller than the predetermined number of times, the effect condition is satisfied. As a result, a stable pseudo-privilege game effect can be executed in a state in which the period in which the second game state is set is ensured, so that there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the game machine T4, when the performance condition determining means determines that the number of times measured by the set number of times measuring means is greater than a predetermined number of times, a second game state effect different from the pseudo privilege game effect is executed. A game machine T5 characterized by having a possible second game state effect executing means.

According to the game machine T5, in addition to the effects of the game machine T4, the following effects are produced. That is, when the number of times the second game state is continuously set is greater than a predetermined number, a specific second game state effect is executed without executing the pseudo-privilege game effect, so that an effect that is easy for the player to understand is provided. There is an effect that it can be executed.

<Characteristic U group> (point consumption effect)
A ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, a determination means capable of executing a determination based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entrance means, and identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means are displayed. dynamic display means for dynamically displaying on means; dynamic display mode determination means for determining a dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means; and a specific determination result on the display means and a privilege game executing means capable of executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating is stopped and displayed, based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, A numerical performance executing means capable of executing a numerical performance for giving numerical information to a player, and a numerical information storage means capable of cumulatively storing the numerical information of the numerical performance executed by the numerical performance executing means. and at least one of the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means corresponding to the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means. and dynamic display mode determination control means for allowing a player to determine the mode of the part by operating the operation means.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not. An advantageous privilege game was executed. As a performance for displaying the lottery result, a plurality of patterns for informing the lottery result are variably displayed, and the lottery result is notified by a combination of the patterns stopped and displayed. A game machine has been proposed in which, as an effect other than the symbols, a notice effect for notifying the player of the result of the lottery before the symbols stop is executed. (For example, JP-A-2012-217766). By the way, the above-described gaming machine has a problem that the player gets tired of the effect executed until the lottery result becomes a win. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of suppressing the problem that a player gets bored with the game early.

According to the game machine U1, the contents of the dynamic display mode related to the notification of the judgment result can be varied by the numerical information accumulated by the executed numerical performance, so that the numerical performance is executed and the numerical information is accumulated. There is an effect that it is possible to make the player interested in playing the game machine and prevent the player from becoming bored with the game machine early.

In the gaming machine U1, when the partial mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determination control means, the corresponding numerical information is subtracted from the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means. A game machine U2 characterized in that it is updated and stored as follows.

According to the gaming machine U2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine U1, the dynamic display mode corresponding to the numerical information is determined, and thus the accumulated numerical information is subtracted. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect that provides a dynamic display mode, and there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

A gaming machine U3, which is one of the gaming machines U1 or U2, further comprising notifying means for notifying information corresponding to the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means.

In addition to the effects of the game machine U1 or U2, the game machine U3 notifies information corresponding to the stored numerical information, so that the player can easily recognize the state of the accumulated numerical information. has the effect of being able to

Any one of the game machines U1 to U3 has numerical information determining means for determining the numerical information given to the player by the numerical performance executed by the numerical performance executing means, wherein the numerical information determining means The gaming machine U4 is characterized in that it is configured to be capable of determining numerical information corresponding to the numerical information stored by the numerical information storage means.

According to the game machine U4, in addition to the effects produced by the game machines U1 to U3, the numerical information given by the numerical presentation can be determined corresponding to the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means. Therefore, there is an effect that the numerical information can be added in accordance with the numerical information held by the player.

<Feature V Group> (Button Press Timing Common Acquisition Processing)
Operation means that can be operated by a player, operation effect execution means for executing a predetermined operation effect based on the operation of the operation means, and an effective period for validly determining the operation to the operation means are set. and effect setting means for setting an effect mode for a predetermined period including the effective period set by the effective period setting means, wherein the operating means is used during the effective period. is operated, calculation means for calculating operation timing based on the effective period set by the effective period setting means; and operation effect execution means based on the operation timing calculated by the calculation means and effect mode setting means for setting the effect mode of the operation effect to be executed.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is a game machine such as a pachinko machine that performs a winning lottery and executes a variable display effect for showing the lottery result on a display device. Furthermore, there is provided a plurality of suggestive effects for suggesting the result of the lottery, and as part of the plurality of suggestive effects, a game machine executes a specific suggestive effect based on the operation result of the operation means operable by the player. It has been proposed (for example, JP-A-2004-283442). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, since a specific suggestive effect is executed regardless of the timing at which the operation means is operated, the player's motivation to operate the operation means is reduced, and the player is early However, there is a problem that the player becomes bored with the game.

According to the gaming machine V1, it is possible to set the effect mode of the operation effect based on the operation timing of the operation means during the valid period, so that it is possible to provide the player with various effects. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the gaming machine.

The gaming machine V2 in the gaming machine V1, wherein the calculating means calculates a ratio between the valid period and the remaining period of the valid period at the timing when the operating means is operated.

According to the gaming machine V2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine V1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the presentation mode of the operation presentation is set based on the ratio between the valid period and the remaining period of the valid period calculated based on the timing at which the operating means is operated. As a result, since the operation presentation is set based on the length of the valid period to be set and the operation timing of the operation means, it is possible to set various operation presentations and enhance the presentation effect. There is

When the configuration of the game machine V2 is used, it is preferable to configure so that different valid periods are set for the same effect mode set by the effect setting means. By configuring in this way, even when the operation means is operated at the same timing for the effect mode being executed, the set effective period is made different, so that the calculation result of the calculation means can be made different. It is possible to change the effect mode of the operation effect.

The game machine V1 or V2 has display means capable of displaying a predetermined effect and movable means capable of executing a predetermined movable effect, and the effect setting means is the effect mode executed by the display means. is set, and the operation effect executing means executes the operation effect using the movable means.

According to the gaming machine V3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine V1 or V2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the effect operation means is operated while the effect displayed on the display means is being executed, the operation effect of moving the movable means is executed, so the operation means can be operated at any timing within the valid period. Even if it is operated, the operation performance can be executed without changing the performance contents displayed on the display means. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the control for executing the operation effect, and it is possible to reduce the manufacturing cost.

In the gaming machine V2 or V3, the valid period setting means can set a different valid period when the same effect mode is set by the effect setting means.

According to the gaming machine V4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine V2 or V3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, even if the operation means is operated at the same timing for the effect mode being executed, by making the effective period to be set different, the calculation result of the calculation means is made different, and the effect of the operation effect is achieved. Aspects can be varied. Therefore, it is possible to provide a variety of operation effects to the player who always operates the operation means at a constant timing, and it is possible to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

In any one of gaming machines V2 to V4, a first sorting means for sorting the ratio calculated by the calculating means according to a first condition, and a second sorting means for sorting according to a second condition different from the first condition. and division determination means for determining whether the ratio is divided by either the first division means or the second division means, wherein the effect mode setting means is determined by the division determination means The game machine V5 is characterized in that the performance mode of the operation performance is set based on the contents.

According to the gaming machine V5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines V2 to V4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the ratios calculated by the calculating means are classified under different conditions, and the effect mode of the operation effect is set based on the contents of the classification. You can perform the performance. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a variety of operation presentations, and to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

<Features W group> (Announcement of pre-reading result of jackpot)
A ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, an acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry means, and a memory storing the information acquired by the acquisition means. means, determination means capable of executing determination based on the information stored in the storage means, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating determination results by the determination means on display means, A privilege game executing means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to the player when identification information for indicating a specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means, and the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means. a bonus game type determining means for determining the type of the bonus game to be executed based on the information stored in the storage means when the Pre-determination means for executing pre-determination based on information stored in storage means; Advance notification means for notifying before dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the determination result is started, and determination by the privilege game type determination means when the determination means determines that a specific determination result A privilege game type prior determination means for determining in advance the type of the privilege game to be played with respect to the information stored in the storage means before being determined by the determination means, and the determination by the privilege game type prior determination means pre-privilege game type notification means for notifying pre-game information for indicating a result before dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the determination result of the determined information is started. A gaming machine W1 characterized by:

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not. An advantageous privilege game was executed. Different types of benefits that can be obtained by a plurality of types of players are set in the bonus game to be executed, and one bonus game type is determined when a win is achieved. A gaming machine has been proposed in which the interest of the player is varied according to the type of privilege game being executed even when a win is achieved (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). By the way, the above-described gaming machine is required to improve not only the effect of improving the interest in winning and losing, but also the interest in the type of privilege game. It is an object of the above game machine to provide a game machine that further enhances the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine W1, since the pre-game information corresponding to the type of the privilege game to be executed when winning is also notified, it is possible to provide the player with an effect combined with the notification result of the pre-determination. There is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The game machine W1 has a pattern display means for displaying on the display means a pattern corresponding to the information stored in the storage means before being judged by the judgment means, and the advance notification means is configured to display the pattern. The gaming machine W2 is characterized in that the notification is given by varying the display mode of the symbols displayed by display means.

According to the game machine W2, in addition to the effects of the game machine W1, the information related to the determination result can be identified by the pattern in a state stored in the storage means before the identification information is dynamically displayed, It is said that the player can be interested not only in the determination result of the identification information dynamically displayed but also in the determination result stored in the storage means, thereby preventing the player from quickly becoming bored with the game. effective.

In the gaming machine W1 or W2, the effect means for executing an effect when the privilege game is executed and the pre-privilege game type notification means cause the effect means to execute a specific effect. Gaming machine W3.

According to the gaming machine W3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine W1 or W2, the effecting means for executing the effect when the privilege game is executed performs the notification of the privilege game type at an early stage. There is an effect that it is possible to make it easy to understand that it is a notification related to.

In the gaming machine W3, the advance privilege game type notification means performs notification in response to the execution of the notification for indicating the prior determination by the advance notification means. Machine W4.

According to the gaming machine W4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine W3, in response to the execution of advance notification related to the determination result, the privilege game type is also notified in advance, so that the player can understand the determination result. There is an effect that advance notification can be performed in combination with notification content.

<Feature X group> (Notice of small hit and charge pattern)
A ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, an acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry means, and the information acquired by the acquisition means are stored. storage means, first determination means for executing a first determination based on the information stored in the storage means, and identification information for indicating a first determination result by the first determination means dynamically displayed on display means. dynamic display means for displaying; and bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating a specific first determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means. a second determination means capable of executing a second determination based on the establishment of a determination condition; In a game machine having a variable means that can be varied so that a ball enters an easy ball-entering state, the variable means is changed to the ball-entering easy state in response to the specific second determination result. A first determination type and a second determination type in which the variable means is set in a special easy-to-enter state so that the game ball enters the ball-entering means more easily than the first determining means is set, The privilege game execution means is capable of executing a special game different from the privilege game when the determination means determines that the special first determination result is different from the specific determination result, and the identification information is displayed with special identification information as a stop display mode for indicating the special first determination result, and during the dynamic display of the identification information, the specific second determination corresponding to the second determination type When a special game determined as a result is executed, the identification information being dynamically displayed is switched to the special identification information and temporarily stopped and displayed before execution of the special game. Game machine X1 to play.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not. An advantageous privilege game was executed. As a performance for displaying the lottery result, a plurality of patterns for informing the lottery result are variably displayed, and the lottery result is notified by a combination of the patterns stopped and displayed. A game machine has been proposed in which, as an effect other than the symbols, a notice effect for notifying the player of the result of the lottery before the symbols stop is executed. (For example, JP-A-2012-217766). By the way, the above-described gaming machine has a problem that the player gets tired of the effect executed until the lottery result becomes a win. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of suppressing the problem that a player gets bored with the game early.

According to the gaming machine X1, it is possible to increase the frequency of displaying the special identification information, thereby preventing the player from becoming bored with the game during the period until the specific determination result is reported due to the display of the special identification information. There is an effect that it can be suppressed.

The game machine X1 has dynamic display mode determination means for determining a dynamic display mode of the identification information when the dynamic display of the identification information is started, wherein the dynamic display mode determination means A gaming machine X2 characterized in that it determines whether the special game is executed during target display, and determines a dynamic display mode based on the determination result.

According to the game machine X2, in addition to the effect of the game machine X1, there is an effect that it is possible to easily set the special identification information by judging execution of the special game before dynamic display.

<Characteristic group Y> (announce the end of the effective time at the same timing with multiple button effects)
An operation means operable by a player, an operation effect setting means for setting an operation effect to be executed corresponding to the operation of the operation means, and an operation effect set by the operation effect setting means. and valid period setting means for setting a valid period determined to be valid when the operation means is operated, wherein the operation effect setting means is capable of setting a plurality of the operation effects. The effective period setting means determines one effective period for the plurality of operation effects set by the operation effect setting means, and the plurality of operation effects are provided within the effective period. One operation effect is executed in a predetermined order based on the execution of the operation by the player, and the notification means individually responds to each of the plurality of operation effects. A gaming machine Y1 characterized in that identification information for indicating the individual effective period set is notified corresponding to the set effective period.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not. An advantageous privilege game was executed. When the result of the lottery is announced, the symbols and the like for informing the result of the lottery are variably displayed in the fluctuation time determined by the lottery, and then the combination of the symbols indicating the result of the lottery is stopped and displayed. A gaming machine has been proposed in which, during the period in which the variable display is executed, an effect is executed in which an advance notice display or the like regarding the notified lottery result is displayed by operating an operation unit that can be operated by the player ( For example, JP-A-2012-217766). By the way, the above-described gaming machine is required to enhance the enjoyment of the game by suitably performing various effects using the operation means. It is an object of the above game machine to provide a game machine that further enhances the interest of the game.

According to the game machine Y1, even when a plurality of operation presentations are set, each operation effective period is notified, so that the period in which the operation means can be operated can be recognized as an individual operation presentation, and the interest of the game. have the effect of improving

In the gaming machine Y1, the identification information is notified by sequentially varying the individual valid period in accordance with the predetermined order in response to the decrease in the valid period. Machine Y2.

According to the gaming machine Y2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Y1, the identification information indicating the individual effective period is displayed in a variable order in which the operation effects are executed, so that the player can receive a plurality of operation effects. There is an effect that the order can be identified.

In the gaming machine Y2, when the effective period elapses while the plurality of operation effects are set, the respective identification information to be reported are notified at the same timing that the effective period has passed. The game machine Y3 is characterized in that it is variable as follows.

According to the gaming machine Y3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Y2, it is possible to notify the player that the individual validity period has passed in accordance with the elapse of the valid period, and to correctly inform the elapse of the valid time. There is

In game machines Y1 to Y3, when the identification information is changed according to the decrease of the effective period, the identification information is updated and changed after blinking. Gaming machine Y4.

According to the game machine Y4, in addition to the effects of the game machines Y1 to Y3, since the identification information is changed after the blinking display, it is possible to make it difficult to understand even if the speed at which the identification information is changed is not constant. This has the effect of facilitating the control of notifying the time.

<Feature Z group> (automatic pressing of button effects)
Operation means operable by the player, operation effect setting means for setting an operation effect to be executed when the operation means is operated, and when the operation effect is set by the operation effect setting means, Valid period setting means for setting a valid period during which an operation by the operating means is determined to be valid, and when the valid period is set by the valid period setting means, identification information corresponding to the set valid period is notified. a game machine Z1, wherein the notification means notifies a specific notification mode when the effective period becomes equal to or less than a predetermined period.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not. An advantageous privilege game was executed. When the result of the lottery is announced, the symbols and the like for informing the result of the lottery are variably displayed in the fluctuation time determined by the lottery, and then the combination of the symbols indicating the result of the lottery is stopped and displayed. A gaming machine has been proposed in which, during the period in which the variable display is executed, an effect is executed in which an advance notice display or the like regarding the notified lottery result is displayed by operating an operation unit that can be operated by the player ( For example, JP-A-2012-217766). By the way, the above-described gaming machine is required to enhance the enjoyment of the game by suitably performing various effects using the operation means. It is an object of the above game machine to provide a game machine that further enhances the interest of the game.

According to the game machine Z1, when the validity period reaches the predetermined period, the specific notification mode is notified, so that the player can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner that the specific period has come, and the interest in the game is improved. It has the effect of being able to

The gaming machine Z1 has a suggestive mode display means for displaying a suggestive mode on a display means to suggest to the player that it is a period during which the valid period is set to operate the operating means, and the suggestive mode display. The means changes and displays the suggestion mode to an operated suggestion mode indicating that the operation means has been operated based on the fact that the operation means has been operated, and the valid period is equal to or less than a predetermined period. and displaying a pseudo operation mode indicating that the operation means has been pseudo-operated in a mode different from the operation completion suggesting mode, based on the fact that the operation means is not operated even when the operation is completed. Game machine Z2 to play.

According to the game machine Z2, in addition to the effects of the game machine Z1, the pseudo operation mode is displayed, so that even if the operation performance is automatically executed with the expiration of the valid period, the valid period has passed. There is an effect that it is possible to recognize in an easy-to-understand manner.

In the gaming machine Z2, the suggestion mode is composed of a pattern that imitates the shape of the operation means, and the pseudo-operation mode is composed of an effect mode in which the pattern is operated. A game machine Z3 characterized by.

According to the game machine Z3, in addition to the effects of the game machine Z2, there is an effect that it is possible to clearly notify that the operation effect has been executed due to the lapse of the valid period.

In any one of the game machines Z1 to Z3, when the operation means is operated at the timing when the specific notification mode is displayed, the special notification mode is notified in addition to the specific notification mode. Gaming machine Z4.

According to the game machine Z4, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines Z1 to Z3, when the operation means is operated at the timing when the specific notification mode is displayed, the special notification mode is reported, so that the game can be played. There is an effect that it is possible to make the user realize that the performance has been executed by the user's operation.

In any one of the gaming machines described above, the gaming machine γ1 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with variable display means for displaying the identification information in a fixed manner after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and the stop time and a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the definite identification information of is the specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

In any one of the gaming machines described above, the gaming machine γ2 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, balls are shot into a predetermined game area, and the balls are ejected into actuating openings arranged at predetermined positions in the game area. For example, the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with the requirement of winning a prize (or passing through an activation opening). In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable prize winning device (specific prize winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the balls to win prizes, and a value corresponding to the number of prizes won Values (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.) can be given.

In any one of the gaming machines described above, the gaming machine γ3 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated game machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, and an operation means for starting (such as an operation lever) The identification information starts to change due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed. a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information; the ball is used as a game medium; A gaming machine configured to require a predetermined number of balls at the start of dynamic display, and to pay out a large number of balls at the occurrence of a special game state.
<Others>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not. An advantageous privilege game was executed. In addition, an effect is executed in which the lottery result is notified to the player after the symbols and the like are variably displayed for a certain period of time. Accordingly, a gaming machine has been proposed that notifies the player of various presentation modes (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-130802).
By the way, the game machine described above executes stop control to stop the movable object at a predetermined stop position when moving the movable object. Therefore, there is a problem that the stop position varies.
It is an object of the game machine described above to provide a game machine capable of stably controlling the movement of a movable object.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the game machine of technical idea 1 includes movable means configured to be movable between a first position and a second position different from the first position, and a movable control of the movable means. and first position detection means capable of detecting that the movable means is positioned at the first position, wherein the movable control means moves from the first position to the second position. When the movable means is moved from the first position to the second position, the movable means is stopped after the movable means is moved based on predetermined movable data for moving from the first position to the second position. When moving from the second position to the first position, the moving means is moved based on the movement data for moving from the second position to the first position, and the first position detecting means detects the When the movable means is detected, the movable means is controlled to stop.
A gaming machine according to technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, wherein the movable means has shooting means capable of shooting game balls, and the shooting means is moved to the first position. and shoots game balls.
A gaming machine according to technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1 or 2, further comprising a base member that movably fixes the movable means, and the movable means has one end rotatably attached to the base member. At least a shaft part pivotally supported by a member, moving means for moving a game ball from the one end side to the other end side, and an opening for shooting the game ball to the other end side by the shooting means the movable means is movable to the first position set to a position rotated in the first direction about the shaft portion by a first rotation amount from an origin position; It is configured to be movable from the first position to the second position set to a position rotated in the first direction from the origin position about the shaft portion by the second rotation amount. .
<effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1, a movable means configured to be movable between a first position and a second position different from the first position, and a movable control capable of controlling the movement of the movable means. and a first position detecting means capable of detecting that the movable means is positioned at the first position, wherein the movable control means moves from the first position to the second position. wherein the movable means is stopped after moving the movable means based on predetermined movable data for moving the movable means from the first position to the second position; When moving to the first position, the moving means is moved based on movement data for moving from the second position to the first position, and the moving means is detected by the first position detecting means. Then, the movable means is controlled to stop.
Therefore, there is an effect that the movable object can be stably controlled.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in technical idea 1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the movable means has shooting means capable of shooting a game ball, and the shooting means shoots the game ball while being moved to the first position.
Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem of variation in shooting accuracy of game balls.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in technical idea 1 or 2, the following effects are achieved. That is, it has a base member that movably fixes the movable means, and the movable means includes a shaft part that is rotatably supported by the base member at one end, and a shaft part that is rotatably supported on the base member at one end, It has at least moving means for moving a game ball, and an opening for shooting the game ball by the shooting means on the other end side, and the movable means moves the shaft portion by a first rotation amount from the origin position. to the first position set to the position rotated in the first direction about the axis, and from the first position to the origin position about the shaft portion by the second rotation amount to the second position set to the position rotated in the first direction.
Therefore, there is an effect that problems due to stop control of the movable means can be suppressed.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)

Claims (1)

A game board having a game area on the front side, a first member arranged on the front side of the game board, and the first member arranged on the front side of the first member at a predetermined interval. A gaming machine comprising a second member that allows the game ball to flow down between the opposing
A changing means for changing a distance between a predetermined portion disposed on at least one of the first member or the second member and the other of the first member or the second member,
The changing means can form a first state and a second state in which the direction of the game ball flowing down between the first member and the second member is different from that in the first state,
A visual recognition portion is formed in the second member so that the player can visually recognize the game ball flowing down between the opposing members, and
The predetermined part is
When viewed from the front of the game board, the upper surface side is inclined with respect to the width direction of the game board, and is disposed on the first member,
When viewed from the front of the game board, it is configured to be longer in the width direction than in the vertical direction,
The game machine is characterized in that the changing means is capable of changing the facing interval by displacing the predetermined portion in the front-rear direction of the game board.

Images